Computer Science in Industrial Application (CSIA 2014, Bangkok, Thailand, 17-18 November 2014)

Editor Ling

Computer Science and Industrial Application is a collection Industrial Applications of papers from the 2014 Pacific-Asia Workshop on Computer Computer Science in Computer Science in Industrial Application (CSIA 2014, Bangkok, Thailand, 17-18 November 2014). The book contains a wide range of topics, including: Science in - Computer and Information Technology - Business management - E-commerce and Tourism Industrial - Education, Psychology and Multimedia

The book is of interest to academics and professional involved in computer science. Applications

Editor: Yanglv Ling

an informa business COMPUTER ScIENcE IN INDUsTRIAL APPLIcATION

9781138028135_Chp_000.indd 1 16/04/15 7:24 PM This page intentionally left blank PROCEEDINGS OF THE 2014 PACIFIC-ASIA WORKSHOP ON COMPUTER SCIENCE IN INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION, NOVEMBER 17-18, 2014, BANGKOK, THAILAND

Computer Science in Industrial Application

Editor Yanglv Ling Wuhan Institute of Technology, China

9781138028135_Chp_000.indd 3 16/04/15 7:24 PM CRC Press/Balkema is an imprint of the Taylor & Francis Group, an informa business

Typeset by diacriTech, Chennai, India Printed and bound in Great Britain by CPI Group (UK) Ltd, Croydon, CR0 4YY

All rights reserved. No part of this publication or the information contained herein may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, by photocopying, recording or otherwise, without written prior permission from the publishers.

Although all care is taken to ensure integrity and the quality of this publication and the information herein, no responsibility is assumed by the publishers nor the author for any damage to the property or persons as a result of operation or use of this publication and/or the information contained herein.

Published by: CRC Press/Balkema P.O. Box 11320, 2301 EH Leiden, The Netherlands e-mail: [email protected] www.crcpress.com – www.taylorandfrancis.com

ISBN: 978-1-138-02813-5 (Hardback) ISBN: 978-1-315-68491-8 (eBook PDF)

Table of contents

Preface xi CSIA 2014 organizing committee xiii

Chapter 1: Computer and information technology

Application researches on cloud computing in SME information system 3 H. Song The exploration of traditional graphic symbol and modern visual communication design 7 L. Liu Blocks garden – Research on creating a garden of intensive module assembly 11 S. Li Characteristics of digital broadcasting technology and its development research 17 M. Yang Exploration on the metadata model of the SOA-based adaptive learning support system 21 T. Liu The building of evaluation system of students’ research training 25 H. Luan & Z.H. Xia Research on clustering analysis and its application in customer data mining of enterprise 31 W. Zhao, X.Y. Li & L.P. Fu Study on EEG monitoring information based on visual stimulation 37 L.N. Xu, Z.Q. Guo, Z.W. Guo, Y.M. Sun & Y.J. Si Image encryption algorithm based on the key extracted from iris character 41 L. Lang, Q.Y. Zhao & J. Zhou The prototype of the personalized information recommendation engine 45 X.Y. Li Research on data mining in social network 51 M.B. Yang The design of nautical navigation message system based on DSP 55 K. Lin Research on the personal maritime search and rescue terminal 59 K. Lin Design and implementation of image acquisition and processing system of QR code based on embedded system 63 Y.L. Zuo Design and implementation of computer network monitoring software 67 J.T. Cui The use of 3D printing technology in interior decoration 71 X.L. Gu

9781138028135_Chp_000.indd 5 16/04/15 7:24 PM Research on the application of computer image processing technology in art creation 75 Y.L. Zhang Discussion on the application of computer technology in artistic creation 79 R.Y. Wang Network trac prediction based on parameters joint estimation of phase space reconstruction 83 M. Li & K.Y. Wang Design and implementation of remote heart monitoring terminal based on UcOs 89 B. Rao Design and implementation of remote data acquisition system based on embedded system 95 B. Rao Discussion on the application of tablet auto pack system 99 G.H. You Design and implementation of fTP service resource sharing platform based on LV s load balancing technology 103 Y.S. Chen, W.L. Zhang, J.T. Ren & Z.K. Wu Design and implementation of security mechanism of network bank 109 Y. Shen Design and implementation of computer network trac monitoring 113 L.H. Song & H.C. Zhao Research on computer image enhancement and image scratch repair 117 H.F. Wang The development trend under the cross media based on ﬂash animation technology 121 Y.J. Shi, B.Q. Wang & F.T. Pu Application and research of data mining technology in the medical data 125 J.W. Zhou

Chapter 2: Business management, e-commerce and tourism

Analysis and evaluation of the economic beneﬁts of tourism under the ecological context 131 J. Zhao Integrated marketing of micro-ﬁlm in advertising 135 Q.G. Sun Research on the operation mechanism of direct trading market between power consumers and power generation corporations 139 Z. Wei Logistics enterprise’s employee health and performance management 143 W. Shen, Y. Wang, R.J. Zhang & Y.M. Zhong E-commerce security policy analysis 147 Maarina Explore the impact of E-commerce network on development of regional economic 151 Maarina The development trend of China’s agricultural economic management disciplines 155 Y. Luo Economic growth, convergence of Chinese provinces and industry sectors 159 B. Wang Research on industrial tourism-led Dabancheng wind farm area development in Xinjiang region 165 L.Q. Wang

9781138028135_Chp_000.indd 6 16/04/15 7:25 PM Status and application of human resource management in the enterprise management 169 Hashengaowa CI strategy research of agriculture creative industrial park in Langfang 173 S.J. Mi & Q. Zhao Economical hotels in email marketing strategy 177 Z.H. Zhang SWOT analysis of the developing situation of sports tourism industry in Anhui Province 181 R.J. Jin & Y.H. Xiao Research on the development strategy of China construction bank Pingxiang branch based on SWOT method 185 Z.L. Zhang Research on cooperation mechanism of Guang Xi and ASEAN under the 21st century Marine Silk Road strategy 189 N.P. Zhang Social progress for the exploration of reform in the rural management system research 193 Z.H. Zhang The research on the network sales model of special local product 197 Z.H. Zhang Study the interaction between the development of specialized Southwest National Area rural tourism and new countryside construction 201 X.Z. Geng The interactive development of economy in Hebei coastal region and local universities 205 H. Wang & H.F. Zhang Problems of highway financing 209 X.Y. Liu The study on new accounting standards for listed companies in china 213 H.Y. Xie The integration of financial accounting and management accounting 217 Z.L. Lou The strategy on low carbon economy development in Liaoning province 221 Y. Liu, H. Liu, Z.H. Chen & C. Jiang The design and realization of tourism electronic commerce platform 227 Y.L. Yang Design and implementation of financial management systems for SMEs 231 J. Zhang ERP Functional demand analysis and security technology design under the E-commerce model 235 J. Wang Asian option pricing based on two related assets 239 M. Zhang

Chapter 3: Education, psychology and multimedia

Problems’ analysis and countermeasures of primary English teaching voice 245 H.M. Hu Universities’ ethics oversight system in Mandarin 249 C.S. Feng Application and development of multimedia in college English education 253 L. Yang

vii

9781138028135_Chp_000.indd 7 16/04/15 7:25 PM Research of management information system of college student internships 257 X. Han Employability analysis and improving strategy of art majors in college 261 L.Y. Kong & S.X. Yang Xu Beihong’s artistic inﬂuence on current university education teaching of Chinese painting art 265 X.F. Kong Talk about graduate student of educational teacher expanding the path of employment in the local comprehensive university: An example of Chinese language and literature in my school 269 S.M. Ren Application of constructivism in English teaching 273 C.L. Liang On assistance of ideological and political education for academic ethos construction 277 Y.C. Liu A comparative study of British and Chinese vocational education— enlightenments brought by English vocational education 281 W. Feng A comparison of Path encoding in English and Chinese 285 C.Y. Zhou & Y.H. Huang Review of China mobile English learning: Achievements and shortcomings -based on statistical analysis of literature for 10 years (2004–2014) in CNKI (China National Knowledge Infrastructure) 289 P. Chen Practice on bilingual education and exam reform of vocational computer programming 293 J.T. Geng, Z.F. Xie & X.Y. Mo The impact of network technologies on higher education management and countermeasures 297 Y.X. Cui On the prospects of the quality education under the education and management of higher vocational schools 301 H. Huang How to strengthen recessive ideological and political education? 305 N. Cao The curriculum problem is the basis of model school construction 309 S.P. Huang Research on eectiveness of ideological and political education research in we-media age 313 G.L. Che Education equipment conﬁguration and funding situation analysis of underdeveloped areas of information technology in rural primary and secondary school 317 Z.M. Jiao Fusion of modern information and English teaching technology under the constructivist theory background 323 J. Chen & S. Zhao Comparative study of college English traditional listening and speaking mode and network listening and speaking teaching mode 327 S. Zhao & J. Chen Ink applied research of element graphic design teaching in intangible cultural context 331 S.Q. Yao & X. Chen Research on moral education of PE teaching 335 P.J. Li

viii

9781138028135_Chp_000.indd 8 16/04/15 7:25 PM Present situation and development of vocational education in English 339 L.H. Li Research on development trend of higher vocational students’ psychological health 343 T. Qin & F.F. Liu A research on the situation and development strategy of reserve athletes in ordinary universities 347 W. Bao The roots of psychological trauma and post-traumatic stress reaction/disorders and the intervention 351 J. Zeng The study on university sport education reform based on modular teaching 355 L. Wang & H. Ge The inﬂuence and countermeasures of network to psychology of juvenile delinquency 359 C.M. Li & L. Lin Discussion on the self-maintenance and support mode of training equipment in higher vocational colleges 363 B.Y. Huang, L.J. Li & H.X. Meng The study on sports psychology consultants based on competence model 367 Y. Qiao Explore the text constitute and art design in the teaching of PS graphic design 371 L. Qin Teaching and research of professional software application skills based on work task-driven — application skills of Thsware tri-dimensional quantity automatic calculation software 375 H.G. Jiang The application of Germany dual education system in nursing education in China 379 Y. Zhao Research on college English open course cloud computing application mode 383 Z. Li & Y.F. Luo Study on the application of virtual reality to the teaching of information technology course 387 G.M. Wang & N.Y. Wang Design and realization of scientiﬁc research management system in colleges and universities based on the structure of B/S model 391 C.X. Wang The construction and application of computer network teaching platform 397 C. Liu, F. Wang & L. Lin The design of English self-learning system based on WEB 403 J.S. Cheng

Chapter 4: Humanities, politics, and philosophy

Innovation of concept and system of economic law based on the sustainable development 409 J. Zhao The role of agricultural mechanization technology in the promotion of scientiﬁc and technological achievements in agriculture 413 Z.Y. Tang & X.M. Fu Physical activity status of civil servants and their health-related research 417 Y.C. Zhou, S.H. Bi, Q.L. Liu & J.Y. Bao Analysis and practical signiﬁcance of Lenin’s legal supervision theory 421 S. Bai

9781138028135_Chp_000.indd 9 16/04/15 7:25 PM Accurate analysis of “Chinese New Standard” with the exploration of classical poetry “mood” method 425 T.H. Yuan Relations of high-tech talent investment in education, health and regional economic output 429 J.S. Xu, L.F. Zheng, H.T. Wu & Z.G. Mao The analysis on social determinants of health of the ﬂoating population 433 Y.C. Zhou, B.H. Shi, Z.Z. Deng & Q.B. Li The creation of public nature in community public space design 437 W. Zhang & R. Jia Development of university document resources construction for the background of information services 441 D.W. Jin Chinese empty nesters’ health status and research progress of community care needs 445 W. Liu, Y.G. Zhang & Y.W. Li Characteristics of Audit Committee and eectiveness of its internal control 449 Y.X. Zhao & X.L. Hu Region culture resources—the motivation that drives people to create animated cartoon 453 H.X. Liu On the inheritance of ancient architecture decoration in the residential construction of urbanization 457 S.L. Wang, P.F. Tan & L. Li The manifestation of texture art in the creative design of fashion fabrics 461 W. Zhong & M.T. Yan Leisure sports characteristics and development trends in China 465 R.D. Wang On the inheritance and development of folk music 469 K. Guo “Impression·liu sanjie” – a research on the participation and perception of residents in scenic area and community 473 Y.C. Wang The city color life under the concept of humanistic ecology – a case study of clothing, food, shelter and transportation 479 J.Y. Wang & W.J. Wang Evaluation and optimization study of industrial upgrading for energy—taking the North Chengdu Reconstruction as an example 483 P. Zhou, F. Zhou & T. Huang

Chapter 5: The others

Convergence study of Chinese carbon intensity 491 B. Wang Promotion of library management and book circulation to research on medical research 497 C.B. Zheng Green design horizon, hand-painted rendering performance techniques to explore 501 J.H. Yong A review of ﬂavonoids’ biological activities 505 S. Cao

Author index 509

Preface

2014 Pacific-Asia Workshop on Computer Science in Industrial Application (CSIA 2014) was held on November 17-18, 2014, Bangkok, Thailand. CSIA 2014 will be the most comprehensive conference focused on various aspects of improvements in Computer Science in Industrial Application. Our conference provides a good chance for academics and industry professionals to discuss the recent progresses in the area of Computer Science in Industrial Application. After the excellent presentations on November 17-18, 2014, authors from dierent countries and areas participated in a lively discussion on November 17-18, 2014, and their viewpoints were divided into several topics. The papers were grouped into five chapters, viz.: Chapter 1: Computer and Information Technology-A computer is a general purpose device that can be pro- grammed to carry out a set of arithmetic or logical operations automatically. Since a sequence of operations can be readily changed, the computer can solve more than one kind of problems. Information technology is the application of computers and telecommunications equipment to store, retrieve, transmit and manipulate data. For example these industries are associated with information technology, including computer hardware, software, electronics, semiconductors, internet, telecom equipment, e-commerce and computer services. And of course there are also other industries in which the information technilogy is applicated. Chapter 2: Business management, E-commerce and Tourism-This chapter mainly researches the basic theory and general method of economic management businesses and market economy. Use the modern management methods and tools to carry out eective business management and business decisions, to ensure the company’s survival and development. E-commerce is trading products or services using computer networks, such as the Internet. Electronic commerce draws on technologies such as mobile commerce, electronic funds transfer, supply chain management, Internet marketing, online transaction processing, electronic data interchange (EDI), inventory management systems, and automated data collection systems. Chapter 3: Education, Psychology and Multimedia-This chapter uses a variety of theories and techniques, through designing, developing, utilizing, managing and evaluating the processes of teaching and learning and related resources, to achieve the theory and practice of teaching optimization. Research the process of education management and its rules, and research the management of schools, educational institutions and non- profit organizations and other issues. Educational psychology is the study of how humans learn in educational settings, the eectiveness of educational interventions, the psychology of teaching, and the social psychology of schools as organizations. In Education, multimedia is used to produce computer-based training courses (pop- ularly called CBTs) and reference books like encyclopedia and almanacs. Chapter 4: Humanities, Politics, and Philosophy-This chapter mainly researches the advanced values and norms, and various cultural phenomena of human society, including architectural culture, literature, or education and culture, politics, and philosophy, etc. Chapter 5: The Others-This chapter includes the design, medicine, etc. The reviewers of the manuscripts, those by tradition would remain anonymous, have been very helpful in eciently reviewing the manuscripts, providing valuable comments well within the time allotted to them. The editors express their sincere and grateful thanks to all reviewers. Finally, express our sincere thanks to the support from technology program committee for designing the conference web page and also spending countless days in preparing the final conference program in time for printing. Express sincere thanks to our organization committee for their several months’ hard work in sorting out manuscripts from various authors, and also to other stas assisting in various stages of the editorial work, especially the international committees of our conference.

CSIA 2014 organizing committee

KEYNOTE SPEAKER AND HONORARY CHAIR Gerald Schaefer, Loughborough University, U.K

GENERAL CHAIRS Wei Deng, American Applied Sciences Research Institute, USA Ming Ma, Singapore NUS ACM Chapter, Singapore

PROGRAM CHAIRS Prawal Sinha, Department of Mathematics & Statistics, Indian Institute of Technology Kanpur, India Harry Zhang, SMSSI, Singapore

PUBLICATION CHAIR Yanlv Ling, Wuhan Institute of Technology, China

INTERANTIONAL COMMITTEE

H.B. Kekre, MPSTME, NMIMS University, Mumbai, India P. Halarnkar, MPSTME, NMIMS University, Mumbai, India Tanuja Sarode, TSEC, Mumbai University, Mumbai, India A. K. Reshamwala, SVKM’s NMIMS University, Mumbai, India S. M. Mahajan, Institute of Computer Science, M.E.T, Bandra, Mumbai, India Yanling Yang, Foreign Languages College, Northeast Dianli University, Jilin, P.R. China Han Li, College of Science, Northeast Dianli University, Jilin, P.R. China Ling Zhang, Beijing Information Technology College, China Yutian Chen, Department of Applied Mathematics, Yanshan University, Qinhuangdao, China Daijun Pi, School of Transportation and Automotive Engineering, Xihua University, China Chao Gao, Kunming University of Science and Technology, China Kunqian Wang, Kunming University of Science and Technology, China Zhifeng Liu, Beijing University of Technology, Beijing, China Yonghao Wu, College Wuhan University of Science & Technology, China Xiyan Wang, Foreign Language Institute, Northeast Dianli University, Jilin, China

xiii

9781138028135_Chp_000.indd 13 16/04/15 7:25 PM This page intentionally left blank Chapter 1

Computer and information technology

Application researches on cloud computing in SME information system

Han Song Yunnan Open University, Kunming, Yunnan

ABSTRACT: According to the characteristics of the small and medium-sized enterprise information architecture and cloud computing, this paper analyzes the relationship between cloud computing and the informationization of small and medium enterprises. From the basic ideas of project development, data storage planning and social service system construction and other aspects of informatization construction of small and medium-sized enterprises, the author explores the calculation informatization construction of small and medium enterprise environment strategy in the cloud. The article combined cloud computing with knowledge management, classificate the knowledge management of the enterprise management information system, plan and design the overall framework of the enterprise management information system. Finally, the paper introduced the implementation scheme of cloud computing architecture for enterprise management information system under the environment of cloud computing and knowledge management system. KEYWORDS: SME; Knowledge management; Core data; Security model; Cloud computing

1 INtrodUctioN in our country, enterprise information construction still exist some problems, such as: Cloud computing uses the transmission capacity of high-speed Internet to process data from a personal 1 The lack of overall planning of enterprise infor computer or server to server cluster on the internet. mation construction. Due to lack of information The server cluster consists of a processing center professionals in small and medium enterprises, management of large data, including the calculation many small and medium-sized enterprises is not of servers, storage servers, broadband resource data well informatization and enterprise development center, according to the needs of customers, distrib- strategy and the concrete management work uted computing resources, to achieve the same e ect together in the informatization construction, many with the super computer[1]. Cloud computing is tech- small and medium-sized enterprise informatiza nically through the data service center virtualization tion construction is blind, the lack of overall design architecture together, realize the calculation, storage, and planning. Enterprise information construction memory, network resources, according to user needs is usually started from the single application, dif- to dynamically allocate. The user is no longer enjoy- ferent department act one’s own freedom in the ing service in physical hardware resources, but to informatization construction, the lack of interop- build their own applications in virtual resource layers. erability between information systems. 2 Telecom infrastructure constraints informationization construction speed. With the rapid development of e-commerce, enterprise Internet demand increas- 2 The PreseNt sitUatioN aNd ProbLems ing, therefore, requirements that access to the Internet of iNformatiZatioN iN SME is more and more high by bandwidth, but due to the constraints of the telecommunication infrastructure, In recent years, small and medium-sized enterprise the speed and the e ect of implementation is a ected informationization has made considerable progress in enterprise information construction. in our country, many enterprises construct the enter- 3 Shortage of enterprise investment fund. Because the prise information management system, the electronic informatization construction need to invest a lot of commerce business, and enterprise informationiza- money for software development and maintenance, tion level basically meets the needs of production and conﬁguration and update the hardware equipment, operation, most of the enterprises access to Internet and small and medium-sized enterprises a ected backbone network through broadband. But from look by the scale of operation and economic beneﬁts, on the whole, the development of small and medi- so they have not a lot of capital investment for the um-sized enterprise informatization is still not perfect construction of informationization.

9781138028135_Chp_001.indd 3 31/03/15 6:54 PM 4 It is dicult to evaluate the implementation e ect. computer, software and network communication Because informationization projects are often large technology, to collect, store, process, analyze the investment, long construction period, are often di enterprise production, operation, management and cult to calculate rate information input and output decision-making in the process of information, in or return on investment, sales, information on enter- order to achieve the development and optimization prise cost, profit contribution is dicult to quantify of enterprise daily business processes and decision how much, therefore, makes the enterprise lack of scheme. The construction of the enterprise manage- dynamic investment in information technology. ment information system should depend on the enter- 5 The environment for the development of EMS prise business process, although di erences between informatization is still not perfect, public services the enterprise business process exist, but for the are not in place, and the social service system is production of enterprises, the main business process not perfect. is product development, procurement, production, sales and other links. The main content of enter- Due to the realization of enterprise information prise management includes management, marketing needs a lot of manpower, material and financial management, purchasing management, production resources, for the small and medium-sized enter- management, quality management, inventory man- prises, rely on their own strength in many aspects agement, equipment management, information man- are not mature, also do not have strong technical agement, human resources management, financial and force investment into the development of the enter- cost management etc. Therefore, through the redesign prise management information system, therefore, the the enterprise workflow of the entire supply chain, majority of small and medium-sized enterprise infor- we determine enterprise import and sale, storage, matization construction is still in the initial stage, has finance, business management as the core module for yet to be further improved. the enterprise management information system[3]. In With the development of information technology, addition, in order to improve enterprise eciency of especially the development of Internet technology and the oce, we need to introduce the oce automation virtual technology, make the Internet resources from management system in the enterprise information client / server, the browser / server, server hosting, management. to the development of server cluster and virtualiza- With the global economic integration, and tion, and produced a kind of new commercial com- increasingly fierce competition between enterprises. putational model: cloud computing. Cloud computing The enterprise will be more and more attention can distribute computing tasks with many computers and customer intimacy, strengthen interaction and resources pool, so that all applications according to cooperation with customers, reinventing the cus- the need to obtain computing ability, storage space [2] tomer relationship. At the same time, with the rapid and a variety of software as a service . Using cloud development of global electronic commerce, enter- computing mode is not only the user can at any time prises will continue to improve the operation mode, through the Internet to get almost unlimited comput- strengthen the analysis of business management ing power and a variety of information services, but of enterprise data, and provide a useful scheme for also can improve the utilization rate of resources, enterprise management decision. Therefore, in order management and maintenance of the simplified to meet the requirements of enterprise management, resources and services of IT, reduce the operation cost. enterprise management information system on the Therefore, with the development of cloud computing platform should be considered in the construction technology, the construction of an enterprise manage- of the customer relationship management, enterprise ment information system based on cloud computing information portal and data warehouse. will become the development direction of enterprise According to the company’s management and information construction. This paper will discuss how decision-making needs, the author designs frame- to use cloud computing technology, the integration of work of the company information platform based on enterprise computing and storage resources, the con- the concept of cloud computing, which is as shown struction of cloud computing platform of the enter- in Figure 1. The general framework of the company prise management information system. information platform includes a platform and information security architecture of the business processing infrastructure platform, information integration 3 The oVeraLL strUctUre of platform, the company management platform, anal- eNterPrise maNaGemeNt ysis and decision-making platform company, subsid- iNformatioN system iary company. The information resources integration of corporate headquarters and subsidiaries, pro- Enterprise management information system uses mod- vide the IaaS for the company headquarters and the ern management thought and method, using electronic subsidiary company (infrastructure as a service),

9781138028135_Chp_001.indd 4 31/03/15 6:54 PM PaaS (platform as a service) and less SaaS (software knowledge management services by terminal. On the as a service), to reduce the information cost of the planning of enterprise knowledge management pro- company, to raise the overall level of the company’s cess based on cloud computing, a target and oper information. ation model of enterprise knowledge management process contributes to the optimization of the cloud environment. The knowledge management process is as shown in Figure 3.

Figure 1. The overall framework of enterprise information platform. Figure 3. The ﬂow chart of enterprise knowledge management based on cloud computing. 4 The SME iNformatioNiZatioN modeL based oN cLoUd comPUtiNG After enterprise acquire knowledge, knowledge eNViroNmeNt needs to choose and treatment and import it into the knowledge base, the process includes the classifi- The construction of small and medium-sized enter- cation of processing and knowledge mining knowl- prises informatization mode based on cloud com- edge. Faced with the growing knowledge resources, puting environment, its main idea is that the small traditional storage architecture has a poor scalability, and medium-sized enterprise informationization is when the demand for capacity and performance of divided into enterprise management information the user increases, can only continue to add high-end system, enterprise product design information plat- storage device, which has caused great pressure to form and enterprise electronic commerce platform, the enterprise knowledge management and backup. each part build small and medium sized enterprises Cloud storage is used to ensure the reliability of dis- informatization mode based on the “cloud com- tributed storage technology knowledge storage, it can puting” according to the small and medium-sized provide mass storage space for the enterprise, and the enterprise informationization demand and cloud flexibility to support enterprise storage expansion of computing characteristics. Calculation of enterprise demand. informatization project environment in the cloud can In order to obtain the corresponding service, the be decomposed into enterprise general projects and user needs through knowledge management, enter- internal project, using di erent solutions to di er- prise Internet login cloud computing platform, and ent enterprise informatization project. Based on the puts forward the application of knowledge service. “cloud computing” enterprise informatization project When the platform receives the application layer solutions such as shown in Figure 2. application, according to the computing resource and storage of the existing state of respond to the application. Knowledge transfer and sharing of knowledge management is the core of the enterprise, is the cloud computing close contact part. The user can easily browse the required knowledge through a browser. And for the retrieval in knowledge, when the user inquires the requirements, and submit it to the retrieval agent, search agent will each server to the Figure 2. The solution of the enterprise information pro- cloud requirements will retrieve, and on each of the ject based on cloud computing. nodes of knowledge information analysis, and then to parallel and distributed retrieval methods will result is 5 The oPeratioNaL mechaNism of transferred to the user, thereby greatly improving the kNowLedGe modeL knowledge retrieval ability and speed. Groupware is a key technology in knowledge In a cloud environment, enterprise knowledge stored sharing, the cloud environment of enterprise know in the “cloud”, the user can timely access to relevant ledge management in improving the efficiency of

9781138028135_Chp_001.indd 5 31/03/15 6:54 PM knowledge sharing has also made new breakthroughs. Cloud mail and online file editing processing can meet the requirements of the communication and cooperation of enterprise knowledge sharing. Cloud mail is the enterprise e-mail system based on a server cluster is large, it can provide a large capacity memory, can be the hardware failure impact on users caused by effectively avoid, realize mail, documents and knowledge sharing based on long-term permanent preservation of knowledge. In addition, the user, to edit the Figure 5. Network topology structure of the core data pro- document through online cloud can the Internet from tection system in the enterprise. any terminal equipment access, edit the document knowledge, and document handling, synchronization and different locations of the group members, the 7 CoNcLUsioNs achievement of business collaboration and knowledge sharing. Therefore, the cloud document online editing With the application of cloud computing, the future has much stronger ability of user interaction. will have a lot of enterprise information system migration to the cloud, it will change the mode of enterprise informatization construction. Therefore, in 6 To Protect the User kerNeL data view of the present situation and problems of infor- based oN CLoUd ComPUtiNG matization in small and medium-sized enterprises, the characteristics of informatization architecture Location of user data that store in the public cloud and cloud computing, this paper presents the reali- computing storage cannot e ectively control by user, zation strategy of informationization in small and to cause great threat to the security of user data. In medium-sized enterprises under the cloud computing order to protect users of cloud computing in the core environment, to reference by information workers in data security, proposed a hybrid Cloud Architecture small and medium-sized enterprises from the basic to protect user data security thoughts. For the design idea, project development, data storage planning and of the user centered data protection model based on social service system construction of informatization cloud computing, its logical structure as shown in construction in small and medium enterprises. Figure 4. The user data are decomposed into core data and general data, core data will be stored in the user controlled private cloud, general data after ﬁltration REFERENCES after storage in the public cloud service providers, to e ectively solve the protection and security of user [1] Xi Liqiao, Zheng Xiao. A summary of the current kernel data. The core data protection system based on research on Cloud Computing [J]. Computer science, cloud computing in the enterprise, the network topol- 2011, 38 (4): 32–36. [2] Wang Long, Wan Zhenkai. Research and implemen- ogy is shown in Figure 5. The system in the user kernel tation of cloud computing based on service architec- data protection reached a basic target for nearly a year. ture [J]. Computer and digital engineering, 2009 88–91. [3] He Peng. Research and implementation of cloud computing development [D]. University of Electronic Science and technology, 2011. 30–41. [4] Tang yuan. Research and implementation of enterprise infrastructure IT automatic supply scheme based on Cloud Computing [D]. Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, 2011 19–44. [5] Sun Shiqiang, Liu Jiaxue. Research on the development and utilization of Internet information resources under the cloud computing environment [J]. Modern Figure 4. The core data protection system of enterprise intelligence, 2011, 31 (5); 76–78. based on Cloud Computing.

The exploration of traditional graphic symbol and modern visual communication design

Li Liu Vocational and Technical College of Yunnan University of Nationalities, Kunming, China

ABSTRACT: As the economy continues to develop, and the continuous improvement of culture, modern visual communication design has become a form of expression based on culture and regarded the graphical applications as the design category. It expands gradually along with the development of science and technology as well as culture. Therefore, visual communication design is in the alternating period of the traditional and modern phase. The traditional graphic symbol is our historic treasure and that is of great significance in modern visual communication design. KEYWORDS: Traditional graphic symbol; Modern visual communication design; Culture

1 INTRODUCTION Understanding of human nature, recognizing society and experiencing life, human beings have to process The traditional graphic symbol has a long history in through vision and thinking, and vision and think- China. As early as the Neolithic Age, there have been ing have to go through some images. Though, only painted pottery patterns and carved rocks on the cli ; through natural image is far from adequate, it must gluttonous graphics in Shang Dynasty bronzes; plum be carried out by human beings’ creation [1]. People, seal, tadpoles in Spring and Autumn Period; phoenix- in order to achieve communication and exchange, shaped lacquer in Han Dynasty; and Lotus and peony should communicate through graphics. And that is pattern in Tang Dynasty and inscriptions which the original form of graphic, and also the ﬁrst form appeared in the latter phase, and so on. The traditional of character. graphics resource in China is extremely rich, and they It can be found that the shape of materials is the have established a unique style of its own in the con- generating foundation of graphics through its fea- tinuous development and evolution. These graphics, tures. Optical graphics is the medium of the material through continuous sedimentation and development graphics. Through material graphics and the projec- in the long river of time and history, have formulated tion of factors of visible light, visual graphics is the a special traditional art system. This system brings reflection of material graphics through the material together the wisdom of thousands of years of China, triggered visual graphics are graphics people’ passing and also shows a unique artistic spirit of the Chinese through the optical pattern. Graphics represents sym- nation. Modernism design respect simple style and bols, which is the result of human beings obtained functionality. Seeing from the surface, it is contrary in a language, graphic and character period. Graphics to the traditional Chinese graphics. This is because have experienced a changing period from original the designers and consumers are pursuing fashion, symbols to various systems of character. Currently, and taking on substantial design concepts of Western people can skillfully express themselves through minimalist graphic. Therefore, in the current design of words and language, but few people understand the visual communication, the works that the real use tra- efforts our ancestors have paid. Few understand there ditional graphics are rarely recognized by the public. was a transition period called a graphical period. From hieroglyph which is 4000–8000 years ago, it can be seen that graphics are older than the character. 2 The appearance oF Graphic

The Appearance of graphic is due to human emer- 3 Chinese traditional Graphics gence, and also because of the necessity of understanding and changing the world. Even when the time Traditional graphic symbol refers to traditional pat- language and character have not yet appeared, using terns which aesthetic symbols had been added to the graphics to remember things has already emerged. surface of the object, so that it produces beauty or

9781138028135_Chp_002.indd 7 31/03/15 7:05 PM special meaning, modifying and beautifying people’s 5 China’s traditional Graphics’ lives. Although the transformation of traditional applications in modern Visual graphics is roughly the same with the previous period, communication desiGn the temperament of these rich and various forms of these graphics can still be realized. Traditional graph- 5.1 China’s traditional graphics’ applications in ics have a long history, and resources are particularly poster design rich, its main functions are decorative, imagery and A good poster should be expressed through graphical pray for good luck. In the process of all transforma- language, not the words. As the main expression of tion development, through the rich and unified style, design works, graphic is a very sensitive and high- it gradually forms a rich diversified, artistic and profile visual core. This is because, in a poster work, designed modern graphics. graphic is the most convenient, the most meaningful, Through the link of traditional visual graphics most e ective medium to convey information [3]. and its meaning shows an ancestors’ grasp of vision, Whatever form of expression cannot ban the impor- and presents classic beauty vividly, changing into the tant position of graphics in the current social. Since main features of national survival and development. the emergence of the knowledge economy, modern Because of the high speed of economic globalization, high-tech get a larger development, making new the traditional graphics lose its own characteristic types of advertisement, communication, production and art in the international culture category, but such methods and design concept poured out, many short periods can not be avoided [2]. But through the designers have a new insight in the interpretation and development of recent years, people gradually get rid understanding of the poster design. They like poster of the excessive pursuit of a foreign design concept, designs which are humorous, simple, ingenious and letting people to rethink the traditional graphics. of profound significance, and convey important content through concise visual expression, which is of high visual tension, truly reflecting their ability to 4 Modern Visual communication interpret the graphic language. desiGns China’s traditional graphics are a very rich treasure, which is the crystallization of traditional culture Visual communication designs are conveying some soul and art philosophy. In poster design, simply copy specific information to the target object through or knock together of traditional graphics should be visual art forms, and its main constituent factors banned, this will only be counterproductive, and can- are words, illustrations and logos. Its contents will not achieve significance of art or business creation. be richening due to the development of technology, When using traditional graphics, it should reflect the generation of new energy and the development and meaning of traditional graphic want to reflect, under- application of product materials. When merging stand its connotation, and then innovate on the basis with other areas, it gradually forms a new design of it, making design works very thoughtful and deep. category associated with other visual media. Visual Then, make an accurate grasp of traditional graphic communication design includes two factors: visual form. Shape, as the most significant symbol of visual symbols and design. Visual symbols refer to symbols works, highly visual impacted, there are different embodies some certain form of things which the eye colors in different regions, and together with the inte- can observe, it mainly includes character, graphics, gration some design concepts, you can really create a science, film, architecture, plastic arts, etc., is the art poster full of national color. of modern business. Communication refers to the process which the messenger sends to the recipient through symbols, it can exceed the language itself 5.2 and it is the communication between human them- Graphics’ applications in traditional logo selves, human and society, human and nature. design Visual communication design is a design which is Due to the continuous development of the time, peo- through visual media and aims of the public, show- ple’s social consciousness is constantly changing. ing the age characteristics of the design and rich As the social environment in which people lived content. Since the reform and opening up, modern changes, design should also continue to promote. design concept gradually been accepted, therefore, Thus, logo designs in graphic design are also highly visual language and design are deeply influenced by time impacted. modern Western visual design. For modern visual In the face of design progress and development, also designs, using traditional graphic symbols to express people’s desire for an idealized life is truly reflected. the factors of unique national language is of great We should treat everything around us with an open importance. Only by doing so,” Chinese design” can mind Social development and progress is through be recognized by the world. communication and coordination between people.

9781138028135_Chp_002.indd 8 31/03/15 7:05 PM So, detached language of visual communication, such associating organization and the appearance and as logo design, further shows its value and signifi- quality of the merchandise. So, as a visual graphic cance than all the past generations. Logo, as a visual contains cultural connotation, logo is very heart symbol representative of the commerce or business shocking, so it is largely applied in the field of visual groups, is very important in social activities. communication. Imaginable and highly emotional logo design can transmit information and content to people through 5.3 visual symbols, letting people understand at a glance, China’s traditional graphics applications in and reach a consensus. Logo designs penetrate the packaging design essence of continuity, figurativeness and novelty, Packaging we described currently, is no longer as a which is not only the reflection of things around us, way to protect, but a reﬂection of people’ aesthetic but also the aesthetic feeling of the cultural spirit. appeal through careful design and decoration of Traditional graphic design is an objective perfor- designers, bringing together people’s wisdom [5]. All mance in art design, and embodies the wisdom and people of the world set up their own peculiar habits, philosophy of human thought as well as reflections aesthetic approach and way of thinking in terms of of the aspirations of the human emotions [4]. For the their social environment and the natural environment traditional culture graphics, character and color, which and thus established a distinctive national culture. embodied in logo design is more able to elaborate cul- Our packaging design pursues balance, unity, happi- ture, express the heart, and communicate with others. ness, etc. And that is a unique feature of national psy- The traditional art forms of expression used in chology and cultural composition over a long period. modern logo design reflect the philosophy of ancient Due to the continuous development of technology, China and ancient method of watching for images, productivity continues to improve, optional supermar- and strive for the integration of man and heaven. kets are emerging. In the modern supermarket, many China’s traditional arts attach great importance to goods are placed in accordance with the categories. the mood and charm, which plays a great role in In the situation when a salesman is not around, con- modern logo design. Graphic design belongs to the sumers selected goods by the image of the package. whole tradition materialized concentrated way, it is Among the wealth of merchandise, how to distinguish the conveyer of the creator’ emotional characteristics domestic goods from imported goods? And we have and integrated objective image symbol. A logo is an to distinguish from the style and design features of extension of graphic design, it is not only the com- the package of goods. Many designers integrate tradi- bination of creative ideas, but also the combination tional graphics and modern, and applied it to packag- of design factors. Traditional graphics, in the areas ing designs, showing the culture and nationality of the of logo creation, express their emotions, reflecting a package. Consumers can obtain some information, unique charm. The image of a modern logo design properties and values through the package of goods, should combine beauty and meaning, which comes which conducive to consumers purchase. from a product of creativity and design, and seeks As packaging design is concerned, there is a inspiration in nature. problem between traditional graphics reference and The effect logo design looks are beyond the plane, innovation. Many of our designers have attached it is the infinite extend of three-dimension. It con- great importance to the exploration and study of this veys visual symbolic language, its meaning and problem and have obtained good results. But because content are highly representative and long-standing. of the limitations of a variety of factors, there still Traditional image used in the logo designs, which not existed some problems on the design concepts and only have to show the rhythm and beauty, but also design methods. For the reference of traditional represents a very rich cultural character and spiritual graphics, attention should be paid to accurate posi- connotations. tioning. Some traditional graphic designers are accus- Character, image object, color, specific graphic, tomed to copy and collage in order to constitute a new abstract figures, etc. constitute logo. Most logos are packaging design. But this method has a disturbing made by combining different basic forms. The logo factor, and is bound to fail. The so-called integration design should first take the scope and purpose of use of man and heaven, referring to the perfect fusion into consideration, and then consider the feasibil- of people-orientated philosophy and aesthetics, and ity of the design, together with some visual effects, attaches great importance attention to the subject and people’s aesthetic awareness and social psychology. object of aesthetic, putting aesthetics as the highest Strengthen new forms to express precise expression. standards, signifying the combination of good and Graphics should focus on artistry, graphic color has beauty. to possess a strong sense impact, so the logos can The most widely used Chinese traditional graphics very artistic. People can tell the profound cultural are those praying for good luck, getting rid of evil meaning through very simple graphical experience, spirits and misfortunes and other traditional patterns,

9781138028135_Chp_002.indd 9 31/03/15 7:05 PM and these are highly symbolic and embody deep establish the characteristics of oriental culture. breath of life, reflecting ancient people’ urgent yearn- By doing so, design works can possess distinctive ing for a better life. By constantly changing, fusion, features and age duration and realizing national to accelerate the development of a new national cul- character at last, making it consistent with global ture. We should transform packaging design culture communication. into that of nationality, but also with internationality. And people have to explore continuously, finding out the binding sites of traditional culture and interna- REFERENCES tional culture and achieve return to its original nature. [1] Li Mu Yang, Elunchun altered form of traditional cul- Therefore, we should draw the essence and learn to ture and its characteristics [J] Border Economy and combine, and make the packaging art develop by Culture. 2008 (10): 80–83. leaps and bounds, changing into a strong force in the [2] Zhang Shi Yue Chinese traditional creative graphic development of the art of our country. design in the modern visual transformation [D] Northwest Normal. 2010: I–IX. [3] Xunxiao Long, study of Chinese Traditional graphics 6 Conclusion applications [D] In modern visual design of Yanbian University (2008): 1–48. How to build Chinese special visual design cul- [4] Yan Wang, Visual Communication Design Applications Chinese traditional elements [J] modern decor (theory). ture in the situation of economic globalization, 2013 (01): 18–19. designers need to uphold a tolerant attitude toward [5] Shi Yali, On the application of traditional Chinese ele- traditional culture, and absorb the essence from ments in visual communication design [J] Journal of di erent directions. For outstanding achievements Zhejiang Business Technology Institute. 2007 (03): abroad, try to make it to serve Chinese culture and 43–44.

Blocks garden – Research on creating a garden of intensive module assembly

Song Li College of Horticulture & Forestry Sciences, Huazhong Agricultural University, Wuhan, Hubei, China

ABSTRACT: Based on the developmental background of the roof and balconies of intensive gardens, status, domestic and international research on the dynamic module garden, case studies, this paper laid the theoretical foundation for the research module assembly to create a garden. Source proposed design and design research, conceptual interpretation, design strategies to create a concept of analysis, design guarantee originality. Articles about garden design research modules, including module monomer design research, are exploring the connection module, the module landscape facilities design, modular garden related technical analysis, modular, intelligent design and so on. Explore intensive assembly and modular design method to create the building blocks of the garden, to change the traditional mode to create a garden, to create a real garden and maintenance of low-carbon eco truly realizes the concept of “building blocks Garden”. KEYWORDS: Intensive Module; Assembly Building; Blocks Garden; Courtyard Garden; Carbon Garden

1 INTRODUCTION However, due to different national conditions, the Chinese family housing conditions are far behind the Currently, the city continues to expand, people have developed countries in Europe and America, Europe been severe erosion of green, each person has a nat- and home gardening industry has a more mature ural space that is very limited, besides, creating gar- economy and industrial base, many families have their dens and maintenance costs are very high. Therefore, own villa and garden. In China, the garden is more of in the garden, creating a study, the urgent need is a longing for life, and not many people can have. to select an economical, gardens beautiful, practical method to create sustainable development. This method is convenient to be able to operate with a low 2.2 Requirement of sustainable development for cost and a strong marketing value and development gardens prospects, but also to meet the needs of different per- In cities, it requires the growing demand for private sonalities, to comply with a people-oriented garden gardens. But the construction of the traditional gar- design, and can be applied to the public. den is a relatively complicated process. The con- Introduce in garden design and construction of struction trouble, conservation trouble, cramped modular thinking, change the status quo and create space are prone to fatigue after a long time. So, in the spending big garden, build complex, which is diffi- garden design study, the urgent need is to select an cult to maintain, after the completion of the design, it economical, beautiful, practical and sustainable gar- is no longer the lead on the garden path of sustainable den design method in line with the needs of different development to promote industrial development and personalities. create a garden, building blocks are to achieve the ideal garden. 2.3 Opportunities for modular garden development 2 BACKGROUND A garden design methodology module is a new garden design method for sustainable development, 2.1 People are yearning for living in garden which will promote the industry to the private garden In Europe and Japan, the garden has become a part of path of industrial production and industrial develop- life as early family life, everywhere is full of flowers ment, so that the public can enjoy the garden and sus- on the windowsill and has a variety of chic private gar- tainable living. Our housing industry is in a stage of dens, any small spaces are likely to turn into a garden. rapid development, research module assembly of the

9781138028135_Chp_003.indd 11 16/04/15 5:31 PM garden can be combined with integrated residential features,features, principles,principles, explainsexplains howhow toto integrateintegrate thethe research,research, followingfollowing thethe integrationintegration ofof residentialresidential andand garden design, as well as to distinguish it from the common development. traditionaltraditional gardengarden design.design. Garden industry should also carry out industrial restructuring,restructuring, accelerateaccelerate thethe upgradingupgrading ofof traditionaltraditional industriesindustries garden,garden, andand taketake industrialization,industrialization, inteninten-- 3.2.2 The modular design approach courtyard sive and modular way. Make full use of the advan-- Jack Wogan mentioned in “Home Improvement The tagestages ofof three-dimensionalthree-dimensional greengreen space;space; increaseincrease thethe Garden Studio” a modular structure of the garden stu-- green area of the city. Representing the future of the dios, and he thought the biggest advantage is porta-- city is a major trend, which will become the future ble, lightweight and features, which makes migration development direction of urban greening, and pro-- garden structures is not only feasible, but it is also mote low-carbon life patterns. convenient. He won the 2006 red dot design and in 2007 American IDEA (Industrial Design Excellence Awards) Industrial Design Excellence Award for 3 DDYNAMICYNAMIC SITUSITUATIONATION AT HOME AND “lawn maintenance system (Verdi Lawnscaping sys-- ABROAD tem)”tem)” usingusing aa modularmodular systemsystem designdesign low-low-maintenance landscapelandscape isis suitablesuitable forfor gardengarden design.design. 3.1 Domestic dynamic situation First, it comes to the modular design of the garden is 3.3 Concept analysis creating the modular for a thethe GuangzhouGuangzhou AcademyAcademy ofof FineFine ArtsArts ofof ZhangZhang Jian’sJian’s garden “(1 + 1 + 1) modular garden space,”. Zhong, in “gar-- The Ideological Origins of modular industrial pro-- den courtyard express a modular design” in the garden duction aims to simplify the design process and the modular design gives a simple analysis, Professor Ma manufacturing process and shortens product develop-- Junshan 2010 in Hangzhou City “home beautiﬁcation”beautification” ment time and facilities to prepare. project master plan, the modular design principles are The traditional Chinese character typesetting toto beautifybeautify thethe homehome environment,environment, andand proposepropose sevsev-- typographytypography waswas pickedpicked basedbased onon thethe specificspecific concon-- eral construction mode balcony, terrace and court-- tenttent ofof thethe printing,printing, thethe printingprinting isis completedcompleted afterafter yard. Currently, the roof is mainly used to moisture, thethe splitsplit version,version, allall thethe typestypes areare reusable,reusable, isis aa “parts“parts heat, and water, installation of solar equipment, dry-- intointo aa whole”whole” andand “piecemeal”“piecemeal” dialecticaldialectical process.process. inging stu,stuff, green green roofs roofs and and terraces. terraces. Balcony Balcony in in people’s people’s Traditional Chinese tenon wood construction, the four daily lives and more for laundry, laundry, is close the basic types of brackets in the wood components are entire debris or idleness with little use to beautify the thatthat bucket,bucket, arch,arch, flatflat andand obliqueoblique FangFang areare dependingdepending home environment, the balcony is into little more than on the location and function of the various combina-- threethree metersmeters deep,deep, toto thethe narrownarrow typetype ofof semi-opensemi-open oror tionstions ofof unitsunits inin thethe buildingbuilding inin whichwhich allall thesethese comcom-- enclosed space, its space utilization is very dicult.difficult. ponents in different ways assemble as a whole. Chinese Traditional Burr puzzle toys and “Lego” magic plastic toy building blocks also apply a modular 3.2 Dynamic situation abroad design concept. Burr puzzle more symmetrical form, 3.2.1 IntegratedIntegrated gardengarden designdesign and each rod through repetition, parallel, overlay and “The integrated garden” First, from the garden to other methods, organized together with each other, start planning the integration, through the aspects showing the beauty ten on structure. Lego has rich of the characteristics of the garden, utility functions, colors, different forms, a wide range of specifications

Modular sofa jigsaw puzzle toys Modular pinball orbit toys Lego toys

Fig.1 modular applications in toys Figure 1. modularModular applicationsapplications inin toys.toys. unity. The combination of multiple, modular building block garden is composed of a fixed several 4 MODULE ASSEMBLY GARDEN DESIGN 1012 modules that can achieve the same kind of multiple CONCEPTS combinations between modules and other modules, and success can be varied in shapes of the landscape facilities, consisting of diverse and thus can free 4.1 Module replacement of modules gardens. "Modules" is from the English word "module", 9781138028135_Chp_003.indd 1012 21/03/1516/04/15 4:035:31 PM translated in the "Dictionary English-technology" as modules, components, banks, instruction set, 5 MODULE ASSEMBLY GARDEN DESIGN warehouse, etc. In the "Modern Chinese Dictionary" IDEAS AND DESIGN PROCESS There are three explanations in its concept: ① you can mix and standard hardware parts replacement; The overall design concept: from the general to the ② large software system is an integral part of local garden, and then thought by local synthesis having individual functions; ③ it refers to the part overall. of the whole thing (Figure 2). Green evolution trend: urban greening can be roughly summarized as the situation that evolves, fill in the blank style evolved from the ground and then green for green roofs and vertical green for vertical green phase synthesis. Roof garden and a vertical green wall height for people add more green biomass (Figure 3).

Fig.2 Module 4.2 Modular design In a range of different functions or the same function, but although the performance specifications of the different products on the basis of functional analysis, create and design a series of functional modules, by selecting and combining Use new technology, focus on the wall and roof, it can modules constitute different products to meet increase the quantity of green Fig.3 Evolution of Urban Greening different market design methodology needs. The modular design of both a design approach is also a How to achieve overall from the garden to the design concept; its main purpose is through a local garden: garden systems for deconstruction, combination of modules to meet the diverse and derived from the garden and garden views individual needs of the public, in order to achieve subsystem. Then it is functional analysis, the lower production costs. functional elements of the person's function, and 4.3 Advantages of modular building blocks gardens then refining the analysis obtained by single module, analysis with respect to the traditional garden from a global to local. Standardization of adaptability, standardization ultimate goal are to increase productivity, ensure 6 MODULE DESIGN product quality, the convenience of products and components ask for generic and interchangeable The main feature is the modular design that can be things. You can make good money on the combined into systems decomposable systems. standardized production. Meet people ubiquitous Several modules can be combined into a system, but novelty, change, divergent psychological, modular also can be decomposed with other modules to form design can be achieved in small quantities, a new system, easy assembly, disassembly and production and productivity of many varieties of replacement. In order to achieve maximum for each building block are also more generally to modular building block garden is composed of a fixed the modular system. Each building blocks are corre- several modules that can achieve the same kind of sponding to the protrusions and depressions on both multiple combinations between modules and other surfaces of the interface, so that two blocks can snap modules, and success can be varied in shapes of the tightly together (Fig. 1). landscape facilities, consisting of diverse and thus can free replacement of modules gardens.

4 MODULE ASSEMBLY GARDEN DESIGN CONCEPTS 5 MODULE ASSEMBLY GARDEN DESIGN IDEAS AND DESIGN PROCESS 4.1 Module The overall design concept: from the general to the “Modules” is from the English word “module”, trans- local garden, and then thought by local synthesis lated in the “Dictionary English-technology” as mod- overall. ules, components, banks, instruction set, warehouse, Green evolution trend: urban greening can be etc. In the “Modern Chinese Dictionary” There are roughly summarized as the situation that evolves, fill in three explanations in its concept: you can mix and ① the blank style evolved from the ground and then green standard hardware parts replacement; large soft- ② for green roofs and vertical green for vertical green ware system is an integral part of having individual phase synthesis. Roof garden and a vertical green wall functions; it refers to the part of the whole thing ③ height for people add more green biomass (Figure 3). (Figure 2).

Figure 2. Module. Use new technology, focus on the wall and roof, it can increase the quantity of green

4.2 Modular design Figure 3. Evolution of urban greening. In a range of different functions or the same function, but although the performance specifications of the How to achieve overall from the garden to the local different products on the basis of functional analysis, garden: garden systems for deconstruction, derived create and design a series of functional modules, by from the garden and garden views subsystem. Then selecting and combining modules constitute different it is functional analysis, the functional elements of products to meet different market design method- the person’s function, and then refining the analysis ology needs. The modular design of both a design obtained by single module, from a global to local. approach is also a design concept; its main purpose is through a combination of modules to meet the diverse and individual needs of the public, in order to achieve 6 MODULE DESIGN lower production costs. The main feature is the modular design that can be combined into systems decomposable systems. 4.3 Advantages of modular building blocks gardens Several modules can be combined into a system, analysis with respect to the traditional garden but also can be decomposed with other modules to Standardization of adaptability, standardization ulti- form a new system, easy assembly, disassembly and mate goal are to increase productivity, ensure product replacement. In order to achieve maximum utilization quality, the convenience of products and components of resources, and to maximize meet the diverse needs ask for generic and interchangeable things. You can of users. So for the connection module, it is to take make good money on the standardized production. detachable connection. Detachable connection modes Meet people ubiquitous novelty, change, divergent include the following: threaded connections, snap psychological, modular design can be achieved in connections and ten on structure. These three meth- small quantities, production and productivity of ods are merging to provide more flexible fastening many varieties of unity. The combination of multiple, and creative connection.

9781138028135_Chp_003.indd 13 16/04/15 5:31 PM utilization of resources, and to maximize meet the 6.1 Module Landscape Facilities diverse needs of users. So for the connection The modular form, with only the final establishment module, it is to take detachable connection. of landscape facilities can meet its value, and build Detachable connection modes include the following: form elements required for its extraction and threaded connections, snap connections and ten on integration. The modular design of the facility and structure. These three methods are merging to the landscape generated sequence, the extraction and provide more flexible fastening and creative integration of landscape facilities modular form connection.Threaded connection is fixedly connected to a elementsintegration divided of landscape into four facilities parts, modular namely form the ele- Threaded connection is fixedly connected to a widely used removable, which includes set screws, extractionments divided elements, into four components, parts, namely modules the extraction and screwwidely connection, used removable, screwed which and includesstud joinsset these screws four, facilitieselements, elements components, form the modules starting and point facilities for the ele- screw connection, screwed and stud joins these four types. Set screws are used for fixing the relative posi- designments element form the is starting the beginning, point for and the the design designed element tiontypes. of Setthe screwstwo parts,are andused cannot for fixing transmit the the relative force keyis ultimatelythe beginning, formed. and Common the designed facilities key such ultimately as position of the two parts, and cannot transmit the or torque. Screw coupling means screw connection is integratedformed. Common landscape facilities shop, gallery such frame,as integrated planting land- force or torque. Screw coupling means screw tanks and seats, extract elements wired, three kinds screwedconnection directly is screwed into the directly connector, into thethe connector,structure is scape shop, gallery frame, planting tanks and seats, simpler than the stud. Bolting bolts through aperture ofextract face and elements body, and wired, the graphics three kinds are theof facerules. and This body, the structure is simpler than the stud. Bolting bolts is to maintain stability, but also it is better able to meansthrough being aperture connected means being to the connected piece and to tightenthe piece the and the graphics are the rules. This is to maintain sta- assemble splicing and post-demolition restructuring. nut.and Sub-ordinary tighten the bolted nut. Suband- articulationordinary bolted hole bolt and is bility, but also it is better able to assemble splicing connectingarticulation the hole two, bolt the isformerconnecting rod and the threaded two, the bolt 6.2andC omponentspost-demolition and M restructuring.odules holesformer have rod intramuraland threaded gap, bolt the holes latterhave is inintramural direct con- Since the element is not re-division unit body, the tact.gap, When the latter stud coupling is in direct is thicker contact. or Whenfittings stud must member6.2 is made of elements of the unit. Form coupling is thicker or fittings must be used in order 6.2 Components and modules be used in order to compact and blind holes, but with elements can vary according to the type of produce, studto compact bolted connections. and blind holes, It can but be withrepeatedstud assembly bolted theSince number the ofelement changes is innot the re-division way of the unit elements. body, the andconnections. disassembly It cwithoutan be repeateddamaging assemblythe connector. and Basedmember on the is extractedmade of elements,elements combinedof the unit. with Form the ele- disassembly without damaging the connector. It has It has a simple structure, reliable connection, easy characteristicsments can vary of theaccording modular to landscape the type facilities,of produce, it the assemblya simple and structure, disassembly, reliable etc. connection, easy willnumber be divided of changes into in three the way components: of the elements. the base Based assemblyIn summary, and disassembly, as for the buildingetc. blocks of the gar- member,on the extracted the connectin elements,g member combined and with the supportthe charac- In summary, as for the building blocks of the den you can use the following four detachable con- memberteristics in ofthree. the modular landscape facilities, it will be dengarden you youcan canuse usethe thefollowing following four four detachable detachable con- teristics of the modular landscape facilities, it will be nections:connection 1,s: through 1, through a special a special module module itself itself ten ten on divided into three components: the base member, the structure,on structure it ,is itto isachieve to achieve without without connecting connecting piece, connecting member and the support member in three. 7 CONCLUSION thispiece, connection this connection because because they theydo notdo notconsider consider the load-bearing, so is mainly used in floor coverings. the load-bearing, so is mainly used in floor Through the study of the modular assembly of the 2,coverings. using the 2, thread using thestructure thread tost ructureachieve to a achievedetachable a 7 CONCLUSION garden, the introduction of modular thinking in the connection. 3, dislocation and other fasteners and detachable connection. 3, dislocation and other garden is to create the design and construction of the fasteners and removable technology research. 4, removable technology research. 4, using the model to garden.ThroughIt a imsthe studyto make of buildingthe modular blocks assembly to create ofa the using the model to achieve the groove and hook achieve the groove and hook detachable connection gardengarden, as simple,the introductionand it can ofchange modular the shapethinking of the in the (Figuredetachable 4). Splicing-2 connection Splicing-3 (Figure 4). Splicing-2 gardengarden constitute is to create. In the design course and of makingconstruction, the of Splicing-3 gardenthe garden. every It momentaims to make can building reflect innovativeblocks to cre- Splicing-1 Splicing-2 Splicing-3 thinkingate a garden. Anyone as simple, can simply and it design can change innovation, the shape changof thee gardengarden designconstitute. and In create the course a spending of making, big, the buildgarden complex, every moment long constructioncan reﬂectreflect innovative innovative period. Oncethinking. thinking. completedAnyone ,can it cannotsimply bedesign changed, innovation, maintenance changeis garden a difficultdesign situation,and create on a spendingthe road tobig, the build garden complex,, it will long leadconstruction to sustainable period. development, Once completed, and promote it cannot the be industrialchanged, development maintenance of is thea dicultdifficult garden, situation, sosituation, that theon onthe the publicroad canto the enjoy garden, the buildingit will lead blocks to sustainable of the garden devel- fun.opment, and promote the industrial development of the garden, so that the public can enjoy the building REFERblocksENCES of the garden fun.

[1] John King. Simulated Masonry Garden Walls Having REFERENCESModular Construction. USA Patent, 7159367. 2007-01-09 [2] David Hoch, Belmont, MA. Patent Application Publication. USA[1] John Patent, King. 0151148. Simulated 2007-07 Masonry-05 Garden Walls Having [3] Thomas J. Gretz, Clarks Summit, PA. Garden Post With ImprovedModular Plastic Construction. Tube Joint. USA UUSAPatent,SA 6915992.Patent, 20057159367.- Fig.4 Module combinations 07-122007-01-09. [2] David Hoch, Belmont, MA. Patent Application Figure 4. Module combinations. Figure 4. Module combinations. Publication. USA Patent, 0151148. 2007-07-05. [3] Thomas J. Gretz, Clarks Summit, PA. Garden Post With 6.1 Module landscape facilities Improved Plastic Tube Joint. UUSASA Patent, 6915992. 2005-07-12. The modular form, with only the ﬁnal establishment 2005-07-12. The modular form, with only the final establishment [4] Peter J. Blomquist, Melbourne Beach, FL., Et. of landscape facilities can meet its value, and build Modular Retaining Wall Block. UUSASA Patent, 452332. form elements required for its extraction and inte- 2001-12-18. gration. The modular design of the facility and the [5] Kevin J. Russell, Alpena, MI. Modular Revolving landscape generated sequence, the extraction and Garden Stake. USA Patent, 637833. 2011-05-17.

1214

9781138028135_Chp_003.indd 1214 21/03/1516/04/15 4:035:31 PM [6] Thomas R. Bryan, LaPorte Ave., Wilmette, et. Modular plant selection and planting design. Northwest Forestry Fence. USA Patent, 7216854. 2007-05-15. University, 2005,20 (3): 180–183. [7] Don A. Holland, Bluebird La., Livingston, et. Garden [14] Zhang Xiao. The Expo will analyze the status quo Structure. USA Patent, 4568584. 1986-02-04. and the greening of urban solid. Modern Agricultural [8] Zeev Brandeis, Alon Street, Rosh Aain. Modular Garden Science and Technology, 2010,17: 241–242. Border System. USA Patent, 6182948. 2001-02-06. [15] He Jiancong, Zhang Taiping, Li Yuelin, et al. Urban [9] Ed Dillon, North Little Rock, AR. Modular Garden Environment & Urban Ecology, 2003,16 (6): 289–291. Fencing. USA Patent, 0230026. 2003-12-18. [16] Li Qing. Garden Design and Integration. [MS Thesis]. [10] Zhao Weiyan. Talking about the role of our roof gar- Zhejiang: Zhejiang Forestry University, 2012. den design, status and principles. Henan Agricultural, [17] Sun Qian. Modular Design Landscape facilities. [MS 2009,2: 61–62. Thesis]. Nanjing: Nanjing Arts Institute, 2013. [11] Chen Jiyuan, Lv Weiya. Modular three-dimensional [18] Wu Yuqiong. Vertical Greening application of new green used in Guiyang International Convention and technologies in construction. [MS Thesis]. Guangzhou: Exhibition Centre. Residential Technology, 2011,12: South China University of Technology, 2012. 43–46. [19] Tang Haiyue. Research modular green wall. [MS [12] Li Qing, Ma Junshan, Lu Cong. Modular Design Thesis]. Beijing: North China University, 2013. Summary garden. Chinese gardening abstracts, 2012,1: [20] Ma Hui. Development and use of roof space. [MS 75–77. Thesis]. Tianjin: Tianjin University, 2005. [13] Ji Wenli, Li Weizhong, Wang Chengji, et al. Northern [21] Zhang Feng. Roof garden design research. [MS Thesis]. Development and Status Quo roof garden green roof Beijing: Central Academy of Fine Arts, 2009.

Characteristics of digital broadcasting technology and its development research

Mo Yang College of the Humanities, Jilin University, Changchun, Jilin, China

ABSTRACT: Driven by the rapid development of agricultural science and technology, many techniques have been developed rapidly, especially the development of broadcasting technology which earth-shaking changes have taken place. The advent of digital broadcasting technology makes the broadcast technology enter a new stage. With its low energy consumption and large coverage area, digital broadcasting technology was widely welcomed by the broadcast television industry. This paper analyzes digital audio broadcasting, multimedia digital broadcasting and digital AM broadcasting, and further concretely elaborates the application prospects of digital broadcasting technology. KEYWORDS: Shock digital broadcasting; Technology; Characteristics; Application

In the development of China’s traditional broadcast- of traditional analog broadcast can simultaneously ing industry where long-wave, medium wave and deliver a variety of services such as digital images, short wave AM broadcasts as part of its infancy and text, data, images and moving images, etc., which has has experienced a long period after the development opened up new application space for the development of FM stereo broadcasts. These forms of broadcasting of traditional broadcasting services. on the basis of AM broadcasts audio broadcast development process belong to the analog audio broadcasts. When the audio broadcast grown in the two decades 1 THE DEVELOPMENT PROSPECTS OF of the twentieth century, the digital audio broadcast- DIGITAL BROADCASTING TECHNOLOGY ing not only began to appear its inherent advantages of the conventional effective way of broadcasting, but According to a related survey data, now the widespread also formed its own unique characteristics which are adoption of digital broadcast receivers are essentially widely recognized by their industry peers. Because it fully occupied the market. Digital broadcast receiver has more advantages, very pure sound, strong anti- not only meets the demand, but also focus on multi- interference ability which can be moved to receive media applications, so its technical advantages to the noise interference segment, and because each station broadcast industry have brought great change. The occupied bandwidth is narrow, so the number of fre- specifications and standards of digital broadcasting quencies utilized is more. In order to achieve higher need larger initial investment funds, and the orig- data transfer and many other services, months ago inal equipment replacement still needs some time. digital multimedia broadcasting is to be the develop- In order to develop digital broadcasting also need a ment basis of digital broadcasting technologies. digital broadcast receiver as participants in the indus- Traditional analog broadcasting is a means of try the manufacturers, content providers and digital information dissemination to convenient for the pub- broadcasting operators and even telecom operators to lic service. With the continuous development of the participate in. In digital broadcasting operators based Internet, network streaming presented a huge chal- business model, a digital broadcast signal through the lenge to the survival of traditional broadcasting. radio transmitter, the user receives an analog signal People also have higher expectations for broadcasting as in the past, like a digital signal with a radio river services, as the contents and sound quality of tra- receiver to watch the multimedia programs. ditional broadcasting services can not meet people’s With the rapid development of the broadcasting needs. Therefore, the transition from analog to digi- industry, the traditional broadcast model has basically tal technology, the implementation of digital broad- been replaced by digital broadcasting and achieve a casting is the inevitable trend of development of technological revolution in the broadcast media, which broadcasting technology, and it energized the broad- make the broadcast media has made over flight of casting service. The single sound service expansion advances in digital broadcasting. Digital broadcasting

9781138028135_Chp_005.indd 17 31/03/15 7:52 PM effectively absorbs the advantages of traditional in the future in the form of radio programs, and broadcasting and gives full play to its own the advan- gradually replacing the traditional AM, FM radio, tage and combined with traditional broadcasting to audio services occupied a huge market. meet the visual needs of the audience. Meanwhile, Mobile television program service market: DMB in the continuous development of science and tech- mobile TV reception capabilities can provide con- nology, the digital broadcasting technology will sub- siderable existing analog TV picture quality news, sequently continue improve and development will video entertainment and information services for provide the audience a better viewing platform. the city or on the outskirts of stationary, mobile state crowd. Traffic Information Services Market: navigation service can provide transportation for motorists, 2 DIGITAL MULTIMEDIA BROADCASTING such as providing rural and urban electronic map, (DMB) real-time road traffic conditions, weather information, text, transportation and emergency alarm Digital Multimedia Broadcasting DMB is formed information. Economic information services market: from digital audio broadcasting DAB, different from providing real-time financial market information, DAB radio, DMB broadcasting is no longer simply a foreign exchange transaction information, and the sound broadcasting, but a voice can simultaneously sound, illustrations. Network services market: use transmit multiple sets of programs, data services the DMB receivers, a network computer can receive and activities broadcast video program. It takes full information on the Internet at a fixed or mobile envi- advantage of DAB digital audio broadcasting tech- ronments. With the accelerated speed of modern life, nology and the function will transfer a single audio the mobile crowd will move into the mainstream, it signal extended to a variety of information carrier can be expected that in addition to installing DMB signal which can transmit data, text, graphics, and receiver in the bus, subway, trains, waiting rooms, television. At present, China’s Guangdong Province shopping malls, colleges and other public places, the was completed the technical transition from DAB to phone people used for information contact not only DMB in 1999, and then, in the Pearl River Delta suc- receive the broadcast, but also to receive television cessfully conducted DMB pilot. August 2003, Foshan and graphic information, so it becomes a small port- Radio, Yueguang company’s engineering staff suc- able audio-visual media, now the major factors that cessfully installed the first bus car digital multimedia restrict the development of multimedia digital broad- broadcasting (DMB) receiver in Foshan, so that pas- casting are the price and promotion. sengers can enjoy high-quality and real-time video broadcasting. Now, the Guangdong DMB project is 2.3 moving the way to commercial development. Digital satellites sound broadcasting Digital satellite sound broadcasting refers to those broadcasting by satellite to transmit DAB dig- 2.1 DMB potential market advantage ital sound. In 20th century, recognized by the It has a variety of audiences’ advantages: You can International Telecommunication Union World Space receive high-quality voice, data and video programs Satellite Group (World Space) launch digital satellite in fast-moving ground state, so outdoor activities, sound broadcasting systems have been debut. The transport (buses, trains, and even airplanes) users will system consists of Asian Star, Africa Star and Star be DMB mobile user groups. DMB can move not only of the Americas three geostationary satellites, radio receive information, it can be fixed indoor and out- uplink station, digital receivers and ground control door occasions using mobile or stationary receiver, so operations network components. It plays digital audio the traditional fixed-users (TV users, a variety of data broadcasting directly to the global coverage of more users) will also be DMB user groups. than 120 countries. It is not only charming in audio broadcasting, but also bring about a revolution in multimedia broadcasting, entertainment and informa- 2.2 Variety of service advantage can be tion dissemination areas. carried out Online (digital) broadcasts the sound of broad- Audio Services Market: multimedia features of DMB casting programs send to the Internet is another new broadcast programs is to break the traditional single form of online media information dissemination. sound business model, but can also transmit the broad- Currently online radio programs broadcast in the cast graphic information related to the program (such form of generally two ways: first online radio, which as a host of information, pictures, songs, background is synchronous with broadcast radio programs, time- information and promos, etc.), traffic information, liness strong; the second is on-demand programming, weather forecasts, to provide sound for listeners out- online found in the text of the news and other various side of the visual effect. It will become mainstream topics that can provide services according to audience

9781138028135_Chp_005.indd 18 31/03/15 7:52 PM needs. The practice has proved that Internet broadcast 15, 2001 digital satellite broadcasting service, using may exceed the advantages and using the Internet can two geostationary satellites located over the United enhance the strength of the competition. Main fea- States, mainly aimed at the domestic market, vast tures: global coverage advantage. Once broadcasting car users. XM Satellite Radio is mainly provided CD access to the Internet is facing a global network user. music, news, sports and other digital sound program, Traditional broadcasting, a radio station can not do pay about $ 10 a month. US General Motors company any global coverage; only network has this advantage. has to install XM digital satellite broadcast receivers Choice freedom advantage: Audience can choose a on their vehicles. XM radio lets people in the car can program in accordance with their own wishes, with- be like at home via cable or broadcast TV, listening out time constraints of traditional broadcast aired. to a variety of digital broadcasts 24 hours. Sirius Information superiority: Web casts can use the net- Satellite Radio in the spring of 2002 on the use of work a huge storage space and powerful transmission satellites in highly elliptical orbit began to broadcast capacity, greatly expanding the capacity of broadcast digital satellite broadcasts for Houston, Denver and information for the audience to provide a wealth of other four cities, and gradually expand the business to information repositories. the entire United States. Sirius radio channels mainly provide original music and sports, news, interviews and entertainment without advertising. 3 CONNOTATION OF DIGITAL DAB belongs to the high-speed, broadband, multi- BROADCASTING TECHNOLOGY channel transmission system, the system works in the L and S band, take up a new band, adopt new emission What is digital broadcasting technology? It refers to equipment and special receiver, and there is a certain the digitized audio, video and all kinds of data signals distance away from the current price of its receiver in a digital state, and other coding, modulation and to the civilized price Which affecting the rapid pro- transmission processing. Compared to the familiar motion in the country. and other traditional AM and FM radio technology, The new DRM broadcasting systems taking into digital broadcasting technology has its own unique account of the transition phase from analogue broad- advantages and can make use of the ground base sta- casting to digital broadcasting, the direct use of exist- tions transmit digital signals through radio and data ing short-wave transmitters and channel, not only can to achieve the purpose of information transmission. achieve very good sound quality, but also to achieve With the continuous development of digital technol- simulcast with existing analog AM radio program, ogy, digital broadcasting technology not only can not take up a new band, saving spectrum resources, transmit audio signals, but also capable of transmit- short-wave radio receiver can be used or a new digi- ting multimedia signals, including audio, video, data, tal radio, inexpensive, easy to spread. Compared with text and other graphics. DAB, the biggest advantages FM HD Radio is the low investment. No new frequency assignments, enabling analog / digital simulcast operation, can achieve 3.1 Characteristics of digital broadcasting a smooth transition from analog to digital. However, technology the spectrum utilization, the DAB transmission qual- AM and FM broadcasting in the traditional sense ity is substantially the same, the ability to move the has certain limitations, such as relatively poor sound received energy to meet the requirements of the the- quality, easy to be influenced by other signals and ory, but somewhat less than the DAB (DAB can meet so on. However, the digital broadcasting technology the maximum 250km / h). can break the limitations of traditional broadcast- The emergence of digital broadcasting technology ing above, with pristine sound quality, high audio diversification is related to the actual situation of each quality, strong anti-interference ability, reduction of country and region, not just from the technical point broadcasting cost, and portable and mobile features. to make a good conclusion which broadcast technol- It is worth mentioning that the different types of dig- ogy is good or not. For example, the analog FM digital ital broadcasting technologies have their own unique broadcasting has different possibilities. They differ in characteristics. terms of the performance of the interference on the existing FM broadcasting systems, the complexity and the price of the receiver and the like. DAB due 3.2 Digital Satellite Sound Broadcasting (DSB) to the wide bandwidth, can not achieve one by one application digital FM radio station, only the overall closed FM, US-run digital satellite sound broadcasting (DSB) has DAB and then replaced; in addition, DAB requires two main stations. One is the XM radio station, and many programs complex with each other, for local or the other is Sirius radio. XM radio stations through- regional radio stations, it is inconvenient and capacity out the United States officially opened on November wasted. FM HD Radio on FM band FM receiver will

9781138028135_Chp_005.indd 19 31/03/15 7:52 PM cause existing intolerable interference, in Europe and the reliability of the digital broadcasting system, China will be subject to greater restrictions apply. reducing area and power systems, reducing system Realization of frequency modulation to synchro- cost and greatly improve the cost performance of the nize with the frequency of a broadcast coherent zone system. Digital broadcasting is a new system, but is that in the identical single transmitter close to the also high-quality, flexible digital broadband wireless transmitter side of the technical characteristics. The transmission capability which the network multi- problem required to solve for coherent regions is two media data services conveniently combined. With or more field transmitter coverage overlap region its widespread use, digital broadcast technology issue. FM receiver has the “capture effect” which will lead an emerging industry that has huge market making FM simulcast reception becomes simple. potential, and the receiver will account for a large This effect is that when two of the same or similar proportion of this industry. frequency RF signals into the receiver, I heard that the field strength stronger radio program. REFERENCES

[1] Jin Liping. Digital Broadcasting Technology and 4 SUMMARY Its Application Status and Development. [J].Cable Technology, 2012, 09: 58–63 + 68. Broadcast transmission of digital broadcast technol- [2] Ma Changsheng. On the Characteristics of Digital ogy is the main trend of development. Due to the large Broadcasting Technologies and Its Application. [J]. international companies have formed the main push Heilongjiang Science and Technology Information, 2013, 25: 1. OAB Industry Alliance and DRM standards, these [3] Chen Feng. Characteristics of Digital Broadcasting two standards will become the mainstream standard Technology and Its Application. [J] Electro-acoustic in the future of digital broadcasting. With the rapid Technology, 2008, 07: 84–87. development of deep submicron IC process technol- [4] Zhao Yue. Digital Broadcasting Technology in the ogy, the integration of 109 tiny transistors, integrated Traffic Information Service. [J] Western Radio and on a silicon wafer in physics has become possible, Television, 2014, 15: 175 + 178. and per unit area can be integrated chip has much [5] Zhao Xiufang. On the Characteristics of Digital more than the original transistors. IC manufacturing Broadcasting Technologies and Its Application. [J] technology breakthroughs to IC designers greater Science and Technology Information, 2011, 25: 43 + 45. [6] Mao Xueying. design space is also put forward higher requirements. Characteristics of Several Digital Broadcasting Technology and Its Application. [J] In the field of digital broadcasting, we are trying to Chinese cable TV, 2011, 09: 1045–1048. reach the analog front-end circuit and back-end dig- [7] Zhong Wei. Characteristics of Digital Broadcasting ital processing circuitry integrated on the same chip. Technology and Its Application. [J] Electronic World, Using SOC design technology can greatly improve 2014, 08: 99.

Exploration on the metadata model of the SOA-based adaptive learning support system

Tao Liu School of Informatics and Electronics, Zhejiang Sci-tech University, Hangzhou, Zhejiang, China

ABSTRACT: There are differences between the different individuals of learning. Adaptive learning support system is a learning system, which provides the learning supports suitable for the characteristics of the individuals according to the differences in the learning of individuals. In this paper, through the analysis on the adaptive learning support system, a system framework based on SOA is proposed and the research methods of the metadata model are emphatically discussed. KEYWORDS: Adaptive Learning Support System; Metadata; SOA

1 INTRODUCTION there have been a great number of network course constructions and applications in the network edu- There are all kinds of differences in the ability, back- cation schools of colleges and universities. In these ground, learning style, and learning objectives of network courses, abundant learning materials, stand- learning individuals; in terms of the actual conditions ardized practices and test, and timely feedback are of an individual, the knowledge of an individual is provided, and the special design discussions and always in a constant changing state in the learning question answering tools are also available. However, process. The focus of the adaptive learning is on the all these teaching modes are centered at the “teach- different learning of individuals, and it is a learning ing”, and do not give a consideration to the original process in which learning environment, learning con- knowledge, cognitive styles and preferences of the tents, and learning activities are promoted to meet the earners. The ALSS based on Web sourced from the highly personalized characteristics of everyone [1]. intelligent tutoring system (ITS) and the adaptive This learning way, which lays an emphasis on indi- hypermedia system (AHS). viduation, not only can help save the time of learners, The pre-learning diagnostic test of ALSS and and also can achieve a better learning effect. the information of updating the learner model in the learning process are aimed at knowing well the information such as experience foundation, cognitive 2 ADAPTIVE LEARNING SUPPORT SYSTEM structure, cognitive style, and hobbies of the learners in real time, and then the most suitable learning con- Adaptive learning support system (ALSS) refers tents, learning strategies, learning support, and the to a learning system, which provides the learning best knowledge foundation of the learners to learn supports suitable for the characteristics of the indi- new things can be provided in the current state [3] [4]. viduals according to the differences in the learning of individuals according to the differences (e.g. different conditions) of individuals in the learning 3 METADATA process [2]. Along with the rapid development and comprehen- Metadata refers to the descriptive information about sive application of the computer, network communi- objects, and it includes the organizational relation- cation and digital media technologies, the modern ship among some specific attributes, correspond- education technology that is characterized by coming attribute values, and attributes [5]. Along with puter technologies has been permeated in all areas the rapid development of information technologies, of the modern education, and simultaneously has metadata has gradually become a special field of received extensive attention from the world [3]. research, and the related research issues include the As an important part of teaching reform, network standardization of metadata, the organizational forms course construction project has been started by the of metadata, the storage of metadata, the search of Ministry of Education in recent years. Therefore, metadata, etc.

9781138028135_Chp_007.indd 21 31/03/15 8:15 PM SOA 4 CURRENT RESEARCH SITUATION OF With the development of the Internet [6], soft- ADAPTIVE LEARNING SUPPORT SYSTEM ware computing environment has undergone great changes. From the early host-machine age to the The ultimate goal of the ALSS-related metadata 1980s, client/server computing environment was researches lies in realizing the “standardization” of constructed by relying on computer equipment and the metadata formats in the ALSS-related researches the mutual connection of LAN. Then, the computing so that this standard can be generally followed in the environment was represented by the “middleware” area, and also the metadata is necessary to be sim- technologies such as distributed object, components ple, flexible, and easy-to-operate, etc. Therefore, and interfaces. Today, a new computing environment the ALSS-related metadata researches will cer- oriented at service emerges. And this computing tainly promote the development of ALSS theory and environment generally supports the open and stan- application. dard network protocols, and implements the rep- Extremely high importance has been attached resentation and interaction of data through XML, by the Ministry of Education to the construction Web Services technology, and other standards. of network education technology standardiza- Service oriented architecture (SOA) is a term that tion. Therefore, Chinese e-Learning Technology is very popular in software development theory, and Standardization Committee (CELTSC) was estab- it developed on the basis of Web Services, so it is lished in 2000. CELTSC is responsible for making of fundamental significance for the improvement of Chinese e-learning technology standards (CELTS); the resource sharing and the generation of service at present, there have been 36 approved draft items, system [8]. and 3 of them have been completed and released by Service-oriented computing environment has the state, and CELTS-27 related to adaptive learning provided great convenience for the interoperabil- remains to be researched [10]. The theory research of ity of subject network courses. In this environment, the adaptive learning metadata model in this paper the heterogeneous fundamental technologies can can be used as an early preparation for making stand- be used for the network courses of all subjects, and ard CELTS-27 in the future, and also can play a ver- XML is used in all subject websites for describing ification role in the future implementation effect of and expressing their own data and function and all the ALSS. users can make a connection through the use of an The practical platforms such as BlackBoard and open network protocol such as HTTP. On this basis, 4a, which are very popular at present, are learning data can be mutually operated and exchanged through management systems (LMS) and do not possess the Web Services; once a website for a group of subjects functions of adaptive learning. is constructed in this service oriented computing At present, the development and research of environment, this environment becomes a service adaptive learning system are in a research upsurge ecological system that is targeted at the sharing of in the foreign countries. The subject, which was resources, so a subject site can be instantly and inde- funded by National Institute Standards Techno1ogy pendently deployed and quickly becomes a member Advanced Techno1ogy Program in 1998, was the of the ecological system once it is developed in this “adaptive learning system”; more than ten related environment. researches were supported by it in total and the invested research fund reached millions of U.S. dollars, and certain achievements had been made to the researches of adaptive test and cognitive model construction. In China, there is an upsurge of researching the web-based teaching system; the adaptive learning theories have been introduced from the foreign countries, and also some web-based learning systems have been available. However, all these systems are only attempts in China, and the researches on the adaptive learning system applicable to the needs of individual learners remain to be blank basically. Meanwhile, in metadata model design and related education technology standards, the adaptive learning system focused program in the National Institute Figure 1. The standard protocol stack of SOA computing Standards Techno1ogy Advanced Techno1ogy environment. Program is still being researched currently.

9781138028135_Chp_007.indd 22 31/03/15 8:15 PM the researches of adaptive test and cognitive model The adaptive learning low is as shown in figure 2. construction. The main research contents can be concluded as In China, there is an upsurge of researching the follows: web-based teaching system; the adaptive learning (1) Research and determine all elements of the theories have been introduced from the foreign student model as well as their influences on the countries, and also some web-based learning systems selection of learning strategies and the ways of have been available. However, all these systems are learning only attempts in China, and the researches on the (2) Research related service model, and use the adaptive learning system applicable to the needs of guidance of teachers as an aid for adjusting learning individual learners remain to be blank basically. content and learning ways in a real time Meanwhile, in metadata model design and related (3) Research the extraction of the metadata of all education technology standards, the adaptive theoretical models in adaptive learning learning system focused program in the National (4) Research the application of the SOA Institute Standards Techno1ogy Advanced framework to all metadata models in ALSS Techno1ogy Program is still being researched (5) Construct a network instruction ALSS service currently. prototype supporting the adaptive learning based on Main research contents of the SOA-based multiple related courses of college computer adaptive learning support system foundation, and then verify the validity and feasibility of this model using this prototype. Learning style test

Learning goal; existingknowledge structure

Determination of adaptive diagnostic learning starting point

Adaptability presentation Selection of autonomous of teaching contents learning strategy

Feedback request and adaptive response knowledge learning

Adaptive cooperation and communication

Related resources consulting

Attainment test

End learning

Knowledge is successfully acquired Figure 2. . Figure 2. AdaptiAdaptiveve learning flow.

Main research contents of the SOA-based 2 Research related serservicevice model, and use the adaptiadaptiveve learning support system guidance of teachers as an aid for adjusting The adaptive learning low is as shown in figure 2. learninglearning contentcontent andand learninglearning waysways inin aa realreal The main research contents can be concluded as follows: timetime 3 Research the eextractionxtraction of the metadata of all the-- 1 Research and determine all elements of the student oretical models in adaptive learning model as well as their influences on the selection 4 Research the application of the SOSOAA framework to of learning strategies and the ways of learning all metadata models in ALSS

2123

9781138028135_Chp_007.indd 2123 27/03/1531/03/15 1:598:15 PM The learning diagnosis is a crucial link, because it In terms of the adaptability principle, the making is an important basis for the adaptive learning of metadata is required to follow the actual needs of system to know well the learning ability and the users, and also the appropriate metadata cognitive ability of the learners. In figure 2, the standards are necessarily chosen as the templates so learning diagnosis includes two parts: (1) the as to screen out the appropriate metadata determination of adaptive diagnostic learning information. starting point; (2) attainment test. The mainly (2) Pertinence involved theoretical models can be seen in figure 3. In terms of the pertinence principle, metadata According to student model, the learning point is information is required to be targeted at the specific determined through adaptive diagnosis. Attainment needs of a particular user, and blindly pursuing the test includes the index tests such as learning extended breadth of metadata information is efficiency, test results, and learning satisfaction. unnecessary, and the goal can be achieved as long as Combined with the knowledge information in the the needs can be fulfilled. models, the knowledge nodes have been made by (3) Scientific teachers in advance. The adaptive engine can display In terms of the scientific principles, information and hide the links between related knowledge nodes should be processed through encoding, and the according to the attainment test results. Its difficulty existing standards and protocols of data exchange lies in the metadata extraction of all theoretical should be strictly followed. The elements in a record models in the ALSS. Attention is necessarily paid to should be consistent with the descriptive languages the following principles in the establishment of the and grammar structures of their attributes. Metadata metadata information. should be made according to the metadata standards (1) Adaptability of the corresponding areas.

existing standards and protocols of data exchange Adaptive Model should be strictly followed. The elements in a record should be consistent with the descriptive languages and grammar structures of their attributes. Metadata should be made according to the metadata standards of the corresponding areas. Adaptive presentation Adaptive Engine In the series of Chinese e-learning education technology standards (CELTS), CELTS-27 related to the adaptive learning standards is still being researched. By referring to the guiding ideology made in CELTS Field knowledge User model and the learning technology system reference model base (IEEE standard 1484.1) proposed by IEEE LTSC, the Figure 3.The relationship among the main data models. extraction of metadata is completed. In the seriesFigure of Chinese 3. The e-learning relationship education amongmechanism the main fordata the models.automatic selection of learning technology standards (CELTS), CELTS-27 related to strategy, learning way, and learning contents is the adaptive learning standards is still being provided. researched. By 5 referring Construct to the guidinga network ideology instruction ALSS service 5 CCONCLUSIONONCLUSION made in CELTS andprototype the learning technologysupporting system the adaptive learning based reference model (IEEE standard 1484.1) proposed by REFERENCES IEEE LTSC, the onextraction multiple of relatedmetadata courses is of college computer In the SOA-based adaptive learning support system, completed. foundation, and then verify[1] theShengquan validity Yu. and Adaptive feas Learning- —anthe ALSS Developme servicent model with practical signiﬁcancesignificance Trend of Distance Education [J]. Open Education Research, ibility of this model using this2000, prototype. (03), pp.12-15. is established in combination with metadata theory, [2] Peter Brusilovsky. Adaptive Hypermedia [J] User Modeling 5 CONCLUSION a SOA-based general framework for the support The learning diagnosis is a crucialand User link,-Adapted because Interaction it ,is2001 , 11:87~110. [3] Shiya Zhang. The vitality of Educationservices—Discussion onand the deployment is constructed, and also In the SOA-basedanadaptive important learning basis support for systemthe adaptive, Rising learning of the Educational system Technology to [M]. Chengdu: Si- the mechanism for the automatic selection of learn- an ALSS serviceknow model withwell practical the learning significance ability is andchuan cognitive Education Press, ability 1998. of the mechanism for the automatic selection of learn- established in combination with metadata theory, a [4] ShiPin Chen, JianPing Zhang. Researcingh Focuses strategy, and De- learning way, and learning contents is SOA-based generalthe learners. framework In forfigure the 2,support the learningvelopment diagnosis Trendof includes the Intelligent Teaching System [J]. Network Instruction, 2007, 10: 41~50. provided. services and deploymenttwo parts: is constructed, (1) the determination and also the of adaptive diagnostic learning starting point; (2) attainment test. The mainly involved theoretical models can be seen in figure 3. REFEREREFERENCESNCES According to student model, the learning point is determined through adaptive diagnosis. Attainment [1] Shengquan Yu. Adaptive Learning—the Development test includes the index tests such as learning efficiency, Trend of Distance Education [J]. Open Education test results, and learning satisfaction. Combined with Research, 2000, (03), pp.12–15. the knowledge information in the models, the knowl- [2] PPetereter Brusilovsky. Adaptive Hypermedia [J] UUserser edge nodes have been made by teachers in advance. Modeling and UUser-Adaptedser-Adapted Interaction, 2001, The adaptive engine can display and hide the links 11:87–110. between related knowledge nodes according to the [3] Shiya Zhang. The vitality of Education—Discussion attainment test results. Its difficulty lies in the meta- on the Rising of the Educational Technology [M]. Chengdu: Sichuan Education Press, 1998. data extraction of all theoretical models in the ALSS. Chengdu: Sichuan Education Press, 1998. [4] ShiShiPinPin Chen, JianJianPingPing Zhang. Research Focuses and Attention is necessarily paid to the following principles Development Trendof the Intelligent Teaching System in the establishment of the metadata information. [J]. NNetworketwork Instruction, 2007, 10: 41–50. (1) Adaptability [5] Xin Xiang. Learning Resources Metadata Storage and Search [D]. Tsinghua University, 2004, pp.125. In terms of the adaptability principle, the making Search [D]. Tsinghua University, 2004, pp.125. [6] Modern Distance Education Resources Construction of metadata is required to follow the actual needs of Technical Specifications ((Pilot)Pilot) [S]. Beijing: The the users, and also the appropriate metadata standards Modern Distance Education Resources Construction are necessarily chosen as the templates so as to screen Committee of the Ministry of Education, 2002: 5, out the appropriate metadata information. pp.37. [7] ZiYao Wang, junjie nan, ZiHui Duan, HaiChun Qian. (2) PPertinenceertinence SOA Core Technologies and Application [M]. Beijing: In terms of the pertinence principle, metadata infor- Electronics Industry PPublishingublishing House, 2008: 3–4. mation is required to be targeted at the specific needs [8] Qingming Wang. Research of the ERERPP System of a particular user, and blindly pursuing the extended Structure based on SOA [J]. Computer Application, breadth of metadata information is unnecessary, and 2007, 27 (2): 413–414. the goal can be achieved as long as the needs can be [9] Janet Macdonald. Developing Competent E-learners: fulfilled. The Role of Assessment[J]. Assessment and Evaluation in Higher Education, Apr 2004.2004.VolVol .29, Iss.2., PPPP.215..215. (3) Scientific [10] http://www.celtsc.edu.cn. In terms of the scientific principles, information should be processed through encoding, and the

2224

The building of evaluation system of students’ research training

Hui Luan Faculty of Science, Nanchang Institute of Technology, Nanchang, China Zhihong Xia Business Administration College, Nanchang Institute of Technology, Nanchang, China

ABSTRACT: In order to foster an innovative spirit and the ability of high-quality talent, much student research training program in domestic universities will incorporate an innovative talent training plan. However, the evaluation mechanism in existing research training program is still not perfect for college students, this article has been carrying out a more in-depth discussion and proposes research training program evaluation system for university students. KEYWORDS: College Student; Science Research Training; Evaluation System

One of the core tasks of universities is to cultivate and and light process. To solve the above problem, this foster a sense of innovation, creativity and innovation paper takes Nanchang Institute of Science Research capability of high-quality talent. Domestic and inter- Training program for example; it combines questionquestion-- national experience proves, college students’ research naires, interviews with experts, research tools and training program for innovation and creative thinking statistical analysis, hierarchical analysis. With qualqual-- has an important role to promote cultivation of stustu-- itative and quantitative point of view, it is trying to dents’ innovative thinking and creative potential of build a more perfect college student research training the play to expand the fieldﬁeld ofof knowledge,knowledge, improveimprove program evaluation system. professional skills and improve the overall quality. Students’ research and research training are aimed at improving the quality and originality of students, 1 ESTABLISH ANAN EVALUATIONEVALUATION SYSTEM the level of project research results is important, but it is scientificscientiﬁc literacyliteracy trainingtraining processprocess toto maturemature This paper uses the thought of AHP, according to the and progressive development of a sustainable pro pro-- properties of the complex issues at differentdierent decom-decom- cess of curing. However, in practice, we found that position into differentdierent groups,groups, inin orderorder toto determinedetermine the training process and the evaluation of the results the overall structure of Student Research Training are often neglected. First, the results have a heavy Evaluation System, shown in Figure 1:

Document retrieval capabilities Data processing capability Scientific literacy Report writing skills Ability to analyze problems Skills Site Assessment Resilience Science Research Reporting results Training Evaluation Collaboration System Teamwork Management capabilities Teamwork Patent case Papers published case Outcome Feasibility of Industrialization Quality Report

Figure 1. Students research training evaluation system.Figure 1 Students research training evaluation system

skills, adaptability and reporting results; right teamwork weighting factors are: assistance, 2. IDENTIFIED WEIGHTS AND FACTORS management ability and team spirit; the right to re- 2523 factor of the project outcomes: patent cases, To determine the weight of each evaluation factor, involved in the project the number of awards. we should first design a questionnaire issued to the The weight given to each factor weights for two- experts, professors and participated in Student stage evaluation right as follows: Research Training students questionnaires 400 (1) The right to the first stage of the four weight copies, eventually recover 326 valid questionnaires, factors was W1, W2, W3, W4. the following calculation process data sources are (2) The right to the second level factor redoes the based on this; then applying AHP on the data following assumptions: analysis, the final results at all levels of factor Right-site assessment of the four factors of 9781138028135_Chp_008.indd 2523 weights. weight values: W11, W12, W13 W14; 16/04/1527/03/15 5:413:14 PM Three factors research capability right weight is 2.1 Weight Calculation Model W21, W22, W23; First, as shown in Figure 1, the model is set to two Three factors right weight value of teamwork: levels. The first level is the overall rating, its W31, W32, W33; weighting factor are scientific literacy, on-site Four important factors are the right project assessment, teamwork and project results. The outcomes: W41, W42, W43, W44. second level is the individual evaluation, Secondly, the judgment matrix using 1-9 scale, respectively, an individual evaluation indicator. assuming that the entire evaluation system for A, an Where the right scientific literacy weight factor: indicator for Bi, two indicators for Ci. Respectively literature search capabilities, data processing between the importance of each of these indicators capabilities, report writing and analytical skills; right were compared, as shown in Table 1. spot reply weighting factors are communication

Table 1 to determine the number of matrix scale Importance Definition Explanation Both are equally 1 Two parallel indicators are as important important Somewhat The former two parallel indicators slightly 3 important more important than the latter 2 IDENTIFIED WEIGHTS AND FACTORS Table 1. To determine the number of matrix scale. Importance Definition Explanation To determine the weight of each evaluation fac- Both are equally Two parallel indicators 1 tor, we should first design a questionnaire issued to important are as important the experts, professors and participated in Student The former two parallel Research Training students questionnaires 400 copies, Somewhat 3 indicators slightly more important eventually recover 326 valid questionnaires, the fol- important than the latter lowing calculation process data sources are based on Obviously The former is more 5 this; then applying AHP on the data analysis, the final important important than the latter results at all levels of factor weights. Highly The former is more 7 important important than the latter 2.1 Extremely The former is more Weight calculation model 9 important important than the latter First, as shown in Figure 1, the model is set to two levels. The first level is the overall rating, its weight- As “the degree of importance between 2,4,6,8 Between two ing factor are scientific literacy, on-site assessment, equally important and a teamwork and project results. The second level is little, then take 2” the individual evaluation, respectively, an individual evaluation indicator. Where the right scientific liter-

acy weight factor: literature search capabilities, data When Mi-Mj> 1.75, compared factor ij extremely processing capabilities, report writing and analytical important factor, taking 9; skills; right spot reply weighting factors are communi- If the mean is between the two, then take 2,4,6,8. cation skills, adaptability and reporting results; right Finally, according to the survey data obtained in teamwork weighting factors are: assistance, manage- the calculation, to the importance of each indicator ment ability and team spirit; the right to re-factor of level set a score: the most important score of 5, the the project outcomes: patent cases, involved in the following order of 4,3,2,1. So that it can calculate, the project the number of awards. mean levels of indicators, and compared to determine The weight given to each factor weights for two- the appropriate matrix structure. Then the judgment stage evaluation right as follows: matrix normalization deal with the corresponding (1) The right to the first stage of the four weight weights. For example set for judgment matrix

factors was W1, W2, W3, W4. elements aij (1≤aij≤9), obtained judgment matrix (2) The right to the second level factor redoes the level indicators are shown in Table 2. following assumptions: Right-site assessment of the four factors of weight values: W11, W12, W13 W14; Table 2. A marker of matrix. Three factors research capability right weight is A B1 B2 B3 B4 W21, W22, W23;

Three factors right weight value of teamwork: B1 a11 a12 a13 a14 W31, W32, W33; Four important factors are the right project out- B2 a21 a22 a23 a24 comes: W41, W42, W43, W44. B a a a a Secondly, the judgment matrix using 1-9 scale, 3 31 32 33 34 assuming that the entire evaluation system for A, an B a a a a indicator for Bi, two indicators for Ci. Respectively 4 41 42 43 44 between the importance of each of these indicators were compared, as shown in Table 1. Bi-level indicators weighting factor is calculated The degree of importance of each factor, according to the difference between the mean of each identified ∑ bij i = 1 and accordingly determine the scale, come judg- b . aij ment matrix. Let M be mean, this article provides as as W = i (Among them = , = j = 1 , i bij s follows: s a. j 0.25

1.25

9781138028135_Chp_008.indd 26 16/04/15 5:41 PM 2.2 A judgment matrix and the corresponding To construct the second indices judgment matrix of index weights each factor, the sub-index factor levels pairwise comparison. The resulting judgment matrix as follows: According to the results of the survey data obtained descriptive statistics of level indicators, the SPSS 1 The C11, C12, C13, C14 scientific literacy con- analysis shows that scientific literacy mean of 3.36, struct pairwise comparison judgment matrix and on-site assessment of 3.31, 3.67 teamwork, project weight corresponding sub-factor weights are results for 3.24. Mean alone, the gap between the fac- shown in Table 5, Table 6. tors is not clear; you cannot give a more reasonable weight for the training college students on research Table 5. Comparison matrix scientific literacy. evaluation. In this paper, it uses AHP for this purpose A B B B B by the mean pairwise comparisons among the indexes 1 2 3 4 to construct the appropriate judgment matrix. B1 1 2 1/3 2 Through the B1, B2, B3, and the right level of judgment matrix indicators B4 pairwise comparison B2 1/2 1 1/3 2 of weight are shown in Table 3 and Table 4 below: B3 3 3 1 3

Table 3. A marker of matrix. B4 1/2 1/2 1/3 1

A B1 B2 B3 B4 Table 6. Scientific literacy weights of each factor.

B1 1 2 1/3 2 B1 C11 C12 C13 C14

B2 1/2 1 1/3 2 C11 1 1/2 2 1/3

B3 3 3 1 3 C12 2 1 2 1/3

B4 1/2 1/2 1/3 1 C13 1/2 1/2 1 1/3

C14 3 3 3 1 Table 4. Level indicator weight.

A B B B B 1 2 3 4 2 The C21, C22, C23 construction site assessment B 1 2 1/3 2 pair wise comparison judgment matrix and the 1 corresponding weights are shown in Table 7,

B2 1/2 1 1/3 2 Table 8 below.

B3 3 3 1 3 Table 7. On-site assessment to determine matrix.

B1 C11 C12 C13 C14 B4 1/2 1/2 1/3 1

C11 1 1/2 2 1/3 C 2 1 2 1/3 2.3 The second indicators judgment matrix and 12 corresponding weights C13 1/2 1/2 1 1/3 Through the survey conducted by SPSS for descrip- C 3 3 3 1 tive statistics, we can clearly come to mean scientific 14 literacy in each sub-factor of 3.34 literature search capabilities, data processing capacity of 3.50, report Table 8. On-site assessment of each factor weights. writing capabilities for 3.33, 3.74, analytical abil-

ity. Site the average respondent in each sub-factor B1 C11 C12 C13 C14 expression was 3.77, 3.73 resilience, reporting results was 3.50; mean teamwork collaboration capa- C11 1 1/2 2 1/3 bilities in each sub-factor of 3.79, 3.63 management, C 2 1 2 1/3 teamwork 3.94; each sub-project results factor in 12 patent cases mean 3.39, published papers mean 3.40, C13 1/2 1/2 1 1/3 3.54 industrialization feasibility study report on the quality of 3.56. C14 3 3 3 1

9781138028135_Chp_008.indd 27 16/04/15 5:41 PM 3 The C31, C32, C33 pairwise comparison matrix 2.4 Conformance test structure teamwork off and the corresponding Because the judgment matrix constructed with a weights are shown in Tables 9 and 10. certain degree of subjectivity, in order to ensure the Table 9. Teamwork judgment matrix. reliability of this article judgment matrix judgment matrix consistency test, that is, through consistency B1 C11 C12 C13 C14 ratio CR indicators to be judged. Consistency ratio index is calculated as follows C 1 1/2 2 1/3 11 party

C12 2 1 2 1/3 n aw C13 1/2 1/2 1 1/3 n ∑ ij j n 1 1 CR = CI / RI CI =−λ λ = j = C 3 3 3 1 , max , max ∑ 14 n −1 n i=1 wi

Table 10. Teamwork weight of each factor. RI is the average random consistency index can be B1 C11 C12 C13 C14 obtained as shown in Table 13 look-up table for the maximum judgment matrix eight values. Generally, C11 1 1/2 2 1/3 when <0.1 can be considered consistent matrix can be accepted or not accepted. C12 2 1 2 1/3

C13 1/2 1/2 1 1/3 Table 13. Mean Random Consistency Index.

C14 3 3 3 1 Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RI 0 0 0.58 0.90 1.12 1.24 1.32 1.41 1.45

4 The C41, C42, C43, C44 pairwise comparison judgment of the matrix structure of project results Through the above analysis, we can see from and the corresponding weights are shown in Table 14, the judgment matrix has a relatively high Table 11 and Table 12 below. consistency (<0.1), the right of the resulting weight is credible. Table 11. Comparison matrix project results.

B C C C C 1 11 12 13 14 3 THE BUILDING OF EVALUATION SYSTEM OF STUDENTS’ RESEARCH C11 1 1/2 2 1/3 TRAINING

C12 2 1 2 1/3 Thus, we can get, as shown in Table 15 final research C13 1/2 1/2 1 1/3 training program evaluation system for university students. C14 3 3 3 1

4 CONCLUSIONS Table 12. Outcome weight of each factor. Establishment and improvement of the research train- B1 C11 C12 C13 C14 ing program of the student evaluation system are a

C11 1 1/2 2 1/3 long-term exploration and practice. This study is to try an idea and methodology. In the study, how to C12 2 1 2 1/3 select college students can better reflect the evaluation research-training program and how to objectively C 1/2 1/2 1 1/3 13 and accurately reflect the degree of importance of the evaluation, are the future research needs to continue C 3 3 3 1 14 to explore and solve problems.

9781138028135_Chp_008.indd 28 16/04/15 5:41 PM Table 14. Each conformance test indicators.

Weights λmax CI RI CR

WA = {}0.23,0.16,0.47,0.14 4.1213 0.0404 0.90 0.0449

WB = {}0.17,0.23,0.12,0.48 1 4.1213 0.0404 0.90 0.0449

W = {}0.54,0.30,0.16 B2 3.0092 0.0046 0.58 0.0079 W = {}0.30,0.16,0.54 B3 3.0092 0.0046 0.58 0.0079

0.14,0.20,0.27,0.39 WB4 = {} 4.1213 0.0404 0.90 0.0449

Table 15. Research training of the evaluation indicators and their weights. An index Weights An index Weights Document retrieval capabilities 0.17 Data processing capability 0.23 Scientific literacy 0.23 Report writing skills 0.12 Ability to analyze problems 0.48 Skills 0.54 Site Assessment 0.16 Resilience 0.30 Reporting results 0.16 Collaboration 0.30 Teamwork 0.47 Management capabilities 0.16 Teamwork 0.54 Patent case 0.14 Papers published case 0.20 Outcome 0.14 Feasibility of Industrialization 0.27 Quality Report 0.39

REFERENCES [2] Wang Zhijin, Li Mingzhen. Site construction methods and process evaluation system [J]. Library and [1] Zhang Yucheng, Zhao Lun, Wangying. Undergraduate Information. 2006 [6], pp. 51–58. research training project monitoring and evaluation [3] Sun Dongfang. Teaching management in universities mechanism of self-reliance [J]. Modern commerce to implement innovative education Reflections [J]. industry. 2009 [6], pp. 244–245. Huizhou University. 2005 [8], pp.65–67.

Research on clustering analysis and its application in customer data mining of enterprise

Wei Zhao Public Resources Management Research Center, Tianjin University, Tianjin, China Xiangying Li Shandong Youth University of Political Science, College of Information Engineering, Jinan, China Liping Fu College of Management and Economics, Tianjin University, Tianjin, China

ABSTRACT: The paper study improved K-means algorithm and establish indicators to classify customers according to RFM model. Experimental results show that, the new algorithm has good convergence and stability, it has better than single use of FKP algorithms for clustering. Finally, the paper studies the application of clustering in customer segmentation of mobile communication enterprise. It discusses the basic theory, customer segmentation methods and steps, the customer segmentation model based on consumption behavior psychology, and the segmentation model is successfully applied to the process of marketing decision support. KEYWORDS: K-means clustering optimization; Customer segmentation; RFM model; Decision support

1 INTRODUCTION 2 RESEARCH SITUATION OF DATA MINING AT HOME AND ABROAD With the rapid development of the technology of data collection and storage, the organizations of the world The data mining process is to obtain the effective, can store vast amounts of data. Because of the huge novel, potentially useful, and ultimately understanda- amount of data, It makes the traditional manual anal- ble patterns from large amounts of data stored in the ysis techniques encountered development bottleneck, database. Data mining involves many fields of artifi- how to efficiently from the massive data finding mean- cial intelligence, databases, statistics, machine learn- ingful information has become the main research ing theory and technology, it is to extract knowledge direction of data mining and driving an important from large amounts of data, can be re analyzed the factor in its rapid development. As a new subject, the data, in order to obtain a more in-depth understand- cluster analysis technology with its unique position ing, and through the historical data to predict the in the process of mining data in real life applica- future. Knowledge of data mining using a certain tions, make it become one of the most active research algorithm to dig out from the practical data of the direction. Judging from the current situation, almost unknown, valuable patterns or rules. The process con- all clustering algorithms are designed for a specific sists of data preparation, data mining, and pattern data object, no algorithm can do “be applicable every- evaluation, consolidate the knowledge and use of where”, each clustering algorithm has advantages and knowledge and other steps. By the graphic details the limitations. process of data mining, as shown in figure 1. After briefly introducing the relevant knowledge of data mining, emphatically introduces the clustering to the distance to the nearest cluster center clusters; analysis of the data mining method, and the cluster- cluster center again by the average distance of ing analysis classified as foundation, introduces each computational elements in each cluster the new kind of cluster analysis of typical clustering algo- cluster, then calculate the other elements to the new clustering center distance, so repeatedly, until rithms, and gives the advantages and disadvantages Figure 1. The process of data mining the clustering center does not change, clustering of various typical algorithms. Figure 1. The process of data mining. At present, data mining has been widely used in criterion of convergence. the CRM, it can solve the problem: database marketing, customer groups, cross selling, 2.1Method of defining distance customer churn analysis etc.. The functions of data According to the general steps of clustering, the mining in the application of the CRM are mainly definition between samples and between class 31 manifested in the following aspects: distances is the key. According to the different To help the company to acquire new customers. distance definition, system clustering can be The traditional marketing methods such as leaflets, divided into a variety of methods, but it has same advertising and other more expensive, is not basic steps of the execution. satisfied. The introduction of data mining The distance between the sample and similarity. technology implementation according to different user groups, consumer habits, tendencies and the Setting the clustering of the data is G, 9781138028135_Chp_010.indd 31 need to implement promotion, reduce marketing 31/03/15 8:28 PM x costs, improve the marketing effect. X, G  xxii  Ri, 1,2,3... n  x ci ci To help the enterprise to cross sell. Cross selling refers to the process of enterprises will be The K clustering center is Z1, Z2... Zk, and Yj the new services or products to existing customers (j=1,2... K) express K cluster categories. Two data for sale. In view of existing customers, enterprises objects Euclidean distance as follows: can use data mining to the existing customer t information, customer analysis of their features, dij(,)()() xxijij xx (1) predicting the future market. To help the enterprise to retain old customers. The1 arithmetic mean of each data object Ax Recognized in the industry is, the cost of obtaining i  xw is the number of samples of the n j a new customer is 6.8 times to keep an old data), the criterion function can be expressed as customer cost. Therefore, the company needs to follows: kn maximize the retention of the old customers, it L dx(,) z (2) needs to study their behavior characteristics, to ij11  jj provide targeted services to improve this part of The distance between the categories. A class customer loyalty. collection of observation data records, between the Process data in the CRM system of mining can two classes of distance is generally used in some be as shown in figure 2. special points in the definition of the distance between. There are two types of Ga and Gb, the distance between them is denoted as D (a, b), commonly used class distance. The class mean method: 1 D(,) a b  dij NaNb x Ga x Gb 2.2 Determine the number of clustering Figure 2. The process of data mining in customer service system of enterprise System cluster finally puts all the observations to cluster into one group, and how to determine the proper number of clusters is a difficult problem, 2 K-MEANS CLUSTER ANALYSIS because the classification itself is not a certain standard. K-means clustering algorithm is a clustering 1).R2 statistics. Note: R2=1-pg/T, Pg denotes algorithm based on partition. First, assume that the difference in the square and for all variables data needs to be set into the K class in a dataset, when the clustering number is total G, T is the total arbitrary selection of K data elements as the sum of squares of deviations. R2 is the total within clustering centers, in according to the distance the cluster sum of squared differences is relatively function to measure the distance to the center of smaller, divided into G classes are suitable. But each data element, data elements will be assigned obviously the more the number of clustering, each

to the distance to the nearest cluster center clusters; cluster center again by the average distance of computational elements in each cluster the new cluster, then calculate the other elements to the new clustering center distance, so repeatedly, until Figure 1. The process of data mining the clustering center does not change, clustering AtAt present,present, data mining hashas beenbeen widelywidely used used in in 3.1criterion Method of ofconvergence. defining distance thethe CRM,CRM, it canit can solve solve the problem:the problem: database database market - AccordingMethod to theof defin generaling distancesteps of clustering, the defi- ing,marketing, customer customergroups, cross groups, selling, crosscustomer selling, churn 2.1 nition between samples and between class distances analysiscustomer etc. churn The analysis functions etc.. ofThe data functions mining of in data the According to the general steps of clustering, the is the key. According to the different distance defini- applicationmining in theof theapplication CRM are of mainly the CRM manifested are mainly in the definition between samples and between class tion, system clustering can be divided into a variety of followingmanifested aspects: in the following aspects: distances is the key. According to the different methods, but it has same basic steps of the execution. ToTo helphelp the company toto acquireacquire newnew custo customers.mers. distance definition, system clustering can be The distance between the sample and similarity. TheThe traditional marketing methodsmethods suchsuch asas leaflets, leaflets, divided into a variety of methods, but it has same Setting the clustering of the data is G, advertisingadvertising andand other other more more expensive, expensive, is notis satisnot - basic steps of the execution. satisfied. The introduction of data mining fied. The introduction of data mining technology The distance between the sample and similarity. technology implementation according to different x implementation according to different user groups, X Set==ting the,, GxclusteringxR ∈=of inthe1, 2, 3...data is G, user groups, consumer habits, tendencies and the ∑ ∈ { ii } consumer habits, tendencies and the need to imple- xci ci need to implement promotion, reduce marketing ment promotion, reduce marketing costs, improve the x costs, improve the marketing effect. X, G  xxii  Ri, 1,2,3... n marketing effect. The K xclustering ci ci center is Z1, Z2... Zk, and Yj To help the enterprise to cross sell. Cross ( j=1,2... K) express K cluster categories. Two data sellingTo help refers the toenterprise the process to cross of enterprises sell. Cross will selling be refers to the process of enterprises will be the new objectsThe Euclidean K clustering distance center as follows:is Z1, Z2... Zk, and Yj the new services or products to existing customers (j=1,2... K) express K cluster categories. Two data servicesfor sale. or In products view of toexisting existing custome customersrs, enterprises for sale. In view of existing customers, enterprises can use data objects Euclideant distance as follows: can use data mining to the existing customer di(,jx)(=−ijxx)( ij− x ) (1) mining to the existing customer information, cus- t information, customer analysis of their features, dij(,)()() xxijij xx (1) tomerpredicting analysis the futureof their market. features, predicting the future market. TheThe arithmetic arithmetic meanmean ofof eacheach datadata objectobject To help the enterprise to retain old customers. 1 1 To help the enterprise to retain old customers. Axi  is the number of samples of the Recognized in the industry is, the cost of obtaining A =  xwx jis the number of samples of the data), i ∑n ∈ Recognizeda new customer in the industryis 6.8 timesis, the tocost keep of obtainingan old data)n , thexw j criterion function can be expressed as acustomer new customer cost. isTherefore, 6.8 times theto keepcompany an old needs customer to thefollows: criterion function can be expressed as follows: cost. Therefore, the company needs to maximize the kn maximize the retention of the old customers, it L dx z k n ij  (,)jj (2) retentionneeds to ofstudy the old their customers, behavior it needscharacteristics, to study their to Ld= (,xz) 11 (2) ∑∑i==11j jj behaviorprovide targetedcharacteristics, services to toprovide improve targeted this partservices of The distance between the categories. A class to improve this part of customer loyalty. customer loyalty. collectionThe distance of observationbetween the data categories. records, A between class col the- ProcessProcess data data in in the the CRM CRM system system of of mining mining can can be lectiontwo classesof observation of distance data isrecords, generally between used thein some two asbe shown as shown in figure in figure 2. 2. classesspecial of distancepoints in is thegenerally definition used inof somethe distancespecial pointsbetween. in the Theredefinition are oftwo the types distance of Ga between. and Gb, There the aredistance two types between of Ga themand Gb,is denotedthe distance as Dbetween (a, b), themcommonly is denoted used as class D (a, distance. b), commonly used class distance.The class mean method: 1 The classD mean(,) a b method: dij NaNb x Ga x Gb 1 Da(,b) = dij 2.2 DetermineNaNb ∑∑ thexG∈∈ numberaxGb of clustering FigureFigure 2.2. TheThe processprocess of of datadata miningmining in in customercustomer service service system of enterprise System cluster finally puts all the observations to system of enterprise. 3.2cluster Determine into one the group, number and of clusteringhow to determine the proper number of clusters is a difficult problem, Systembecause cluster the finallyclassification puts all theitself observations is not a tocertain clus- 32 KK-MEANS-MEANS CLUSTER CLUSTER ANALYS ANALYSISIS terstandard. into one group, and how to determine the proper number1). R2of clustersstatistics. is aNote: difficult R2=1 problem,-pg/T, Pg because denotes the K-meansK-means clusteringclustering algorithm algorithm is ais clusteringa clustering algo - algorithm based on partition. First, assume that classificationthe difference itself in isthe not square a certain and standard. for all variables rithm based on partition. First, assume that data needs when the clustering number is total G, T is the total todata be needsset into to the be K set class into in the a dataset, K class arbitrary in a dataset, selec - 1 R2 statistics. Note: R2=1-pg/T, Pg denotes the dif- arbitrary selection of K data elements as the sum of squares of deviations. R2 is the total within tion of K data elements as the clustering centers, in theference cluster in sumthe squareof squared and differencesfor all variables is relatively when accordingclustering tocenters, the distance in according function to to measure the distance the dis - the clustering number is total G, T is the total sum function to measure the distance to the center of smaller, divided into G classes are suitable. But tance to the center of each data element, data elements obviouslyof squares the of deviations.more the number R2 is the of totalclustering, within each the willeach be data assigned element, to thedata distance elements to thewill nearest be assigned cluster cluster sum of squared differences is relatively center clusters; cluster center again by the average smaller, divided into G classes are suitable. But distance of computational elements in each cluster obviously the more the number of clustering, each the new cluster, then calculate the other elements category is smaller, R2 is bigger also, so to con- to the new clustering center distance, so repeatedly, sider a number of conditions: G should make R2 until the clustering center does not change, clustering large enough, but G itself is relatively small, but criterion of convergence. R2 doesn’t increase greatly.

9781138028135_Chp_010.indd 32 31/03/15 8:28 PM 2 Semi partial correlation coefficient. In the class 1 n x = x of GK and GL merged into the next level of class n ∑1 i GM, defining a partial correlation coefficient: Among them : (5) 1 n R2=BK1/T, where BK1 is the incremental merge σ = ()xx− 2 ∑ =1 i sort caused the within class sum of squares, semi n −1 i partial correlation coefficient greater that the two kinds of more should not be merged. So if the x is the sample mean, σ is the standard deviation. merger by the n+1 class for the N class, semi par- Parameter n represent the n data elements set. tial correlation coefficient large should retain+ n 1 classification. 3 Pseudo F statistic. Pseudo F statistic denoted as: 4 THE SPECIFIC APPLICATION OF K-MEANS CLUSTERING ALGORITHM IN STOMER ()TP−−gG/( 1) F = (3) SEGMENTATION. Pg /(nG− ) The telecommunications industry is the foundation of Pseudo F statistic for evaluation is divided into G service industry. The consumption process of telecom class effect. If the G type is reasonable, the within products is the user that is consumer and service at class variance should be small, the square of the dif- the same time. For telecom industry, they focus on ference between class and relatively large, so cluster- the customer, is to pay attention to their own output. ing level and pseudo F statistic is larger and smaller Incremental market telecom market shrinking, the classification tree G. stock market is saturated, the extensive mode of operation, the transition need to fine marketing mode, to 3.3 The optimization of K-means algorithm customer demand as the center of the operation mode, the core is to subdivide the study of mass customers, The selection of metric function, Matteucci pointed out understand the customer consumption behavior char- that the metric function may get the clustering lower acteristics and differences to provide differentiated results. The WkDaniell for this problem presents an marketing. independent criterion, according to the different selection of data attributes. Different distance measure function, average the accuracy rate reached 90.9%, complete 4.1 Selection and design of customer the method can be applied to practice, so this method segmentation index is used in this thesis. Rule function specifically as fol- Single index designed in this paper are: data services lows: if q≤ 8.4595% at this time choose the Euclidean index, SMS proportion, local calls, long distance distance as the measure function, if q≥ 8.4595% time call index, index, IP index, index of long-distance Manhattan distance as the metric function. roaming calling index, virtual network index and Rule q function expressions are as follows: mobile communication circle index; comprehensive index are: price sensitivity index and bind viscosity 1 n ()xi − x 4 index. All the indicators are averaged statistical ∑i=1 q = n (4) period. As specified in Tables 1 and 2: σ 4

Table 1. Description of customer segmentation single index. Category Variable name Calculation and description

Data Data business index Data service fee / user cost service SMS ratio The number of text messages (SMS / number + telephone number) Local calls index Local call time / total call duration Long distance call index Long distance call time / total call duration Roaming index Roaming call time / total call duration IP long distance index IP long distance call time / total long-distance call duration Category Calling index Calling time / total call duration Virtual network index Virtual network call time / total call duration The proportion of mobile And mobile phone call time / total call duration communication circle

9781138028135_Chp_010.indd 33 31/03/15 8:28 PM Table 2. Description of comprehensive index statement. Index Related factor Export customer demand Virtual network index Binding of A response to customer loyalty viscosity index The proportion of mobile communication circle IP long distance index Price sensitive Calling index Export customer demand index SMS ratio Business index data

The calculation formula for comprehensive is relatively small, even the distinction between indexes: feature group is not particularly evident, to guide the Comprehensive indexes = ω1×(Factor 1)+ω2× marketing activities of no operation. In the analysis (Factor 2)+…+ωN×(Factor n) (6) of the model results, according to the cost function The factor weights ωi determined by using the F (W, Z) minimum principle, combined with the busi- principal component analysis method. ness of. Through continuous testing and adjusting, the final choice of the number of clusters =k 4. The big customer and general customer class are clustered 4.2 Modeling of clustering algorithm into 4 groups, and finally a total of 8 subdivide cus- Clustering in the use of PFKP algorithm, according tomer groups, the clustering center intercepted some to the experience of human input the number of clus- data fields for the various classes as shown in table 3. ters K. The number of clusters K has a great influence on the clustering results, it is difficult to determine a 4.3 time, need to be adjusted according to the clustering The analysis of customer segmentation results results. In front of the design of the model, we clus- and its application ter the customers and ordinary customers. According The clustering results are generalizations, have to business experience, the clustering number k characteristics of each customer group, as shown in value set at 4 to 8, respectively get the value of 4, table 4. 6, 8, to operations on the sample, then the value of The clustering results can see, a small part of the K was determined according to the clustering results. high value customers can bring the most profit for If K is too small, some customers’ too much group the company. Therefore, customer segmentation, users, cannot find the effective mode, the division the company can provide sufficient technical and lost its meaning; if K is too large, the statistical data human resources for this part of the customer sup- becomes trivial, some customers number user group port, in order to meet the high value customers to

Table 3. Customer segments clustering center. Category Customer group Customer brand Point- to-point SMS Point-point multimedia message GPRS business Local calls index Long distance call index Roaming index Binding index Price sensitive index

1 1 0.168 0.131 0.103 0.714 0.131 0.052 0.379 0.389 2 0 0.643 0.529 0.536 0.307 0.242 0.134 0.199 0.588 3 0 0.289 0.054 0.123 0.272 0.501 0.358 0.197 0.432

Large Large customers 4 0 0.547 0.443 0.549 0.669 0.436 0.508 0.017 0.199 5 1 0.321 0.118 0.056 0.722 0.061 0.072 0.682 0.401 6 2 0.789 0.347 0.295 0.66 0.31 0.195 0.536 0.617 7 1 0.086 0.007 0.001 0.201 0.02 0.001 0.301 0.114

Ordinary customers 8 1 0.336 0.119 0.181 0.237 0.341 0.207 0.221 0.366

9781138028135_Chp_010.indd 34 31/03/15 8:28 PM Table 4. Main features of customer segments. Contribution of Category Customer group ARPU(yuan) number of people The overall contribution within group 1 106.70 1986 29.73% 2.85%

Large 2 157.27 2007 30.06% 2.89% customers 3 182.60 1340 20.07% 1.93% 4 272.22 1345 20.14% 1.93% 5 55.57 25462 28.33% 26.37%

Ordinary 6 75.26 23337 25.97% 24.17% customers 7 16.87 23681 26.35% 24.52% 8 59.69 17383 19.34% 18.00%

the company customer service expectations. On the derived from the real data in the process of enterprise contrary, some low value customers bring profits operation, and has good reliability, but with the less, sometimes even negative profit for the company. application in practice situation such as hundreds of While the majority of customers are in the middle of billion data compared to the situation, or failed to high value and low value, they drive the growth of fully discover more accurate rules. Only the relevant the company, the company is an important customer experiments in more large-scale database have better group. The customer will usually have a great influ- credibility. ence on the company’s financial performance. On the one hand, they will bring more customers’ development opportunities; on the other hand, they also bring REFERENCES high operation risk. The company is concerned, it is important to provide high quality service for higher [1] Li Jie, Gao Xinbo, Jiao Licheng. A new fuzzy cluster- value customers, and for different levels of customers ing algorithm based on feature weight[J]. Acta elec- tronica Sinica, 2006, 34 (1): 89–92. to provide pertinent service is equally important. [2] Fu Hui. Fuzzy C. means (FCM) clustering algorithm improvement.[J]. science technology and engineering, 2007,7, (13): 3121–3123. 5 CONCLUSIONS [3] Wu Xiaorong. Research on the issues related to selection of K. means clustering algorithm to the initial After obtaining the packet model and the results by center[D].Changsha: Master’s degree thesis of Hunan clustering, important work is how to feature group, University, 2008, pp.46. combined with the business of business characteris- [4] Yang Xiao Bing. Clustering analysis to research the tics, from a marketing point of view, put forward the key technology: [Zhejiang University doctoral degree thesis]. 2005, 23–38. concrete business plans and countermeasures of tar- [5] Wang Y, Guo Q, Li X.L. A Kernel Aggregate geted marketing based on the conclusion of the anal- Clustering Approach for Mixed Data Set and Its ysis, so that the effective information on data mining Application in Customer Segmentation. In: Proc. of the into the actual economic benefit. This data is carried 13th International Conference on Management Science out in a small amount of data case, although it is and Engineering. Wuhan, China, 2006, 121–124.

Study on EEG monitoring information based on visual stimulation

Lina Xu Jilin University, Changchun, China Zhiqiang Guo Zhuhai College of Jilin University, Zhuhai, China Zhiwen Guo Fogang People’s Hospital, Qingyuan, China Ying Sun Zhuhai College of Jilin University, Zhuhai, China Yujuan Si Jilin University, Changchun, China Ying SunZhuhai College of Jilin University, Zhuhai, China

ABSTRACT: By analyzing the relationship between EEG and the human mental state and EEG detection method, the paper designs and analyzes corresponding circuit for EEG acquisition, focuses on the analysis of the EEG signal in human mental concentration data. By adjusting the attention, the tester can be brain - machine interactive operation with the concentration degree to change the color light by the EEG detection equipment. At the same time, this paper analyzes several feasible schemes associated with visual stimulus features in EEG signals, and ultimately choose and comprehensive utilize feature extraction of EEG signals in time domain and frequency domain characteristics. KEYWORDS: EEG signal detection; Electrical control; Model; Visual stimulation

1 INTRODUCTION neurons that randomly trigger bio electrical activity, potential cloud on the scalp electrode and a reference Biological signals are measured by the organism, and potential difference were recorded, is the natural state they can be used to refer biological signals. There of true feelings, the correct solution contains transla- is a potential difference and generate current in the tion EEG reading and information is of great practical organization, organ or nervous system by the biologi- value. Brain computer interface based on EEG signal is cal signals. Typical biological signals are ECG, EEG, the detection of human communication is an important EMG, and EOG signals. means and ways of information, use the technology of The electrical activity of the brain and brain state visual stimuli to make judgments and predictions is a has a close relationship, and is a very important form comprehensive application of computer science, bio- to understand the human brain information process- logical science, psychology three cross combination, ing [1]. EEG signal is mainly composed of a large and it has non-constant considerable prospects. number of neurons in the cortex to highlight potential sum after the formation of synchronization, which is the result of many neuronal activity. With the devel- 2 THE OVERALL DIAGRAM OF VISUAL opment of computer science, extracted from the EEG STIMULI EEG DETECTION and mental task-related patterns possible, brain computer interface technology has become a research Mind control EEG detection equipment is composed hotspot. of EEG acquisition, wireless transmission part, con- Visual stimuli can measure the person to keep the trol part, voice prompts part and a display, the main attention degree in a certain period of time, the visual body of display part is a lantern, lantern consists of a stimulus of accurate measurement and estimation can diameter of 40cm acrylic ball cover and a base, the be used to prevent serious accidents often happen in lampshade is made up of 36 red, green, and blue LED high-risk operations. The EEG signals are a compre- lamp to provide the light. The overall design of the hensive reflection of the billions of individual brain system diagram is as shown in figure 1. 37

9781138028135_Chp_012.indd 37 16/04/15 6:00 PM control part, voice prompt part and a display, the and blue LED lamp to provides the light. The main body of display part is a lantern, lantern is overall design of the system diagram is as shown in consist of a diameter of 40cm acrylic ball cover and figure 1. a base, the lampshade is made up of 36 red, green, control part, voice prompt part and a display, the and blue LED lamp to provides the light. The main body of display part is a lantern, lantern is overall design of the system diagram is as shown in consist of a diameter of 40cm acrylic ball cover and figure 1. a base, the lampshade is made up of 36 red, green,

Figure 1. The Fig.1overall Thediagram overall of visual diagram stimuli EEG of detectionvisual stimuliequipment. EEG detection equipment

Fig.1 The overall diagram of visual stimuli EEG detection equipment

2 EXTRACTION AND PROCESSING OF EEG SIGNALS3 EXTRACTION AND PROCESSING OF STM32F103 microcontroller receive and display 2 EXTRAEEG SIGNALSCTION AND PROCESSING OF EEG the attention and focus values of the tester, by timer SIGNALS software simulation to generate three PWM signals

EEG acquisitionThe EEG acquisitionTGAM TGAMmodule module can canbe bedirectly directly to control the red, green, blue LED value, so that the connectedconnectedEEG to acquisitionthe to electrode,the electrode,TGAM were modulewere collectedcollected can be anddirectly andana- light STM32F103 color change. microcontroller receive and display analyzed lyzedconnectedby means by means to of the ofa anEEGelectrode, EEG electrode electrode were andcollectedand a REFa REF andref- theFocusSTM32F103 attenti rangeon value microcontrollerand isfocus 0–100, values thereceive focus of and istester, divideddisplay by timer referenceerenceanalyzed electrode electrode by meansthat that ofget get a EEGEEGEEG electrode signalssignals in and theon a brain. REFthe intothesoftware attenti5 grades, onsimulation and 0–21, focus 21–41, tovalues generate 42–62,of tester, three63–68, by PWM timerand signals Thereference collected electrode EEG signalthat getprocess EEG into signals a digital on sigthe- 84-100.software When simulation the focus to generaterange at 5three levels PWM correspond signals- brain. Thebrain. collected The collected EEG EEGsignal signal pr ocessprocess into into aa to controlcontrol the the red, red, green, green, blue LEDblue value,LED sovalue, that the so that the digital signalnal through through the integrated the integrated operational operationalamplifier, fil- ing,light lights color color change. will change into the corresponding ter,digital ADC signal conversion through module, the integrated interference operational filtering color,light coloras shown change. in figure 3. The attention is not cen- amplifier,noiseamplifier, filter, and muscle filter,ADC movement, ADCconversion conversionmodule analyzes module,module, and tralized,FocusFocus i.e. range rangefocus value value value is is0 -veryis100, 0 -low,the100, focusthe the color isfocus divided of the is divided interferenceacquireinterference filtering 8 groups filtering noise of independent noiseand andmuscle muscleEEG movement, of movement, α, β, δ, γ , lightinto is5 5red, grades,grades, when 0 -attention 21,0- 21,21- 41,is21 focused,-4241,-62, 42 and63-62,- 68,namely 63and- 68, and module analyzeθmodule and processes analyzeand acquire theand outputacquire 8 groups parameter 8 groups of independentdataof independent of focused when84-100.100. the focus WhenWhen value the is the veryfocus high,focus range the colorrangeat will5 levelsatgrad -5 levels α,β,δ,γ,θ and process the output parameter EEG of α,β,δ,γ,θdegreeEEG of and andrelaxed process degree, the and output finally parameteroutput of the uallycorresponding, become a bluelights lightslantern. color color will changewill changeinto the into the serial.data of Figure focused 2 is degreea data frameand relaxed with computer degree, proand- correspondingIn designing thecolor, control as shownlight color in figurechange, 3. focus The data of focusedfinally output degree by the and serial. relaxed Figure 2 degree,is a data frameand attentioncorresponding is not centralized, color, as i.e. shown focus value in figureis very 3. The finally outputgram analysis.by the serial. Figure 2 is a data frame andattention light color is notchanging centralized, change combined, i.e. focus the valueRGB is very withEvery computer complete program data frameanalysis. length of TGAM mod- colorlow, refinementthe color of into the 16 light equal is parts red, as when a buffer attention between is Every complete data frame length of TGAM focused, and namely when the focus value is very with computerule output program is 36 bits analysis. synchronous, with 2 byte 0×AA, twolow, adjacent the color colors, of so the that light the query is red, by colorwhen array attention is module output is 36 bits synchronous, with 2 byte high, the color will gradually become a blue lantern. Every 0completeAA. A byte datarepresentation frame oflength the data of signal TGAM qual- datafocused, points constituteand namely to drive when LED, the so thatfocus the vacolorlue is very 0xAA,× 0xAA. A byte representation of the data In designing the control light color change, focus module outputity (0-200), is 36 greater bits numericalsynchronous, representation with 2 of byte EEG slowlyhigh, theand colorgently willto another gradually class becomecolor. The a testerblue lantern. signal quality (0-200), greater numerical and lights color changing change combined, the doped more noise. The signal quality value of 200, through concentration, with the idea of control lantern 0xAA, 0xAA.representation A byte of EEGrepresentation doped more noise. of theThe signaldata RGBIn color designing refinement the into control 16 equal light parts color as a change,buffer focus signal saidqualityquality EEG value or (0ofREF -200,200), electrode said EEGgreater and or REFthe test electrodenumerical head skinand devicebetweenand lightscolor, two easy adjacentcolor to master changing colors, your so attention thatchange th state.e querycombined, by the representationcontact.the test of Data headEEG frames skin doped contact.can morealso resolveData noise. frames related The can tosignal alpha, also colorRGB array color data refinement points constitute into 16 to equal drive partsLED, asso a buffer beta,resolve gamma, related Delta, with alpha,theta EEG beta, data, gamma and, testDelta, the theta cur- that the color slowly and gently to another class quality valuerent focus of 200, and saidrelaxation EEG data or REFvalues. electrode and 4between THE EXTRACTION two adjacent OF colors, EEG FEATURE so that the query by the test headEEG data,skin and contact. test the currentData framesfocus and can relaxation also color.color Thearray tester data through points concentration,constitute to with drive the LED, so data values. idea of control lantern device color, easy to master resolve related with alpha, beta, gamma, Delta, theta Theyourthat characteristics attentionthe color state. ofslowly EEG frequency and gently distribute to another1 and class EEG data, and test the current focus and relaxation 49Hz,color. the The sampling tester frequency through is fs=concentration, 100Hz. We put with the data values. 1sidea time of window control of datalantern as a processingdevice color, unit (epoch), easy to master so the sampling point is N = 100. 3your THE attention EXTRACTION state. OF EEG FEATURE

2πi The characteristicsN −+kn+ of EEG frequency distribute 1 () N ,1,2,..., (1) andFxkn 49Hz,==∑ thexe samplingkN frequency is fs= 100Hz. We put3 THE 1s time nEXTRACTION=1 window of data O Fas EEG a processing FEATURE unit (epoch), so the sampling point is N = 100. 2i ByThe Transform characteristics ofN the discrete oknf EEG Fu frequencyLiye transform distribute 1 DFT, We getF (x) the spectrum x eN signal ,k at12 , 1 ,...,N ~ 100Hz, (1)by and 49Hz,kn the sampling frequency is fs= 100Hz. We Nyquist’sput 1s timetheorem windown 1 known of to dataNyquist as afrequency processing unit Fig.2 A frame data parsed from the TGAM data Figure 2. A frame data parsed from the TGAM data. spectrum(epoch), f0=so the50Hz sampling symmetric point distribution is N = 100.center. 2i N  kn  N  Fkn (x) x e ,k12 , ,...,N (1) n1 Fig.2 A frame data parsed from the TGAM data 38

9781138028135_Chp_012.indd 38 16/04/15 6:00 PM

Figure 3. AttentionFig.3 level Attentioncorresponds levelto the colorcorresponds values and to color the plate. color values and color plate

By Therefore,Transform we of consider the discrete only the Fu front Liye half transform part of the predictnew data,the effect its will pr haveedictive certain ability promotion. will But decreaseas DFT, Wespectrum get the from spectrum 0 to 50Hz. signal Here Fk at (x) 1 1/N~ 100Hz, as a virtual by inremarkably. the data fitting Based and onthe thefield above of machine reasons, learning, we train in Nyquist'sN numerical theorem frequency, known amplitudeto Nyquist and phasefrequency of each enhancethe 5 the expressiveness12 according of tomodels some will of appear the basic spectrumfrequency f0= 50Hz component symmetric respectively: distribution center. afterexperience the over that fitting use phenomenon. the regression The model model [1in-2] the. Therefore, we consider only the front half part of the current data∼ set (training set) expression is very accu- |(Fx)| rate, but for unknown new data, its predictive ability spectrumEnergy from((Fx 0 ))to= 50Hz.k ,Here Fk (x) 1/N as a will decrease remarkably. Based on the above rea- k N (2) virtual N numerical frequency, amplitude and phase sons,4 ESTIMATION we train in the MODEL5 ∼ 12 according OF VISUAL to some of the (()) arctan(Re()), Im(()) of eachPhas frequencyeFkkxF component= respectively:xFk x basicSTIMULATION experience that uses LEVEL the regression model [1-2].

| Fk (x)| Energy(We Fget (x)) the spectrum ,information of each process- After all of the above treatment, data convert into 10 k N (2) 5 ESTIMATION MODEL OF VISUAL ing unit, we do a story on the Delta, theta, alpha, beta, featureSTIMULATION dimensional LEVEL vector every second, and there Phase(gamma, Fk (x))the five arctan(Re frequency Fkk (x)),Im(histogram, F (x))the gamma is a corresponding alert tag to each feature vector (in band here for 30 ~ 50Hz. In order to avoid the absolute After0 all1). of Problem the above istreatment, transformed data convert into ainto mark 10 in a Weamount get ofthe energy spectrum differences information between different of each gen- featurestandard dimensional good data vector sets everyon the second, supervised and there learning processingder, different unit, we individual do a story value, on we the put Delta, the histogram theta, isproblem. a∼ corresponding Classification alert tag problem to each needfeature to vector new input alpha, normalizationbeta, gamma, for theprobability five frequency density map. histogram, Five bands (indata 0 ∼to 1). a The discrete problem class is transformed label. In intogeneral, a mark an in input the gammaon the totalband energy here accountedfor 30 ~ for 50Hz. more thanIn order that, asto a amap standard to onlygood dataone setscategory, on the supervisedso the input learning space is signal in the frequency domain, as shown in equation 3. avoid the absolute amount of energy differences problem.partitioned Classification into disjoint problem decision need to newregion, input the between different gender, different individual value, databoundary to a discrete is called class the label. decision In general, surface. an input The map decision we put the histogramEner ynormalization for probability to only one category, so the input space is partitioned s {,,,,} is D-1dimension surface of D dimensional input Features =∈s δθαβγ (3) into disjoint decision region, the boundary is called density map. Five Enerbandsy on the total energy space. accounted for more∑ i thans that, as a signal in the the decision surface. The decision is D-1dimension surfaceLogistic of D dimensional model inputis aspace. very widely used frequency domain, as shown in equation 3. discriminativeLogistic model model, is a very it widelyevolve usedd on discriminathe basis- of the Among them: linear regression model, the logistic function f (y) = Enerys tive model, it evolved on the basis of the linear regres-    - y ∞– y ∞ FeatureEneryEs =∈nergyF((xss)) {{, ,δθ ,,,αβ , ,,}γ } (3) sion1/ (1 model, + e the) the logistic linear function regression f (y) was= 1/ in(1 (+- e ,) + ) sk∑ Enery ks∈ i s therange linear interval regression mapping was in to(– 0∞, + 1∞) area range and interval directly to mappingthe posterior to 0 ∼ probab1 area ilityand directly p (ω k|to x)the modeling.posterior The Among them: probability p (ω k| x) modeling. The logistic model The time domain feature design: a form of p order logistic model of learning ability∼ is very strong, the    of learning ability is very strong, the scope of appli- Eneryautoregressivesk Energy( model F (x)) AR s (P) { is ,as ,the , following , } for- scope of application is very wide, so here we choose cation is very wide, so here we choose this model to mulaks 4, wherein the µ is the current system of ran- this model to estimate the level of alertness, and t estimate the level of alertness, and verify that we had dom noise. The time domain feature design: a form of p onverify the EEG that signal we had preprocessing on the EEG effect signal preprocessing order autoregressive model AR (P) is as the effectIn the two class problem as an example, the logis- followingXXtt =+formulaφφ11−− 4,22XX tpwherein++... φµ thetp − µ+t ist the current(4) tic modelIn the gets two an class estimated problem probability as an located example, in the system of random noise. 0logistic ∼ 1 for modelzero class, get then an selectestimated the threshold probability thresh located       forin classification.0 1 for zero If thresh class is ,greater then thanselect 0, lessthe thanthreshold XtAutoregressive11 X t 2 Xmodel t 2 ...can bep Xestablished tp  t relation (4)- threshthresh is for 1. Forclassification. multi class problemsIf thresh canis greaterbe in the than 0, ship between the brain state and time, and the tim- sameless thantrain∼ threshof thought is 1. is Forsimilar multi to theclass two problems classes of can be Autoregressiveing information modelcan be completelycan be saidestablished by model problem solving, not detailed here. relationshipcoefficient between ϕi , i∈ the {1, brain2,.., p}. state Therefore, and time, we choose and in the same train of thought is similar to the two the timingthe autoregressive information coefficientcan be completely expression signalssaid by in class of problem solving, not detailed here. the time domain information. The order of P higher, 1 1 (5) model coefficient ϕi , i {1, 2,.., p}. Therefore, we px(|ω0 ) = θ − ypθ(x () 0 | x)    (5) chooseexpression the autoregressive ability model coefficientwill be stronger, expression so as to 1+ e 1 e y (x) signals in the time domain∈ information. The order of Theθis an unknown parameter set {β0, β}, yθ T P higher, expression ability model will be stronger, (x) is general linear function y (x) = β 0+ β x that so as to predict the effect will have certain depends on the unknown parameter θ. Set the NO.i promotion. But as in the data fitting and the field of 39 data xi, the category label Ti is 0 or 1, the penalty machine learning, enhance the expressiveness of function is: models will appear after the over fitting Cost( p ( | x ),t ) {t log( p ( | x )) phenomenon. Model in the current data set (training 00ii i i (6)  set) expression is very accurate, but for unknown (11 tii )log( p (0 | x ))}

9781138028135_Chp_012.indd 39 16/04/15 6:00 PM The θ is an unknown parameter set {β0, β}, yθ(x) is ability, LR adjusts complexity of the model by the T general linear function y (x) = β 0+ β x that depends number of features. on the unknown parameter θ. Set the NO.i data xi, the category label Ti is 0 or 1, the penalty function is: Table 1. the classification accuracy rate and the average AUC value for 10 test set average. Cost((pxωω|),)tp=−{t log( (|x )) + θθ00ii ii (6) (1 −−t)iilog(1(pxθ ω0 | ))}

Optimize logistic function, you can use the gradient descent method and Newton method to solve the optimization problem CONCLUSIONS 7 CONCLUSIONS 1 n We extract the EEG(7) signalsWe extract in time the domainEEG signals and infrequency time domain domain and fre characteristics- , to analyze minJ()θω= Cost((pxθ 0 |)ii,)t θ ∑ m i=1 quency domain characteristics, to analyze and com- and compare. Feature extractionpare. Feature is oneextraction of the is key one stepof thes keyof EEG steps ofsignal EEG based on the estimation of alertness, according signalto the based physiological on the estimation on EEG of alertness, signal accordingprior knowledge, take the five to the physiological on EEG signal prior knowledge, 6 EXPERIMENTAL RESULTSfrequency AND band energy values as feature extraction in the frequency domain. At the same DISCUSSION take the five frequency band energy values as feature time, we also put theextraction EEG as in athe time frequency series domain. model At thecalculating same time, the coefficients of an we also put the EEG as a time series model calculating We did experiments in 10 groupautoregressive classification model. test Through the experiment, the classification effect combines features of set to verify our vigilance estimation system effect. the coefficients of an autoregressive model. Through All experiments were done in theboth same the preprocessing time domain orthe frequency experiment, domain the classification characteristics effect better combines than fea the- use of single. and use the synthetical characteristics of time domain tures of both the time domain or frequency domain characteristics better than the use of single. and frequency domain informationREFERENCES combination. We then to different experimental group F6, P6 respectively, compared the effect of different classification algorithms. Table 1 shows when[1] theJia conductanceXi.Used fo rin the studyREFERENCES of EEG feature extraction and classification of brain computer combination with forehead caninterface obtain [D].a relatively Hebei: Hebei University of Technology, 2007:1-6. high accuracy rate of classification. [1] Jia Xi.Used for the study of EEG feature extraction and classification of brain computer interface [D]. Hebei: Accuracy and reasonable evaluation cannot be [2] Tong shibai, Hua Chengying.Hebei University Analog ofElectronic Technology, Technology 2007:1–6. [M]. Beijing: Higher sometimes a classifier performance. Therefore, we [2] Tong shibai, Hua Chengying. Analog Electronic calculate the average AUC threeEducation methods Press,on 10 data 2006 Technology [M]. Beijing: Higher Education Press, 2006. sets of values, with accuracy in classification as a [3] Guan Jin, Chen Yaguang. Multi-channel feature com- reference. It said the classifier for any given a 1 and bination and SVM single trial evoked EEG signals[J]. a 0 class can give accurate results[3] Guan of probability, Jin, Chen we Yaguang. Journal Multi of-channel Huazhong feature University combination of Science and and SVM single trial believe that the ability to describeevoked the EEG quantitative signals[J].Journal Technology of Huazhong (NATURAL University SCIENCE ofEDITION), Science 2006, and Technology index of classifiers can be better. 34 (8), pp.19–22. According to the classification(NATURAL accuracy SCIENCE from EDITION),[4] Wu Xiaopei, 2006, Feng Huanqing,34 (8), pp.19 Zhou -Heqin,22. Wang Tao. Independent component analysis and its application table 1 can be seen, close to the classification results in EEG signal preprocessing[J].Beijing Journal of of three classifiers, SVM slightly[4] dominant. Wu Xiaopei, We know Feng Huanqing,Biomedical Zhou Engineering, Heqin, 2001,Wang 20 (1):Tao. 36,pp. Ind 38–40ependent + 49. component analysis that by adjusting the mixing quantity of each class, [5] Yang Fusheng, Hong Bo. Principles and Applications GMM can provide no limit toand the itscomplexity application of the in EEG signalof independent preprocessing[J].Beijing component analysis Journal [M].Beijing: of Biomedical model, but it will also produceEngineering, the generalization 2001,20 (1): 36Tsinghua,pp. 38- University40 + 49 Press,. 2006(01), pp.205.

[5] Yang Fusheng, Hong Bo. Principles and Applications of independent component analysis [M].Beijing: Tsinghua University Press, 2006(01), pp.205.

Image encryption algorithm based on the key extracted from iris character

Lang Lang Equipment Division of the Second Affiliated Hospital of Third Military Medical University, Chongqing, China Qianyan Zhao Logistical Engineering University, Chongqing, China Jun Zhou Institute of Arts and Humanities Department, Chongqing Science and Technology, Chongqing, China

ABSTRACT: There is memory and storage problem of long key in encryption algorithm, so combining biometric characteristic with the traditional encryption algorithm is a new research direction. An encryption algorithm based on key from iris features and AES is proposed. On the basis of iris images preprocessing stage, effective iris area is decomposed of three layers by 2D Haar wavelet. Detail coefficients from the third layer is extracted and 375-bit iris codes are generated, 128-bit key is extracted from iris codes by using unit mapping function. The encryption and decryption experiments with AES was applied on the image with size of 512×512. Experimental result shows that the encrypted image has high security, also the purpose of protecting image information is reached. KEYWORDS: Iris features; Key; AES; Images; Encryption; Decryption

1 INTRODUCTION This paper presents an encryption algorithm based on the key extracted from iris features. In iris pre- Because the encryption algorithm (such as AES) is processing, iris features are extracted by using of public, so its security depends on the key, the length 2D Haar wavelets, 128-bit random key is generated of the encryption key is long, so there is not easy to from the codes of iris features. AES algorithm and remember and care the key, and the key from exter- the 128-bit key is applied on the image encryption nal, so there is always exists security risks [1]. The and decryption experiments, experimental results encryption key based on biometric is from the man show the encrypted image to achieve the purpose of himself, and has the advantage of uniqueness, invar- protecting the image information, and more secure iant for lifelong and convenient to carry, the secu- than the classic Arnold image scrambling encryption rity of the information encrypted by biometric key algorithm. combines the security of biological characteristic and encryption algorithm, encryption algorithm is more secure than the traditional algorithm. The first 2 IRIS IMAGE PREPROCESSING application about biometric key is IBM’s signature transaction security system which connected pen and Preprocessing of iris image is made of three stages: handwriting signal processor for online transactions iris localization, noise detection, image normaliza- in 1989 [2]. Monrose extracted the key form sound tion. The eye image is made of pupil, sclera, and any [3] and keystrokes [4]. Clancy embedded fingerprint eye surroundings (Eyelashes, eyelid, etc.). So the iris characteristics in smart cards to strengthen the secu- localization includes the iris border should be local- rity of information [5]. Chang, who in accordance ized followed by noise detection, including detection with the distribution of biological characteristics of of the influence of the surroundings. In normalization the feature space, mapped into an encryption key [6]. stage, the iris region is unwrapped to a rectangular However, these algorithms are still far from practical block with the regular size in order to remove the applications, and the key generation method based on dimensional inconsistencies caused by pupil dilation iris features is lesser, further investigation is needed. and other sources.

9781138028135_Chp_013.indd 41 03/04/15 9:18 AM Iris localization is on the basis of the algorithm 100×400. Moreover, the size of the feature extraction proposed in [2]. Noise detection is on the basis of region is should not less than 60% of the normalized the algorithm proposed in [3], the rubber sheet model iris image in size [6]. So we assumed the size of R3 proposed by Daugman [2] is applied to normalize region is 40×200. an iris image. The iris image preprocessing method Haar wavelet shown in Fig. 2 (b) was used as a adopted in this paper is not detailed here, because it basis wavelet function. Wavelet transform is applied is not the emphasis of this paper. However, it is very in the R region for three times, Fig. 2(c) shows the important for the subsequent processing. An example 3 results. Approximate components LL was obtained, of the iris image preprocessing is shown in Fig.1. 3 horizontal detail components LH={LH1,LH2,LH3}, vertical detail components HL={HL1,HL2,HL3} and diagonal detail components HH={HH1,HH2,HH3}. The conceptual process of the wavelet transforms by Haar wavelet is shown in Fig. 2(d). The most information about iris texture is repre- (a) (b) (c) sented by the detail components. If we use the detail components in the first or second lever to represent the iris feature, the feature space will be larger, and leading to more cost on consumption. After a lot of tests, it is appropriate to use the detail components at the third lever to represent the iris feature. In fact, (d) (e) the iris feature coefficients are extracted from wavelet transform, and the value of the coefficients is posi- Figure 1. Iris image preprocessing: (a)original eye image; tive or negative, but entirely different comparability (b) iris localization; (c) eyelashes detection; (d) eyelid detec- between the wavelet and a section of the signal is rep- tion; (e) normalized iris image. resented by a positive or negative value [7]. So the iris feature is encoded as following regulation, 3 THE KEY GENERATION FROM IRIS FEATURES C(i)=0 , if C(i) ≤ 0 (1) 3.1 Iris features extraction and coding { C(i)=1 , if C(i) ≥ 0

Fig. 2(a) shows a normalized iris image. The R1 region is occluded by Eyelashes, and upper eyelid. Where C represents iris feature space and C= {LH3, The R region is occluded by bottom eyelid, and we HL3 HH3}, and C(i) is the element of C. Altogether 2 375 binary codes are computed for each iris. can see the most iris texture is close to the pupil area.

Therefore, most features are extracted from R3 region. In this paper, the size of the normalized iris image is 3.2 AES key generation The image is encrypted by using AES encryption algorithm, the encryption key is extracted from the iris codes. Iris feature sequences of K is divided into (a) (c) m, the length of each group is L1, if the length of iris feature length (K) mod L1 ≠ 0, then the excess part will be truncated. The iris codes were divided into m

groups, then we get the key alternative set K = {k1, k2,...,ki,..., km}, the key for AES was selected from the collection K by the random function. Also the key sequence P was divided into groups, the length

of each group is L1, if the length of P length (P) mod (b) (d) L1 ≠ 0, then the excess part will be truncated, the key sequence is divided into n groups, the key sequence Figure 2. Sketch map of iris feature extraction: (a) Select is P= {p1,p2,...,pj, ..., pn}. Because the length of group a feature extraction region;(b) 2-D Haar scale function and for K and P is the same, where the group mapping wavelet function; (c) Results of wavelet transform with 2-D function f: P→K was used to one-by-one group map- Haar wavelet (d) Conceptual diagram for organizing an iris ping. There are several ways to achieve a group map- feature. ping. The simplest method is to cycle the key group in

9781138028135_Chp_013.indd 42 03/04/15 9:18 AM

Altogether 375 binary codes are computed for each max in random (max) for different values the iris. distribution of index i fro m ki, from the figure below 3.2 AES key generation we can see ki is an essentially equal probability distribution in K, and the max value the greater the The image is encrypted by using AES encryption randomness of the more obvious, indicating that the algorithm, the encryption key is extracted from the P → K group mapping randomness.

iris codes. Iris feature sequences of K is divided into frequency freq accordance with the natural order of order one-by- m, the length of each group is L1, ifP the length of iris uency one mapping,length as (K) p1 =mod k1,..., L1 p n≠ = 0, kn ,afterthen thekn is excess selected, part

fe ature thewi nextll be roundtruncated. is from The the iris beginning codes were kn+1 divided. In order into to m improve the security of encryption, you can press a groups, then we get the key alternative set K = {k1, certain key sequence is mapped to by the random k2,...,ki,..., km}, the Pkey for AES wasK selected from functionthe collection f.Let p j K= kbyi, inthe fact random the function function. f acting Also onthe thekey group sequence index, P aswas i = divided f (j). The into definition groups, theoff (lengthj) as follows:of each group is L1, if the length of P length (P) mod L1 ≠ 0, then the excess part will be truncated, the key Index Index sequence is divided into n groups, the key sequence (a) (b) f( j)= [(m – j + zr) modm] + 1, is P= {p1,p2,...,pj, ..., pn}. Because the length(2) of {group for K and P is the same, where the group zr = random(max), max ∈ Z, zr ∈(0,max) frequency mapping function f: P→K was used to one-by-one group mapping. There are several ways to achieve a random (max) is the function of generating a ran- group mapping. The simplest method is to cycle the dom integer, where max will be a larger integer to ensurekey group the randomnessin accordance of withthe mapping.the natural The order length of P order one-by-one mapping, as p1 = k1,..., pn = kn,afte r of iris feature codes is 375bit, group length L1= 4bit, kn is selected, the next round is fro m the beginning intercepting excess 3bit, so the group number m = 93.kn+1 The. In key order length to improve of AES theis 128bit, security group of encryption length is , you can press a certain key sequence P is mapp ed to 4bit, group number n=32. By equation (2) the 128 bit K by the random function f.Let pj = ki, in fact the binary sequences P is obtained , as shown in Fig. 3 Index function f acting on1 the group index, as i = f (j). The (c) definitio n of f (j) as follows： FigureFigure 4. 4 . RandomnessRandomness of of group group mapping mapping P P → → K:( K:(a)a) ma max= x=103 103(b) (b)max max=105=105 (c)max (c)=107 max=107. fj( ) [( m  j z ) mod m ]  1, r (2)  z  zr random(max) , max Z , r (0, max] tools4.EXPERIMENTAL is the Matlab R2010. RESULTS Figure 5AND shows ANALYSIS the experi - mental results, the size of lena image is 512 × 512 pix- random (max) is the func tio n of generating a els,The the extr encryptionacted 128 time bits iswere about used 6 seconds, as the AES the imagekey for random integer, where max will be a larger integer to isencryption divided into and (512 decryption × 512)1/16 experiments = 16384 groups, on Lena an ensure the randomness of the mapping. The length of averageimage, timeplaintext for each packet encryption was 128 group-bit (16is (6) bytes), / 16384 for ir is feature codes is 375bit, group length L1= 4bit, ≈the 0.36 image ms. The is 4 decryption × 4 pixel timesub- blockis about for 8 the seconds, encrypted an intercepting excess 3b it, so the group number m = averagepacket, time encryption for each rounds decryption were group 10. The is (8) experiment / 16384 93. The key length of AES is 128bit, group length is ≈was 0.48ms. tested The on Ireasonntel Core2 of speed CPU differenceclocked at 2GHz,for image and 4bit, group number n=32. By equation (2) the 128 bit encryption2GB memory and decryptionof the computer is because, and of programmingthe slightly binary sequences P1 is obtained , as shown in Fig. 3 different for encryption and decryption time of the Figure 3. 375 Bits iris codes. tools is the Matlab R2010. Figure 5 shows the AESexperiment algorithm.al results From, the the point size of viewlena imageof encryption is 512 × and decryption speed, the proposed algorithm can be Supposing is a certain value (e.g., j = 1), the map 512 pixels, the encryption time is about 6 seconds, j appliedthe image to a staticis divided image into for (512encryption. × 512)1/16 = 16384 in K from pj to ki is examined, Fig. 4 shows when the groups,The lena an averageimage was time encrypted for each encryptionby Arnold grouptrans -is max in random (max) for different values the distribu- form.(6) / 16384Fig. 6a ≈ 0.36shows ms. the The encryption decryption results time is ofabout the 8 tion of index i from ki, from the figure below we can Arnoldseconds, transform, an average the time number for each of Arnolddecryption transform group is see ki is an essentially equal probability distribution iterations(8) / 16384 is 10. ≈ 0.48ms. Fig. 6b Theis the reason histogram of speed of Figs.difference 5b, in K, and the max value the greater the randomness andfor Fig. image 6c encryptionis the histogram and decryption of Fig. 6a. is because of the of the more obvious, indicating that the P → K group slightly different for encryption and decryption time mapping randomness. of the AES algorithm. From the point of view of encryption and decryption speed, the proposed scrambling degree of the encryption image by the algorithm can be applied to a static ima ge fo r Figure 3. 375 Bits iris codes Arnold transformation. The scrambling degree of 4 EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS AND ANALYSIS encryption. image encryption by the proposed algorithm is

Supposing j is a certain value (e.g., j = 1), the map greater than the scrambling degree by the Arnold Thein K extracted from pj to 128 ki is bits examined, were used Fig. as4 showsthe AES when key the transform. The histogram of the encrypted image by for encryption and decryption experiments on Lena the proposed algorithm is more flat than the image, plaintext packet was 128-bit (16 bytes), for histogram of the encrypted image by the Arnold the image is 4 × 4 pixel sub-block for the encrypted (a) (b) (c) transform, the image signal is more random, the packet, encryption rounds were 10. The experiment FigureFigure 5. 5.Encryption Encryption and and decryption decryption effect effect by by the the proposed readability of encrypted image is worse. Based on the was tested on Intel Core2 CPU clocked at 2GHz, and algorithproposed m:(a) algorithm:Lena image (a) (b) Lena Encryption image (b) image Encryption (c) D imageecryption above analysis, the proposed encryption algorithm is 2GB memory of the computer, and programming (c) Decryption image. image more secure than Arnold transform on aspect of The lena image was encrypted by Arnold image encryption. tra ns form. F ig. 6a shows the encryption results of the Arnold43 transform, the number of Arnold transform iterations is 10. Fig. 6b is the histogram of Figs. 5b, 5. CONCLUSIONS and Fig. 6c is the histogram of Fig. 6a. The degree of scrambling is an important measure In this paper, after the preprocess for iris, the indicator of performance of an image encryption effective iris area is decomposed by using 2D Haar algorithm, the greater its values, the greater the 9781138028135_Chp_013.indd 43 03/04/15 wavelets, 9:18 AM 375 bits binary iris codes were extracted difference of the gray value between pixels and the from detail coefficients of the third layer. An 128-bit round the better encryption affect is achieved. key was extracted from the iris codes, An image was According to the literature [8], the scrambling degree encrypted by using AES algorithm and the iris codes. defined in above two algorithms was calculated from From the effect of image encryption, the security of the encrypted image. the proposed algorithm is higher than the classical Arnold image scrambling encryption a lgorithms, frequency protecting the image information purposes is achieved. Encryption speed is the next issue worthy of further study, especially for larger size image, the image can be compressed before encryption to enhance the encryption speed.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

(a) (b) grayscale

frequency *Project supported by the Special Fund for Post doctor Scientific Research Project of C hongqing (No. XM20120049).

REFERENCES

[1] R. Spillman. Classical cryptography and modern cryptography[M], Be ijing: Tinghua University, 2005(07), pp.144.

(c) grayscale [2] D.G. Abraham, G.M. Dolan, G.P. Double, and J.V. Stevens, Transaction Security System[J]. IBM Sys tems Journal, Figure 6. Encryption effect comparison between the proposed 1991, 30(2):206-229. algorithm and Arnold transformation :(a) Image encrypted by [3] F. Monrose, M.K. Re iter, Q. Li, et a l. and S. Wetzel, the proposed algorithm (b) Histogram of Image encrypted by Cryptographic key generation fro m voice[J]. IEEE the proposed algorithm (c) Histogram of Image encrypted by Symposium on Security and Privacy, 2001, pp.202-213. the Arnold transformation [4] F. Monrose, M.K. Re iter, and R. Wetze l, Password hardening bas ed on keystroke dynamics,Proc Of Sixth  2 5437.1 ACM Conference of Computer and Communication  new   5.56 (3) iris  2 Security[C].USA: ACM Press, 1999,pp.73-82. org 977.4 [5] Clancy, T., Lin, D., Kiyavash, N.: Secure s martcard–bas ed  2 5070.4 fingerprint Authentication. In: ACM Workshop on  new   5.18 (4) – Arnold  2 Biometric Methods and Applications, pp. 45 52 (2003) org 977.4 [6] S. Ma llat. Zero-crossings of a wave let transform [J]. IEEE Trans. on Inform. Theory, vol. 37, pp. 1019–1033, July 1992. uiris is the scrambling degree of the encryption [7] R. Wildes, J. Asmuth, G. Green, S. Hsu, R. Kolczynski, J. image by the proposed algorithm , uArnold is the Matey, and S. McBride. A machine-v ision system for iris

scrambling degree of the encryption image by the Arnold transformation. The scrambling degree of image encryption by the proposed algorithm is greater than the scrambling degree by the Arnold transform. The histogram of the encrypted image by the proposed algorithm is more flat than the (a) (b) (c) histogram of the encrypted image by the Arnold transform, the image signal is more random, the Figure 5. Encryption and decryption effect by the proposed readability of encrypted image is worse. Based on the algorith m:(a) Lena image (b) Encryption image (c) Decryption above analysis, the proposed encryption algorithm is image more secure than Arnold transform on aspect of The lena image was encrypted by Arnold image encryption. tra ns form. F ig. 6a shows the encryption results of the Arnold transform, the number of Arnold transform iterations is 10. Fig. 6b is the histogram of Figs. 5b, 5. CONCLUSIONS andThe Fig. degree 6c is the of histogramscrambling of Fig.is an 6 a.important meas- 5 CONCLUSIONS ure Theindicator degree of of performance scrambling is of an an important image encryption measure In this paper, after the preprocess for iris, the algorithm,indicator ofthe performance greater its values, of an the image greater encryption the differ - effectiveIn this paper,iris area after is decomposed the preprocess by usingfor iris, 2D the Ha effecar - encealgorithm, of the thegray greater value betweenits values, pixels the and greater the roundthe wavelets,tive iris area375 bitsis decomposed binary iris codesby using were 2D extractedHaar wave - difference of the gray value between pixels and the the better encryption affect is achieved. According frolets,m detail 375 coefficientsbits binary ofiris the codes third werelayer. extracted An 128-bit from round the better encryption affect is achieved. key was extracted from the iris codes, An image was toAccording the literature to the [8],literature the scrambling [8], the scrambling degree degreedefined detail coefficients of the third layer. An 128-bit key in above two algorithms was calculated from the encryptedwas extracted by using from AES the algorithm iris codes, and the An iris image codes. was defined in above two algorithms was calculated from From the effect of image encryption, the security of encryptedthe encrypted image. image. encrypted by using AES algorithm and the iris codes. theFrom proposed the effect algorithm of image is higher encryption, than the the classical security of Arnold image scrambling encryption a lgorithms, frequency the proposed algorithm is higher than the classical protecting the image information purposes is achieved.Arnold imageEncryption scrambling speed encryptionis the next algorithms,issue worthy pro - oftecting further thestudy, image espe informationcially for larger purposes size image is achieved., the imageEncryption can be speed compressed is the next before issue worthyencryption of furtherto enhancestudy, theespecially encryption for speed.larger size image, the image can be compressed before encryption to enhance the encryption speed. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

(a) (b) grayscale

frequency *ProjectACKNOWLEDGMENTS supported by the Special Fund for Post doctor Scientific Research Project of C hongqing (No. XM20120049).

*Project supported by the Special Fund for Post doctor Scientific Research Project of Chongqing (No. XM20120049). REFERENCES

[1] R. Spillman. Classical cryptography and modern REFERENCEScryptography[M], Be ijing: Tinghua University, 2005(07), pp.144.

(c) grayscale [2] [1]D.G. R. Abraham, Spillman. G.M. Classical Dolan, cryptographyG.P. Double, and and J.V. modern Stevens, cryp - Transactiontography[M], Security Beijing: System Tinghua[J]. IBM University, Sys tems J ournal2005(07),, FigureFigure 6.6. EncryptionEncryption effect effect comparison comparison between between the proposed the pro - 1991,pp.144. 30(2):206-229. algorithm and Arnold transformation :(a) Image encrypted by [3] F. Monrose, M.K. Re iter, Q. Li, et a l. and S. Wetzel, posedthe proposed algorithm algorithm and (Arnoldb) Histogram transformation: of Image encrypted (a) Image by [2]Cryptographic D.G. Abraham, key G.M.generation Dolan, fro G.P. m voiceDouble,[J]. IEEEand J.V. encryptedthe proposed by algorithm the proposed (c) Histogram algorithm of Image (b) Histogramencrypted by of SymposiumStevens, on Transaction Security and Security Privacy, System[J].2001, pp.202 IBM-213. Systems Imagethe Arnold encrypted transformation by the proposed algorithm (c) Histogram [4] F. Monrose,Journal, 1991, M.K. 30(2):206–229. Re iter, and R. Wetze l, Password of Image encrypted by the Arnold transformation. [3]hardening F. Monrose, bas ed M.K.on keystroke Reiter, dynamicsQ. Li, et, Procal. and Of S. Sixth Wetzel,  2 5437.1 ACMCryptographic Conference keyof Computergeneration an fromd Communication voice[J]. IEEE  new   5.56 (3) Security[C].USA: ACM Press, 1999,pp.73-82. 2 iris  2 Symposium on Security and Privacy, 2001, pp.202–213. 5437.1 org 977.4 – σ new [5] [4]Clancy, F. Monrose, T., Lin, D., M.K. Kiyavash, Reiter, N.: andSecure R. sWetzel, martcard Passwordbas ed µiris ==2 = 5.562 (3) fingerprint Authentication. In: ACM Workshop on  new 5070.4 σ or g 977.4     5.18 (4) hardening based on keystroke dynamics,Proc– Of Sixth Arnold  2 Biometric Methods and Applications, pp. 45 52 (2003) org 977.4 ACM Conference of Computer and Communication 2 [6] S. Ma llat. Zero-crossings of a wave let transform [J]. IEEE σ 5070.4 Trans.Security[C].USA: on Inform. Theory, ACM vol. Press, 37, 1999,pp. 1019 pp.73–82.–1033, July µ ==new = 5.18 (4) Arnold σ 2 977.4 [5]1992. Clancy, T., Lin, D., Kiyavash, N.: Secure smartcard– uiris is theorg scrambling degree of the encryption [7] R. Wildes,based fingerprintJ. Asmuth, G.Authentication. Green, S. Hsu, In:R. Kolczynski,ACM Workshop J. image by the proposed algorithm , uArnold is the Matey,on Biometricand S. McBride Methods. A machine and Applications,-v ision system pp.for iris45–52 uiris is the scrambling degree of the encryption (2003). image by the proposed algorithm, uArnold is the scram- [6] S. Mallat. Zero-crossings of a wavelet transform [J]. bling degree of the encryption image by the Arnold IEEE Trans. on Inform. Theory, vol. 37, pp. 1019–1033, transformation. The scrambling degree of image July 1992. encryption by the proposed algorithm is greater than [7] R. Wildes, J. Asmuth, G. Green, S. Hsu, R. Kolczynski, the scrambling degree by the Arnold transform. The J. Matey, and S. McBride. A machine-vision system for histogram of the encrypted image by the proposed iris recognition[J]. Machine Vision and Application, algorithm is more flat than the histogram of the vol.9, pp.1–8, 1996. [8] W. Congli, C. Zhibin, L, Ting. Blind Evaluation of encrypted image by the Arnold transform, the image Image Scrambling Degree based on the Correlation of signal is more random, the readability of encrypted Adjacent Pixels[J]. International Journal of Electrical image is worse. Based on the above analysis, the and Computer Engineering, 2013,11(11), pp.32–34. proposed encryption algorithm is more secure than Arnold transform on aspect of image encryption.

The prototype of the personalized information recommendation engine

Xiyong Li Computing Department of PingXiang University, Pingxiang, Jiangxi, China

ABSTRACT: The problem of information overloading in the big data era makes the user submerge in a large amount of irrelevant information and product browsing. although The traditional search engines such as Google, Bing and Baidu can quickly help users find the target information, but it does not fully meet the user’s demand for personalized information. In order to solve this problem, a recommendation for search engine gives a better solution. in this paper, the prototype of personalized information recommendation system has carried on the exploration and analysis of the implementation model is presented. KEYWORDS: Prototype, Personalize information, Recommendation Engine

1 INTRODUCTION personalized recommendation engine based on the public behavior of recommendation engines. The for- The rapid development of network technology allows mer gives the same recommendation for each user, the qualitative changes of the Web taken place, from a and the recommended target can be set by the system single Web site into a data sharing platform, informa- administrator static or the results and statistical sys- tion creation and sharing becoming more and more tem of all the users’ feedback. Personalized recom- easily, a lot of pictures, blogs, video posted on the mendation based on different user preference is given Internet. Data speed and capacity are in a geometric to the individual user’s precise recommendation, then growth. With the most extreme explosion of informa- the system needs to know the identity of the individ- tion, people find it more and more difficult to look ual user data, hobbies, etc., and recommend the key for the information they need. Especially in e-com- data of information, or find the user with the same merce, in order to find the customer themselves characteristics based on the social network to com- the purchase goal in a huge amount of commod- plete the recommendation. ity information requires a lot of time, many invalid Personalized recommendation engine is a kind browsing leads users submerging in the overloaded of real intelligence information discovery process, information. Based on the target towards accurate which is very successful currently in e-commerce information, people seek search engines; however, and some applications of personalized information traditional search engines such as Google and Baidu service platform. In the face of vast amounts of data, are relatively simple information positioning tools users need some sort of more intelligent, more aware although it is the best way to find the target infor- of their needs, tastes and preferences information mation quickly, but it can’t effectively meet the needs discovery mechanism. The working principle of per- of users. One reason is that the users sometimes can sonalized Recommendation engine finds that the cor- not describe their needs; the other reason is that the relation of data according to different data sources, information retrieval based on keywords in many and then, to recommend this based on the goal cases is not enough. And the emergence of the rec- information or a similar set of users, which is also ommendation engine, users get access to information known as Collaborative Filtering Recommendation in the way from the simple targeted data search for (Collaborative Filtering—based Recommendation). more advanced information discovery more accord Personalized recommendation engine data sources with their using habits. generally include target recommended information items (product or content) of metadata, the basic information about the user and user preference for tar- 2 THE IMPLEMENTATION PRINCIPLE OF get recommendation information. The preference data RECOMMENDATION ENGINE can be divided into explicit and implicit user feedback. Explicit user feedback can accurately reflect the Recommendation engines can be divided into user’s real preferences, but users are needed to take mass action based on recommendation engine and participate in; while implicit user behavior can reflect

9781138028135_Chp_014.indd 45 02/04/15 9:44 AM Figure 1. Working principles of personalized recommendation engine.

the user’s preferences for data accuracy is different prediction. This recommendation engine can recom- and there is a big discrepancy between some behavior mend the users the items they might be interested in. analysis by some analysis and processing. But as long as the correct behavior characteristics, implicit user 3 THE ESTABLISHMENT feedback can get a very good effect, also the choice of RECOMMENDATION ENGINE MODEL behavior characteristics may be quite different in different applications, such as in e-commerce web sites, 3.1 Users and the recommendation target purchase behavior is actually a very good perfor- module design mance implicit feedback on user preferences; downloading behavior is also a said implicit user feedback Personalized recommendation engine based on Information on the web site. objects (target) and the user itself will take each user According to different mechanisms, and each item as a separate entity and predict of the Recommendation engine may use certain parts of the items that how much the user is fond for each user, data sources, based on which the users are recom- and then these messages are often described in a mended after the analysis of certain rules or directly two-dimensional matrix. As users are interested in the

Figure 2. Recommendation based on users alike. Figure 3. Recommendation based on similar products.

9781138028135_Chp_014.indd 46 02/04/15 9:44 AM far less items than the real total number of the items, methods to generate the system model. Pattern ana- such models lead to many useless data, that is to say, lyzer Web services make use of data mining technol- we often get a large sparse 2 d matrix. At the same ogy to analyze log data and to get the recommended time, in order to reduce the amount of calculation, we target related to the page and to the user clustering can cluster the same kinds of items and users, then weights model and user clustering model; there are record and calculate the fondness of a kind of item many other reasons—users information browsing is for a group of users. dynamic, so is the process of the user’s interest, pages may often be modified, and model analyzer are faced with the problem of updating, otherwise the model is 3.2 The human-computer interaction not valid in the pattern library. So to ensure the effec- module design tiveness of the model, the model should be analyzed In the human–computer interaction model, an infor- and updated at the same time. mation service is recommended by recommendation The web page of human-computer interaction engine according to different users’ needs and inter- interface is a stateless program, thus it is unable to ests recommend different for the users. Its basic archi- know the client’s state of viewing from the server. So tecture is the network information collection, and to record the user’s information through a Session then grab the information from the human-computer (Session) is a must, when the user gets access on this interaction through the pattern library matching filter. Web server providing the confirmation of the user’s The network information collection is a pointer identity to the server, etc. to the target data source, real-time information User’s access to the site and the site for the user’s acquisition, extraction, mining, processing and feedback and recommendations may be regarded as a unstructured information from many extracted from form of questioning and answering, so the interaction human-computer interaction behavior to save in a between the user and system can be recorded in the structured database, which provides data input for the form of through dialogue. In order to make interac- pattern library matching rules. tion of the rules with conforming between the system

Figure 4. Structure of human-computer interaction.

When users visit the Web site, they send the request and users, it appears to be very necessary to this kind to the Web server first, and then the user’s request data of dialogue in the form of interaction management. are submitted to the recommendation engine module, As described in Picture 5, the function of the dialog while the recommendation engine uses the pattern manager is the dialogue between system and user library and Web database to generate recommenda- management. tion result set, and the result set is returned to the Web Recommend device is the core part of the recom- server. After the interaction between the Web server mendation engine design, which uses data sources and with users, the recommended process is completed. and recommendation engine from other modules on the user’s information and request to complete the 4 RECOMMENDATION ENGINE specific results of calculation model and algorithm so STRUCTURE MODEL that the results could be passed to the message sender. When a user browsing the site, the Session The important basis for the system being able to rec- Manager (Session Manager) is responsible for the ommend is the recommended mode, and the function communication with the users, at the same time, it of mode analysis of the system is to use data mining captures the user’s information to the Dialog Manager

9781138028135_Chp_014.indd 47 02/04/15 9:44 AM Figure 5. Mode of recommendation engine structure.

(Dialog Manager), keeps in touch with and deal 5 CONCLUSIONS with the context of the user interaction at the same time, calls the recommended unit (Recommendation In this age of network data explosion, it is critical for Engine) and completes the calculation of the recom- both the application of e-commerce and social net- mended engine to get the result set. By collecting the work faster to find out the data that the user needs and session manager information, the result sender will to let the know their potential interest and demand. submit the result by to the Web server and complete The emergence of recommendation engine attracted the recommendation work. The context of the user people’s more and more attention. Based on person- interacts with the system record in dialogue context. alized recommendation engine service, the key is to In data system which contains large amounts of accurately analyze the situation, to grasp the user information, the calculation of recommendation requirements, to use appropriate recommendation engine is quite large, so the establishment of the algorithms and to perform lively and friendly. Based recommendation engine model is indispensable, the on the analysis of recommendation engine principle, strategies of which include the recommended strat- the personalized recommendation engine model is egy based on recommendation information and use established in accordance with the relevant recom- it and recommended strategy based on association mendation strategy, which can accurately grasp the rules or on the model of the recommended strategy. user requirements, recommend information needed Recommendation system can use some or a variety for the anytime and anywhere in a dynamic friendly of strategies. Actually, in the recommendation sys- way of rendering. tem nowadays, there are very few occasions that only one recommended strategy recommendation engine is used. On most occasions, different recommended REFERENCES strategy is generally used so as to achieve the best effect, such as Amazon’s recommendation, which is [1] ZhouPuxiong, TaoMengying. The analysis of Sensitive based on the recommendations from past purchases Personal information recommendation system under of the user itself and on the recommendations from mobile network scenarios [J]. Library and Information, the user’s currently browsing items, and based on the 2012(10): 80–84. popularity of the more popular items in different parts [2] LiXianhua, SunJingyu, ChenJunjie. The analysis of of the recommended so that it allows the user to find Searching Engine-BHO-Recommendation Engine Module [J]. Journal of Guangxi Normal University- their real interest from a full range of recommended natural Science Section, 2010(3): 109–112. items.

9781138028135_Chp_014.indd 48 02/04/15 9:44 AM [3] LvXiaomin. E-commerce Recommendation Engine [8] M.J.Pazzani and D.Billsus.Content-Based Research based on Web Data [J]. Modern Computer, Recommendation Systems.Lecture Notes in Computer 2009(10): 31–34. Science 4321(2007) 325–341. [4] BaiJuan, YanXinqing. The Design and Accomplishment [9] B.Sigurbjornsson and R.V.Zwol.Flickr Tag of E-commerce Recommendation based on JavaEE[J]. Recommendation based on Collective Knowledge. Journal of North China Institute of Water Resources In:Proceedings of the 17th international Conference and Hydropower: Natural and Science Section, on World Wide Web, (ACM, New York, 2008), 327–336. 2012(3): 72–73. [10] K.H.L.Tso-Sutter, L.B.Marinho,and L.Schmidt- [5] G.Q.Zhang,Q.F.Yang,S.Q.Cheng,and T.Zhou. Evolution Thieme.Tag-aware Recommender Systems by Fusion of the Internet and its cores.New Journal of of Colaorative Filtering Algorithms.In:Proceedings Physics, 10(12)(2008)123027. of the 2008 ACM Symposium on Applied [6] J.Bennett and S.Lanning. The Netflix Prize. In: Computing, (ACM, New York, 2008) 1995–1999. Proceedings of KDD Cup and Workshop (2007). [11] Y.C.Zhang,M.Medo,J.Ren,T.Zhou,T.Li,and F.Yang. [7] K.Ali and W.van Stam. TiVo: Making Show Recom- Recommendation model based on opinion diffusion. mendations Using a Distributed Collaborative Filtering Europhysics Letters 80(6)(2007)68003. Architecture. In: Proceedings of the 10th ACM SIGKDD [12] Y.C.Zhang,M.Blattner,and Y.K.Yu.Heat Conduction International Conference on Knowledge Discovery and Process on Community Networks as a Recommendation Data Mining, (ACM,NewYork,2004) 394–401. Model. Physical Review Letters 99(15)(2007)154301.

Research on data mining in social network

Maobao Yang School of Information Science and Technology, Jiujiang University, Jiujiang, Jiangxi, China

ABSTRACT: This paper studies the improved K-means algorithm, experimental results show that, the new algorithm has good convergence and stability, better than single use of FKP algorithm. The results of a user recommendation belong to the same kind of topic, or recommended most interested topic after analyze by the users, thus the Sina micro-blog topic function using have a wider rate. KEYWORDS: Data mining; Data extraction; Clustering analysis; Social network

1 INTRODUCTION 2 RESEARCH SITUATION OF DATA MINING AT HOME AND ABROAD With the rapid development of computer technology, electronic information resources of the Internet play The data mining process is to obtain the effective, an indispensable role in everyone’s life and work, peo- novel, potentially useful, and ultimately understand- ple interact is more and more wide through the net- able patterns from large amounts of data stored in work. The social network is composed of a network of the database. Data mining involves many fields of social change, social networking is the predecessor of artificial intelligence, databases, statistics, machine the email, social networking, the BBS will be a step learning theory and technology, it is to extract knowl- forward. The e-mail and BBS is a social tool upgrade edge from large amounts of data, can be re analyzed edition is instant communication and blog, the trans- the data, in order to obtain a more in-depth under- mission speed and parallel processing, instant com- standing, and through the historical data to predict munication is improved; the blog began to reflect the the future. Knowledge of data mining using a cer- sociological and psychological theory. In recent years, tain algorithm to dig out from the practical data of the development of social networks is very attracting the unknown, valuable patterns or rules. The process Sb.’s attention. At present, there have been more than consists of data preparation, data mining, and pattern half of Chinese Internet users communicate and share evaluation, consolidate the knowledge and use of information through social networks, social networks knowledge and other steps. By the graphic details the have become the largest propagation effects, most process of data mining is as shown in Figure 1. extensive coverage, and the highest commercial value of the user Web2.0 business. The rapid growth of network data, if we can get the website of these data for the analysis of social hot issues and trend are of great help, and also to have the very big help and influence on the social network operation. The social network on the youngest and most active Internet users, so also is the network of speech where the most intensive, mining the information resources, can obtain a lot of valuable original Figure 1. The process of data mining. data, analysis and decision making for the associated user. In this paper, the data mining application in At present, data mining has been widely used in social network data mining, huge amounts of data on the CRM, it can solve the problem: database market- the Internet, and the data also will grow rapidly, pro- ing, customer groups, cross selling, customer churn viding a good foundation for data mining. analysis etc.. The functions of data mining in the

9781138028135_Chp_015.indd 51 02/04/15 10:38 AM application of the CRM is mainly manifested in the until the clustering center does not change, clustering following aspects: criterion of convergence. 1 To help the company to acquire new customers. 1 Method of define distance The traditional marketing methods such as leaf- According to the general steps of clustering, the lets, advertising and other more expensive, is not definition between samples and between class dissatisfied. The introduction of data mining technol- tances is the key. According to the different distance ogy implementation according to different user definition, system clustering can be divided into a groups, consumer habits, tendencies and the need variety of methods, but it has same basic steps of to implement promotion, reduce marketing costs, the execution. improve the marketing effect. (1) The distance between the sample and simi- 2 To help the enterprise to cross sell. Cross selling larity. Setting the clustering of the data is G, refers to the process of enterprises will be the new services or products to existing customers for sale. x X ==,,GxxR∈=in1, 2,3... In view of existing customers, enterprises can use ∑ xc∈ i { ii } data mining to the existing customer information, ci customer analysis of their features, predicting the future market. The K clustering center is Z1, Z2... Zk, and Yj 3 To help the enterprise to retain old customers. (j=1,2... K) that express K cluster categories. Two Recognized in the industry is, the cost of obtaining data objects Euclidean distance as follows: a new customer is 6.8 times to keep an old customer cost. Therefore, the company needs to max- t imize the retention of the old customers, it needs di(,jx)(=−ijxx)( ij− x ) (1) to study their behavior characteristics, to provide targeted services to improve this part of customer The arithmetic mean of each data object 1 loyalty. A = x is the number of samples of the data, i ∑ xw∈ n j Process data in the CRM system of mining can be the criterion function can be expressed as follows: as shown in Figure 2. k n Ld= (,xz) (2) ∑∑i==11j jj

2 The distance between the categories. A class collection of observation data records, between the two classes of distance is generally used in some special points in the definition of the distance between. There are two types of Ga and Gb, the distance between them is denoted as D (a, b), commonly used class distance. The class mean method: 1 Figure 2. The process of data mining in customer service Da(,b) = dij system of enterprise. NaNb ∑∑xG∈∈axGb

3 Determine the number of clustering 3 K-MEANS CLUSTER ANALYSIS System cluster finally puts all the observations to cluster into one group, and how to determine the K-means clustering algorithm is a clustering algo- proper number of clusters is a difficult problem, rithm based on partition. First, assume that data needs because the classification itself is not a certain to be set into the K class in a dataset, arbitrary selec- standard. tion of K data elements as the clustering centers, in according to the distance function to measure the dis- (1) R2 statistics. Note: R2=1-pg/T, Pg denotes tance to the center of each data element, data elements the difference in the square and for all variables will be assigned to the distance to the nearest cluster when the clustering number is total G, T is the total center clusters; cluster center again by the average sum of squares of deviations. R2 is the total within distance of computational elements in each cluster the cluster sum of squared differences is relatively the new cluster, then calculate the other elements smaller, divided into G classes are suitable. But to the new clustering center distance, so repeatedly, obviously the more the number of clustering,

9781138028135_Chp_015.indd 52 02/04/15 10:38 AM each category is smaller, R2 is bigger also, so to 4 SINA MICRO-BLOG DATA EXTRACTION consider a number of conditions: G should make BASED ON PYTHON R2 large enough, but G itself is relatively small, but R2 doesn’t increase greatly. The paper dig data of the social networking platform (2) Semi partial correlation coefficient. In the are micro-blog Sina, micro-blog gets rapid devel- class of GK and GL merged into the next level opment in recent years, it is the era of the Web2.0 of class GM, defining a partial correlation coef- new network application form. A user state in Sina ficient: R2=BK1/T, where BK1 is the incremental micro-blog words is limited, the provisions are no merge sort caused the within class sum of squares, more than 280 characters in length, this form is con- semi partial correlation coefficient greater that the venient for users to share their favorite topic of con- two kinds of more should not be merged. So if the versation whenever and wherever possible through merger by the n+1 class for the N class, semi par- mobile phone and mobile user terminal of other, more tial correlation coefficient large should retain n+1 suitable for the fast pace of today’s society. In China, classification. Twitter users have accounted for 14% of Internet (3) Pseudo F statistic. Pseudo F statistic users, and Sina micro blog has become the leading denoted as: force of industry of China, its share of the market share of close to 87%.

()TP−−gG/( 1) F = (3) 4.1 The application of API interface Pg /(nG− ) The use of micro-blog API must first apply, need to register an application in micro-blog Sina open plat- Pseudo F statistic for evaluation is divided form, then developers will get APP KEY and APP into G class effect. If the G type is reasonable, the SECRET, access to ACCESS TOKEN according to within class variance should be small, the square of the two data obtained. the difference between class and relatively large, so clustering level and pseudo F statistic is larger and smaller classification tree G. 4.2 Python calls API to extract data 4 The optimization of K-means algorithm The API interface of micro-blog have fans service The selection of metric function, Matteucci pointed interface, interface, interface, micro-blog invited out that the metric function may get the cluster- comments interface, user interface, interface, inter- ing lower results. The WkDaniell for this problem face, the relationship between the top micro-blog presents an independent criterion, according to friends packet interface, the user interface tab the different selection of data attributes. Different interface etc.. Each interface has a corresponding distance measure function, average the accuracy function. rate reached 90.9%, complete the method can be Access to the specified users to listen to the list applied to practice, so this method is used in this as follows: thesis. Rule function specifically as follows: if q≤ 8.4595% at this time choose the Euclidean dis- if getfocus(client,userid): tance as the measure function, if q≥ 8.4595% time friends_list = u’ Listen: ‘ Manhattan distance as the metric function. myfriends = client.friendships.friends. Rule q function expressions are as follows: get(uid=userid) for s in myfriends.users: friends_list += s.name 1 n ()xi − x 4 friends_list += ‘ ‘ n ∑ i=1 q = 4 (4) if len(friends_list) >= 140: # maximum of σ 140 characters print friends_list.encode(“gbk”) # Output code friends_list = u’Liston’ 1 n Among them: x = x time.sleep(10) n ∑1 i print friends_list.encode(“gbk”) try: 1 n σ = ()xx− 2 (5) print myfriends.get(‘ids’) ∑ i=1 i n −1 return myfriends.get(‘ids’) except Exception: x is the sample mean,σis the standard deviation. print ‘get focus failed’ Parameter n represent the n data elements set. return

9781138028135_Chp_015.indd 53 02/04/15 10:38 AM 4.3 The capture flow chart of Sina API data clustering results, the user of the same class topic will be recommended. By this result, it allows the user to Open platform Sina micro-blog have access better participate in micro blog topic, topic promotion restrictions, so the author is simulated browser to is greater. This recommendation model can be used login Sina micro-blog manner to extract micro-blog in other fields such as electronic commerce, good data. The flow chart of Sina through API interface recommendation. capture data is as shown in Figure 3.

REFERENCES

[1] Yang Xiaobing. Clustering analysis to research the key technology[D]. Zhejiang University doctoral degree thesis. 2005, pp.23–38. [2] Wang Y, Guo Q, Li X.L. A Kernel Aggregate Clustering Approach for Mixed Data Set and Its Application in Customer Segmentation[D]. In: Proc. of the 13th International Conference on Management Science and Engineering. Wuhan, China, 2006, pp.121–124. [3] Wu Xiaorong. Research on the issues related to selec- Figure 3. Capture flow chart of Sina API data. tion of K. means clustering algorithm to the initial center[D]. Changsha: Master’s degree thesis of Hunan University, 2008, pp.55. 5 CONCLUSIONS [4] Li Jie, Gao Xinbo, Jiao Licheng. A new fuzzy clustering algorithm based on feature weight [J]. Acta elec- The paper study the hot topic and user informa- tronica Sinica, 2006, 34(1): 89–92. tion in the social network in the Sina micro-blog, [5] Fu Hui. Fuzzy C. means (FCM) clustering algorithm using the clustering algorithm in data mining to improvement [J]. Science technology and engineering, extract topic clustering. Through the analysis of the 2007, 7, (13): 3121–3123.

The design of nautical navigation message system based on DSP

Kang Lin Navigation Institute, Wuhan University of Technology, China

ABSTRACT: The paper realize Digital Down Conversion (DDC), Digital Control Oscillator (NCO), Low Pass Filter (LPF), Cascaded Integrator Comb (CIC) decimation filter, Half Band (HB) decimation filter, digital demodulation and message decoding module. The software includes the Direct Digital Frequency Synthesis (DDS), the Analog/Digital conversion (A/D), digital down conversion, digital demodulation, message decoding, human-computer interaction and a message storage module. Through performance of the receiver is tested, it can receive message and display a message. KEYWORDS: Navigation message system; Message system; Navigation information; DSP

1 INTRODUCTION 2 THE PRINCIPLE AND THE GENERAL SCHEME OF RECEIVER Navigation message system [1,2] can automatically send and receive marine navigation and meteor NAVTEX receiver uses a scheme with LCD display, ological warnings, meteorological forecast software filtering, mixing and demodulation. It can be emergency information, that is an important part completed at the same time receiving English inter- of the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System national message and the Chinese or local message, (GMDSS) [3]. The GMDSS system establishes and contains a self-checking circuit. Considering the new maritime distress and safety communications signal received by the NAVTEX receiver that belongs network using digital communication network to short frequency and signal frequency, namely the technology, satellite communication, computer signal frequency received by the antenna is not high, and other modern under the coordination of the most of the functions of the digital receiver used to International Maritime Organization (IMO), and replace the original equipment accomplished by further improve the existing set of powerful, wide analog circuit. At the same time in order to simple coverage, comprehensive and strong sea rescue circuit design and reduce the requirements for the network communication system [4]. The system processor, the hardware of the 4209.5KHz channel is divided into two kinds: one kind is the inter signal down converted to the frequency of 486KHz, national NAVTEX, receiving on the international and two circuit uses the same type ADC chip. English NAVTEX maritime safety information with According to the principles of a receiver, this 518 KHz frequency; the other is a local NAVTEX, article puts forward the general scheme of receiver by receiving the local (or national) Maritime using DSP as controller, as shown in Figure 1. Safety Information in [5] language with 486KH (Z or 490 KHz, 4209.5 KHz) frequency. According to the requirements of IMO, most of the coastal countries in the world have established the NAVTEX system, and the language used for the English. China has established the NAVTEX station in a plurality of coastal cities, has covered the area within 400 miles of the coastal regions of China, at a frequency of 486 KHz broadcast navigation warn- Figure 1. The general scheme of receiver. ing information. Since its implementation, he system 2.1 success to save the lives of millions of people in the The design of front-end filter circuit application [6]. So the NAVTEX receiver in today’s The highest frequency of the received signal is marine safety plays a very important role. 4209.5 KHz, belonging to the short frequency, so

9781138028135_Chp_016.indd 55 02/04/15 6:43 PM we use passive filter. According to thecharacteristics 2.3 Mixer circuit design of the frequency response of the filter, the filter can Mixer circuit mainly completes the spectrum shifting be divided into Butterworth filter, Chebyshev fil- of the RF signal, the signal frequency down to the ter and ellipse parameters such as the type of filter. desired frequency. Mixer gets low-frequency signal Comparison of the performance of several filters, by RF signal and the vibration signal is multiplied. because the cutoff properties of Chebyshev filter are The basic principle is: very good, in band ripple is small, finally using this type of filter designed front-end bandpass filter. The Local Oscillator: vtLO (t)V= LO cos ωLO 518 KHz and 486 KHz frequency signal filtering cir- The RF signal: vtRF (t)V= RF cos ωRF cuit is as shown in Figure 2, it is used by five order Multiply: Chebyshev band pass filter. vvLO RF =−0.5VVLO RF [cos()ωωRF LO t ++cos( ωωRF LO )t] Mixer circuit is shown in Figure 5. The first circuit is the local oscillator, BF2 is a radio frequency signal, and BF2_1 is the mixer output signal. Based on the mixing principle, the first local oscillator =BF2- 486KHz, where 486 KHz is the mixer output signal. Thus to know, only BF2_1 low pass filter, can get the frequency of the signals required. Pin 3 is the out- Figure 2. The filter circuit of 518 KHz and 486 KHz. put current, thus via an external resistor current sig- Figure 3. The filter circuit of 4209.5 kHz. nal into a voltage signal, but also to do with the later stage circuit impedance matching. Through the pins 7 The circuit of 4209.5 KHz signal filter is as shown and 5 external T resistor network to improve the car- in Figure 3, it is also used in the five order Chebyshev rier leakage level and signal level. band pass filter.

2.2 The design of amplifier circuit The amplifying circuit includes a radio frequency amplifying circuit and an intermediate frequency amplifier circuit. Taking into account the overall noise coefficient of the receiver noise coefficient is mainly decided by the previous level circuit, the front end and the two amplifying circuits are located in the receiver, so the amplifier circuit with low noise amplifier circuit (LNA). Three of the circuits using NEC tube 2SC4226 as the core device for amplifying circuit. The circuit is as shown in Figure 4. According to the 2SC4226 technical manual, when the transistor static

working point is set to VCE=3V, IC =3mA, the noise figure is 1.2dB, magnification of 26dB. Apparently Figure 5. Mixer circuit of 4209.5 KHz to 486 KHz. 2SC4226 can meet the requirements of the circuit. 2.4 The design of the regulating circuit Before the analog signal input to the ADC, the circuit need process input signal amplitude. Various indexes meet the requirements of AD7484 input signal. In this design, through the amplitude of the signal crystal filter after the very small and is bipolar, a range of input signal and AD7484 for 0~2.5V. Therefore, carries on processing of the signals into the ADC before, mainly completes the signal amplification and bias adjustment, namely signal regulated within the range of 0~2.5V. Conditioning circuit as shown in Figure 6, first of all, taking into account the amplified signal in the introduction of small noise, using 2SC4226 low Figure 4. The circuit design of low noise amplifier. noise amplifier for signal amplification. The noise

9781138028135_Chp_016.indd 56 02/04/15 6:43 PM Figure 8. The format of NAVTEX system message.

Figure 6. The design of the regulating circuit. According to the format and characteristics of symbolic information, we design decoding program. coefficient of 2SC4226 lower than the small noise The first step, detect phase signal and the end ZCZC. coefficients of other amplifier. When the detected signal more than four of phasing Finally, the input signal is sent to AD7484 after signal and receives the ZCZC terminator, success- conditioning for ADC sampling. A sampling fre- fully detects phase signal; the second step, we need quency of chip AD7484 is up to 3MSPS, 14 bit res- to detect coding and judge need to receive the mes- olution, meet the above requirements of sampling sage. Correctly received “123 4B B B B” code, first it frequency and resolution. needs to judge 2B code if it is A, B, D and L receiving compulsory message type, and then judge whether the 1B is receiving station identification code, the 3 THE DESIGN OF ADC PROGRAM AND last comprehensive 1B and 2B to judge whether we DECODING PROGRAM receive the message. The third step. If this message is received, the message, and receive messages. If not, 3.1 ADC program design then skip this part. Until the NNNN is detected, the receiving end message. The specific decoding pro- Figure 7 is a flow chart of ADC program. At the gram flow is shown in Figure 9. receiver under the normal working condition, call ADC procedures with a sampling frequency of recip- rocal 1/f as the cycles, to start the ADC conversion. At the same time it’s complete data acquisition, processing and storage and other operations.

Figure 9. The decoding flow chart.

4 CONCLUSIONS

The hardware circuit of the receiver mainly includes a filter circuit, amplifying circuit, a mixer, a local oscillator circuit, a self-checking circuit, A/ D conversion Figure 7. The flow chart of ADC program. circuit, controller, human-computer interaction circuit, storage circuit and communication circuit, etc. It 3.2 The decoding program design mainly completes the signal received by the antenna The message format of NAVTEX system is as shown of the frequency selection, amplification, down in Figure 8. The first phase signal +ZCZC, phasing conversion to an intermediate frequency signal and signal represent the beginning of a message. When amplifying and conditioning treatment. Analog signal the circuit detected phase signal processing, and then conditioning after the analog / digital conversion, the work the next step. ZCZC is the end of the phase sig- final input to the DSP for digital processing of a series nal symbol; followed by technical code 1B, 2B and 3 of. At the same time, the use of SD card, SDRAM 4B B, it respectively is the station identification code, and Flash memory for data storage message, receiver message identification code and message sequence operating state, the platform scale, font information code. Then is the message itself and the Terminator and digital down conversion using the sine table etc.. (NNNN). The receiver also has an LCD message display, speech

9781138028135_Chp_016.indd 57 02/04/15 6:43 PM synthesis output, remote communication function [2] Li Xin, Xu Xibin. The principle and technology module, and display and voice prompt processing of software radio [M].Beijing: People’s Posts and of a received message, and the receiving integrated Telecommunications Press, 2010: 46–52. navigation system (INS) location information and [3] Luo Gang.Design of double integral principle based calculate the position of the receiver to complete the on ADC [D].Master thesis, University of Electronic Science and technology, 2009: 12–19. automatic receiving function. At the same time, but [4] Niu Qian. Design of 1553B bus monitoring system also the system can communicate with other equip- based on FPGA [D]. North Central University master’s ment for the network, realizing the resource sharing. thesis, 2011: 55–56. [5] Huang Zhiwei. Wireless transmitting and receiving circuit design [M]. Beijing: Beihang University press, REFERENCES 2007: 3–6. [6] Wen Jun, Xie Fuzhen, Li Jian Bian Zhu. Design of [1] Luo Lina, Yang Wanquan. Performance parameters and radio communication RF circuit and technology [M]. test method of high speed ADC [J]. Experiment science Beijing: Publishing House of electronics industry, and technology, 2007. 2 (5): 145–147. 2010: 161–166.

Research on the personal maritime search and rescue terminal

Kang Lin Navigation Institute, Wuhan University of Technology, China

ABSTRACT: This paper analyzes the AIS technology and its protocol, and discussed principle and performance of search and rescue terminal, and put forward a design scheme of individual maritime search and rescue terminal. The circuit and the corresponding program is designed according to the scheme, the circuit design is focused on analyzing the modulation circuit, carrier generation circuit, two-point modulation technology, matching circuit, programming is focused on analyzing the GPS information interception and analytic, AIS message encoding and transmission control system. Finally, we made and test the actual individual maritime search and rescue terminal on the basis of this scheme, ensure the functional correctness and system implementation. KEYWORDS: Maritime search and rescue; Automatic Identification System; GPS; Signal modulation

1 INTRODUCTION At the same time, the search target will display in the electronic chart visualization, real-time locating The maritime traffic accidents have the characteris- information synchronization display for people in the tics of sudden strong, complex meteorological envi- water, so as to improve the search efficiency, and win ronment. At present our country maritime search and over the precious time for the rescue. rescue mainly rely on vision and electronic search. Visual search needs the search and rescue personnel manual operation that is limited by factors such as 2 INTRODUCTION OF AIS TECHNOLOGY light, vision, especially in the event of bad sea conditions and night weather conditions, extremely easy The AIS system working in the VHF band mobile to cause the water loss. Electronic search and rescue sea, has the characteristics of automatic continuous rely mainly on the search radar transponder, which broadcast. It can exchange the position and veloc- belongs to a simple search equipment, search radar ity information between the ships and shore station, responder automatically the start when suffered ship- or between ship and buoy, and using SOTDMA wreck, it will wait for a trigger signal. when receiv- (self-organized time division multiple access) tech- ing a search and rescue probe pulse by search aircraft nology to improve a high update rate for a variety of or and rescue ship radar emitter, search radar tran- reports, to ensure stable and reliable operation. sponder will transmit a response signal, and use the There are 27 kinds of AIS message type. The mes- 12 bright spots continuous indicator distress position sage type in the paper is “position report” (timing in the electronic chart, so that the search and rescue position report class a ship carrying mobile devices) personnel as soon as possible to search, but because and “secure broadcast information” (safety data the radar belongs to a meteorological sensor, all broadcast communication) [3]. weather will produce the very big clutter and it is not AIS code have plain code and secret code. Plain easy to judge the drowning person position, that can code start with a “$” sentences, contain information influence the search and rescue work[1-2] . that can be directly read out according to the corre- This research paper is an individual maritime sponding message format, does not need the corre- search and rescue terminal technology based on sponding decoding; the secret code is a sentence start Automatic Identification System (AIS). The termi- with “!” symbol, contains information can be read nal can automatically establishes communication out in accordance with the character conversion and with passing rescue ships, search and rescue aircraft related format definition. Message sent in the article and the rescue shore station that load AIS equipment is AIS message code. The format of the message is after drowning men start, and ensure the reliability as follows. of communication, the performance will be better. ! aaccc,x,y,z,u,c-c,v*hh

9781138028135_Chp_017.indd 59 02/04/15 6:52 PM “!” said cipher identifier; Aaccc said session to the communication control module. A communi- identifier. Maritime search and rescue terminal is cation control module to analyze the received GPS received send message to other AIS devices, should information, extract the location, UTC time of the be “! AIVDM” (AIS VHF Data link Message); X rep- news. After the device is started, the communica- resents the message transmission by how many sen- tion control module can code and modulate that AIS tences (up to 9 sentences); y said this sentence in the message is sent to a modulation based on SOTDMA sequence of brands; Z represents the same sequence communication protocol, through a series of such as identity (0-9 cycle); u said receiving the message power amplifiers, harmonic filtering and alternately belongs to channel; C-C said the package informa- sending distress position information in two exclusive tion, need to map 6bit ASCII code; V said a number channel on AIS. Therefore, this paper puts forward a pad character, the number of characters package is an design diagram that is shown in Figure 1. integer multiple of 6, if it is not satisfied, then to fill 0-5 characters; HH is a checksum, will get the bitwise XOR operation for all the characters between “! “ and 4 THE CIRCUIT DESIGN OF MARINE “*” (not including the “!” and “*”). RESCUE TERMINAL

As shown in Figure 2, the NEO-6M is a GPS posi- 3 SCHEME DESIGN OF INDIVIDUAL tioning module, MSP430 communication control MARITIME SEARCH AND RESCUE module, CMX7045 is a modulated signal mod- TERMINAL ule, VCO (Voltage Controlled Oscillator) and PLL (Phase Locking Loop) is a carrier generation circuit, Individual maritime search and rescue terminal is RF5110G is a power amplifier module. composed of a positioning system, a communica- (1) The GPS module tion control system, the wireless transmitting device This paper uses the NEO-6M chip of u-box and battery components. The terminal first received Company received to complete the GPS information. the positioning information of latitude and longitude NEO-6M chip NEO series is the sixth generation from a GPS satellite system, will get the longitude product, is currently the highest price of the GPS chip and latitude information through UART (Universal with low power consumption, small volume, high Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter) the serial port precision in the market.

Figure 1. The design diagram of rescue terminal.

Figure 2. The whole circuit diagram.

9781138028135_Chp_017.indd 60 02/04/15 6:52 PM communication control module for the AIS message transmitted alternately in two exclusive channels. Communication control module circuit diagram is as shown in Figure 4. CMX7045 is a dedicated processor for marine automatic identification system of search and rescue transmitter operation, it is equipped with a Figure 3. GPS circuit diagram. 9600 GMSK modem Potter, for the transmission of The antenna receives the GPS information and AIS formatted data, also equipped with a dual input transmitted to the chip’s RF_IN terminal, then the 10-bit DAC two system clock output and 4 GPIO. In received GPS information and UTC clock by UART order to ensure maximization of terminal battery life, standard serial port (TxD1, RxD1, VCC and GND) CMX7045 also provides a low power sleep mode. is transmitted to the communication control module. Although GPS can give UTC time, but there will be a delay for the user in receiving, then to the precise 5 PROGRAM DESIGN OF MARITIME time, the introduction of PPS (Pulse per Second: SEARCH AND RESCUE TERMINAL second pulse) signal rising edge to UTC marked the whole second moment, at the same time, the accuracy First of all, for the clock, serial port, timer, GPS can be to a nanosecond, and no accumulated error. module, modulation and coding module, a commu- (2) The communication controller module nication control module for initialization, the GPS CPU completes the analysis of information on the module will receive the GPS information through GPS, extract the location, time and other parameters the UART standard serial port in accordance with the message UTC. Modulation code is transmitted to the NMEA-0183 protocol into STM32F103VE. Receives CMX7045 modulation and coding module completes the STM32F103VE analytic GPS information, the AIS message parameters message will then be extract the location, UTC time and parameter infor- obtained. Equipment to transmit time slot starts, a mation, modulation and coding parameters message

Figure 4. The circuit diagram of communication control module.

Figure 5. The main flow chart of maritime search and rescue terminal.

9781138028135_Chp_017.indd 61 02/04/15 6:52 PM Figure 6. The GPS data based on maritime search and rescue terminal.

and then will get sent to the CMX7045 modulation model. After testing, the GPS information receiv- and coding module completes the AIS message. ing and parsing is correct, the carrier output circuit When the transmission time of arrival of the message, oscillation waveform is stable, the frequency is spec- STM32F103VE will be packaged into the AIS mes- trum accurately by AIS message output and meet sage to the wireless transmission module based on the requirement of ITU-R M.1371-4 standard, also SOTDMA communication protocol, through a series guarantees the correctness that proposed individ- of power amplifiers, harmonic filtering and in pro- ual maritime search and rescue terminal program in prietary AIS channel (CH87-161.975MHz, CH88- the paper. 162.025MHz) to send distress position information and a secure broadcast information. The whole program flow chart is as shown in Figure 5. REFERENCES [1] Wei Wucai. Rescue transmitter based on automatic identification system (AIS-SART) [J]. navigation tech- 6 TEST AND CONCLUSIONS nology, 2011.3.41–44. [2] Shi jian.Structure and information processing in AIS The UART interface board is connected to the com- system [J]. China waterway (semimonthly), 2010, 10 puter through a MAX232 serial port line, you can see (10):91–92. the GPS data that are shown in Figure 6 through the [3] Fu X.G. Liu Jianmin. Standard data format of GPS serial port debugging a program on a computer (latitude measurement application analysis and explanation [J]. and longitude and UTC time). Because the serial port is urban exploration and survey, 2010, (1):62–63. divided into 1/10000 units, and the relationship between [4] Yang Dong, Li Dongmei. Low voltage phase locked loop bandwidth stable [J]. Design and development of the degrees of conversion is 60, so the latitude longi- o o integrated circuit, 2010.12 (16), 1209–1211. tude is 7221.9256/60=120.4 , 2165.8798/60=36.1 , [5] Yin Haifeng, Mao Zhigang. A method for optimization receiving GPS information is correct. design of a low jitter phase locked loop [J]. Research Practical tests were carried out on the personal and development of solid state electronics, 2010.30 (3), development of maritime search and rescue terminal 387–391.

Design and implementation of image acquisition and processing system of QR code based on embedded system

Yanli Zuo Henan Vocational College of Agriculture, Zhengzhou, Henan, China

ABSTRACT: This paper introduces the characteristics of QR two-dimensional code and the system architecture based on embedded system, and detailed analyze the image processing method to identify QR code in the whole process, and the bilinear mapping method is applied to image correction, finally gives the concrete steps of decoding. The actual test results show that, this paper designs the algorithm that has theoretical and practical, and the recognition system can correctly decode QR barcode that has high recognition rate and recog nition speed, practical value and application prospect. KEYWORDS: 2-D barcode; QR code; Image Recognition Technology; Embedded System

1 INTRODUCTION of the correction pattern is a functional pattern is mainly used to locate bar code symbols and feature Dimensional barcode is a certain geometric shape recognition, does not contain coded information; distribution of black and white graphics data record- additional blank area for at least four modules in ing symbol information according to certain rules in width around the surrounding symbols. The structure the planar [1]. In coding, the clever use of a computer is shown in Figure 1. represent the text, numerical information based internal logic “0”, “1” bit stream concept, using a plurality of corresponding binary and geometric shapes, through the image input device or optical scanning equipment automatic reading in order to realize the automatic processing of information. It has large storage capacity, fast recognition speed, security features strong security and so on, and can be used to store text, data, images and other information file [5]. The two-dimensional code technology combines with embedded platform, and Android as the current popular mobile phone operating system has a great effect of each industry by its combination produced to spread its business in the field of information, users can read Figure 1. The QR symbol structure. the maximization of business information. So in the embedded platform development of two-dimensional QR Code has the following basic features five code recognition system not only has the full theory areas: basis but also has realistic necessary. 1 Coded character sets, including numeric data (0 - 9), alphanumeric data (digital; case letters; nine other characters: Space, $,%, *, +, a , , / :), 2 INTRODUCTION OF QR CODE 8 -byte data type, the Japanese kanji characters, Chinese kanji characters (GB2312 corresponding 2.1 Basic characteristics of QR code characters and non-kanji characters) . QR code symbol structure can be divided into two 2 Data representation, represented by a dark mod- parts, features graphics and coding region. Position ule binary “1 “, with the light module represents detection patterns, separator, and a positioning image binary “ 0 “

9781138028135_Chp_018.indd 63 02/04/15 11:05 AM 3 The symbol size, symbol specification does not behavior. Image capture and network module layer include a blank area, 21 × 21 modules from ver- image capture is using a camera for capturing the sion 1 to version 40 of the 177 × 177 modules. two-dimensional code and graphics, and will get to 4 The number of data characters ( 4 ) symbol to ver- the graphics data format conversion convenient QR sion 40, for example, the number of data symbols Code decoding layer identification decoding process, for each character: a character digital data 7089, The network module is identified by decoding the data 4296 alphanumeric characters, 8-byte data two-dimensional code contains the network address 2953 characters, Chinese characters data 1817 link, mobile phone through the link address to access characters. the data acquisition process. 5 The error correction capability, there are four lev- The OS layer provides the necessary operation of els of error correction. The ratio of the code word the whole system software environment of the upper is recoverable: L level is 7%, M level is 15%, and layer applications and access to the underlying mod- Q stage is 25%, H level is 30%. ule interface, and also provides access to the underlying hardware module package. The physical hardware layer serves the top layer 2.2 Symbol structure of QR code module, transceiver communication between hardware module and a mobile phone operating system QR code encoding format as follows: mode indicator, the main support needed by the entire system running Character Count Indicator, the data compressed by environment, mobile phone camera and network data. various rules, the padding bits and other information, and then follow the version information is divided into different blocks, each block error correction bit 4 THE SYSTEM FUNCTION DESIGN computing and the error correction code data filled, according to different versions of the graphics display The overall system function module is as shown position detection, the positioning pattern correction in figure 3. The embedded system generates a pattern, format information, version information, two-dimensional code, and a two-dimensional code etc., are shown in Figure 1. image include commodity information, phone numbers, web tag and a series of formatting information, and the recognition is the process of decoding the 3 DESIGN OF TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE two-dimensional code, and according to the decoded RECOGNITION SYSTEM information call server-side interface. The JSON (JavaScript Object Notation) is a lightweight data As shown in Figure 2, the whole system is divided interchange format, has two advantages, one of which into five layers from top to bottom user interface layer, is the machine easy generation and analysis; the sec- QR layer, Code decoding image capture and network ond is convenient for people to write read. module layer, OS layer and physical hardware layer.

Figure 3. The structure of a system function.

5 IMAGE RECOGNITION PROCESS OF QR CODE

Figure 2. The structure of 2D code recognition system. Image recognition is an important field of artificial intelligence. Using a computer for image process- The user interface layer can show the layout of the ing, analysis and understanding, that is a technique page, and rapidly understand its function to control to identify different patterns of goals and objects. the whole system operation. QR uses image recognition technology to identify QR Code decoding layer is the decoding process two-dimensional code has been widely used. Its identi- based on 2-D code graphic collection, identification, fication process can be divided into image acquisition, pretreatment, correction and correction of a series of graying, binarization, correction and decoding steps.

9781138028135_Chp_018.indd 64 02/04/15 11:05 AM 5.2 Edge extraction ranks To extract the edge of each column of each row, just Figure 4. Pre-processing algorithm design flow chart. needs to get the line, a number of feature points and curve fitting column to the specific implementation steps are as follows: 5.1 Image scaling 1 To calculate the scan range point coordinate values Different devices sample different sizes of the according to the four corners; two-dimensional code image, even the same equip- 2 Set the initial line spacing 1.5 times module ment because the shooting distance and angle differ- width from the upper left corner of the graphic ences obtained images are not the same, so be sure detection; to zoom the picture so that it is most beneficial to 3 Two-dimensional code scanning pictures from top read in black and white modules. Because detection to bottom, get on the edge of the feature points, is the most important graphical symbol QR codes, using the least squares fit on the edge; thereby to determine the optimum size of the probe 4 Fit to the upper edge as a starting point in the according to the preferred scaling graphics. Area distance does not exceed the value range of detection patterns to obtain the template matching the scanning lines and recorded gray value method. greater than 0, the feature point, and record- Template matching procedure is as follows: ing the difference between the upper and lower vertical coordinate of the feature point, using the 1 pre-loaded with 15 different sizes of standard method of least squares edge lines were fitted to detection graphic template for matching; the Bank; 2 According to the four corners of the known picture 5 Obtained by averaging the difference between the to be detected to determine the detection range of steps to get our line spacing, line spacing is used the detection point of the graph. In the upper left to estimate the next line; corner as an example to illustrate the detection 6 Repeat steps 1-5 until the over scan range. process. As the probe image occupies the width 7 Establish a sampling grid and read the module: of eight modules, so the upper left corner to the extract the lines, the establishment of the sampling upper left corner point down the right starting grid edge after each row of pixels on each small point for the nine modules’ width as the range to grid sampling. be detected; 3 After determining the scope of the original image and calculate the various templates from left to right, top to bottom scan order of the cumulative 5.3 Decoding recognition difference between the gray value and to identify the difference between accumulation and minimal The decoding process is the reverse of the coding template is the best matching template; algorithm. Decoding algorithms process is shown in 4 Use the same method to detect the graphics to Figure 3. match the other three corners point to find out Read sampling network information: Read the difference between the cumulative and max- DataMatrix symbol sampling network, the black and imum point is the bottom right corner point white pixels in each node of the network is mapped standard QR codes (standard QR code in the to “1” ‘, 0’, the matrix, whereby the bar code sym- lower right corner graphics without detection bol stream of binary bits, and then remove the “L’’ graphic); after the detection patterns to obtain a binary code bit 5 According to the standard map on the bottom right stream data area is: of the point identified in step determines the angle (1100111110, 1010101000, 1111101100, of rotation, the rotation will be tested to the stand- 1001100110, 1000111100, 1100110101, ard graphical form. The angle is determined by the 0111101111, 1100011010, 0111111110, following equation: 1000101001) Depending on the amount of data read DataMatrix Angle= (180-90*minID+360)%360 symbol can be sured that the information: Symbol size is 12x12 module, the data area size 10xl0 Which minID represents the cumulative difference module, which can accommodate five data symbol in the previous step to identify and maximum angle code words and seven RS error correction code corner label (Lower left corner in a clockwise direc- word. Wherein the decoding process shown in tion from the start mark 0). Figure 5.

9781138028135_Chp_018.indd 65 02/04/15 11:05 AM time, the average speed is 180–200 ms/picture, the recognition rate improved too much.

7 CONCLUSIONS

This paper analyzes the process of an image pro- Figure 5. Recognition process of QR barcode image. cessing method using the QR code recognition based on the introduction of QR two-dimensional bar 6 EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS AND ANALYSIS code, and image recognition process correction and decoding method are introduced in detail, and put Identify examples of two-dimensional code image forward the method of bilinear transformation to solve for deformation obvious: each of its uses Nokia, the geometric deformation problem, the method is Samsung mobile phone brand that comes with simple and easy to implement, geometry can quickly a two-dimensional code recognition software. QR bar code image correction. Compared with the This article compares the two-dimensional code photoelectric identification technology, the method recognition system experiments, and the results are of QR barcode recognition using image processing shown in Table 1. technology, and can effectively identify the pollution, incomplete and the geometric deformation of the bar code, so it has broad application prospects. Table 1. Compare results of different options.

Correct recognition rate REFERENCES Testing program This algorithm Nokia Samsung [1] Shi Bingzheng. DM code recognition system based on Distortion is not Symbian embedded platform[J]. Microcontroller and 100% 100% 100% obvious embedded system. 2010, 10(2): 51–53. [2] Zhang Chenghai, Guo Weihua, Luo Qiuke et al. QR Distortion is 68.5% 47.5% 54.1% Code two-dimensional code [M]. Beijing: China obvious Standard Press, 2000. [3] Pavlidis T, Swartz J. Fundamentals of barcode information theory [J].. IEEE Transactions on Computers, Since the resolution of the two-dimensional code 1990, 23(4): 7486. scanning equipment slightly higher pixel camera [4] Xu Xiaohui, Bing Zhong, Liu Zhi. A method of 2D barcode skew correction based on the least phone, so the recognition rate is slightly higher than square method[J]. Journal of Zhejiang University of the phone. During the experiment, a sample picture Technology.. 2008, 36(3): 250–253. identification with obvious deformation is an aver- [5] Feng Lin, Sun Tao, Wu Hao, Yuan Bin. Wireless authen- age 50-70 ms/picture; correction algorithm for obvi- tication method based on mobile phone and 2D barcode ous deformation image to identify need the longest [J]. Computer Engineering,. 2010, 36(3): 167–168.

Design and implementation of computer network monitoring software

Jiantao Cui Software Engineering College, Zhengzhou University of Light Industry, Zhengzhou, Henan, China

ABSTRACT: This paper mainly studies the key technologies of network real-time monitoring system based on Client/Server, and implementation of a real-time monitoring system based on CS/ mode. Using the network communication technology, Winsock technology, TCP/IP protocol, image compression and transmission technology, the process of communication technology and object oriented software technology to realize the main frame module, the system include network monitoring data initialization module, data transmission module, image coding and decoding module, its advantage is to make full use of the existing network resources, the highest price, with real-time information control and real-time control as the center, timely delivery and management of information. KEYWORDS: Computer; network; Monitoring design; C/S

1 INTRODUCTION established, and then you can remote control through internet protocol network TCP/IP. Network monitoring refers to the local computer system monitor and control the remote PC through the network (especially Internet). Network monitoring 2 THE OVERALL FRAME STRUCTURE OF also called remote monitoring, literally, remote refers NETWORK MONITORING SYSTEM to not close, monitoring refers to the monitoring and control. Another interpretation of remote monitor- The overall frame structure of network monitoring ing of the network is composed of a computer (host, system is as shown in Figure 1, the idea of the net- client) far distance to control another computer (cli- work monitoring program establish on the Socket ent/server) technology, the distance is not the literal message mechanism and application, monitoring meaning of the long distance, generally refers to the client program (the end) and the controlled server control of the remote computer through the network. (student terminal) to exchange data, to monitor and Network monitoring is based on the modern computer control purposes. network technology, communication technology, control a new application technology and graphics 1 The network module: It is responsible for connect- and image technology. Integrated it used multiple ing to the server monitoring Socket and sending information transmission, monitoring, management the server operator initialization data, is responsi- and integration, realize the sharing of information, ble for sending the command to the server opera- resource and task, achieve the real-time monitoring, tion (mouse, keyboard, various generic parameters fast and efficient, and can be interconnected and other message command); responsible for receiving data computer network, provides a more efficient, more from the server to send back (screen data, com- comprehensive, more safety, more convenient service mand feedback data, etc.) These data are decoded, mode to the people, to change the traditional mode of and decompression, and then the contents of the monitoring. data (screen) displayed in this machine. Implementation of network monitoring function 2 The encoding/decoding module: responsible for generally adopts the mode of client/server (Client/ Hoffman decoding of the data, the RunLength Server) mode, it is composed of the client and server. decoding. This module is based on the user in the The server program is placed in the control computer, dialog box and selects the compression data to the client program installed in the control terminal. client programs using the corresponding decod- After successfully installed on the client and server, ing method and encoding method, send a specific the client on the network search to the remote com- to the client. The encoding and decoding module puter server that has been installed, issued instructions mainly involves the following: Hoffman com- to obtain the server connection, two PC connection is pression coding method, many times Hoffman

9781138028135_Chp_019.indd 67 02/04/15 6:58 PM Figure 1. The overall frame structure of network monitoring system.

compression, RunLength coding, Runlength 3.1 Design of client general message coding and uncompressed Hoffman combination. General news including news color mode WM_ 3 The main frame module: responsible for the cli- CMOD, the number of grid WM_GRID and WM_ ent window message processing and mapping, and WM_COMP message message data compression. initialize the server end data. The user can according to their common dialog data 4 The common dialog module: the number of colors transmission needs and LAN to choose a different selection dialog box, color selection dialog, cod- color pattern, algorithm of grid number and data coming and decoding selection dialog box, grid num- pression set. In order to achieve a satisfactory effect. ber selection dialog. The following message to data compression as an The server required modules are as follows: example: if(iId==IDM_COMPRESSION) 1 Variable database module: it saves variable data of { software. When the students operate the software, // select the compression level and compression they can access data from the variable database. method 2 The network connection module: responsible for pComPression->m_iComPressionLevel=iCom- monitoring the client, responsible for receiving PressionLevel; and processing the client sent the command and if(DialogBox(m_hlnst,MAKEINTRE- initialization data (mouse, keyboard, grid message SOURCE(IDD_COMPRESSION),m_hwnd,(DLG- command), process these messages and sending PROC)CompressionDlgProe)) data in the machine (screen data, command feed- iComPressionLevel=PComPression->m_iCom- back data) to the client. PressionLevel; 3 The encoding / decoding module: responsible for if(fConneeted) data Hoffman compression, RunLength coding { // set up compressed message and decoding. This module is based on the client memset(szMouseMessage,”\0”,sizeof(szMouse- requirements (general command message, the Message)); client sends the message compression method, sprintf(szMouseMessage,”WM_ grid, color mode message encoding and decoding COMP:%d;0;0;0\0”,iCompressionLevel); method) using specific. Options include Hoffman // set the compression level compression, many times Hoffman compression, SendCommand(hwnd,1,szMouseMessage); RunLength coding, Runlnegth coding and uncom- //Set number of grids pressed Hoffman combination. SetGrids(m_hwnd); 4 The main frame module: responsible for the server UpdateRegiona1Sereen(m_hwnd,sClient,TRUE); window message processing and mapping, as well SetTimer(m__hwnd,0,m_iTimerlnterval,NULL); as the operation of the computer interface and the }}} model of the controlled. Handling message of mobile mouse: voidCMainwnd::OnMouseMove(HWNDh- wnd,intx,inty,UINTkeyFlags) 3 THE OVERALL PROCESS OF NETWORK { MONITORING if(fConneeted) { The overall process of network monitoring is as x+=iHSerollPos; shown in Fig. 2. y+=(-1*iVSerollPos);

9781138028135_Chp_019.indd 68 02/04/15 6:58 PM Figure 2. Technological process of network monitoring program.

memset(szMouseMessage,”\0”,sizeof(szMouse- the implementation in student operation data ini- Message)); tialization module has been talked about in great sprintf(szMouseMessage,“WM_MM;%d:%d; detail, will not repeat them here. %d:0;\0”,x,y,keyFlags); 4 Call to the client request the client thread function SendCommand(m_hwnd,1,szMouseMessage); processing, processing of client requests. }} ClientThread is a communication with the client thread function, this function waits for messages 3.2 The design of the server sent from the client program. If the message is 1 The students choose the client IP address and con- “REFRESH”, then it sends the current desktop pic- nection to the server. ture (updated grid); if the message is “Dicsonnect”, 2 Keep polling and receive initialization data that then the connection it end and client; if this message sent by the client. with “WM_” at the beginning, then he is according to Server starts a thread, using while cyclic stop the type of message, the server executes the message, receiving client to students in Gymnastics in and send the results returned to the client. thread initialization data. And will receive the data displayed on the server. 4 CONCLUSIONS 3 Calls the Loadwinsock to load and initialize Winsock, bind the local address, create listening This paper uses WindwosNT operating system Socket, waiting for client connections. The Socket as development platform, using VC++6.0 as a is mainly used to accept client requests, and make development tool, using the network communication corresponding processing the feedback message technology, Winsock technology, TCPI/P protocol, is sent to the client socket. Because this part of image compression and transmission technology, the

9781138028135_Chp_019.indd 69 02/04/15 6:58 PM process of communication technology and object ori- [3] Zhou Zhongying, Li Guiqi. Realization of multimedia ented software technology, the realization of the main computer image data compression [J].Guilin University module of the system framework, network monitor- of Electronic Technology, 1996(2), pp. 42–46. ing data initialization module, network transmission [4] Yang Xiaogang. Image compression technology and module, image data coding and decoding module. the common image format[J]. The print world, 2004, 11, pp. 25–27. And reliability of the network data transmission and [5] Jiang Yu. Application of Winsock substitution method real-time have taken some programming skills and and in network monitoring[D]. Sichuan: Sichuan technology realization method, the system is running University. 2003. 03, pp. 54. in good condition in the LAN.

REFERENCES

[1] Luo Hong, mu De Jun.Compression and transmission scheme of desktop image sequences[J].Computer applications, 2005. 25(6) 1–3. [2] Tu Changpei.Still image data compression method [J]. Wuhan: Journal of Jianghan University, 2000. 17(3).

The use of 3D printing technology in interior decoration

Xiaolong Gu Shijiazhuang Vocational Technology Institute, Shijiazhuang, Hebei, China

ABSTRACT: This paper discusses the influence of three-dimensional printing technology on the production of interior design. During the design process, how should we look at it? We should consider the application problem of it, and it is necessary for us to study it in further to provide new ideas for the development of interior design industry. Finally, the article thinks using 3D printing technology can solve and improve work efficiency and effect of the whole product development process. KEYWORDS: 3-D Printing; Rapid Prototyping; Furniture Design; Products Development

1 INTRODUCTION 2 THE ADVANTAGE OF THREE DIMENSIONAL PRINTING Three dimensional printing is also called 3D print, is referred to as the rapid prototyping technology. It was There are a lot of room for development of the printer invented by Charles W. Hull, and he invented the tech- in the print speed, print size, etc., but the three dimen- nology called SLA (stereo lithography technique). He sional printing has unmatched advantages. From called the printer because the concept of 3D printer the production principle, three dimensional printing borrowed from ordinary 2D printer, is different from breaks through the traditional manufacturing industry traditional toner or ink printers (oily, water and other in the past to the material with a lathe, bound cutting printed material) using the corresponding static elec- processes and directly to the overall product is man- tricity technologies through the nozzle. The 3D printer ufactured, the processing mode can be difficult parts broke through the limit of traditional two-dimensional processing production for the past. And the phys- printer that can only print in plane material. In the ical product is much better than that of traditional printing material admiral dedicated vertical layers products. piled up to form a three-dimensional objects. For the performance of printer, taking first gen- Three dimensional printing using the process eration SLA technology as an example, it is able to thought of layered manufacturing, such as FDM (fused 0.05–0.15MM height to print the liquid photosen- deposition modeling technology) technology printer, sitive resin. In 2011, OBJET company produced in the print production, the printer using special data has the highest is only 16 mu m thick layer of the interface will be produced two-dimensional hierar- printer to print. While the 3D Systems to produce chical print data in advance with three-dimensional has carved out the resolution of the 600DPI models geometry data STL file, and in accordance with the in the 0.1 MM thickness, color printing effect and height information of discrete itself carries to the can achieve the vertical print speed is 25 mm and printer unit, and according to the specific proportion 24-bit color. model outline arrange printing material, after the melt From the production difficulty, the 3D printer is material melted filamentous according to hierarchi- easier to use, because it directly connects the com- cal data is ejected through the nozzle, through entity puter, the production of goods is established in the products constantly superimposed layers with three- software model, and therefore the traditional produc- dimensional scale together eventually formed. Except tion process needs a large number of skilled work- FDM and SLA, and there are many other kinds of ers that can be omitted in three dimensional printing printing technology, MIT introduced 3DP Technology in production. And 3D printer is very flexible, print (3D printing), and also appeared outside of SLS the scale can be large or small, not suitable for (selective laser sintering technology node) and DLP large-scale industrial production is also suitable for laser forming technology, UV molding technology. small products processing production, even in the These technologies have different characteristics home environment. MAKERBOT Company intro- and advantages. And three dimensional printing has duced a number of specially designed household 3D already applied in many industries, and is changing printer for small product processing. our life.

9781138028135_Chp_020.indd 71 02/04/15 11:14 AM 3 THE APPLICATION OF THREE process, easier to scale, shape and grasp the design DIMENSIONAL PRINTING IN INTERIOR process, design and further inspiration and perfect DESIGN the existing feedback, thereby reducing unnecessary design process make the design process more concen- 3.1 The design of furniture and home furnishing trated of information flow. products On the other hand, using 3D printing, we don’t use any tool or mould in the process, thereby greatly Furniture design belongs to the category of industrial reducing the manufacturing cost, which especially design, and like most industrial products, also need has the advantages in the conceptual design stage of the following six steps: planning, development of fur- the prophase. Designers need not worry about the niture product conceptual design, the overall system cost problem, thus the use of 3D printing to produce a design, the local design, production, testing and veri- conceptual model of various morphological and func- fication. From Figure 1 we can see, using 3D printing tional, fully brainstorming and accelerate the forma- technology can solve and improve work efficiency tion of the final design scheme. In addition, flexible and effect of the whole product development process. mode of operation also makes this technology par- On the one hand, the traditional product develop- ticularly suitable for personal desktop manufacturing ment process is the two-dimensional (drawing) 3D → system (Desktop System), the technology is conven- (model or prototype) two dimensional (drawing) → ient for the popularization and application [2]. 3D (Cheng Pin), that is, drawing design proof- → → For example: in 2004, the French designer of ing verification modification and perfection, it is a → Patrick Jouin is in cooperation with Materialise, who complex cycle process, the scale of production is not designs and manufactures Solid series furniture. Using only time-consuming work, but also needs to be multi- 3D printing technology creates tables and chairs in sectoral coordination that can achieve very good stereo lithography and laser sintering technology [4]. effect [3-5]. This process need an effective media and It makes the design community to recognize the 3D creative platform, and 3D printing can achieve this printing technology manufacturing ability in the com- function. 3D printing technology is mainly character- plex entity, as shown in Figure 2. OneShot is not lim- ized by rapid prototyping, 3D printing, can be in the ited to complex external shape, designers do further product conceptual design stage can quickly generate in the combination of art and technology, forming the 3D conceptual model, through making scale models whole chair without using any parts connected, and of single effect can bring up drawings or effect graph all through the 3D printer weaving. 3D printing tech- planar form, and thus from the three-dimensional per- nology so that the product modelling has a broader spective to more authentically demonstrate the overall space for development, but also lets the personalized effect of design, and designers to directly touch the products more prominent. Designer song corrugated material and the structure of the real in the producing

Figure 1. Application of 3D printing in furniture.

9781138028135_Chp_020.indd 72 02/04/15 11:14 AM Figure 2. Solid furniture.

Figure 3. Design by Song BoWen.

articles Gewu studio, launched 3D print works interface, space elements have higher requirements, “twelve water lamp” (Figure 3). The designer will be difficult to manufacture, and the cost is high. And, the traditional Chinese painting thought combined the design thought and the manufacturing method with modern manufacturing technology that will be of design ideas in the indoor part is to match the the cultural heritage in a new manner. Compared building. Daniel Widrig Studio[4] is an outstanding with the machine production and manufacturing, 3D example of applying the 3D printing technology to printing technology has many restrictions, such as the solve complex architectural form and interior space complex shape and the materials and design of the coordination problems. Now we can see many of matching requirements for products, and it is more Zaha’s works have a Daniel Widrig involved. Zaha close to the original design manufacture. HeydarAliyev Centre (Fig. 3-Left) indoor part is finished by his studio, also known as well as Chanel Mobile Art Tour (Mobile Art Chanel) (Fig. 3-Middle) 3.2 The interior space and design of interface indoor part. As can be seen from the graph, in order to shape meet the overall shape of the inner space of architec- Talking about application of 3D print in the spatial ture, from the interface to the furniture for the curve design, have to mention a person, that is building the type structure. Of course, these modelling and prod- queen Zaha Hadid, her success is not accidental, in ucts are not realized by 3D print, but the future of 3D addition to her stick, and the courage to challenge printing will be the mainstream technology of such the traditional and positive spirit of innovation. Zaha buildings to achieve. In China, there are also many of caught the era context, she tried to cross-border coop- Zaha’s works, completed in 2014 Shanghai volley of eration, to realize your own work with new technol- SOHO is the one. (Figure 4-Right) the rental model ogy. Smart, free, pure, these features just seen her between the nationality of design and processing by design people should have a deep understanding [5]. 3D print of the latest technology. The interface space From the point of view of interior design, interior curves reflect each other, form a unified style, furni- space if the works of Zaha and the whole building has ture modeling novel and meet the functional require- a perfect matching, furniture, furnishings from the ments, carpet patterns and color of digital model

9781138028135_Chp_020.indd 73 02/04/15 11:14 AM Figure 4. Design by ZhaHa.

directly weaving production. The model room style the multi variety and small batch market demand also has reunification and harmonious environment. need to be a variety of materials for the rapid molding compound. It can make a variety of materials and products with complicated shapes and parts. 4 THE PROBLEMS OF THREE DIMENSIONAL PRINTING IN FURNITURE DEVELOPMENT 5 CONCLUSIONS 4.1 Applicability and diversified of material Three dimensional printing due to its fast, efficient, Although the range of 3D print selected material can intuitive features, is the trend of the future devel- be very wide, as long as the powdered material adhe- opment of the manufacturing industry. Although in sive bonding can be used as its raw material, but from 3D printing many unsatisfactory places, such as the the current actual application, is mainly focused on price is not low enough, not widely available, but we several plastic, resin, ceramic limited material, which should also know that as a new tool, it can provide the is the technique of total give a person a fundamental designer a new design mode of expression and con- cause of feeling “strength is not high”. struction means for the design industry, to provide fast The demand for new materials in the field of indus- and effective new products, new forms, is irreplacea- trial design is mainly embodied in two aspects, one is ble in the role of the design industry. So we should the material plasticity, and two is the physicochemical look at the positive side of this new technology, it will properties of materials. At present, many manufac- be introduced to the interior design industry. turers are in active development of special materials suitable for rapid prototyping technology, to meet the product mechanical and morphological need. REFERENCES Furniture is mainly made of wood materials, has also [1] Wang Kunqian, Lin Jiehui, Xu Renping. The product made some research on the research of wood plastic innovation design based on rapid prototyping (RP) [J]. composite materials, wood powder, wood, metal pow- Packaging engineering, 2005 (2): 138–139. der forming mechanism, and achieved some results, [2] Guo pool, Zhang Chaohua. Rapid prototyping technol- I believe the near future 3D printing field will see the ogy [J]. Furniture, 2012 (6): 102–106. lignin material figure [2]. [3] Zhou Hongtao, Wang Fenghu. The present situation of conceptual design and the strategy of furniture [J]. furniture, 2005 (1): 40–44. 4.2 Improvement of production process [4] Liu Shuyi. The concept of product and the product In addition to finding a more suitable and more diver- conceptual design [J]. furniture and interior decoration, 2003 (3): 10–12. sified printing material, the processing precision of [5] Zhang Zhongfeng. Furniture product design stage cost the increase is also a problem that needs to solute. 3D control [J]. furniture and interior decoration, 2005 (10): printing mainly is powder wood, particles and gelati- 70–71. nous material. In addition to the layer by layer scanning [6] Wu Zhihui. Advanced technology of furniture manu- superposition, precision is obviously insufficient, espe- facturing in the era of information economy [J]. furni- cially in processing the connecting piece. In addition, ture, 2003 (2): 13–16.

Research on the application of computer image processing technology in art creation

Yelu Zhang Henan Institute of Education, Zhengzhou, Henan, China

ABSTRACT: The computer image processing technology is an emerging technology in recent years. Its powerful function of graphics and image processing enable wide applications in many fields including the field of painting. The application of computer image processing technology in the painting creation, has become one of the arts of painting in the creation technique at present. The paper application analyzed this technology in the painting creation based on the introduction of the computer image processing technology. KEYWORDS: Image processing; Photoshop; PC; Artistic creation

1 INTRODUCTION manufactured by computer that brought a lot of shock and inspiration for aesthetic. This experience is not Since twentieth Century, computer-aided design is in the traditional painting. More and more traditional widely used in the field of environmental art design. artists participate in this new art categories, and Along with the progress of computer hardware and explore the practice of the combination of traditional software, computer-aided design has gradually painting and computer image processing technology become the mainstream of architectural rendering and unremitting. Japanese fantasy illustrator, pioneer performance. Through the analysis of present situ- “digital painting techniques of Kaga Valley Rang” ation and prospects of the computer-aided environ- began to try to draw a draft and picture by using com- mental art design, the paper summarizes the current puter in 1991, he fully draws by computer in 1995, people pays more and more attention to the applica- published from composition to color and graphics tion of various drawing software, while ignoring the production that fully computerized works, created Computer-Aided Environmental Art Design of visual the field of painting epoch-making “digital painting” art should present art, human and the diverse char- techniques. The picture is extremely detailed, pro- acteristic. Only pay attention to the computer per- found artistic conception, the picture has a transpar- formance technology, while ignoring its artistry that ent feeling strong, content is the ancient myths and can cause the work program and mechanization, lack combined with modern technology, enjoys a high rep- of human touch. Therefore, this paper puts forward utation at home and abroad. It is as shown in Figure 1. in the performance of techniques, can be combined At present, in addition to the use of computer image with a variety of performance techniques, and they processing technology in the creation of traditional can be used in common, the artistic appeal; secondly, painting, including the operation technique of the to cultivate and stimulate the creativity of designers image processing software, also includes the use of to improve the comprehensive ability of the design- pop artist since using various image resource manip- ers; finally, in the environment of computer art design ulation, which have misappropriated, modification, teaching aids have the appropriate reform measures, juxtaposition and restructuring of public image, so as to cultivate with more and more professional and also has the use of photography, the camera as the artistic designer. Only in this way, we can promote basic media, technology of rendering or directly to the progress and development of the computer-aided the acquisition of material import computer, finally environmental art design. form creation blueprint. In China, the creation of oil painting contemporary has many artists cleverly 2 THE SUCCESSFUL APPLICATION OF misappropriating public image to create their need of IMAGE PROCESSING TECHNIQUE IN artistic image according to the principle and interest PAINTING. in popular culture [1], which not only gives the significance of new scenes, but also rediscovery and Since the computer technology generation and re-create on the public image. For example, painter graphic image processing, a lot of image patterns Wang Guangyi’s works “great criticism “use header

9781138028135_Chp_021.indd 75 03/04/15 4:49 AM and popular criticism of the Cultural Revolution coca music trademarks, ridicule to a strong culture to the weak culture invasion problem. The painter Zhang Xiaogang’s works “big family” use the parody of last century, the sixty’s five in domestic popular family picture form, cleverly relates to the “ultra left” ideological trend to obliterate mass cruel personality problem. (see Figures 2 and 3). Guangdong artist Huang Yihan in his contemporary ink and wash creation focus on popular culture such as from acquiring the image advertisement, cartoon, photography, and processed in the computer and then paint onto the rice paper. Work involves a “new human” cultural theme. Figure 2. Creation by Wang G.Y. In his concept of ink in ink, pieces of processing technique and computer feeling, the combination of traditional techniques and methods, mixture of sym- biosis, the visual impact and cause a strong strange. (See Figure 4) [2]. With the increasing popularity of computer technology, application of image processing technology offers a new method in the oil painting creation for China contemporary artists. Many possibilities partial artists continuous explore painting in their own way. In the 2004 Beijing season “Gallery” screenist – China photographic painting “exhibition, which the painter Li Songsong choose pictures of the computer print out, due to the printing error caused by the wrong color, exaggeration to retain in the picture Figure 3. Creation by Zhang XG. (see Figure 5). Another painter Cheng Guang childhood family photographs are processed by a computer into a mosaic effect, to copy the image on the screen according to the color digital number, residual lattice edges and deliberately in the picture painted by re-magnified image, to distinguish mosaic effect in real produced by computer (see Figure 6). Another painter Huang cited by Louis Weedon’s brand image ads, to explore the identity dissimilation problem brought by the fashion consumption (see Figure 7) [3]. Visible, the modern science and technology factors involved, makes the artist to the image resource utilization performance more material and tech- Figure 4. Creation by Huang Y.H. nology. With the combination of computer technology and traditional art and continuous penetration,

Figure 1. Creation by Jia H.G.R. Figure 5. Creation by Li S.S.

9781138028135_Chp_021.indd 76 03/04/15 4:49 AM painting, watercolor, crayon, pencil painting, Chinese painting, relief and other painting effect. Computer image processing software explains a certain painting techniques are to simulate the effect of these techniques many times, make some complex painting techniques become simpler. The following is a general technique for computer painting using Photoshop software:

3.1 The image material finishing The computer image processing technology is the abundant image world; this process is fast and the resources unceasingly. Finishing material of image, Figure 6. Creation by Cheng Guang. image sharpening or softening material, can improve the fuzzy image and enhance the image contour clarity, can also carry on the different regions of the selection of treatment according to the need of. Repair screen for image material defective can despeckle, dust and scratches better, also can do the opposite choice, appropriately increase the miscel- laneous points to generate rough picture effect. The use of correction or distorted image material of this function, adjust the material image can rectify tilt in various tool with the help of flexible free will become extremely relaxed and simple.

3.2 Creative inspiration of picture composition In the use of channels, quick mask, history and other tools, editing, image constituency patchwork is a quick, here the “Mask” blend two unrelated images seamlessly together using shelter. Photoshop software can automatically draw a new image, you can also use the ready-made images to “grafting” and adaptation, Figure 7. Creation by Huang Yi. the existing image deformation, arrangement, insert, method of composition proportion, the change of the the combination of high-tech tools and traditional original material logic relations and re-form a new painting art is more closely, looking for new creative image had been reached by artists experiment, com- form and also enriched the creation of traditional bined with the above material finishing techniques painting style type. want to get “Dali works” in like a dream scene can easily get in the software tools operation completely, as long as you have enough and bold imagination. 3 THE GENERAL TECHNIQUE OF (see Figure 8) in the face of some random cluster pat- PHOTOSHOP SOFTWARE tern provided by the computer, as long as the artists is objective and honest, can discover the limits and jump The picture effect of computer image processing by out of the existing thinking, create novel works more software is completely independent of the creator, visual dislocation. some special effects in the picture appears, often not transfer by man’s will and has great randomness. But this kind of chance and randomness contains a lot of 3.3 The adjustment of graphic image color inevitability of art; a mature software system cannot The levels, curves, color balance function in the only help artists realize the idea, when necessary, can software of Photoshop is more natural color in addi- also generate many unexpected ideas. Different image tion to the normal adjustment, but also can change processing software, the processing mode is not the the objective material color to achieve the purpose same, such as the Photoshop software can not only subjective expression of the painter, can even become build a variety of graphic, also can simulate the oil completely reversed the negative film of the same

9781138028135_Chp_021.indd 77 03/04/15 4:49 AM art thoughts. The author thinks, computer painting to exist as a kind of painting, the key is to have the other paintings are unable to effect and technique. Only by improving the creators of artistic accomplishment and aesthetic taste, and the use of a bold attempt and familiar with the functions and tools of all kinds of software in the creation into traditional painting philosophy to improve computer painting works of art value.

4 CONCLUSIONS Figure 8. Creation by Dali. To optimize the creation in the use of digital color. Through the whole or partial adjustment mate- technology, although the creation and manifestation rial of image depth and cold, can make the picture and traditional painting art is different, but the form of have many rich or beat all effect. Computer electronic aesthetic requirements are the same color, also need palette color more new, bright, fashionable, it not traditional oil painting in the form of visual effect, only exploits the color vision of the artist, but also principle, we cannot simply believe that the computer reduces the real burden of artists in traditional cul- is omnipotent, digital painting can completely replace tural background. the traditional painting or think that it has no difference with the traditional painting, we believe that it 3.4 The rendering of painting effects is just tools using different, and should recognize and combine traditional painting and modern technology Photoshop software filter function can be processed is not a simple summation, but adapt to a different the into a variety of different image texture painting effect. new art form from the traditional painting that meet Use the airbrush method, dot matrix method in the to the trend of times, therefore, in the creation, cannot rendering picture effect, which requires a deep knowl- blindly the pursuit of digital technology and ignore edge of art, to master the regularity of the composi- the real painting skills, also cannot weaken their art to tion structure and levels of the pixels of the image, but digital image restoration effect, also should not reject also the technique must delicate patient, usually in the the use of this technology, but we should actively use, enlarged “stippling”, “painting”, reduce the observa- give full play to the advantages of digital painting, tion, and then zoom “stipple” works of creation, the promoting the development of digital art. plasticity of the big picture, the work wonders. The Art creation of computer image processing tech- disadvantage is that it need very high skill to the crea- nology is a new era under the exploration and experi- tor of art with a longer time. (See Figure 9) ment of artistic innovation, talented artist is the spirit Based on the above, the computer painting can’t to accept the new technology and new ideas with have the unique traditional art kind material beauty more sincere and open-minded and a kind of toler- like painting and sculpture in some ways. But ance, they can truly appreciate life and show the real, through the use of some professional software, the born finally excellent and moving works of art. artist can really freely to create different styles and schools, computer painting works on behalf of their REFERENCES

[1] Niu Handing. China times interpretation of oil painting in the Digital Context [J]. Journal of Changsha University, 2010, 2 (46), pp.124–125. [2] Cheng Yan. Discuss on reasonable intervention on image processing technique of oil painting creation [J].Beijing: China Science & Technology Panorama Magazine, 2011 (21), pp.273. [3] Wu Danbo. Participation of the Digital Art in the creation of oil paintings [J]. Literature and art, 2010 (4), pp.108. [4] Wang Guanwei. The development and changes on traditional art and digital art and its types [J]. China: Journal of SHENZHOU(In mid), 2011(2), pp.80. [5] Liu Jianhua. Research on the French oil painting art based on the digital software [J]. Pioneering with sci- Figure 9. PS compos graph. ence and technology, 2011 (4), pp. 134–135.

Discussion on the application of computer technology in artistic creation

Ruoyao Wang Henan Institute of Education, Zhengzhou, Henan, China

ABSTRACT: With the rapid development of computer industry in recent years, the computer aided design also develop quickly. Computer aided design is applied to the art design is the inevitable result of the development of hi tech. Therefore, the computer art design is the combination of traditional art design and computer image processing technology, which makes the art design workload to greatly reduced, at the same time it also enables the creation of space has been expanded, it has become essential to an art designer tool, it is the trend of the development of the times. KEYWORDS: Computer aided design; Basic art; Computer art and design; Art creation

1 INTRODUCTION following definition: CAD is a kind of technology, which combines computer to solve the people and The computer is the foundation and core of modern groups, a problem closely, play to their respective science and technology, mankind has entered the strengths, to make it work better than each of the computer era. With the rapid development of com- parties, and provide the possibility for the applica- puter technology, computer aided design is being tion of multi disciplinary comprehensive cooperative used more and more widely in the field of art creation. law. CAD is the engineering and technical personnel For example, the environment art design, landscape to the computer as the tool, general design, drawing, design, upholster design, fashion design, advertising analysis and preparation of technical documents for design, industrial design, Webpage design, film and the design activities of producing and engineering. television animation design, printing design have led Art design is an independent artistic discipline, it people to computer aided design system. is different from the pure art, it is accompanied by The function, effect and high efficiency computer the development of social economy and science and with its unique traditional manual or other work technology development, is the overlapping and the which cannot be likened to the art design, field work integration of science and technology and aesthetic has brought new and visual shock. In Institutions art. At the same time, the art design is a highly inte- of higher learning, “computer aided design” course grated discipline, it relates to the social, cultural, has become a professional basic course of art design economic, market, technology and many other side major. As a new course, how making the computer factors, its aesthetic standard also changed with many aided design for more effective application in the factors and the. teaching of art design, caused the writer’s thinking. 3 THE PRESENT APPLICATION OF 2 THE CONCEPT OF COMPUTER AIDED COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN IN THE FIELD DESIGN AND ART CREATION OF ART DESIGN

Computer Aided Design (CAD) takes the computer In different art and design expertise areas, the com- and peripheral equipment and its system software puter aided design software also each are not iden- as the foundation, including 2D graphic design, 3D tical. At present, the application of computer aided geometric modeling design, finite element analysis design in the art design field concentrates on the fol- (FEA) and optimization design, NC programming lowing several sides: (NCP), simulation and product data management etc. 1 Graphic design On 1972 October, the International Federation for Graphic design takes the different basic graph- information processing (IFIP) was held in Holland ics to form patterns according to certain rules “the principle of CAD work conference” gives the in the plane. Using boundaries to division the

9781138028135_Chp_022.indd 79 02/04/15 11:23 AM contour of maps and land in two dimensional Almost cover the whole process of product design, range, describing the image. In graphic design, processing. computer aided design applies in packaging decoration design, advertising poster design and CI layout design in the whole process. The extensive 4 THE UNIQUE ADVANTAGE OF COMPUTER application of Coredraw, Photoshop, painter, illus- ART DESIGN trator, freehand basically and completely replace hand-painted function. The computer is as an advanced design tool, it can not 2 The environmental art design only sound map and Mao, large amount of informa- The environment art design (Environment tion storage, display and convenient, the image vivid, Design) is emphasized after World War II in dynamic effect is not up to the traditional design, and Europe and the United States, it is a highly devel- revised up especially convenient. As an advanced oped industrial and commercial economy in the production tools, computer is widely used in various twentieth Century, a product of the combination fields of production and life of human beings in the of science, economy and art. It is one step to the link has played a huge role, greatly improving the practical function and aesthetic function as a uni- production efficiency. It gives designers leave more fied organic whole. The environment art design time for thinking and imagination space design, have includes space image design, decoration design, also been expanding, from graphic design, three-di- indoor physical environment design and exhi- mensional design, animation design and film and TV bition design and so on four sides,) commonly production network. used professional software 3ds max, Lightscape, Diversity of computer art design mainly reflected Vray, AutoCAD, computer can be done from the in the diversity of the art design software. For exam- AutoCAD, the 3ds Max can be accurately for a ple, advertising and graphic design software such as case design, draw the construction drawings, and Photoshop, CorelDraw, Google, Picasa can design then use the 3DS MAS model is created, and then pictures, logo signs, advertisements, pictures, also Vray or 1ightscape renderings. This enables a can increase some treatment effect. AutoCAD, designer to liberate from the heavy manual labor, 3DMAX building construction drawing design, designers use computer design that can carry on indoor and outdoor decoration effect design of three the three-dimensional effect preview, on one hand, dimensional design. All mature art design software the author can observe the effect of design, the provides the perfect adjustment scheme is very high, other hand, they can design drawings, and it makes through the color, brightness, contrast and so on the heart idea become a reality. screen to adjust, can quickly modify the works at any 3 Industrial design time. Without the need to redraw the coloring. Its con- From the angle of a complete industrial design venient operation is beyond the traditional art design process, the role of computer aided design is obvi- is not up to the. In the traditional art design, mainly ous. The computer is widely used in the design because of one mistake will result in work come to process of data management, product design pro- naught, computer operation is effectively avoided the cess, product performance and computer aided waste release, save the art designer’s time and energy. modelling of the production process, and it is like Computer network information and the mass storage a man of the right hand, to play the role of industry. designers can easily obtain material. At the same time, In the design, we used the Rhino (RHIN03D) soft- can also bring their own previous creative design to a ware modeling, after using the vRay for RHIN03D new creation. The computer to the art design works (Flamingo) and Flamingo do post rendering, and can be mass storage and network information that then PHOTOSHOP to complete the relationship works the publication and dissemination has remark- between light and dark treatment, body adjust- able advantage. At the same time, it also promoted the ment, rendering the color for a problem, make the rapid development of the whole art design industry, physical layout design thought. the designer can exchange referrals. Computer art design has a good creative, its designs While the PRO/ENGINEER is an in production the art has vivid and colorful that the traditional structure for a very useful software. It is currently design cannot the reach. In the computer art design, the most popular CAD/CAM software system, which designers can be free to express their imagination and is widely used in electronics, machinery, industrial creativity, to develop a new way of thinking, to design design, home appliances and even PRO/ENGINEER their desired effect with the computer, the formation in aerospace field, set parts design, assembly, engi- of the design of the new ideas, new ideas, and further neering drawing, sheet metal design, mold design and enhance the aesthetic ability and innovative thinking. NC machining, design, reverse engineering, motion New forms of work and produce will develop simulation and finite element analysis is equal to one. with the computer, they has a natural dependency on

9781138028135_Chp_022.indd 80 02/04/15 11:23 AM technology and computer aided design of computer attaches great importance. In the conceptual image processing, the computer is product display design stage, the Photoshop software is con- platform for a new generation of art design: such as stantly playing the technical advantage of the web design, interactive flash animation, PowerPoint powerful, the storage function of the process of electronic slides, a new generation of digital anima- sketching step by step well recorded, very easy tion and so on. to modify. By using the Photoshop software previously many ideas continue to become more perfect, and make the author profoundly under- 5 THE STEPS OF DIGITAL IMAGE CREATION standing the theme and content creation. 4 To complete the design Artistic creation is a full of new experiences and a By the previous discussion, we can conclude complex mental labor process. In oil painting crea- that hand-painted is more suitable for display cre- tion, reasonable using computer image processing ative recording and preliminary scheme design of technology will be the abundant technique means of pre performance, and computer graphics are more oil painting creation for the processing of their orig- suitable for later finalized and eventually renders. inal works, and for the computer randomly creates But this does not mean that we must absolutely pattern effects might also bring a lot of inspiration to the drawing and computer drawing two forms and guidance for the creator of the idea, especially in a particular stage of creation strictly separated, to sketch drawing creation efficiency is greatly and even the formation of opposites. Analysis and improved, better for the creation of services. This new discover the inner relationship between them, and way of working is very good for the development of then to juggle, use, but may be a surprise move, oil painting creation. The following according to the get the surprise and harvest. For example, in and practice in the creation of the experience, talk about preliminary scheme concept sketches were drawn the specific process of creative sketch drawing using stage, although stressed the need to hand, but can Photoshop software about oil painting creation: also be appropriate and timely use of computer software for some design aided understanding (a) The choice of subject matter and research, including spatial and object inser- The collection phase of material, the author tion structure, shape, scale and proportion, it is mainly uses the network to download, album, very necessary for the practice of the students camera scanning remake the way, this stage is lack of experience. In the implementation of the the preparation of artistic creation. The Internet scheme and construction program drawing stage, giant provides high quality a lot of pictures, can also be based on the computer graphics case, using a digital camera and scanning technol- by using a combined method of hand drawing and ogy can bring some good book album pictures computer drawing phase to further improve and directly into the computer for editing. enrich the design drawings of readability, descrip- (b) The creative thought tion and art. Students can use PHOTOSHOP and They have a creative direction substantially CORELDRAW graphic processing software in after accumulating original material in good first computer generated drawings directly or through hand, the next step is to timely turn raw mate- scanning add graphics and symbols some hand- rials into the aesthetic images of the heart, this painted, hand-painted scanning release can also is a process of creative conception. The design be modified, tagging, coloring and reconstruction stage is the creative motivation of sublimation, in computer software, the drawing and computer is combing and processing of art found. Many drawing these two will play the role of weaknesses. subjective factors, the creators of the continuously penetrate into the object and the revamp- ing, the object into the artistic image from. In 6 THE CLOSELY RELATIONSHIP the creation of the initial idea, through the use of BETWEEN COMPUTER ART DESIGN AND Photoshop software, a lot of ideas and creativity TRADITIONAL ART DESIGN are carried out jointly with the process of sketch drawing. Many functions of the software provide Although the development of computer art design has complete creation idea gradually forming. brought about great changes to the field of art design, but the core of computer art design is still art design. (c) Sketch design Art design is getting rapid development today, mainly This link is not only a concrete artistic cre- lies in the design work of functional, artistic and culation idea sublimation and aesthetic image, is tural taste. This requires the designer to have good also a link to the ultimate goal of promoting aesthetic ability and innovative thinking, and contin- art creation, we need an appropriate grasp, and uously injected into the cultural and artistic value for

9781138028135_Chp_022.indd 81 02/04/15 11:23 AM design works. So a good computer art designer, he but It has become essential to an art designer tool, it is requires skilled software skills, but also should have the trend of the development of the times. Grasp this the good foundation of the traditional art design. If trend at the same time, we should be in traditional art only the computer operation does not have the basis and design foundation, develop good aesthetic ability of traditional art design, cannot be created with art and artistic creativity. works of art; really want to create computer art design works of high quality, but also the need of computer art design and traditional art and design foundation REFERENCES together, the designer’s aesthetic ability is stronger, the higher the artistic accomplishment and their works [1] Li Hui. Discussion on application of computer art out the design taste is higher, can get more popular. design and technology [J]. Journal of Hubei TV University. Vo1. 29, No.8 August. 2009, pp.98–99. [2] Fan Mengwei; Li Guojuan. Reflection on computer art design [J]. Journal of Changchun University, 2010, 7 CONCLUSIONS pp.108–109. [3] Sun Mingsheng. Discuss on three basis of Higher Computer art design is the combination of traditional Art Design Education [J]. Art & Design. 2007(5), art design and computer image processing technol- pp.100–101. ogy, which makes the art design workload to greatly [4] Su Junping. New combination road of digital painting reduce, at the same time also it enables the creation and traditional painting [J]. Art life: Published in late of space to be expanded, and thus it put forward the May, 2012(2), pp.43. higher request to the art designer’s creative ability.

Network traffic prediction based on parameters joint estimation of phase space reconstruction

Ming Li & Kuiying Wang ChengDu Military General Hospital, ChengDu, China

ABSTRACT: In order to improve the prediction accuracy of network traffic, a network traffic prediction method is proposed based on parameters joint estimation of phase space reconstruction. Extreme learning machine is used as the network traffic prediction algorithm, and the optimal parameters of phase space reconstruction is selected according to prediction results of the network traffic, the simulation analysis is carried out on network traffic data to tested the performance of single step and multi-step prediction model. The results show that the proposed method can effectively select t parameters of phase space reconstruction, significantly improve the prediction accuracy of network traffic, the prediction results is significantly higher than other prediction models. KEYWORDS: Network traffic prediction; Phase space reconstruction; Parameter estimation; Extreme learning machine

1 INTRODUCTION network traffic predication method [7–11], and this method has some self-learning ability, which is equal With the wider and wider network business, the net- to other network traffic prediction model, improv- work traffic data categories are many more, along ing network traffic predication precision. In recent with the comprehensive influence of the Internet years, some scholars, for the complex change fea- price, online time and users’ online behavior, Internet tures of network traffic and based on combination traffic change is increasingly complex, which not only optimization theory, proposes some combination has the periodicity, correlation but also has the ran- network traffic prediction model, such as support dom and chaotic features. I we can conduct accurate vector and time sequence method, linear regression prediction of complex and changeable network traffic, analysis and neural network, gray model and support it will cause people’s widespread concern [1,2]. vectors. Relative to a single model, the combination For Internet traffic prediction problem, the lit- model can describe from different angles for network erature [3] proposes a linear regression prediction traffic change features, and it can obtain better net- model, and they have a good short-term prediction work prediction results. However, these models, in effect, but the Internet traffic prediction has the the modeling process, it seldom considers network advance, and its application has limitation. The lit- traffic chaotic features, and the network traffic pre- erature [4,5] proposes the network traffic prediction diction precision needs further improvement [12]. method based on time sequence, and the method first A lot of research shows that network traffic has conducts trend processing for original network traffic chaotic and time change features, and it can recon- data, and it conducts time sequence analysis, which struct and discover network traffic history data’s can better describe network traffic periodic change hidden change rules through phase space. Thus, it laws and similarity, but its essence is a kind of linear appears network traffic non-linear prediction model modeling prediction method, which cannot conduct based on chaotic theory. If it determines network network traffic random and chaotic change feature traffic delay time (t) and embedding dimension (m) and the prediction result is not stable, and the pre- for the network traffic prediction result. If chosen diction result is not reliable and incredible, without properly, then the predicted value and actual value any practical application value [6]. With the constant deviation are very large [13]. In order to choose the deepening of machine learning algorithm research, optimal delay time (t) and embedding dimension (m), some scholars introduce into the network traffic mod- it appears a lot of optimal algorithms, such as cor- eling process, which appears neural network, limited relation dimension method, false nearest neighbor learning, relevance vector machine, hidden Markov, method, time window method, correlation analysis gray model and support vector machine and other method, and they are not integrated with machine

9781138028135_Chp_023.indd 83 03/04/15 9:36 AM learning algorithm, and it is hard to establish a good 2.2 Extreme learning machine overall network traffic prediction model. In order to It gives N sample , and , respectively, improve network traffic prediction precision, it pro- ()Xtii X i ti represent input and output data, and poses the network traffic prediction model based on T ,,, n, m, ELM maths phase space reconstruction dual parameter joint esti- Xxii=∈[]12xxii n R ti ∈R model is: mation. It first adopts limited learning machine as the

network traffic prediction algorithm, and it predicts M result optimal and bad choice phase space recon- ,1,, (7) ∑βiigW()⋅+Xbji==ojj  N struction parameters, and it finally establishes single i=1 step, multi-step network traffic prediction model, and through simulation experiment, it conducts analysis T . Wwii= []12,,wwii, n represents weight vector; Wi of simulation experiment for its performance. Xj represents Wi and Xj inner product. bi represents i hidden layer and output neurons of the weight vector is the hidden layer node bias. is i hidden node 2 NETWORK TRAFFIC PREDICTION bi deviation. MODEL OF DUAL PARAMETER JOINT ELM can be zero close to N samples, and zero ESTIMATION M error means ot−=0, namely, it exists b , W ∑ j=1 jj i i 2.1 Phase space reconstruction theory and bi it makes

If the time sequence {xi}, its power system is: M β gW⋅+Xb==tj,1,, N (8) dx ∑ ii()ji j i i=1 = fxin()12,,xx, (1) dt The above N equation can be written as Through the elimination method, obtaining the nonlinear differential equation: Hβ = T (9)

xf()nn= xx,,()11, x()− (2) () HW()11,, WbMM,, ,,bX1,, X N   After transformation, a new trajectory: gW()11⋅+Xb11 gW()MM⋅+Xb   (10) ()11()n− =   Xt()= ()xt (),,xt (), xt () (3)   gW⋅+Xb gW ⋅+Xb  ()11NM()NMNM× As long as the time delay is selected as a time sequence of time scale, it will guarantee the delay  coordinate linearly independent. β1     If {x (ti), i=1, 2… n}, the time delay is β =    τ =∆kt,1k = ,2,, thus it can obtain m dimensional  β    M M ×1 (11) phase  Space  t1     T =    Xtii()=+()xt(),, xt()iiττ,1 xt()+−()m (4)   t    N N ×1 In the formula, Xi(t) is m dimensional phase space point. In the formula, the hidden layer is output matrix.

Any point Xi(t) has m components, m meets the condition: 2.3 Evaluation standard mn=−()mk−1 (5) The mean absolute percentage error, MAPE for According to Takens theorem, in embedding measurement and its calculation formula is: space, “trajectory” and original system are dynamic equivalence, thus: 1(S yt) − ytˆ() MAPE = ×100% (12) S ∑ yt() Xt()+=Tf()Xt() (6) t=1 In the formula, T is the prediction step length, and In the formula, y(t) is real value, and ytˆ()is predic- f ( ) is the reconstruction prediction model. tion value, and S is the prediction step number.

9781138028135_Chp_023.indd 84 03/04/15 9:36 AM

(1) Collecting network traffic history data, it as the parameter t and m evaluation standard, and conducts corresponding pre-processing, and the value is smaller, it means parameter t and m the specific requirement is as follows: better. (6) Constantly repeating implementation steps (3), x  x  xˆ  i min (13) (4), it obtains t and m combination evaluation i    xmax xmin standard value. (7) According to prediction error, the smallest t In the formula, xˆ is regression value, and xi is i and m value as the selected result. original value. Max, Min is the maximum and minimum value of the original data. (8) According to optimal t and m establishing (2) According to relevant research and experts’ network traffic learning sample, it establishes experience, it sets t and m value range. network traffic prediction model. (3) The network traffic is divided into training (9) Finally, it conducts processing of network collection and testing collection of two parts, and the traffic result; it recovers real predictive value, training is used for choosing model parameters, and specific as: the testing is for verifying model performance. xxi () x x x (15) (4) It randomly produces a group of parameters t i max min min and m, and it adopts their network traffic The dual parameter joint estimation network reconstruction. traffic prediction model work flow is as shown in (5) The reconstructed network traffic training is Figure 1. input into extreme learning machine for training, and the prediction error of network traffic, it is used 1 Collecting network traffic history data, it conducts Start corresponding pre-processing, and the specific requirement is as follows: Collect network traffic data

()xxi − min ˆ = (13) Data pre-processing xi ()xxmax − min Set r and m range

In the formula, xˆ is regression value, and xi is i Choose a group of parameters to reconstruct sample grid original value. Max, Min is the maximum and minimum value of the original data. 2 According to relevant research and experts’ expe- Extreme learning machine training rience, it sets t and m value range. 3 The network traffic is divided into training Calculate prediction error and use as evaluation standard collection and testing collection of two parts, and the training is used for choosing model param- r and m combination taken out? eters, and the testing is for verifying model performance. Yes 4 It randomly produces a group of parameters t and m, and it adopts their network traffic Obtaining the optimal r and m

reconstruction. 5 The reconstructed network traffic training is input Reconstruct network traffic

into extreme learning machine for training, and the prediction error of network traffic, it is used

as the parameter t and m evaluation standard, and Establish network traffic output model

the value is smaller, it means parameter t and m better. 6 Constantly repeating implementation steps (3), End (4), it obtains t and m combination evaluation Figure 1. Work flow of network traffic prediction model standard value. Figure 1. Work flow of network traffic prediction model. 7 According to prediction error, the smallest t and m value as the selected result. 8 According to optimal t and m establishing network traffic learning sample, it establishes network traffic prediction model. 9 Finally, it conducts processing of network traffic result; it recovers real predictive value, specific as:

 xxi =×i ()xxmax −+min xmin (15)

The dual parameter joint estimation network traffic prediction model work flow is as shown in Figure 2. Collected network traffic data. Figure 1. Figure 2. It adopts the final 50 pieces as the testing collection, and the rest as the training collection. 3 SIMULATION EXPERIMENT DATA

3.1 Network traffic data 3.2 Network traffic single step prediction In order to test the network traffic prediction model First, it adopts C-C algorithm delay time, and the effectiveness proposed by this paper, the adopted result is as shown in Figure 3. The network traffic P42.8GHz CPU, 1G memory, Windows XP(SP3) time sequence optimization r=4. Then, it adopts CAO operation system, conducting simulation experiment, algorithm to calculate m value, and specific as shown and it chooses single optimization r and m model for in Figure 4. From Figure 4, we know that network comparison experiment. The network traffic data a traffic optimization m=5. large-scaled network server Dec.1st 2013–Dec.20th It adopts r=4, m=5 reconstruction network traffic, 2013, altogether 480 samples, specific as shown in and it adopts limited learning machine for learning,

9781138028135_Chp_023.indd 85 03/04/15 9:36 AM 1.25

x(τ) 0.75

0.5

0.25 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 τ (a) Network traffic single step prediction result Figure 3. Network traffic optimal delay time calculations

1.8

1.6 E(m) 1.4

1.2 (b) Single step prediction deviation between prediction 1 value and actual value 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 m Figure 5. Single step prediction performance of parameter Figure 4. Network traffic optimal embedding dimensional single optimization model. calculation. 3.3 Multi-step prediction network traffic prediction and it conducts testing of the network traffic testing Parameter single optimization model and dual param- collection, and the result is as shown in Figure 5. eter joint optimization model 3 step prediction model From Figure 5 analysis, parameter single optimal net- results are as shown in Figure 7 and 8, and their pre- work traffic model prediction value and actual value dicted result MAPE is 10.185% and 5.147. Thus, dual derivation is smaller, the prediction error MAPE is parameter joint optimization model multi-step pre- 4.590%, and the prediction error is an ineffective diction performance is better than parameter single range of actual requirement. The predicted result has optimization model, and parameter single optimiza- some practical value, but the point prediction devi- tion, prediction range surpasses actual application ation is larger, and the prediction performance still requirement 10%, and the prediction result has no needs further improvement. application value, and dual parameter joint optimi- The dual parameter joint optimization model zation model can obviously improve network traffic obtains the optimal(t,m)=(2,5), and conducts recon- prediction precision and prediction effect. It can bet- struction for network traffic, and it can make training ter reflect network traffic change feature, and it can collection input limited learning machine for learn- prove that this dual parameter joint optimization idea ing, establishing corresponding network flow pre- proposed by this paper is correct and feasible. diction model and conducting single step prediction of testing, obtaining the prediction result as shown in Figure 6. From Figure 6 we can know that, dual 4 CONCLUSION parameter joint optimization model prediction result In the chaotic and nonlinear network traffic, the phase and actual network traffic value are very small, and space reconstruction theory is introduced into net- the change range is smaller. Through prediction result work traffic prediction, proposing a network traffic comparison, MAPE value is 1.714%, smaller than a prediction model based on phase space reconstruc- single step prediction 4.590%. The comparison result tion dual parameter joint estimation. The simulation initial represents that this paper proposes that dual comparison experiment result shows that this model parameter joint optimization idea is correct and feas- not only obtains network traffic prediction result with ible, with a certain priority. high prediction precision, but also it can conduct

9781138028135_Chp_023.indd 86 03/04/15 9:36 AM (a) 3 step prediction result of network traffic (a) Network traffic single step prediction result

(b) Single step prediction deviation between prediction (b) 3 Step prediction deviation between prediction value and value and actual value actual value Figure 6. Dual parameter joint optimization model single Figure 8. Dual parameter joint optimization model 3 step prediction performances. prediction performance.

multi-step prediction, and the prediction error is controlled in effective range, and the network traffic has a wide application prospect.

REFERENCES

[1] Jiang Ming, Wu Chunming, Hu Daming, etc. Time sequence model comparison research in network traffic prediction [J]. Electrical Journal. 2009, 37(11) 2 353–2 358. (a) Network traffic 3 step prediction result [2] Chen Xiaotian, Zhang Shunyi, Tian Tingting. IP network traffic prediction based on BP neural network [J]. Journal of Nanjing Post University, 2010, 30(2); 16–21. [3] Wang Tao, Yu Shunzhen. Network traffic classification research progress based on machine learning [J]. Small- scaled computer system, 2012, 33(5):1034–1040. [4] Zhang Ran, Zhao Chenglong. ARIMA model application research in network traffic prediction [J]. Computer simulation, 2011, 28(2):171–174. [5] Zhang Bin, Yang Jiahai, Wu Jianping. Internet traffic analysis and evaluation [J]. Software Journal., 2011, 22(1):115–131. [6] Gao Bo, Zhang Qinyu, Liang Yongsheng, etc. Similar (b) 3 Step prediction deviation between prediction value and network traffic prediction based on EMD and ARMA actual value [J]. Communication Journal, 2011, 32(4); 47–56. [7] Hong Fei, Wu Zhimei. Multi-dimensional network Figure 7. 3 Step prediction performance of parameter single traffic prediction model based on small wavelet [J]. optimization model. Computer Journal, 2006, 29(1):166–170.

9781138028135_Chp_023.indd 87 03/04/15 9:36 AM [8] Ma Hualin. Network traffic prediction based on [11] Wei Yongtao, Wang Jinkuan, Wang Cuirong, Zhang gray model and self-adaptation filter [J]. Computer Kun. Network traffic prediction algorithm based on Engineering, 2009, 35(1):130–131. wavelet change and combination model [J]. Journal of [9] Sun Zhixin, Zhang Yufeng. P2P network traffic cog- Northeast University (Natural and Science Edition), nition model based on multi-dimensional support vec- 2011, 32(10):1382–1391. tor [J]. Jilin University Journal (Technology Edition), [12] Luo Binsai, Xia Jingbo, Wang Huanbin. Application 2010, 40(5). Research of Chaotic-Support Vector Regression [10] Zhang Yinlu. Network traffic prediction based on iden- in traffic prediction [J]. Computer Science, 2009, tification algorithm optimization support vector [J]. 6(7):244–246. Computer Science, 2008, 35(5):177–179.

Design and implementation of remote heart monitoring terminal based on UCOS

Bin Rao Hubei University of Science and Technology, Xianning, Hubei, China

ABSTRACT: The article design ECG monitoring terminal system based on μC/OS and introduces the hardware system design takes ARM7 as the control core. On the basis of transplant μC/OS operating system, the system software architecture, application-layer multi-task and the priority has been designed, focuses on the use GPRS tasks, preparation methods GPS tasks. After experimental tests, the system is stable and reliable, the realization of real-time vehicle monitoring. System design methodology for embedded system application development has a certain reference value. KEYWORDS: μC/OS; Multi task; AD; ECG; Embedded; Real-time monitor

1 INTRODUCTION information processing system and PDA medical composition. Figure 1 is the structure of the whole With the development of the economy and the pro- system. The monitoring terminal by patients carry, gress of technology, people demand has high quality used for data acquisition and send the patient’s of medical service, and hopes to get expert in home ECG, simple processing and display of infor- services, service content also extended from disease mation; when the abnormal signal and the patient treatment to disease prevention and health care. In feels bad, monitoring terminal can be automatically order to cope with this change, the study of telemedi- or manually operating the connection of wireless cine system has been the rapid development in recent mobile network, through the GPRS/ CDMA net- years[1]. work data of ECG signal is sent to the hospital The United States, Australia and some European ECG information processing system ECG; hospital countries studied remote monitoring, part of the com- information processing system receives the ECG pany also introduced a corresponding monitor, there signal data, scheduling doctor PDA, comprehen- are some domestic universities, and research units to sive analysis and detection of ECG signal, is res- carry out the related research work, and achieved cer- ponsible for the medical management information tain results. Tsinghua University Shenzhen Graduate system MIS link; the doctor PDA mobile monitor- School of embedded systems and technology labora- ing equipment used, having a receiving ECG signal tory, design a set of remote ECG monitoring system, data and hospital central server data, and can be the main work is to develop a remote ECG moni- used for the analysis and processing of a certain toring terminal based on embedded technology, the on the signal. system is easy to carry, convenient operation, through Continuous data acquisition monitoring terminal wireless network to ECG signal transmitted to the client and real-time analysis of the patient’s ECG sig- monitoring center remote hospital patients, not only nal, when the abnormal signal and the patient feels can be used for remote first aid, and may be used in bad, monitoring terminal through the GPRS/CDMA patients with daily care. mobile communication network monitoring data will be transferred to the hospital ECG central information processing system. Hospital central ECG 2 THE STRUCTURE OF REMOTE REAL-TIME information processing system receives the patient’s ECG MONITORING SYSTEM data access request, scheduling the work of a doctor, the doctor assigned to each patient, the correspond- Remote ECG monitoring system is mainly coming patients ECG processing data are sent to the doc- posed of remote monitoring terminal, hospital ECG tor in PDA.

9781138028135_Chp_024.indd 89 02/04/15 11:31 AM Figure 1. The structure of remote real-time ECG monitoring system.

3 THE HARDWARE DESIGN OF THE gain, low oset voltage and drift, low noise. Circuit MONITORING TERMINAL design is shown in Figure 3. After the previous signal processing circuit, A/D module of ECG signal The monitoring terminal needs to use the design of from the microprocessor comes to complete the A/D small size, low power consumption. Figure 2 shows conversion. Typically, the frequency is not a useful the monitoring terminal hardware is consist of elec- signal of ECG signal than 100Hz, according to the trocardio data acquisition module, ARM7 micropro- Shannon theorem, the sampling frequency should be cessor module, wireless transmitting module, power guaranteed in the more than 2 times. In the analysis supply module and man-machine interface module 5 of ECG signals, the sampling frequency is usually set parts. The monitoring terminal completes the acqui- in 500Hz. sition and processing of ECG signal by the wireless module, real-time transmission to the monitoring 3.2 center server, so as to realize remote wireless real- The circuit design of TC35 time monitoring on the real significance of ECG. TC35i GSM module is industrial GSM module supports a Chinese short information, work in EGSM900 and GSM1800 dual band, the power range is 3.1 The acquisition module of ECG data 3.3 ~ 4.8V, TC35i data interface can be two-way The bandwidth of the human ECG signal is transmission of instructions and data through the AT 0.05Hz ~ 100Hz (sometimes as high as 1KHz) AC command, the baud rate is 300b/s ~ 115kb/s, auto- signal, the amplitude only is mV level, the signal need matic baud rate is 1.2kb/s ~ 115kb/s. TC35i is com- to be enlarged a thousand times, it reaches V in order posed of power supply module (ASIC), flash memory, to facilitate observation by A/D conversion. So setting ZIF connector, an antenna interface is composed of the secondary amplification gain is 200, where the 6 parts. Circuit design is shown in figure 4. use of the OPA2335 operational amplifier has wide

Figure 2. The hardware structure of monitoring terminal.

9781138028135_Chp_024.indd 90 02/04/15 11:31 AM Figure 5. μC/OS System structure diagram.

Figure 3. Operational amplifier circuit. 4.2 μC /OS- II transplant The STM32F407 processor meet the transplanted μC/ OS basic conditions, transplantedμC/OS to STM32F407 need to rewrite 3 associated with the processor file: OS_ CPU_A. ASM, OS_CPU. H and _CPU_C. The STM32F407 processor to meet the transplanted μC/OS basic conditions, port μC/OS to STM32F407 need to rewrite 3 associated with the processor file: OS_CPU_A. ASM, OS_CPU. H and _CPU_C. (1) OS_CPU_A. ASM rewrite the 4 processor functions associated with the S3C44BOX,which written in assembly language. The 4 functions are: OSStartHigh Rdy( ) run the highest priority ready task; OSCtxSw( ) : task priority switching function; OSInitCtxSw( ) : Interrupt task switching function; Figure 4. TC35 circuit. OSTickISR( ) : Tick interrupt service functions. (2) OS_CPU.H is written in C language and operating system-related functions, rewriting and settings 4 SOFTWARE DESIGN BASED ON mC/OS associated with OS_CPU.H the processor and compiler code. 4.1 The overall design of software (3) modify OS_CPU_C.C file, OS_CPU_C.C Because the terminal system achieve many basic file simply modify the task stack initialization functions, it has high requirement of real-time. So OSTaskStklnit () function, creating task a function we uses μC/OS embedded operating system as the of OSTaskStkInlt () is called by OSTaskCreate () or bottom software platform. System software using OSTaskCreateExT (), the task is responsible for ini- hierarchical design, software structure include: hard- tializing the stack structure, stack initialization after ware driver layer, operating system layer, application work, return to the new stack pointer. program interface (API) layer and application layer, structure of μ C/OS-II software and hardware system of the terminal system as shown in figure 5. 5 APPLICATION PROGRAM DESIGN The software design is mainly in the successful transplantation of μC/OS operating system, driver 5.1 The main program design design of each hardware module circuit, design tasks After it starts, the main function begins execution, and interrupt processing program, create a semaphore first initialize the ARM system, then the function call mailbox to complete communication between tasks, OSInit () to initialize the C/OS-II operating system, so as to control the entire terminal operation. the function call OSTaskCreate () to create a startup

9781138028135_Chp_024.indd 91 02/04/15 11:31 AM Figure 6. Flowchart of system software.

tasks, the function call OSStart () began running μ OSFlagPend(Flag_Gprs, (OS_FLAGS) C / OS, start the task execution. Software process is 3,OS_FLAG_WAIT_SET_ALL,0,&error) ; shown in ﬁgure 6. // Data processing and packaging; // Send location information data; ...... } 5.2 Task design void timer1ISR(void) Start task create sub-task, create a semaphore mailbox { communication tools. The sample code is as follows: OSIntEnter( ) ; // Call “enters the interrupt void TaskStart(void * pdata) service” function { OS_ENTER_CRITICAL( ) ; // Close the OSFlagPost(Flag_Gprs,(OS_FLAGS) interrupt 1,OS_FLAG_SET,&error); ...... / / set μC/OS clock interrupt vector OSTimeDlyHMSM(0,0,1,0) ; // wait for 1s OS_EXIT_CRITICAl ( ) ; // Open the interrupt OSIntExit( ) ; // Call “exit the interrupt service” OSStartlnit( ) ; //Initialize the statistical tasks function //Create additional tasks // The other interrupt handling code; //Create a semaphore mailbox communication } tools ...... } 6 CONCLUSIONS

5.3 GPRS task The terminal embedded operating system μC/OS in ARM processor, to achieve inter task communication TaskGPRS wait and read task of TaskGPS and timer and synchronous communication tools provided by ISR event set 1 flag to corresponding flag group, μC/OS. After tests, the system meets the requirement when receive corresponding flag, TaskGPRS task be of real-time multi task, realize the real-time moni- ready, and get control of CPU, calling the correspond- toring of vehicle. There is a certain interval between ing function of processing and packaging for sharing follow-up system task priority, convenient to add location data buer, and then to the monitor center new tasks for functional expansion; system software sends location information data. The sample code is using hierarchical design method, the application can as follows: be transplanted on dierent terminals, is convenient for system maintenance and further development, static void TaskGPRS(void * pdata) in accordance with the embedded software design { ...... thought, system software design method has a cer- pdata = pdata; tain reference value for the application of embedded while(1) system design { // If do not waiting for the event flag then to hang the task

9781138028135_Chp_024.indd 92 02/04/15 11:31 AM REFERENCES [4] Shao Beibei, et al. Embedded real-time operating system μ C/OS[M].Beijing: Beihang University press, [1] Ding Mingshi, Paul Liu, Zhang Lixin, et al. A design 2003, 05, pp. 582. of ECG telemonitoring terminal based on mobile [J]. [5] Ni Jianjun, Fan Yuezu, Li Songlin. Implementation of Journal of Tianjin University, 2004, 37(12): 1087. GPS vehicle monitoring using GSM Short Message [2] Peng Wei. Design and research of mobile vehicle mon- business [J]. Application of electronic technology, itoring mobile system based on GIS/GPS/GPRS [D]. 2005, (7): 53–55. Dalian University of Technology. 2005, pp. 77. [3] Liao Yikui. ARM Cortex-M4 embedded real development solution based on STM32F4[M]. Beijing University of Aeronautics and Astronautics Press.. 2013-07-01.

Design and implementation of remote data acquisition system based on embedded system

Bin Rao Hubei University of Science and Technology, Xianning, Hubei, China

ABSTRACT: Through the analysis of the overall structure of the system and the need for technical support, this paper designed the overall scheme of the data acquisition system, designs the corresponding hardware schematic diagram, PCB diagram and specific device selection scheme. Finally, the software part of the system include the ARM start programming, design protocol of RS485 communication software based on the Modbus and Ethernet communication program design. KEYWORDS: Ethernet; Modbus; Data acquisition; PT100; ARM; RS485

1 INTRODUCTION signals, after the signal is filter, gain adjustment, signal protection after conditioning by ARM IO port, With the development of information technology, the and use analog to digital converter of STM32 chip rise of the Internet of things technology, monitoring to complete data acquisition and conversion; data information demand increase both in the wild and will be stored to RAM internal memory chip after laboratory. In order to meet the needs of the market, conversion, then are processed on the output signals all kinds of data acquisition system emerge. But it by ARM, transmitted to the remote terminal for data failed to achieve the desired goal in the development processing, display and monitoring etc. via Ethernet. process, data acquisition technology of monitoring According to the different industrial environ- object, specific to the particular environment, such ment, the main function of the module design can be as the stability and real-time. According to the devel- divided into input signal power supply module, pro- opment needs of today’s market and data acquisi- cessing module, RS485 communication module, tion system, the paper combined with the Ethernet CAN bus module, RS232 communication module. C0rteX-m3 core processor with ARM latest and Mainly input signal is the analog signal collected stability, develop embedded remote data acquisition by the sensor temperature PT100, and then send it system based on the Internet of things, provides a to the digital signal processing module; the power scheme for the development of various fields of data supply system is mainly to complete the overall acquisition, and can be used as the future things net- requirements: power supply is 3V and 5V, and the working perception layer technology provides ideas processing module of power supply special need to in short distance applications. do DC-DC (such as RS485 communication module power supply); RS485 communication module and CAN module mainly complete data acquisition and 2 THE ARCHITECTURE DESIGN control using 485 bus and CAN bus function accord- AND ANALYSIS OF EMBEDDED ing to the different field test environment, at the same ACQUISITION SYSTEM time, the computer can realize direct control on the motherboard through RS485 and CAN bus; serial The basic frame diagram of the data acquisition communication module is mainly used to debug and system is as shown in Figure 1, the digital signal can test. The system adopted ARM chip of STM32 series be directly display on a terminal through the processor of sampling precision to achieve the digital quantity and serial port, and for industrial temperature data in 12 bits, and the use of its own AD module can meet acquisition process is as follows: the system receives the requirements of industrial field data acquisition, the PC commands through the Ethernet machine to without the need of external ADC chip, simplifying control data acquisition device, when the system the system control the timing, so that not only reduces receives the remote host command, to achieve the the complexity of system design, but also to meet industrial temperature data acquisition through PT100, price ratio requirements of the low power consump- temperature sensor translate effectively into electrical tion and high performance.

9781138028135_Chp_026.indd 95 03/04/15 9:45 AM Figure 1. Schematic diagram of the overall system design.

3 THE HARDWARE CORE PERIPHERY increased dramatically in the message, thus intro- CIRCUIT DESIGN FOR DATA duced the concept of network management and diag- ACQUISITION SYSTEMS nostic message. CAN network topology is as shown in figure 3. STM32F107VCT integrated basic extended 3.1 The hardware design of Modbus_RS485 bxCAN (Basic Extended CAN), which supports CAN communication interface protocol 2.0A and 2.0B. The system only needs to send and receive part of the circuit design of CAN, When RS485 bus is more than tens of meters or implements the data transmission function of CAN. kilometers, the communication requirements of its widely use RS485 serial bus standard. RS485 uses a half-duplex differential receiving and balance trans- 3.3 Hardware design of Ethernet mission, has higher ability to reject the common communication interface mode interference. In the embedded system products, RS485 bus interface complete contains: RS485 con- W5100 was a new network on chip launched by troller, bus transceiver, power supply module, access WIZnet, the chip controller has 10/100M Ethernet, the load design and isolation circuit part. The circuit is highest communication speed can achieve 25Mbps, shown in Figure 2. which contains the TCP/IP protocol stack, MAC and PHY, and support for ARP, TCP, PPPoE, ICMP, UDP, Ethernet protocol type. Adopting SPI interface mode, 3.2 The hardware design of CAN module and also add the indirect mode bus hardware con- The more network node of CAN, it can connect mul- nection, it can realize the hardware connection mode tiple CAN through the gateway, so the number has transformation through the use of interface mode, the

Figure 2. The RS485 bus interface.

9781138028135_Chp_026.indd 96 03/04/15 9:45 AM realization of STM32F107VCT and W5100 hardware 5 CONCLUSIONS connection. If in SPI mode, it can achieve the purpose of data communication as long as the 7 pin MCU sim- This paper aim at the sustainable development of the ple connected with W5100. The hardware implemen- acquisition system and multifunctional application, tation is shown in Figure 4. complete the hardware design of the whole system, the circuit integrate CAN, RS485, TCP and other functional modules and temperature sensor PT100. 4 SOFTWARE DESIGN OF DATA Using the latest Cortex-M3 kernel STM32F chip as ACQUISITION SYSTEM the main processor, the chip has 12 bit AD the internal conversion module, simplifies the complexity of The network communication between the Modbus hardware design, and test the feasibility of the system client and the Modbus server can also be directly through the design of 8 channel analog and digital connected by cross network line through a router acquisition module. connected. Figures 5 and 6 show the remote network communication.

Figure 4. The connect circuit of W5100 SPI mode.

Figure 3. The structure of CAN network topology.

Figure 5. The process flow chart of the TCP server mode.

9781138028135_Chp_026.indd 97 03/04/15 9:45 AM Figure 6. The process flow chart of the TCP client mode.

REFERENCES [3] Hu Jianjun. Research on Ethernet CSMA/CD original [J]. Science technology and engineering, 2008, 24(8), [1] Wang Guangwei, Zhang Hao Ran. Design of Embedded 6623–6628. Ethernet communication interface based on ARM and [4] Cao Yali, Song Aijuan, Li Xiaoming. Data acquisi- W5100 [J]. Microcomputer and application.2011, 30 tion and control testing system based on Ethernet [J]. (325): 50–52. Mechanical and electrical product development and [2] Li Wangbiao, Wu Yunping and so on. Design and innovation, 2009, 22 (6): 168–169. implementation of a low-power Ethernet data acquisition system [J]. Micro computer application, 2008, 29 (11): 43–46.

Discussion on the application of tablet auto pack system

Guang-Hui You Department of Pharmacy, People’s Hospital of Zhengzhou, Henan, China

ABSTRACT. Objective: Ideas and suggestions were provided for China’s hospitals to introduce automated drug unit-dose drug dispensing machine or tablet auto pack system. Method: The application value and related problems in introducing the machines were discussed through practice conclusion and literature review. Result: With the application of the tablet auto pack system, drugs pollution and cross infection in the prescribing and dosing process were prevented; the error rate in the dispensing and dosing process was reduced; the manual dispensing error frequency was lower from 2~3 times a day to once 2~3 days; prescription distribution errors occurred very rarely through by pharmacists’ verification. However, its application also resulted in new machine errors, operation costs and management difficulty. China’s hospitals must be based on rational demands, analyses and arguments to introduce the above machine, and also they are better to apply it to dispensing unit-dose drugs. Conclusion: Automatic dispensing is a development trend and the application of new machine will breed new problems and challenges, and therefore it is necessary to actively explore new management model. KEYWORDS: Automated Drug Unit-dose Drug Dispensing Machine; Pharmacy Dispensing; Medication Errors

1 INTRODUCTION a pollution to drugs if drugs are openly placed in medicine glasses for a long time. Automated drug unit-dose drug dispensing machine An automated drug dispensing machine consists of or tablet auto pack system refers to a kind of equip- several medicine chests placing hundreds of medicine ment, which can automatically dispense the unit- storage boxes and a printing, packaging system. dose drug or capsule into the same medicine bag According to the different size of drugs, each drug based on the doctor’s advice conveyed from hospital storage box can accommodate hundreds to thousands information system. This machine was developed of drugs. The solid preparation drugs demanded by and applied in the 1980s. In 2004, it was introduced a patient can be automatically packed into the same by Beijing Hospital attached to China’s Ministry of medicine bag per a unit dose without the manual Health for the first time and applied to dispensing dispensing process of pharmacist, so as to avoid the oral medicine [1]. In early 2007, People’s Hospital of bare, unclean air environment. Zhengzhou also introduced and applied two similar machines for pharmacy dispensing, making a fun- 2.2 Reducing the error rate in drug dispensing and damental change to the manual unit-dose drug dis- dosing process in inpatient area pensing. In this paper, a conclusion was made from Earlier foreign literature information showed that the the perspective of the managers involved in technol- error rate can be lower from 31.2% to 13.4% with the ogy implementation, so as to provide a reference. application a unit-dose drug dispensing model, even from once a day to once a week [4]. Foreign studies found that [5] 6.5 adverse drug 2 NECESSITIES FOR HOSPITAL TO APPLY events would occur among 100 inpatients and 28% of THE AUTOMATED TABLET AUTO them could be prevented; in the preventable adverse PACK SYSTEM FOR UNIT-DOSE DRUG drug events, the occurrence rates of the events about DISPENSING transcribing doctor’s advice (6%), events about dispensing (4%) and events about dosing (34%) were 2.1 Preventing drugs pollution and reducing the close to half of the total errors rate. cross infection of patients Automated drug dispensing machine not only can In China’s hospitals, a layer-to-layer environmental the automated operation of oral unit-dose drugs, but condition is absent in the traditional unit-dose drug also can reduce and completely eradicate the occur- dispensing, but pharmacists are hard to avoid directly rence of errors in multiple dispensing and dosing pro- touching drugs with unclean hands and thus make cesses, as shown in Fig.1.

9781138028135_Chp_027.indd 99 02/04/15 11:38 AM Table 1. The statistics and their causes of the tablet auto pack system errors.

Causes Number The of drug frequency varieties of errors to occur

Drug card is in medicine 34 114 box

Drugs are stringed in a bag 8 74

Figure 1. The cause-effect-diagram of medication errors Drugs are fractured 10 12 on filling inpatients’ prescriptions. Medicine bag is damaged 11 3 EVALUATION ON THE COST EFFECT OF or encapsulation is not APPLYING AUTOMATED TABLET AUTO complete PACK SYSTEM Foreign matters appear in 5 medicine bag In terms of the practical experience, the application effect of automated tablet auto pack system depends Other (system software 6 on the merits of the main pieces of the machine, problems) the perfection degree of the accessories, and the dispensing system operation management model In total 52 222 established based on automated conditions. The Evaluation on the cost effect of automated tablet 3.2 auto pack system is introduced from three aspects Reducing the manpower and improving the as below. quality of drugs in spite of operating cost increase The packing in bags and printing way used in automated 3.1 Reducing human errors after enhanced checks drug dispensing machine reduced the secondary in spite of machine errors pollution of drugs, but cost a lot of consumable items Automated tablet auto pack system can bring its own such as plastic paper for bags, thermal transfer rib- machine errors. For example, the two automated bons for printing, and machinery spare parts. These drug dispensing machines introduced by Changhai supplies and accessories are imported necessarily Hospital from Japan had cumulatively produced and have been not offered by China’s manufacturers about 300000 bags of unit-dose drugs after it worked so far. According to Shanghai’s medical price pol- normally for two months, but machine errors and the icy, hospitals have to bear the cost themselves, but errors found in the reviews by drug dispensing phar- shall not charge additional consumable items from macists still occurred. The common problems are patients. The cost of new consumables can reach 13, shown in table 1. 5000 yuan/year after the cost (65, 000 yuan) of med- The machine can automatically report errors if icine cups before the application of the machine is some hardware problems are caused by drugs. For cleared away, according to the current operating sta- example, errors can be processed and prevented tistics. Considering the machine purchasing price and timely by pharmacists if some irregular drugs such maintenance cost again, the total new additional cost as talcid and amlodipine besylate tablet are easy to is RMB 385000yuan/year, which is nearly equivalent jam in the falling process. However, drug fracture, to the labor cost of eight pharmacists according to the strings, bag damage, and foreign matters caused standard (i.e. the annual pay of an ordinary pharma- in the working process of the machine will make cist is 50,000 yuan in Shanghai). In the above cost the quantity of the drugs in bag inconsistent with calculation, however, the cost savings of hospitals or the reality or the varieties of drugs wrong, and the patients, which are caused by the adverse drug events total probability for the occurrence of these errors but may be reduced by automated drug dispensing is 0.36‰. The errors can be found after a careful machine, are not taken into consideration. Two stud- bag-to-bag review by pharmacists. That is to say, ies in the United States found that each adverse event the errors that may be caused by the machine to can increase the treatment cost of two hospital stays 2 bags can be found by pharmacists a day. or $2000 to each patient on average [8, 9].

100

9781138028135_Chp_027.indd 100 02/04/15 11:38 AM 3.3 Improving the drug dispensing efficiency and 1 If the manual unit-dose drug dispensing man- environment in spite of increasing management power cost is high and a lot of pharmacists should difficulty dispense drugs and nurses should check and get drugs, and also the work load is very heavy and On the surface, automated drug dispensing machine the drug dispensing errors are very frequent only has solved the low manual operation efficiency to occur. in the drug dispensing process, and it still has a series 2 It is an urgent need to implement the concentrative of problems such as batch drug tracking and effective drug distribution, reduce the frequency and time management, the temperature control, light-proof, and of nurses in inpatient area to get the medicine from insect-resistance, and accurate inventory after drugs dispensaries for inpatients, and increase the num- are in open stock, and difficulty in reviewing dispensed ber of bedside nurses as well as the working time. drugs in the unit-dose drug dispensing management. 3 As a demonstrative teaching or scientific research At the same time, the problems such as the increase of hospital, it needs a lot of automated machines in consumable cost, the summary on the automatically order to improve the automated level of medical dispensed drugs and the manually dispensed drugs in treatment and drug supply, explore the new man- the doctor’s advice for the same patient, the automated agement model, and narrow the gap with the peers machine operation training and use management, and in the developed countries. the start-up and processing of emergency prepared- ness after big faults are caused because of the application of automated drug dispensing machine. 4.2 Whether the hospital information system can Drug dispensing in hospital, however, is a multi-link support the application of new machine operation process, including pharmaceutical prep- In hospital information system, the electronic entry aration, drug dispensing, review, inventory, and dis- and information transmission of the prescriptions tribution, etc. In this process, drug dispensing is the in inpatient area have been available. The system most important. Theoretically, the unit-dose drug works stably and also owns the ability to develop packaging speed of automated drug dispensing mach- subsequently, which can realize the seamless inter- ine can reach 60bags/min, more than three times of face with automated machine system. the maximum manual drug dispensing speed (18cups/ A new unit-dose dispensing system easy for min), so that the efficiency is greatly improved and prescription information processing, bar code the demand for the peak of clinical drug use is ful- reviewing, and accurate information feedback can be filled. Moreover, automated machine occupies a small established, which can adapt to the process reengi- area and makes it easy for pharmacy layout because neering and optimization under the new management it can centralize drug dispensing, so that the working model. environment is significantly improved. 4.3 Whether the machine characteristics and quality can meet the requirements 4 THE STRATEGIES FOR CHINA’S HOSPITALS TO INTRODUCE AUTOMATED Currently, there have been many Chinese agencies DRUG DISPENSING MACHINE AND THE to sell automated drug dispensing machines. There KEY POINTS IN ITS APPLICATION are the machines from Germany, the United States, Japan, and South Korea for hospitals to choose, and From the above analysis, there are gains and losses to they are different in price and performance. the application of automated drug dispensing mach- At the same time, some additional features, ine in China. Certainly, the factors necessary for a peripheral accessories, and maintenance methods hospital to consider are much more to introduce such of automated drug dispensing machines are also a machine. The manager and decision maker of a the factors necessary to consider in machine intro- hospital should also consider the following aspects duction or price negotiation. Additional features on whether to introduce automated drug dispensing such as medicine box obturator, light protection to machine, in addition to determining if it can sustain prevent drug discoloration, complete machine tem- the purchasing price and use cost. perature control, and automated drug classification can ensure the quality of the drugs in the machine. Peripheral accessories such as small tablets cutting 4.1 Whether the demand for introducing the machine, automatic medicine counting machine, and machine is urgent automatic drug dismounting machine can reduce a The urgent conditions of the demand are concluded large amount of inventory and pharmaceutical prep- generally in the following: aration work.

101

9781138028135_Chp_027.indd 101 02/04/15 11:38 AM 4.4 Whether it is applied to hospital dispensing or increase if it is helpful for improving medication outpatient dispensing quality, reducing medication errors, and securing patients’ medication safety. At present, some Chinese hospitals apply automated drug dispensing machine to outpatient dispensing [2] and let many patients bring a lot of drugs in REFERENCES bags to home. This plays a very good effect in terms of the convenience for patients to use drugs, the [1] Anacleto TA, Perini E, Rosa MB, et al. Medication improvement to the accuracy of dosage, and reduc- Errors and Drug-dispensing Systems in the Hospital ing the pharmaceutical waste. However, more medi- Pharmacy [J]. Clinics, 2005, 60(4): 325. cation errors may occur because of the difficulties in [2] Bates DW, Cullen DJ, Laird N, Petersen LA, et al. pharmacist review, no notes for the drug bag batch Incidence of Adverse Drug Events and Potential number and expiry, the changes of stored drug var- Adverse Drug Events: Implications for Prevention [J]. ieties, and possible errors for patients to read the bag JAMA, 1995, 274(1): 29. information, etc. Especially considering the more [3] Shirley KL. Effect of an Automated Dispensing System on Medication Administration Time [J]. Am J Health significant increase of consumable cost, automated Syst Pharm, 1999, 56(16):1542. unit-dose drug packing should not be used in the out- [4] Dean BS, Allan EL, Barber ND, et al. Comparison of patient service if there are no special requirements. Medication Errors in an American and British Hospital [J]. Am J Health Syst Pharm, 1995, 52(21): 2543. [5] Classen DC, Pestotnik SL, Evans RS, et al. Adverse 5 CONCLUSIONS Drug Events in Hospitalized Patients. Excess Length of Stay, Extra Costs, and Attributable Mortality [J]. JAMA, 1997, 277(4): 301. On the premise of taking patients as the center, a [6] Bates DW, Spell N, Cullen DJ, Burdick E, et al. The medical institution should seriously consider and Costs of Adverse Drug Events in Hospitalized Patients. apply a new technology to updating its own manage- Adverse Drug Events Prevention Study Group [J]. ment model under the condition of appropriate cost JAMA, 1997, 277(4): 307.

102

Design and implementation of FTP service resource sharing platform based on LV S load balancing technology

Yan-sheng Chen & Wen-luan Zhang Guangdong Industry Technical College, Guangzhou, China Jiang-tao Ren School of Software, SUN YAT-SEN University, Guangzhou, China Zhong-kun Wu Guangdong Industry Technical College, Guangzhou, China

ABSTRACT: FTP service resource sharing platform in campus networks is being pressed by the concurrent access to large-scale data. In this paper, a FTP service resource sharing platform for three-layer structural server cluster was designed based on the integration of LVS load balancing technology and the improvement of the existing network technology and also implemented in a real college as example. The result of the evaluation on the related performance parameters of the platform showed that the platform scheme designed and implemented in this paper was better than the previous one. This is of practical significance to the development of the efficient resource sharing platform construction technology under the condition of the limited resources. KEYWORDS: LVS; Load Balancing Technology; FTP Service Resource

1 INTRODUCTION 2 THE FACTORS TO AFFECT LOAD BALANCE AND THE CONCEPTION FTP service resource sharing platform in campus networks is pressed by many di culties. Under 2.1 The factors to affect load balance the condition of limited resources, speciﬁcally, it 2.1.1 needs to add load balancing FTP service sched- Real server In this design, two real servers were required at least uler into multiple independent servers to produce to conﬁgure in the resource sharing platform, so as a server cluster. This can eectively improve the to implement the function of load balancing; the real reuse of hardware and thus reduce the cost of hard- servers would make a corresponding response after ware upgrades, but there are still many restricting receiving a request from the scheduling server, and factors such as the real server, network equipment then acquire the data demanded by users from RAID and storage system to aect load balance. Qingjiang server and then returns it to users via Router. ZENG [1], Wen QIN [2], and Maotao XIE [3] et al presented their own views about how to implement the integrated application of 64-bit Ubuntu 10.04 2.1.2 Network devices Server network operating system, LVS/DR schedul- Gigabit interface was applied to the switches in the ing service [4], link aggregation technology, SNMP resource sharing platform in order to provide high monitoring and Heartbeat Heartbeat monitoring, transmission speed; the adapters in two networks were RAID5 disk array, and other technologies or soft- aggregated into a logical link using link aggregation ware based on the cluster system load balancing technology on the basis of above gigabit network strategy of Linux Virtual Server (LVS) scheduling adapters in server, so that the bandwidth was doubled. service, so as to design and implement the scheme for FTP service resource sharing platform in cam- 2.1.3 Storage system pus networks to support the concurrent access to The resource sharing platform was to provide large-scale data. teachers and students with service using FTP server,

103

9781138028135_Chp_028.indd 103 02/04/15 12:23 PM in which the demand on the speed of reading the disk 3.1 Load balance concurrent data would be higher if there were many Load balancing layer was mainly responsible for the users to access. Thus, the speed to read the data stored distribution of FTP control flow. It was composed of in the disk of the system might be one of the bottle- two Linux scheduling servers of Ubuntu 10.04 Server. necks of system [5]. The two servers were configured as the main standby structures with the same functions, and they would 2.1.4 The conception of FTP resource sharing play a role of scheduling by replacing the primary platform server if the primary was unavailable [7]. According to the existing hardware and software resources conditions of campus network and a deep 3.2 Real server analysis on the demand of the example college for campus network, a new resource sharing platform The real-server layer was composed of multiple was implemented by setting up Linux Virtual Server. independent real servers. It was specifically respon- The resources in FTP sharing server were reasonably sible for receiving FTP’s access request, and then and eectively integrated and scheduled through add- requesting storage space or file from the storage ing load balancing FTP service scheduler technology server according to FTP’s read-write question and into the platform. By improving the e ciency of the finally sending the processing results to the client. protocol stack (TCP/IP) and the I/O speed of service processor and combining with a balanced NAT sched- 3.3 Storage server uling mechanism, the whole system was equipped The storage server layer was composed of a server with a high data throughput, the above strategy was with RAID5 disk array. It was responsible for con- applied to the actual environment, and the outlet flow verting file access request to disk access request and was converted to the internal flow. then returning the processing results to the real server.

3.4 3 FTP SERVICE RESOURCE SHARING The typical download data process design for PLATFORM DESIGN SCHEME FTP service resource sharing platform As shown in Fig.1, FTP cluster was presented as a Server cluster was designed with a three-layer struc- single FTP server (IP: 192.168.1.110), and its uplink ture [6]: LR (load balance), RS (Real Server), and SS data ﬂow was as follows if the client sends FTP access (Storage Server). By integrating the above situation request to the cluster: analysis, the overall design scheme of the resource (1) FTP control flow got to the load balancing sharing platform was as shown in Fig.1. server (IP: 172.16.128.200)

Figure 1. The resource sharing platform scheme.

104

9781138028135_Chp_028.indd 104 02/04/15 12:23 PM (2) The load balancer choose a requesting real 4.3 The installation of the resource sharing server (e.g. 172.16.128.210) according to the mini- platform based on load balance mum connection power scheduling algorithm and The installation and configuration of scheduling then forwarding the control flow request server was as follows: (3) The real server read the requested file resources (1) Install link aggregation software, Linux Virtual from the storage server if it received the forwarded Server’s scheduling service, SNMP monitoring soft- request ware: sudo apt-get install ipvsadm ifenslave-2.6 snmpd (2) Boot bonding module and aggregate two giga network adapters into one logical link 4 THE IMPLEMENTATION OF FTP SERVICE sudo echo bonding >> /etc/modules RESOURCE SHARING PLATFORM bond-mode 0 bond-miimon 100 4.1 The selection of network operating system (3) Configure real IP and virtual IP Linux operating system’s Ubuntu 10.04 Server was auto bond0 significantly advantageous to improve the business iface bond0 inet static capabilities of FTP service resource sharing platform. address 172.18.128.200 (1) Support the hardware architecture of the server netmask 255.255.255.0 (2) Low requirements for the server hardware up ifenslave bond0 eth0 eth1 resources down ifenslave -d bond0 eth0 eth1 (3) Fast patch repair auto bond0:1 (4) Good privilege management iface bond0:1 inet static (5) Stable system address 192.168.1.110 (6) Less viruses to Linux netmask 255.255.255.0 (7) High automation efficiency gateway 192.168.1.254 (8) Low overall cost (4) Configure LVS/DR load balance technol- Based on the above advantages, Linux operating ogy and apply the minimum link-number strategy; system’s Ubuntu 10.04 Server was chosen as the net- the IP addresses of the backend real server were work operating system of FTP service resource shar- 172.18.128.210 and 172.18.128.211; allow users ing platform. request to the backend real server sudo ipvsadm -A -t 192.168.1.110:21 -s rr sudo ipvsadm -a -t 192.168.1.110:21 -r 4.2 The installation of network operating system 172.18.128.210 -g -w 1 Load scheduling server and real server were imple- sudo ipvsadm -a -t 192.168.1.110:21 -r mented as Ubuntu 10.04 Server in the resource 172.18.128.211 -g -w 1 sharing platform, so that the system could provide sudo ipvsadm -Ln hardware resources to the platform to the maximum sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.all.send_redirects = 1 and only default the installation of the basic operat- The installation and configuration of standby ing system and two modules (openssh-server remote scheduling server was as follows. Linux Virtual management and iptables firewall). In the following, Server’s scheduling service, link aggregation soft- the partition of the disk installed operating system ware, SNMP monitoring software and Heartbeat built in the server was only introduced, as shown in monitor software were also installed for standby table 1. scheduling server. The configuration different from those of the master scheduling server was as follows. Table 1. The partition of the system. Configure Heartbeat monitor software: sudo apt-get install heartbeat Partition Specification Capacity Note sudo cat /etc/ha.d/haresources /boot Boot area 1G System boots lb1 192.168.1.110 lvs.sh ldirectord file sudo cat /etc/ha.d/ha.cf ucast bond0 172.18.128.200 / Root area 28G System file The standby scheduling server wound execute script lvs.sh if it did not listened to the heartbeat of /swap Interaction 16G Twice server the master scheduling server (72.18.128.200), and area memory then let all other machines on the network know its virtual IP address was 192.168.1.110 by sending /data Data storage Dree Store data area space GARP broadcast and also create an IPVS table like the master server.

105

9781138028135_Chp_028.indd 105 02/04/15 12:23 PM The installation and configuration of disk array #max_clients (the maximum number of concurrent server was as follows. In array Server, new 6 SAS users is 400) disks of 500GB were used to constitute a RAID5 disk max_clients=400 array of 2.5TB for storing the data of the resource max_per_ip=3 sharing platform. local_enable=YES (1) The command for the configuration of the disk write_enable=YES array: local_umask=022 mdadm –create –verbose /dev/md0 –level=5 anon_umask=022 –raid-devices=6 /dev/sd[bcdefg] anon_upload_enable=NO (2) Configure SNMP monitoring and change pub- anon_mkdir_write_enable=NO lic defaulted by community to jsj for improving the dirmessage_enable=YES security; monitor the storage space of the disk array xferlog_enable=YES server using cacti monitor server outside the platform xferlog_file=/var/log/vsftpd.log sudo cat /etc/snmp/snmpd.conf xferlog_std_format=YES # sec.name source community idle_session_timeout=600 com2sec paranoid default jsj data_connection_timeout=120 The installation and configuration of real serv- ftpd_banner=WelcometoFTP. ers was as follows. Real Servers provided resource chroot_local_user=YES sharing service and were not required to install Linux ls_recurse_enable=YES Virtual Server scheduling services. However, SNMP secure_chroot_dir=/var/run/vsftpd monitoring software, VSFTP server, link aggrega- pam_service_name=vsftpd tion, and NFS network file system were necessarily rsa_cert_file=/etc/ssl/certs/ssl-cert-snakeoil.pem installed. rsa_private_key_file=/etc/ssl/private/ssl- (1) Install VSFTP server and mount NFS network cert-snakeoil.key file system in remote directories The configuration of movieadmin was as follows: sudo apt-get install vsftpd db4.8-util nfs-common #local_root (FTP root directory for movieadmin) (2) Mount the hard disk(/srv/raid) of the array local_root=/srv/raid/ftproot/public/movie server (172.18.128.239) to the local /srv/raid via /etc/ #write_enable (directory read is permitted) fstab write_enable=YES sudo cat /etc/fstab anon_world_readable_only=NO 172.18.128.239:/srv/raid /srv/raid nfs rw, auto 0 0 #anon_upload_enable (upload is permitted) (3) Configure the resource sharing platform users anon_upload_enable=YES according to privileges #anon_mkdir_write_enable (directory creation is Movieadmin was the administrator of movie permitted) directory; ftpadmin was the administrator of resource anon_mkdir_write_enable=YES sharing platform. Teachers and students accessing to anon_other_write_enable=YES the resource sharing platform at ordinary times could anon_umask=022 use an anonymous account, and the root directory was Ftpadmin and movieadmin were consistent in user /SRV/raid/ftproot/public. They only had the privilege privileges, but different in root directory, suggest- to read. The default configuration was applied. The ing their scope of management was different. The basic configuration of VSFTP: detailed configuration was as follows: listen=YES local_root=/srv/raid/ftproot listen_port=21 write_enable=YES tcp_wrappers=YES anon_world_readable_only=NO guest_enable=YES anon_upload_enable=YES guest_username=virtual anon_mkdir_write_enable=YES virtual_use_local_privs=YES anon_other_write_enable=YES #user_config_dir (the directory of user profile) anon_umask=022 user_config_dir=/srv/raid/ftp_users #pasv_min_port (TCP minimum port number used 5 TEST ON THE PERFORMANCES OF FTP in passive mode) SERVICE RESOURCE SHARING PLATFORM pasv_min_port=10000 #pasv_max_port(TCP maximum port number 5.1 used in passive mode) Test on the transmission rate pasv_max_port=11000 In this paper, the bandwidth of the FTP service use_localtime=YES resource sharing platform was tested with network anonymous_enable=YES performance test tool iperf.

106

9781138028135_Chp_028.indd 106 02/04/15 12:23 PM Two groups of testing data results were as shown in disk array technology was applied. In Fig.3, the com- Fig.2: the average transmission rate was 816.3Mbit/s parison between the results of the tests on the disk read before the establishment of FTP service resource rate before and after RAID5 disk array was applied and sharing platform, but became 1802.85Mbit/s after the results of the tests on the disk read rates of two the establishment; the transmission rate of a single groups of RAID5 disk array servers were shown. server was D(X)=3000Mbit/s2 compared with the The test results showed that the FTP service cluster server variance. The test results showed that resources sharing platform scheme designed and the network transmission rate was improved after the implemented in this paper was better than the previous establishment of FTP service resource sharing plat- resources sharing platform, and it was helpful for sup- form, thus making the reuse rate and access efficiency porting the concurrent access to concurrent data. of the resources increased.

6 CONCLUSIONS 5.2 Test on the disk read rate Two groups of disk read rates were respectively tested According to the problem of the concurrent access to for 8 times using disk test tool HDparm under the con- large-scale data processed by FTP service resource dition of disk 24 x 7 operations before and after RAID5 sharing platform in campus network, a FTP service

Figure 2. The test results of FTP service resource sharing platform’s transmission rate.

Figure 3. The test results of FTP service resource sharing platform’s disk read rate.

107

9781138028135_Chp_028.indd 107 02/04/15 12:23 PM resource sharing platform with a three-layer structural [2] Wen QIN. The Implementation of LVS-based Load server cluster was designed and implemented. The Balancing Technology in VOD System [J]. Journal of testes proved that the results from the designed Shenzhen Institute of Information Technology, 2008, scheme were better than that before the implementa- 6 (4): 57–60. tion of the scheme. [3] Maotao XIE, Zhongshan SONG. Study on LVS Cluster System Load Balancing Strategy [J]. Computer Engineering and Science, 2006, 28 (8): 30–31. [4] Jipeng WANG, Longfa FAN, Jianglong LI. Dynamic ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Feedback Scheduling Algorithm in LVS Cluster [J]. Computer Engineering, 2005, 24 (19): 40–42, 58. Fund Projects: The Annual Research Project 2012 of [5] Yuyan LIU, Mingyu SHEN. The Application of Load the “Twelfth Five-year” Education Scientiﬁc Research Balancing Technology to Network Services [J]. Journal of Guangdong Province (2012JK089); the natural of Hefei University of Technology (Natural Science science foundation at the school level (KJ2013110) Edition), 2007, 30 (12): 1592–1595. [6] Quansheng GUO, Jiwu SHU, Xiping MAO, Dongchan WEN, Weiming ZHENG. Load Dynamic Balance Design and Implementation based on LVS System REFERENCES [J]. Journal of Computer Research and Development, 2004, 12 (6): 923–929. [1] Qingjiang ZENG. Load Balance System Design [7] Wentao ZHU, Peilin Hong, Jinsheng LI. Load Balance Scheme [J]. Computer Engineering and Design, 2009, Based on Linux Virtual Server [J]. Computer engineer- (19): 4404–4405. ing, 2002, 12 (12): 55–57.

108

Design and implementation of security mechanism of network bank

Yang Shen Dalian Vocational & Technical College, Dalian, Liaoning, China

ABSTRACT: This paper discussed the key technology about the development of Internet banking and online banking research mission, and with reference to online banking authentication of commercial banks and considering all the characteristics of the business, according to data encryption project of the bank on the net requirements, design and developed a modular architecture of a single bidirectional SSL net bank system. The model system has been tested; the test results show that the system has good performance both in response time and bearing load capacity. KEYWORDS: Online Banking; Security Architecture; Client Security

1 INTRODUCTION Bank of the backbone network intrusion detection, anomaly detection and misuse detection algorithm, With the wide use of information technology and we proposed to use the fingerprint authentication make a spurt of progress of science, the Internet method, and combined with fingerprint authenti- has gradually become a necessary tool for people cation technology and Internet banking system, to to contact each other and business. In recent years, replace the traditional password authentication tech- a large number of Internet technology used in bank- nology, solving the defects of inherent security passing and gradually mature, the overall popularity of word to meet online banking security requirements, the Internet bank has played an important role, and realize a complete set of online banking solutions. become one of the most important business of the bank. Especially the appearance of J2EE technology to the online banking system in structure design provides a good architecture, J2EE has two core con- 2 THE MODEL OF SECURITY MECHANISM cepts: one is the level of thought, is a component of BASED ON J2EE the thought. Especially the J2EE technology in MVC model fully embodies the two concepts of it. It can As shown in Figure 1, the client system will be make the presentation layer, business logic layer and identity authentication through fingerprint identifica- the control layer separated, and each in the business tion method and server, and through matching infor- layer; business is divided into individual components, mation and authorized user data in the database, if the so it has high expansibility and maintainability that match is successful, safe landing, otherwise it is said can be applied to the online banking system at the login fails, the system administrator has the highest same time, due to the current network hackers and authority for the necessary management and mainte- Trojan virus is rampant, the hardware and software nance of the database operation. will cause some damage, therefore the safety prob- Intrusion detection system is the safety protection lem of the bank on the net has become a problem that detection method by real time intrusion detection cannot be ignored. method and non real time intrusion, and manages According to the existing Internet banking system, intrusion information through the audit database, in improve the security of the network, and realize a sim- order to find and remove the risk data. In the J2EE ple, low cost, security mechanism and the customer model, we use the EJB describe banking business, be as a network identity to validate access, to consider using SERVLET as the control layer for access the security mechanism must improved security as control, using JSP as the final page display in VIEW the premise, through the analysis and Research on the layer.

109

9781138028135_Chp_029.indd 109 03/04/15 12:40 PM Figure 1. The business model. 3 INTRUSION DETECTION SCHEME FOR term data resources is a very long period of time ONLINE BANK do not change the information. 4 Intelligent network agents: it is the core of intru- According to the intrusion detection method that sion detection system. It makes intrusion detection previous study and discussion, reference the others filtering suspicious data through data, ensure the ideas, we design KIDS system model, the prototype is safety of data flow. And according to the rules of a kind of intrusion detection system. The system uses intrusion detection to analyze the data, in order to the console through the intelligent network agent; the ensure the security of data communication. data were analyzed using Libpcap API function to read the network data in real time, the console sent The intrusion detection system deployment can the results to the analysis of system response in a provide external security for Internet banking secu- timely manner; the response system can make corre- rity transaction hardware environment. Ensure that sponding response. the Internet banking transaction security, is one of The intrusion detection system framework is the important aspects of the security mechanism of shown in Figure 2. Internet banking. 3.1 Management module of enroll and logout for enterprise Usually, the online banking enterprise version has no registration function, so the enterprise version of the online banking registration is accomplished by the counter at the bank, but when the enterprise enrolls, business users can conduct their own related operations through the bank on the net, then the online bank, the background management program requires the adoption of ADMIN in the background mainte- Figure 2. Framework of intrusion detection system. nance related the enterprise information. The corporate enrolls application process is shown in Figure 3.

The framework consists of 7 parts, the main part of the introduction is: 1 The main console: It mainly completes receiving events and analysis of results, and send commands to the system response and the configuration and processing of parameters. 2 The event collection and analysis: It mainly completes analysis of proxy data for each intelligent network, and preserve corresponding analysis data to the database for console query and call. 3 Log data: the information data of interaction of the intelligent network agents in the system are saved in the log database, there are two types of a general data resource, the other is a long-term data resource, data resource is generally high real data information near section time, and long Figure 3. Flow chart of enterprise account.

110

9781138028135_Chp_029.indd 110 03/04/15 12:40 PM The description of the class: Com.key.admin.execution.Logi is a COMMON class, which can realize the processing of the page of data information, and then transferred to the page with the LoginedLoader class, so as to realize the Registry class to handle, through this process, Registry data will be added to the database table, so as to realize the enterprise users to the backstage management system registration.

3.2 Application of logout for enterprise The main function of logout application module’s is to take counter registered account information of enterprise publish to the corporate Internet Figure 4. Flow chart of an adjunct organization. banking through a method of operation, Before the operation, we must determine whether the user 3.3 Business of different remittance has signed up in the bank enterprise for customers, Part of the business at present, remittances and oper- this step is a prerequisite to note, For the customer ation of the business process for enterprises and per- has become the bank’s subscriber who put forward sonal is distinct, and therefore must be distinguish logout apply that can be passed, or cannot perform relevant treatment based on user state; then according this operation. The logout application process is to the corresponding business process each of the shown in Figure 4. different types of information. The remittance transfer LoginLoader.java is the COMMON class, the process is as shown in figure 5. pretreatment process completes the data processing The description of class: about the page, and then through its LoginLoader transfer related pages to complete the relevant oper- 1 TransferList.Java remote: specific transaction ation. HangAccount.Java for process verification and processing class for remittance business; data users to hang. AccountInformation. java to con- 2 TransferDetail.Java: display data of transaction firm hang information and update the database. information;

Figure 5. Flow chart of remittance and transfer.

111

9781138028135_Chp_029.indd 111 03/04/15 12:40 PM 4 SYSTEM TEST

Test tools used in this thesis is the Application Center Test, using 8 clients, each client can simulate 200,150,120,100 connections, the running time is 30 minutes, were running three user scenario (the home page, the background management interface, and so on several main interface). In response to the Figure 7. The statistical chart of response time. situation of view different connection server, use performance, network bandwidth of the server, and make time and average response time. From the chart, we statistics. The system pressure statistics are shown in can see that the maximum response time is relatively Figure 6. large jitter, and the other two evaluation test variables relatively stable.

REFERENCES

[1] AI Fei, Cao Xianbin, Ye Jing. Design and research of a new generation of Internet banking system infrastructure [J]. Microelectronics and computer, 2006, 23 (5): 179–182186. [2] Zhang Wei. The design of online bank B2C electronic payment system [J]. Wen Hui science and education, 2007, (8): 189–189. [3] Guo Yong Yan Hao Chang Fu. Wuhan commercial bank network bank system design and development [J]. Electrical brain development and application, 2005, 18 Figure 6. Pressure diagram of click on the system. (8): 25–27. [4] Ge Yao, Zhu Qingsheng. Design and development The response time statistics is as shown in figure 7. of online bank service system based on .NET [J]. It can be seen effect of eight clients to the server Computer engineering, 2003, 29 (11): 149–150185. pressure from Fig. 6. Figure 7 shows the overall [5] Ma Jun, Li Yulin. Daquan SQL language and database response time from March 24 to March 28, including operation technology [M]. Beijing: Publishing House the minimum response time and maximum response of electronics industry, 2008, pp.530.

112

Design and implementation of computer network traffic monitoring

Lihui Song Yanching Institute of Technology; Hebei Langfang, China Haicun Zhao The Northern Investment Group Co, Ltd. Beijing, China

ABSTRACT: This paper focuses on the key technologies of P2P and network traffic monitoring, and on basis of it, the paper design a new P2P traffic monitoring system. Through the design and implementation of computer network traffic monitoring system based on C/S mode to achieve automatic control, maintenance, and monitoring of network traffic, the program is suitable for the current engineering software to monitor a network application environment. From the network users and network operators perspective, monitoring of network traffic will improve scientific and reasonable of network management that has important research value. KEYWORDS: Monitoring system; Network traffic; ASP.NET; Web technology

1 INTRODUCTION PPStream and so on, has become the Internet users online entertainment in the best way of life. Network traffic is the network transmission amount of data. As to the design of traffic and road, accord- In order to improve the quality of service, this paper ing to the number flow and the width of road. With in-depth research and analyze network traffic control constantly enrich and development of network appli- and network traffic requirements. According to the cations, the design of the network is very necessary, user the excessive use of cyber source, resulting in the according to computer network traffic, network traffic broadband network facing greater pressure. Operators also become complex and varied, several of the most must take measures to meet the needs of users, thereby common network traffic data are described below: limiting the loss of customers, but also improve the user experience, open up new sources of income. Then 1 The FTP flow: FTP has been one of the most it introduces the network flow analysis system; and frequently used application user services, from with the research on the equipment and system. the beginning of the Internet appears. The importance of although decreased, but with the advent of the P2P applications, is still an important 2 THE GENERAL DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM application and the way users download files cannot be replaced. The complete P2P traffic monitoring system mainly 2 The HTTP flow: It has already replaced the main includes five modules. Respectively, flow identifica- application of traditional file download FTP proto- tion module, flow control module, flow management col by the Internet, HTTP is the most widely used module, database module and server module, the sys- protocols. With YouTube and other video sharing tem framework is shown in Figure 1. sites such as pull, in the past four years, HTTP based network flow for the first time in more than 1 Flow identification module: mainly responsible for a P2P application traffic. the accuracy recognition and classification of P2P 3 VoIP flow: VoIP flow of the traffic on the Internet flow through the device, accepted the policy infor- is also very worthy of administrator attention, mation flow management module, the manage- global IP phone users in 2006, increasing from ment module to flow to the recognition results etc.. 10300000 to 18700000, an increase of 83%. VoIP 2 The flow control module is mainly responsible call volume has reached all call volume in 2007 for the P2P flow control strategy, according to the after the 75%. strategy execution, sending corresponding control 4 The flow rate of Streaming: live and on-demand message to the network, at the same time to collect video, the flow also increases constantly, with traffic information, and report to the traffic man- the emergence of video software such as PPLive, agement module.

113

9781138028135_Chp_030.indd 113 03/04/15 10:35 AM Figure 1. The overall architecture of P2P traffic monitoring system based on DPI.

3 Flow management module: is mainly responsible module, responsible for the most common P2P for the analysis of statistical data, and the statisti- software protocol identification; there is the DFI cal analysis of the data stored in the database, and recognition module, responsible for some encryp- according to the control strategy of demand. tion or to identify P2P traffic rules characteristics 4 The database module: database module provides is not obvious. The port identification module is data storage strategy, flow configuration data, equip- mainly for recognition and matching common port ment management information and alarm informa- some P2P software, or several common dynamic tion and provide the related data query function. ports, and then flow to the DM sub module identifi- 5 The background service module: the background cation. The DPI recognition module uses to analyze server module and network management (user the application level load, and then matching and interaction). The background server module protocol rule base model and get the recognition mainly provides a better human-computer result. P2P flow DPI recognition module failed to interaction interface, provide flow data query, log identify through into the DFI recognition module management and alarm management and other behavior recognition to improve the system recog- functions, to facilitate the network administrators nition rate, to solve the P2P identification problem to better understand the cyber source; provide of high occupancy resources. The process flow strategic management functions, to facilitate the identification module is shown in Figure 2. administrator to configure policy information. DPI recognition module: When DPI recognition module run, it is first derived DPI libraryfeatures corresponding feature words stored in the two- 3 THE DETAILED DESIGN OF P2P FLOW dimensional Hash list, then the module calls CONTROL FUNCTION the corresponding value matching method, the feature list stored value into the feature matching 1 The detailed design of traffic identification module algorithm, the DPI module proceed deep packet Traffic identification module mainly consists inspection; at the same time, the module from the of three modules, one is the port identification shared memory area for critical reading pretreat- module, is mainly responsible for the port to iden- ment request message, once read a message, read tify the P2P software; two is the DPI recognition after the release, buffer, and call the corresponding

Figure 2. The processing flowchart of module traffic identification.

114

9781138028135_Chp_030.indd 114 03/04/15 10:35 AM matching algorithm to read after the end of the control module, interference and other parts of message scanning recognition. At this time, scan- the newspaper library, interactive process between ning identification work for a message to end, each module and system running process is shown have a message identification work the next, until in Figure 3. the user end DPI scanning. Finally, the P2P traffic The function of identifying configuration module is identification results have been identified and sent to identify the network traffic, network traffic data to the P2P flow management module, another part recognition judgment need for interference control. will fail to identify the P2P stream in DFI recogni- The system needs to be initialized configuration, con- tion module testing. figuration control card, by monitoring the IP address DFI recognition modules: feature data storage P2P range, select the direction of interference (client, flow DFI feature in the library, including the flow server or both interference); send packet frequency behavior of statistical data on the time axis, such as interference. The second is to identify the network data flow rate, average packet size, duration, etc.. traffic, analysis of the flow contains the type of traf- DFI recognizer detects P2P flow that DPI failed to fic. The last judgment is required. The existence of an identify, the P2P stream will input DFI recognizer interference network protocol, if necessary, send the to be further recognition and detection. When protocol type, control strategy and interference con- the DFI recognition module is running, from the trol module, otherwise the data flow is not network shared memory area to read the preprocessed data processing. flow, and data flow into a specific field, stored in the 3 Process design of traffic data processing DFI data sheet. When the data table data reaches a In the ASP.NET technology, through the use certain amount, can get the flow characteristics of of LinkButton controls, program code in the the data stream, and then classify, identified by a LinkButton1_Click control time function, when a DFI module integrated judgment to identify P2P user performs a click operation, the event function traffic, and the recognition results are sent to the will automatically execute the program code in the P2P flow management module. SQL insert statement, information data that the user 2 Traffic control module input table on layer interface added to the applica- The bypass control system composed of tion fields of the database, because of the use of identification configuration modules, interference middleware, which greatly reduces the time to add

Figure 3. The architecture diagram of bypass control system.

Figure 4. The flow chart of add and delete flow information.

115

9781138028135_Chp_030.indd 115 03/04/15 10:35 AM data, process design to improve the efficiency of the 4 SYSTEM FUNCTION TEST original data to add, add data operation realization process is shown in Figure 4 (1). The delete opera- We test display function of the system trafficstatus, tion flow expressed by the SQL database statement flow data refresh interval was 5000 msec, we get is shown in Figure 4(2), to continue the delete oper- 60 frequency segment data flow chart, click the ation executive function, operation delete function refresh button, can obtain showing the total data will be integrated into the data bound control to flow diagram that is shown in Figure 5, it can display user GridView, can be directly removed, greatly 60 data with 5000 ms, test shows that the flow state improving the remove efficiency. display is basic accuracy.

Figure 5. The function test interface of flow display.

5 CONCLUSIONS [2] Tang Hao, Li Zhiju. Design and implementation of P2P flow control system based on DPI [J].Information and Due to the continuous development of network communication security 2007 (06), PP.94–99. technology and network application popularization, [3] Dai Qiang, Zhang Hongli, Ye Lin. Rapid identifica- the need for computer network traffic monitoring tion of P2P traffic based on behavior characteristic[J]. Microcomputer letter, 2009 (03), pp.88 + 216–217. and management of the information and data is very [4] Mi Shuyun. Design and implementation of IP network necessary, network administrators monitor and man- traffic monitoring system [D], Beijing, the Beijing post age the application of network. The network traffic Tun fire science, 2009, pp.56. monitoring system is designed in such a background [5] Cai Wenyu, Jin Xinyu, Zhang Xian. Network traffic and the development of software, network traffic control mechanism based on Linux [J]. Journal management is to help improve the safety of the net- of Jiangnan University (NATURAL SCIENCE work, the use of normative flow will improve the net- EDITION), 2006, pp.480–484. work system maintenance performance.

REFERENCES

[1] Xiong Qibang, Huang Mingzhe. Network traffic monitoring system based on Netflow and asynchronous service [J]. Computer Engineering, 2006, pp.144–146.

116

Research on computer image enhancement and image scratch repair

Haifeng Wang College of Information Science and Engineering, Zaozhuang University, Zaozhuang, Shandong, China

ABSTRACT: In general, there is a digital image with noise, low contrast, blurred edges and other defects. To effectively enhance the contrast of the image blur to meet the requirements of the subsequent identification and detection. This paper presents a fuzzy adaptive image contrast enhancement algorithm based on gray entropy. This method not only enhances the overall image contrast, but also effectively enriches the target image detail information, and suppresses the noise amplification. Meanwhile, the paper proposes an improved K and P parameters image restoration algorithm. The algorithm combines both isotropic and anisotropic diffusion, the use of regional differences in the frequency achieved in the different regions use different iterative equation. Experimental results show that the algorithm with TV model algorithm compared with the same premise of restorative effects, avoiding the staircase effect and better than the TV model repair speed. KEYWORDS: Image restoration; Image enhancement; Anisotropy; TV model;

1 INTRODUCTION smaller areas isotropic diffusion, improving iteration speed, gradient value in pixels the larger area using The use of digital image processing technology anisotropic diffusion based on a P-lap lace operator, has widely covered in various medical, industrial to avoid the effect of the image flat area ladder repair. detection, biological aspects. Digital image generally Experimental results show that the algorithm has has defects in noise and poor contrast, for further good repair and good convergence. detection, image recognition to great inconvenience. Image enhancement is one of the most basic and the most important technology of image processing the 2 ALGORITHM OF ADAPTIVE IMAGE aim is to highlight the image enhancement, some char- CONTRAST ENHANCEMENT acteristics of the information, to improve the visual effect of the image, so the imageenhancement is very 2.1 The principle of the algorithm necessary to use In the process of image processing. Gray entropy is an important part of the gray system Image restoration techniques are an important theory, gray scale entropy can determine whether a part of image processing, image restoration is based pixel is in the edge area: when the fuzzy gray entropy on the known area of the image related information, pixel is large, it means changing the gray point neigh- recovery information that’s missing in the area infor- borhood in the Super potential is small, this point is mation. According to the different characteristics of more likely to be the image of the flat region, and the theories and methods of image restoration, image the eye flat area noise sensitive, so it is necessary to restoration techniques can be roughly divided into enhance smaller; on the contrary, when the fuzzy gray two categories: 1) based on the structure of the image entropy pixel more hours, it means that the gray value repair technology; 2) texture synthesis based image in the neighborhood change tendency, this point is restoration techniques. Patches around the area of more likely to be the details of the image area, and information dissemination to be repaired area will the human eye in the detail area is not sensitive to be based on the structure of the image restoration noise, therefore can be enhanced greatly. Based on techniques applied to repair small scratches, stains, this principle, firstly, the image is mapped to the fuzzy and text of the target area, a repair algorithm based domain, determine the contrast mapping function in on the structure of the core idea is to take advantage fuzzy neighborhood; and then, in the 3 × 3 window, of the physics of heat diffusion equation in. General calculating the gray scale entropy of each pixel point model repairs smooth area prone repair ladder effect in the image, and stored in a position corresponding disadvantage. A previous algorithm based on an to gray scale entropy. Whether the pixel belongs to improved algorithm, using a combination of isotropic the smooth area or detail region through gray entropy and anisotropic diffusion model, in the pixel gradient size. Because the human visual characteristics, in the

117

9781138028135_Chp_031.indd 117 02/04/15 12:42 PM smooth regions than in the detail area is more sensitive 4 Through the transformed, fuzzy contrast function to noise, therefore, the details and the smooth area is obtained inverse transform membership func- were enhanced in different degrees, effective process tion after correction: detail features of an image, while suppressing the

noise amplification.  ''  mm(i,j)(1C−+(i,j)) /(1C(i,j)) u(i, j) ≤ (i,j) ' (i,j) = u  '' (4) (i,j)(1C(i,j)) /(1C(i,j)) u(i, j) (i,j)  mm+− > 2.2 The specific implementation of the algorithm

1 Fuzzy mapping. If an image size is M × N, in pixels 5 The fuzzy domain transforms into a gray domain (I, J) of the gray value is I (I, J), gray level and the image is L (256), the image is transformed into a ' 4(×−L1)a× rctan(u(i, j)) fuzzy equal to the size of the membership, in order I ' (i,j) = to avoid computing gray entropy zero denominator π meaningless, and consider the convenience of calculation, using the new fuzzy membership degree: The center pixel (I, J) of 3 × 3 neighborhood window calculation the gray fuzzy entropy H (I, J) are π × I(i,j) u(i,j)t= an (i ==1, 2,..,M; j1,2,..,N) (1) as follows: 4(×−L1)

i+1 j+1 In this way, the distribution of the membership hp(i,j)(=−∑ ∑ k,l)× ln(p(k,l)) value in [0,1], and good linearity, treatment does ki=−1lj=−1 not result in a low gray quite a lot in the origi- u(k,l) (5) p(k,l) ==(i 2,...,M1−=;j 2,...,N1− ) nal image value is mandatory for 0, save the low i+1 j+1 gray value of the edge information, will not cause ∑ ∑ u(k,l)) image distortion. ki=−1lj=−1 2 Fuzzy contrast. The image is in the airspace enlargement neighborhood contrast value C, the Among them, in the calculation method of image gray center and background contrast, this algo- matrix edge rows and columns are as follows: rithm has achieved good results. The fuzzy contrast, namely in the center pixel (I, J) of 3 × 3 win- j+1 j+1 hp(1,j)(=−∑∑1, l)×=ln(p(1,l)) hp(M,1)(−×MM,l)ln(p( ,l)) (j =−2,..., N 1) dow for calculating the current pixel contrast as ij=−1 ij=−1 i+1 j+1 (6) under the: hi(,1) =−∑∑pk(,l)×=ln(p(,khl))(iN,)−×pk(,Nk)ln(p( ,)Ni)(=−2,..., M 1) ki=−1 ij=−1 |u(i,j)m− (i,j)| 1 i+1 j+1 C(i,j) = mu(i,j) =−[(∑ ∑ k,l) u(i, j)] (2) |u(i,j)(+ m i, j) | 8 ki=−1lj=−1 2 2 2 N hp(1,1)(=−∑∑∑ k,l)×=ln(p(k,l)) hN(1,)−×∑ p(k,l)ln(p(k,l)) kl==1 l=1 k=1 1 Where: i =2,…,M-1, j =2,…,N-1. 2 M M N (7) hM(,1) =− ∑∑∑ ph(k,l)l×=n(p(k,l))(MN,)−×∑ p(k,l)ln(p(k,l)) 3 Transform function of fuzzy contrast. As the fuzzy kM=−11l=1 kM=−1lN=− contrast setting an enhancement coefficient Rij, the coefficient of adaptive image itself accord- Gray entropy H (I, J) is greater, said pixel (I, J) ing to gray distribution regulation of the degree of the neighboring gray level change more slowly, of enhancement, also can take into account the therefore, should reduce the contrast enhance- overall image information and local features. This ment, in order to avoid the noise in smooth regions paper uses exponential function to enhance the amplified. Conversely, should increase the contrast contrast of pixels: enhancement. Therefore, a constant, when the gray entropy is larger than the threshold epsilon, ' σ ij C (i,j)(= C(i, j)) (3) belonging to the smooth area, enhancement were smaller, when gray entropy less than this thresh-

Wherein: σij is contrast amplification coefficient; old epsilon, belonging to the details, are greatly 0<σij<1 Fuzzy enhancement of contrast, σij>1 enhanced. Fuzzy amplification coefficient contrast reduce the fuzzy contrast. is shown as follows:

118

9781138028135_Chp_031.indd 118 02/04/15 12:42 PM When p=1, the model of evolution as a general model, apparently only along the gradient perpendic- (8) ular to the direction of diffusion, can better maintain the edge information. When p=2, the model is clearly an isotropic Type: Hmin, Hmax respectively, for the pixel gray diffusion model, no response to the edge direction entropy minimum and maximum graph, βmin, βmax and the gradient direction of the difference of the are the minimum and maximum contrast ampli- diffusion coefficient, so that edge information fuzzy. fication coefficient, and user defined parameters When 1

∇Ix(,y) 02 By Table 1 can be observed, the improved model JI[(xy,)]|= |p dx dy +−λ ((Ix,)yI(,xy)) dx dy ∫∫ K 2 ∫∫ (10) ΩΩ repair effect and subjective judgment is consistent, more than the general model to increase the peak Table 1. The contrast parameters of the general model and That’s Lagrange is: improve model in repair. General Improve General Improve ∇I 0 ( )( )0 Number model model model model −∇ p +−λ II= (11) Breakage |/∇IK| of iter points Repair Repair PSNR PSNR ations time time (s) (db) (db) (s) Where, p is an adaptive operator, need to be calculated in the image restoration process, namely: 8000 300 5.7 9.56 35.11 42.41 14200 700 17.5 35.2 23.35 28.41 1 p =−1 (12) 14520 900 33.5 72.6 28.47 34.84 1| |2 +∇I 16252 800 29.8 56.2 26.88 38.92

119

9781138028135_Chp_031.indd 119 02/04/15 12:42 PM signal-to-noise ratio (PSNR) in decibels. Illustrate REFERENCES the improved model does a great improvement on the restorative effects. Time increase is caused because [1] Tang Liangrui, Sun Donghua. Enhancement methods the Matlab for p = 1 and p <1 calculation time. based on maximal fuzzy entropy for infrared images[J]. Computer Engineering and Applications, 2008, 44(9): 200–202. [2] Andrea Polesel, Giovanni Ramponi, John Mathews. 5 CONCLUSIONS Image enhancement via adaptive unsharpmasking[J]. IEEE Trans on Image Pro, 2000, 9(3): 505–510. This paper presents a new adaptive fuzzy contrast [3] Zhao Jingchao, Qu Shiru. The fuzzy nonlinear enhancement algorithm in the fuzzy domain, the con- enhancement algorithm of infrared image based on trast with the gray adaptive entropy of different sizes curvelet transform[J].Procedia Engineering, 2011, for different levels of enhancement, nicely enhanced 15(3): 3754–3758. the image edges and details, and the introduction of [4] Cheng H D, Xu Huijuan. A novel fuzzy logic approach two parameters: K and p. K to control the gradient to mammogram contrast enhancement[J]. information range in need of protection, to adjust the different sciences,2002, 148(1): 167–184. [5] Li Gang, Tong Yala, Xiao Xinping. Adaptive fuzzy images require different repair model with the param- enhancement algorithm of surface image based on eter p. Through the above experiments show that the local discrimination via grey entropy[J]. Procedia improved model has a big advantage on the effect of Engineering, 2011, 15(1): 1590–1594. image restoration, image repair model can be fully restored better.

120

The development trend under the cross media based on flash animation technology

Yu Jie Shi, Bao Qing Wang & Fang Tao Pu Digital Art Department, Dalian Neusoft Information Institute, China

ABSTRACT: Flash is not only easy to animation software; but also a hundred-percent cross media, cross industry software. In his design of network advertisement, make Flash website, MTV, cartoons, games, not only spread rapidly, in the network field but also to use it to design the mini movie and network advertising, film, music, mobile phone and MTV have entered the wireless communication, television, movies and music CD and other fields. Through the technical characteristics of the development trend of Flash animation and Flash elaborated in the cross media environment value. KEYWORDS: Flash Animation; New media; Development of animation technology; Flash Technology; Cross media

1 THE CHARACTERISTICS OF FLASH 6 Use flash animation will greatly reduce the cost of ANIMATION TECHNOLOGY production, reduce manpower, material resources consumption. At the same time, the production 1 By restricting Flash animation cyber source gen- time can be greatly reduced. The half hour pro- erally relatively short, so the plot and the picture gram, if made with Flash technology, about 3 to 4 are often more exaggerated ups and downs, work- months can be baked, if use other techniques usu- ing within the shortest time to convey our deepest ally need 10–14 months. FLASH animation can feelings. at the same time in the network and the television 2 Flash animation with the interactive advantages, broadcast, the realization of a two broadcast. better meet the needs of the audience, he can let the viewer moves to become part of the animation, by clicking on the choice of action, decided to run 2 THE PRESENT APPLICATION OF FLASH the process and results of the animation. This is the ANIMATION traditional animation incomparable. 3 Not only that, due to need to grasp some specific April 18, 2001 officially opened the match “China software you can try Flash animation, relatively first Pentium 4 processor computer Flash animation simple, a fan is very easy to be a producer. The creative competition and the Flash Animation Film new Flash animation (Flash) to make the anima- Festival” in the large “Flash” China team set of waves, tion is very simple: a set of computer software, a and in the end of August successfully lowered the person, a computer can create a be full of sound curtain. The number of entries of the works, goods and color animation clip. of high water, is the most Chinese. At the same time, 4 Flash animation can be put on the Internet for organized the first mint Head and Shoulders Flash people to see and download, due to the use of the advertising creative contest also ended smoothly. vector, the file is small, transmission speed char- Since this year, the media have begun to focus more acteristics, contributed to the rise of high-speed attention on FLASH, and coverage. Recently, CCTV animation, can make use of the unique advantages also interviewed representatives of some “Flash”, of widely on the Internet, there is a spread of the including the prodigal son, Chiang, small, BBQI, incomparable. Flash produced by MV is easier CINK etc. Flash, have heated up. than the traditional MV spread on the network. When you hear someone say “Cui Hua, when the 5 Flash animation while it is still relatively rough, pickled cabbage”, you don’t be surprised. “I” comes primitive, but Flash has a new visual effects, more from a song called “northeast people are living easily than traditional animation and dexterity, Lei Feng” songs, just released, did not attract pub- more “cool”. It cannot be denied that has already lic attention. Then there is “flash” Flash redid it, to become one kind of a new art form, make it more popular, also famous as a singer. Now,

121

9781138028135_Chp_032.indd 121 03/04/15 10:44 AM in various restaurants, as long as shouting “Cui Hua, comprehensive many kinds of techniques and skills, sauerkraut”, will be assured of led to a burst of laugh- integration of a variety of programming languages ter. So, Flash can also create the myth. From Chiang (including the TML/JAVASCRIPT, the background to BBQI, from the snow village to small, these on of the PHP/ASP/CGI, etc.), is the crystallization of the network compulsory labor “living Lei Feng” are several image processing tools (including 3DMAX, really bleak industry created a lot of “flash” point. CORELDRAW, FREEHEAD, PHOTOSHOP etc.). These in the eyes of ordinary people is a maverick, The application of this large by one or two people Flash people, will find they are not alone, because the could not complete, the team made in application of Flash is used as a core business empire is emerging. this complex will show great vitality. Aiming at the wide application and spread of Flash In mid September, the Flash 5 version of the intro- in China this excellent opportunity, in October 30th, duction, the new version has not improved signifi- MACROMEDIA Chinese users (CHINA MMUG) cantly in the animation manufacture and easy to use, was formally established the alliance. As the creator but there is a marked strengthening in script program- of FLASH, MACROMEDIA in the world of the inter- ming, even includes support for electronic commerce active multimedia industry occupies 85% of market (XML) function. Can see the future of Flash making share, its products into Chinese also has 7 years. The trend will to three directions from these new features: coalition includes CCTV, Beijing TV, dozens of well- one is the pure animation short film making; two is known domestic media, Feng Rong was elected as the the commercial application of interactive; there is the Secretary General of the League of.” There are ten existing animation short film, comprehensive appli- million people like to watch Flash, China have seven, cation and interactive content. eight hundred thousand people like to do Flash,” Feng Rong quote these figures the tone of pride. In his view, such figures have shown, a mass of the demand side and supply side of the market has already formed. 4 CROSS MEDIA THEORY Feng thinks, only the formation of Flash industry, to find their own profit point of growth, in order to make After the reform and opening up, China’s media the “Flash” become a kind of occupation, appear industry began to explore the market, industrializa- thereby promoting more excellent works. tion, after nearly 20 years of development, has formed the present TV, newspaper, magazine, broadcast as the main body of the huge market, annual ad revenue breakthrough 70000000000 Yuan, total profit and tax 3 FLASH ANIMATION TECHNOLOGY AND in 1998 media industry first over the tobacco industry, CROSS MEDIA CONCEPT BORN become the pillar industrial countries ranked fourth. At present, China’s media market overall in the TV Flash 3 since 98 years the market with its unique 2D media as the main body, to newspapers, magazines, Webpage multimedia and interactive programming books for the extension, to broadcast, audio-visual makes the viewer’s eyes a bright, but new things are products as a supplement, multiple media to Internet always neglected, then in only a handful of having a multimedia for the direction of the mutual competi- foresight personal home page using this technique. tion, parallel development pattern. 99 years for Flash version 4 was officially launched, The traditional media and network media is cur- the animation manufacture and scripting are greatly rently facing some common issues, namely: the oper- strengthened, in a short period of one year, Flash ation of the law, the network media network media animation has been the rapid development and profit model, global and fierce competition, domestic popularization. network market abroad strength of domestic network The development process is divided into three media China enters the market, etc. The mainstream stages: news media site although has the policy advantage 1 A simple Flash animation stage. and resource advantage, but in the management and 2 Complex Flash animation stage. operation is very difficult to achieve rapid response 3 The large Flash animation stage. and flexible decision-making; engage in comprehensive dissemination of news portals, despite having In this two leap from the second stage to the autonomy management, operation, but the lack of third stage leap effect on Flash manufacture indus- news and information resources. We can see that the try is extremely far-reaching. Large Flash animation traditional media and network media is complemen- is those comprehensive application of Flash and its tary to each other in cross media is under this kind of associated software, fully expressed a clear theme condition, the birth of. or completed the combination of multiple ideas Cross media is not only the traditional media a complete business function. Large V animation (newspapers, magazines, books, television, outdoor

122

9781138028135_Chp_032.indd 122 03/04/15 10:44 AM advertising, broadcast, film) collectively and network many kinds of information service rising wave are a media, but the integration of traditional media and multimedia information as the core. network media. With the development of network information technology, especially the telephone network, cable TV network, the Internet “triple play” 5 CROSS MEDIA APPLICATIONS ON FLASH the development of technology, high speed, interactive, multimedia broadband network will become the USA express, general motors, K mart, MILLER com- mainstream media news, information, entertainment panies such as BREWING have a better propaganda gradually. In this situation, the existing various inde- effect through the Flash advertising. At present, the pendent media will move toward integration, cross world’s top 500 companies have turned to the use of media platform to form an inclusive, with broadband Flash technology, Flash technology can transfer com- network information service as the core, the integra- plete, interactive information, thus greatly improve tion of various media. Its essence, namely unified all the response rate than the standard BANNER the information sources and media, information and advertising. comprehensive through various media, timely, rapid, TBWA/CHIAT interactive creative director low cost to transfer to the maximum range of audi- DOUG JAEGER said Mr. Flash, “so that advertisers ence, to play a synergistic effect between different can overcome the limitation of bandwidth to transfer media. the rich emotional information through the Internet, Distribution and cross media information on the the interactive development of huge implementation interaction between different media, it at least includes so that we can create more methods for customers for two meanings: one refers to the cross transmission our brand promotion through the use of Flash tech- and integration of information in the same between nology. Rhododendron aureum different media, the second refers to the cooperation MILLER BREWING company has been used in between the media, coexistence, interaction and the past few years different online publicity advertise- coordination. Across media platform integrity can ments using FLASH technology. “Flash has proven to be divided into information collection, editing, be an effective technology to help us make customers publishing, storage and exchange of five main units. interested in our online activities,” advanced digital The cross media platform is the first fully digital media marketing manager MILLER said, “according to sta- solutions, in the means of production is completely tistics, our Flash advertising 110 times more effective changing the original mode of operation, since than BANNER and BUTTON, the advertising effect the implementation of the program (information), obviously, when I have to find effective ways to pro- and the final preproduction post editing, broadcast mote customer the use of Online services, we think archive integration, all forms of work assignments to it is one of the preferred tool for us. Rhododendron the “interactive” web development direction, avoids aureum.”We found that, the use of Flash technology the disadvantages of time, quality, the efficiency site more” than regular site visits, POING OF VIEW of the traditional operational flow bring on the. the company’s business development director JOHN The network media and traditional media integra- HORN said: “in Webpage, Flash more impressive to tion represent the general trend, but various forms visitors than any other technology. of media will also be in the process of continuous integration of common development. The network is changing media landscape, with the development of 6 FLASH CROSS MEDIA APPLICATIONS radio, television, network of information technology must in a unified platform for the electronic media, Flash technology constantly brings forth the new using computer technology to store and process infor- through the old, after sweeping the Webpage design, mation will replace the print media and small capac- network advertisement, movie, television, cartoon, ity, high cost, difficult, difficult to preserve the copy vocal music will be its next step leading stage. Flash (newspaper, magazine and so on). from the network to the film, television, cartoon, A multimedia platform in the twenty-first Century music, promote the integration of traditional media can not only provide audio-visual illustrated infor- and Internet media. Webpage designers began to work mation, but also provide e-commerce, e-government, for the business, music videos and TV programs by electronic business, electronic medical, educational using network technology. In the Internet Movie field, and other electronic services. The development Flash technology since 1997 by MACROMEDIA of information industry has experienced 3 waves, after the launch, and gradually by Hollywood stu- namely, take the hardware as the core, the tide to dios favors, increases the microfilm and film produc- software as the core of the tide and the network as tion based on the network, and the network design the core of the wave, so the next wave is information of the mini movie film using it. BMW launched the collection, processing and dissemination of tide, also Internet Movie Series on Flash main battle, which is

123

9781138028135_Chp_032.indd 123 03/04/15 10:44 AM Crouching. Tiger, Hidden. Dragon director Ang Lee “”. LEAVE”, is the world’s first produced entirely by In China, flash skin three for a movie has produced MACROMEDIA company’s Flash software series. Flash drama. The play every half-hour, by JOHN CALLAHAN to In the television advertisement domain, reflect his wheelchair humor comic blueprint for the NETZERO company officials said, they recently by creation, will be broadcast in the FLASH’s popularity MACROMEDIA company’s Flash software produced is largely reduced the cost and time of TELETOON a television advertising campaign that will broad- on Canadian prime time television. KIMBERG said. cast in prime time, the way to save production cost Flash produced programs can also in the network and of $2100000 for the company. This is coming in Cbs the television broadcast, a two broadcast, cost-effec- Broadcasting Inc (NBC) during the broadcast of the tive. He also revealed that, if the half hour program NBA finals of the broadcast of “revolutionary” advert produced by the technology of Flash, about 3 to 4 is expected with the Philadelphia 76 person team in months can be baked, if other techniques, usually Los Angeles this week, the Lakers broadcast. need 10-14 months. In the field of game, the Sony NETZERO chief marketing officer Brian Woods Corp also announced that it will use the technology said the MACROMEDIA company’s Flash software to produce “PLAYSTATION 2” titles. In addition, has opened the way for them to save costs. Woods because it can reduce the game software in the movie said: “our technical staff used originally for network clips account for the data capacity, and therefore technology took only a small part of the normal pro- is expected to save more space for the DVD game duction costs has completed a series of high quality software. advertising film production. Simply put, NETZERO company only cost of TV advertising film about 2% normal production cost, so that the ratio of advertis- REFERENCES ing production cost and spend time between the pur- [1] Zhang Huilin. chase cost of the media is more reasonable. China’s Animation Art History in Twentieth Century [M]. Shanxi: People’s Fine Arts In the field of television cartoons, the first new Publishing House, 2002(04), pp. 236. product named “NELVANA WHEN QUADS WON`T [2] Jia Fou. Introduction to Animation [M]. China LEAVE”, is the world’s first produced entirely by University of Communication Press, 2005. 5, pp.217. MACROMEDIA company’s Flash software series. [3] Yin Jun. Chinese Animated Cartoon Model in the The play every half-hour, by JOHN CALLAHAN to Context of Globalization [J]. Art & Design 2006, (12), reflect his wheelchair humor comic blueprint for the pp. 27. creation, will be broadcast in the Flash ‘s popularity [4] Zhang Lu. On Cultural Aphasia of China’s Animation is largely reduced the cost and time of TELETOON [J]. Movie Review, 2007, (03), pp.9–11. [5] Li Pingping. on Canadian prime time television. KIMBERG said, Research on the development of animation industry in Shanghai under the geographical Flash produced programs can also in the network spatial relationship [D] Shanghai Normal University, and the television broadcast, a two broadcast, cost- 2007(04), pp. 83. effective. He also revealed that, if the half hour [6] Yang Minghuan. Research on Problems and program produced by the technology of Flash, about Countermeasures of China animation industry [D] East 3 to 4 months can be baked, if other techniques, usu- China Normal University, 2007(05), pp. 56. ally need 10–14 months. [7] Luo Xiaoyan. Flash animation and cartoon making creative navigation[D] Tsinghua University press, 2009. 7 CONCLUSIONS [8] Zhao Shihong. The characteristic of film in animation [D] Wuhan University of Technology, 2011. In the field of television cartoons, the first new product named “NELVANA WHEN QUADS WON`T

124

Application and research of data mining technology in the medical data

JianWen Zhou The Third Xiangya Hospital of Central South University, Changsha, Hunan, China

ABSTRACT: The paper studies the prescription drug health service system, and has made the data association mining, through the analysis on the association rule algorithm, using an algorithm for mining frequent item sets based on Boolean matrix operation. The algorithm only needs to scan the database once, has the advantages of simple and fast and memory saving advantages, through the analysis of mining with medicine hospital, find out the discharge combined with common drugs in prescription, it can be used as matching open medicine of doctor recommended based on these results. KEYWORDS: Intelligent medical; Word similarity; data mining; Application of health service; Big data;

1 INTRODUCTION The doctor’s ability is the most important aspects of the evaluation of a doctor working ability, so the cor- With the development of medical and health ser- rect evaluation of a medical diagnosis is the crucial vices, the concept of health service system is con- one annulus. tinuous deepening of people’s life. The health service system has been the hospital and patient communication intermediary, not only can share the 2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE hospital pressure diagnosis and treatment, but also be offering a convenient solution evaluation for hos- The core of this system is the diagnostic information pital medical activity management. In this system, analysis model, it can be through the comparison of there are amount of medical data were recorded, a large number of text, select the description that is including the doctor’s diagnosis and treatment infor- not consistent preoperative and postoperative diag- mation, hospital management records, the effective nosis text information from, and then to provide an use of these data can provide great convenience to accurate and no reference results by the algorithm. the diagnosis and treatment of hospital management Moreover, the system is not a fixed, closed system, process, but most hospitals now for the processing it can be a part of this stage and is difficult to dis- of these data are also limited to add, delete, change, tinguish the data presented to the hospital experts, by check operation, low the level of application of experts with specialized knowledge to determine the these data operation belongs to the medical data, accuracy of diagnosis. System to learn from the user’s no further analysis of medical data, not to mention manual judgment, to improve the accuracy of future the automatic acquisition of medical knowledge. judgment, the gradual reduction of the artificial judg- Medical data mining is analyzed in-depth min- ment in the long-term use, evaluation and analysis ing, according to these data, dig out the valuable system is mainly responsible for the doctors to diag- information. nose ability. Diagnostic records can enter the system The paper study on the comprehensive assess- through the application of health service interface, ment of doctor of preoperative and postoperative the main module of the system is divided into: doctor, diagnostic information treatment ability based on patient management module, pretreatment module, this system, and provides the doctor a summary encryption module, and access and log management of the process of diagnosis and analysis of service module, log module doctors misdiagnosed medical system, can help doctors to better improve their text. Structure diagram of the system is shown in level of diagnosis and treatment, make up for the Figure 1, the system data flow diagram is shown in defects on the medical knowledge of knowledge. Figure 2.

125

9781138028135_Chp_033.indd 125 02/04/15 12:55 PM Figure 1. System architecture diagram.

Figure 2. Diagram of system data.

3 ANALYSIS OF DATA MINING FOR DOCTOR common subsequence problems with the classical DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION (Longest Common Sequence) is similar to the problem. This paper integrated the longest common sub- 3.1 Mapping algorithm for the name of disease sequence algorithm and keyword semantic computation disease name similarity, on the basis of it, the We will segment diagnosis word, and will get a set paper proposed comprehensive matching mapping of ordered disease keyword sequence. In comput- algorithm. The whole algorithm process is shown ing the similarity of two disease name, we must in Figure 3. consider these keywords sequence. The longest

126

9781138028135_Chp_033.indd 126 02/04/15 12:55 PM Figure 3. Flow chart of disease mapping algorithm.

3.2 Clustering algorithm {For each i sample, calculate it that should belong to the class: Clustering is that group data objects divided into classes or clusters (Cluster), its goal is: high similarity between objects in the same family, while objects in 2 ()ij:arg min () different clusters in the difference. Therefore, in many cX=−µ j applications, data objects in a cluster can be treated as a whole, thus reduces the amount of computation or improve the computing quality. For each class j, recalculate the centroid of the In the clustering problem, giving us the training class: sample is {x(1),...X(m), for every X(m) ∈R, don’t have y. m K-means algorithm is the sample cluster into K 1 cj()ii= X () j ∑i=1 {} clusters (cluster), a specific algorithm is described as µ := m } follows: 1 cj()i = ∑i=1 {} 1 Randomly selected K cluster centroid points (cluster centroids) is μ1,μ2,…,μk¨Rn 2 Repeat this process until convergence 3.3 Correlation analysis algorithm

127

9781138028135_Chp_033.indd 127 02/04/15 12:55 PM Correlation analysis is that if there is a certain rela- to assess the diagnostic ability of the doctors in the tionship between two or more things, so one of the hospital management system actual application, to things you can through other things. Its purpose is to solve the diagnostic information analysis of mission predict the relationship between hidden in data min- hospital, avoid the manual statistical analysis of diag- ing. Association analysis is to find hidden in large nostic information inconvenience, diagnostic data on datasets of interest relationship. It has been found that mass are analyzed effective evaluation. The practical contact can use association rules or frequent itemsets application of the system shows that the method can form. Association rule mining is many data from improve the hospital management personnel’s work- the excavation of relevant knowledge describing the ing efficiency, and help doctors to raise diagnostic interconnections between data items valuable. ability. In addition, the paper on the discharge pre- The basic idea of the algorithm is: first find all scription mining analysis results in the HIS system frequent sets, these itemsets frequent sex appeared applied in the cooperative hospitals try, the results at least the same as the predefined minimum support showed that the drug association pattern mining degree. Then generate strong association rules from method can prescribe medicine doctor assisted as ref- the frequent set, these rules must meet the minimum erence, to further promote the application. support and minimum confidence. And then use the first step to find frequency set to produce the desired rule, produced only contains all rule sets of terms, REFERENCES where each rule of the right of the only one here is used in the definition of the rules. Once these rules [1] Mao Guojun. Data mining techniques and algorithms are generated, then only those minimum confidence for mining association rules [D]. Beijing University of greater than the user specified rules to be left. In Technology, 2003, pp.62. order to generate all frequent sets, using the recursive [2] Xu Gang, Yuan Zhaokang. Application and Prospect of method. data mining in medical science [J]. Practical clinical medicine, 2006,7 (13): 11–15. [3] Bao Lei, Li Ze, Sun Zhirong. Expression of Bias gene 4 THE RESULTS OF SYSTEM TEST cluster in the application of knowledge mining in the spectrum [J]. Biophysical journal, 2002, 18 (1). [4] Zhou Aihua, Zheng Yingping. A review of the medical The diagnostic information analysis system designed data mining [J]. Chinese Journal of practice medicine, in this paper has passed the test of the application 2005,4 (2): 126–127. of cooperative hospital. Through the statistical data [5] Zhang Ning. Research on Chinese text preprocessing and analysis of test results, the system improves the based on Semantic [D]. Xi’an Electronic and Science function that basically met the design requirements University master’s degree thesis.2011.3.

128

9781138028135_Chp_033.indd 128 02/04/15 12:55 PM References

1 Chapter 1: Computer and information technology

Fig.1 modular applications in toys

4 MODULE ASSEMBLY GARDEN DESIGN

CONCEPTS

4.1 Module

"Modules" is from the English word "module", translated in the "Dictionary English-technology" as modules, components, banks, instruction set, warehouse, etc. In the "Modern Chinese Dictionary"

There are three explanations in its concept: ① you can mix and standard hardware parts replacement;

② large software system is an integral part of having individual functions; ③ it refers to the part of the whole thing (Figure 2).

4.2 Modular design

In a range of different functions or the same function, but although the performance specifications of the different products on the basis of functional analysis, create and design a series of functional modules, by selecting and combining modules constitute different products to meet different market design methodology needs. The modular design of both a design approach is also a design concept; its main purpose is through a combination of modules to meet the diverse and individual needs of the public, in order to achieve lower production costs.

4.3 Advantages of modular building blocks gardens analysis with respect to the traditional garden

Standardization of adaptability, standardization ultimate goal are to increase productivity, ensure product quality, the convenience of products and components ask for generic and interchangeable things. You can make good money on the standardized production. Meet people ubiquitous novelty, change, divergent psychological, modular design can be achieved in small quantities,

The learning diagnosis is a crucial link, because it is an important basis for the adaptive learning system to know well the learning ability and cognitive ability of the learners. In figure 2, the learning diagnosis includes two parts: (1) the determination of adaptive diagnostic learning starting point; (2) attainment test. The mainly involved theoretical models can be seen in figure 3.

According to student model, the learning point is determined through adaptive diagnosis. Attainment test includes the index tests such as learning efficiency, test results, and learning satisfaction. Combined with the knowledge information in the models, the knowledge nodes have been made by teachers in advance. The adaptive engine can display and hide the links between related knowledge nodes according to the attainment test results. Its difficulty lies in the metadata extraction of all theoretical models in the ALSS. Attention is necessarily paid to the following principles in the establishment of the metadata information.

(1) Adaptability of the as to information. (2) needs of should be existing should be should be of

Figure 3.The relationship among the main data models.

In the series of Chinese e-learning education technology standards (CELTS), CELTS-27 related to the adaptive learning standards is still being researched. By referring to the guiding ideology made in CELTS and the learning technology system reference model (IEEE standard 1484.1) proposed by

IEEE LTSC, the extraction of metadata is completed.

5 CONCLUSION

In the SOA-based adaptive learning upport syst m, an ALSS service model with practical significance is established in combination with metadata theory, a

SOA-based general framework for the support control part, voice prompt part and a display, the main body of display part is a lantern, lantern is consist of a diameter of 40cm acrylic ball cover and a base, the lampshade is made up of 36 red, green, and blue LED lamp to provides the light. The overall design of the system diagram is as shown in figure 1. Fig.1 The overall diagram of visual stimuli EEG detection equipment

2 EXTRACTION AND PROCESSING OF EEG SIGNALS

EEG acquisition TGAM module can be directly connected to the electrode, were collect d and analyzed by means of a EEG el ctrode and a REF reference lectrode that get signals on the brain. The ll cted EEG signal process into a digital signal through the integrated operational amplifier, filter, ADC conversion module, interference iltering noise and muscle movement, module analyze and acquire 8 groups of independent

EEG of α,β,δ,γ,θ and process the output parameter data of focused d gree and elaxed degree, and finally output by th serial. Figure 2 is a data frame with computer program analysis. Every complete data frame length of TGAM module output is 36 bits synchronous, with 2 byte

0xAA, 0xAA. A byte represe tation of the data signal quality (000), greater numerical representation of EEG doped more noise. The signal quality value of 200, said EEG or REF electrode and the test head skin contact. Data frames can also resolve related with alpha, beta, gamma, Delta, theta

EEG data, and test the current focus and relaxation 2 Chapter 2: Business management, e-commerce and tourism

Integrated marketing of micro-film in advertising

Qinggang Sun

Harbin University of Science and Technology at Rongcheng, Shandong China

ABSTRACT: Experienced a period of relatively long and messy process, there are slowly developed micro-film, micro-film development and online video, online movies has a very close relationship, we can say, online video and movie are micro-film development’s predecessor, the micro-film is online video, online movies extension breakthrough. The micro-film advertising was born in the micro-film, and is a new commercial.

Microfilm advertising is for traditional advertising and product placement is a breakthrough movie on the basis of innovative network video and movies on the network. Since the micro-film advertising is a new thing, the industry has not been a unified definition. Although micro-film advertising is a new thing, it is a favorite of advertisers and consumers after birth. Many well-known brands have performed micro-film advertising and marketing, such as Cadillac, Jeep, giant network, Samsung, Canon, Crystal Orange Hotel, etc. and quickly get a great welcome to the network audience. Click rate increase beyond imagination, wide industry is involved, the degree of popularity is so large, and all people see a strong micro-film advertising vitality.

KEYWORDS: Micro film; Advertising; Networks; Movie implantation; Commercials

1 THE REASON OF BIRTH AND DEVELOPMENT OF MICRO-FILM ADVERTISING

Progress and a large number of Internet users of network technology are the basis that micro-film advertising was born, and an important prerequi site for development. According to statistics, by the end of 2012, the number of Internet users in China has as many as 564 million. Under the Internet age, mainly in the following areas we promote the devel opment of micro-film advertising: (a) The popularity of handheld video playback equipment. Palm video playback equipments are: smart phones and tablet computers. The popularity of these devices, so we can spare the time, regardless of location plagued watch their favorite videos, subject to the network era, consumers pass the time requirements; (2) upgrade network speeds. Higher broadband support online video needs to be able to achieve smooth playback purposes, therefore, the network speed is one of the constraints of microfilms broadcast advertising, and now the network operator’s network speed makes browsing anywhere online video and it has become a trend. (3) Develop an online forum, micro-movie spoof originally began in the network, and gradually became a professional film and television production sta�, to further enhance the quality, make the spread of micro-film advertising positions further expansion, and it can be spread wider audiences. 2 FEATURES OF MICRO-FILM ADVERTISING 2.1 Dilute the product, highlight the brand The brand is to determine whether the enterprise is one of the important factors in an invincible position in the fierce market competition, but also insist on deciding whether an important basis for sustainable development. Since the micro-film advertising focus is advertising information in the consumer audience in the “soft spread,” if it seems too sti� oriented products, with traditional advertising and no di�erence, so micro-film advertising should have a “dilute the product, we highlight the brand” performance characteristics. Make the brand connotation of enterprise through micro- film advertising communication to motivate consumers, until a favorable impact on society. And it is no longer self-traditional advertising before the product advertised, so people feel sti� and unable to accept. This is the micro-film advertising and traditional TV advertising, online video advertising, one of the main di�erences. Television advertising, online advertising usually focuses its good information, which is due to these two types of ads are hard-wide, forcing the audience to watch, while the micro-film advertising is more of an active interest in the audience and enjoy, with the spread of continuity. Diluting the product and highlighting the brand was more propaganda value.

2.2 Dilute advertising, prominent movie

Due to the trend of the wind blowing micro-film, micro-film micro-culture is derived from the audience gradually a�ect lifestyle. Audience fragmentation era has been bombed advertising flavor of traditional advertising for many years, therefore, micro-movie ads must be another way to dilute the flavor in the micro film advertising ad’s weight, and there are more plots to infect the audience with the film, so the audience is not its feelings of resentment. Also, because the audi ence is generally viewed micro-film advertising time in the debris, which also requires micro-film advertis ing, we must highlight film elements, especially the episode with the requirements of compactness, rea sonable and attractive. For example, the Land Rover serialized anime micro movie advertising “City of

Aurora.” A total of eight episodes, the average weekly broadcast a set. The Ministry of micro-film advertis ing uses cartoons and real mutual integration of style, each episode has left suspense, and the next episode crack suspense. This series of micro-film advertising have compact plot, suspense, interesting, tense scene, stimulation. The entire series commercials do not see a trace of advertising, and it is an action suspense movie that receives great attention of the audience.

2.3 Narrative of ups and downs

In the micro-film, in order to quickly accept the net work audience, we most chose the ups and downs of the narrative features in the beginning - the outcome of this Cape nested structure of traditional narra tive is into a mosaic of several important events -

Development - climax structure, and, beginning with the ending is infinitely compressed, development or even be omitted, that is, a climax to great lengths to show the events of the narrative way. Therefore, one important prerequisite is that the director general audience is familiar with the movie preset in the con text of the show, such as “explosive” story on a sim ilar Hollywood gangster film, the action part and the chase scene - the climax accounts for almost video content of all, fights skydiving, chasing blast, a man with a mysterious man in black mission launched a desperate battle, with the help of assistants and the car, the actor Deus Ex saved the day. So we can see that the micro-film narrative strategy is the most interesting part of the audience infinite zoom, and dilute the subplots to achieve rapid emotional reso nance with the audience. This is the missing elements of traditional television advertising.

2.4 Focus on the depth of the micro-film advertising

There is a saying in Chinese literature: good is for longer text, short poems are di�cult to assign.

Microfilm advertising is the same, especially with the sharp rise in the number of 3G mobile phone users, and the micro-film advertising is usually at its mobile state a short time before being viewed. This requires that manufacturers should focus on micro-film advertising depth, if time is too long micro-film advertising is unable to come to the fore, the micro-film advertising must be creative, energetic, profound meaning. For example: Cadillac’s “Route 66” long 90 seconds. Thus, the pursuit of micro-film advertising in the shortest time will tell the story of a brand consumer to listen to, the overall look dapper, not drag its feet. Route 66 Description: Route 66 diagonally, across the way from Chicago to Santa Monica, California. Route 66 (Route 66), the Americans affectionately judge “Mother Road.” Route 66 Length: 2,448 miles (about 3,939 km) traffic using: November 11, 1926–1985 June 27, Route 66 60 years of research scholar Michael • Hua Aires, said: “Route 66 is to the American nation, like a mirror; it symbolizes the great American people the difficult journey along the way. Use well-known as a micro-road movie in the background, and it is more conducive to the late publicity, it played a role of assistance, the United States of America’s famous car brands plus the mother road, and also formed a propaganda between the brand invisible. 3 THE ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF MICRO-FILM ADVERTISING 3.1 Advantage of micro-film advertising The reason why micro-film advertising is greatly sought after, one is micro-film advertising campaign and long-term economic benefits, even more important is its relatively low cost and relatively short production cycle. For example, Orange Hotel Group by the end of 2010 hit imitate the movie “Let the bullets fly,” launched interpretation Orange Hotel brand micro-film advertising, “let the train called” cost spent more than 30,000, it is less than a week’s time. The latter is only the fans in a large amount of private micro logging starter and get blitzed and forwarding users. The play within a week reached 400,000, more than the 10,000 forwards, and get great results. Fast speed, low price is unmatched by any form of advertising. Tasted sweetness of Orange Hotel Group, in early 2011 decided to increase investment, in microfilm advertising. Until the end of May, “orange crystal constellation of micro-film series,” All the shooting is completed, and the speed is about a week in major meager, on the portal site with video playback, the total cost is just over 100 million. This puts TV ads and video ads cost lower than more than product placement. Since the micro-film advertising time is short, we put fewer resources and manpower, so the director and production team will put in more effort, in the short est possible time to show to the audience the best side.

The reason why micro-film advertising can target audience is its tailor-made advertisement. Whether it is an interpretation of the brand, or the screenplay for micro-film advertising content to write, produce, and to the spread of micro-film advertising and other aspects of the program, they are required in accord ance with the needs of advertisers to customize. In addition to micro-film advertising exquisite wonder ful story enough to attract audiences and make them secondary transmission, but also it requires energy in the story which can naturally reflect the concept of brand advertisers and value and so on. Since the micro-film advertising targeted, and therefore, once broadcast, advertisers will be able to disseminate the contents of thought, ideas and other elements passed to the target audience. Due to advances in technology and popularization of science and technology, the Internet has become part of people’s daily life universal, traditional mass media, consumer bundles of increasingly weak. With widespread Internet access to people’s daily life, more and more consumers are moving away from depend ence on the traditional mass media. According to statistics, by the end of 2012, the number of Internet users in China has as many as 564 million. Internet media audience in addition to extensive also reflect it has a strong interactive, participatory, which is the traditional media cannot match. In the micro-film advertising, the audience understands the concept of advertising interpretation of the brand, and it is also able to experience the first time based on the adver tiser’s own view of the interaction. In this process, we allow the audience to better understand the brand concept, accept the value of the brand, and become a brand’s fans.

3.2 Disadvantage of micro-film advertising

Since the micro-film advertising relies on the network media to spread, so its e�ect is limited by the propa gation area network penetration. As shown, in China’s

Tibet, Hunan, Guangxi, Sichuan, Henan, Gansu,

Anhui, Yunnan, Jiangxi and Guizhou provinces, the network does not reach 30% penetration, the spread of micro-film advertising e�ect is relatively poor. Micro-film advertising is a form of online video, so the user’s favorite videos on the network to some extent also reflect its attention on the micro-film advertising. As can be seen from Figure III, the age distribution of online video users, 18–24-year old

Internet users prefer to watch online video, up 31.9%, followed by 25–30 years of age, group under 18 age, which accounted for 20.9% and 16.3%. To cause of this phenomenon, there is a difference between the number of largely Internet users of all ages, on the other hand it is also used with the purpose of Internet users of all ages about networks. According to Figure II it shows that 18 years of age, 50 years of age over the two most Internet users do not like to watch online video, so micro-film advertising has poor dissemination of results in these two age groups. 4 THE FUTURE OF MICRO-FILM ADVERTISING Micro-film advertising are new things, which are preferred by customers and advertisers after birth, in the 21st century people are prone to fatigue, while the micro-film advertising begin to attract major audiences with fresh appearance, freshness is over, there will lead to its decline and eventually be abandoned by the audience. Therefore, the future development of micro-film advertising audience should avoid being abandoned to their fate. According to numerous literature research, and author carried out on the market and the famous micro-film advertising watch, research, the author makes the following recommendations for the future development of the micro-film advertising. In recent years, the emerging microfilm festival helps the development of micro-film, micro-film to make a better direction. More young and talented youths join the micro-film career. To go further micro-film advertising, portals, video sites, advertisers, etc. can not be behind closed doors, and the audience should be in-depth exchanges and inspire the audience to watch, enthusiastic participation. Building a suspense series of micro-film advertising is undoubtedly a shortcut. Micro-film manufacturing in advertising funds, resources and other conditions permit, and it may require the development of micro-film series based on commercials branding. Each episode is closely co-ordinated, at the end of the last episode leaving the suspense. You can have a variety of Cohesion. When the premiere episode finished, the audience can Solicitation story to the next set, and select branding meets the needs of the script to shoot (if the story audiences can not meet the branding needs, we allow team members posing as audience participation collect and provide the original story). 5 SUMMARY Combined with micro-film and commercials for marketing, it will be the next big marketing tool of the trend. Microfilm advertising is the traditional television advertising, video advertising and product placement, etc. in terms of expression, forms of com munication, advertising content, once a revolutionary breakthrough with the development of the advertising and marketing into a new world. Domestic research is more famous micro-film advertising (such as “Route

66”), these micro-film advertising success are insep arable from the production team of well-functioning, mature marketing model and other factors. It is able to in a very short time, to maximize attract audience attention, detonate topic of discussion between the audience, the audience were caused by spontaneous reprint, share micro-film advertising, then become brand advocates, and it is the most successful micro film advertising and marketing place. However, we

Research on the operation mechanism of direct trading market between power consumers and power generation corporations

Zhe Wei

State Grid Energy Research Institute, Changping District, Beijing, China

ABSTRACT: Direct trading between power users and the electricity generation enterprise is an important part of the power market. The paper summarized directly trade effects and the existing problems in the pilot work of our country electric power users, for the promotion operation next stage, the paper analyzes the core problems of transactions, the market access, the transaction space, price mechanism, electricity surplus and deficiency swap transaction and settlement and the release of information, and its popularization and operation were suggested in order to widely direct transactions to provide a certain reference.

KEYWORDS: P ower consumers; Generation enterprises; Direct transaction; Transaction platform;

T ransaction pattern;

1 INTRODUCTION

Since twentieth Century 80, electric power indus try reform needs to break the monopoly, improve e�cienc y, and to form free competition in the elec tricity market in the world. Let users’ purchase options has become the development direction of the electric power industry, is also a target of the reform of China’s electric power system. [1] The United States, Britain,

France, Norway, Australia, South Korea and other countries have already carried out market reform, and combined with di�erent situation of each took a dif ferent mode. Russia, South Africa and India and other emerging countries are at the beginning of the reform of electricity market or are making the reform scheme.

National reform not only reflected in the power gen eration sector liberalization of the market and the reorganization, many sales in the side of the market of drastic reform, including gradually and selectively release to end users free purchasing restrictions. Direct trading between power users and the elec tricity generation enterprise is an important content of China’s power market reform. In 2009, the national development and Reform Commission, the SERC issued a “notice on Relevant Issues concerning the pilot work trade directly improve power users and the electricity generation enterprise” (electric power supervision market (2009) No. 20), “the basic rules of the power generation enterprise users and direct trans action” (electric power supervision market (2009) No.

50)} and other documents, promote direct trading work power users and power generation enterprises to guide. In the policy under the guidance of the East cost, avoid the large scale adjustment of interests, to achieve a steady development, for the future the pro motion of operating experience, laid the foundation.

By the end of 2012, the country implemented the direct trading provinces is as shown in Table 1.

Table.1. Statistical table of directly trading provinces.

2.2 Specific issues in the practice of the pilot

Due to the national laws and regulations are not sound, and a�ect by work starting points and other factors for the di�erent provinces, the trial of direct transactions still exist many problems, mainly mani fested in the following five aspects:

1 Trade policy implementation has greater deviation. Jilin, Liaoning, Anhui and Fujian four provinces pilot power users are high energy consuming enterprises, more than half of the pilot power users is high energy consuming enterprises in Jiangsu province. Direct electricity trade in high energy consumption enterprises electricity accounted for more than 90%, resulting in the policy of preferential tari�, low price of high energy consuming user exists objectively, trying to reduce user electricity price ideas through direct exchange, deviated from the original intention of the pilot.

2 The trading rules of the implementation is not in place. The deal still is the “point to point”, has yet to establish a market transaction mechanism standard transparent; and the part electricity power enterprise of the province surrender part of the profits for the pilot of pilot power user, do not deduct direct trading of generation capacity in accordance with the provisions, resulting in power generation enterprises annual average generating hours significantly beyond the provincial average level, such as Jilin Longhua ThermoElectron Corporation in 2010 and 2011, respectively, is higher 24.9%, 23.6%; Anhui power plant in Xuancheng higher 14.56% in 2011, objective encroached on rights and interests of other power enterprises.

3 The market fairness needs to be improved. A few big user directly participate in trading pilot that reduces the power purchase price, for the same industry that did not participate in the direct trading users create unfair competition, such as Jilin carbon company in 2009, 2011, electricity prices are downward float 19.6%, 16.5% and 17.8% compared with the province of large industrial catalog price purchase . 4 The lack of power transmission and distribution price transmission mechanism. At present, transmission and distribution price discount method calculating according to the average purchase price, the average compression space grid electricity price is 0.03 Yuan/(kW - H). After the start direct trading of electricity transmission and distribution, it don’t calculate and adjust year after year, cannot reflect the change of power transmission and distribution cost. Such as Fujian Province, the existing transmission and distribution price standard calculation basis for the 2007 data, if in accordance with the 2011 data, needs to raise about 0.03 Yuan / (kW - H) about. 5 Power universal service is a�ected. The power universal service of our country is the implementation of cross subsidy mechanism by price. Large users enjoy low price through direct transactions, reducing the implementation of universal service cross subsidies responsibility and power grid enterprises source of funds. In addition, large users to participate in the direct trading of the pilot in addition to state-owned enterprises, and private enterprises and foreign-funded enterprises, while the power supply enterprises are state-owned enterprises, large income source user is the state-owned power enterprise interests, may result in the loss of stateowned assets. 3 STUDY ON DIRECT TRADING MARKET MODEL With the recent gradually ease the power supply and demand situation, and create a good external environment and conditions for direct trade promotion, need to properly handle the problems of electricity transmission and distribution, cross subsidies, direct trading mechanism design is reasonable, the rich market transactions varieties, to establish support system and transaction information platform and improve the power user direct trading technology, promote the healthy development of market. From the technical level, the recent direct transaction mode is mainly embodied in the way of transaction, market access, electricity trade space, price mechanism, electricity surplus and deficiency swap transaction and settlement, information release. 3.1 The principle of direct trade 1 Carry out the state industrial policies and macro-control policies. The direct involvement of trading in all enterprises must comply with national industrial policies and requirements related to energy saving, environmental protection.

2 Adhering to market-oriented principle. Fair opening of electric power network, the establishment of multilateral and bilateral / market buy sell, a fundamental role play to market allocation of power resources.

3 To ensure the safe and stable operation of the power grid. Members participate in direct transactions should bear peak, peak load regulation and peak averting social responsibility.

4 It is conducive to promoting the sustainable development of power industry, straighten out the price, regulate the market for the purpose, and not simply in order to reduce the price for the purpose of.

5 According to the principles of equality, voluntary, establishing direct trade mechanism standard transparent.

6 According to steadily push forward the principle. Actively and steadily, step by step, normative and orderly ground to promote trade directly involved in the initial work, the market main body range should not be too large.

7 Unified trading platform management. Unified carry out transactions in the transaction platform, can improve e�ciency and ensure safety, implementation in place.

8 Using long-term transactions, when conditions are ripe and then transit to short-term trading.

3.2 Direct transaction price

Direct transaction price is determined by the power consumers and generators. To encourage power con sumers and generators used in the downstream prod uct price linkage price formation mechanism. The purchase electricity price that power user participation in direct payment, it is composed of direct transaction price, power transmission and distribution price and government funds and additional components.

3.3 Direct transaction mode

According to the number of participants in the trans action, the direct transaction can be divided into 4 kinds of modes: single user on a single power gener ation enterprises, a single user of a plurality of power generation enterprises, multiple users on a single power generation enterprise and a plurality of user of a plurality of power generation enterprises. With the experimental work in depth, the scope of the trans action object is also gradually expanding, more cases will be “many to many” forms to carry out.

3.4 Business process of trading platform

1 To carry out bilateral negotiation transactions through the trading platform, the transaction process is shown in Figure 1, the specific transaction steps: ① The trading center issued a notice containing the information of transactions, transaction time, reporting time, and choose the market members involved in the transaction; ② The power user declared transaction electricity price information; ③ The power generation enterprises to confirm the transaction information; ④ The trading center traders trial and security check, if not pass, reverts back to step 2; ⑤ The trading center leadership for approval; ⑥ Results the distributed transaction, members of the market to see the results of transactions. Figure 1. Flowchart of bilateral negotiated transaction. 2 To carry out centralized transactions through the trading platform, the transaction process is shown in Figure 2, the specific transaction steps: ① The Trading Center released transaction alerts, and choose to participate in the transaction market members; ② The market members declared transaction electricity price information; ③ The generating encrypted data file for bidding; ④ The trading center traders bid opening, bid calculation and implementation, security check. Such as through to step 6, or enter step 5; ⑤ The check rules in accordance with the adjustment of electricity trade; ⑥ Approval by trading center leadership; ⑦ Release the results, transactions market members see the results of transactions. Figure 2. Flowchart of centralized transaction.

4 CONCLUSIONS

With the acceleration of the market process, power users and the electricity generation enterprise direct transactions will be gradually extended from the existing pilot. In order to promote the smooth devel opment of future business, according to market access, transaction, transaction organization space, transmission and distribution price, ancillary service, congestion management, trade execution and per forms a comparative analysis. Recent should be a smooth start, power gener ation companies and power users should follow the energy-saving environmental protection, anti-risk ability principle; transaction space to be controlled; using bilateral trade or matchmaking; not the estab lishment of ancillary service market, transmission and distribution price take Directory User buying and selling price difference way. The longer term, we should construct a scientific system of trans mission pricing, to gradually open up the scope of

Logistics enterprise’s employee health and performance management

Wei Shen

Suzhou Chien-shiung Institute of Technology

You Wang

School of Philosophy and Sociology, Northwest University

Rongjun Zhang

Nanjing University of Science and Technology

Yumin Zhong

School of Public Administration, Nanjing Normal University

ABSTRACT: A scientific and rational designed employee performance management system should be closely related to the goal of the enterprise management system, should not only help to achieve corporate stra tegic goals and employee personal goals, but also help to achieve business goals and employee performance.

This paper builds enterprise employee performance management model based on objective management and points out its practical value, according to objective management and performance management process theory.

KEYWORDS: Object management; Performance management; Employee performance management model

Performance management is the main part of the entire logistics enterprise human resource management, but the majority of logistics enterprises lacks scientific performance management system, which resulting in employee lack of enthusiasm and company lack of competitive advantage. Through some logistics enter prise performance management surveys and studies, we believe that the current issue of the following five areas of logistics enterprises which are main reasons performance management failed to achieve good results in the crux: The enterprise’s overall strategic objectives is disaccorded with department objectives.

Enterprise performance management is too singular.

Performance assessment did not achieve the desired results. Performance management assessment indi cators are not rational. Basically did not establish e�ective communication mechanisms. Logistics enterprise performance management system should consider the company’s strategy, resources, services and operations organically con stituted complete management system. To achieve effective performance management, logistics com panies must do the following aspects: First, to build an enterprise performance management system based on the strategic objectives. The company’s strategic thinking communicated to managers at every level and every employee, so that everyone can clear their own performance indicators and management responsibility, so that the growth of each employee integration and business development, the formation of an open, active participation take the initiative to communicate the corporate culture. With the further deepening of China’s reform and opening up, the state-owned enterprise leaders have recognized the importance of human resource management. We should strengthen human resources development, and build a high-performance team, tap the potential of employees by mobilizing the enthusiasm and initiative of employees to create more value and wealth for the enterprise. An important fulcrum of human resource management is performance management, performance management is to identify, measure, and performance levels to convey important and rewarding employees, so that is one of the highest levels of productivity and gradually positioning method. Performance management is based on the nature of the work of employees, job content and job requirements, using the scientific method, the employee’s job performance, including the effects of work behavior and work to inspect and evaluated to determine its record management. Its main purpose is to carry out a comprehensive assessment of the employees to determine whether they are competent, and use that as the fundamental basis of human resource management, and ensure staff remuneration, promotion, transfer, scientific and vocational skills development, motivation, dismissal and other work. Enterprise performance management concern is to improve employee performance, and improve employee performance is to achieve organizational goals, which will tie employees and enterprises together, but also will enhance the status of perfor mance management to a strategic level, strategic view of performance management, strategic perfor mance management strategies to develop and execute strategies.

1 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT

Performance management, which is the manager to ensure that employees and their output can be consist ent with the corporate objective process, is the central link to get a competitive advantage. Performance man agement is a goal-oriented, consensus-based managers and employees in determining the objectives, tasks, requirements and strive direction, forming a commu nity of interests and responsibilities to jointly develop and promote corporate and individual e�orts to cre ate high-performance, successful implementation of enterprise process goals. Performance management has become an important management function, is an important means and ways to achieve the strate gic goals of the enterprise. Implementation of perfor mance management to clear the overall goal, grasp the key indicators, focusing on performance improvement.

Key performance indicators to support the sector to ensure the realization of the company’s overall objec tives, key performance indicators to support sta� to ensure the realization of key performance in this sec tor, and this will form a concerted e�ort to ensure the normal operation of enterprises, to achieve the over all strategy. Therefore, based on the target managed enterprise employee performance management is an e�ective performance management model which has important practical value for this research model. Performance management has a core control in business management, which is an effective means of control to achieve the strategic goals of the enterprise, and its importance has concerned more and more managers. Performance management ideas and meth ods around the world are being used by many com panies, has also been valued by a growing number of Chinese entrepreneurs. Performance management will be the Chinese enterprises to cultivate a world class competitiveness of the most important manage ment system. The traditional performance appraisal process often overlooked performance management, perfor mance appraisal and performance management are not equivalent. Performance Management refers to the organization in order to achieve their goals, through the continued development of the communication process, the formation of the organization’s objectives assessment. Moreover, since the channel of assessment complaints is not unblocked, when employees are nowhere to redress unfair evaluation, leading to depart ment heads in the assessment casual abuse of power.

Subjective and objective assessment of the reluctance on the assessment results and their interpretation of the examination results of the assessment back to being who conduct the assessment becomes a black-box operation, the formal appraisal process. While many companies have developed and implemented a more complete performance appraisal regulation, but in the actual assessment process cannot be implemented. For example, some companies do not have regular assess ment or evaluation is not strict, but only when at the end of the year by the department heads of depart ment assessment team comprises members to have the assessment, and the assessment process is not public.

As a result, employee performance appraisal will be considered just a formality, a negative mood that “usu ally dry and quit a kind, more or less a kind; leaders say you can, you are on the line, that you can not, you will not do,” and no one will seriously analyze the perfor mance appraisal results, there is no real advantage of the performance appraisal process and the assessment results to improve employee performance and behavior.

3 PERFORMANCE DIAGNOSIS AND IMPROVEMENT

Performance management as an e�ective manage ment tool, which provides more than just a reward and punishment means, more important is that it pro vides a signal for the enterprise worker to improve and enhance the performance. Therefore, during the performance appraisal, we cannot stay on the sur face of performance appraisal data. The resulting data of performance evaluation may be just a surface phenomenon of some potential management issues.

The key of proper performance management is not the assessment itself, but rather how the enterprise’s management information and comprehensive analy sis of the assessment of the performance management process as an entry point, this is the most valuable and the most positive sense, this is the performance of the diagnosis. If we find out the problem of low performance through the performance appraisal, the most important thing is to find out the reason.

Employees are an important channel to find the cause, then, companies should strive to create a center to resolve the problem of accepting environment that encourages employees realistically pointed out busi ness problems, positive ideas to improve the business performance low problem. Once find out the cause, supervisors and employees should work together to eliminate the problem. In this case, the competent is act as mentors and helper. After completion of the above process again planned a round of job performance management basically completed. You should have a summary base on the current round of performance management, and then to develop the next round, so that performance management can be carried out continuously to make business performance to a higher level of purpose. 4 EMPLOYEES’ PERSONAL HEALTH INFORMATION MANAGEMENT Relying on the establishment of healthy employees personal health records, the occurrence of various diseases has a certain reason and rule, including congenital genetic factors, and the acquired behavior and lifestyles. Health management services can use software to collect and manage employees personal health records for health and disease risk assessment, tracking, and health behavior guidance personal health information and to provide a secure web-based information management, information management, including standard formats friendly interactive client management interface, permanent electronic medical records and personal health management account. At present, some of our country’s enterprises carry out performance management, their purpose is not to improve the overall performance of the enterprise so that employees and enterprises shared values and goals and work together, but thinks performance management as a very popular form of management, other companies implemented, so they should also carry my business. The other business purpose is clear and correct, but the implementation of performance management is the purpose of the few senior managers, performance management level employees do not understand, and just think that performance management is the boss to pick their mistakes to accumulate evidence for punitive deduction. It is due to performance management mere formality, making the performance appraisal are cramming every time, human resources must hurry expelled a yearend assessment methods, rather than forming a well- established processes and systems. 5 FEATURES AND PRESENT SITUATION OF LOGISTICS COMPANIES’ EMPLOYEE PERFORMANCE APPRAISAL 5.1 Features of logistics companies’ employee performance appraisal Currently logistics companies are more emphasis on job level, division management, decision- making, emphasizing standardized, less communication between their duties, management and subordinates, their performance appraisal characteristics are:

1 Much reference data, but develop performance plans and objectives is di�cult. Work requirement is standardized, process-oriented, emphasizing the safety, requiring strong responsibility, can not have errors, hard working, better service attitude.

2 employee’s qualifications and the quality are uneven, company managers often irregular recruit ment situation with production operations, layo�s, resulting in sta� mobility. 3 performance man agement system dynamically adjusted according to the enterprise’s internal and external environment, employees specific case, the specific implementation of performance management in the course of the dif ficult, need to guide good enterprise culture through performance management. 5.2 Human resource development of logistics companies’ employees

Performance appraisal is lack of strategic planning, human resources “bureaucratic”. Many logistics com panies are now paid little attention to strategic issues of human resource development sta�, leading logis tics company’s human resources department in many cases become “idle bureaucratic,” especially in terms of performance appraisal, just a superficial work, generally have a lot of performance appraisal is the end of the specific implementation, but the end for many logistics companies operating season is just so often which leads to performance appraisal work is not yet in full swing on miserably. Logistics enter prise culture hinder the operation of the performance appraisal, most logistics companies’ senior managers have several years of experience in the operation of the market, creating the consensus more believe the market, although due to the world economic devel opment, logistics enterprises gradually began to pay attention to the advanced management theory , but it still takes a long time to form a common philosophy, so the logistics enterprises performance evaluation is still in its infancy, if you want to achieve proper per formance appraisal evaluation results, we still need human resources personnel together for a long time

E-commerce security policy analysis

Maarina

Inner Mongolia Business & Trade Vocational College, China

ABSTRACT: In today’s 21st century of IT, e-commerce began to develop rapidly. Among them, in the process of e-commerce implementation, it is mainly to ensure system security issues. Based primarily on this issue, we discussed issues related to certification systems, SSL protocol as well as SET protocol. In addition, the article also describes the business several other safety-related technology.

KEYWORDS: E-commerce security; Authentication system; SSLX agreement; SET protocol

Today, the rapid development of the Internet, e-commerce has mushroomed rise, and there are a lot of importance to the state of e-commerce, and also put forward a series of appropriate policies as well as take the appropriate measures. Of course, in our coun try, there is no exception. When the online payment necessarily involves e-commerce, we are in order to make transactions safely and e�ectively, People’s Bank of China will set up a study of e-commerce research group, specializing in e-commerce in the bank to pay in research, and in this study basis, along with other banks, they are an organization established CFCA. In the process of implementing e-commerce, the most critical issue is to ensure that the whole pro cess of security issues. In other words, safely use e-commerce and traditional transactions. Among them, to ensure the safety of e-commerce is mainly used to encrypt data as well as an authentication tech nology. Here we are discussing from the authentica tion system, SSL protocol as well as SET protocol.

1 AUTHENTICATION SYSTEM

The people who conducted online transactions all should know that the Internet is the basis for digital certificates for secure transactions. This certificate is di�erent from our lives in a variety of certificate, which is similar to our side of the card, mainly in online trans actions to identify the true identity of the person. In fact, CA is the certificate authority. Here we carry out a detailed analysis of the authentication system.

1.1 The basic principle

We all know that the traditional symmetric key encryption algorithm not only has high strength char acteristics, but also the computing speed is superior.

But no one is perfect, the algorithm is the same, the traditional symmetric key algorithm will produce a number of problems in the transmission as well as the management of keys. However, the public key algorithm then would appear to solve this problem. The public key algorithm is to use a pair of keys, called a pair of keys, and it is a private key, a public key is to be open to the public, with the individual’s own private key is kept secret. In general, basically for public key encryption, decryption private key is also used during signature. On this algorithm, the encryption strength can be set up their own, the longer the length of the selected key, the stronger encryption strength. Here we had to introduce an RSA algorithm, which could be considered the most in-depth research as well as the most widely used algorithms in a public key algorithm, and the algorithm is also used in most of the countries. Since RSA has outstanding advantages in key management as well as automatic identification aspects of digital signatures, we can use this to build a credible certification system, in which the public key has the most guarantees. The certification system will be called CA. 1.2 Structure system The system is functionally divided into CA, RA Web Publisher the three parts. Where CA is the core of the system, it will CA be placed in a separate, space, and in order to ensure the safety of its operation, as well as on the personnel selection system it has very strict rules. CA is mainly received RA certificates while having certificate requests. Personal certificates are generally automatic, and manual intervention is not necessary. RA is the structure of a certificate of registration, the main regional centers scattered in online banking. And RA with online banking centers combines various banks, in co-management applications for both customer acceptance and approval, and finally sends a valid certificate to CA. During this period, RA exchange and SA should also be encrypted to ensure security. Web Publisher publishes system certificate, it is the user interface to communicate directly with CA, and it is linked to the Internet. For the averaged user is concerned, he is the equivalent of an online data base of relevant certificates. After the certificate is issued, CA will notify the user and guide the user to download the certificate.

1.3 Situation of the system

Countries in order to be able to develop e-commerce in our country successfully, established a Financial

Certification Center. Certification in China’s financial center is led by the People’s Bank of China’s other major banks combined together to establish a certi fication center. Here is to tell us about the financial and Certification Center, the certification center for the country, and the country’s financial system is run by the establishment of a unified common relevant certification center.

2 SSL AGREEMENT

SSL is a secure protocol simple connection tech nology. As a standard security measure between the browser and the server, it only provides a handshake for the connection. This handshake is still before the adoption of digital signature digital certificates for authentication. Feature of this model is simple and can either make all information which is encrypted so that information can also be encrypted portion

Moreover, this model combines symmetric and asym metric encryption technology; This mode is a digi tal certificate issued by CA for authentication; finally what adopted is to prevent forgery related to digital signatures. The SSL protocol is mainly composed of certification as well as user authentication servers composed of two processes. In every transaction, the client’s certificate first is communicated to the bank, and then it is verified by the server, and finally the legality verification certifi cate. Server is mainly based on information provided by the customer to determine if it is necessary to gener ate a new master key, if necessary, then the server will respond to customer when the information is transmit ted containing the new key to the customer, then the customer in accordance with provided information to generate a new key and the new key will be generated to the server, the server replies master key based on this information, allowing customers to verify. Now most of the banks in our country are used in the SSL protocol, especially in the electricity busi ness in real-time to pay for this one, SSL protocol has a wide range of applications. But in the beginning, the SSL protocol is not designed specifically for e-commerce, so there will be little drawbacks when applied. For example, e-commerce is to work together with the user, as well as the bank of the three sites, but it can only guarantee, SSL authentication between the client and the server, so it will have some security issues in between. Therefore, in order to improve, SET protocol e-commerce transactions appeared. 3 SET AGREEMENT SET protocol is specifically developed for online transaction security, and provides more secure protection for electronic transactions, thus ensuring the legitimate confidentiality and anti-repudiation, related data integrity as well as user identity transactions. 3.1 Confidentiality SET protocol is to use a public key algorithm to ensure the confidentiality of information, this algorithm allows anyone to send an encrypted message to the recipient, but the recipient can only be developed, so the process will ensure the relevant information confidentiality. SET sometimes sent the information by double signature to businesses, but businesses cannot access customer information, which also reduces the likelihood of information being spied upon, to ensure their safety. 3.2 Data integrity After the encrypted information sent through SET protocol, it will produce a digest value and is the only one of the relevant information. If someone wants to tamper with the information in the data, this digest value will be changed, and inspectors will find that this will ensure the integrity of the data. 3.3 Anti-repudiation SET transaction in the entire publishing process as well as digital certificates, related businesses as well as customer information will be included in this process forward. So, if customers use SET to businesses placing orders, after the arrival the customer can not deny the existence of this order, for the same, the business cannot be denied on this order. 3.4 Limitations Because SET is designed specifically for e-commerce, but the application cannot solve all the problems encountered in e-commerce, although in many ways it has also been beneficial SSL dissatisfaction of some banks and boycott. There is no way to know its future development, only to see it later developments.

4 SOME OTHER TECHNOLOGIES RELATED TO E-COMMERCE

The first is the password technology, which mainly consists of traditional public key cryptography system, there are two passwords. Which is the tra ditional type of system would use the same encryp tion and decryption keys, but it is the use of open type of a pair of keys, that is both a private key and a public key. Here, it seems, and the basis of cryptographic techniques is described earlier related technologies;

Second, it is the access control. In addition to its own computer network hardware, operating system is to ensure the safety of the most basic parts. As about the manager of network resources, it requires to have certain protection mechanisms. Here, the access con trol, security mechanism is the core of the operating system. Finally, looking at the firewall technology, computer set up firewalls mainly to protect their inter nal networks to external networks which are not sub ject to attack in order to prevent leaks.

5 SUMMARY

With the rapid development of the Internet, more and more people have access to surf the internet, and

Explore the impact of E-commerce network on development of regional economic

Maarina

Inner Mongolia Business & Trade Vocational College, China

ABSTRACT: In the era of rapid development of the Internet, people began to adapt to the huge growth of the

Internet to facilitate people’s daily lives, people have been accustomed to staying at home and can easily enjoy the convenience and needs of life to achieve quick and easy lifestyle. The advent of the Internet age has also become more virtual to business models, and now the development of enterprises has involved the application of e-commerce technology, the company’s business model combines network through electronic technology to some extent, and it made great adjustments and changes in order to deal with the new face of increasingly fierce competition in the market. Thus a new term: “E-commerce” is well known and accepted by more and more peo ple. A regional economic development need of the residents’ daily consumption is driven, so local governments need to focus on the various steady developments of local small and medium enterprises. Therefore, the devel opment of electronic commerce network technology can indirectly affect a region’s economic development.

This paper discusses this issue.

KEYWORDS: E-commerce model; Network IT; Regional economic development.

Electronic commerce is a network formed by means of the interconnection network between consumers and sellers of electronic sales. Among them, a com bination of Internet technology, value-added network technology and enterprise LAN technology, through

B2B e-commerce service model, promote the devel opment of the logistics industry, and shorten the distance between the merchant and the customer.

Development of e-commerce on the Internet has a role in promoting the regional economy, at the same time it meets the needs of people’s lives, and accelerates the economic development of the region. China, as a developing country, each region is also actively advo cated the continuous optimization of the industrial structure of an e - commerce system, the economic globalization of information can be carried out, so that domestic economic development keeps pace with the times. Therefore, the state in recent years has been the traditional business models for reform and innova tion, the constant introduction of advanced equipment is from abroad, and hire a professional research sta�, in China the technology builds sophisticated network easier platform for domestic enterprises convenience.

1 CONSTRUCTION OF E-COMMERCE 1.1 Government support

In order to make e-commerce system mature as soon as possible in the domestic market, the relevant state departments of some large enterprises are to establish a series of e-commerce network marketing system, thereby improving network information between authenticity and reliability. The government is actively working to educate the citizens of network information used to advocate the protection of citizens to improve self-awareness of network information. Also we organize to establish a network of specialized police force, once found to have violated conduct online transactions of credit, we take stringent measures to rectify and punish in order to create a network environment of civilization, so that people can rest assured the conduct online transactions, and make businesses more convenient to use e-commerce sales model. 1.2 Regulation of third parties In order to carry out e�ective supervision of both parties, the expert organizations work together to create a third-party platform. Third parties have certain strengths and credibility of the establishment of an independent transaction payment platform, the buyer after selecting food items, there are not direct payments to the seller, but the money hit the third trading account. The third party after the receipt of the money will notify the seller to arrange delivery. After receiving consumer goods, confirm the quality and style of the goods satisfied to notify third-party payments, such as consumers do not want a third party, and it can be refunded after receipt of goods, the money is returned to consumers. Third-party platform on both sides of the transaction level of credit guarantees, and it plays the role of intermediary to protect the common interests of both sides, so that the transac tion can be successfully reached.

1.3 Enterprise self-protection

In a complex network environment huge information resources, information resources can be shared with each other, but the major companies of foreign trade secrets cannot be easily compromised.

Related technology sector enterprises need to do the company’s internal information security work, and we must continue to strengthen internal network firewall features, regular virus detection. When the internal network is outside information, the application can be integrated e�ectively means good protection, improve self-defense and self-healing capabilities within the enterprise network, and reduce the internal network from external attack vulnerabilities. Increase the number of lines in the certification process to pass information to each other in the process, so as to continuously strengthen the network information security system, and construct a harmonious and healthy Internet environment [1].

2 THE ROLE OF E-COMMERCE

2.1 Convenience of business sales

Occupying a larger share in the market, you need to supply a large number of products to market enter prise, once form a clear product positioning, you need to build a business started exclusive brands to enhance their value. There are features in order to allow indus tries to achieve a comprehensive representation of industrial upgrading, product di�erentiation and bet ter inter-industry segments, so the e�ective integra tion of the types of goods need to be fully e�ective used by e-commerce technology that allows larger businesses to focus on corporate brand building and form a unique corporate image. When companies launch new products in the online transactions, they often use the lowest cost to stabilize the price dynam ics. E-commerce platform brings together various industrial products featured presentation materials with information sharing certain areas, to facilitate inter-individual companies o�er to broaden the com pany’s business sales channels, thereby reducing the cost of enterprise [2].

2.2 Business sales effectiveness

Some developed countries attach great importance to the protection of the natural environment, and

Chinese residents are a�ected and form a strong awareness around environmental protection. As e-commerce sales model is no limit on the spatial and geographical environment, all aspects of the sales are doing on the network, allowing people to stay at home and buy favorite products. It does not consume natural resources, but also promote the development of the logistics industry chain, and reduce the number of times most people go shopping. Reduction in the number of people is going out, thus reducing the frequency of use of the car. This reduces are to some extent the coal emissions and environmental pollution of the air, people’s living environment is full of green, more environmentally friendly. 2.3 Necessity of business sales Enterprises in the sale of goods can combine text, pictures and videos on the electronic network related products detailed description, production costs are significantly reduced advertising. Consumers can also be learned through network intuitive product information, determine whether the product is their own needs, thereby enhancing consumer product identity at the time of product purchase. Consumers are around the electronic network in the business information, so moved and happy moments create simple, work and life and it can become a better place. Therefore, the economy of a region wants to get a long-term stable development in the larger context, they need to increase e�orts to create a complete e-commerce sales system within the enterprise, allowing more diversified business model [3]. 3 E-COMMERCE AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT In an increasingly competitive market, the social environment, the structure of the system of e-commerce at the same time continue to make sound, it has been gradually applied to the development of enterprises in various fields. Commodity trading through e-commerce, the transaction process is rarely a�ected by time and space, and it can reduce consumer awareness to understand the limitations and impact on commodity grades and specifications, and allow consumers to be more comprehensive understanding of the product. The introduction of e-commerce companies to e�ectively improve the daily running speed within the enterprise, the enterprise can e�ectively integrate resources and configuration, thereby positively regulating internal industrial structure. Reduce operating costs at the same time, reduce the di�culty of the enterprise commodity sales service and better function the enterprise liquidity, business-to-consumer groups expand the scope of services, thereby speeding up the rhythm of people’s lives, to promote regional economic development pace. Personnel is needed to build an innovative e-commerce platform which has been constantly expanding. Institutions in each region have success fully founded more than e-commerce training insti tutions, training a batch of e-understand, understand new talent business. Companies fully implement the training of personnel and technology and construc tion, instill a people-oriented business ideas, which e�ectively led to a regional labor level, to facilitate students’ learning skills in the region, thereby cre ating more employment opportunities. Therefore, the regional government has formulated a series of supportive policies on e-commerce development, and reduces the magnitude of the tax levied on the implementation of e-commerce enterprises, and the relaxation of enterprise e-commerce creates a work of approval di�cult. The development of an enter prise as a center of gravity enhances the impact of e-commerce technology on the market, and the abil ity to constantly be surrounded by di�usion. Better promote regional economic development, and good dominant market leader laid a good foundation and optimistic prospects for the development of e-com merce technology [4].

4 CONCLUSIONS

In mobile phones, computer necessities as people age, people’s lifestyle are undergoing tremendous

The development trend of China’s agricultural economic management disciplines

Yi Luo

Chongqing College of Electronic Engineering, Chongqing, China

ABSTRACT: Modern agricultural economics and management has a nature of the fusion cross, and agricul tural economic management has economics, agronomy, management and integration and it also has the partic ularity of disciplines, from the position in terms of management and economics agricultural economy belongs to the branch pipe and branch management economics. As China’s reform and opening up, the whole society is in a new phase of a transition, agricultural economics and management disciplines would like to be explored in more areas, but we still want to keep the cross and integration features. In this paper, a modern agricultural economy management discipline is in order to adapt to the transition period which is characterized by a series of market analyzes and reflection.

KEYWORDS: Agriculture; Economics; Management; Subject; Economics

According to authoritative data, to the industriali zation of developing countries in the early stages of industry, agriculture is the dominant position occu pied by the majority of the workforce who engaged in agriculture, industry, if you want to develop, they must rely on agriculture, in terms of the objective agriculture which provides the basis for the industrial accumulation. If the development of the industry in the late industrial economy will be the dominant body, it will become a subsidiary of agriculture, the growth rate of agriculture and industry will be at a great gap, the accumulation and development of industry will continue enhancement of industrial trans and Shop will come to help agricultural development, and it can be appropriately adjusted model of development for agriculture and rural e�orts to be supported by large e�ort, which would promote the harmonious devel opment of industry and agriculture. Since China’s reform and opening up, China has gradually improved the industrial system and national economic system,

China’s agricultural development of the country has made tremendous contributions to the modernization of rural areas for urban construction, and it provides a great foundation for the country’s economy farmers’ contributed value.

1 DEVELOPMENT TREND OF AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS AND MANAGEMENT

Modern agricultural economic management disci pline is with the continuous innovation of the market, the object of the study also had a di�erence; modern agricultural economic management can introduce new methods and concepts, the following are the main points. Modern agricultural economic management has been extended to food science and its affiliated disciplines. In the past development has been the protection of innovation to promote development, the traditional agricultural sector gradually narrows themselves and is involved in the field of agriculture, and it has been extended to antenatal, postnatal each point, in the structure of agricultural surplus, the agriculture postpartum link will highlight its importance, and it is derived from agricultural products processing, distribution, safety, and all the more important quality. Agricultural Economics and Management disciplines will gradually come to sustainable development and environmental protection. In today’s era of economic times, it is the era of environmental protection, agriculture and natural production and reproduction are linked to agriculture and the environment is also inextricably linked, for environmental protection and sustainable development in terms of agriculture itself, it has immeasurable value of the role. Therefore, Agricultural Economics and Management disciplines are related to sustainable development and environmental protection, and it not only can improve the field of agricultural economics and management, but also promote the agricultural tradition of thinking paradigm shift. During the economic restructuring and development of agricultural economic management discipline, it should be individualized according to the differences between disciplines, based on the actual content of discipline and the need to select and according to the research needs of Agricultural

Economics and Management discipline relative personnel training. Agricultural Economics and

Management disciplines textbooks are for contin uous updating and adjustment, also the direction of research to train personnel makes necessary adjust ments based on changes in the focus of the study, which will be heavy and difficult to study new knowl edge and new technology into concrete training on scientific research personnel. Meanwhile, countries should continue to strengthen efforts to train man agement personnel of the agricultural economy, then introduce more information about the support policy, intensify research and personnel training.

2 DISCIPLINES OF SCIENCE COMPLEMENTARY STRATEGY

Agricultural Economics and Management discipline is the integration of economics and management science and mathematics, finance, environmental science and many other subjects. We cannot study these subjects divided during the study of economic management in agriculture, agricultural economics and management of knowledge are related to the heavy and di�cult core of a comprehensive research and analysis to carry out, and we achieve practical purposes of the theory in the course of phenomena in

Agricultural Economics and Management Contact in a long-term.

3 AGRICULTURAL MANAGEMENT ISSUE OF ECONOMIC ANALYSIS IN THE FOREFRONT

From an international point of view, in the manage ment of the agricultural economy in recent years, researchers have studied Agricultural Economics and

Management major and will focus on the following aspects: First, the industrialization of agriculture, eco nomic liberalization and internationalization of the economic development of agriculture and agriculture in developing countries and the impact of resources and the environment. Agricultural development in developing countries is a key determinant of the level of agricultural economic development of the country, and the current problems of developing countries are to protect agricultural resources and it has been a hot issue in international agricultural economic manage ment which researchers are concerned. Agricultural industrialization and rapid economic liberalization in developing countries make the agricultural economy of agricultural resources causes a significant impact on the environment, many forests and arable land resource su�ered degradation, and the world’s ecological protection and agricultural resources have already caused a major impact. Secondly, there is the issue of food security and national policies on food. Due to the economic development of developing countries lag behind, a lot of food and clothing problems of people in countries have not yet been resolved, and therefore how to ensure food supply security of the poor management of the current agricultural economy to another focus among developed countries is basically due to the problem of food safety and clothing, the national policy take problems seriously on food quality and safety aspects of the direct impact of agricultural trade and agricultural economic development of countries. Thirdly, there is the household income distribution, agricultural public policy, but few studies are on these several aspects. From above, these problems reflect the current agricultural economic management researchers and have developed agricultural economic development in developed countries from a focus on economic development, agriculture, economic development, and the impact of economic globalization on agricultural development and agricultural resource protection has become an international management research hotspot in the agricultural economy. After the economic restructuring, agricultural economy itself has undergone a series of profound changes, which require to be subordinated to the need for agricultural economic development guidelines for the economic development of services in the agricultural vocation of Agricultural Economics and Management disciplines which must be adapted. First, the requirements of agricultural production managers adapt to agriculture to enhance risk management changes, and to be able to fully understand the risks of farming, they more accurately foresee the natural and market risks, with a certain sense of risk and the ability to resist risks with considerable modern agricultural knowledge and a higher management level. Second, there is the requirement to meet the needs of agricultural production managers to restore the integrity of the agricultural industry, a comprehensive management of agricultural prenatal, delivery and postpartum ability in all aspects and knowledge are to be more broad, to have a certain amount of knowledge management on the basis is not only for understanding the basics of agricultural production, but also for having the appropriate knowledge to understand some agricultural products processing, and marketing of agricultural products; Third, the requirements of agricultural production managers have a more solid deep knowledge of economics and management knowledge, it is not only to grasp the development trend of the economy at the macro level, the understanding and use of national economic policy is to better adapt to the macroeconomic environment for agricultural development, correct handle the relation ship between agricultural industry and other indus tries, and effectively promote the agricultural industry development, and to the specific management of agri cultural enterprises or certain aspects and processes of agricultural industries, agriculture has become another through another tube of professional, inte grated complex of talent at the micro level. Fourth, we require agricultural managers have the management of agricultural production, distribution, consumption and distribution of the entire market, knowledge and ability socialization process, with supply and demand forecasting ability to better produce to eliminate agricultural production which is not uncertainty, in particular, they are able to effectively use and man age orders agriculture, contract farming, futures, industrial management and other markets agricultural model. Fifth, with economic development, trans forming of the relationship between the workers and peasants, agricultural market, the international trend of enhanced competition and challenges are increas ingly fierce, which requires agriculture to constantly improve their competitiveness.

4 AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS AND MANAGEMENT CONSTRUCTION AND DEVELOPMENT

Determine the direction of development. Although

China’s agriculture through economic restructuring has made certain achievements, and shows a good momentum of development, but it should be noted that China’s agricultural economy still exist two con tradictory: one of them is China’s agricultural popu lation, china lacks resources per capita arable land, agricultural production management has not yet formed a certain scale, and has not yet formed a com plete industrial forms of agriculture; the second is that the agricultural production has shifted from the past weighs heavy now, the market and the state and trends of agriculture has become increasingly evident, which led to the modern conflict intensified agriculture and traditional agriculture. Therefore, only strengthen ing the agricultural economy management, human resources in rural areas will be fully utilized, and we actively adjust the agricultural structure, improve the quality and safety of agricultural products in order to increase the added value of agricultural products, reduce production costs, and improve China overall quality and international competitiveness of agri culture. This is the only way to achieve sustainable development of agriculture. Wanting to adapt to this situation, Agricultural Economics and Management disciplines must determine their own direction of development, provide a lot of talent and theoretical support for the management of China’s agricultural economy, and make e�orts to find solutions to conflicts and problems related. Meanwhile, the learning content and design of this theoretical system of scientific disciplines actively introduces new knowledge, new technology, new ideas, and we e�ectively realize the economic development of agricultural education and agricultural economic management combined. We highlight own characteristics. Subject to mature and develop the premise that scientific research, it is also a prerequisite for access to important tools and resources disciplines. On agricultural economics and management science itself, it is composed of economics and management. It is di�erent from the general management, but also di�erent from the general economy, and belongs to economic management and interdisciplinary agriculture. Subject integration is not a simple superposition, but in the future economic and social development- oriented disciplines are upgrading and developing. Interdisciplinary modern science and technology is highly integrated, holistic development, showing a multidisciplinary joint research, academic thought complementary disciplines edges are expanding and generating transverse disciplines trend products. Agricultural Economics and Management disciplines in terms of its disciplinary origins, nature, have a cross-integration, which is composed of agronomy, economics, management science complex, cross, fused together an interdisciplinary subject, from the perspective of economics and management speaking it belongs to the branch of economics and management science department. Today, after the transformation of the agricultural economy, the discipline would like to be forward a higher level, and we still must maintain integration and cross feature. 5 STRENGTHENING OF AGRICULTURAL ECONOMIC THEORY AND METHODS In China’s agricultural economic theory and management methods, there is a large gap compared with developed countries. In order to narrow the gap between the final practice, agricultural economics and management researchers should be strengthened between the accumulation of important documents outside wooden disciplines, in order to fully grasp or understand international research and Progress of similar problems. At the same time, you should pay attention to Seeing research in simple terms, in relevant theories and methods referring to the guidance, we are focusing on practical experience to enhance the theory of China, in order to enrich the theoretical system of the agricultural economy, and enhance the level of China’s agricultural economy construction management discipline as soon as possible to form agricultural economy with Chinese characteristics theory and management system.

6 SUMMARY

The experience of many countries shows that basic research is the source of innovation. States should develop a long-term strategic development of human ities and social science framework to ensure the devel opment of humanities and social sciences research and innovation activities into the government and its long-term stable orbit supported in the past. To management disciplines in the development of the agricultural economy, the worrying is not just applied research, and also strategy research gap with foreign countries, the gap between basic researches is more worrying. National parties should increase invest ment in basic research, increase funding for those forward-looking, exploratory study of major issues, to encourage original research, especially quantitative research methods (method of measurement model) innovation and internationalization. Of Agricultural

Economics, Chinese scholars should focus on prac tical experience to enhance the theory that “localiza tion” Agricultural Economics research results with international standards and scientific degree, to enrich the theoretical system of agricultural economics and management, and ultimately it makes our agriculture integrally formed by discipline Chinese characteris tics, logical number of structural knowledge. Changes are in response to the new generation of agricultural economies in transition, Agricultural Economics and

Management has a system engineering disciplines,

Economic growth, convergence of Chinese provinces and industry sectors

Bo Wang

School of Humanities and Law, Sichuan Agricultural University, Yaan, Sichuan, China

ABSTRACT: Province’s per capita income is mainly decided by the industrial sector output, and to reduce regional disparity needs to start from the industrial sector. This article will divide national economy into eight sectors, use panel data and mixed effects regression and fixed model, in order to have a convergence test for provinces and various industry sectors during 1993–2009, there is absolute convergence existed in the various provinces and industrial sectors, and use Bernard and Jones method to have a research on the provincial sources of GDP growth and convergence and find that the coordinated development of agriculture and industry plays a decisive role in province’s GDP growth and convergence.

KEYWORD: convergence sector; Panel Data; economic

1 INTRODUCTION

Overall economic growth in Chinese provinces is with convergence or divergence? If it is convergent, which industrial sector led? If it is a divergence, which industrial sector caused in turn? How is the relationship between the sectors with convergence or divergence in leading provinces? In order to reduce regional disparities, which sector will be more e�ective according to our policies? There are many scholars studying the first question - CAI Fang and

Du Yang, Liu Qiang, Lin Yifu and Liu Peilin, Shen

Kunrong and Ma Jun, Wei Houkai like. These stud ies mainly take the provinces (autonomous regions and municipalities) as the unit of analysis. But the province’s per capita income primarily decided by output decisions in the industrial sector, narrow ing the gap between provinces must proceed from the industrial sector, taking provinces as the unit of analysis will ignore the reasons of regional dispari ties in the industrial sector, and few scholars studied provinces from the perspective of breaking it down into several industrial sectors. Therefore, based on the perspective of the industrial sector, research on the convergence of provinces and various sectors, identifying the dominant provinces of convergence or divergence of the industrial sector, have some sig nificance for formulating policies to narrow regional disparities. The issue of economic growth convergence refined into the industrial sector began with a sys tematic study by foreign researchers; more in-depth study is Bernard and Jones. Bernard and Jones, the national economy is divided into six sectors, namely agriculture, mining, manufacturing, services, water and electricity industry and the construction industry, the use of cross-sectional data and time series data to study the labor productivity and total factor productivity sectors convergence in 14 countries of OECD during the period of 1970–1987. Overall, these 14 countries presented absolute convergence in labor productivity and total factor productivity. But the convergence between sectors are quite different, the service sector is leading the overall convergence of industries. This article will be divided into eight sectors of the national economy, namely agriculture, industry, construction, transportation, warehousing and postal and telecommunications sector (the transportation), wholesale and retail trade and catering services (referred to as wholesale and retail trade), finance and insurance, real estate, other tertiary industries (referred to other tertiary), using panel data to study absolute convergence during the 1993–2009 GDP per worker of β. The article mainly answers the following questions: whether Chinese provinces and departments converge? What sector led provincial convergence? Content is divided into four parts: The first part is an introduction; the second part of this article will explain models and data sources, and have a statistic description; the third is empirical test using panel data and research on GDP growth per worker and divergent sectors of leading provinces; the fourth part is the conclusion.

2 MODEL AND DATA

2.1 Model Solow-Swan model has such a meaning, if there is the same steady-state between the economic entities, due to the diminishing returns of capital, there will be con vergence. Steady factor referred to structural features here, including: savings rate, labor force growth, the initial technical level, the degree of market develop ment. The model established for take structure char acteristics of di�erent economies as an explanatory variable, called conditional convergence model (see

(1)); the structural features of di�erent economies are the same, and the establishment of the model, it is absolutely convergent model (see (2)). This article will have an empirical research based on Barro model

[8] and the model expressed as follows:

(1 / T) ln f () (y_ (i, t) / (y_ (i, tT)) = α + β ln f ()

(y_ (it-T))) + piX_ (i, tT) + μ_ (i, t ) (1)

(1 / T) ln f () (y_ (i, t) / (y_ (i, tT)) = α + β ln f ()

(y_ (it-T))) + μ_ (i, t) (2) i represents the provinces, t represents the current period, t-T represents the beginning period. (1) on the left is the explanatory variable, represents the aver age GDP growth rate of labor value in the period of

T; explanatory variables include: ln )( ) ( ,y i t T ↓ and , X i t T ;α_()__ , X i t T is other structural features; μ i,t is a random disturbance. Equation (2) assumes that the provinces have the same structural characteristics, and therefore remove the X_ (i, tT), with the same α.

2.2 Data

2.2.1 Data and sample description

This article uses data from the “China’s GDP accounted for historical data 1952–2004”, “China

Statistical Yearbook” (2006–2010), “China Labor

Statistical Yearbook” (1994–2010). In the data of the number of industrial workers in di�erent regions, data from 1993 to 2002 are directly from “China Labor

Statistical Yearbook” during 1994 to 2003. The data of a number of agricultural workers during 2003 to 2009 are from the “China Statistical Yearbook.” Data dur ing 1993–2004 are from “China’s GDP accounted for historical data (1952–2004)”, data from 2005 to 2009 are from the China Statistical Yearbook (2006–2010).

2.2.2 Statistical description

From the observation of overall and each indus trial GDP per worker in 30 provinces, we can see the overall industry trends and position of the various provinces. The average GDP performance is very di�erent among provinces, but the rank of provincial GDP per worker are not representative of all industrial GDP. In the provinces in terms of GDP per worker, Shanghai is China’s most economically developed regions, Guizhou is China’s most economically backward regions. However, Guizhou GDP per worker in agriculture in addition to the bottom, output per worker in other industrial sectors is not the lowest, especially industry. In the 1990s, di�erences of GDP per worker in Guizhou and Shanghai were very small, at the forefront of the provinces, but after 2000 the gap with Shanghai was widening, but always in the middle level. Agriculture in Shanghai is in the first place in the long term. Intuitively, with respect to a developing country, development and overall economic development are closely related to agriculture. In addition, industrial GDP per worker of the traditional heavy industrial base is higher, such as Heilongjiang, Jilin, Liaoning and other places, and GDP per worker in light industrial areas is lower, such as Zhejiang, Guangdong and other places. In terms of GDP per worker, the highest is real estate, the other three industries are the lowest and agriculture is below the average level, higher than the wholesale and retail trade. In terms of the rate of increase, the other industries are the highest, reaching 8.1%, followed by agriculture, reaching 7%, each region does not have negative growth in the two industries. The average growth rate of Wholesale and retail trade industry showed the negative growth of –2%. The industrial growth rate is only 1.9% and not very high, Jiangsu, Zhejiang and other places appear negative GDP growth. The standard deviation of GDP per worker indicates that GDP per worker is with σ convergence or divergence. Standard deviation of GDP in different departments of labor trends are varied: Agriculture appeared convergence before 2000, divergence after 2000, but overall divergence; industrial appeared divergence; wholesale and retail trade appeared divergence; transportation, finance, insurance, real estate appeared convergence; construction industry and the other tertiary industries appeared divergence before 2006, standard deviation fell sharply in 2005–2006, standard deviation variation changed a lot in the entire period, and then in 2006, it rose slightly. 3 EMPIRICAL STUDY We adjusted (1), (2) appropriately, with Stata10.0 statistical software, using panel data, to do the convergence test and research on provincial GDP growth per worker and sources of industry convergence.

3.1 Mixed regression

Order (2) in the formula T = 1, is (3): ln f () (y_ (i, t) / (y_ (i, t–1)) = α + β ln f () (y_ (it–1)))

+ μ_ (i, t) (3) If β <0, there is absolutely convergent, divergent otherwise. Table 1 presents the regression results, the estimated coefficients are significant, provinces and eight industrial sectors are absolute convergence.

Finance and insurance industry converges fastest, β estimates reached –0.283, the slow convergence is agriculture, industry and other industries, β estimated value is –0.027. Since the provinces and agriculture in the year 2000, the construction industry and other tertiary industry in the year 2006, the change of standard deviation of GDP per worker is larger in trend, this paper carried out absolute convergence tests in the period, the results showed in Table 2. Comparing the β coefficient with standard deviation of the estimated time trend, from the point of view of the entire period, agricultural, industrial and wholesale and retail trade industry standard deviation have increased, but there is absolute convergence; in the sub-period, the standard deviation of the construction industry and other tertiary industry in 2006 years later rises, but there is absolutely convergent. Therefore, absolute convergence does not

Table 1. The regression results of panel data mixing of GDP per worker. Provinces Agriculture Industry Construction Transport Wholesale trade Finance and insurance industry Real estate Other third industry

Intercept 0.161 *** (5.98) 0.262 *** (3.14) 0.233 *** (2.81) 0.326 *** (4.71) 0.958 *** (5.53) 0.395 ** (2.66) 2.486 ** (2.61) 0.936 *** (6.60) 0.246 *** (5.73) y i,t |1 –0.017 *** (–4.84) –0.027 ** (–2.36) –0.027 *** (–2.77) –0.037 *** (–4.12) –0.119 *** (–5.25) –0.060 *** (–2.86) –0.283 ** (–2.53) –0.093 *** (–6.50) –0.027 *** (–4.36)

R 2 0.0196 0.0180 0.0115 0.0146 0.0578 0.0330 0.1449 0.0552 0.0082

F 23.46 *** 5.57 ** 7.67 *** 16.94 *** 27.53 *** 8.17 *** 6.42 ** 42.25 *** 19.05 ***

“***”: significant in the level of 1%: “**”: significant at the level of 5%; the standard deviation for clustering using robust standard deviation ➅.

Table 2. Mixed regression results in di�erent periods. Time Intercept y i,t |1 R 2 F

Provinces 1993–1999 0.065 (1.05) –0.003 (–0.36) 0.0007 0.13

Provinces 2000–2009 0.194 *** (4.34) –0.022 *** (–3.77) 0.0303 14.248 ***

Agriculture 1993–1999 0.734 *** (5.31) –0.092 *** (–4.75) 0.1353 22.53 ***

Agriculture 2000–2009 –0.049 (–0.71) 0.014 (1.50) 0.0063 2.24

Construction 1993–2005 –0.012 (–0.17) 0.0005 (0.06) 0.0000 0.00

Construction 2006–2009 2.074 *** (5.85) –0.240 *** (–5.45) 0.2270 29.65 ***

Other tertiary industries 1993–2005 –0.049 (–1.02) 0.012 * (1.72) 0.0051 2.95 *

Other tertiary industries 2006–2009 2.951 *** (4.81) –0.380 *** (–4.62) 0.3990 21.32 ***

“***”: significant at the level of 1%, “*”: significant at the level of 10%; the use of a standard deviation of clustering robust standard deviation. necessarily mean that the gap is closing. If the impact of the provinces is the same, the province left behind may have low base of GDP, even if the growth rate is higher than in developed provinces, output per worker will be lower than in developed provinces, resulting expanding gap of output per worker in different areas, but with high-growth of the backward provinces,

GDP per worker reaches a certain critical value.

3.2 Fixed effects model regression

Order (1) in the formula T = 1, and replaced by a_i + γt_i piX_ (i, tT), to give (4) ln f () (y_ (i, t) / (y_ (i, t–1)) = α + β ln f ()

(y_ (it–1))) + a_i + γ t_i + μ_ (i, t) (4) If β <0, and significant, it is convergent, divergent otherwise. α i represents factors not changing over time provinces, such as geography, climate, culture and so on. It portrays time trend, if γ estimates significantly, we will use two-way fixed effects regression. Since the calculation method of the fixed effects model will remove variables a_i, cannot calculate its coefficient, but it still can give an explanation ofß coefficient. Table 3 reports the regression results, in addition to finance, insurance, real estate industry, the provinces and other sectors, there were a significant time trend. Statistically speaking, these individual and time factors have the same impact on GDP growth and GDP per worker of last period, mixed regression β estimated value exists upward bias (In general, this bias in examining the absolute convergence is inevitable). From an economic point of view, mixed regression β estimated value are meaningful. On the one hand, bias is upward, coefficient of βis negative, it can be inferred the negative relationship existed between GDP growth in the current period and last period, as well as absolute convergence. On the other hand, there are some factors make the steady convergence of various provinces, autonomous regions or similar industry sectors, so that absolute convergence appears.

Table 3. Regression results of GDP per worker of fixed e�ects model. Provinces Agriculture Industry Construction Transport Wholesale trade Insurance industry Real estate Other tertiary industries

Intercept 1.783 *** (7.09) 2.219 *** (8.15) 2.119 *** (9.12) 2.111 *** (6.72) 3.415 *** (5.08) 2.307 *** (6.53) 5.490 *** (4.78) 3.013 *** (6.02) 1.449 *** (12.85) t 0.003 *** (2.95) 0.010 *** (5.73) –0.005 *** (–3.79) 0.011 *** (5.53) 0.010 * (1.87) –0.009 *** (–3.05) 0.018 *** (8.23) y i,t |1 –0.236 *** (–6.93) –0.303 *** (–7.91) –0.249 *** (–8.85) –0.280 *** (–6.84) –0.448 *** (–4.89) –0.315 *** (–6.78) –0.625 *** (–4.79) -0.302 *** (–6.00) -0.222 *** (–12.55)

R 2 0.123 0.18 0.203 0.133 0.180 0.167 0.310 0.154 0.1203

F 24.96 *** 31.38 *** 50.57 *** 32.82 *** 18.01 *** 27.64 *** 22.92 *** 35.95 *** 79.10 ***

“***”: significant at the level of 1%, “*”: significant at the level of 10%; the use of a standard deviation of clustering robust standard deviation.

4 CONCLUSION

The issue of Chinese provincial balanced economic development has always been an important concern in the long economic research. By using a panel data and fixed e�ects regression and mixed model regres sion, to have convergence tests in provinces and var ious industry sectors, the following are conclusions: First, over the entire time period, the provinces and eight industrial sectors appear absolute convergence.

The fastest is the finance and insurance industry, slowest is in agriculture, industry and other tertiary industry. After not changing with individual effect which is time-varying in different provinces, conver gence rate in each industry accelerated, indicating that geographical factors, the industrial base, the initial quality of the population and other factors have impact on the steady state. Second, the study found that by sub-periods: divergence appeared in provinces during 1993– 1999, after 2000, it was absolute convergence. Agriculture occurred absolute convergence during 1993–1999, faster than the entire period, after 2000, diverge occurred. In 1993–2005, the construction industry and other tertiary industry are divergent, but after 2006 there had been a significant absolute convergence with quick convergence rate. Particularly, in 2000 the divergence of Agriculture appeared, through the influence it brings needs for longer observation. At the moment, on the one hand, we should strengthen the development of modern agriculture, continue to improve agricultural productivity, release more labor for industry; on the other hand, do not blindly focus on the development of high-tech indus tries, it is necessary to absorb surplus rural labor force, promote the urbanization and it is particularly important for the economic development of backward provinces.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

Supported by the project of Social Sciences of

Sichuan Agricultural University, combined the pro

Research on industrial tourism-led Dabancheng wind farm area development in Xinjiang region

Liqin Wang

Tourism College, Northwest Normal University, China

ABSTRACT: Industrial tourism has become a new hot spot for tourism development at home and abroad, but there is still no clean energy industry tourism in Xinjiang. Combined with Dabancheng scenic spots planning cases, this paper analyzes the conditions for the comprehensive development, the overall concept and indus trial tourism product design and other aspects, which draw conclusions that integrated area planning should highlight the characteristics, focus on the aspects of comprehensive development, market positioning and other in-depth study. KEYWORDS: Industrial tourism, Tourism products, Dabancheng

1 INTRODUCTION

With the development of productive forces, people’s gradually improving living standards, industrial structure adjustment and thriving tourism, industrial tourism has gradually generated. Back in the 1960s, there was an industrial heritage UK-based industrial tourism prototype. [1] Since the reform and opening up, some Chinese industrial enterprises wanted to show achievements and expand publicity, they began to receive all walks of life to visit [2] . Pei Zesheng believes that industrial tourism refers to that through people’s organized visit to the industrial, scientific, handicrafts, services and other types of businesses, they understand the production process of certain products, and purchase products from manufactur ers at below-market prices. This is the first national non-academic definition [3] . Guo Wenkang thinks that industrial tourism is that taking the protection and development of industrial heritage as the core, while demonstrating the landscape of modern industrial production and operations, and can create a produc tive experience for visitors to the special tourism [4] .

As to the definition of industrial tourism, combined with domestic and foreign scholars view, we believe that industrial tourism is an combination of indus trial and tourism which is an industrial process and technology creation by an organized visit to the city’s industrial enterprises, so that visitors get produc tion experience, understand science knowledge, and participate in various recreational activities so as to achieve educational and entertainment purposes, give access to economic, social and environmental bene fits of the special tourism products for government and businesses. There were 103 companies in 2004 awarded the first “national industrial tourism demonstration sites” title, which made a national model for the development of industrial tourism. After obtaining the first certification of industrial tourism demonstration sites by Karamay Oilfield, the ancient city of wine admitted by the National Tourism Administration, there have been 16 companies certified industrial tourism demonstration sites in Xinjiang, which has opened up a new path in order to expand the tourism resources in Xinjiang. So far, in Xinjiang, there is no industrial tourism attraction that takes clean energy as the representative. Xinjiang has a relatively fragile ecological environment in the region, in order to prevent pollution and protect the environment, clean energy development and popularization is imperative. Therefore, the research in this article about tourism development of the Dabancheng wind farm has an important practical significance of project planning of industrial tourism and clean energy knowledge popularization. 2 FEASIBILITY ANALYSIS OF WIND FARM INDUSTRIAL TOURISM DEVELOPMENT IN DABANCHENG 2.1 Geographical advantages of tourism golden hotline and a good tourism benefits safeguard The planning area is located in the northwest Chaiwopu Township in dabanchengqu of Urumqi City, which is an important part of the dabanchengqu wind farm. Geographical coordinates: 43°36’43”–43°36’07”N, 87°46’39”–87°47’13”E. The total planning area is 170,000 square meters.

Scenic west is of about 40km to Urumqi city, 312 State

Road and spit big black highway are straight through respectively from both sides of the south and north scenic, located in Urumqi - Turpan tourism hotline with a stable and large-scale tourist market. If there is a good project planning, scenic tourism benefits will have good protection.

2.2 Science, environmental protection and energy-saving publicity base of wind and other new clean energy

Wind power is the development trend of the world’s electricity, which has an important social benefit for the protection of ecological balance, environmental pollution reduction, fossil energy conservation, power conflicts relieve, supporting economic development.

The development and construction of this scenic spot can get more people in close contact with the gener ation process of clean energy power and help to train the awareness of people’s using clean energy to create a conservation-oriented society. This is consistent with the current national advocating the development of clean energy and building a conservation-oriented society call. The scenic area is perfectly placed to build “China’s Clean Energy Demonstration Zone” and “China’s wind power science education base”,

New Industrialization propaganda base and display windows.

2.3 The cradle of China’s wind power industry, which is expected to build China’s biggest windmill scene

Dabancheng wind area is the country’s most famous wind zone with wind season long. Wind period of

153–171 days per year, including a few windy days

145 days, the maximum wind speed 41 m/s, with an annual average wind speed 6.4 m/s, wind energy reserves of 25 billion kwh, the annual average should generate electricity. It is also the cradle of China’s wind power industry, China’s first domestically birth place fans and witness of China’s wind power devel opment history, gathering nearly the various types of fans about 20 years in our country and Europe, which can be called “the world of modern Fan Expo”.

The development of this project is expected to cre ate China’s most scenic big windmill and become a symbol of China’s wind power industry.

3 TOURIST PROJECT PLANNING AND SPATIAL LAYOUT

According to the development conditions of regional resources, the scenic overall framework is “a museum three areas”. Hall: Wind power science museum, three areas: wind power training schools, clean energy display and windmills ads Grand Park, wind farm tourism and onshore wind sail area. 3.1 Wind power science museum Wind power science museum architectural modeling is three wind leafy consisting of four parts, which is structured as follows: 1 The central axis region: the central area of the building is middle of the blades. The layer can be used as a tourist service center and tourist shopping hall. Two-story is domed building, can be used as leisure and entertainment venues for visitors. Three fan zones are: Windmill science exhibition hall, fan products and commodities exhibition hall and dynamic theater. 2 The windmill science exhibition: Windmill science exhibition fully demonstrates the human use of wind resources in the past, present and prospects through pictures, text, landscape models, multimedia, software and other forms of virtual experiments and popularizes knowledge. The main settings are as follows exhibition: Environment and Energy warning, wind and wind energy, wind farm model, world’s wind power development history, type and structure of wind power and other clean energy facilities, Xinjiang Wind Power Development History Ferris, Xinjiang wind power industry and clean energy merit show. 3 Fan Products: Through coordination with wind turbine manufacturers of domestic and foreign, put various models of fan in this exhibition show. On the one hand, it can make visitors feel that the knowledge economy has brought us impact and improved people’s awareness of the use of clean energy to develop the knowledge economy. 4 Motion Theater: Setting multi-purpose hall, in the tourist season, it can be used as a windmill motion cinema, screening dynamic e�ects movies with windmills and clean energy as the theme. At the same time, set the display, respectively networking with production plants, wind farm control room monitoring system, visitors can watch the fan assembly, transportation, testing, inspection and other production processes through the screen, to understand wind energy production and transmission process. 3.2 Wind power training school This area is located in the southwest of scenic, mainly provide food and accommodation for peers and participants visiting the wind farm turbine technology. Its main building consists of three parts, the first part is the main functional areas, mainly in teaching. The second part is the food and beverage department, which o�ers Chaiwopu Panji for students and tour ists. The third part is setting windmill base, which takes various domestic windmill shapes (such as the

Mediterranean, the Netherlands classical windmill, etc.) architecture as the main building, surrounded by body building attached to the deputy, forming the building blocks of the assembly.

3.3 Clean energy show and windmill advertising grand garden

1 Solar display area. The display area mainly set up Sino-German cooperation 30KW photovoltaic power plants, power stations covering 1300m 2 , including the control room, battery room, engine room and outdoor spread solar panels. While demonstrating the use of other solar facilities, such as solar water heaters and solar cookers and other sites in the region. The zone setting a solar green toilet.

2 Windmill Advertising Grand View Garden. Adjacent to the scenic highway, it is hidden by huge advertising opportunities. Construction of several companies in the area of outdoor advertising windmill, inkjet trademark of companies on windmill. It can also draw advertising on the blower tower of the wind farm roadside barrel, or provide land lease for the advertising needs of enterprises with high return on investment. Scenic become Grand View Garden for famous enterprises at home and abroad to make an outdoor advertising display, which helps improve their visibility and make scenic benefit directly.

3.4 Wind farm tourism and onshore sail area

1 Wind farm tourism. Set up escalator tower barrel outside the fan model spiral, or by an internal fan climbing the upper part of the tower bucket, allowing visitors contact fan with zero distance. Place the windmill explanatory signs next to each windmill.

2 Onshore sail area. Land sailing is a thrilling, exciting, delightful movement, which is evolved from the ice sailing. Land sailing has three wheels, can sail either on the asphalt pavement or on a flat earth. Its top speed is 116 miles per hour. Direction wheel is at the front, the other two wheels at the back. The driver sits between the mast and the rear wheel, which requires the driver eye - hand - Legs should be coordinated. At present, many countries have land sailing. China is expected to build this scenic land Windsurfing Centre. The scenic terrain is relatively flat with steady wind speed. Planning designate an area in the south of the scenic, construct beginners and professionals playing area. Carry out wheeled land Windsurfing throughout the year. The visitors can win some prizes available in the game. 4 DEVELOPMENT OF INDUSTRIAL TOURISM PRODUCTS Dabancheng wind farm, scenic industrial tourism resources have a good combination in the space with natural and cultural resources, which is conducive to the development of complex tourism product, its tourism product design has industry, tourism features, develops wind turbine closely, fan Museum, the wind farm technical training and other industrial tourism products. At the same time, develop leisure, scenic sightseeing, and outdoor activities as the core product of the foil, so as to make the scenic tourism products more plentiful. Its tourism product plan is as follows: 1 Souvenirs. According to the region’s main content such as the World windmill landscape, onshore windmills Arena, clean energy showcase, design and develop: the windmill and fan model series: the world windmill miniatures of di�erent periods. 2 The festival tourism products. Use the visibility of dabancheng wind farm tourism, propose to hold the regular Windmill Festival, International Symposium of wind turbine manufacturing, wind power industrial sculpture contest, land sailing competitions and photography exhibition and other activities. So that the Windmill Festival can attract large numbers of tourists and gradually develop the theme of the festival events in Xinjiang. 3 Tourism and cultural commodity series. High quality souvenirs, the historical description of wind energy and windmills, wind energy development history of China, books, maps, CD-ROM of the development of wind energy company history. Develop a series of printed windmill and T-shirts, hats, bags with windmill style tags. Crafts Series: such as windmills, bagpipes, wind chimes, kites and wind instrument. 5 COUNTERMEASURES FOR SCENIC SPOTS DEVELOPMENT Dabancheng tourist attractions should establish a government support, corporate-driven scenic modern enterprise system to create good conditions for the development of tourism to ensure the healthy and orderly development of scenic spots. The government should primarily focus on the windmill World tour ist attractions publicity, guidance, investment and finance, taxation, land and other relevant policies and other aspects of policy support. Scenic operat ing assets will be valued business, absorb other oper ating components, consist of diversified economic elements of the shares of the company operates. This model provides an e�ective system of guarantees for tourism development and scenic protection.

1 Seek government support. The development of Windmill World tourist attractions is not only a tourism project, but also an autonomous science education base. The project is bound to get policy support from Tourism Bureau and other relevant departments in terms of finance, taxation, land and so on.

2 Technical support. After the unified planning and packaging of scenic construction and layout, all need a high artistic taste of engineering supervision for technical monitoring, in order to protect the overall e�ect of the scenic landscape construction. This scenic area should gradually realize scenic management of automation and networking. Register online domain name, create a scenic tourist website, while adding Xinjiang tourism information network, communicate with the Chinese tourist information network and use the Internet for publicity marketing.

3 Form intelligence support systems of tourism development. Hire tourism development specialists, investment advisers, think tanks and other components market promotion, so that tourism development decision-making can be more scientific, optimize the investment mode to avoid major investment mistakes.

Status and application of human resource management in the enterprise management

Hashengaowa

Inner Mongolia Business & Trade Vocational College, Hohhot, China

ABSTRACT: With the overall socioeconomic development in the continuing process, companies occupy an important position in it. Labor is the subject of an enterprise, in which it plays an important role, so the human resource occupies a major position in the enterprise. This paper describes the human resources management in the enterprise as well as the status of the position and role of human resources management in the enterprise.

There is an objective analysis of the current status quo and prospect enterprise human resource management, and it plays an important role in the development of enterprises.

KEYWORDS: Situation analysis; Position; Application

In the 21st century, the global economy rapidly develops and we gradually realize information tech nology and globalization of economy. Companies are also facing more challenges and opportunities. In business, people occupy a dominant position, how do people in the enterprise maximize e�ciency require the status of human resource management in the enterprise to analyze and summarize, in order to rec ognize the human resource management, the impor tant role of business, it results in the management of enterprises in the process to greatly stimulate the potential of employees. In the enterprise, you can pro vide some innovative thinking to the role of human resources and business development of continuous innovation management, as well as to promote the development of good corporate development. In busi ness, human resource management is a new manage ment company in the areas of human resources, and it is the individual development, configuration and other aspects of the general, it has great significance and impact on the development of enterprises.

1 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT CURRENT SITUATION

1.1 Low sense of presence in the enterprise

In business, human resource management is a new administration, and the original does not exist, so to say there is a sense of human resource management in the enterprise and it is not high. Human resources management is mainly for corporate strategies, plan ning the integration, and then making its investment decisions. In enterprise management, the use of human resources management is more important for the enterprise. At the moment, companies don’t pay enough attention to human resource management, which results in a lower sense of human resource management in the enterprise. 1.2 Enterprise is inexperienced with human resource management Corporate human resources department is originally evolved by the executive branch of the human, in the early evolution, there are simply cosplayers of administrative sta�, in constant development stage, it becomes a mere human resource development, and they lack certain strategic, so in these developments, companies will lack professional human resources management experience, making the status quo do not meet requirements in the enterprise strategy and cooperation. Although, human resource management has served other new functions, it is responsible for the other aspects of responsibility, but the majority of its management personnel management system lacks professional knowledge and experience. 1.3 Difficult to make work quantify Due to the special nature of human resource management, the nature of their work is di�erent from other jobs. Human Resource Management is not a strict, relatively easy to quantify the economic behavior, in which the management process mostly belongs to the abstract of a wide range of management, and they lack specific quantitative management, so in human resource management work is more di�cult to quantify, while the rigor such non-economic behavior makes the principles of economics useless.

1.4 The complex relationship between economic interests

In the enterprise, interest has always been complex.

These benefits are made up of a variety of interests in common body composition, some shareholders, participants, as well as social and so on. Due to the special nature of human resource management, human resource needs and interests in these major companies deal directly, so often there will be some contradictions and conflicts. Although the relation ship between the enterprise human resources man agement is trying to balance between the various interests, but the interests of these areas are indistinct.

2 POSITION IN THE ENTERPRISE

2.1 The core of the enterprise status

Human resources departments in the enterprise are to occupy a central position. In an enterprise, it is often inseparable from the talent and excellent human resources management. Human resources manage ment attracts good talent, making their talents for the benefit of the enterprise. Survival and development of enterprises rely on to compete in the competition, companies must have one or more areas of expertise to achieve the top level of competition in the field, so that the enterprise human resources management need for such a competition, and configure top teams and talents are to protect the core competitiveness of enterprises.

2.2 It is guarantee of business success running

The success or failure of a business is determined by the people, the basic guarantee of successful operation of a business relies on human resources management. Sub-enterprises in developing strategy focus on the future and in the future development ignoring the management of human resources will result in the phenomenon of internal talent scarce, then the company’s success and prosperity is a con fusing appearance. So in the enterprise operation and management, human resources management depart ment is an important safeguard of a business running successfully.

2.3 Help improve business performance

Run enterprise, the most fundamental purpose is to win benefits. And an important goal of human resource management is to implement beneficial activities for corporate performance. So human resources management in the enterprise is to actively mobilize human, well use internal talent, make businesses get more interest in the strategy. Such use of human resources, you can largely enhance human capital, and the development of enterprises is fully prepared. 2.4 Enterprise is the source of human capital Human resource management in the enterprise is an important part of the enterprise, but on the other hand, all of the management of human resources management is not a business, so that the company’s management does not have the human resources management. But in business, human resource management is the source of enterprise human capital, human resources management for the enterprise transport a large number of human capital, such as human capital, and they are reviewed by the human resources department, training, professional business need talent, and therefore have a certain value for the enterprise. 3 APPLICATIONS IN THE ENTERPRISE 3.1 Establish strategic human resource planning system Because human resources management occupies an important position in the enterprise, so in the future, companies will be applied to a large extent the management of enterprises, so great to play its role in promoting the development of a great enterprise and progress. In the enterprise, through the establishment of strategic human resource planning system, namely the establishment of a complete training system, through talent for business personnel training, thus it provides companies with business needs. Investment in training is one of the highest corporate ROI, such training is targeted for corporate training, corporate talent needed, so that the “type of consumable resources,” needs to constantly develop, allowing companies to adapt to market competition. 3.2 Development and the establishment of three-dimensional integrated talent management system In business, to pay attention to the development of three-dimensional talents and integrated management system is also part of human resource management in the enterprise. Companies need talent is not a single aspect, but it needs many, and it can be adapted for the enterprise personnel. Therefore, human resource management will need to filter out talent for business, make the appropriate planning and training, but the training is not enough merely to note three- dimensional development of talent, so these people can well meet the development needs of enterprises, which plays their great talents to contrib ute to the development of enterprises. Because enter prise sta� is not a small number, so they pay attention to integrated enterprise management medicine man agement, such as integrated management systems, human resources management system is easier to use in the enterprise.

3.3 For the company’s future role in innovation

Not only because of business innovation and devel opment, so the role of corporate positioning needs is diverse. The future role of human resources is the need to carry on with the development of enterprise and innovation, such as supervisors, such as the role of innovator transformation. So in the future devel opment, human resources development is with the enterprises to continuously develop and change.

Such constant change is for the better development of enterprises, and for the human resources manage ment’s better applications to the enterprise.

4 CONCLUSION

In business, human resource management occupies an important position. Meanwhile, the status and role of human resource management and development of enterprises are all closely related. Human resources management is an important part of enterprise devel

CI strategy research of agriculture creative industrial park in Langfang

Shengjie Mi

Department of Materials, North China Institute of Aerospace Engineering, Langfang, China

Qing Zhao

Department of Economic Management, North China Institute of Aerospace Engineering, Langfang, China

ABSTRACT: By studying the development status and trends of agricultural, industrial park in Langfang, the paper will analyze the present development and the main factors which restrict the development of CI strategy in an agricultural creative industrial park in Langfang city. The paper also tends to put forward the measures to speed up the CI strategy in Langfang city industrial park and to form a new pattern with local characteristics and advantages.

KEYWORDS: Creation, CI strategy, Visual image, Agricultural industrial park

1 INTRODUCTION

Creative agriculture is one of the important directions of China’s modern agriculture development. The unlimited business opportunities for creative agri culture mean it is a sunrise industry, there is a great market potential and broad prospect for development.

At present, the development of creative agriculture in

China is from one to the situation of flowers, from the early bud to rapid development phase [1] . The Creative and breakthrough in traditional agricultural produc tion mode to speed up the agricultural resources turn to tourism resources, the countryside turn to the sce nic area, farmers turn to scenic region’ people, mass to tertiary industry, and promote agricultural products from practical functional consumption type cultural aesthetic transformation. Developing creative agri culture industry become an important way to the deteriorating ecological environment challenge [2] .

Sichuan, Beijing, Shanghai, Tianjin, Henan, Hunan,

Chongqing, Jiangsu, Guangxi and other provinces

(municipalities and autonomous regions) in creative agriculture has carried on the bold exploration and achieved much gratifying experience.

2 METHODOLOGY

In Langfang agricultural, industrial park development course and present situation analysis, the construction of modern agriculture industrialization demonstra tion park is “the city to city suburb” type of mod ern agriculture and double festival as the important carrier of combination of agriculture, in Langfang city development positioning, and the characteristics of the agricultural resources has a strong vitality and good prospects for development [3] . 2.1 Spontaneous formation (1999–2006) In the late 1990’s, the construction of the modern agricultural park is becoming a hot spot of the city agriculture development. The city’s ten countries (city, area) around the agricultural resource base and the actual development, around the development goal of agricultural efficiency and farmers’ income, promote industrialization, promote the building of the modern agriculture park, a group of agricultural park should be formed. At this time most of the modern agricultural park focused on new agricultural technology, the introduction of new varieties, new equipment demonstration and popularization, focuses on the optimization of agricultural, industrial structure, improve the comprehensive agricultural production capacity, is invested by the government [4] . For example, Sanhe agricultural high-tech park, Xianghe agricultural high-tech park, GuangYang agricultural high-tech park, Bazhou agricultural high-tech park and other modern agricultural park a total area of 47000 mu. Sanhe agricultural high-tech park construction in 1999, in “the 21st century, modern agriculture science and technology achievements transformation base construction, good varieties of demonstration base, production processing and sales base, science and technology talents cultivating base” for the purpose, at the time with the Canadian flowers nursery stock of chemistry research center, Wuhan university, Peking University and more than 10 scientific research institutes to establish a stable relations of cooperation, the introduction of space, five-color corn seed, dehydrated Onions, etc in the country and the world at that time have affected more than

50 famous new variety, become the leader of the con struction of the park at that time [5] .

2.2 Optimization development period (2007–2009)

With the rapid development of the city’s agricultural industrialization, Sanhe Yanzhao garden, giant cattle and sheep slaughtering, processing, Jinfeng agricul tural science and technology park city food process ing zone of a large number of agricultural production, processing, leisure and sightseeing agriculture gar den area should be potential, By the end of 2006, the city’s various agricultural park to 42, but also the park cluster, design planning is not high, inaccurate posi tioning, redundant construction and other issues [6] . In

2007, the municipal government issued and two policy docu ments, as a watershed in our city agriculture indus trialization demonstration park construction, accurate positioning, in line with market demand rapidly developed in the park, and some of the smaller, less project, weak park transformation were eliminated. An minor cereals nutritious food industrial park make full use of Wen’an County contained the advantage of rich resources, relying on the account for auspicious grain and oil food co., LTD., the bead food co., LTD., Beijing lai “bud at trade co., LTD.,

Wen’an County auspicious dragon enterprise and construction such as grain and oil trade co., LTD.

Park covers an area of 206 acres, production work shop 206 square meters, with the Chinese academy of agricultural sciences, China agricultural univer sity, sino-japanese food research institute and other research institutions to establish a long-term relations of cooperation, is the specialization of sesame oil in north China’s largest production base and the nation’s largest red bean, bean paste products production and processing bases [7] .

2.3 Order rise period (2010–present)

In 2011, the ministry of agriculture issued a (agricultural

< 2011> 3), further defined the concept of agricul tural industrialization demonstration garden and con struction standards [8] . According to the construction standard, promoting the construction of ring the cap ital economic circle around the construction of the identified “beijing-tianjin high-quality agricultural and sideline products supply demonstration base, characteristic food processing demonstration base, the Bohai sea high technology, high grade, high added value leisure agriculture demonstration base” three demonstration base and “build high-end food production and processing plate, plate quality agricultural products trade logistics, high-end business and leisure creative agriculture sector, fresh green, organic agricultural production plate, hot springs for leisure agriculture plate, special food and leisure food plate” six big plate of development goals, according to the development of industrialization of langfang, hierarchical, gradient to promote the construction of agriculture industrialization demonstration park. Guang Yang group on international agricultural exhibition expo park is a provincial agricultural industrialization leading enterprises, provincial agricultural science and technology park, and in 2010 won the “China top ten famous” title [9] . At present, the NongKeYuan ecological abalone pavilion built, adopt unique design patterns, combined with the small bridge, flowing water, draw bamboo pavilions of form a complete set, while enjoying the jiangnan food Jane fruit still can enjoy the scenery infinite; The farming culture of the construction of the lively tour of five thousand years of Chinese history of farming culture, the Chinese tourists in play at the same time a taste labor people’s wisdom and civilization in the traditional agriculture; By high and new technology to the construction of the museum, vegetable factory, agronomic shinco, vegetable garden star three topics, in addition to cultivate excellent fruits and vegetables at home and abroad, and through the space technology to cultivate fruit varieties, organic soilless cultivation, cultivation of the air and colorful varieties and new cultivation techniques, shows the connotation of modern agriculture science and technology and high yield potential. 3 RESULTS 3.1 Langfang creative problems existing in the agricultural industrial park development In today’s global market competition of agricultural products, agricultural brand competition is the competition in the consumers, especially in large and medium-sized cities, agricultural product brand competition is increasingly fierce, how to effectively improve the competitiveness of agricultural products, has become the agricultural production operators, government agencies, such as agricultural enterprises face major issues. Due to the restriction of the subjective and objective factors, industrial park of appearing some problems in the process of import CI strategy. CI is one of the enterprise strategic target, require companies based on long-term interests, step by step and layer on the long-term planning, but deeply the influ ence of the small-scale peasant economy, the con straints of the planned economy thought has not been completely eliminated, the heavy production, light management, and overall understanding of agri cultural brand strategy significance does not reach the designated position, not as a current and basic strategies of agricultural development in the future.

Some government departments lack of guidance of brand agriculture, some think, creates the brand is the enterprise has little to do with the government, the lack of a strong policy support [10] . Many enter prises think industrial park brand advantage is not obvious, create work hard, ignore the brand image shaping and developing the advantage; Some peas ants believe that your strength is small, only products with agricultural enterprises trading relations, creates the brand has nothing to do with yourself, does not pay attention to the quality of the product [11] . Many agricultural brands there is a simple imitation phe nomenon, lead to similar and hollowing out brand, lack of characteristics of agricultural products, mar ket positioning and brand unique cultural connota tion, didn’t get the recognition, consumers shall have the market power.

3.2 The industrial park construction mechanism is not perfect

Agricultural manage level is not high, the high qual ity agricultural products less, less leading enterprises, low level of processing, weak ability to resist the market risk; Imperfect information network, infor mation utilization rate is low [12] . Overall, producers less access to information, most of the information for various reasons did not play a proper market guid ance, especially to the foreign market information is not enough, production and sales to production with bigger blindness; Especially in some new industrial park, the lack of agricultural agent cooperation organ ization is not sound; Social service function is not strong.

3.3 Agricultural underfunded

Agricultural investment is the creative industrial park,

CI strategy implementation of another important factor. But for a long time investment by government for agricultural have been less and far from satisfy ing the needs of the agricultural industrial park. But because the lack of benefit between the bank and enterprise of incentive mechanism of agricultural, industrial park investment and financing, bank basic give up those risks, but have a high earnings forecast project, thus further limiting the creative agriculture industrial park. Detrimental to the implementation of the CI. Strategy of agricultural, industrial park. 4 DISCUSSION Creative agriculture in Langfang city industrial park, CI strategy analysis of the countermeasures. 4.1 Create a good environment to promote the construction of an industrial park, CI strategy The implementation of the strategy of creative agriculture industry parks, CI is a long-term and complex work, will not happen overnight, need to formulate corresponding supporting preferential policies to create a good environment, nurturing its expanding continuously. On the one hand, with the thinking of project operation, train key brand, promoting the construction of agricultural brand. Build a brand of an industrial park, is a major project, use the successful experience of project operation, security and the condition of resource input, operation mechanism, collaboration, etc., interlocking, cohesion, to ensure that the brand construction of major breakthrough [13] . Strengthen industrial park, on the other hand, the brand effect, the effective play to the agricultural, industrial park brand to develop modern agriculture and the construction of new socialist countryside. Agricultural, industrial park drive a group of farmers to implement a brand, a number of agricultural county industrial park brand drives the whole county agriculture economy, city and county of the regional brand level of modern agricultural development. 4.2 Scientific planning, the formation characteristics, improves the level of industrial park construction Around the Langfang regional advantages, according to the scientific planning, the principle of reasonable positioning, forming characteristics, set industrial park, industrial base development plan [14] . Through the varieties, specialization, scale, construction of key to cultivate the leading industry. In infrastructure, information system, service environment and so on carries on the overall consideration, clear core area, demonstration area, radiative zone, enhance the scientific nature, forward-looking and operability. High standard construction, hardware, construction standard, settle can let enterprise production; Service higher environmental standards, and strive to project into the “zero fee”, customers service “zero distance”, “zero interference” in production and management, make enterprise can see benefits in the park. High level of development, give full play to their creative elements gathered function of the agricultural industry park, technology transformation, industrial impetus function, mechanism innovation, continu ously strengthen leading enterprise cluster, ensure that produce scale effect [15] .

4.3 Strengthen the scientific and technological innovation, increase industrial park the technological content of the brand

To strengthen the construction of the enterprise technology talent team, pay attention to the devel opment of human resources, improving agricultural entrepreneurs, the overall quality of the agricultural science and technology personnel. To strengthen the construction of enterprise research and develop ment center, and actively cooperate with well-known colleges and universities, scientific research institu tions at home and abroad, optimization and integra tion of agricultural science and technology strength, innovation mechanism and the way to extension work, encourage scientific research organizations and agricultural technology personnel involved in brand management, in the form of technology in enhanc ing agricultural science and technology innovation ability. Organizations to carry out the new peasant training project, make more the high quality new farmers, have certain professional skills.

5 CONCLUSION

Design creative development of the agricultural, industrial park, the basic visual elements for all visual media to standardize industrial park, systematic spec ification, through a unified visual system, the indus trial park management concept, effectively passed to the outside world. On the whole, industrial park to complete all in one go, CI planning and unification, is not easy. This not only need to spend a lot of money, more need to invest a lot of manpower and time.

Creative agriculture, industrial park, therefore, can according to their own needs and situation, orderly, selectively gradually put in place.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

Fund program: Langfang city Technology Bureau research subject (2011023130)

[1] Zhu Xing BAI “developing the western region - agriculture, rural areas and farmers,” Economics and Management Press 2002. 7, pp. 32–33. [2] E.Commercial agriculture as creative destruction or destructive creation: A case study of chili cultivation and plant-pest disease in the southern Yucatan region[J]. Land degradation & amp; development, 2004, 15(4):397–409. DOI:10.1002/ldr.621 [3] WANG Feipeng.Development of Creative Industries in China and Its Human Resources Strategy[C].// Proceedings of the 2010 international conference on technology innovation and industry development. 2010:700–7. [4] Yi Ren,Wenting Wu,Ao Shen et al.Study on the Strategies of the Spatial Development Mode of the Creative Park Derived from the Creative Industries[C].// Natural Resources and Sustainable Development II. Part 3. 2012:2867–2870. [5] Cheng-Wei Chung,Yuan-Yang Chen, Jiun-Jia Hsu et al.Residents’ culture-creative industries inTaiwan[J]. International journal of services technology and management, 2011, 15(1/2):89–105. [6] Marilena Vecco. Creative and cultural industries and cities[J]. International journal of sustainable development, 2009, 12(2/4):192–209. [7] A. N. Kashtanov.The creative inheritance of A.V. Sovetov and current problems of Russian agriculture [J]. Russian agricultural sciences, 1998, 0(2):13–18. [8] Hanae Komachi.German Urban Agriculture Filled with Creative Spirit[J]. AXIS, 2012, (TN.159):36–39. [9] Du, J. (2011). Planning and design of agricultural greenhouse park. Journal of Landscape Research, 3(4), 6–9. [10] Liu, L. W. (2010). Creative agriculture of developed countries: their development path andsuccessful experience. Academic Exchange, 197(8), 79–82. [11] Xu, J., & Lv, H. J. (2012). Research on sightseeingleisure agricultural development based on newrural construction—A case study of North Jiangsu Province in China. Journal of LandscapeResearch, 4(3), 72–74. [12] LIU JP, WANG AL. Typical patterns of creative agriculture development in Beijing and its main practice [J]. Agricultural Products Processing, 2010(1):27–32. (in Chinese). [13] ZHANG YF, WANG AL. The origin of creative agriculture and reality [M]. Beijing: China Agriculture Science and Technology Press, 2010:101–102. (in Chinese). [14] CHEN LN, HUANG XQ, LI J. Path and proposal on the development of creative agriculture in Tianjin [J]. Tianjin Agricultural Sciences, 2010, 16(1):13–17. (in Chinese). [15] ZHENG YM. Based on the local resources to develop tourism agriculture [J]. Journal of Beijing Agriculture Vocational College, 1998 (12):15–17. (in Chinese).

Economical hotels in email marketing strategy

Zhenhua Zhang

Institute of Information Technology, Guilin University of Electronic Technology, Guilin, Guangxi, China

ABSTRACT: With the rapid development of China’s tourism industry, the country in various regional econ omy hotels has sprung up everywhere. Economical hotels affected due to lower prices of factors, more and more pro-consumer gaze. Customers source a large part of budget hotels are from users, how to promote their hotel through the Internet is a problem that must be considered by the economy hotel, the paper through the study of economy hotel email marketing strategy wants to Economical hotels certain significance.

KEYWORDS: Economical Hotels; Email Marketing; User License

Economical hotels are also called limited-service hotels, its biggest feature is the price cheaper, the service mode “b & b” (bed and breakfast), generally considered economy hotel is inexpensive, the facili ties clean, safe, clean and cost-e�ective a hotel format mode, and most of the chain in the manner of exist ence. This hotel’s main target is the ordinary traveler, the SME business people and students. With the rapid development of the Internet econ omy hotel, customer resources become more and more dependent on the network. How Economical hotels to attract more customers from the network are an important issue to study economy hotels, a very important way is email marketing.

1 THE BASIC FORM OF AN E-MAIL MARKETING AND SELECTION

Email marketing, internal and external e-mail market ing are two basic forms. The former refers to all types of enterprises to develop e-mail marketing through e-mail registered users own (as existing customer information, free service, user information, etc.); the latter refers to companies who commissioned a professional email marketing service provider, free e-mail service providers, professional websites, e-mail marketing through their gas resources for mar keting activities. It needs to establish an internal e-mail market ing or use third-party e-mail distribution system, user data management, bounce management, user feedback tracking maintenance management, inter nal e-mail marketing to a small number of consec utive resources into long-term, stable and marketing resources. External e-mail marketing is to use the funds in exchange for temporary marketing resources, according to the needs of potential users to choose to run different types, so you can get significant results in the short term. Taking into account the long-term business and financial issues limited budget hotel, we should recommend the hotel to select the internal e-mail marketing. E-mail marketing is targeted at the most accurate and most likely translate into a group of people. Users of other internet marketing techniques are to get the most minds that are free to browse into your website, which not very active. The e-mail is different; every incoming mail databases are active to fill out the form, to take the initiative to ask you to send the relevant information to their group of people. After a few emails, the contact information is sent to the user as long as you have helped, they will become a group of loyal subscribers. Email Marketing made Economical hotel marketing staff to keep in touch with long-term subscribers. It is a strong trust and brand value in such a way that few other established network marketing can be compared. For Economical hotels, there are any new developments, or discount promotions, the subscriber is able to convey to the long-term budget hotels in terms of email marketing, which is a good choice. 2 CURRENT ECONOMIC PROBLEMS IN E-MAIL MARKETING HOTEL 2.1 It did not choose the right service mailing providers Economical hotels in general have been taken to send bulk mail messages. Strictly speaking, this is not a mass-mailing approach for the true sense of the mailing list; you can try at the beginning of the list of email marketing, as an interim measure. Service standards mailing list management includes service provider, e-mail addresses, social network marketing, membership management, message content selects di�erent formats, e-mail marketing results tracking and other functions. The QQ mass function does not have e�ect function of the customer e-mail address management and tracking email marketing.

2.2 The user database information is not perfect

Existing users are more or less the existence of the address information, which has incomplete website, incomplete information, the information lag, classi fication unscientific and other issues. Due to a seri ous lack of a user data repository, so users will not be able to live in demographic information on consumer behavior and user segments, it cannot use the research results to the user database marketing to segment marketing, precision marketing until one cannot play personalized marketing e-mail marketing, precision marketing advantage. In this case, the budget hotel usually in batches is sent to users to distribute market ing messages, which cannot achieve the goal of cus tomization. Some users regarded the class mail spam; the message is seen as shame and was put into” trash.”

If the client continues to send marketing messages, the user may mask the e-mail address, so perhaps the hotel lost a potential customer.

2.3 E-mail marketing does not focus on the customer experience

The message content is mainly single in the contents.

The focus of attention for everyone does not form a strong promotional market sensing. The main con tents of the form of expression are in the form of text, no professional designers are to design the message.

On the sending time, sending e-mail and website data updating are not synchronized, the update time of uncertainty, the customer base cannot determine when it can receive mail.

2.4 E-mail marketing results tracking is difficult

As hotels are generally neither to establish their own distribution system, but also by the limitations of existing e-mail distribution platforms, and E-mail marketing results did not have a clear analysis of the data. Therefore, the working economy hotels in Email marketing e�ectiveness tracking are done above the blank, which directly a�ects the entire Email market ing promotion activities. If you add some tracking code Html code, these codes are often masked, and for e-mail in plain text, it simply cannot be tracked, unless paid with professional mailing list service provider cooperation, it is actually di�cult to know how many messages are delivery and reading, which will be di�cult to precisely predict E-mail marketing e�ectiveness in the end. Economical hotel should address these specific issues, combining with today’s form, taking suitable for consumer email marketing strategy. 3 ECONOMICAL HOTELS IN EMAIL MARKETING STRATEGIES 3.1 Take advantage of existing customer information resources Economical hotel in the general course of business for many years has accumulated a number of customer e-mail addresses, you can take advantage of the QQ friends, MSN friend and registered member of these friends, these are the hotel’s old customers and potential customers are interested in the hotel. So most of the email address list and e-mail address are valid, the hotel can establish a good relationship with customers through emails and potential customers. 3.2 Use email marketing software Professional email marketing software has standardized user data acquisition methods and processes, database update and maintenance standards and procedures, user classification standards and procedures, analysis criteria of user behavior and process modeling. Be able to establish a more accurate customer database industry, send an e-mail to targeted customers for enterprise e-marketing that has an important guiding significance. 3.3 Target customers get hotel-mail address Economical hotels in collecting user’s email address easiest way is to buy from providing Internet marketing services related to Service Provider. The best and most direct way is to use the hotel website “Feedback”, “Customer Feedback” and other columns collect customer that stays e-mail address below, or to create some kind of online special events, such as hotel rating, web special e�ects, preferential prices, restaurant services, promotions, etc., to attract users registered to participate in consciously creating an online customer base. 3.4 Method of obtaining the user’s Permission One is to attract users to register as a member of the hotel site, to select the services they need, which is a good foundation of the opening of permission-based email marketing. The second is to carry out promotional activities in the hotel’s website, the user is encouraged to leave information, it is easy to get a long-term license; Third is to create a mailing list the hotel to attract users to voluntarily subscribe to obtain the user’s permission.

3.5 E-mail design

The key to open and read the e-mail recipient is email design, namely the message subject, theme, content and sender information. Theme designed messages should note the follow ing points: The first is eye-catching, attractive. The introduction is the basic requirements of the mail design. Mail themes have enough appeal to make the recipient, which will be able to produce a title to see the full text of desire not to read too simple or complex thing. Usually 5–10 8–20 characters or English words are the proper number. The second is a certain test, and it is to strive to select the most effective theme.

You can prepare several different topics with solicit ing comments section after use and then determine the subject of the message because of the hotel’s potential customer base that is mostly for tourism individual, business travelers, backpackers, students and other young groups, which can be designed for its features targeted message content and message subject. First, to provide valuable information for the audi ence is the primary task of e-mail marketing. Through the different types of target audience, we can send different messages that focus on ways to enhance the value with the message content. If the message is for the majority of consumers, the focus should be inter ested in consumer travel information and hotel rooms and other promotional measures. Secondly, the hotel should pay attention to hidden marketing message content. You cannot use voice chatter behavior to persuade the recipient to make a booking, we cannot show to the recipient tedious marketing advertising, the best hotel brand or market ing message can be organically integrated in related interactive activities, to minimize their business of breath. Again, the content of the message should also note hotel introductory principles. With the simplest expression of selling point, it is best not more than one full screen, words control in less than 240 subs.

The best hotels can give the URL link in the message, the recipient if interested, will take the initiative to tap. Also, try not to use the contents of the message attachment. Fourthly, it is to contribute to the recipient. People like to read the information, not advertising. Try to make the information on the recipients to contribute, rather than blindly promotions, hotels can send some scenic spots around the world about the introduction and Tourism Strategy, etc. to attract readers. Even advertising can also provide the readers useful infor mation; users will welcome the only way. For the first time, a user receives a message, the sender information directly determines the mail open rates; for enterprises, timely delivery of mail has not been opened, but the sender information includes the name, trademark or logo on website to some extent, which can also play the role of propaganda. So for Economical hotel marketing messages, the sender information shall include the hotel name, address, etc. and art treatment. For all the emails from customers, the company should quickly give back, at least in one working day to issue at least one answer. To speed up the response rate, it saves workforce and financial resources, the company can make use of an automated message system of reply process automation. The auto- reply message can include product catalogs, price, special reports, application forms, purchase orders, and so on. From the sending e-mail experience, it can test the users’ interests in economy hotels and then properly adjust your email marketing strategy. If consumers like the economy room, you blindly give them room features advertising is undoubtedly less effective. You can read the message to the re- classification of user groups: particularly fond of and a general favorite. For the audience almost read most of the message, you can send them an affordable room; slightly interested users can send profits slightly lower room. For hardly interested audience or send e-mail on a regular basis, and it can strive to win customers over a few. To do so, in order to allow Email blasts to maximize conversion rates. Theoretically, the more detailed of classification of the user community is, the better the effect of e-mail marketing. However, with more points, it is to pay greater attention, it should have a different design for each user login page and welcome message, the workload is quite complicated. In fact, after a long period of analysis and experimentation, there are twenty-eight law-mail marketing, most of the recipients actually reactions to different ads are similar, only 20% of users will be sensitive to customized messages. So do not spend energy, in particular, to the unique design of the mail above, which is monitoring the user’s click-through rate, grabbing 20 percent of the population would play an important role in the next prime strategic adjustment. E-mail marketing has different effects in different stages of evaluation. Obtaining and maintaining client resources stage, email marketing-related indicators are: the effective number of customers, customer growth, customer exit rate; delivery phase tracking service rate, bounce rate. When the information is passed to the customer after the case, it does not mean that customers will read and react. Customer feedback on the information can be used to receive open rates, click-through rate, conversion rate, the recommended rates and other indicators to measure; the user has a yield response to the evaluation stage. In implementing e-mail marketing campaign of

Economical hotels, the key is to track three indica tors mail of the success rate of sending e-mail, e-mail open rates, yields. Sending success rate is higher; the profit of the hotel can help. Email open rates can clear the message and the quality of customer appeals.

Mail yield is a key indicator to evaluate whether the marketing campaign marketing is purposes. There are a lot of e-mail marketing-related indicators, but the most important thing is to be converted into email marketing. These indicators improve process to resolve and the next marketing campaign, which step rise in the marketing cycle. Economical hotel mar keter email marketing campaign should not be seen as an isolated marketing operation, nor should evalu ate the effect of each isolated simple email marketing campaign. E-mail marketing is a need for long-term operation of the marketing system, and only through continuous accumulation, constantly optimizing email marketing campaigns can be constantly improved.

4 CONCLUSION

In short, the budget hotel should be based on the actual circumstances for their own email marketing

SWOT analysis of the developing situation of sports tourism industry in

Anhui Province

Ruijin Jin & Yuhong Xiao

School of Physical Education, Huaibei Normal University, Huaibei City, China

ABSTRACT: By using the method of SWOT analysis, the author carries on a brief analysis of the advan tages and disadvantages and opportunities and threats of the development of sports tourism industry in Anhui

Province. Its aim is to put forward countermeasures to develop sports tourism industry in Anhui Province, increase propagandist, arouse the consumption demand, make best use of features, create the brand project, reserve talent cultivation and improve service levels.

KEYWORDS: Anhui Province; Sports tourism; SWOT analysis

Sports tourism is a natural resource-based tourism.

It is the sum of all associated socio-economic activ ity generated by finding the psychological needs of people, and combining pleasurable experience and joys of thrilling, excitement, competition in sports activities with the natural landscape. In recent years, sports tourism along with the psychological need and of people’s growing demand of holiday travel enjoys rapid development, which plays an increas ingly important role in the economic life of the entire society. Therefore, sports tourism has become China’s new economic development growth. This paper ana lyzes the advantages, weaknesses, opportunities and threats of Anhui sports tourism industry develop ment, which is to provide a basic thinking and stra tegic planning for the development of sports tourism in Anhui.

1 ADVANTAGE OF THE ANHUI PROVINCE SPORTS TOURISM INDUSTRY

1.1 Significant local advantages

Anhui Province, adjacent to the Yangtze River Delta region, has a natural location geopolitical environ ment. Jiangsu, Zhejiang and Anhui Provinces and one city are to participate in the development of start- provincial urban system planning and urban master planning, which is to promote the upgrading of indus trial structure of Anhui itself, infrastructure sharing docking, space coordination development, and to accelerate the industrialization and urbanization. It is especially important to tourism development. In transportation, the improving transportation infrastructure in Anhui Province lays a solid foundation for the development of tourism. At present, it has formed rapid transit network connecting the east and the west, the south and the north; provincial highway is very advanced, the transportation is very convenient; the mainline railway can connect other provincial cities, highways can connect around the counties. The province accessible transportation network will further strengthen the advantage of the province connection with the east and the west, the south and the north, and makes it contact with the Yangtze River Delta cities closer. 1.2 Rich natural resources Anhui Province has many famous lakes, historical monuments. The Yangtze River, Huaihe River are running through it, it has rich tourism resources. It has Huangshan, Jiuhua Mountain, Tianzhu Mountain and other 10 national key scenic spots, and it has five national historical and cultural city of Shexian, Shou, Bozhou, Anqing and Jixi, six national nature reserves, 29 national forest Parks, 56 national key cultural relics protection units. And it has 7 class 5A areas, 31 4A level scenic pots. Huangshan, Xidi and Hongcun ancient dwellings and other groups have even been included in the UNESCO World Heritage List. Abundant natural resources provide good conditions for hiking, rock climbing, rafting, fishing, cycling and other outdoor sports, which is a favorable factor for the industry.

1.3 Rich cultural heritages

Anhui is located in the Yangtze River and the Huaihe

River Basin with rich culture and long history.

Historically, the Huaihe River Basin bred a Taoist school. In Ming and Qing Dynasties, Huizhou cul ture became the most influential cultural genre.

The Hui style architecture, Slices, Xin’an School,

Xin’an Science, Xin’an medicine, Literary School,

Hui Opera, Huangmei, Huagudeng and other have far-reaching impact nowadays. In recent years, with relying on Anhui Wannan ancient villages, ancient architecture and Huizhou folk culture tourism resources, development is very viral, which attracts many tourists from Pan-Yangtze River Delta region and the country. Rich historical heritage and rich cultural heritage will become rare advantage for the development of sports tourism.

1.4 Sports tourism industry has a certain basis

In recent years, Anhui Province has proposed plans to build four major sports industry sectors, includ ing Huangshan, Jiuhua Mountain as the center of the

“Southern Anhui sports tourism and leisure sector.”

Currently, Anhui Province by using “challenge the limits of travel, environment, eco-tourism, leisure and travel characteristics” as based products, has organ ized the “Huangshan MTB Festival”, “Huangshan

International Climbing”, “Huangshan International

Walking Festival”, “Ma On Shan Li Bai outdoor tour ism Festival “and other international sports tourism.

In the country, when comparing to other places, it has an early start, faster development, and has accu mulated some experience of sports tourism indus try, which will provide basis for the development of sports tourism industry.

2 DISADVANTAGES DEVELOPMENT OF SPORTS TOURISM INDUSTRY IN ANHUI

2.1 Sports tourism awareness is not enough

With the economic and social development and improvement of living standards of the masses, the tourism industry in our province has improved sig nificantly. According to the “2013 Anhui Province

Economic and Social Development Statistics Bulletin” shows that in 2013 the annual tourist arrivals in Anhui

3.855 million passengers, an increase of 16.3% over the previous year; domestic tourists 336 million pas sengers, an increase of 15%. However, due to inade quate publicity, most people do not know the sports tourism, they do not know what sports tourism is or how to develop sports tourism, sports tourism aware ness is not formed; or lack of understanding still on the sidelines, and enthusiasm is not high. This led to the rapid growth of tourism trips, but most people still choose the traditional tourism and leisure travel, few people choose sports tourism. On the other hand, the same is due to a lack of awareness of sports tourism, the majority did not o�er sports attractions and other tourism projects, the majority of the tourism market investors do not understand or hold o� due to the state, they are not willing to invest in sports tourism projects. 2.2 No formation of industrialization Because sports tourism in our country is still in its infancy, we still lack of experience of how to develop sports tourism project. And it is not enough to explore the natural and cultural resources, resource utilization is low, and therefore the formation of sports tourism products presented in the form are repeated, single. It does not have high added value, experience of industry technology, and sustainability and other characteristics, which cannot form scale and brand without strong attraction for tourists. 2.3 Lack of expertise Sports tourism is an emerging project in the planning; all aspects including packaging, promotion, and operation will require many talents. And, in the professional sports tourism industry, it requires that both tourism and sport have the knowledge and skills. At present, the sports schools and other colleges and universities have rare travel professionals such professional settings; highlight the lack of supply of talent, which is a constraint to the development of tourism. Lack of talent, directly reflects management confusion, poor service quality in the current sports tourism product, which cannot keep long-term stable source. 3 OPPORTUNITY OF SPORTS TRAVEL INDUSTRY DEVELOPMENT IN ANHUI PROVINCE 3.1 Market opportunities In 2005, since the country stated “Rise of Central China” plan, Anhui took the regional advantages into full play of the central region and the overall economic advantages, the economic indicators are among the best in the central region, people’s living standards has greatly improved. Rapid economic development of the tourism industry brings a strong market driver for sports tourism and reserves a huge potential consumer groups. According to data released by the Tourism Bureau of Anhui Province, in 2013, “October” Golden Week tourism income of

Anhui achieved total 13.912 billion yuan, an increase of 31.06 percent, tourists were 42,948,400 passen gers, an increase of 22.77%. Huangshan City, Lu’an,

Chizhou, Anqing, Suzhou, Wuhu, Hefei and other tourism revenues were over one billion yuan. On the other hand, more and more people realize the impor tance of sport for health, both athletic and sports tourism, entertainment and participation, just meet people’s demand for a full range of travel and tourism and physical exercise, which is very consistent with the tourists’ consumer psychology. It will have broad market prospects, be more favored by the market.

3.2 Policy opportunities

In 2009, the State Council “on accelerating the devel opment of tourism opinion” stated that the tourism industry had developed into a strategic pillar industry of national economy and people were more satisfied with the ambitious goal of modern service industry.

In 2010, the State Council “on accelerating the devel opment of tourism.” proposed to “foster new tourism consumption hot spots, with large-scale international exhibitions, important cultural and sporting events as a platform to foster new tourism consumption hot spots.” Beijing Olympic Games, Shanghai World

Expo have been held successfully, making increasing tourist arrivals, a strong impetus to the development of China’s tourism industry. Anhui Province responds positively to the national policy, attaches great impor tance to the tourism industry in the province strug gling to rise rapidly in the leading role, and their integration into the overall planning of economic and social development. It can provide a more relaxed policy environment that encourages all kinds of cap ital into the sports tourism industry to promote the healthy development of sports tourism market, which has positive impact on the development of sports tourism for the province.

4 THE THREAT OF SPORTS TOURISM INDUSTRY IN ANHUI PROVINCE

4.1 Fierce competitions from surrounding provinces

Areas along the coast and the Yangtze River Delta have economic strength, the leading investment in tourism, sports venues and facilities, service level. Henan,

Shaanxi and other provinces around are ancient cities, historical and cultural tourism resources are very rich;

Shandong’s development of sports tourism is earlier, and it has “Tarzan Climbing Festival”, “Weifang kite

Festival” and other international brands. Provinces are targeting at good prospects of sports tourism industry, the inter-provincial competition will be more intense. 4.2 Development status quo is not balanced On one hand, area of development is not balanced. Currently, Anhui Province Sports Tourism industry is mainly concentrated in the southern Anhui and Southwest Anhui, central and northern regions sports tourism industry started late with slow development. On the other hand, population involved in relatively is narrow. According to the survey results of Dai Qing, Chen Cheng, take Hefei, for example, 18–35 years of age of participation in sports tourism highest proportion of population a�ected by the higher education level, the higher the participation rate in sports tourism. Thirdly, it is strongly seasonal. Anhui Province has four seasons, it has warm spring, hot summer, cool autumn, cold winter, and therefore it is suitable for sports tourism and it is mainly carried out in the spring and autumn, which influenced by the seasons. 4.3 Facilities require a higher demand Sports tourism facilities include transport infrastructure, transport facilities, hotels, restaurants, tourist shops, sports venues and equipment, sports facilities and so on. Most sports tourism projects require specific sports facilities and venues. Cycling needs a vehicle, clothing, track, and water sports must have all kinds of water sports boats, windsurfing, surfboard and supporting lifeboat, ambulance, etc., are necessary equipment and facilities. Comparing to traditional sightseeing tours, the hardware construction of sports tourism facilities has generally high standard and cost, and maintenance costs are high. 5 CONCLUSIONS 5.1 Intensify propaganda to mobilize consumer demand Sports Tourism should have independence from traditional tourism product; it should take advantage of the emerging media dissemination network, television, etc. publicity campaign designed. Based on consumer psychology creation, content marketing strategy, more consumers change their thinking concept, they have the initiative to understand the content and characteristics of sports tourism products, mobilize the enthusiasm of consumers to participate in sports and tourism interests. 5.2 Fully exploit the characteristics of the project to build the brand It should make best of the local conditions, and the time, and geographical environment, natural landscape and seasonal climate. Patron is focused on the development mountaineering, rock climbing, cycling and other projects. As for water, it is focused on the development on the water swimming, rafting, wind surfing and other water projects. It should explore the potential depth to develop long-term planning, to create a regional characteristics Anhui folk flavor of sports tourism projects; it should have positive dec laration and have an influence on sporting events.

With sporting events platform, it will drive the devel opment of sports and tourism projects, to create a national, universal Sports tourism brand.

5.3 Reserve personnel training, improve service levels

Set up a professional sports tourism counterparts and courses in various sports colleges and other universi ties, both targeted at training to understand the basics of sports, with some motor skills, and knowledge to understand complex talent tourism, sports tourism industry development reserves human resources, transportation shortage of talent. At the same time, we should strengthen the existing sta� engaged in sports tourism industry vocational training, certifi cation, and industry practitioners to improve access system, improve the overall service level sports

Research on the development strategy of China construction bank

Pingxiang branch based on SWOT method

Zilong Zhang

Economic and Management Department of Pingxiang University, Pingxiang, Jiangxi, China

ABSTRACT: With the rapid development and competition in bank business, financial innovation appears constantly, private and foreign Banks are becoming the potential entrants. The original management, control and business mode already can not adapt to the new situation, it’s necessary to adopt the new development strat egy to meet new opportunities and challenges. This article embarked from the analysis of macro environment and based on the Pingxiang area characteristic analyzes the current situation of the CCB Pingxiang branch, puts forward some countermeasures to the implementation of the strategy of the CCB Pingxiang branch.

KEYWORDS: Pingxiang, China Construction Bank, SWOT Method

At present, in the face of the threat of foreign Banks and private capital, Commercial Banks will be impacted and influenced greatly, the transformation of the financial system and the commercial banks will be inevitable. Therefore, in order to occupy a favorable position in future competition, banks and other financial enterprises are pouring in all kinds of resources, intensified the layout. China construction bank Pingxiang branch is a state-owned commercial bank with a huge social responsibility, which oper ates good or not will have great influence on the social public. The configuration of the efficiency of funds will also impact the allocation efficiency of the whole social resources. So, it’s necessary for China construction bank Pingxiang branch to the strategic layout based on their own advantage.

1 CURRENT SITUATION OF THE DEVELOPMENT OF CHINA CONSTRUCTION BANK PINGXIANG BRANCH

China construction bank Pingxiang branch was founded in October 1, 1954, has 14 branches, which distribute reasonably in the important areas of the city’s various districts and counties. At the end of 2013 the whole branch profits 157 million yuan, a year-on year increases 2.54 million yuan, general deposit bal ance was 7.187 billion yuan, a year-on-year increase

0.97%, the new increasing is 1.036 billion yuan, the growth of 16.85% is higher 3.95% than the entire province average. Among them, 3.28 billion yuan is the non-individual deposits, the new increasing is

517 million yuan. Personal deposit is 3.908 billion yuan, 519 million yuan is now increased. The loan of 4.432 billion yuan ranks first in the four major state-owned Banks. Because china construction bank Pingxiang branch establishes more business relationship with all kinds of institutions, and has the highest quality of employees, the absolute position in commercial banks still occupied by the four stateowned commercial banks. But other financial institutions include foreign banks and other commercial banks are growing fast in all kinds of business, in the meanwhile, the internet and the electronic commerce also give huge threat to China construction bank Pingxiang branch. How to grasp the advanced chance and take some measures is the urgent problem for China construction bank Pingxiang branch. 2 THE ANALYSIS ON CHINA CONSTRUCTION BANK PINGXIANG BRANCH WITH THE SWOT METHOD Advantage analysis: First of all is the strong power of science and technology support. China construction bank Pingxiang branch attaches great importance to the science and technology, So most businesses in the branch is information, the internal bank has already completed the financial information service and decision management system, by which risk management can be done quickly, which also are in a leading position in Pingxiang financial institutions. In addition, the strong ability of big data analysis is another advantage, by which, the branch can acquire a customer number and transaction data and analyze the customer characteristics, consumption habits and other valuable information. Therefore, the Process reengineering and Accurate risk control have become impossible in the branch. Disadvantage analysis: First of all is the inflexi ble mechanism. Although China construction bank

Pingxiang branch has established modern enterprise system, it still has right in such aspects as property rights, institutions, leader, which is the reason for the slow market reaction and decision-making ability and low working and management efficiency. At the same time, the branch lacks corresponding flexibility in management incentive mechanism, which result in a large number of excellent brain drain. Secondly,

Innovation ability is weak. Most of the staff education is mainly college, innovation of science and technol ogy research and development team has not yet been established, most of the workers are busy market, So there is a shortage of innovation ability and conscious ness, and difficult to form the real innovation. Opportunity analysis: In the long run, the overall situation of China’s economy is still good, Market position is more prominent, the vitality of the devel opment of small and medium-sized enterprises are more apparent, urbanization will be further, which will become a new economic growth point of

Pingxiang. In the past, because of the old mechani cal system, more financial services flowed to state owned enterprises and large companies. Now more and more small and medium-sized enterprises hope to get more financial services, this will be an important development opportunity for the branch. In addition,

Pingxiang economic work conference also consid ers the project construction, science and technology innovation as well as the ecological construction as an important means of Pingxiang economic trans formation, The whole city will construct more than

1000 projects, invest more than 350 billion yuan, which are the very important opportunity for the development of the branch. Threat analysis: Affected by domestic and for eign economic, Pingxiang is affected largely in the economy. The coal was one of the pillar industry in

Pingxiang. Due to the influence of various aspects, the price decline, A large number of coal enterprises are in loss, a lot of workers lost jobs, local con sumption ability jump to the lowest point. Fireworks industry also is one of the important pillar industries of Pingxiang area. Due to the bad weather and the people’s further improvement of the environmental protection consciousness, the fireworks industry suf fers greatly both at home and abroad, sales are on the way down, which seriously affect the development of the fireworks industry. Cement industry, which was once an important industry in Pingxiang, are also suffering the influence of national macroeconomic regulation and control. A lot of excess capacity force the enterprise to produce inadequate, the income of workers affected greatly. Therefore, three of the five pillar industries of Pingxiang have been in a very serious situation, the related enterprise capital chain increase nervously, a large number of mortgage items are shrinking, Some buses run defaulted and so on, which give the financial institutions such as China construction bank Pingxiang branch a huge crisis and stress. In addition, affected by the macroeconomic regulation and control, the expansion size of the loan of the branch is limited, which are also the threat analysis for the branch. 3 MEASURES ON THE IMPLEMENTATION OF DEVELOPMENT STRATEGY OF CHINA CONSTRUCTION BANK PINGXIANG BRANCH TO SPEED UP THE CUSTOMER TRANSFORMATION Pingxiang has very good geographical location, in the west of Changsha urban agglomeration which is in the transformation and development period, the branch should take advantage of this opportunity, broaden the business look for new quality customers, improve business growth on the basis of continuously maintaining the original big customers, old customers. For the new one thousand project, the branch should be actively involved and analyze the new and old customers in depth and maintain and develop them, by which the accelerated transformation of marketing would be impossible. First of all, the branch should take the customer as the center, follow up and expand the customer. For the important clients, the branch should track individually with the highest quality service. For the institutional business, more focus should be on the government and large companies. For some distinctive self- employed person, the more credit system should be created, through the unsecured loans, industry group, strengthened cooperation can be created. At the same time, more cooperation should be strengthened with the insurance companies, securities companies and other financial intermediaries. Secondly, According to the current actual needs of financial customers in pingxiang, the branch should optimize the credit structure and the equilibrium of wholesale and retail business, actively use pingxiang industrial structure adjustment, contact more state enterprises and major projects, increase investment in resources of the country’s policy support industries, increase the financial support of ceramics industry, at the same time, the decline industries such as coal, cement and fireworks should audit strictly and control the credit business, and strive to give more credit to more dynamic small enterprises, grab more effective market share.

4 STRENGTHEN THE RISK MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL STRATEGY

In the economic development of our country gradu ally slow down, Pingxiang’s economy is also slowing down, concealment of many financial issues, finan cial risk is increasingly revealed. It is in this context that the branch should have risk awareness, defuse the arrival of all possible risks in advance. Firstly, the branch should Improve risk control policy in the weak industry, adjust measures to local conditions to develop a suitable risk management policy of Pingxiang. More clearly judgment should be on the main risk category, all kinds of risk appetite and tolerance, risk management methods, especially in the current recession larger industries, such as the coal industry, cement industry and fireworks industry,

Loans and other business should reasonable evalua tion for these industries. Through the establishment of organizational structure with risk management ability and the continuous improvement of organization in risk management tools, the branch increase various business risk identification, monitoring and preven tion of ability, at the same time, strengthen the trans mission of information to ensure timely reporting important risk, policy, marketing, customer, and loss of deposit, and other important information. Secondly, strengthening the management of oper ational risk for the self-employed person according to the internal control requirements. According to the characteristics of the Pingxiang self-employed person, the face of the risk prevention should involve more widely, especially for the new added one, the branch must pay close attention to the risk, do strict censorship and post-loan management, and continu

Research on cooperation mechanism of Guang Xi and ASEAN under the

21st century Marine Silk Road strategy

Nianping Zhang

Guilin Institute of Tourism, Guangxi, Guilin, China

ABSTRACT: In 2013 October, president Xi Jinping put forward China is willing to develop good marine partnership with ASEAN countries in the twenty-first century and will jointly build “marine silk road” on a visit to the ASEAN countries. In the aspect of marine tourism, Guangxi and ASEAN cooperation has a solid foundation. This paper first gives the concept of the Marine Silk Road, and then analyzes the Guangxi and

ASEAN tourism cooperation mechanism of the line, implementation steps and conditions under the 21 century

Marine Silk Road strategy in order to provide reference for the related workers.

KEYWORDS: Marine Silk Road; Tourism cooperation

The Marine Silk Road line is long and complex, involving many countries. To create “international tourist routes of fine silk road on the sea”, and the relevant country ASEAN marine tourism coopera tion, promote the formation of transnational tourism integration development pattern of Guangxi and gen eral North Gulf, will promote the “Marine Silk Road” has become the new engine upgrade and a new devel opment of the transformation of Guangxi Tourism industry, and to become an international model area tourism cooperation. Guangxi’s participation in the

China’s Marine Silk Road construction is expected to advance from tourism.

1 CONCEPT OF 21ST CENTURY MARINE SILK ROAD

The construction of 21 Century Marine Silk Road was proposed when the general secretary Xi Jinping visited to ASEAN countries.in 2013 October. The old Marine Silk Road was opened since Qin and Han

Dynasties which has always been an important bridge between eastern and western economic and cultural exchanges, and the Southeast Asian region since ancient times is an important hub of the Silk Road on the sea and part. On the basis of history, General secretary Xi Jinping focused on the establishment of

China, ASEAN strategic partnership of ten anniver sary of the new historical starting point, in order to further deepen the cooperation between China and

ASEAN, build closer the fate of the community, and for the people on both sides and puts forward the local welfare strategic thinking. At the same time,

“the twenty-first Century Marine the Silk Road” in contemporary China is undergoing complex changes in the pattern of world powerful means to take the initiative to create a cooperative, peaceful and harmonious cooperation with foreign environment, to create a good opportunity and the external environment for China’s comprehensive reform. Premier Li Keqiang pay close attention to the planning and construction of the “Silk Road Economic Belt” and “twenty-first Century Marine silk road” in March 5, 2014 in the government work report. 2 COOPERATION MECHANISM OF GUANG XI AND ASEAN UNDER THE 21ST CENTURY MARINE SILK ROAD STRATEGY 2.1 Necessary conditions for tourism cooperation strategy the tourism resources of Guangxi and the Pan Beibu Gulf region is very rich, subtropical and tropical coastal tourism feature rich, very suitable for development of sightseeing and leisure tourism. Such as Guangxi three coastal cities (Beihai, Qinzhou, Silver Beach, Weizhou Island, Fangchenggang) has seventy-two Jing, Jiangshan Peninsula, gold beach and rich tourism resources. The high quality of coastal tourism resources in the coastal area of distinctive ASEAN for Guangxi and the region to carry out Marine cooperation in tourism, especially the common construction of Pan Beibu Gulf regional marine tourism lines provides power source. Guangxi and ASEAN are not only closing geography relations, there are a variety of cultural identity. The multi relationship formed between extremely attractive, so that people from ASEAN countries and the overseas Chinese have in China to Guangxi for sightseeing, visiting relatives and friends, seeking root and requirements of progenitor and trade, invest ment and so on many kinds of desire. At the same time, the ASEAN countries in particu lar the Beibu Gulf countries will travel industry as a national important pillar industry to support, main tain the sustainable development of tourism industry flourishing, has become one of the main sources of foreign exchange revenues in the region, in the coun try’s economic development plays an important role in leading and supporting. Based on the solid cooperation foundation and many favorable conditions, Guangxi and ASEAN will develop cooperation on marine tourism cooperation, especially the cooperation in the sea cruise tourism has a broad market prospect. “Go ASEAN by cruise” will become a new fash ion in Guangxi tourism. Cruise tourism will also be a new bright spot of marine tourism. With the devel opment of the international cruise industry continued to move eastward, cruise tourism as a new leisure way gradually to more Chinese tourists to accept, the development of the Beibu Gulf sea cruise tourism market conditions have been met, this for the marine tourism cooperation between Guangxi and ASEAN in particular provides the precondition for the cruise tourism cooperation. It is understood that the cur rent Beihai cruise terminal is starting construction, and Fangchenggang is ready to open to the central

Vietnam and South Sea route.

2.2 Cooperation strategy implementation steps

“Marine Silk Road” international tourism lines strate gic path and implementation steps will be taken step by step integration of two layered, poly ring strategy. Before 2015, focus on integration of tourism cir cle around the North Bay (Tourism Circle around the

North Bay). The main task is to integrate the Beibu

Gulf (Guangxi, China, Guangdong, Hainan and

Vietnam in Guangning province) internal tourism resources, creating a series of vivid, features prom inently, with strong market competitiveness of the

Beibu Gulf ace tourism products. Strengthen Beibu

Gulf coastal tourism reception facilities, infrastruc ture and public service facilities, in particular to accelerate the cruise, yacht dock construction and supporting the port joint inspection system, parking lot, Tourism Advisory Service center. Strengthen the Beibu Gulf coastal city and port cooperation, the establishment of the Ring Northern Bay City

Tourism Alliance, the common construction of per fect sea tourism big channel and supporting tourism products. Improve, enhance the sea tourism route north bay existing situation, improve the existing sea cruise tourism products form a single, the new Guangxi Beihai to Hainan Sanya, Hainan Sanya to Vietnam and Xialong sea cruise tourism routes, built in Guangxi - Vietnam - Hainan - Guangxi “Gulf of Tonkin sea cross-border tourism in Golden Triangle”, the Beibu Gulf sea cruise tourism the formation of ring. Before 2020, the focus of the integration of tourism circle of Pan Beibu Gulf (Tourism Circle in Pan Beibu Gulf). To share resources, tourist market share, sharing, sharing of benefits as the goal, to further open the Pan Beibu Gulf region countries and regions of the tourism market, the simplification of customs procedures, the establishment of a barrier free Tourism Zone, and jointly promote the development of the Pan Beibu Gulf tourism. Strengthen the Pan Beibu Gulf coastal cities and ports cooperation, jointly build a perfect sea tourism channel, open up China (Beihai) - Vietnam (Xialong, Da Nang, Hu Zhiming) - Thailand - Malaysia - Singapore - Indonesia - Brunei - Philippines - China (Hongkong - Haikou - Beihai) in the Pan Beibu Gulf sea intern tional cruise tourism circle. The establishment of the alliance of the regional tourism cooperation in Pan Beibu Bay, common to create tourism line, common development of foreign marketing, the Pan Beibu Gulf “Marine the Silk Road” into a world-class multinational Marine tourism product. Guangxi development has a solid foundation and favorable conditions and marine tourism cooperation in the ASEAN region, at present Guangxi has opened Beihai - Ha Long Bay in Vietnam and Fangchenggang - Vietnam Ha Long Bay two marine tourism routes. Guangxi and Guangdong, Hainan and Hongkong, the region of Macao and the 7 ASEAN nations formed the Pan Beibu Gulf region between two continents (Asia, Oceania), Liang Dayang (Pacific, Yin Duyang), as the sea tourism cooperation provides an advantageous geographical conditions and advantages. Promote the marine tourism cooperation between Guangxi and ASEAN, will become the highlight of China ASEAN cooperation. 2.3 Tourism line in Marine Silk Road cooperation A line of sea travel has gradually clear: China (Beihai) - Vietnam (Xialong, Da Nang, Hu Zhiming) - Thailand - Malaysia - Singapore - Indonesia - Brunei - Philippines - Chinese (Hongkong - Haikou - Beihai). Guangxi is now with Vietnam, Thailand, Malaysia, Singapore, Indonesia, Brunei, Philippines and ASEAN countries to strengthen Marine cooperation in tourism, the Pan Beibu Gulf region to build “Marine the Silk Road” tourism lines. Development of marine tourism cooperation between Guangxi and the north of various countries and regions to long-standing, friendly cooperation is mutual consensus. The tourism industry has become to promote the pilot PBG economic cooperation lead ing industry. To create “international tourist routes of fine silk road on the sea”, is based on the Pan Beibu

Gulf Cooperation in tourism, further promoting the formation of transnational tourism integration of the

Guangxi Beibu Gulf area and extensive development pattern. This line will make the “Marine Silk Road” has become to the sea of multinational cruise vaca tion tourism as the mainstay, composite international tourism product integration of sightseeing, business and exhibition, sports and health, cultural experi ence, studies the expedition, leisure real estate and other functions in one. The Guangxi and ASEAN marine tourism have become an important content of China, ASEAN regional cooperation, become the new engine upgrade and innovation development, transformation of Guangxi tourism industry and become an international model of regional tourism cooperation.

3 MAKE THE BARRIER FREE TOURISM CIRCLE OF GUANGXI AND ASEAN BASED ON 21ST CENTURY MARINE SILK ROAD STRATEGY

3.1 Facilitate the customs clearance policy is the programs of action for the develop ment of tourism, guiding the entire tourism devel opment direction. For example, since 1980s, the EU attaches great importance to the development of the tourism industry policy support. The first step is the tourism and separately from the budget of the European Commission, to strengthen the research on each member of the tourism service trade and tourism policy, promulgated “on the com munity tourism policy of the main principles of ” etc. series of tourism specialized documents, which laid the foundation for the EU countries tourism intercommunication. At present, the visa procedures of China citizen tourist to ASEAN members is quite complex. China should consider setting up a system with ASEAN like the EU “Schengen Agreement” .Guangxi should strive for national support, constructing transnational tourism cooperation based on Guangxi - ASEAN

“barrier free tourism circle”. The purpose is to sim plify the entry and exit procedures between China and ASEAN, to facilitate customs clearance, to make Guangxi and ASEAN as a visa free region, to guarantee Guangxi-ASEAN tourism with no policy barriers. 3.2 Strengthen basic construction and tourism boutique route planning we should actively promote the construction of marine tourism channel and accelerate the Beibu Gulf coastal city and port cooperation. Among them, we should promote the construction of the Pan Beibu Gulf sea international cruise and the yacht base to guarantee Marine Silk Road hardware guarantee between Guangxi and ASEAN available. At the same time, we should attach great importance to the planning and design of tourism boutique route planning to secure the tourism cooperation of “Guangxi and ASEAN” a win-win. 3.3 Establish multilevel cooperation mechanism Based on the 21st Century Marine Silk Road tourism cooperation, we need not only to create win-win solutions along the country can accept, but also need the top-level design to maintain long-term prosperity. Guangxi-ASEAN tourism cooperation should be based on the international field of vision and the “big tourism, big industry, big market”. The main body of the implementation of Guangxi - ASEAN regional tourism cooperation mechanism (government, industry associations, tourism enterprises) should emphasize on the exploration of tourism cooperation, coordination mechanism of Guangxi and ASEAN in various countries at various levels Guangxi ASEAN tourism to ensure smooth cooperation and to promote the building of the Silk Road Economic belt. 4 CONCLUSIONS At the beginning of this year, Guangxi proposed the building of the twenty-first Century Marine Silk Road and the new hub of the goal of the new portal. In order to implement the goal, Guangxi to play at the forefront of ASEAN free trade cooperation, Chinese - advantage, build international tourist routes of fine Marine Silk Road, strengthen and ASEAN related national Marine cooperation in tourism, the tourism industry becomes its participation in the Marine Silk Road construction pilot leading industry. To build international tourist routes of fine Silk Road on the sea, is based on the Pan Beibu Gulf Cooperation in tourism, further promoting the formation of transnational tourism integration of the Guangxi Beibu Gulf area and extensive development pattern. Guangxi to actively seek will create the Pan Beibu Gulf International Tourism Circle in the twenty-first Century Marine Silk Road national overall development strategy, focus on promoting the Guangxi ASEAN marine tourism cooperation, promote the Marine Silk Road to become the new engine upgrade and the innovation of the development and transformation of Guangxi tourism industry.

[1] Chen Wu. Develop the Partnership of Marine Cooperation well: Study Deeply and Carry out President Xi Jinping’s Strategic Concept of Constructing Marine Silk Road in 21st Century [J], China: People’s Daily, 2014, 01, 07. [2] Ma Ye. A Study on the Tourism Cooperation Mechanism of Guang Xi and ASEAN [J] Journal of Guang Xi University, 2014, 01, pp.18–22.

Social progress for the exploration of reform in the rural management system research

Zhenhua Zhang

Shandong University of Science and Technology, Taian, Shandong Province

ABSTRACT: Combining with the third plenary session of the 17 th “the central committee of the communist party of China on promoting rural reform and development of certain major issue decision” and the eighteenth big clear adherence to and improve the basic rural operation system and to protect farmer’s right to the con tracted management of land, the land and collective income distribution, the resolution of collective economic power, this paper discusses the main content of deepening reform of China’s basic rural operation system. It elaborates we must adhere to stabilize and improve the rural basic management systems, give farmers more fully right to protect the land, develop rural land contract management rights transfer, and promote agricultural innovation and industrial organization.

KEYWORDS: Rural management system; Reform; Thinking.

Historically, before the formation of the rural tier management system, the basic rural operation system has become a tortuous road. Overall, following the

Marxist theory of the transformation of peasant econ omy, the cooperative direction immediately after the land reform is the right approach to achieve the public ownership of land, and establish the basic economic system of socialism in China’s rural areas, help capital accumulation industrialization, help promote agricul tural modernization. There are a system of ownership change too fast, the implementation of egalitarianism, political and social unity, rejection of the many defi ciencies of scientific management system and many other shortcomings. The rural tier management sys tem is in line with the actual development of China’s rural productivity.

1 SUMMARY AND EXISTING PROBLEMS OF LAND REFORM SYSTEM

Three land reform has greatly improved the farm ers’ enthusiasm for production, bringing the increase in the agricultural output, according to statistics: in

1952 the total value of agricultural production in the country increased by 48.3 percent over 1949, grain production increased by 44.8 percent, cotton and oil seeds increased by 193.4 percent and 168.1 percent.

This shows two things: on the one hand the relation ship between the forces and relations of production, when the relations of production adapt to the devel opment of productivity it will promote the develop ment of productive forces, otherwise it will hinder the development of the productive forces. The decisions of the Third Plenary Session of the CPC decided are actually to give farmers more land and property rights, which is in line with China’s rural land property rights regime change and development of the law. The implementation of these policy measures will gradually realize the farmers land management in the possession, use, income, sanctions “Four Rights unity.” On the other hand, the relationship between the government and the farmers: when government policies are in line with the interests of farmers, helping farmers accept the policy, which is conducive to play the enthusiasm of farmers, help to improve agricultural output, otherwise it will a�ect farmers’ production enthusiasm, as the commune period, a “labor does not contribute” and food production phenomenon. According to explanation of institutional economics, when the system revenue opportunities and earnings expectations institutional change occurs and the system is greater than the cost of change, institutional change usually occurs. Then who is going to change the system to measure the costs and benefits of it, I think that as a socialist country in which people became their own masters, we should respect the interests of farmers groups, and have to consider a reasonable use of limited resources. Thus, the future reform of China’s rural should not only consider the adaptation of productive forces and production relations, but also considers the interests of farmers’ groups. Promote agricultural business entities change and enable it to fit with modern agricultural development direction. With industrialization and urbanization in the development process to adapt to the develop ment of modern agricultural productivity requires one agricultural business entities change occurs, the current planting a few acres of land for each family situation, which only belongs to the peasant economy.

If like the current small-scale production millions of households, small traders operating mighty force, it is difficult to adapt to an increasingly open market competition in the ever-changing needs. Modern agri cultural needs science and technology development, equipment, information technology to support it, and requires the urgent need to reform the agricul tural business entities. If still in single family, every three or four acres or five or six acres of small-scale production, decentralized production and operation, from planting, harvesting and selling by the family farming style to complete the whole process, it is dif ficult to provide access to the carrier for science and technology, and information technology. Thirdly, the development of modern agriculture requires skilled, management, best management expertise farmers to serve it. There is an urgent need for innovative agricul tural business entities. Agriculture itself is an industry and modern agriculture should be in accordance with the industrial management need to follow the require ments of the law. Professional farmers need to provide professional arena and regardless of farmer coopera tives, family farms or enterprises, a group of profes sional farmers need to take responsibility. Fourthly, the development of modern agriculture requires not only technology, human resources support, but also strongly invested capital. Striving to improve the organization of agriculture and the progressive real ization of modest scale agriculture are two keys of innovative agricultural management main body. As for the current situation, the exploration of the more developed areas along the southeast coast gradually appears effects. For example, Shanghai city agricul ture has been over 60% in six aspects: one, the land circulation area is more than 120, ten thousand mus.

And agriculture moderate scale operation has reached

61%; two, the city has set up more than 3,000 various types of farmer cooperatives, 402 leading enterprises of agricultural industry, helping drive more than 30 million peasant households and the organization of agriculture has reached 62%; three, make the rate of training for surplus labor transferred from the employ ment more than 60%; Four, we have completed a total of 129.8 acres of farmland facilities, facility vegeta ble 17.25 acres, 2.7 acres of aquatic breeding base standardization, standardization livestock base 120, the regional characteristics agricultural base 31, and agricultural facilities covering rate has reached more than 70%; five, the city has optimized the structure of agricultural equipment, new tractors, combine har vesting machine, vegetable planter precision, match ing straw and other farm machinery, and mechanized farming income rate has reached more than 72%; six, the whole city has promoted the city’s industrial technology system pilot, organizational innovation team formation technology demonstration and technical personnel for technical system support forces, expanding the services to enhance the service capabilities. Meanwhile, agricultural production in order to standardize the construction of Shanghai as the starting point, the formation and perfect six systems are: the system of information network service; agricultural technology extension system; the system of agricultural product quality certification; agricultural brand promotion system; agriculture and agricultural quality inspection and monitoring system and law enforcement supervision system. 2 FULLY UNDERSTAND THE IMPORTANCE OF DEEPENING THE REFORM OF RURAL MANAGEMENT Reform of rural production is from the beginning of the reform of the management system. After the Third Plenary Session of the Party, the rural abolished “a sophomore public”, “three all, team-based” people’s commune system, and the implementation of the “household contract combines unified and separate,” the two-tier management system. This system, has given operational autonomy to the farmers, mobilized the farmers’ enthusiasm for produced, released and developed the productive forces in rural areas, rural poverty and backwardness has changed dramatically. The practice has proved that the household contract-based operating system, not only makes the combination of farmers and production closer, more direct interest, in line with the level of development at this stage of rural productivity, but in the long run, it can accommodate di�erent levels of agricultural productivity. It adapts to both traditional agriculture and modern agriculture, with a wide range of adaptability and vitality. Therefore, this management system should continue to adhere to, and long-term stability. Rural land decentralized operation, the slow growth of agricultural benefit. Household contract responsibility system solves the problem in the agricultural system, but it does not solve the problem of convergence of production and the market. Disconnect between production and market is the main factor of restricting the further development of China’s agricultural. The basic conditions that were much less determine the household contract can only implement the equal distribution of land, with good or bad, causing thinning and fragmentation of land, limiting the scale of agricultural production. 1. The contradiction between small-scale production and prominent market. Decentralized management of individual farmers, are both the main body of production and market. Due to the small produc tion scale, asymmetric information, transaction costs higher reason, it decides that they either do not have enough enthusiasm to concern the market, research the market, and there is not enough capacity for them to effectively open up the marketplace. Therefore, in the absence of effective docking with the market sit uation, “Farmers tend to be based on the majority’s actions to determine their own actions, this herd of target selection method is likely to result in a certain area farmer to produce the behavior of replication and isomorphic cause abnormal oscillations of agricul tural production and circulation, production and man agement of vulnerable farmers to increase the risk”.

2. Agricultural production is difficult to form scale.

Huge rural surplus labor and the lack of effective social security of land bear an extremely important function of employment and social security. In the second and tertiary industries and the slow develop ment of rural surplus labor is difficult to achieve an effective transfer of the case, it is difficult to let go of farmers dependent on the land. This has resulted in that one hand, technology and management capacity farmers lack concentrated land. They cannot reach the scale of operational efficiency; on the other hand, the farmers lacking technical and operational capac ity can only carry out extensive land management.

In addition, agricultural output efficiency is very low, so that the limited land resources cannot play its due role.

3 BUSINESS IDEAS AND WAYS TO DEEPEN RURAL REFORM

The core of deepening rural reform is empowerment, deregulation, coordination, and the establishment. It aims to break the constraints of institutional barriers to rural development mechanism, establish owner ship, contractual rights, the right to operate “paral lel division of powers,” the agricultural land system, guidance and regulate the orderly transfer of rural land management rights to build the new business entities agricultural province, out of a production of advanced technology, modest scale, competitive market, the new road to modernization and sustain able agro- ecological environment. Orderly transfer is to build an e�ective way of new business entities in agriculture. According to statistics, the province of the rural land area is 698 acres. Guiding and regulat ing the orderly transfer of land use rights, we must adhere to the four principles, seize four ways and prevent three errors. The four principles are: uphold ing the dominant position of farmers, giving farmers contracted land possession, use, income, transfer and contract management right mortgage, hypothec; adhering to the “law, voluntary, paid” respecting the wishes of farmers, not forcing farmers to engage in the implementation; Ensuring stability of rural land contract relations and maintaining long-term change, not change the nature of collective ownership of land, no changes in agricultural land, not harm the interests of farmers; adhering to the “open, transparent, information symmetry”, through auction bidding form, so farmers have access to land rights. Four ways are: to promote land transfer in a shares way, achieve agricultural cooperative; land swaps to facilitate land transfer, benefit and win-win, contiguous centralized management; land-agency approach to promote land transfer, development of agricultural enterprises to realize the industrialization of agriculture; land bidding, auction and other ways to promote land transfer, the overall development and realization of land intensive operations. Three errors are the misunderstanding of land transference period the longer the better; misunderstanding of the bigger the better land circulation scale; errors of the farmers’ right the bigger the better. We must built rural management organization guarantee adapted to safeguard. Operation and management of the rural economy, both involving the development of rural productivity, but also involves the adjustment of production relations, administered effectively promote the work is inseparable from the bottom up, and efficient operation of the rural administered system, is inseparable from the work of multi-sartorial coordination mechanisms to protect. Rural Economics and Management System is to implement the party’s rural economic policies, safeguard the legitimate rights and interests of farmers, an important force for promoting harmony and stability in rural areas, is to draw grassroots experience, an important carrier of innovation and constantly enrich rural management system and mechanism. Rural land contracting and lighten the burden on farmers, collective asset management policies and regulations, to rely on its implementation to the farmers; the typical experience of industrialization of agriculture, cooperatives, etc., have to rely on their findings are summarized and promotion; agricultural economics statistics, biography and the rural economy dynamic response, to rely on its collection, collation, feedback. Nurtured a familiar rural policy, agricultural situation to understand the people, zealous for full-time farmers do practical team relentlessly focus on strengthening grassroots rural administered system is to protect the foundation to promote the healthy development of rural administered. The practice has and will continue to prove, relying on the establishment of the State Council, led by the Ministry of Agriculture to reduce the burden on farmers, agricultural industrialization joint meeting mechanism is conducive to the integration of resources, often to build an effective communication platform in favor of the formation of joint efforts to fight with the support of the relevant departments, urgent need to continue to strengthen and perfect.

4 SUMMARY First, under the socialist system, we should respect the collective wisdom of the farmers of public choice, and improve various microscopic mechanisms.

Whether commune movement and over-reacted, or family responsibility of successes and failures, is not the problem of a socialist nature itself, but how to improve various microscopic mechanisms in this basic premise, to the supervision of the socialist workers and incentives to promote the continuous development of production. Therefore, whether farm ers or small independent business cooperation should respect the collective wisdom of farmers and public choice, allowing farmers to explore their own forms of economic organization and cooperation for rural development, adapt to di�erent levels of productivity needs. The second is to give farmers equal access to resources. Land is the fundamental welfare of farm ers, the ultimate goal of land reform is the clear land ownership, land owner can possess, use, benefit, transfer, mortgage, inheritance, establishes exclusive rights, the protection of the interests of landown

The research on the network sales model of special local product

Zhenhua Zhang

Institute of Information Technology, Guilin University of Electronic Technology, Guilin, Guangxi, China ABSTRACT: With the rapid development of Internet, popular souvenirs of e-commerce site specializing in business, traditional e-commerce sites also offer specialized marketing segment for special local product, special local product enterprises also have to carry out network marketing, but not all special local products are suitable for network marketing. What kind of special local product is suitable for network marketing, special local product should take what network marketing model, the paper provides some suggestions for sales of specialty products business.

KEYWORDS: Special Local Product; E-commerce; Internet Marketing.

Special local product refers to a place unique or particularly well known product. Generalized special local product, not only contains the forestry specialty, but also mineral products, textiles, handicrafts, etc. In general, it refers to a special local product from a spe cific area, with excellent quality of agricultural and forestry products or processed products, special local product may be direct harvesting of raw materials, but also can be made by special processing of products.

Whether raw materials or products, its quality can be compared with similar products should be privileged or distinctive. [1]

1 AN OVERVIEW OF SPECIAL LOCAL PRODUCT OF CHINA’S CURRENT NETWORK MARKETING

With the improvement of people’s living standards,

Internet sales are becoming increasingly popular souvenirs. First, they are Dangdang, Jingdong Mall,

T-Mall representing B2C Web sites that have set up specialty Marketing, brought huge profits. Secondly, the tribute specialty network in the world has been selling souvenirs and other professional network website are springing into emerging. Third, some of the special local product companies have also set up their own e-commerce site to test the water network marketing. Apple of Qixia, pear of Laiyang, lychee of

Zengcheng and brittle date of Zhanhua wore the name of “Best of origin,” the first high-end specialty fruit is flowing through the new channel table tier cities, and achieves a new and stylish consumer market. Big business platform of specialty electricity supplier has opened up a specialized and independent columns, T-Mall on line “meow fresh students”, the fruit is one of a large category, in dependence on the size of the fruit is also rapidly expanding electricity supplier - “Every day in the orchard,” life would have been profitable. Although just at its beginning, specialty fruits electricity supplier in this uncharted territory are under more and more entrepreneurs to join. And a growing number of local products have put into the sales network in the past. Back in 2012, Taobao food category re-established feature of China project, the location and needs of specialty products explore the aggregation of project start. In just over a year of operation of the process, and it gradually formed a prerelease purchase as representative of the “presale + contract farming” sales model innovation, innovation in food security mechanism of Suichang, Longyou represented. Sichuan, Xiamen of local life, represented net sales of channel innovation. The Chinese special local product is a line of new roads vulnerable industries. From the consumer’s point of view of the opening, with the rapid development of e-commerce, logistics, online shopping consumers have a tendency special local product, special local product steadily increased the amount of net sales. 2 THOSE SPECIAL LOCAL PRODUCTS ARE SUITABLE FOR NETWORK MARKETING Faced with the trend of e-commerce development, special local product companies have launched e-commerce projects, network marketing, hoping to find a better souvenir of sales channels. But not all special local product products are suitable for network marketing, exam specific circumstances. Those special local products suitable for network marketing it? The author summarizes the following points:

2.1 Uniqueness

The so-called uniqueness refers not only to available things not elsewhere, such special local product else where cannot be imitated, not cultivated, not forged.

For example, the main producing areas of Mangosteen are in Guilin City and Guilin areas. Yongfu County and Lingui County produced the most famous ones,

Mangosteen of Guilin is the specialty economic plants, and it is one export commodity of traditional

Chinese medicine with high nutritional value. The rest does not grow out. 90 Percent of Mangosteen the consumer buy are produced in Guilin, the most suitable for this type of special local product network marketing has its uniqueness.

2.2 It is easy to save

There is a common characteristic for the Internet sales of products, which is easy to save; special local prod uct is no exception. Net sales of products generally require long-distance transport, which will require a longer shelf life of special local product, non-perisha ble. The short shelf life of consumer products is often more inclined to go to the store to buy.

2.3 There is high added value

Many of our special local product impression’s levels are not high, and there is no cohabitation, counterfeit brands are in serious condition. One of the main rea sons is that the added value is not high, it cannot form a unique competitive edge. Increase the added value of special local product, in addition to processing, the brand has done martial arts, the most important thing is to enhance the quality of packaging and packaging quality. Yu Cuiping general manager of Shanxi Fen Yuyuan

Foods Co., Ltd. makes walnut beautifully packaged, one by one, which will be packaged walnut that looks like fine chocolate, it will improve the value of the products. And the sales are much higher than the price of no fine packaging. It can not only enhance the quality of products for enterprises to bring in huge profits, but also promote its own brand. The compa ny’s walnuts are also exported to Europe, the market position is impregnable. Because of its unique prod uct packaging and high value-added products, more and more consumers buy the company’s products through a network. In addition, special local product in packaging should focus on to promote his hometown feeling, highlighting local characteristics and prominent his tory. It should tap the traditional culture to establish a brand image and respect personality merchandise. [2] 2.4 There are certain brands Many special local products are named after the place, such as Yantai apple, taro head, Rong pomelo, etc., which will help protect special local product origin, but it often creates consumer confusion of these souvenirs, they do not know whether those brands are authentic special local product. This requires the efforts of enterprises in brand building. Such as vermicelli, everyone knows good vermicelli, Longda enterprises build ad that Longda is creating a big dragon vermicelli, which created big brands. Enterprises to special local product name, should be sure to pay attention to the “brand + category,” such as “Wujiang • Fuling” mustard [3]. 2.5 To improve local supporting industries For the special local product, network marketing, whether there is a perfect supporting industry is a very important part in the area. For example, processing, packaging, logistics, etc., the most critical is the logistics. Better product quality with logistics underdevelopment, specialty cannot be shipped out, it cannot achieve economic benefits. Currently, the key bottleneck in network marketing is the logistics of our encounter lag. Internet sales B2C companies, such as Dangdang, Jingdong Mall, have their own logistics system, for their future, it laid the foundation for healthy development. For logistics of Special local product, strong enterprises can build their own logistics system, but the vast majority of companies is still seeking thirdparty logistics. This requires strong guidance of the local government to support the development of logistics in the region, providing funding and policy support for the development of the local logistics industry. Logistics and other related industries are improved to vigorously promote the sale of souvenirs. 3 THE SUITABLE NETWORK MARKETING MODEL FOR OUR SPECIAL LOCAL PRODUCT At present, China special local product network marketing model includes three types: First, set up their own websites, product promotion, this model belongs to B2B oriented model; the second is the use of well-known retail platform, including 8848, Taobao, eBay and other established shops. They all use existing online trading platform; Third, through the network to recruit agents store chain model, this model is the B2B e-commerce model. Three models have advantages and disadvantages, but also complement each other, or to determine the conditions according to their various stages in the creation of network marketing. [4] But from the current point of view of the network marketing, shopping environment, there are three models for special local product network marketing:

3.1 Establish their own website, increase online store module, product promotion and sales, which is a B2C or B2B model

Special local product enterprises through the online store show specialty brands publish specialty infor mation, communicate with customers, you can add new sales channels, new markets, with a small invest ment to get great gains and profits. First, the special local product can expand the business promotion through the site, enhance brand image. Allow users understand the origin of the spe cialty, business information, etc. The purpose is to determine the uniqueness of special local product ori gin, strengthen brand awareness of consumers to buy souvenirs. So as to enhance their brand image. Second, direct Internet sales. The company will produce special local product information posted on the website, consumers directly through the website order system to lower sales orders; after the com pany received orders for its confirmation, with timely delivery, and promoted the sales of souvenirs. This would also ensure that the interests of consumers do not consider the genuineness and quality of products, improve the consumer’s shopping experience. Third, they should set up the establishment of a database, personalized marketing. Consumers buy ing souvenirs tend to leave the real information, consumer information businesses will add to the much consumption, to provide consumers with per sonalized service. Qianye in Guilin is a company specialized in Mangosteen. The company has set up a net work, designed the company’s corporate website, and launched an online trading platform. Guilin

Mangosteen also opened a network, the site offers

Mangosteen product information, price, usage, etc. all kinds of information. It has the most visits and the largest, it is the most comprehensive Mangosteen spe cial website, at the same time, and the site offers buy ing services, which contributed greatly to the Qianye

Mangosteen sales. In short, the perfect combination of such a model is special local product + self-built online store dedi cated website. Self-built online store is for sale, sou venirs special website is to publicize such souvenirs, promotional companies, and the entire industry will get bigger and stronger.

3.2 Using the existing B2C platform to sell their products This is in turn divided into two categories. First class: special local product enterprises stay B2C platform to sell their own specialty, which is to open shop in the B2C platform, so B2C platform such as T-Mall mall, sinks and other ants. Why choose such a platform, the main value is credibility. Such as, T-Mall, it is a regular brand sales channel with a high degree of credibility. There is a huge customer base, which is to improve the payment system with efficient service. It is the preferred special local product enterprise set up shop. In this way has the much faster benefit than building their online stores. The second category: the special local products are licensed to sell online marketing channels, such as Dangdang, Amazon and so on. These sites specifically set up souvenir plate, bringing new sales channels for selling souvenirs. With the e-commerce channel and high reputation, they have a fixed customer base, with its own logistics and distribution, product quality assurance, but they are also attracting more and more consumers to buy souvenirs of the channel. The reason why it is not to recommend C2C website, is that now the main consumers are increasingly dissatisfied with the C2C shopping experience. C2C website, although cheap, but have many fakes, product quality cannot be guaranteed, the logistics are controlled by others, the interests of consumers cannot be guaranteed. Therefore, consumers are more likely to B2C online shopping. On the ground tripartite platform shop, we should be sure to determine their own shop names, be consistent with the corporate brand, licensed to third parties, but also mark the official authorization. After the building of the shop t, it is how to attract consumers to the store to buy, I recommend cooperation with Baidu, conducting keyword optimization and promotion, consumers in the Baidu search for a special local product; they first see the company’s shop on third-party platforms. Companies can also advertise on third-party platforms, the effect will be greatly reduced. 3.3 Find special local product alliance, launch mobile internet e-commerce The mobile Internet is the future trend of e-commerce development, China Internet Network Information Center (CNNIC) released the “China Mobile Internet Development Survey Report” shows that as of the end of December 2011, China’s mobile phone users reached 356 million, of which, the smart phone netizens reached 190 million, mobile e-commerce is also booming. Special local product enterprise or local government should do more to strengthen cooperation and build special local product professional mobile e-commerce platform to form a strategic alliance special local product, grasp the future development trend of e-commerce. Alliance of special local product enterprises can take the lead, it can be government-led, high-quality specialty products into our country together to nego tiate and provide quality resources to ensure quality souvenirs, and establish credibility. By accumulat ing gradually formed brand concept, a lift to buy souvenirs, consumers will think of the league’s first e-commerce platform.

4 CONCLUSION

At present, China is rapidly emerging in e-commerce platform for special local product, mobile e-commerce platform has achieved rapid development, and special local product enterprises should seize the opportunity.

With the telecom operators, the timely introduction of mobile Internet e-commerce platform or build special local product mobile e-commerce Alliance, through micro-channel, microblogging promotes and publi cizes, seizes opportunities for future development. With the improvement of people’s consumption concept and income levels, green, health, nutrition, healthy eating special local product people would be the best choice for fashion gifts. Therefore, the development of a broad market prospect special local product, a special local product of upscale specialty franchise network marketing may be the future of the mainstream business model. In e-com merce development environment, how to make a special local product on many low-end sales chan nels has a certain competitive advantage, now spe

Study the interaction between the development of specialized Southwest

National Area rural tourism and new countryside construction

Xuanzhen Geng

Xichang College, Liangshan, Sichuan, China

ABSTRACT: Southwest minority areas has its unique culture, natural landscape resources and post- development advantages, in recent years, the local government is developing rural tourism in order to promote local new rural construction. In practice, however, the lack of coordination measures necessary between rural tourism and new rural, leading to interoperability between the two thrusts did not really been achieved. On the basis of analyzing the current interaction of Liangshan rural tourism development and new rural construction, it focuses more on discussing the strategy of developing rural tourism in the Southwest National Area and the construction of new socialist countryside.

KEYWORDS: Specialized rural tourism, Strategy, New rural construction, Interactive development

Southwest minority areas are important to our country, inhabited by many ethnic minorities; the terrain is mainly mountainous, natural conditions are relatively poor; it is being in a closed and semi-closed state for a long-term. But just as it does, a beautiful natural environment of the region, the unique rural landscape and unique culture of traditional farming culture and a combination of natural and historical heritage all had been formed, so this is a strong appeal for people in the hustle and bustle of the city all the time.

1 RURAL TOURISM AND NEW RURAL CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

1.1 Rural tourism

Rural tourism originated in Europe; it makes people in the cities attracted by “decompression” and “return”, which have been respected in the Western nations.

China started late on rural tourism, it was just the rise of a new tourism activity in the 1980s. The concept of rural tourism, many domestic and foreign experts and scholars had explored and defined, but it has not formed a unified definition. Domestic and foreign experts generally agreed that: rusticity and unique ness are the natures and attractions of rural tourism.

Southwest inhabited by ethnic minorities, for its unique cultural tourism resources, rarity of natural landscape and primitiveness of farming methods, making it a rustic atmosphere di�erent from other regions. Rural tourism in rural areas is referred to herein as the destination, has its unique climate, natural land scape, production methods, cultural heritage, customs and ethnic minority village scene are regarded as attractions to make domestic and foreign tourists have trips, leisure, vacation and study tourism activities. 1.2 Constructions of the socialism new countryside Building a new socialist countryside is an important historic task, proposed in Party Plenum, it is the basic approach to balance urban and rural development, promote agriculture, the fundamental way is to narrow the gap between urban and rural areas and expand rural market demand and the most significant strategic initiative is to solve the “three rural” issue and build a moderately prosperous society. Building a new socialist countryside covers economic, political, cultural, transportation, and social construction other aspects of the whole countryside. 2 THE IMPACTS OF DEVELOPING RURAL TOURISM ON LIANGSHAN NEW RURAL CONSTRUCTION 2.1 Developing rural tourism has improved the living standards of the local farmers and herdsmen Tourism is a strong industry association, involves eating, travelling, shopping, entertaining and etc., the exploration of rural tourism can promote the rapid development of catering, accommodation, transportation, commerce and other industries. It is estimated that a year receives rural tourist attractions with 100,000 people can be placed directly and indirectly employed 480 farmers, both directly and indirectly increase revenue for 1070 families. More importantly, the Liangshan is vigorously developing rural tourism, providing employment opportunities for local ethnic minority women with a lower level of the culture to help them improve their own qualities in the work.

2.2 Developing rural tourism has improved the capacity of Liangshan village, rural and democracy

“Clean and tidy village, rural civilization and demo cratic management” are important parts of ‘20 words the goal of’’ the new rural construction, the city is the cultural center of the region, the progress of city cultural will spread to the surrounding countryside by various forms, especially as a number of the city tour ists goes into rural areas, they will bring city’s culture to the countryside and it will a�ect the overall cultural environment in rural areas. Especially in advanced technology and enterprising spirit of the people in the city and they will greatly improve the level of quality and the modern culture of farmers and herdsmen in remote rural areas, however, creating a good atmos phere for new rural constructions in Liangshan.

2.3 Development of rural tourism makes Liangshan rural infrastructure improvement and modernization of the continuous improvement

Infrastructure is both the content of rural tourism plan ning and an important task of the new rural construc tion, which is both the best convergence point. Tourism on the soundness and safety of infrastructure has higher requirements, the originator of Liangshan rural tourism must make some improvements related to roads and tourism and do necessary governance, maintenance and construction to rural environment; communications, networking and other modern services are essential conditions of developing tourisms, these services and facilities improve the level of local rural modernization.

3 LIANGSHAN NEW RURAL CONSTRUCTIONS CAN PROMOTE LOCAL RURAL TOURISM DEVELOPMENT TO A HIGHER LEVEL

The overall layout of Liangshan’s new building is: building center with the county and township (town) as the backbone and the rural village-based market system to meet the basic needs of farmers and herds men and to adapt suitable production and distribution network of daily services di�erent from rural vil lages (especially the Yi village). Actively responding national policies to abolish agricultural taxes, animal husbandry tax, the establishment of mechanisms is to ensure funding for rural compulsory education, eliminating the rural compulsory education tuition and fees, minimizing the establishment of the rural living security system, implementing the social pension insurance of the new rural, those grazing policies provide strong support for the development of local rural tourism. 3.1 Liangshan adjust the industrial structure of rural tourism development to provide material support Liangshan is a typical agricultural area, the vast rural areas of the region are the enrichment zone of rural tourism resources, with a beautiful environment and beautiful scenery, traditional farming methods, a unique cultural landscape and a long history of folk culture, these unique rural resources are the prerequisites to develop rural tourism. Liangshan is to adjust and optimize the industrial structure through the development of agriculture, food and drink, and other characteristics of the folk culture festival, reasonably transform the scientific planning and living environment of the Yi villages, the development in the protection of historical and cultural value of the of the ancient villages, ancient houses are as attractions of rural tourism. Since 2010, the leaders of Liangshan’s Party and government guide most Yi people to promote the comprehensive development and poverty reduction, take priority of implementing Yijia New Village Construction. At the same time, they continue to increase investments in rural infrastructure, rural health care, sanitation, communications, and transportation; electricity these aspects have been greatly improved that providing a strong material security for the development of rural tourism. 3.2 Liangshan government has introduced various preferential agricultural policies for rural tourism development to provide financial support Liangshan introduced multiple places relevant to construction-related policies in the new rural construction, and preferential agricultural policies accounted most, when the majority of farmers and herdsmen participate in the development of rural tourism; it is bound to tilt some of the benefits to go into policy. Such a micro-credit incentive for farmers and herdsmen allows them to actively involve the construction project of rural tourism (such as the Yi Yue); new rural construction is to achieve the “three links “project” of village asphalt”, “village cement road “and the village buses, but also provide a guarantee as accessibility of a tourist’s destination. In addition, Liangshan’s government makes some re-establishments of village planning and use some special funds for Yi village governance, so their original residence, village style and village appearance have been completely improved, the implementation of these policies stabilizes the characteristics of rural tourism that provide a strong support for its sustainable development.

3.3 The level of education improvement in rural areas cultivated tourism personnel for the development of rural tourism

Currently, the Liangshan Prefecture in rural tourism operators is basically local farmers and herdsmen, their main advantages are in the cultivation and aqua culture, tourism is often scanty, they can not transfer endemic agricultural resources into tourism products, because it is not conducive to the development of rural tourism in depth. Vigorously developing rural human resources, speeding up the training of rural technology and management talent and improving the qualities of farmers and herdsmen in scientific culture, are the most important parts of Liangshan’s new rural con struction. The demand for talent and training of New rural construction, o�ering opportunities for needed talent with the development of rural tourism, but also added a new type of rural construction of new talent.

3.4 The rural ecological environment construction enhanced Liangshan’s tourism resources attraction to tourists

To protect and improve the ecological environment in

Southwest minority areas, keeping sustainable devel opment is an inevitable requirement of developing modern economies and optimizing the allocation of resources, it is one of the most important objectives of new rural construction in southwestern areas. The ornamental, participation and other characteristics of rural tourism, no matter the form, development or participators and operational process, it can increase farmers’ environmental awareness to a big extent and protect the rural environment, enhance sustainable development capacity in rural areas.

4 LIANGSHAN RURAL TOURISM AND NEW RURAL CONSTRUCTION INTERACTIVE DEVELOPMENT STRATEGY

4.1 Socialist new countryside construction as the focal point of compaction characteristics of rural development in Liangshan trip conditions required

4.2 Accelerate the construction of infrastructure in Liangshan Prefecture; improve accessibility of rural scenic spots and Yijia village.

A Healthy tourism development is inseparable from the social productive forces, it needs to provide the necessary material conditions for the tourism industry on the basis of existing society economic development in order to form integrated tourism reception capacity. In the process of new rural construction in Liangshan, it should continue to improve road signs, rapidly increase the accessibility of rural scenic spots and Yijia village, a good accessibility is one of the necessary conditions to promote rural tourism to a higher level of development. 4.3 Develop the rural economy to provide financial support for rural tourism In newer rural construction, the central government announced: emphasize on science, to improve the innovation capacity of agriculture and technology and transformation capabilities. Encourage enterprises to establish a new base of agricultural science and technology and regional agricultural research centers, the state taxation, financial and technological transformation should be given considerable support to fight by nations. These measures reduced the farmers’ expenses and increased farmers’ funding and objectively provided financial support for the development of local rural tourism. 4.4 Accelerate the construction of the Yi villages, improve the attractiveness of the rural living environment and enhance rural tourism resources The level of infrastructure of tourism destinations and environmental conditions will directly a�ect tourists’ behavior. Liangshan’s government should take on the overall construction of new rural agricultural and rural work, take the priority of village building, strengthen the development concept, of continuously improve its poor situation to o�er physical condition for the development a strong rural tourism. 4.5 Liangshan should strengthen human resource development, train required service level management system for the development of rural tourism. On the one hand, there should be set up Prefecture tourism administrative departments in Liangshan specialized responsible for managing, coordinating the development of rural tourism, increase the support of rural tourism through open selection, communications and other forms. Young cadres in Xichang city, county administrations are regularly sent to the township, village and tourism management department studying in order to train personnel required for the management of rural tourism. On the other hand, people should develop long-term planning personnel training of rural tourism, as an important part of the task, the rural tourism service personnel should be considered as vocational education system, addi tional theoretical courses, and relate rural tourism and conduct rural characteristics of the Liangshan travel better and the relative maturity of some tourist attrac tions, scenic rural tourism as for practice and training base. In order to constantly improve the management system and the associated required service levels of rural tourism.

4.6 Vigorously develop Liangshan’s rural tourism to promote new rural construction

Strongly develop rural tourism in rural areas contin ually to optimize the industrial structure, promote the rural economic development and develop Liangshan’s characteristics of rural tourism, make linkage e�ects really play “an industry with hundreds of industry“ and bring more visitors to the Liangshan Prefecture, let local farmers own production of agricultural prod ucts for tour operators or directly sold to tourists and get relative higher incomes, shorten the sales chain, agricultural products, reduce transportation costs and time to accelerate the commercialization of agricul tural products speed to achieve the docking harmony of primary industry and tertiary industry; develop rural tourism to make some farmers be separated from traditional farming and engaged in other tour ism-related industries, and constantly optimize the industrial structure of Liangshan Prefecture, to fur ther promote the coordinated and healthy Liangshan’s economic development; develop rural tourism contin ues to improve local rural landscape to attract talent outflow to start business by returning hometown, and to better promote the development of Liangshan rural productivity. To develop rural tourism and continually broaden the sources of income of farmers’ and herdsmen;, with the development of society and economy,

Liangshan total income and per capita income both increased to varying degrees, but there is a considera

The interactive development of economy in Hebei coastal region and local universities

Huan Wang & Haifang Zhang

Hebei Union University, Tangshan City, Hebei Province, China

ABSTRACT: This article taking national current affairs decisions as entry points, the theory related to regional economy as basis, analyzes the development relation between regional economy and local universities, thus puts forward countermeasures to achieve the interactive and coordinating development of Hebei coastal regional economy and local universities.

KEYWORDS: Hebei coastal regional economy, Local universities, Interactive development

Local colleges and universities is the inevitable out come when higher education develops to a certain stage. For Western developed countries, in the devel opment process from an industrialized society to a post-industrial knowledge society, the platform on which local colleges and universities rely on regional economy development seems more and more strength ened and important. In the “The 12 th five-year pro gram of national economic and social development of PRC (The People’s Republic of China)”, it clearly points out that we should implement the overall strat egy for regional development—“Promoting the econ omy integration development in Beijing, Tianjin and

Hebei regions, establishing capital economy center, focusing on Hebei coastal region” and accelerates the construction of national innovative city and regional innovative platform. It means in current and future period, there is rear historical opportunity for Hebei development: The accelerating rise of Bohai Sea region, Hebei coastal economy region supported by

Qinhuangdao, Tangshan and Changzhou is expected to be incorporated into the overall strategy of regional development.

1 THE DEVELOPMENT RELATION BETWEEN REGIONAL ECONOMY AND LOCAL UNIVERSITIES

1.1 Relation of dependence

The most obvious feature to distinguish local uni versities with other universities is that local univer sities are located in local place, whose development replies on the development of local regional economy.

Although China is vast in territory, but not the same level of economic development in each region, based on this fact that the establishment of some local universities is always relying on the local specific industry, such as DQPI (Daqing Petroleum Institute), a university accompanied with the discovery of the Daqing Oilfield. It can be said that the regional economy strength is an important support for the development of the local universities, and the construction of its teaching, research, subjects and majors develops as the comprehensive strength of the regional economy develops. And for the regional economy, to ensure the sustainability of its development, it can take full advantage of such power like talents, technology, science and research of local colleges and universities. It is the common trend to rely on regional economic development for local universities, in this era of knowledge economy. In present period of technology highly differentiated and discipline crossed, for those local universities not replying on regional economic development, it is quite difficult to obtain further survival basis and sustainable development power. 1.2 Relation of intergrowth Speaking of the intergrowth of local university and regional economy, this relation only appears when society develops to a certain stage. Along with the continuous development of the social economy, local colleges and universities initiatively integrate into society without distance. Now, intergrowth of local university and region economy acts more incisive and vivid. In the trend of education globalization and economy regionalization, the resources which social development rely on are also transferring from material capital to human capital, but the improvement of human quality could not go without education, especially local higher education, so, from this level, it is imperative to combine with local universities if local economy attempts to obtain sustained and healthy development stamina.

1.3 Relation of benefit

As a local university, its primary consideration is to cultivate a number of what kinds of qualified gradu ates and how to cultivate a number of qualified gradu ates, also main target, and the core concept of this target is to seek the social benefit of education. As a local university, its development aspiration is to realize the school goals and promote school develop ment by means of getting school resources and sat isfying the demands of organizers, school managers, beneficiaries and regional economy changes. In the interactive development course of regional econ omy and local universities, benefit relation seems a little complicated compared with industrial economy period. On the regional economy, the higher edu cation belonging to the third industry, a basic indus try of promising future in demand, high rate income from investment and in the strategic position, plays a role in promoting regional economic development continuously. Local universities “can not only drive education consumption, but also can effectively push forward social income, an inexhaustible motive force for regional economy development”. For local uni versities, aiming to regional economic development needs, complying with the adjustment of industrial structure and the needs of regional economic devel opment and appropriately adjusting majors and curriculums is conducive to the sustainable develop ment of the local universities.

2 PUSHING FORWARD COUNTERMEASURES OF INTERACTIVE DEVELOPMENT OF HEBEI LOCAL UNIVERSITIES AND HEBEI COASTAL REGIONAL ECONOMY

Pushing forward countermeasures of interactive development of Hebei local universities and Hebei coastal regional economy, Government such relevant department should also start from system arrange ment and policy makes long term strategic planning, sets up mechanism for high schools and enterprises groups of all industries, and creates good develop ment environment. Below are specific work details:

2.1 Government level

Government should strengthen macro-control and play well the bridge role of interactive develop ment between local universities and coastal original economy. Hebei province should put the construction of its local universities into the overall plan for basic construction, so as to ensure a steady investment to local universities each year and increase the research investment. At present, Hebei capacity of cultivating talent has still not completely met the demands of building Hebei as a powerful coastal province. Especially, the ability to cultivate talents of innovation and application is quite weak, so the adaptive education needs increase space, which requires all local governments optimization education system, perfect operation system and provide good environment and policy support for the interactive development of local universities and Hebei coastal regional economy; Government should play a guiding role in talent cultivation, society service and industry-school-research such aspects, actively develop cooperative running school, and optimize resources allocation of high school; Government should provide the support of policy and science and technology funding, build innovation platform for enterprises and local universities, guide the coordinative cooperation between local universities and regional industry groups and realize their common development. 2.2 Local universities level: Optimize talent cultivation mode to gain support for Hebei coastal region economy construction and development 2.2.1 Hebei local universities should adjust professional structure and talent cultivation mode according to needs of coastal economy development. This is an important part in the process of Hebei coastal regional economy construction, which directly determines whether the local universities can apply the cultured talent resources and the invented science and technology to coastal industry and maximize its effectiveness. So far, Hebei Province coastal region development and construction have already entered a new period. Shougangjintang iron and steel company the first period project has been put into production, Huanghua comprehensive port the first period project has been built, the volume of Qin, Tang and Chang ports has gone the third, all these events mark the coastal areas in Hebei Province has entered a new stage of the large-scale development and construction. It also proposed new requirements of the major structure adjustment of the local colleges and the talents training mode. For example, in Qinhuangdao, Yanshan University and Qinhuangdao branch of Northeastern University should strengthen their subject advantages and major specialty. So according to local economical industry structure, local university should adjust the major structures, so that it could serve the local economy development in the structure and level of talent training.

2.2.2 Determine the talent training direction of local universities. On the Hebei “Coastal top talents fair” in June, 2012, it could be found that Tangshan,

Qinhuangdao and Changzhou cities have raised more requirements no matter in the new enterprises, new projects or talents especially higher level talents.

According to some statistics, Hebei local universities amount to 31, Higher vocational technical college amount to 20, in the construction process of Hebei regional economy, all places of local universities con tinue to optimize level structure; perfect the colleges layout adjustments, and further optimize the allo cation of educational resources and the integration of regional resources. Therefore, local colleges and uni versities should take the objective of talent training as the most important in its future development.

2.2.3 Local universities should be based on the con struction of Hebei coastal regional economy and carry out research activities. Technology innovation is the key to the coastal economic construction. Therefore, the coastal regional economy needs introducing high level personnel of the key supporting industries and strategic emerging industries, make more efficient use of science and technology from local university and

Problems of highway financing

Xiaoyan Liu

School of Economics and Management, Chang’an University, Xi’an, Shaanxi, China

ABSTRACT: With the sustainable development of China’s economy, transportation increasingly highlighted the importance of their role in the economic development. Highway as an important part, direct impact on a region or even a country’s economic development capacity. As an important national public infrastructure, highway construction requires a lot of capital investment as a support, but the highway has been a lack of funds is a major problem facing. Based on the domestic and international comparative analysis of highway financing mode, from both theoretical and practical aspects of the analysis of highway financing issues were discussed, and combine with the characteristics of highway financing system, propose suitable means of financing the construction of the highway.

KEYWORDS: Highway, Financing, Project construction

1 INTRODUCTION

The highway is an important part of transportation.

With the reform and opening-up and economic development, by the end of 2010, the development of highway in China has realized a great leap for ward development, ranking the second in the world.

Highway plays a more and more important role in the national economy, also it puts forward a higher requirement for construction capital requirement and financing mode. The construction fund shortage and financing mode backward have become the important problems of restricting highway development. Based on this background, this paper makes a comparison analysis of domestic and foreign highway financing mode, making analysis of highway financing prob lems from theoretical and practice aspects. Combined with the highway financing system features in China, it proposes the financing mode suitable for our high way construction, in order to provide new research ideas for solving highway financing problems.

2 DOMESTIC AND FOREIGN RESEARCH OVERVIEW

In the 30th year of the 20 th Century, the highway has developed in western developed countries, also, the analysis of highway financing mode has always been the focus of many countries. 1. America has 84,000km of highway, and the construction fund is mainly from national investment, with (1) issuing highway con struction claims. (2) Setting up a joint investment fund. (3) Issuing fuel tax. 2. German now has 8500 km of highway. (1) In 1955, it determines to put vehicle tax and fuel tax as part of a special fund for special funds for expanding the highway. (2) Issuing bonds to raise funds. (3) Providing government credit. 3. Japan now has highway, 5000 km, and the construction fund source is mainly: (1) central funds. (2) Local funds. (3) Financial investment. 4. France now has 7000 km of highway, with main funding source: (1) issuing domestic and foreign long-term construction claims. (2) Borrowing funds. (3) Government fund subsidy. In different historical background and policy system, various national highway capital collection modes are also different, but in general, it can be summarized as (1) tax on the expropriation and highway. (2) Highway toll system. (3) Establishing a special highway management operation entity. 3 DOMESTIC CURRENT HIGHWAY FINANCING STATUS In China, the current highway financing mode can be generally divided into three types: 1. Equity financing; 2. Debt financing; 3. Project financing. At the end of 2012, China’s highway mileage has reached 4237500 km, increasing by 131100km than last year, with km density of 44.14 km/hundred square kilometers, improving 1.37 km/hundred square km than last year. The national highway mileage is about 3,609,600 km, increasing 156,000 km than last year, and the level road accounts for 85.2% of the total mileage of highway, improving 1.1 percentage. The national highway mileage is up to 96200 km, increasing 11300 km than last year. The national highway mileage is about 424600 km, increasing 48700 km, as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1. 2008–2012 national highway mileage. Our national road investment is mainly from cen tral investment, domestic loans, foreign capital and self-construction, with specific details in Table 2.

Data source: according to transportation department

2006–2011 road waterway transportation development sta tistics report calculation sorting

3.1 High debt risk

From the table above, our national highway construc tion fund has 87% of bank loans and local fund. This excessive bank credit financing makes local highway group fund debt rate up to 70%, increasing debt risk.

3.2 Financing environment limitation

In securities markets, our national bond market is still in the initial stage, with small market scale, irra tional structure, too much management, insufficient mobility and flexibility and in the complete operation mechanism.

3.3 Project financing difficulties

At current, the main problems of our financing mode development are: (1) organization time is long, with high cost and large failure probability. (2) BOT financing regulation is not normative, with high fund cost. (3) Project investment concentrates on economic development regions, ignoring western region. In recent years, China uses BOT mode to construct a highway, which is mainly concentrated in economically developed regions or several stem roads. For economic undeveloped regions, because the investment return rate is not ideal and it selects development, leading to the greater gap of economic development areas and undeveloped areas. 3.4 Lack of professional staff For new project finance mode, China is still in the exploration stage, and talent lack is the first problem, also the professional consulting institutes and professional institutes are less. The system shortage, insufficient experience and professional staff shortage have become the restrictive factors of restricting new project financing mode development. 3.5 System and law mismatch In recent years, China has been committed to the establishment of diversified financing difficulties, improving national highway construction fund financing environment. But from current status, for folk capital investment behavior in infrastructure field, China still lacks of the corresponding legal system, private investment indirectly makes it difficult for the government to effectively put the direction for risk. In summary, currently, our highway construction financing problems can be summarized into several points: (1) Excessive reliance on debt financing. (2) Greater debt pressure. (3) Higher mortgage rate limits sustainable development of financing. (4) Mismatch development policy system limits financing mode development. (5) Listed company re-financing efficiency is not sufficient. (6) The construction project financial condition is not good. 4 COUNTERMEASURES OF SOLVING NATIONAL HIGHWAY FINANCING PROBLEMS IN CHINA 4.1 Multiple management and multiple financing modes exist, forming stable funding source. Through Table 3, we can see that domestic highway construction fund source is mainly special fund, bond launch and road fee, but our national road construction special fund mainly depends on vehicle purchase tax on a single source channel. With the current highway financing platform ability is saturation, in order to meet the huge fund demand of road construction, it must construct new financing channels and expand new financing platforms. In order to take efforts from the following aspects: (1) gradually divide highway construction and operation. (2) Flexibly using invig orated stock assets to solve the insufficient fund problems. (3) Strengthening the diversification of financing structure and expanding the new channels of investment.

Data is from “Chinese road construction financing system reflection” 4.2 Improving debt risk management system and strengthening highway debt risk management foundation

Highway operation and construction separate, according to the principle of “loans and responsibil ity”, clearing responsibility relationship, constructing and perfecting highway debt risk management infor mation system, also constructing an effective risk warning mechanism, reasonable evaluation fee, using rolling system to randomly grasp debt latest dynam ics, in order to improve its debt risk prevention ability.

4.3 Increasing central fund input

From table 1, we can see our national highway financing 87% of bank loans and medium-term debt. After 21 st Century, our financial income has reached 103740 billion yuan. Compared with 2003, it increases 82025 billion yuan. Based on this, we can refer to western developed countries’ experi

The study on new accounting standards for listed companies in China

Haiyang Xie

Zhengzhou Institute of Aeronautical Industry Management, Zhengzhou, Henan, China

ABSTRACT: We believe that, although the new accounting standards on accounting yields raise the conservative position in the accounting information quality requirements, new accounting standards more emphasis on truth and justice of the accounting information. The application of the fair values of the lower the conservative, so as to reduce the stability of the accounting after implementation of the new guidelines. This paper main shortcoming comes conditions due to lack of conservative analysis using base-stock return model surplus, and may affect all the research conclusion inquiry. Second, there are many factors affecting income conservatism, such as corporate governance factors, and market economy conditions, from the point of view of the accounting control and research the new conservative income may be affected.

KEYWORDS: Earnings conservatism; New accounting standards; China

1 INTRODUCTION

Chinese listed companies formally implementing new accounting standards on January 1, 2007. It is not only related to the listed company’s own sustaina ble development, and to the health of China’s capital market business. The basic principles of accounting conservatism, to ensure reliable accounting surplus information, and also the most influential of the accounting principles (pounds, 1970), serious impact on the accounting industry at least 500 years history

(after taxes s. 1997), due to a lack of conservative, managers and shareholders will provide reliable information in order to pursue their own interests, and financial fraud will be more serious, which even tually led to the capital market charges (Ross l. watts,

2003). Accounting conservatism comes from four major areas: contract, litigation, rules and regulations and taxes (Watts, 2003). Since China’s national con ditions and the accounting law system of the position because of in the salutary accounting, legal system, is the main influential factor in China’s accounting conservatism of the restraint of accounting standards, accounting standards. Whether the implementation of new accounting standards influences public company accounting conservative? This paper will conduct a study in this.

2 RELATED LITERATURE REVIEW

“Accounting conservatism mainly reflects in the reliability of the balance sheet and the statement.

The former emphasizes accounting procedures should strictly in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, stability of the balance sheet is called” unconditional stability “or” pre-stability “; the latter mainly reflects profit conservative, and that is: emotion, the good news and the bad news to declare period discrepancies. Income statement conservative test is based on the stock price fully embody the market information, so conservative income statement is called “conditional conservatism” or “afterwards conservative” (R, the shiva ball industrial zone, 2005; ball R, SPKothari, 2000), most studies focused on the latter. Lee Zengquan, Mr. Lu Wenbin (2003) analyzes the accounting profits and stock gains the a-share listed companies use base 1995 2000 model (1997) and found that there are laws between the annual accounting profit, and clear the returns on the stock, they believe China’s listed companies have kept up with conservative accounting income. Their conclusion study is also confirmed that Zhao in the long (1999) and small Chen, (1999). Zhu Chafen (2006) has proved that China accounting standards to effectively enhance the reform in 2001 of the accounting information timeliness and conservative income. Xiaohui and autumn Beijing Qu Yuan (2007) found that joint-stock enterprise accounting system “in 1998 did not affect significantly income conservative 1998 2000 sample company financial year, in the implementation of the accounting standards for enterprises” in 2001 the gains of the new conservative sample company from 2001 to 2004. Old accounting standards, compared to the new standard conservative affect the accounting income in the following aspects: 1) assets impairment provisions of the new guidelines change of fixed assets, intangible assets, goodwill, and other project under construction, these asset impairment is not allowed, still can reduce as an opportunity, enterprise managers operation profit using the back of the asset impairment provisions. 2) The fair value measure ment attribute. Since always, fair value is considered as the opposite of the principle of conservatism, the fair value of the new standards of an active market value accounting measurement and recognition will influence the influence of corporate earnings.

3 EMPIRICAL RESEARCHES ON IMPLEMENTATION EFFECTIVENESS OF NEW ACCOUNTING STANDARDS

3.1 Research hypothesis

H1: 2006–2008 years, China’s listed companies have been kept earnings conservatism. This is relevant provisions in the new accounting standards, such as: no reversal of fixed asset impair ment, cancels inventory last-in-first-out evaluation method, and expands the range of consolidated finan cial statements, et al. These provisions have reduced the surplus management of space, so as to keep accounting income conservative. On the other hand, the expanded use range of rea sonable value; Allow qualified cost of borrowing, research and development costs is capital, allow debt restructuring gain to be recorded from operating income, expanded the range of earnings management, so as to reduce the correctness of the enterprise accounting conservatism. In addition, asset impair ment guidelines require inventory, loans, accounts payable and other current asset impairment can be reversed, because these current assets of the company’s assets ratio are generally a high number of the accrual and reversal can be used to adjust the accounting income also, it weakened the stable income. Therefore, we put forward another hypothesis: H2: 2007–2008, after the implementation of new accounting standards, earnings conservatism have declined in china’s listed companies.

3.2 Model design

Empirical research of this paper takes use of Basu model to test the relationship between accounting earnings and stock prices.

(1) Variable meanings: EPS it —t annual earnings per share in I company; Pi t-1 —the stock’s closing price at the end of t-1 annual; RET it —cumulative average annual rate of return adjusted by the market shares DR it —dummy variable, When RET it < 0 value is 1, otherwise 0; ε—random error In the model 1, β 0 measures correlation between accounting earnings and annual and positive stock returns, that is, it confirms the timeliness of “good news”; β 1 measures incremental timeliness of accounting earnings to confirm the bad news compared with good news. As the conservatism means accounting earnings is more timely and adequate when reflects bad news than good news, it can test the conservatism factor β 1 whether significantly exceeds zero or not to judge the earnings conservatism of listed companies. In order to further test the impact of accounting conservatism when implement new accounting standards (H2), we construct an integrated model through the use of the annual dummy variables as follows: (2) D 2007 is the dummy variable, if the samples belonged to the year 2007, then the value is 1, otherwise 0; D 2008 also is a dummy variable, if the samples belonged to in 2008, then the value is 1, otherwise 0; the remaining variables defined as before. β 3 , β 5 measure respectively earnings conservatism changes after the implementation of new accounting standards in 2007, 2008 compared with fiscal 2006. According to the study hypothesis 2, we expect β 3 , β 5 will be significantly greater than zero. 3.3 The research sample We collected and sorted out the data that came from the CSMAR database and Wind database. The primary sample includes all of A—shares companies from 2006 to 2008 in Shanghai and Shenzhen stock exchange. We removed some unsuitable sample companies for researching object as follows: 1) financial insurance companies; 2) IPO firms; 3) Data deficiency companies; 4) part of a company that EPS/P and RET observations abnormal change exceeding 1% from top to bottom. This paper selected a total of 3779 samples. We take use of Microsoft Excel software and SPSS13.0 to finish and process data.

P DR RET RET DR it it it it it it it * * 1 0 1 0 1 α α β β ε= + + + + − EP P DR RET RET DR D DR D RET D RET D D D D RET D RET DR D it it it it it it it it it it it it it * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 1 0 1 0 1 2 2007 3 2007 2 2007 3 2007 4 2008 5 2008 4 2008 5 2008 α α β β α α β β α α β β ε = + + + + + + + + + + + + + −

3.4 Empirical results and analysis

3.4.1 Descriptive statistics

After finishing the selected sample data, we got descriptive statistics of sample in Table 1. From Table 1, we can see that in 2006 the EPS/P skewness of China’s Listed Companies is -3.23997. Similarly, the skewness of 2007 and 2008 are less than zero, that is, the EPS/P of listed companies has been EPS/P RET mean SD skewness mean SD skewness

2006 0.022269 0.093273 -3.23997 -0.21126 0.73317 1.479185

2007 0.038031261 0.061613053 -1.547361104 0.254172718 1.121152503 1.260829726

2008 0.006212406 0.026481316 -1.992811642 0.036046681 0.154721461 1.526170456

Table 1. Descriptive statistics. year N Adj-R 2 (%) modulus expected sign evaluation t Value S Sig 2006 ~ 2008 3779 19.8 α 0 0.04921 9.738 <0.0001*** α 1 −0.0034 −0.505 0.614 α 2 −0.01293 −2.057 0.489 α 3 0.00629 0.692 0.040 α 4 −0.0426 −7.002 <0.0001*** α 5 0.00279 0.314 0.754 β 0 0.00683 1.343 0.180 β 1 0.0552 6.360 <0.0001*** β 2 0.00423 0.743 0.457 β 3 — −0.0466 −4.106 <0.0001*** β 4 0.0195 1.009 0.272 β 5 — −0.0295 −0.562 0.574

Table 2. Model (1) regression results.

***Indicates the results in the 1% level significant year N Adj-R 2 (%) modulus expected sign evaluation t Value S Sig 2006 ~ 2008 3779 19.8 α 0 0.04921 9.738 <0.0001*** α 1 −0.0034 −0.505 0.614 α 2 −0.01293 −2.057 0.040 α 3 0.00629 0.692 0.489 α 4 −0.0426 −7.002 <0.0001*** α 5 0.00279 0.314 0.754 β 0 0.00683 1.343 0.180 β 1 0.0552 6.360 <0.0001*** β 2 0.00423 0.743 0.457 β 3 — −0.0466 −4.106 <0.0001*** β 4 0.0195 1.009 0.272 β 5 — −0.0295 −0.562 0.574

Table 3. Model (2) regression results.

***Indicates the results in the 1% level significant negative skewness, indicating that there was earnings conservatism in listed company during 2006 to 2008. Then we analyze the standard deviation changes of the EPS/P and RET, the earnings conservatism decreased in 2007 compared with 2006. But it has been enhanced in 2008 compared with 2007.

3.4.2 Regression analysis Tables 2 and 3, respectively, show the regression results of the model (1) and model (2). In 2006, according to the regression results in Table 2, the coefficient of RET market returns β0 is 0.006829

(t = 0.955), which measures the degree which accounting earnings responses to the “good news”; interaction coefficient β1 is 0.05518 (t = 4.526), which measures the incremental level that the com panies’ earnings responses to “bad news” relative to

“good news” at 1% significance level mark. The response degree of accounting earnings to “bad news” is 0.062009 (β 0 + β 1 ). The ratio (β 0 + β 1 ) /β 0 ) is 9.080246, that is, the sensitivity multiples is 9.08. The above regression results show the existence of earnings conservatism in listed companies in 2006.

By the same token, accounting earnings is sensitive to the “bad news”. The sensitivity multiples could be 10.78 times to the “good news” in 2007, and

1.97 times in 2008, it verifies the hypothesis 1. According to Table 3, β3, β5 respectively rep resents the changes of earnings conservatism in 2007,

2008.Their value are 0.04659 and −0.02954, proved the conservatism level of the 2007 is declined com pared with 2006. In 2008, earnings conservatism increased compared with 2007. It means to be in line with our expectations at the 1% level significantly.

4 CONCLUSIONS

On the basis of empirical study, this paper summa

The integration of financial accounting and management accounting

Zhaolin Lou

Zhengzhou Institute of Aeronautical Industry Management, Zhengzhou, Henan, China

ABSTRACT: Financial accounting and management accounting, as the main branch of the accounting discipline to play a different role in the business management activities. Accounting is an economic information system; business accounting is the subject of accounting. Financial accounting and management accounting are two important branches of business accounting. Financial accounting and management accounting are two basic contents of the modern accounting, from the same mother, and together constitute the organic whole of the modern enterprise accounting system. The two are interdependent and restrict each other and complement each other. The paper proposed the corresponding suggestions to Ideological change, the integration of financial accounting and management accounting methods.

KEYWORDS: Financial Accounting; Management Accounting; Integration

1 INTRODUCTION

Financial accounting within the enterprise is such a job: the use of and supervision funds in the account ing cycle, whose duty is use during cycle must be comprehensive and systematic, in accordance with these accounting and supervision to provide the financial position for creditors and other stakehold ers, enable them to know something about economic management activities on corporate profitability. The so-called management accounting, point to the department in charge of internal plans, internal controls and internal evaluation to ensure that the resources of the enterprise to be reasonably used, and can effectively fulfill their own financial responsibility for a management activity. Its main role is to carry out analysis and research activities for the various prob lems encountered in the management process, and its own proposals and countermeasures, to facilitate management decision-making or control assessment, and its goal is to enhance corporate the internal man agement of the quality of management accounting, so management accounting is called internal accounting.

2 THE CONTACT BETWEEN FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

2.1 Financial accounting and management accounting are two basic contents of modern accounting

Management accounting and financial accounting from the same mother, and together constitute an organic whole of the modern enterprise accounting system. Both are interdependent and restrict each other and complement. 2.2 The ultimate goal is same Management accounting and financial accounting have the same work environment; achieve together the goal of the enterprise and enterprise management and operation of the target service. 2.3 Method mutual penetration Management accounting and financial accounting has its own independent set of methods, with the continuous development of science, the mutual penetration. 2.4 Accounted for the content of cross Management accounting and financial accounting have the cross and overlap in the accounting contents. For example, cost accounting process, financial accounting, management accounting in order to calculate the profit or loss of the enterprise; developed to use it the standard cost, the cost level of control and evaluation. Financial accounting in a number of indicators such as the output value, profits, costs, expenses, management accounting, forecasting, planning and control; budget management accounting standard is one of the bases of financial accounting. 2.5 Mutual sharing some of the information Much of the information required for management accounting from financial accounting system, its main work is the deep-processing and re-use of financial and accounting information, and therefore subject to the constraints of the financial accounting of the qual ity of work. Management accounting information is sometimes not the same as the method to use with

Financial Accounting to record, analyze and forecast business situation of enterprises.

3 THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

3.1 Financial accounting and management accounting have different goals

Financial accounting is based on Accounting

Standards, based primarily on corporate transactions and matters analyze and reflect, confirm, measure ment, record corporate assets, liabilities, owners’ equity, changes, changes in the acquisition of the record operating income, the costs were incurred and ownership, as well as the income of the formation and distribution of report in the form of a financial report on a regular basis the financial position, operating results and cash flow, and of the financial statements, evaluate the enterprise’s solvency, profitability, and so on. The objectives of financial accounting focus on external reporting. Corporate financial account ing must be from outside the enterprise’s financial relationship at the request of investors, creditors, the relevant government departments to provide real and standardized financial accounting reports. Although the information provided by the corporate financial accounting we need to meet the internal operation and management, forecasting the needs of decision- making, but in general, it is more focused to meet the external demand, financial accounting, also known as external reporting accounting. Management account ing, also known as internal accounting report, is a sub discipline Accounting blend of modern management theory and accounting to management decision-mak ing as its core content, is to strengthen internal man agement, to achieve the best value for money the ultimate goal of an accounting branch of the case of internal management accounting, and thus it focuses on the internal reporting information. With in-depth development of the market economy, investors, cred itors, the relevant government departments will be increasingly concerned about corporate profitability, solvency, cash flow and other financial information.

3.2 Different time frame

Financial Accounting, for the past business activ ities, after the vouchers and books of record, the economy and business activities were at some point in the past has been completed. Financial statements are based on the vouchers and books of record at a certain time to be prepared, it must have time operating conditions of an umbrella and reflect. Management Accounting for the future, it is prepared according to the needs of enterprise management, financial accounting on the basis of various reports, this report without restriction on the time frame, the preparation of statements of a certain period of time, you can also the report of the preparation of a future time. 3.3 Functions are different Management accounting is the internal management of the corporate accounting system, its emphasis on providing information services to the internal management of enterprises, which get rid of the shackles of the “generally accepted accounting principles,” Financial Accounting and diverse program of work, there is no strict procedural constraints access to information through the corporate method of operation to help the main responsibility for the revision of goals, and to some extent, control the behavior of the main responsibility. Management accounting also attaches great importance to the management process and results of the impact on the internal aspects, according to the intended target of the enterprise to develop the program of work, while fulfilling the functions of forecasting, planning and decision-making. The focus of financial accounting is to provide information for outside interests, so their work is certain, and uniform system of work, it is the main creditor of the debtor, shareholders, and government departments to provide services that belongs to the accounting of the report. 4 CHINA’S CURRENT STATUS FOR THE INTEGRATION OF FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING Many of our companies for the integration of financial accounting and management accounting is not yet workable fusion method for the management of enterprise human, material and financial resources without deep and carefully put in place, the communication is between the financial accounting and management accounting small, inadequate computers and other new technologies, leadership communication and coordination between the member companies do is not good enough, not close co-ordination among the various departments of these factors is the financial accounting and management accounting integration has brought a certain amount of resistance, and ultimately make our enterprise cost management did not implement.

5 THE REASONS OF THE MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING INTEGRATION

5.1 Analysis of the necessity of mutual financial management accounting and financial accounting

With the rapid economic development, in order to better run enterprise management activities, will inev itably require financial accounting and management accounting to help each other, work together to com plete a project. If these two departments combined into one department, you can avoid the waste of cor porate resources, duplication of financial information, not only saves the cost of capital for enterprises, also received a management improvement; for the opera tor to avoid heavy business operations but also enrich their own knowledge structure, and expand their abili ties. Therefore, the integration of financial accounting and management accounting will inevitably become a major trend in enterprise development.

5.2 Content focus on complementary business both inside and outside

The focus of financial accounting is based on daily business records, registration books, and the prep aration of the financial statements on a regular basis; the focus of management accounting is to provide predictive analysis of specific problems of business management, business management, decision-mak ing, and control assessment of the information they need. Daily work, management accounting and did not repeat the financial accounting process, but pro vided financial and accounting data to do further analysis and extension. The relationship between the two can be summarized as the relationship between the foundation and the building manage ment accounting can not be separated from financial accounting to provide the daily basic information and data, financial accounting is dependent on better man agement accounting on the basis of data integration and processing enterprise the operation and manage ment to add color, rather than just play the role of the record. Therefore, the integration of the two can better improve the business management, to achieve the goal of profit maximization.

5.3 Management accounting is the extension and development of financial accounting

The initial management accounting and financial accounting in one of its di�erentiation is to appear later in order to adapt to the constantly high operat ing e�ciency, market environment, has experienced a long process, so that is not a whim, the rationality and necessity of existence has its accompanied by the development of market institutions, business and ownership no longer belong to the same operating person or body in order to improve operational e�ciency and improve overall competitiveness, management accounting emerged. Understandable for the accounting profession toward a more rational, more logical direction, From then on the production targets, cost estimates, operational flow, expenses and so on to make the detailed planning for future action and lay the foundation. 5.4 Combination of the theoretical basis of financial accounting and management accounting External financial accounting, management accounting and internal “seems to be the theoretical circles and practice of community consensus. This view is not conducive to play the role of accounting functions, but also hindered the development of accounting theory. Fundamentally speaking, the accounting system is coupled from the financial accounting and management accounting; it is the core subsystem of the enterprise management system. Under the conditions of knowledge-based economy, with the rapid development of information technology and network technology and its application in the accounting, financial accounting and management accounting further integration is not only possible, but their specific theoretical basis. 5.5 Barriers to integration of management accounting and financial accounting Financial accounting and management accounting to achieve the integration of theory must meet a basic condition: the convergence of the service object. Management accounting as a business management decision-making tool, its services mainly within the enterprise managers, such as business management authorities, the various functional departments, sta� and board of directors. Specific problems encountered by enterprises in the course of business, accounting personnel, after analysis to provide relevant information to internal managers at all levels aimed at improving the economic e�ciency of enterprises, to get as much profit, this target is suitable for any conditions commercialization and market economy. Although the method of management accounting is flexible, but revolves around the relations between profits and related variables, the purpose is to determine the variation of the profit of extreme value as well as a variety of economic factors and their impact on the profit level. Financial and accounting reporting system, and its main objectives are outside the enterprise user services, such as the state department of macroeconomic management, investors, creditors and the tax department, the focus is the preparation of financial statements on a regular basis according to the daily business records, registration books, interested groups and individuals outside the enterprise report ing corporate financial position and operating results.

6 CHOICE OF THE INTEGRATION OF MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING

6.1 System integration

Financial accounting is based on Accounting

Standards for guidance in the accounting statements, there is explicit agreement, the construction of man agement accounting system, there are a lot of system is incomplete. So, should make great e�orts to build the management accounting system, clear responsi bilities and authority of the practitioners, practitioners can fully integrate the call of various resources, and give full play to the role of decision aids.

6.2 Integration of institutions

The existing financial accounting department has undertaken a large number of budget and final accounts, cost accounting, performance appraisal, management accounting and other aspects of the work. However, due to the di�erence in the quality of personnel requirements, the e�ect is often not satis fied, you should consider the separation of functions of management accounting, independent establish ment of the department, in order to better play the di�erent roles of the two.

6.3 Integration of data

Financial accounting of the data acquisition is the credentials of the production process, the ultimate expression of books and reports data; data acquisition of management accounting financial accounting data processing. The ultimate expression of the report or model of computation results of the statistical anal ysis. Both collection methods and the final result, there are di�erent. However, both homologous with network technology by merging the original data source, information sharing and fusion, to promote the docking of the system and the ERP system to achieve Real-time sharing of financial information and business information. Through the integration of management account ing and financial accounting, the only way of build ing a scientific accounting system, it can better play out of the accounting functions for the sustained and

The strategy on low carbon economy development in Liaoning province

Yuan Liu Jiangxi Science & Technology Normal University, Nanchang

Fujian Agriculture And Forestry University, Fuzhou

Hong Liu

Jiangxi province Water Resources And Hydropower College, Nanchang

Zhaohui Chen

Bohai University, Jinzhou

Jilin University, Changchun

Chong Jiang

Jiangxi Science & Technology Normal University, Nanchang

ABSTRACT: Liaoning province is an experiment site of nation low carbon economy. According to Liaoning province’s energy structure and industrial structure, Liaoning province needs some strategies to promote low carbon economy development.

KEYWORDS: Low carbon economy; 12th five-year plan; Fiscal and tax policy; Intellectual property; CSR;

Low carbon city.

1 THE CONNOTATION OF LOW CARBON ECONOMY

1.1 The background of low carbon economy

After entering the industry time, as the economy rap idly developing, the environmental pollution, energy depletion became more and more serious. The people started to realize the environment question caused by increasingly using energy and it has been confirmed that the carbon dioxide density will bring the whole world climate change. Under this condition, this concept “the low carbon” was known gradually and accepted, so has the theory “the low-carbon economy”. The so-called low-carbon economy is under the sustainable development idea instruction to reduce the consumption of coal and petroleum, reduce greenhouse gas emissions, and achieve the win-win model that eco nomic society development and ecological environment protection. The first time proposed the concept“the low-carbon economy” was appeared in “Energy White paper” in 2003, but it’s the first time worldwide pro posed the low-carbon economy idea in “the Stern

Report” writed by World Bank chief economist Nicolas

Stern in 2006, he appeals to all the countries to reform to low-carbon economy in the report. Hereafter, the low-carbon economy was accepted by countries. 1.2 The significance of low carbon economy 1.2.1 To the world The low carbon economy’s path is not only the world economy development current, also become the countries’ responsibility to the universe. The low carbon economy proposed to establish a high efficiency, low consumption and emissions development pattern. In the long run, low-carbon economy is the inevitable choice of the world development. The greenhouse gas excessively discharge causes the global warming phenomenon, which led to the phenomenon be more and more serious, and created serious environmental crisis. Furthermore, the energy consumption also causes the world has to turn to the development low carbon economy the path. Firstly the low carbon economy can change the present global climate situation, improve the living environment, secondly it can reduce the energy consumption, protect the nonrenewable resources and promote the world economy sustainable development and realize the win-win model of economy society development and the resources environmental protection. Finally, it can promote and maintain the world peace. In the history, many wars were caused by fighting for energy, for example the Mideast never cease fire for energy.

1.2.2 To China

China developed the low carbon economy relatively late and has weak awareness to the energy deple tion question, due to china is an abundant resource country, especially the carbon resource, and can be self-sufficient. The low carbon economy appearance means a new industrial revolution will arrive. The development of low carbon economy is the trend of sustainable development, which initiates an interna tional development strength competition for energy environment technology. Our country has a 1.3 billion population and faces fragile bearing capacity in the industrialization and urbanization. As the biggest developing nation, our country has to face with the economy develops the energy conservation and environmental protection, which some majority industrialized country has not met before. Our country is in the process of modern ization and urbanized construction, the massive high carbon gas emissions are inevitable, moreover, our country is the largest populated country, the living standard is still low, therefore large scale infrastruc ture construction, industrialization construction will continue in a period. All of those will intensify the energy demand and the high carbon emission. On the other hand, the energy structure is the restrict ing factor in our country transformation. This offer a challenge to the low carbon energy technology devel opment and the environment pollution. Therefore, the energy structure highly depends on carbon will not change easily in our country in the future. The essence of low carbon economy is the highly effective using of energy, the clean energy develop ment, the realization of green GDP development, the core is the energy technology, technology innovation and the industrial structure and the system innovation.

So the low carbon economy is one kind of sustaina ble development goal. Therefore, low carbon devel opment is the best way to the whole world climatic change, also is the intrinsic demand of domestic sus tainable development. First, the development of low carbon economy is the best way to resolve the energy crisis. Secondly, the development of low carbon economy is the best way to resolve the climate and the environment crisis.

Thirdly the development of low carbon economy indi cates direction for our country’s economy reforming.

Finally, it will promote our country industry devel opment and the enterprise technological innovation, strength domestic enterprises’ future international core competitive power. Low carbon economy is not only beneficial to the resource in the economy developing process, but also can realize the economy development pattern trans formation, will be our country economy sustainable development important way. In brief, the low carbon economy promotes the development, circulation economy, establish intensive society, complete with the thinking of China’s sustainable development. The developed country is exploring the low carbon economy type, which is an international current and offers a possible way to our country to develop sustainable development. 1.2.3 To Liaoning province As the old industrial base, Liaoning Province forms extension growth form---“high mining, the low using, the high emission” and the city infrastructure construction is lag, which caused the city to pay the heavy environment price for the economy development, especially in some central cities, the air pollution is badly serious north. Now Liaoning Province is being in the heavy industry development period, the energy consumption mainly is the coal, the petroleum. The high pollution fossil energy. The waste and pollution are serious. In Liaoning’s city industry pollutant still occupied the top of pollutant emission. Thermal power, metal smelting, rolling processing industry, nonmetallic processing industry and petroleum processing industry discharge occupy the 90% of the total amount of discharge. Liaoning province low carbon index Index National average Liaoning Result Carbon productivity (10rmb/t carbon) 1.560 1.01 Difference Per capita carbon discharge (t) 1.360 2.58 Difference Forest coverage (%) 45.000 46.94 Achieve Carbon energy discharge coefficient (t carbon/t coal) 0.650 0.66 Achieve In the table, the Liaoning’s per capita carbon discharge is higher than the national average, which means the Liaoning’s inhabitant life expense pattern is inappropriate and need to improve. The carbon productivity is lower than the national average, which means the technical level of low-carbon economy is not advanced and need to develop the low carbon technology. The carbon energy discharge coefficient is basically flat the national average level, which means Liaoning Province used energy appropriately. The forest coverage achieved the national average level, which means Liaoning Province pays great attention to afforestation. [1] Liaoning Province is facing to the contradiction between the rapid energy needing and environment protection. Under the world development low car bon economy impetus and national development low carbon economy summon, Liaoning Province’s low carbon economy development is imperative. The development low carbon economy in Liaoning corresponds to the world development current and the national development strategy. The world adjust pos itively the economy development pattern to develop low carbon economy to adapt the global environment problem, which is every country’s responsibility for climate change and the world’s future. China pledged to reduce carbon dioxide emission at the Copenhagen climate congress in 2009, and recent years also pos itively called each province and city to transform economy development pattern. On August 10, 2010 national Development and Reform Commission issued “the pilot work of notice on Development Low carbon in Provincial capital and city”, which carried out in five provinces and eight cities to develop a low carbon economy. The five provinces are Guangdong province, Liaoning province, Hubei province,

Shaanxi province, Yunnan province respectively, the eight cities are respectively Tianjin city, Chongqing city, Shenzhen city, Xiamen city, Hangzhou city,

Nanchang city, Guiyang city, Baoding city. Liaoning province is one of experimentation provinces. On the other hand, it is beneficial to Liaoning prov ince to transform the economy development pattern and reduce the energy consumption, raise the energy using efficiency. According to statistics, the coal pri marily accounts for 51.2% in the Liaoning province energy consumption, the petroleum accounts for

46.9%, the natural gas accounts for 1.6%, the water and electricity accounts for 0.3%. In the energy con sumption pattern, Liaoning province couldn’t meet the need in the coal, the petroleum, the natural gas and the electric power, which almost 49% the coal need to transfer from other provinces,34.1% crude oil need to import, 13% electric power need to transfer from other province. [1] So the coal, the petroleum, the natural gas occu pied major proportion in Liaoning province energy consumption pattern, while the renewable energy proportion is small and the energy structure is sim plified. It can improve the energy structure, establish multiplex and the sustainable development energy system to develop the Liaoning Province renewable energy positively. At the same time, it can improve and optimize the Liaoning Province industrial struc ture and reduce the fossil energy proportion in the energy structure proportion. It’s the best way to real ize economy development innovation that developing renewable energy, constructing new energy industrial structure, which realizes the Liaoning Province eco nomic society sustainable development. [3] 2 THE STRATEGY ON LOW CARBON ECONOMY DEVELOPMENT IN LIAONING PROVINCE The global climate change and energy crisis have threatened the human survival and the development. It’s universe’s mission that curbing climate. “low carbon economy development”not only means the energy conserving energy, also concerns with society’s sustainable development, which involves the technology, the system, the policy and the life idea and so on. Due to Liaoning Province’s low carbon economy is at the primary stage, which the energy structure is not reasonable and the lowest carbon science and technology level is not high, all of these restricted the process of low carbon economy development. 4So Liaoning Province should implement a series of strategies to develop a low carbon economy and construct an energy ecology system, which realize the sustainable development. 3 UNDER A PLANNING “Report on the work of Liaoning province in 2011” proposed that we must implement the ecology province construction policy, perfect the ecology compensation mechanism, realize circulation economy and low carbon economy. so we should put low carbon economic development in social development planning, put low carbon technology in local technology planning and make special project, which put the low carbon economy as an index in the national economic planning system. [3] The planning is a whole action scheme to consider the long term and fundamental question. Low carbon economy development is scaled up to a planning level, which can strengthen the idea of low carbon economy. In the long run, it was guided significant to make specific measure to promote low carbon economy development. Liaoning province should bring low carbon economic development in the whole planning and give specific instruction to develop a low carbon economy. 4 ESTABLISH FISCAL AND TAX POLICY TO SUPPORT LOW CARBON ECONOMY DEVELOPMENT It need high cost in some technology and equipment to develop a low carbon economy. Therefore, it’s necessary that setting a special fund to support low carbon economic development and putting financial subsidies in the appropriate place. According to the objective requirement local government should determine reasonable subsidy range and regulate the supervision of subsidy fund. [3] Liaoning province also can study the experience of Qinghai province that establishing low carbon econ omy development fund and investing industry related to the low carbon economy. Meanwhile the govern ment must coordinate the “Agreement on Subsidies and Countervailing Measures” in subsidy. Although China has issued the preferential tax pol icy for some low carbon enterprises, some policies just are the policy manifestation, which are dispersed in different tax categories. Some preferential tax pol icy doesn’t set the product scope and the standard is also not clear, which confuse to the grassroots unit to verify the technical standard authenticity. These all need the government to embody the policy according to the local actual situation. It’s carried out in the jurisdictional scope that designing a tax system to promote a low carbon econ omy. On the one hand, Liaoning province should encourage and support low carbon enterprises, on the other hand, the government also should regulate the high carbon industry and guide these industries to develop low carbon industry.

5 ESTABLISH INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY SYSTEM TO SUPPORT LOW CARBON ECONOMY DEVELOPMENT

Developing a low carbon economy isn’t simply enlarge low carbon industry scale, whereas develop ing advanced technology is the development direction and fundamental way out of energy and environment problem. Money can acquire technology, while it isn’t the advanced technology. So self-dependent innova tion should be paid attention to, because it can keep a new strategic industry developing. Liaoning province need the support form intel lectual property rights system to develop low carbon economy, which can help to realize resource effective disposition. The essential of low carbon technology achievement decides it need protection from intellec tual property rights system. Low carbon technology rights protection need intellectual property rights sys tem safeguard. So encouraging technology innovation and protecting intellectual property can develop low carbon economy industry in Liaoning province. The Liaoning province intellectual property rights bureau issued “the opinions to strengthen patent work and promote independent innovation” and set subsidy fund for patent invention. However, an invention’s social meaning is differnent, if its aim serves the low carbon economy development or for the high carbon economy. Thus it should emphasis on low carbon technology and implement in low carbon industry. The scale of Liaoning province foreign trade rank the eighth in country, so only independent innovation can develop low carbon economy and stay in the top in international trade. 6 STRENGTHEN CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY(CSR) The corporate played a main role in discharging carbon. At the beginning of the reform and open, the Chinese economy is at the start stage, so the primary goal is economy growth. At that time, the goal is rational, so we should objectively criticize it. While now China’s GDP per person has already exceeded 2000$. Liaoning province GDP per person has already exceeded 4000$. When we obtain the subsistence right, we should pay more attention to environment and human right instead of partially emphasized economy growth. [4] The Corporate social responsibility means the corporate not only pursue profit maximization, but also should undertake the responsibility to the society. In the low carbon economical age, the corporate should integrate the social responsibility into the enterprise strategy, unifies organically the society responsibility and the enterprise low carbon competitive power to realize society and enterprise’s sustainable development. [4] 7 CONSTRUCT LOW CARBON CITY Cities contribute an estimated 70 percent of the world’s energy-related greenhouse gases (GHG). Their locations—often in low-elevation coastal zones—and large populations make them particularly vulnerable to the impacts of climate change. But cities often take steps, even ahead of national governments, to reduce GHG emissions. So it is with China’s cities, which are well placed to chart a low-carbon growth path to help reach China’s national targets for reducing the energy and carbon intensity of its economy [5] . Some countries developed low carbon city to realize low carbon economy development. Recently, China started to choose some cities as experiment to build a low carbon city. The Dalian city’s low carbon construction has significance to the low carbon economy development of Liaoning province: firstly, set a city as an experimental site to develop low carbon city construction and summarize experiences and lessons. secondly,

Dalian city’s construction stimulates other cities to implement low carbon economy construction, finally the whole province economy development converts to low carbon economy development. Certainly, the low carbon city construction cannot move towards another extreme. Someone proposed that the essence of low carbon city means the whole greenhouse gases discharge is low or not. it’s a con troversial opinion. Low carbon economy isn’t means zero carbon economy. There are industry and trans portation, there are carbon discharge. Low carbon economy is a new model of economy development rather than stop development. If we can control the discharge in environment capacity, we succeed in low

The design and realization of tourism electronic commerce platform

Yongliang Yang

Henan Industry and Trade Vocational College, Zhengzhou, Henan, China

ABSTRACT: This paper discusses the function of tourism e-commerce platform, the platform realize and solve the needs listed in the system requirements analysis, through the tourist routes, ticket booking, member information management, message plate, on the construction of our server, data management and so on several modules, which realizes the encountered problems in the process of tourism. This platform combined closely the informationization of tourism industry, the tourism products and services, to establish a network sharing platform for the development of tourism. This paper presents a platform architecture based on platform archi tecture of tourism e-commerce information release system, and gives the general model and the realization of the platform architecture and key technology of process. The platform uses the XSLT template parsing

J2EE platform StrutsCX frame and the XML document tree based on conversion technology, it can provide automation platform construction site features for the user, and can rapidly establish many tourism application components by way of plug-in.

KEYWORDS: Information publishing system; Tourism e-commerce platform; StrutsCX; XML document;

1 INTRODUCTION

In recent years, with the rapid development of the

Internet revolution, tourism information and network is opened. Many travel websites have mushroomed to appear, they make the consumers living, food, travel, shopping and entertainment tourism elements of life become more convenient, greatly promote the development of tourism, also brought huge economic profits. The simple definition of tourism electronic commerce, the Internet for the theme, tourism infor mation collection, electronic bank based on tourism business operations through the use of electronic means of business system. From 1996 to the present, tourism e-commerce has been rapid development, at present, the existing 5000 much home website can provide basic travel information, and professional tourism website to reach more than 400, mainly cov ers the tourism website portals, characteristics of tourism website, area three categories. Although the tourism industry blend into electronic commerce only a few years’ time, the trend of its development is very strong, it is to become the new mode of the informa tion times travel business operation. Now the website becomes an indispensable part of the informationi zation of the tourism industry, but now our country tourism electronic commerce website exists the prob lem of network security, information content is not perfect etc.. This paper introduces the status quo of and through analysis of tourism e-commerce website, set up a comprehensive tourism electronic commerce platform. According to the characteristics of the integrated platform, we study the development of the platform in the process of actual design and development in-depth on the basis of the key technology. 2 THE OVERALL STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM 2.1 The system structure of business The system takes the tourism electronic commerce platform as the center, to recommend the scenic area, tourism strategy / scenic tourist destination, scenic map navigation strategy for entrance, displays all related information such as the scenic area, city, scenic, cultural resources, geography, traffic, weather, festivals, equipment, resources and so on display, and can enter the other scenic spots of the same with the scenic spot with the scenic tourist city or other scenic spots of the same strategy. The structure diagram of system business is shown as in figure.1. 2.2 The technical architecture of platform The system adopts three layers of structure: data layer, business layer, presentation layer, data layer support all the relational database (recommended by Oracle), the spring control manage affairs, configuration and other aspects of the business logic layer, convenient maintenance business in the future, the presentation layer uses the principle of decorator to maintenance and to keep the style of the page, technology architec ture is shown in figure 2.

2.3 Hardware deployment

Member login server through the Internet / mobile network, barrier free login to a business service platform and public service platform. Ordinary user access to the platform through the client browser, the business service platform and public service platform can share data through the interface in the data center, hardware deployment diagram is as shown in fig.3.

3 THE KEY TECHNOLOGIES OF THE PLATFORM ARCHITECTURE

The key technology of platform structure adopt the technology and framework of StrutsCX-MVC sys tem structure and XSLT template parsing conversion technology of XML document tree based on J2EE.

1 StrutsCX combine the advantage of Struts[3] and the advantages of XSLT together based on MVC framework of J2EE, it uses XSLT to replace the generated View JSP, but wholly intact to retain Struts Controller and part Model. In View, the StrutsCX transfer target is no longer JSP, but a Servlet, organized by Servlet, the structure of XML document, and use the XSL style XML documents. If there is ActionForm Bean, the Action object will copy it to HttpServletRequest, then was also added to the XML output document [4]. Similar to Struts, the presentation layer is StrutsCX function of the action coordination of the Web application or J2EE application and all other layers, such as business layer. The J2EE server application is divided into 3 layers: the presentation control layer of the StrutsCX framework, business logic layer persistence model layer and the Hibernate data. In StrutsCX framework of the said control layer

Figure 1. The system structure of business.

Figure 2. The technical architecture of platform. Figure 3. The hardware deployment diagram. special separate a filter for Filter sub layer, the Action controller contains 3 StrutsCXServlet, depicts the overall flow of the XML document tree generation and XSLT template parsing. The whole process is divided into two stages: (1) from “1” to start, the client generates a page frame request to “11” that last generate XST style HTML page display; (2) from “12” to start, the client submission form to request to “17” the form data persistence mapping to the database, second stage. Based on the information system of the tourism electronic commerce platform technology architecture is shown in figure 4. 2 The XSLT template parsing technology of document tree. XSLT template parsing and conversion process of XML document tree is as shown in figure 5. As a formal standard of a kind of W3C, XSLT provides a XML data into a plain text, PDF, HTML/XHTML, WML, VoiceXML and so on any XML format flexible, powerful tool. XSLT

Figure 4. The architecture process of e-commerce platform.

Figure 5. The XSLT template parsing and conversion technology of XML document tree. processor, such as Xalan and Saxon, performed by XSL style conversion, XSL style itself is actually a kind of XML document [5]. Transformation of XML document process is divided into two steps:

1 According to the XML document structure source tree, then, according to the rules of XSL source tree be into a result tree. At present, the protocol conversion has become more perfect, and from, independent of XSL, become W3C official recommended standard, called XSLT (XSL Transformations); 2 To generate a result tree, we can interpret, produce a kind of suitable for display, print or broadcast format, this step is called format (Formatting). The realization of the conversion process is responsible for the XSL processor: (1) The XML document is parsed into a DOM tree is stored in memory; (2) the document analysis, each node in a DOM tree are compared with a model, when the two match, will be in accordance with the rules defined in the template conversion, otherwise continue down. So the cycle until the entire docu ment processing is completed. The process includes data collection, XML from the source tree filling value, the whole process XML tree XSLT parsing and generating HTML files.

4 CONCLUSIONS

The thought of development platform is becoming increasingly important in the design and develop ment of Web application system, because it shows a clear, fast to build application component mode.

The platform architecture of tourism e-commerce information release system proposed a new general assembly platform based on the analysis of the infor mation publishing system and tourism e-commerce platform technology limited basis. It can provide an automated build platform for user customization and generate their own special website, based on this platform can be quickly generated by way of plug-in and build a plurality of tourism industry application components. At the same time, the platform adopts

StrutsCX framework based on J2EE platform, suit able for a variety of hardware, operating system and

Design and implementation of financial management systems for SMEs

Jie Zhang

Zhangjiajie College of Jishou University, Zhangjiajie City, Hunan Province, China

ABSTRACT: This paper analyzes the business function module, function flowchart, the application layer and the network topology for the financial management system, and analyze and design the overall structure of the financial management system. According to the system demand content, we design business operating function of the financial management; at the same time, using UML modeling to design sequence diagram and state diagram, then set up the financial management system of the financial enterprise database using E-R design relationship graph, detailed design the database table of contents and business process.

KEYWORDS: SMEs; Financial Management Systems; B/S mode; ASP.NET;

1 INTRODUCTION

With the rapid development of Internet based informa tion technology, Chinese enterprises usher in a com prehensive information era. The information provided new opportunities for traditional industry, at the same time also brings challenges and impact. The informa tion construction of enterprises has become an indis pensable part of the enterprise’s own construction, the informatization of enterprise’s financial management is the core problem with them, decide the enterprise survival and development in the future. The globaliza tion of the world economy, and China’s rapid economic development, will promote the research and application of “model” in the enterprise of our country cooperative financial management of enterprise informatization. The collaborative model of financial management informatization in the enterprisee, is what way of finan cial management mode of information sharing and collection between the enterprise and the stakeholders in the network. In this mode, due to breaks the limit of time and space in the traditional financial manage ment of enterprises, improve the efficiency of financial management, thus greatly reducing the rapid business expansion and the need for increasing the number of financial management, broaden the function of finan cial management, improve financial management personnel’s work quality and financial management for enterprise scale benefit. Strengthen the enterprise financial control of administrative and legal means.

2 THE SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE AND MODEL

Three layer architecture is a design pattern that is the MVC design pattern. The MVC design pattern,

M is a Model (business logic layer), all the business logic code is in the Model layer, the new class module generates object for business logic operation in the servlet or Struts action, V is a view presentation layer, used to display interface, mainly produce that can display the JSP page with servlet and JSP, the C is controlled a layer, control the jump direction of each business logic after operations, which is the configuration file. 2.1 The basic functions and requirements According to the functional requirement of a financial data management system of the enterprise, the financial data management system is divided into: system initialization, system settings, account management, document management, management, financial statement financial data management, and relevant books of the financial management module. The system function structure is as shown in Figure 1. 1 Login modules: financial management system, the realization of the basic functions, and the login interface. 2 The management of financial report: file operation, report processing and report formula and commonly used statements made, need these functions of management of financial statements. 3 Certificate management: collect registration subjects ledger, non-voided documents recorded in the ledger will have been audited, check the month of journal and Book of original documents, vouchers, and financial voucher, voucher center; 4 The books of account management module: manage the financial books of the project details and the balance sheet, the amount of subsidiary ledger, multicolumn subsidiary ledger, subsidiary ledger, trial balance and the general ledger; 5 Financial data management: data entry management; the final treatment and initial data processing, the final processing carryover of profit and loss, month end closing, carried forward to the next year and automatic transfer management;

7 The system settings: need to configure the system, set the unit of measurement, voucher number, bill and the dictionary, set up financial accounting and accounting subjects such as project;

8 The system initialization: respectively specified accounting system as well as the choice of accounting subject, specify a document model, specifies the encoding rules, specify the account before the cash class of subjects must be specified by cashier check, audit and the single entry voucher entry, specify whether cash flow, input the basic information, such as the initialization operation, according to the financial data and system the basic setup initialization.

2.2 The design of overall structure

According to the local area network structure, we establish the financial management system in financial enterprises based on the B/S mode, and design function and structure of network financial management system. The establishment of asset information management system in financial enterprises, due to local area network structure of financial enterprises, the system is divided into three layers architecture to design, application layer design: report management module, accounts management module, accounts management module, accounts management module, system login interface, system settings module, document management module and other functions, the function of the structure of financial management system design for financial enterprises such as shown in figure 2. The software architecture of the financial management system of financial enterprises. 3 THE DESIGN OF SYSTEM DATABASE 3.1 The database design of certificate management module Certificate management operation is mainly the management accounting vouchers, abstract and accounting subjects. There exist some relationships between these entities, the concrete manifestation is: an original certificate can only correspond to document number only. One of the original document, but can be corresponding to a plurality of abstract and a plurality of accounting subjects. Document management E-R is shown in Figure 3 Figure 1. Demand analysis of the system function structure. Figure 2. The overall framework of financial data management system. Figure 3. The E-R chart of certificate management module.

Figure 4. The E-R chart of salary management.

3.2 The database design of salary management module

The entity of salary management is employees, salary grade. Data association reflected between them is: an employee can only have a salary grade. Employees and payroll are a one to many relationships. The E-R chart is shown in Figure 4.

3.3 The database design of account management module

The entity of books management in the system func tion modules contains books of initialization, the current subsidiary ledger, schedule summary books etc.. The E-R chart is shown in Figure 5

3.4 Login interface system

The user login function in the financial data of the enterprise management system: when the informa tion of user input is the same as existing information in the database, users can login to access; if no such user system database, user name and password login or input is inconsistent, then the system will run, only enter the correct user name and password allows the user to enter the system. As shown in Figure 6, it shows the operation process of a financial data management system, the first log, including your name and password, after the completion of the input, the program will perform data comparison processing, analyzing the data exists in the database of the system, if it exists, and consistent with the user name and password, can allow users to enter the system, otherwise it will jump out of the interface prompts the login information is incorrect. Login code for programming is: SQLConnection myConnection = new SQLConnection(); myConnection.DataSource = “localhost”; myConnection.UserID = “sa”;

Figure 5. The E-R chart of books of account management. myConnection.Password = “”; myConnection.ConnectionTimeout = 30; myConnection.Open(); myConnection.Database = “pub”; myConnection.IsolationLevel = IsolationLevel.ReadCommitted

4 ANALYSIS OF TEST RESULTS

As can be seen through the functional and perfor mance test of the financial management system of the enterprise’s points, the test results show that has reached the goal of performance testing in the 16 user access to the system, we finish system testing about

Figure 6. Flow chart of user login system.

ERP functional demand analysis and security technology design under the

E-commerce model

Juan Wang

Bohai University, Jinzhou, Liaoning, China

ABSTRACT: The ERP management system is used for meeting the enterprise development needs in the economic globalization in the way of scientific and efficient management. Enterprise’s e-commerce model puts forward a higher requirement for quality, speed and efficiency of the enterprise. In the process of global infor matization, ERP becomes the core information system for the modern enterprise management. Huge losses will be caused for enterprises once there is data lose or interruption to occur in the ERP system. In this paper, how ERP management system can meet the development needs of enterprises under the e-commerce model and how to guarantee the safe, stable operation of ERP system and choose an appropriate model for implementing

ERP management system are discussed, and a feasible technical scheme is proposed from hardware, software, network, database, and operation, so that a greater value can be ultimately created by the ERP management system for the enterprises.

KEYWORDS: ERP Management System; E-commerce; Security Technology

1 INTRODUCTION

Currently, enterprises are getting improved and devel oped under the environment of informatization; the competition between enterprises is getting more and more intense. Thus, enterprises must constantly strengthen enterprise management, raise the standard of management, reduce costs, and gain more bene fits in order to obtain advantages in the fierce market competition. The development of e-commerce pro motes enterprises to participate in the global competi tion and also it is a platform for enterprises to connect to the external world. ERP, as an integrated manage ment model of information technology and advanced management, attaches high importance to the inter nal management. The combination of the two sides makes they supplement each other and also is very important for enterprise development and competi tiveness enhancement. Under the e-commerce envi ronment, higher requirements and new challenges are raised for the ERP development of enterprises.

2 THE ERP MANAGEMENT THOUGHTS AND DEVELOPMENT

ERP is short for enterprise resource planning. In ERP, the resources of an enterprise can be fully utilized; enterprise’s material resources, manpower, capitals, and information flow are integrated and transferred, so that the maximization of the economic benefits of an enterprise is accomplished. ERP has experienced a developing process from the initial simple data query and summary to implementing the cross-country and cross-enterprise operating system using the world’s Internet, and its development stages and the systems implemented at each stage as well as, theoretical basis, problem solving, and achieve goals are as shown in table 1. With the arrival of the e-commerce era, enterprise is required to enhance the ability in sharing information and exchanging data with customers or suppliers and also the connection with other enterprises, so as to realize the supply chain management thoughts complying with the survival competition and make a survival chain formed for the common development. Meanwhile, the function of the corresponding aspects must be implemented in ERP system for achieving enterprise management innovation, so that the market competitiveness can be enhanced in today’s economic globalization. 3 THE BASIC THEORY OF E-COMMERCE AND ERP MANAGEMENT IDEA E-commerce is a trade that is completed electronically, and it is an advanced application of information technology. It makes an enhancement to the commerce relationship based on the information. It is a new business model. ERP was originally based on enterprise’s internal supply chain management. The ERP system is mainly used for the whole enterprise supply chain manage ment, in which suppliers, customers, manufacturing plants, and distribution networks in the supply chain are connected together. Thus, enterprise’s produc tion, supply, and sales activities can be effectively arranged, and the partners in the unified supply chain partners can share the interests. In addition, the functions such as plan, processing, control, and deci sion-making are implemented in the business process flow of the entire supply chain.

4 THE RECONSTRUCTION OF ERP’S FUNCTIONS

Under the e-commerce model, enterprise product development, production management, sales manage ment, purchasing and supply chain, inventory man agement, quality management, customer relationship management, human resources management, finan cial management, and decision support system are synchronously operated, and information will break the space limit and get to the related departments within the shortest time.

4.1 Product development and management

To implement product development and manage ment, market information must be fully investigated.

The market must be known well through the Internet.

Products must be designed according to the market demand and in combination with the ales feedback, so that the product development is fitting the market. 4.2 Production management Production management includes production contract management, production planning management, production supplies claim and use, and return management, etc. 4.3 Sales management Sales management includes sales order management, sales price management, and all sorts of resource management, and also provides a variety of network query function and order processing status, etc. Thus, efficient product ordering is provided for customers. 4.4 Purchasing and supply chain management Purchasing management and supplier management are involved. 4.5 Inventory management In inventory management, a variety of inventory query functions are available for timely purchase, safety inventory management, inventory control, warehouse-in and warehouse-out inspection, etc. 4.6 Quality management In quality management, quality inspection, maintenance information, quality query and statistics,

Table 1. The theoretical development of ERP.

Development Stage Software System Theoretical Basis Solved Problems Achieved Management Goal

The first stage: 1960s Time-based MRP system Inventory management theory, the main production plan and BOM phase quantity standard How to determine the order time and order quantity Reduce cost, reduce out stock out

The second stage:

1970s Close-loop MRP system Capacity requirements planning, management and operation management, planning, implementation, feedback and control circulation How to ensure effective implementation plan and make timely adjustment Plan is implemented normally and properly

The third stage: 1980s MRPII system System integration technology, logistics management, and decision management How to realize the integration of the management systems Strengthen the connection between each subsystem

The fourth stage:

1980s ERP system The supply chain, hybrid production environment, and beforehand control How to use all available resources within the scope of the whole society Adapt to the rapidly changing market environment quality control and corrective action, and after-sale quality management are provided, so as to timely con trol the quality problems, improve the product quality, and enhance the competitiveness of enterprises.

4.7 Customer relationship management

Through customer relationship management, trading to the customers must be comprehensively recorded and analyzed, so as to analyze customer individual ity demand, deepen the understanding of customer needs, mine potential customers to purchase, increase sales, and expand corporate profits, etc.

4.8 Human resource management

In human resource management, a human resource pool is established using the advanced human resource management ideas, aiming to let all person nel play their ability to the maximum. A complete human resources management system includes per sonnel recruitment, evaluation and selection, training, and the improvement of the payment system, etc.

4.9 Financial management

Financial management is the core module of ERP, including accounting, cost, account payable, account receivable, fixed assets, and salaries, making it easy for collecting accounting and fund information and providing the managers with the financial manage ment information.

4.10 Decision-making support system

In decision-making support system, the ERP under e-commerce model integrates the information on all aspects such as supply, production, sales, personnel, finance, and materials, so that a powerful support is provided for the implementation of policy. With the support of e-commerce, a quick response can be made to market information, and then the right deci sions will be made.

5 SECURITY PROBLEMS IN ERP MANAGEMENT

The ERP system is currently the most scientific, the most advanced system model that is designed for enterprise management. Once a problem occurs in the system, the lagging-behind management and operation will be caused in an enterprise, and more seriously the enterprise will be eliminated by its com petitors, so that a disastrous loss is caused. ERP system, as a large enterprise management information system, is to ensure that the software can provide users with a reliable, fast, and uninterrupted service and also let the problems timely recovered, in which hidden security problems are involved. The problems are related to all parts such as hardware, software, data, and environment of ERP systems, while a security plan must be designed from these aspects and then implemented in a planned way and step by step. 6 ERP SYSTEM SECURITY TECHNOLOGY SOLUTIONS 6.1 ERP software security technology solution The supporting software of ERP system includes system software, ERP system application software, databases, and antivirus software tools. Attention must be paid to the patches when the software is being applied. ERP software application can be matured or self-developed software. Mature software such as SAP’s ERP system has been operated successfully in the market. In database application platforms, Microsoft SQL Server and Oracle application are applied more frequently, and the function of the database should be compatible with the system. 6.2 ERP system data security solution ERP system data are based on the database. A good database can be fast fault-tolerant, but also can automatically store. For example, RAC is short for oracle real application cluster, which provides a database with flexible scalability and high availability. Through the database, the sharing resources group is implemented, in which application service system (program), shared disk, virtual host, file system, and IP network resources are included. Through testing, the automatic repair is ensured once a problem occurs in equipment. ERP system data protection usually includes storing data protection, data backup protection, and disaster recovery. Data is stored in the server, machine, and disk, in which security password is added to protect it. 6.3 ERP system network security By network equipment and the connection, the data interaction between information system and users is implemented, and an unblocked data interaction can be ensured only if the network connection is smooth and the network equipment is reliable. Using redundant network for the protection the network connection, cable and network interface failure can be avoided. Dual -network card or multiple-network card is tied to an IP like one network card to increase the bandwidth traffic and maintain the stability of the bandwidth. At the same time, the visit to a server is shared, the load pressure is decreased, and the ability to resist concurrence is improved.

6.4 ERP system security technology

After ERP system is applied to the enterprise oper ation process, there will be many security problems such as improper operation, system software mainte nance and management, and ERP archives manage ment. ERP system operating personnel will directly contact with the software, so many unsafe factors are derived from the artificial operation. For example, the password is leaked by the personnel; the software codes are deleted. The most direct solution to pre venting the operating problems of the personnel lies in system security and personnel’s contact control. The maintenance of ERP system is the most important and also the most time-consuming in the operation process, so it is necessary to strengthen the maintenance and management and regularly test the hardware in order to ensure system hardware and software security and keep clear of faults in time. The software changes according to the information envi ronment, to adapt to the management development.

Program maintenance is to diagnose and correct pro gram errors, and records are necessarily made to the

Asian option pricing based on two related assets

Min Zhang

School of Math and Physics, University of South China, Hengyan, China

ABSTRACT: In this paper, using a physical probabilistic measure of price process and the principle of fair premium, we deal with the pricing formula of option on Asian option. Under the assumption that the stock price process driven by non homogeneous Poisson jump-diffusion process and strike price process driven by Ito process, we obtain the pricing formula of Asian option and put-call parity.

KEYWORDS: Asian option option pricing; fair premium; non homogeneous Poisson jump diffusion

1 INTRODUCTION

Asian option has been widely used in the market, but its pricing is still not a good solution, mainly because of the reliance on market arbitrage-free, balanced and complete assumptions. If the market arbitrage or incomplete, it shall not apply the traditional theory of the Black-Scholes formula for pricing. 1998 Mogens

Bladt, Tina Hviid Rydberg [1] option actuarial pricing method is proposed for the first time, in the absence of such market assumptions, gives accurate pricing formula of European options, and proved in stocks follows geometric Brown movement, exactly the same actuarial pricing and the Black-Scholes pricing.

Because they no longer assume no-arbitrage and equi librium in the market is complete, so it can be widely used in non-equilibrium, incomplete markets, but for no-arbitrage and equilibrium market still applies. Asian option is a new option, derived from a stan dard option of new contracts. Asian options accord ing to the different means of settlement, is divided into a fixed exercise price of the option and the floating exercise price option. This paper deals only with floating strike price Asian options pricing prob lem, actuarial idea to a pricing of Asian options with a floating strike price, assuming that stock prices follow a non-homogeneous Poisson jump-diffusion processes, and floating implementation of two asset prices following a process correlation model, and

Asian call and put options are given expression, and parity formula.

2 ACTUARIAL PRICING MODEL

Actuarial pricing is a fair premium principle: multi buy options, short party within the period of val idity of the option will bear some potential risks, for this risk in addition to insurance, the premium is the price of this option. Convert this option pricing problem of options bear the risk measure of the size of. Consider continuous time financial markets had only two assets: one risk-free asset, at t time with the risk-free rate r(t),another risky assets, at t time with Asset price s(t),considering the time interval [0,T], S t t{ ( ) : 0}> is a stochastic process defined on the complete probability space F P( , , )Ω , F t t { : 0}> is a σ − algebra generated by S(t) flow and S(0) = S is a constant greater than zero, the option of actuarial pricing concept used [1] . Assumption risk assets price process {S(t):t > 0} and risk-free assets prices {P(t):t > 0} satisfy: dS t S t d t S t dW t( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )µ δ= + S S(0) = (1) dP t P t r t d t( ) ( ) ( ) ( )= P(0) 1= (2) Among them ,µ δ is a negative constant, µ is yields as stock options, δ is volatility of stock price, W t t T{ ( ) : 0 }≤ ≤ is standard Brown motion on a complete probability space F P( , , )Ω , F t is natural current σ − algebra of W t t T{ ( ) : 0 }≤ ≤ . Definitions 1.1: Suppose b(t) is the real-valued function of t time,and is S(t) t moment instantaneous yield, and Stocks in expectations of income is E S t Se s ds t [ ( )] ( ) 0 = ∫ b . Definition 1.2 : C(K,T ) P(K,T ) is represents the expiration date of call and put option prices, strike price k, the actuarial pricing option at t=0 is: C K T E e S T Ke I t dt r t dt A T T = ∫ − ∫ � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � b− − ( , ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 0 0 P K T E Ke e S T I r t dt t dt B T T = ∫ − ∫ � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � b− − ( , ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 0 0 I A and I B are A and B indicative function, Call and put options expiration date by the implementation of the if and only if conditions are:

Conditions I A e S T Ke t dt r t dt T T ( ) ( ) ( ) 0 0 ∫ > ∫ b− −

Conditions I B Ke e S T r t dt t dt T T ( ) ( ) ( ) 0 0 ∫ > ∫ b− − Note: ① definition 1.2 in the absence of financial markets makes traditional prerequisite for option pricing assumptions, complete market with the result of no-arbitrage and equilibrium and non-equilibrium market arbitrage, are all valid, only risk in calculating the potential loss risk asset according to the expected rate of return of discounted, the risk-free asset dis counted at the risk-free interest rate. ② different from the traditional conditions of imple mentation, actuarial model executable condition is e S T Ke t dt r t dt T T ( ) ( ) ( ) 0 0 ∫ > ∫ b− − . ③ {S(t): t > 0} simply use the actual probability distribution you can get the option price.

3 ASIAN OPTION’S MARKET MODEL

In actual markets, stock movement is divided into two parts: the first is the “normal” price volatility, arising from the transactions of some individuals unconscious small fluctuations in stock prices; The second is “unusual” price fluctuations, due to some major publication of information makes the stock price has fluctuated greatly, and such volatility and no rules to follow, so consider stock prices follow non homogeneous Poisson jump diffusion process, the non-homogeneous Poisson jump-diffusion model is a

1976 by Merton [2] introduction. In Asia type option pricing in the, Asia type option of floating Executive price for option validity within assets a segment time within of average price, and this average Executive price is random fluctuations of, but its stability will far over stock price itself, does not appeared stock price as of exception of fluc tuations, process is used of most widely of descrip tion price changes of random process, so considered floating Executive price process with Itoˆ process to description, so chapter considered two asset cor relation model, under Asia option obedience non homogeneous Poisson jumped diffusion process and floating strike price subject to Itoˆ process. Considering the continuous-time financial markets, intervals, says it represents maturity, given a complete probability space, set risk-free interest rates, stock prices, Asian floating strike price call option respectively, satisfies the following differential equation dS t S t t t dt t dW t dN t S S S ( ) ( )[ ( ) ( ) ] ( ) ( ) ( )µ λ θ σ j= − + + S(0) = S (3) dS t S t t dt t t dW t t t dW t a a S S S S S a a a a ( ) ( )[ ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 1 ( ) ( )] 2 µ σ ρ σ ρ= + + − S a (0) = S (4) W W W S Sa (.) ( (.), (.))= two-dimensional standard Brown campaign on a probability space F P( , , )Ω , and r(t) > 0, t t t t t S S S a a λ σ µ σ ρ> > > > >( ) 0, ( ) 0, ( ) 0, ( ) 0, ( ) 0 , are deterministic function of time, they meet the necessary conditions of this stochastic differential equation has a solution. N(t) is number of jumps in [0,t], it was with independent parameters for non-homogeneous Poisson process. , , 1 2 j j ... N t( ) j are independent and identically distributed random variables, and at random times, t t, , 1 2 ... t N t( ) are always jumping height, j and N(t), W(t) are independence, and 1j > − , a.s, ln(1 )j+ obey the normal distribution N J J ((ln(1 ) / 2), ) 2 2 θ σ σ+ − , J 2 σ is the variance, of ln(1 )j+ , θ is the unconditional expectation of j, and average growth by Poisson jump in stock prices. Lemma 2.1 solution of stochastic differential equations for (3) and (4) : (proof see [3] ) S T S t t t dt t dW t S S T S S i i N t T ∫ ∑ ∫ µ λ θ σ σ j= − − � � � � � � + + + � � � � � � � � � � = ( ) exp ( ) ( ) 1 2 ( )) ( ) ( ) ln( 1 ) 2 0 0 ( ) 0 S T S t t dt t t dW t t t dW t a S S T S S T S T S a a a a a ∫ ∫ ∫ µ σ σ ρ σ ρ= − � � � � � � � � + + − � � � � � � � � � � ( ) exp ( ) ( ) 2 ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 1 ( ) ( ) 2 0 0 2 0 Lemma 2.2 let X N X N Cov X X~ (0,1), ~ (0,1), ( , ) 1 2 1 2 ρ= X N X N Cov X X~ (0,1), ~ (0,1), ( , ) 1 2 1 2 ρ= , then for any real number a b c d m m, , , , , 1 2 have the following conclusions:(proof see [4]) E e I cX dX m aX bX m [ ] { } 1 2 1 1 2 2 = + < + < c d cd N ac bd ad bc m a b ab N ac bd ad bc m a b ab ρ ρ ρ ρ ρ + + � � � � � � + + + − + + � � � � � � � � − + + + − + + � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � exp 1 2 ( 2 ) ( ) 2 ( ) 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 Proposition 2.3 S(t) for Asian options in the stock price, S a (T ) floating within the validity period meet the respective exercise price for (3) and (4), Asian option price and parity respectively C S S T S t d t t dt n N d a T T n n n ∫ ∫ ∑ θ λ θ λ = − + � � � � � � � � � � + � � � � � � = ∞ ( , , ) exp (1 ) ( ) (1 ) ( ) ! ( ) 0 0 0 ∫ ∫ ∫ ∑ ∑ µ λ λ ( ) − − � � � � � � � � � � − � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � − = ∞

S t r t dt t dt t dt n N d S T T T n n n a exp ( ( ) ( )) exp ( ) ( ) ! 0 0 0 0 (5) ∫ ∫ ∫ ∑ ∑ µ λ λ ( ) = − � � � � � � � � � � − � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � − + = ∞

P S S T S t r t dt t dt t dt n N d a S T T T n n n a

( , , ) exp ( ( ) ( )) exp ( ) ( ) ! 0 0 0 0 ∫ ∫ ∑ θ λ θ λ

− − + � � � � � � � � � � + � � � � � � − = ∞

S t dt t dt n N d T T n n n exp (1 ) ( ) (1 ) ( ) ! ( ) 0 0 0 (6)

C S S T S T e P S S T S a a r t dt a T ( , , ) ( ) ( , , ) ( ) 0 + ∫ = + − (7)

Among them d r t t t dt n n S T a ( ( ) ( ) ( ) ) ln(1 ) 1 2 0 ∫ ∑ ∑ µ λ θ θ = − − + + + t t t t t dt n t S S S S J T a a [ ( ) ( ) 2 ( ) ( ) ( )] ( ) 2 2 2 0

∑ ∫ σ σ ρ σ σ σ= + − +

Prove: E E E N T E i i N T i i N T i N T prove : (1 ) [ (1 ) ( )]] [(1 ) 0 ( ) ( ) 0 ( ) ∏ ∏ j j j+ � � � � � � = + = + � � � � � � = = t dt K e e e e K T K t dt t dt t dt t dt T T T T [(1 ) ( ) ] ! 0 0 ( ) (1 ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 0 0 0 0 ∫ ∑ θ λ

= + ∫ = ∫ ⋅ ∫ = ∫ λ θ λ λ θ λ = ∞ − + −

Among them e e t dt t dt T S T ( ) ( ) 0 0 ∫ = ∫ b µ = ∫ − ∫ � � � � � � � � b− −

C S S T E e S T e S T I a t dt r t dt a C T T ( , , ) ( ( ) ( )) ( ) ( ) 0 0 = ∫ � � � � � � � � − ∫ � � � � � � � � = − b− − E e S T I E e S T I I I t dt C r t dt a C T T ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 1 2 0 0 The execution conditions I C e S T e S T t dt r t dt a T T ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 0 0 ∫ > ∫ b− − On both sides of the logarithm t dt S T S T r t dt T a T ( ) ln ( ) ln ( ) ( ) 0 0 ∫ ∫ b− + > − Equivalent to t dW t S T S i i N t ( ) ( ) ln(1 ) 0 0 ( ) ∫ ∑ σ j+ + − = ∫ ∫ σ ρ σ ρ+ − � � � � � � >t t dW t t t dW t M S T S S S T a a a ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 1 ( ) ( ) 0 2 0 Equivalent to M t r t t t t dt S S S T a a ( ( ) ( ) 1 2 ( ) 1 2 ( ) ( ) ) 2 2 0 ∫ µ σ σ λ θ= − − + + For a given n Z t dW t N S T S i i n ( ) ( ) ln(1 ) ~ ( , ) 1 0 0 1 1 2 ∫ ∑ σ j µ σ= + + ∆ = n n J ln(1 ) 2 1 2 µ θ σ= + − n t dt J S T ( ) 1 2 2 2 0 ∫ σ σ σ= + Let Z t t dW t t t dW t N S S T T S S a a a ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 1 ( ) ( ) ~ (0, ) 2 0 0 2 2 2 ∫ ∫ σ ρ σ ρ σ= + − ∆ t dt S T a ( ) 2 2 2 0 ∫ σ σ= let Z X 1 1 1 1 σ µ= + Z X 2 2 2 σ= X N~ (0,1) 1 X N~ (0,1) 2 Z Z t t t dt S T S a cov( , ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 1 2 0 1 2 ∫

ρ ρ σ σ σ σ = = σ µ { } = � � � � = + � � � � σ σ µ− > − > − I E e I E X I Z Z Z M X X M exp 1 * { } 1 1 1 { } 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 µ σ { } = + N d n exp 1 2 ( ) 1 1 2 ∫ θ σ= + � � � � � � � � � � t N d n S T n (1 ) exp 1 2 ( ) ( ) 2 0 ∫ b= − � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � I E t dt S T I T C exp ( ) ( ) 1 0 ∫ ∑ ∫ λ θ σ σ j= − − � � � � � � � � � � + + � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � =

S t t dt E t dW t I T S S S i i N t T c exp [ ( ) 1 2 ( )] exp ( ) ( ) ln(1 ) 0 2 0 ( ) 0 S t t dt E E e I N T S T Z c exp [ ( ) 1 2 ( )] [( ) ( ) 2 0 1 ∫ λ θ σ= − − � � � � � � � � � � � � � �

S t t dt P N T n t dt N d S T n n S T n exp ( ) 1 2 ( ) ( ( ) )(1 ) exp 1 2 ( ) ( ) 2 0 0 2 0 ∫ ∑ ∫ λ θ σ θ σ= − − � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � = + � � � � � � � � � � = ∞ S t d t t dt n N d T T n n n exp (1 ) ( ) (1 ) ( ) ! ( ) 0 0 0 ∫ ∫ ∑ θ λ θ λ

= − + � � � � � � � � � � + � � � � � � = ∞

Similarly available

I S t r t dt t dt t dt n N d S T T T n n n a exp ( ) ( ) exp ( ) ( ) ! 3 Chapter 3: Education, psychology and multimedia

Universities’ ethics oversight system in Mandarin

Chunshuang Feng

Department of Personnel, Tangshan Normal University, Tangshan, Hebei, China

ABSTRACT: The main problem of ethics management in local colleges and universities has ethics education management lags; morality system construction is not perfect, environmental construction morality is urgent for improvement. To strengthen ethics education and management, we should establish and improve the ethics evaluation and incentive system, strengthen ethics oversight mechanisms, colleges and universities to raise awareness of ethics management of the construction management, construction to create a good environment, ethics, ethics management in order to strengthen the construction of the university.

KEYWORDS: Ethics Oversight; Evaluation; Incentive

Professional Ethics is an important part of the working of the colleges and universities, is also an important part of the faculty building. Morality is the formation of teachers’ professional ethics requires transform ing into a process of conscious action of individual teachers, the process is both complex and lengthy, and so the moral construction is a comprehensive, systematic project. If you do not have a proper long term mechanism to play a role, it is di�cult to form a good teacher ethics habit. Ethics oversight mechanism as a long-term mechanism gradually helps teachers develop good habits, ethics, moral construction is an extremely important part. Ethics oversight body for teachers conduct oversight mechanisms, management organizations and universities, teaching management sta�, students, and teachers themselves and other objects are university teachers supervised ethical behavior. Currently oversight body of the composition of a wide range, from the point of view of teachers in colleges and university internal environment manage ment personnel, includes teachers and student groups; from the external environment from the Universities of view, there is oversight of public opinion. However, in the supervision of running the program, as for how to conduct oversight, supervision and what are the standards, there are still some questions on how to deal with issues such as supervision and the results led to the implementation of floating on the surface of supervision, monitoring mechanisms do not run well.

1 CONSTRUCTION OF ETHICS

MANAGEMENT CONNOTATION

The so-called morality, ethics and teachers should have a code of conduct. Morality has the following characteristics: First, they have a tradition of morality; it is absorbed in the history that enriches and develops the traditional culture based on excellence. Second, morality has distinctive social characteristics. Moral of the specific content is with the development of social relations of production and development. From the perspective of the development of the law of ethics, morality is subject to specific production relations and class interests. Due to di�erences in national systems and institutions, or religious culture of the standards of morality, it is di�erent, what kind of culture, people have, for whom and people how to train people is always the eternal subject of colleges and teachers face. Third, morality has obvious characteristics of the times. Alternatively, a stage in di�erent periods of history or in the same historical period of ethics requirements varies, but morality is not by economic, political and social development as well as other factors such as network media greater impact. Fourth, morality has universal and individual di�erences in features. It is Moral Education Management lag. First, it is the theory lag of the research ethics education. There is an Ethics Construction of College of Management existence standardization and local differences in characteristics. Our general requirements for university teachers are to standardize the requirements of professional ethics of teachers; at the same time, there is a big difference between the central subordinate institutions and local colleges and universities. Central subordinate institutions due to the long history of the school, has invested relatively more teachers overall higher structural levels, scientific and academic discourse and training opportunities for learning exchanges account for the obvious advantages; and local education foundation, educational resources has relatively weak institutions. Local colleges in college enrollment in the presence have upgraded merger experience, especially merge to form new institutions, since the educational dif ferences between the historical and cultural heritage, they lead to differences in cultural identity. Secondly, the heavy use and light education management are resulting in ethics anomie. From our present situa tion of teachers’ morality construction management point of view, due to the impact of the market econ omy, there are university teachers more or less strong utilitarian sense of contempt for their basic quality of attention.

2 SOCIAL MEDIA SUPERVISION LACKS

OF BENIGN FEEDBACK CHANNELS,

A ND IT IS DIFFICULT T O SUPER V ISE

TEACHERS’ EVERYDAY ETHICS

Social media supervision refers to the Teachers’

Ethical behavior evaluation and regulation of public opinion, that is, through the community some com mon views and positions to influence the teacher’s words and deeds. Its origin is very broad; it can come from within universities, but also from various sec tors of society. It can be through formal media, such as an informal way of television, radio, publications, networking, etc., but also through the streets and other people’s word of mouth, a phenomenon is com mon to make ethical behavior or fear of evaluation.

Nevertheless, we should also note that public opin ion often lacks positive feedback channel, which is not conducive to teachers to correct their behaviors, it does not comply with the special laws ethics forma tion. Moreover, it cannot guarantee that at any time they are correct. In some cases, the public will form incorrect or outdated conclusions; teachers cannot completely obey in public opinion arrangements. In addition, the public tends to focus more on some of the more significant and sensitive issues, it is impos sible to be an e�ective teacher everyday ethics watch dog behavior, because this part is probably beyond the reach of social media corner. As previously said, the teachers reflected in the details of daily work ethics once again have been ignored.

3 LACKING OF FEEDBACK LOOPS IS

NOT CONDUCIVE TO TEACHERS’

OWN BEHAVIOR CORRECTION

Formation law from morality point of view, the results of monitoring should be fed back to the teachers themselves for the first time, so that it can help teach ers discover and promptly correct their deficiencies, and gradually complete the ethics of self-discipline habits. If lacking of this necessary oversight system link, it will lead teachers to supervise ignorant results, or just a major problem occurs only when it is known. More importantly, the results of such monitoring systems in operation under the supervision of teachers just is to be appraised and in the end of the semester during a job promotion rarely has works reference items, teachers themselves naturally, do not care about the outcome of supervision. It is more di�cult to complete amendments to their own behaviors. From the above-mentioned problems, we can see problems with the ethics oversight system in many aspects. Without a sound system of supervision and oversight mechanisms, it is difficult to make the whole play. A good monitoring system must first have a more fair and objective oversight body to clear standards for oversight of objects under the supervision of supervision; it can also pay attention to improve the results of effective supervision and feedback. Thus, an ethics oversight system can be improved in the following aspects: 3.1 Select the masses as the main oversight body Mass refers to the teachers’ sta� in the industry and educational objects. “Teachers’ professional peers who are the same or similar means, belong to the same or related sectors of teachers, educational objects are college students. Peers and educators object teachers’ necessary part of the work to contact the closest, but compared with other oversight body, most people understand the teacher’s daily supervision ethics behavior, which has the strongest results of the monitoring objectivity. We should improve oversight body, the formation of ethics oversight universities, ethics oversight body is a force acts perpetrators of supervision, including supervision of school administrators, college teachers, peers and teachers as the main student groups, including the community through the supervision of public opinion It also includes the conscience of college teachers in vocational-oriented self-monitoring. 3.2 Campus supervision Moral of the campus of Uni versity College Teachers’ oversight body includes administrators, teachers, and peer groups of students. Of these three types of systematic oversight body, we should establish and improve the supervision of University Teachers, administrators, teachers and students with industry personnel supervision and oversight of the Trinity college ethics of the oversight system. Management of University Teachers is mainly through listening to these reports, the masses or direct lectures and other forms of university teacher ethics oversight, which is the most authoritative and direct supervision. Because management personnel directly involved in the super vision, supervision, a�ect the broader, and thus it has an unparalleled authority. However, this oversight due to adopt the form of checks, reports, lectures and other short-term examination, involves narrow, intermittent in time and space, and generally only for teaching activities in schools, it is di�cult to truly understand and have comprehensive col lege teachers to master the daily behavior and the real situation ethics. So we should play the internal supervision of the masses universities to have greater significance.

3.3 Self-monitoring

We should establish a sound system of norms of morality, only provide a code of conduct for col lege teachers, and teachers take these guidelines into a conscious act, practice in activities of daily moral ity that lies within the individual teacher norms of morality to improve moral self-awareness, we should complete ethics law ethics and self-discipline to transformation and upgrading. Universities currently

Anomie of morality, of course is about the negative impact of the social environment, but some university teachers relax ethics and self-discipline that is also an important factor. In the course of further develop ment of the market economy and education system reform in universities, in the face of temptation and complicated tremendous work pressure, some uni versity teachers relaxed self-requirements, showing a tendency of quick success. Therefore, the current situation in the construction of university ethics should establish and improve the supervision system of teachers ‘morality, we should give full play to the role of the teachers’ ethics oversight body as to guide the conscience of college teachers in the teaching pro fession-oriented, conscientiously fulfill ethics norm requirements, and in order to evaluate and adjust their ethical behavior.

4 ESTABLISH AND IMPROVE THE

SCIENTIFIC EVALUATION SYSTEM

OF TEACHERS’ MORALITY

The morality appraisal system is the key to the moral ity construction system, the results of the evaluation of university teachers’ titles is directly related to the promotion and other personal interests. Therefore, in a reasonably scientific ethics evaluation system, teachers can play a positive virtue of a good regu latory role. Sound evaluation system of teachers’ morality is from the following aspects:

We should increase students’ right of re-evaluation of teachers. The quality of teachers’ ethics with the right to speak is not school leaders, but they should lis ten to teachers teaching students. While most colleges and universities take students evaluation mechanism, but students assess of the weight is not high, and thus the final result of the impact assessment of teachers ‘ethics is not large, therefore, we should increase students’ right of re-evaluation of teachers, so that the real implementation of ethics is onto Health-oriented. We should establish a sound system for ethical evaluation. The ethics evaluation index is more difficult to quantify, but it is based on ethical standards, and we should establish a multi-level evaluation index system that is feasible. Index system should pay attention to the rational allocation of weights. We should strengthen ethics oversight and incentives universities, the establishment of monitoring and incentives are based on the root level of awareness of the human mind, the human consciousness and self-interest without supervision and motivation are the premise or human factors that exist. The formation of good habits of people just relies on people’s consciousness that is not enough. A specification requirement of the system, the scientific rewards and punishments, the system of ethics oversight and incentives to colleges and universities is an important measure to improve the level of university ethics. We should strengthen ethics oversight and incentives universities, one is to supervise incorporated into the evaluation system. Assessment and monitoring are not two separate processes, but two aspects of a process. Second, we must develop a scientific evaluation standard, so that it is evidence-based supervision. Right outside the three institutions to enhance the supervision of weight, the parents and the community are incorporated into the monitoring mechanism in the past. Fourth, we should set up a special leading group ethics oversight in not only to do with the members of the “tactful”, but also to do occasional rotation, team members also accept the supervision of all teachers. Give incentives to develop ethics, morality will be placed in the same position as important as research and teaching. Morality and attention is to insist on carrying out publicity and education mechanisms ethics awareness and training and education, to promote the formation of the Professional Ethics education system. We should strengthen the moral construction of propaganda, to establish various forms of propaganda mechanism, to create a strong atmosphere, to form a good situation. Morality and universities are to be made within the scope of effectiveness, we must take all calls and exemplary combine education and personality to guide the demonstration together, through propaganda to create atmosphere, massive media environment. By taking various forms of propaganda noble morality, one organization morality and schoolteachers are to carry out activities in the great debate, focus on organizational learning and teachers to use the political discussions of organizational lifetime

Morality Construction. Second, we should use radio, poster, windows, networking and other forms of propaganda for morality construction work. The third is a typical example and ethics play an exemplary role, form an excellent demeanor morality, ethics Raise the school level. Fourth, we should give full play to the role of teachers and students to interact in the Construction of Teachers, the formation of a good atmosphere of respecting teachers, encour aging teachers to Germany Slim, Moral Education enthusiasm and initiative.

5 UNIVERSITY TEACHERS ARE

TO STRENGTHEN THE MORAL

PRACTICE GUIDELINES

Practice is the fundamental way to University

Teachers’ Professional Ethics. We should boot uni versity teachers to strengthen the moral practice to ask the university teachers to practice ethics in prac tice norms, improve the level of morality, rather than hide behind closed doors training, talking about eth ics. One is to guide the college teachers in teaching, research and other educational practice consciously practicing ethics requirements. We should supervise adherence to ethics norms guiding college teachers in the teaching activities, to set an example for students; stricter academic ethics in the academic research process are to be honest with yourself and honest labor to contribute to the academic development; we also pay attention to guiding college teachers deal relationships and promote healthy development of collegial relationships. The second is to guide the university teachers to participate in sports activi ties, public service activities, visits and other activ ities, through the activities enrich the spiritual life of University Teachers. We should carry out various

Application and development of multimedia in college English education

Ling Yang

Faculty of Foreign Language and Cultures, Kunming University of Science and Technology,

Kunming, Yunnan, China

ABSTRACT: With the advent of computers, it marks the advent of the information society. This brings us the teaching reform new shocks. The traditional teaching and learning have been unable to adapt to the times. The com puter is lively and quick with easy operation. With the development of multimedia technology and network technol ogy, computer-aided instruction became one marked modern education, and it has become the measure of a country an important symbol of modern education. Continuous development of computer technology makes a few people grasp of computer that becomes a popular tool used, but in recent years with the development of computer tech nology, multimedia technology, businesses are widely used in computers. Electronics information technology has become a new standard. How we use computer multimedia technology, use and develop disciplines with featured multimedia software and create multimedia courseware has become an important task of the new century teachers.

KEYWORDS: Multimedia, English, Education, Courseware

1 APPLICATION OF MULTIMEDIA

NETWORK TECHNOLOGY IN COLLEGE

ENGLISH TEACHING

Currently, teaching is still a common problem of class room “teacher-centered”, the main reason is to get rid of the teachers who have no fundamentally ideological shackles of traditional teaching concepts. After Higher enrollment, some schools English teaching resources cannot meet the needs of teaching methods or student cannot acquire knowledge form the teachers in the classroom, students still are English passive recipients, which is contrary to the law of language teaching.

Due to various factors, the application of multi media, network technology still has some limitations, such as lack of multimedia network development level of English resources, the level of teachers’ application of computer network technology, capital investment in schools and other issues. All these lead to multimedia technology and network technology, only a small number of good universities and young teachers have adjunct teaching methods, and they did not become the focus of the elements in the teaching mode. It is difficult to play their personalized, inter active features and advantages.

2 MULTIMEDIA FEATURES AND ROLE IN

ENGLISH TEACHING

2.1 Environmental factors in English teaching

Learning the language has been emphasized lan guage environment; traditional teaching is difficult to achieve sound, text, maps. In addition, as for today’s computer, we can easily achieve this. These can greatly arouse students’ interest in learning more digging learning potential. 2.2 Change the conventional memory way In the traditional English teaching mode, the memory of students tends to be passive. The use of multimedia in teaching students from the previous passive learning becomes semi-automatic (plus teachers teach students self-learning) study, using a variety of carriers, and strengthens the students’ memory with greater use of associative memory, unintentional memory, logical memory. Multiple memory modes are more conducive to student learning. For example, in extensive reading textbooks, many new words make students daunting. They use such a variety of Kingsoft translation software, students can easily learn to reduce the large number of students time to read the dictionary to help students improve their reading speed and efficiency, and achieve a multiplier effect. 3 MULTIMEDIA TECHNOLOGY AND ENGLISH TEACHING INTEGRATION AND NETWORK TECHNOLOGY We should integrate multimedia, network technology and modern English teaching to reflect innovative educational ideas. Classroom teaching application of multimedia, network technology is with constructivist learning environment suited to teaching, constructivist theory, and knowledge. Language learners are not passive recipients, but active creators of knowledge struc tures. Hypothesis puts forward by finding problems – confirm assumptions and solve the problem – the dis covery of new problems. In the course, this cycle of constantly expands their own knowledge structure.

Therefore, in the integration process, students should be taught the subject structure that must ensure student participation and learning, so that students are under the guidance of teachers in the use of listening to multi media, network technology through exploration, inter action, collaboration and other activities of language including speaking, reading, writing and translating.

Multimedia English Teaching network environment is supporting breakthrough time and space limitations of traditional teaching, so that the exchange of teachers and students are on a more extensive level to start. English writing implements “teaching” and “learning” open ness, interactivity, sharing, collaboration and auton omy, as the students’ ability to learn the language to create a good environment for communication between teachers and students provides a convenient condition.

First, it can greatly motivate students of English inter est in writing. With the network communication tech nology, virtual space, the media, electronic dictionaries and other means, a radical improvement in student learning, writing environment; such encounters are not the words, sentences, click mouse dictionary. It is lack of grammar, writing knowledge into the curriculum of lesson plans database queries, or even writing to famous sites to find relevant information. Furthermore, students can at any time, place online and in writing to discuss their favorite course topic in English, and they can fully express their views, insightful, and advocate cooperative learning. In addition, they can facilitate the management of teaching. Teachers are also not subject to time and place restrictions, teaching instruction can be modified at any time, modify student assignments at different levels, so that students maximize the benefit from the teacher’s guidance.

4 COLLEGE ENGLISH TEACHING IS

MAINLY COMPOSED OF MULTIMEDIA

APPLICATIONS

In college English teaching process, multimedia effective combination is of a variety of ways, making multimedia English language teaching to become an effective whole. If the system functions, the multime dia consist of three parts.

4.1 Computer and player together to form an effective multimedia hardware

Hardware is the basis for multimedia applications, as well as media to play an effective role in the carrier. In college English teaching process for multimedia hardware, requirements are not high, the general configuration of the computer and its players are enough qualified college English teaching. On the hardware platform, multimedia teaching major meets three requirements. First, the integration is with sound and image. Multimedia English word is Multimedia, it contains two layers of sound and image content, therefore, because of the hardware, and the most important thing is to achieve the integration of sound and image in order to ensure the effective role to play multimedia. Secondly, there is a sense of three- dimensional teaching. The traditional blackboard and multimedia teaching is the biggest difference that the former is just flat, imagine teaching, and the latter through three-dimensional, intuitive teaching to meet student recognition for English-speaking environment. Third, it is the teaching content. Compared with the traditional teaching, multimedia teaching is not only very rich in content, but in terms of color and character, dialogue has greatly improved. 4.2 Network technology is to expand the width of the English teaching Network technology is an important extension of information technology; information technology has become an important platform for applications. In the multimedia teaching, network technology has gradually penetrated, and played an active role in the formation of an effective multimedia network technology. Application of this technology in college English teaching has advantages and way; it is summed up including the following three aspects: First, the multimedia network has the resources to ensure. The multimedia network resource is shared to ensure the wide dissemination of resources, making resource that is more effective and teaching methods can exchange and promote the development and reform English teaching. Secondly, the knowledge of network technology is to ensure real-time. Through network technology, students can learn the latest knowledge of English, which can increase the interest for English learning, and teachers through the introduction of multimedia, network technology can effectively help students to understand the English-speaking world, in order to improve English teaching. 4.3 Advantages of multimedia in college English teaching application (A) It can help to attract college students to be interested in learning English. Einstein said: “Interest is the best teacher.” Interest is a positive learning psychological factor. Multimedia has a very strong expression in English teaching; it can sound content and images together, so that you can become boring vivid knowledge of English.

(B) It can help to improve the efficiency of the university students learning English

The college English teaching is in the form of development and deepening of the communicative approach to develop into an important English teaching. Communicative Approach refers to the college English teachers in the classroom to cre ate an almost realistic communication environ ment, and college students in this communication environment make every effort to improve their

English skills. You can create a multimedia learning environment illustrating English to English teach ing content presented in the form of stories, so that college students will be more straightforward to understand, and the illustrations of English teaching also help train college students a wealth of imagin ation and writing skills.

4.4 Disadvantages of multimedia in college English teaching application

(A) College English Teachers Have Their Own Roles of Media and Confusion.

In college English teaching, English teachers still play a leading role. Despite the accessibility of mul timedia in college, English teaching is very powerful, but it cannot pursue college English teachers college

English modern form of discarded traditional college

English teaching tools such as blackboards, chalk and other important tools. Instruments have English teaching functions. No matter how powerful and per fect modern multimedia features are, it is just a tech nology and teaching methods only, it can only provide the possibility of a teaching and diversity. That is, in college English class can no multimedia, but defi nitely not without a college English teacher. College

English teacher is a multimedia users and control of them. Our aim is to use multimedia in college English teaching, rather than college English teaching is to use multimedia.

It is creating English communication scenarios, students’ interpersonal skills, encouraging students to generate power active learning in the traditional

English teaching, language learning with other sub jects, like the main teacher lectures. Students lack real language environment, the lack of authentic language input. Learners are just passive recipients, textbooks and the teacher controls even learning methods. Students do not choose to study the pro gress of freedom manipulator classroom, teachers are also learning progress control and they ignore individual differences of learners, resulting in stu dents of English produce fear, anxiety, boredom or despair, and a series of negative emotions effect, leading to the fact that the English proficiency gap between the students is growing. Use of multimedia teaching English can create and simulate real-life situations, to provide students with a real English language-learning environment, students get through a virtual classroom discussions, network chat, role play, games, and other means to actually learn and simulate real-life feedback the interpersonal way. Multimedia teaching in English, on the one hand, students can independently choose their own cognitive style to learn materials and learn interesting; on the other hand, students can also control the input and output of the English language from the quantity and quality of learning grasp progress. In English multimedia teaching, teachers provide only a certain stage of learning objectives, students can choose the appropriate language input in accordance with the original English, according to their own learning progress rational allocation of study time, the ability of students based on the original can expand their learning goals. 5 MULTIMEDIA TEACHING ENGLISH AUXILIARY PROBLEMS, COUNTERMEASURES We should increase the emphasis on multimedia teaching in English, leaders, teachers and students should increase inputs. Schools should invest capital, from hardware and teacher training and increase the intensity. Universities should cultivate and are just engaged in software development, but can effectively use a variety of software to engage faculty teaching. Other colleges and universities should establish an online resource sharing with the use of limited resources to do their own distinctive education. 6 SUMMARY Modern network multimedia teaching and traditional classroom teaching are complementary and mutually reinforcing relationship. The introduction of modern information technology is in college English teaching, which does not mean that the traditional classroom is not important. In the traditional teaching model, teachers can write on the blackboard with body movements, facial expressions, eye contact, as well as teaching methods. With the teaching methods of selection and use, there will be a flexible organization of classroom activities and teaching strategies and their corresponding great skill to mobilize and control the classroom atmosphere. Teachers and students in the exchange process, teachers can discover and solve problems.

In addition, there will be full of humane care and emotional communication in an interactive pro cess. There is a lack of interactive learning purely traditional classroom education; teachers and stu dents ask for mutual exchange between the students, making the learner no proactive source of strength, with a lack of road Durso quality training. Therefore, teachers should play a leading role. We must grasp multimedia “degree”, without too much reliance on multimedia technology, all the teaching of all is man ifested with multimedia tools, as soldiers seized the main noise, teachers should not achieve a dominant role. Teachers should be based on the actual situation of the combination of several teaching touch-type, both active use of multimedia, network technology, and reasonable tradition, teaching advantages, they should give full play to the advantages of network multimedia teaching to realize the combination of modern technology and traditional teaching edu cation and interoperability to improve the quality of

Research of management information system of college student internships

Xin Han

College of Computer Science & Technology, Taizhou, Jiangsu, China

ABSTRACT: With the development of the theory of college students internship, internship teaching this new mode of teaching practice are paid much attention, this paper on teaching students intern ships supports the management of some rather special college teachers and conducts a comprehensive in-depth investigation, and summarizes student internships management features and focus during the teaching on the basis of further exploration reasonable and effective teaching students internships branch management.

KEYWORDS: Teaching Practice; Student management; Mode

With more and more corporate internships of students and graduates of formal induction grad ually increased, due to the reason of changes of internships and graduate jobs in large dispersed and the current widespread use of traditional man agement, using traditional system can not timely understand and control the management of student internship, and also the practical effect can not be fast and accurate and scientific evaluation, people can not widely and quickly understand the appro priate post graduate employment situation, and can not give these students effective, targeted and timely guidance and help.

Using modern communication and network tech nology, we realize control of vocational college students’ network management and related matters during internships, and promote vocational colleges and student exchanges and links between schools and enterprises. Through fast, standardized manage ment tools we provide internships for improving the efficiency and quality assurance, and also facilitate the employment situation for graduates of feedback channels to provide information and training objec tives and set a reference for decision-making posi tions talents vocational colleges.

Teaching Practice is very critical and important part during the teaching education, the students theoretical knowledge is learned in the classroom directly and involved in teaching activities, and it gradually forms a separate teaching ideas and more complete social values, how doing this stu dent management period and ensure the healthy development of students, are of great significance for teacher professional learning and student orientation. 1 FEATURES OF STUDENT MANAGEMENT DURING A POST TEACHING PRACTICE Teaching Practice is as a special stage of teacher education, compared with the student management the previous management has obvious particularity. 1 Management of the environment and form changes. In higher education, the main environmental management is the school management of student, and student internships during teaching learning activities are into all kinds of support from the school to teach school, student management also entered teaching school. Originally overall unified management will be based on the student’s specific circumstances of different schools into a variety of forms, small-scale, decentralized management, and a single management in the form of pluralism, in post teaching practice period, such support of teaching students is scattered in counties to support education schools in a complicated and loose tendency. 2 Changing characteristics of managers group. Normal Students enter the practice stage, age, learning environment, learning multifaceted social impact of external focus, social contacts and content changes in employment, education and so on, their psychological and behavioral characteristics of groups will produce significant changes. For example: a simple individual student and prospective teachers combining into social and professional individual; one feature of group behavior, learning from a simple classroom knowledge into free competition in professional learning and social interaction is necessary to combine various forms.

3 Change managers. Students’ administrators at the school generally are a teacher or counselor, the

Senate is on behalf of the school, college, logistics and other sector-specific management. And after entering the teaching school, it is mainly by the college teachers and internship county education administration and teaching schools in the macro requirement of schools and teaching school spe cific circumstances, implementation and manage ment, teaching school administrators often bear the heavy school work, lack of in-depth experience required to do the effort and student management work. They do not have direct control lever for dis ciplining students, so that there is no correspond ing authority, leading to weakening of management functions; or they lack of management experience for undergraduate education and responsibility to discipline students education and treatment, and also the necessary relevance and timeliness.

2 STRENGTHEN PRE-SERVICE TRAINING

To enable students to adapt as quickly as possible dur ing the internship positions, changes are from being the student to do a double role to be students plus faculty status, and they need to improve students’ understanding of the job. Before students to be internships, the school arranged a certain amount of hours of pre- service train ing. Instructor to “General Biology” course is as the representative for information on how to better design, teaching and how to write lesson plans and other aspects of the content of the training. As internships teachers, we must first fully understand the students to meet the individual needs of different students; Second, we must grasp the nature of the characteristics of disciplines, and understand the basic concept of course, accurate, in-depth interpretation of the design and points to note content, and in teaching process, we know how clever use different teaching methods for students to acquire knowledge in a relaxed mood, let the students deeply feel the charm of teachers. Pre-service training is at the same time, the instructor arranges internships and give students the task, so that students have problems and tasks to practice, practice purposefully avoids the blindness of student internships and inert. After train ing, the students not only learned a lot of theoretical knowledge, but also learned more than the experience of school textbooks, the next pre-service lecture work is to provide a more solid theoretical foundation of knowl edge and teaching skills.

3 IMPLEMENTATION OF SUPERVISION

AND GUIDANCE

During student internships, college teachers assign to the corresponding sentinel schools of the guidance of the actual work of the student conduct random classroom lectures, while checking job correcting the situation, classroom management, the in-depth understanding of students, we conduct student satisfaction surveys to the actual situation of students internships and conduct a comprehensive grasp of the actual situation and the analysis of each student, instructor mentoring program is to develop targeted and conducted in-depth exchanges and students, and promotes programs implementation, to solve practical problems, and do further examination of classroom organization. After the instructor and student exchanges continue to tap the potential of students, we stimulate students’ interest and enthusiasm for teaching, for example, in some practice is in order to improve student learning outcomes, organization of biological knowledge contest, building exam, subject choice, competition in all aspects of the design of the form by the students themselves to complete; additional allocation certain sections allow students to independent learning, in order to mobilize their initiative and to strengthen its self-learning ability. 4 PROCESSES OF INTERNSHIPS INFORMATION MANAGEMENT 4.1 Formulate internships mission statement The internships mission statement is developed by the school instructor, to clear the professional internship goals, internship content, practice methods, practice requirements, internships and other achievements handed. The instructor is in charge of the mission statement which will be issued to the internship network management platform for students and companies to guide teachers. 4.2 Determine internships school instructor Requirements are based on the principle of professional instructors who are specialized teachers to guide students’ expertise. The instructor is the first guardian of the student during the internship, and they are selected by the faculties’ rich teaching experience, internships are more familiar with the production, strong sense of responsibility, a certain organizational and management skill as teachers. 4.3 Determine units of student internships, internship agreement is signed Units can look for internships by students themselves and can also be recommended by the school, students can be pre-employment units, other units may also be arranged by the school, but student internship positions consistent with the objectives to foster professional principles. Students are looking for a good internship in internships in information management platform to enter their internship information, including students’ own contact information, name, address, internships, part-time instructor corporate information, and finally they are guided by school teachers’ summary.

4.4 Students complete internships registration form internships require students to work first before entering internships login information management systems, they seriously fill the registration form internships. If during internships, student intern ships or job changes, there is a need for timely online updates.

4.5 Students submit diary, once a week

Require students to submit diary once a week to guide teachers through information management platform, the internship tasks, work process (process), the main harvest work is completed, it is recommended to improve the work of the other information submit ted to the instructor. Internships can also be encoun tered in terms of ideology, life questions, difficulties through the platform and timely communication with the instructor. Instructor through the platform inspection mark student internship weekly, and answer student questions.

5 SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN

Providing personalized service internships role management system mainly uses the role of stu dents, school guidance teacher internships, academic administrators, corporate guidance teachers, parents and system administrators. The system is to provide them with their duties consistent system function, and there is no interference between the function of the role.

Automatically generating various statistical report ing system is based on the student, the management of teachers, business people and other different roles raw data, it can automatically generate all kinds of charts that can be classified in general and statistical analysis, for school leaders, middle-level cadres and ordinary teachers of different users student intern ships query information.

Internships can improve the management of teachers and school management efficiency man agement related departments, teachers can be easily done through the system notification bulletin, the students are responsible for obtaining internships statistics, online guide student internships, etc., from tedious phone calls, duplication of informa tion, such as low levels of fat QQ freed. School related administrative departments also benefit from this system to obtain the latest information about student internships statistical reports, they change the past, wait for each instructor to report aggregate information behind after practice to improve management efficiency. The system can offer a close contact information platform for students and schools and teachers in the school student internships, as long as they access to the Internet, they can view the latest Announcement schools through the system, online communication is with teachers and administration, information submitted in internships, internships Summary and so on. Enterprises can timely feedback to guide students to practice cases through the system, parents can learn about the overall situation of student internships to better participate in the school management work. This can change students, schools, businesses, parents, the situation where communication is not smooth. The application layer is mainly to divide complete user group members and their rights assignments. The main function of the presentation layer is in complete pages, user controls and custom server controls are to build the data and access and security settings on the control, using the module table management is to facilitate the assembly and security control. In the business layer, it is mainly all the business rules and logic implementation encapsulated in charge of the business logic components. In the data layer it is mainly the interaction encapsulate all data access and database components. At the physical layer, it is built with the ability to support the relevant server and establish smooth and secure Internet capabilities. Vocational student internships management system using B / S structure is to achieve design practice management and graduate school students in vocational colleges during the internship (paper) management. Competent leadership schools, the relevant departments and branch can publish information notification by sub-platform, and you can view the student’s guidance situation internship situation and teachers. Students can fill out the practice by sub-platform weekly, upload internship scene photos, video and other media information, you can write internship summary, you can view the graduation design (thesis) mission statement, and hand graduation design (thesis) opening report. The teacher can be sub-platform marking practice weekly, fill in guiding the recording, publish graduation design (thesis) mission statement, and review graduation design (thesis) opening report on the graduation project (thesis) outcomes and archive that student internships were grade comprehensive evaluation. The system is achieved through standardization, information technology and network management of vocational college students internships and graduate employment follow-up survey process, so the man agement is convenient, fast, comprehensive, and accurate.

6 SIGNIFICANCE OF ESTABLISHING

INTERNSHIPS INFORMATION

MANAGEMENT PLATFORM

Internships information management platform is focused on internship process to achieve full, com prehensive, in-depth, effective management and monitoring, and through information collection, col lation, analysis, we objectively and accurately evalu ate various aspects involved in internships, students accumulated practical achievements and employ ment resources to provide a reference for subsequent internship participants.

Through internships information management platform it can guide the way to break through the limitations of single; ensure effective linkages between instructors and students, employers, parents; through data collection, collation and analysis provide

Employability analysis and improving strategy of art majors in college

Liyun Kong & Suxia Yang

Xingtai University, Xingtai, China

ABSTRACT: Scarce resources of higher education are the fundamental factor affecting arts college students’ employability training and promotion. Human capital acquired by art majors in higher education is professional knowledge and skills with the core of employability. Characterized by a high degree of operability art expertise determines the students and enhances their professional knowledge and skills for the high depen dence of educational resources. These educational resources include not only the hardware facilities, teach ers, but also include the school’s philosophy, cultural traditions, social practices of professional opportunities, social influence and other hidden educational resources, for example, as for the traditional fine arts students, in addition to enough learning creative space, schools and cultural traditions have a very profound impact on the ability for professional and career development. In case of shortage of educational resources, art students’ the opportunity to study and practice professional knowledge and skills must be affected, but the large number of students makes many teachers tied of teaching school recessive educational resources which cannot even be effectively communicated.

KEYWORDS: Art majors; Employability; Quality education

1 CHARACTERISTICS OF COLLEGE

ART MAJORS

We all know that because particularity of art students’ major, compared with other ordinary humanities col lege students, they are more sensitive and extreme, and self-assertion is that people generally feel. They are emotionally rich, active thinking, divergent strong sense of novelty, but the ideals and beliefs are indif ferent, organization and discipline is not strong. Arts education focuses on the cultivation of students’ innovative thinking, because of its professional fea tures and their own personality traits, art students are active, creative, quick thinking and innovative, they are interested in new things. However, because of the influence of commercial art, when considering or dealing with problems, they are easily detached from the reality, lack of rational thinking, lack of concern for political a�airs, and their emotional stability is poor. They are often self-centered and thinking of “self performance art”, concerned about their own development, will inevitably lead to its thin ideal, distorted beliefs, and even cause deviation of their outlook on world, life and values. Art students are emotionally rich, and have strong idealism and romanticism thinking, they are impulsive and sen sitive to new things, and good and evil. Compared with students in other disciplines, they are more sus ceptible to environmental interference and impact.

Irregularities of learning, particularity of life and lack of self-discipline, lead to the results that most of the students are legal consciousness, style lazy, slack discipline. Even individual students also aspire to “absolute freedom” of its own way, so there is a strong rebellious and hostility to the College rules and regulations, education and management. Specific performance is: deliberate tardiness, random absenteeism and truancy; eating in class, receiving a call; dirty, chaotic bedroom Health; disregard the feelings of others and so on. Their learning attitude is good, but their emphasis on professional learning, neglect theoretical study. Mostly art majors practice their skills from childhood, they are enthusiastic about their professional learning as art is everything. Therefore, students tend to be more emphasis on spending most of their time in the professional skills, thus ignoring other cultures theoretical courses of study, leading to poor results of cultural studies. Art students are generally with low scores, undergraduate admissions score in some schools of cultural studies is less than 200 points, which is a stark contrast with stubbornly high points of ARTS and science, making some mediocre candidates applying for the school of arts and sciences hopeless case transferred or to learn the art, its purpose is to be able to go to college, thus causing some art students neither artistic talent and lack of interest in learning. Because of the poor cultural foundation, and lack of earnest, hardworking attitude toward learning, “do not understand, do not use” would be a reason for their regular truancy. Therefore, weak cultural qual ity and cultural enrichment are the most prevalent problem of art majors, resulting the phenomenon that mostly art students failed on cultural classes.

2 SITUATION ANALYSIS OF EMPLOYABILITY

TRAINING OF ART MAJORS

Based on the above employability connotation anal ysis of Art Majors, observation and reflection on the current higher arts education and arts students’ employment status is not di�cult to find the prob lem and its causes. To practice and strengthen from schools, educational administrators, and students themselves can strengthen self-awareness, and enhance self-employment.

Schools and faculties should provide students rich atmosphere of cutting-edge design, design atmos phere is not difficult to imagine, but to create it needs long-term accumulation of both hardware and soft ware. Each school has its own characteristics, such as different cultural backgrounds, academic ideas, geog raphy and other geographical features. The college can have cutting-edge design atmosphere, according to the own characteristics of academic construction and development and culture concept of design.

Create an academic atmosphere. Actively carry out design exhibitions, seminars and other academic exchange activities, are good ways to create academic atmosphere. At present, the profession of art has set around design art schools and comprehensive schools in different areas, in addition to key institutions in first-tier cities, local arts institutions are also with quite a large number of students, and their internships are relatively much more difficult. There are many students who are located in secondary cities which the local design development level is not high, the exchange of information is also relatively isolated.

How to create a positive atmosphere for part of stu dents? It is up to the schools and faculties to find countermeasures. In addition to invite well-known designers and executives from well-know colleges and design company to the school or organize aca demic teaching exchange activities, but also at the same time may be appropriate to organize the stu dents to fieldwork learning in other developed cities, and organize students to participate in various design contests. But these are reference and learning, funda mentally, is key to establish a solid active academic atmosphere of art. Combined with the local industry, handicraft specialties, as well as national geographic and cultural characteristics, to establish a specialty professional development, and establish their own brand of design culture. To establish design practice and academic exchange system in line with actual market demand, and community interaction with the local market, and adjust to the changing of the market situation flexibly. In such an atmosphere, the students can learn to use and improve self-confidence, self-employment and largely enhance the capacity. At the same time construction of campus culture should also be paid attention to, so that students get involved to build their own learning environment. To guide students to combine their expertise to participate in the cultural construction of the college, and play subjective awareness on campus, love the school, love the profession. 3 REFORM EVALUATION METHOD OF STUDENT ABILITY Evaluation methods of students’ professional competence should be appropriately changed, in the past, to assess student professional quality of professional courses just to see whether the every job is completed, the evaluation of students is just based on one course, does not reflect the students’ practical ability and comprehensive operating level. The new approach should be evaluated to see if the student has had the ability to enter the job. The formation of students ‘professional ability required to have a process, one examination cannot evaluate the students’ practical abilities. Evaluation of professional skills needs to inspect and evaluate all aspects of vocational skills. Most colleges now evaluate the ability of students without caring the demand for standard jobs, the needs of society and the market. Universities should take the form of school-enterprise cooperation, at the time of training and evaluation, let companies involve in, and evaluate students’ employability according to the company’s employment criteria. Holding a graduation design exhibition together with recruitment fairs and broadening employment channels to provide a platform for society to have the school a comprehensive understanding of the situation of graduates is worth exploring. Here, we carried out a bold attempt, integrating graduate design exhibition with recruitment can build up a bridge for graduates and enterprises, resulting in an overall broadening graduates channels. We invite many experts, leaders participate in our graduation exhibition. Each student stood in their booth to introduce their design through panels, mock-ups and design report, some students still put the computer in the booth, and directly have an interview to show their design skills. At the same time we will set up a recruitment spot and provide a booth for each enterprise to display images and attract talents. Thus, the employer contacts and exchanges with students face to face, and two-way choice is easy to reach employment intentions, at the same time, it can display the results of the school’s teaching, win the social reputation for the school, but also make a useful groundwork for future graduates.

4 STUDENTS ACTIVELY PARTICIPATING

TO IMPROVE THE EMPLOYABILITY AND

COMPETITIVENESS

We will integrate graduation design with compe tition, mainly due to the following considerations:

First, our graduate design is the most regulated and most universities’ systematic design for students throughout the learning stage, and is very consistent with the requirements of all levels of tournament, so after completing graduate design topics students can directly participate in the contest with just a lit tle modifying and typography. Second, the design competition is the comprehensive test of professional competence for students, it can promote their basic knowledge and expertise combined with outstanding training professional core competencies and compre hensive capabilities. Third, it is conducive to the cul tivation of students ‘innovative spirit and ability. The design contest Competition is not only professional competence of students, it is the battle of students’ innovative thinking. Finally, and most importantly, it is helpful to student employment, the use of the design competition can increase social awareness and competitive graduate professional level.

5 EMPLOYABILITY CONTENT ANALYSIS OF

ART MAJORS

There are a lot of student studies on employability in recent years, the concept has also undergone a concern from a purely personal knowledge, skills, personality traits and other human capital factors to concern for social capital (including family background factors, social relations, etc.), human capital process factors, lifelong learning, periodic characteristics and a com bination of factors. Employability of university stu dents in career choices and career development really a�ected by many factors. As for higher arts education, enhancing the employability of college students need a broad vision and ideas.

Connotation employability of Art Majors can be summarized as a core, and two dimensions. A core is a comprehensive capacity with professional knowl edge and skills, as well as occupation and seeking career-related personality traits and abilities, which is the core competence of Art Majors’ employabil ity, that is their human capital of employment. Two dimensions are namely the lateral and longitudinal plane: horizontal plane, includes Art Majors’ fam ily background, gender, social relations and social capital affecting the ability of employment; longitu

Xu Beihong’s artistic influence on current university education teaching of

Chinese painting art

Xiaofeng Kong

NanJing Normal University, Jiangsu, China

ABSTRACT: We explore the idea of current university teaching reform of Chinese art, the contemporary

Chinese painting cannot help with the status quo and reform. Because after all, the fundamental purpose of teaching Chinese painting is to train a large number of innovative awareness and skills of professionals in order to promote the prosperity and development of Chinese painting. So, therefore, to reform the teaching of Chinese painting not only should be synchronized with the innovation of Chinese painting, Chinese painting should be involved in the development and reform of a series of important topics discussed making forward-looking thinking. Starting from the basic characteristics of painting, we are to explore ways to image modeling and imagery observation method according to melting into the hold of the art teaching among Chinese pai.

KEYWORDS: Xu Beihong, Art Education Ideas, Universities, Art Painting

Xu Beihong was a pioneer of the new democratic revolution art movement; he was an outstanding landmark art educator and painter, as a master of modern art education and history. Art History Home

Professor Liu Ruquan has written that if integrated his noble character, excellent artistic skills, he is to revitalize the national art grand ambitions and four great contributions in arts education made to understand, sir, he helps us recognize ‘five • Four movements’ and he is the only one person. “As the

Chinese art of Chinese painting crown, since the Six

Dynasties, the Sui and Tang to the Song, there was a development of giant peak, the Ming and Qing dynasties increasingly it caught in the quagmire of retro. Mr. Xu has pointedly noted that” by the abuse,

Dong Qichang followed four kings unsolicited artifi cial landscape, it is a typical work in the 17th, 18th,

19 th century, and Wang Shigu was called Huasheng who has low energy and shameless, it is really very unimaginable. “This comment captures the seven teenth century Chinese painting on the decline since the root cause.

Xu Beihong (1895–1953), the Jiangsu Yixing

Qiting Bridge, the Chinese founder of modern art career, is an outstanding artist and art educator.

Xu Beihong was born poor; his childhood was with his father Xu Da Zhang to learn poetry painting.

In 1912, 17 years old, he could either draw teacher in

Yixing Women Teachers and other school junior. In

1916, he went into the Shanghai Fudan University

French Department work-study and self-study sketch.

In Japan, he was to study art in 1917, shortly after returning to Peking University Research painting instructor. In 1919, he went to study in France, in 1923 in the Paris National School of Fine Arts, studying painting, drawing, and traveled Western Europe, the concept of G study of Western art. In 1927, he returned, he served as Head of Shanghai Southland Institute of Arts, Central University professor of art, dean of Peking University School of Art. Since 1933, China has held art exhibitions and solo exhibitions in France, Belgium, Italy, Britain, Germany, and the Soviet Union. After the establishment of the People’s Republic of China, he was the Chairman of National Association of Fine Arts (now the China Artists Association), president of the Central Academy of Fine Arts and other staff, for the first session of the CPPCC National Committee representative. 1 XU BEIHONG AND REALISM PAINTING Xu Beihong’s painting practice effectively is implemented in order to improve the realism of Western ideas of Chinese painting. Early it is influenced by the Lingnan School founder Gao Jianfu, the latter returned from studying in France, when the European classical painting spread to China. His oil painting techniques of the realist realism and Chinese painting in the line drawing sketched intermediation one with both the Art Institute of rigorous style, but it also bears the national feelings of style. He has a teaching system and a set of the system, before the Cultural Revolution, the Chinese oil painting field occupies the mainstream art status.

Innovation and change in Chinese painting process, he advocated the use of Western realism artistic transformation of traditional Chinese paint ing, for which he paid a lifetime of effort. When Xu

Beihong studied in France, European art is under going unprecedented change with art new trend emerging, numerous and diverse forms of artistic expression, but his concern did not go beyond the early impressionist paintings.

Xu Beihong claimed to be “slightly through foreign art history”, this Chinese-style modesty is more ter rible than the average of arrogance. He admired the painting from realism to judge this proposition to prove his lack of a breadth and depth of Western art and cultural horizons. After all, in his time, the West has begun to reflect on literary and philosophical cri tique of modern civilization. Whether it is dominated by existential philosophical thought, or impression ist painting, expressionism, abstract art and Dadaism and other modernist art, both rational doctrine and industrial civilization showed great rebellion, as rational argument against modern civilization Weber tools and rational purpose, revealing that the human beings cannot achieve an absolute rational way of life.

It violates the civilized essence. Health consciousness exists. In this regard, Liang Qichao, Gu Hongming and Cai Yuanpei have full alertness such as per capita judgment, and Xu Beihong has just been a power house passionate painter, lack of historical vision and cultural vision thinkers.

2 FORMING OF ART EDUCATION

THOUGHTS OF XU BEIHONG

Xu Beihong chooses realism with its historical inev itability. This is a new trend at the beginning of this century. Learning is the “May Fourth” New Culture

Movement in the art world, of course, it responded. At that time, drawing on the scientific spirit of Western art was understood as the capture of Western realism.

Kang Youwei that we should take fine Kaneohe writ ten form to fill the short Shingo country. Chen Duxiu improved Chinese painting by the broken thing that cannot adopt Western painting realistic spiritual one;

Yuanpei also pushed for the best picture taken of the

China Ocean painting scenery realism, describing the plaster that was like field views, there are other human beings like Lu Xun and other remarks. It was in this era of scientism strong step into the painting’s atmosphere.

Era atmosphere is Xu Beihong’s selection exter nal realism, his personal growth and learning experiences are internal painting, he created this idea. Da Zhang Xu is the teacher of his childhood, his father studied painting. Da Zhang is a civil divi sion portrait; portraits of seeking similar future for Xu Beihong who is obsessed with realism into force. Xu Beihong’s painting early learned a lot from Wu Shihai’s copying works. Wu You is of the case of Miss China Pictorial art pioneer, depicting real life and current events; it is easy to understand painting style, which also helped Xu Beihong with realism formation. Xu Beihong is to get a realistic portrait of Kang’s favor and was close disciples, as Kang’s disciples, Xu Beihong’s painting is actually improved Kahn Reform on the continuation and development. 3 POSITIVE ART EDUCATION MEANING OF XU BEIHONG THOUGHTS Mr. Xu Beihong advocate lifetime to realism, with all non-combat realism, and the formation of a complete educational system. Not only is it living alone at the time the various factions with the Debate upper hand and art education is in the implementation of over half a century, changing the pattern of Chinese painting and drawing appearance, which created and influenced a whole generation of artists, the formation of a generation of mainstream style. “Servers are clever,” Xu Beihong is such fitter. In Xu Beihong era of life, China is among the internal and external problems, salvation is the only theme, “Art National Salvation” is the artist’s best wishes. The revolutionary propaganda art form requires realistic, Xu Beihong realism pedagogy is admired. Although the works of Xu Beihong had an own portrayal of real life, but his realist art education thought is the rise of China realism art foundation. 4 XU BEIHONG AND CENTRAL UNIVERSITY DEPARTMENT OF ART EDUCATION Xu Beihong was employed part-time Central University (then known as Jiangsu University) since about March, 1928. The professor began to officially leave the Central University in 1946, transferred to the National College of Art president of Peking. In the meantime, he just focused on teaching activities in the Department of the Central University of Art from 1928 to 1938, and from 1938–1946 his teaching activities were hosted by the art department of Lv. Lv is due Xu Beihong School of loyal successor, therefore, the 1938–1946 central University art education is still a continuation of Xu Beihong realism system. Xu Beihong helms 10 years, he used this platform of the Central University Department of Art implement and gradually he improved his realist art education ideas. Around 1929, National Government Ministry of Education sponsored the first National Art Exhibition and expanded “two Xu dispute”, the ultimate winner Xu Beihong realism, realism laid to lead the development of Chinese art mainstream oriented position.

Xu Beihong Art Education Thought for teach ing Chinese painting is to be re-understanding. Xu

Beihong in France has presided over the Central

University of Arts after returning Beijing College of

Art and the Central Academy of Fine Arts with the full implementation of realistic concepts and meth ods of college-style to sketch the shape of the basis of the transformation of Chinese painting. In the

1940s, because of the war, the need of realistic paint ing was paid attention to; in the 1950s, he advocated to be with the Soviet Union the “socialist realism” and as a whole, the implementation of the National

Art Education officially recognized as a sample. Xu

Beihong realism art education ideological had influ ence of the 20th century Chinese art world’s larg est arts genre. Xu Beihong used Western realism to improve traditional Chinese painting that is mainly reflected in figure painting and teaching, empha sizing the ability to depict real life, the promotion of traditional Chinese painting and the public needs to adapt to the social revolution that had a major impact. Xu Beihong realism portrayed system repre sentatives. Jiang Zhao sketched an appropriate com bination of light and shade structures to emphasize shape-line drawing characters; this approach with the traditional hook line drawing and filling methods has more in-depth characterization of expression and inner world.

Xu Beihong sketches for training to develop course content, teaching methods and systems, which is mainly based on his own sketches highly accom plished, in addition to a solid foundation, he has carved a unique approach: it is focused on light and dark boundary line (IndiCation), half-tone (Demiton) and joints (Articulation) site characterization, relax ing, weakening, and tracing other parts omitted. He was both light and dark parts of the boundary line with the joint both simultaneously, which is consid ered vital body parts, it is the key to determine the shape and texture of Hugh. Human, portrait sketch

Mr. Xu, the boundary line between light and dark, semi-tone and joints behaved most specific, most full and unequivocal.

Xu Beihong’s black and white faceted shape the body “but to take simple, for harmony, not yet trivial and loss of fine.” He advocated and refined choice, simple outlines, highlights the main, the Department omits unnecessary force to avoid the cumbersome, so it is with three-dimensional works, strong sense of weight and sense of space and light, texture is a very prominent, vivid image.

Xu Beihong’s sketch training methods is unlike the Western end of the century court painters sketch teaching and Clain’s. In the early 1950s, he saw the student clutching a handful of sharpened pencil painting, thought it was a waste of time, it is less effective, he said:. “Realistically, it feels boring” and he takes many of these pictures, trying to convince students not to pursue the honor appearance of hair loss effect. Xu Beihong realism requires faithful to the spirit of the object, but firmly opposed to “follow suit” naturalistic approach. 5 EFFECTIVE GOAL SETTING ART TEACHING Effective teaching goals set for improving teaching art teaching, art undoubtedly plays a multiplier effect. Art teaching goal setting should focus on students’ produce art hobby, according to the characteristics of the arts curriculum, teaching the art of teaching goal setting requires considering in three dimensions, including processes and methods, knowledge and ability around, attitudes and values, but each lessons have no necessity to be taken all these three points into account. Because a class time is limited, that is not easy for students are able to grasp little knowledge. Therefore, in terms of art teaching goal, it is set to seize the main goal. Effective goal setting art teaching is also reflected in the systematic teaching objectives, a textbook gets our hands on, teaching objectives for each lesson should have a rough outline. The teaching goal setting should be gradual, progressive approach to the task of teaching art. Instructional design cannot be stereotyped, cannot rely on reference copy, or every time the same lesson plans. Art teaching needs each lesson to be changed, and strives wonderful classroom, teaching effectiveness, which requires art teachers consider teaching objectives carefully and design depicting vivid picture. Goal setting should focus on the art of teaching so that students develop a lifelong pursuit of art; they can participate in arts activities, oriented, comprehensive, sustainable development provides a good artistic accomplishment for them, the goal of teaching the arts must be based on the complete personality development of students. 6 SUMMARY The artist, Xu Beihong is a great painter of the Chinese people and an excellent art educator. He had great success in the plastic arts; art education in China has made important contributions. Xu Beihong life events in art and art education are integral part of China’s “Four and Five Movement” New Culture Movement, he was the standard-bearer of China’s new art movement and founder. In the 1920s and 1930s, Chinese art was in vivacious decadent, chaotic state, without new art gestation bud. Then Dong Qichang and four kings affect

Chinese painting. Mr. Lu Xun once summed up the situation prevailing art in two sentences, one is that new art is without foundation; the second is that it is still detained in three thousand years old bolt orange inside. Xu Beihong is shipped as the volun teer and his artistic ideals outset the nation rise and fall with the suffering of the people together. He saw the glory of the original history of Chinese culture, with glorious heritage. It just does not pay attention nearly a century portraits, and nearly three hundred years of the prevalence of inherited climbing imita tion of Phoenix, lazy and backwards, making things increasingly decadent painted. This continues for a long time with a glorious history and glorious her itage of Chinese culture. There is a great danger

Talk about graduate student of educational teacher expanding the path of employment in the local comprehensive university: An example of Chinese language and literature in my school

Shumin Ren

School of Literature, Beihua University, Jilin, China

ABSTRACT: With the increasing amount of college graduates every year, the employer needs structural contradiction, traditional college graduates employment difficulties. Chinese Language and Literature is as a strong tradition of employing facing unprecedented challenges. Based on the severe employment situation,

Teacher Education in Local Comprehensive Universities need to start improving their own quality of graduates, and actively guide the graduates to change jobs ideas, updating the concept of employment, and use existing resources, and actively expand employment channels, and explore new ideas and open up new market, employ ment path is becoming more diverse to ensure employment stability and sustainable development.

KEYWORDS: Teacher Education; Local Comprehensive University Chinese Language and Literature;

Employment path

In recent years, the number of college graduates increases every year, 2010 it was 6.3 million, in 2011 it increases to 6.6 million and in 2012 to 6.8 million, 2013 7000000, 2014 session of the number of grad uates is new highs, reaching 727 million people, and it is called “the hardest job in the history of season”, virtually employment of university students will bring tremendous pressure. The Ministry of Education said that in 2014 the total graduates further increase the pressure, while the employment needs of structural contradiction, graduates concept still further change.

Minister of Education Yuan Guiren stressed the need to get rid of the impact mechanism of the institu tional barriers to the employment of college gradu ates; Deepen the comprehensive reform of education, enhance the adaptability of higher education and social needs; sound employment policy, service system and market system, strengthen the govern ment actively promoting the expansion of employ ment public functions.

Employment pressure, on the one hand, is that the social production is suppressed, reducing labor; on the other hand, it is a huge number of graduates.

At present, the traditional employment difficulties college graduates has become an indisputable fact that, accordingly, how to expand the employability of university students has become a real problem of common concern to all colleges and universities. Now, that is my school Chinese language and litera ture, for example, we explore what extend teachers’ professional graduate education employment reality paths in local comprehensive university. 1 STATUS QUO OF EMPLOYMENT OF STUDENTS MAJORING IN CHINESE LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE Our school Chinese language and literature teacher education undergraduate education o�ers more than 30 years, and it has become a more significant professional features and sound discipline system. However, as a local university, the school’s Chinese language and literature teacher education in the severe employment situation has encountered unprecedented new problems. Traditional veteran professional Chinese Language and Literature is having a more profound historical heritage and also a strong tradition of professional employment. However, with the continuous enrollment university, in a market economy, the impact of competition in Chinese Language and Literature graduate employment is increasingly fierce. At the same time, with the adjustment of national economic development policies, the social demand for Polytechnic technical talent continues to increase, which increases the pressure on employment of Chinese Language and Literature in the invisible, Chinese language and literature graduate began facing choosing an awkward situation. Since 2007, third-party research firm educational consulted with international standards -

MyCOS (MyCOS), by means of statistical and scientific system of labor economics and sustained employment status and ability to work six months after graduating from college, students were national survey research, the data and research authority, third party impartiality has been widely recognized by the community. 2009, MyCOS issued “China Graduate

Employment Report”, which is the first professional employment for professional assessment, the report shows: “2008 has not yet up to six months after grad uation employment 10 undergraduate professional persons unemployed for 10.75 million, accounting for

35.9% of undergraduate amount of unemployment, which has eight professional and also the 2007 ses sion of the largest number of unemployed graduates are in professional: law, computer science and tech nology, English, international economics and trade, business administration, Chinese Language and

Literature, electronic and Information Engineering, accounting. “Chinese Language and Literature was listed as one of the first undergraduate colleges and universities are not promising. Beginning in 2010, written by Michael thinking Institute, Social Sciences

Documentation Publishing House published “China

Graduate Employment Report” (Employment Blue

Book) for five consecutive years to the profession as a “yellow card” professional (large amount of unem ployment, employment low rates, lower monthly income and low job satisfaction, professional).

2 IN PAST FIVE YEARS, ANALYSIS OF

THE EMPLOYMENT SITUATION OF OUR

SCHOOL CHINESE LANGUAGE AND

LITERATURE TEACHER EDUCATION

GRADUATES

2.1 Overall employability of graduates continues to increase and the employment path is becoming more diverse In recent years, as China’s increasingly tense forms of employment, “employment” has been broken in the traditional sense, after graduating the normal students engaged in teaching positions less and less, of course, the cause of this phenomenon is due to teaching jobs increasingly saturated, instead, more of College

Graduates chose apply for civil service, career series, and some went to the enterprise, as well as chose to start their own businesses, and flexible employment.

Chinese Language and Literature Teachers class is as a veteran professional in the past, we have focused on the production of qualified personnel training secondary school teachers in the language classes, students focus on literary quality, teaching skills such as literacy and skills. Although education in teaching practice has also taken some measures the ability to train students in other areas (civil service exam, exam transferring students, village o�cials, etc.), but it did not set the appropriate course in the teaching process, so they do not get enough attention, but it also failed to achieve the desired results. In recent years, community colleges and universities after the presentation application-oriented personnel training objectives, the school through reflection and discussion gradually cultivate students’ ability to write other aspects of personnel training programs, and set some appropriate curriculum in the teaching program, they are intended to form a complete set of training model to adapt to a wide range of community development needs. In addition to teaching students, they need to strengthen the ability of the professional skills of education, and civil servants and public institutions examinations related capabilities. Thereby strengthening the diverse student employability training, to a certain extent, is to broaden the students’ employment opportunities, enhance the students’ adaptability and employability employment, and improve the students’ employment rate and the quality of employment. 2.2 In the last five years, employment situation of our school Chinese language and literature teacher education undergraduate student All along, under the correct leadership of the Party committees and employment at the school, hospital employment rate of Chinese Language and Literature Education consecutive years is of steady improvement. College adheres to the correct location, full participation, forming a “college leadership overall responsibility of all teachers to participate, the graduating class instructor is responsible for implementation of the” graduates working system, thereby ensuring that comprehensively promote employment work. Through our hospital from 2010 to 2014 session of the Chinese Language and Literature Education graduates comparative analysis of the employment situation, you can grasp the basic situation of our hospital professional graduate employment trends, to provide a theoretical basis for further improving employment mechanism and deepening the teaching reform improve school quality, and enable graduates to meet the needs of the new situation of development. From the direction of the graduates choosing employment industry point of view, our graduates have diversified employment trend, located in educational institutions, government agencies, institutions, companies among these types. However, the table can be seen in our hospital in recent years Chinese Language and Literature graduate education to the teaching units proportion of employment is not high, some enterprises graduates choose to become a hot spot, while engaging in professional counterparts is not much.

2.3 Real problems faced by teacher education graduate in employment

North China University Chinese Language and

Literature was founded in Jilin Normal University during one of my school predecessors. As a tradi tional normal specialty, for decades, society has trained more than 5,000 people by teachers. In 1999, our school Chinese Language and Literature ushered in an unprecedented challenge - combined school and enrollment. The Professional Normal University is from the trunk to the under part of a comprehen sive university, professional and experienced Chinese language and literature is ignored, Normal features gradually are diluted, student employment is not like before when approved by the school from recruiting to be watched, which makes a comprehensive univer sity teacher education professional under local caught in an awkward situation. In addition, enrollment in the university context, traditional Chinese Language and

Literature Education is by the job market, geograph ical space, educational level, professional settings and other factors limited serious imbalance between supply and demand, there is oversupply of graduates.

The original training mode allows employment space shrinking. The reason for this situation is multifac eted, although the language is the main subject of primary and secondary schools, but teachers become saturated, and therefore, jobs, all types of schools o�ered fewer opportunities for college students along with professional counterparts in employment will narrow. In addition, the employment pressure led to a large number of Chinese professional non-normal students in the education sector, crowding out normal students of employment space, further deteriorating the employment situation normal students. Also, pro fessional setting at the University of touch is with the actual situation, they lack appropriate teaching experience of teachers, textbooks archaic knowledge, theories and teaching activities are still around books, innovation speed and strength are weakened, they are unable to adapt to the pace of primary and secondary education reform radically. In the market background, how to adapt to the restructuring and development of society, to achieve diversification of employment and student disciplinary scientific development of the perfect combination; how closely the labor market and employment facts to respond positively to the call of national policy, and services are based on local economic and social; how to play the teacher guiding force, the driving force, the role and function of the catalyst, the employability of students with diverse employment opportunities to broaden and improve the quality of employment has become an important topic in local comprehensive university teacher education professional development. 3 THE MAIN MEASURES OF TEACHER EDUCATION GRADUATES EMPLOYMENT EXPANSION PATH IN LOCAL COMPREHENSIVE UNIVERSITY 3.1 Strengthen education of development plan of teacher education graduate Help students clear learning objectives during the university and enhance student self-education, self-awareness and ability to manage, as soon as possible to form career awareness. Schools, teaching institutions, actively carry out various forms of Xue Gongbu door graduates development planning educational activities to enhance awareness of the employment of graduates, correct attitude of employment graduates, thereby laying the ideological foundation

Employment chart of Chinese Language and Literature Education students in the past five years. 2010 session 2011 session 2012 session 2013 session 2014 session the number of graduation 226 196 177 124 117

The public servant 21 17 19 16 11

The education department 66 63 59 43 28 institution 14 16 8 7 5

State-owned enterprises 7 7 5 5 3

Other enterprises 57 27 34 26 20

To enter a higher school 13 12 21 12 10

The actual signing 165 130 125 97 67

Flexible employment 19 30 24 14 21

The employment number 197 172 170 111 98

The number of to be employed 29 12 7 13 19

The employment rate 87.17% 93.90% 96% 89.52% 83.76% of good jobs for graduates. Schools and colleges actively guide students so that graduates have a relatively clear employment orientation, objective analysis of reality, thus maintaining peace of mind.

Encourage students to fit their posts up, grass-roots units, to be not too ambitious.

3.2 Correctly guide the transformation of teacher education graduates employment concept

Employment is a dynamic optimization process management, and in the past many students believe that something civil service exam, to enterprises and institutions it is the real road to employment, schools for the current college graduates careers, employ ment psychological misunderstanding opened a career guidance lessons to help students understand the needs and development of the job market, they analyze career development prospects, in addition to guide liberal arts students learn professional knowl edge, there are still higher requirements according to career development to enhance their level. Among them, some courses are related to the how to guide students to establish a correct concept of employment, correct employment mentality. In fact, the value of life is diverse, so is the choice of employment, they also should vary to decide what for their own is the best. Many times students feel professional and want to learn the occupation biased, in fact, it is only a means to get a professional capacity, universities are engaged in is not simply professional education, including vocational education and employment education. College of Chinese Language and

Literature graduate employment rate of basic educa tion and the national employment rate unchanged, but one signing rate declined year by year, it is replaced by a flexible employment and self-employment. This shows that the concept of employment of students began to shift, more pragmatic.

3.3 Make greater efforts to train teachers in teacher education major vocational training

Driven by the diversification trend of normal student employment, part of the College Graduates subjec tively believe teachers’ professional skills training on their own do not mean much, it is not necessary.

They believe that “the words of a word,” etc. Normal vocational basic training of teachers can not choose to provide them with an unexpected career advantage, therefore, part of the normal production had indi�er ent even a boycott of emotions. We, as a professional teacher education must strengthen the importance of teacher training in vocational skills of the student population, and urge the students in class and after

Application of constructivism in English teaching

Chunlin Liang

Guangxi Police Academy, Nanning, Guangxi, China

ABSTRACT: Constructivism is an important branch of cognitive theory. It is a leading theory of education at the end of the 20th century and the early 21th century. Language itself is a kind of social construct, learning a language is construct personal knowledge. Under the guidance of constructivist learning theory, English teach ing has transformed into a student-centered self-construct mode. It created a new situation that students can receive the overall development and personality development through situation setting, collaborative learning and meaning construction.

KEYWORDS: Constructivism; English teaching; Cognitive theory

1 CONSTRUCTIVIST LEARNING THEORY

AND ENGLISH LEARNING

Constructivism, an important branch of cognitive theory, also known as structuralism, is the further development of behaviorism to cognitive theory.

Constructivist view of learning stresses that learn ing is an activity and situation closely linked to self- operational activities. In the process, knowledge, content and capacity cannot be trained or absorbed except for being constructed. However, the construc tion process is always based on existing structures of knowledge instead of starting from scratch. According to the previous cognitive structures, students selected external information carefully for the current things meaning construction. When we use our prior knowl edge, it is not extracted from memory absolutely but reconstructed according to the variability of specific examples. Constructivist theory has special signifi cance for language learning. Language learning is a process that we constructed our personal knowledge.

Language itself is a social construction, and it has both the characteristics of the construction and the attribution of society. Piaget believed that language structure includes three characteristics: integrity, conversion and self-adjustment. It will change the original structure continuously and formed a new structure. And the newly formed structure can partici pate in another round of construction to create a new construction. Actually, English learning is a kind of skill learning. Learners themselves take the initiative to choose, assimilate, accommodate to make the new input materials interact with the original one and then formed a new structure. Language commanding is the result of learners’ active construction instead of passive assimilation, the process from input to absorb is full of learners’ active construction. While the result of absorption is a new structure which the new and original information intact with each other. Learners master a language is a continuous process of construction because they are always contacted by all kinds of language materials. The innate characteristics of constructivism of English subject determine that the language study must have the traits of construction. 2 THE IMPLEMENTATION OF CONSTRUCTIVISM IN COLLEGE ENGLISH TEACHING Using the method of situating sitting in class to motivate the students’ enthusiasm of learning means you should set similar or relevant situations according to the teaching content. In an English class, teachers should try to set the questions which are close to the real life to motivate students’ enthusiasm of learning. When students are familiar with or interested in these issues, they will be happy to express their views. If you just lectured the knowledge from the textbook, it will make the knowledge become very abstract and very boring, it is obvious that the study will become very monotonous and boring. When setting problems, you can use some auxiliary teaching tools, such as objects, pictures to help your teaching. It will be easier for students to learn at the time students can associate with the related things. In this process, teachers should encourage students to think independently and collaborate with each other. In addition, they should use the elicitation methods rather than indoctrination methods to guide students to find answers to the questions and master the knowledge.

3 THE ORIENTATION OF TEACHERS

AND STUDENTS UNDER

CONSTRUCTIVIST THEORY

Under the guidance of constructivist theory, great changes have taken place in the role of teach ers and students in the traditional teaching model.

Constructivism emphasizes that in teaching, the role of teachers has transformed from traditional knowl edge installer into a student learning facilitator and mentor. At the same time, teachers are the cooperator in class. Teachers play leading roles in teaching and it is no longer the center of it. In this kind of teach ing method, teachers must create a certain learning situation and ask questions to encourage students to discuss, analyze, and finally solve problems inde pendently. When necessary, teachers will be required to provide some guidance and related information.

In the teaching process, teachers should try their best to stimulate the enthusiasm of students and organize the students to cooperate with others in the form of groups. For questions or errors that occurred during the discussion, teachers should give a timely cor rection and guidance so that students can continue their meaning construction by using the knowledge they have mastered. This teaching thought does not undermine the status of teachers in the teaching point. Instead, it has put forward higher requirements for teachers. Teachers should not only have the abil ity to lecture the knowledge of textbooks or extracurricular, but also have strong organization and coordination skills so that students can have positive initiative in class.

4 THE DIFFERENCES BETWEEN

TRADITIONAL TEACHING MODE AND

CONSTRUCTIVIST TEACHING MODE

Traditional teaching theory believed that education is the reproduction and description of teachers towards the objective world. Traditional teaching, gives pri ority to “teach”, is “objectivism” “determinism” and

“cramming method of teaching. It attached much importance to the certainty of knowledge, and denied students ‘initiative and put the students’ conscious ness as a piece of paper and a mirror. The student’s learning process is to wait for the teachers to use a rational conclusion to make the empty bucket filled with or print the beautiful picture onto the paper. In the teaching process, the traditional mode of teaching took the pattern of pedagogy, students were always accepted the knowledge passively. The classroom was completely dominated by teachers, students’ main task is to digest and understand textbook knowl edge transferred by the teacher. Traditional teaching theory overemphasized the authority of teachers and textbooks. It a�ected the students’ independence, autonomy and judgments seriously, separated the connection of knowledge construction of the old and the new script and ignored the students’ individual di�erences in cognitive ability and inhibited the initiative of the students’. Learning under the traditional teaching mainly happened to the individuals or the form of individuals’ learning activities. You cannot get a lot of important benefits arising from collaborative learning. Obviously, this traditional teacher- centered teaching method is against to cultivate students’ ability to cognize and solve practical problems, is not conducive to students’ divergent thinking, critical thinking and creative thinking ability, go against to the formation of innovation capability and the growth of creative talents. 5 ENGLISH TEACHING UNDER THE GUIDANCE THE CONSTRUCTIVISM THEORY The traditional English teaching is a teacher- centered mode. It overemphasized on grammar, vocabulary and knowledge of textbooks and do not put the students at the important position, not to mention reflecting the scene of English learning. The process of English teaching is mainly a form of unilateral output, learners learned passively. The concrete manifestations, one is that although learners in the learning process can be naturally accept knowledge naturally, they cannot think back on what they have learned from memory. Another is that the traditional form of teaching ignored the needs of the learner to explore the psychological. Curiosity is the inherent needs of learners, but the teachers just let the learner to accept ready-made knowledge and hardly consider how learners acquire knowledge, let alone consider the generate questions explored in the learning process. Thirdly, it rarely considered learners learning strategies and emotional attitude. Learning is a process, in this process, and the learner not only should use the learning strategies, but also learn to control their own feelings. Traditional teaching focus is only on learning outcomes with little regard to acquiring knowledge for learners. Some teachers, regardless of whether learners are interested in the subject, just force the students to accept it. As time pass by, learners will naturally rebellious towards learning and with this kind of psychological consciousness, learners will gradually lose interest in learning English, and then give up learning. Constructivism emphasis on collaborative learning and believed that understanding is formed by individuals’ construction, but it should result in understanding and learning between teachers and students, between students, teaching media and teaching content and interaction, namely, interactive collaboration is to activate the old schema and con struct a more accurate and comprehensive linguistic meaning to improve and deepen the meaning of the theme of Construction. Through collaborative learn ing environment, students’ interests has been fully mobilized, thinking ability has been well inspired, wisdom can be shared by the whole class group, which groups together to complete the entire learn ing the meaning of what they have learned to build.

Learning is a social experience. Individuals first think independently and generate understanding of the issues, and then to build common meaning through communication and collaboration with oth ers to test his ideas, and finally, through the review of common sense in a larger study population to con struct a collective sense that can be shared. The three phases of the activity reflect the social construction of knowledge process. Meanwhile, the establish ment of collaborative groups not only improves the students’ enthusiasm for learning, but also improves the opportunities for generative learning.

As learning is an active process of construction, learners are not passive recipients of external infor mation, but active cognition structure based on the previous selective attention and perception of exter nal information to construct the meanings of current things, and thus the process of teaching must be in the students-centered form, meaning students are active constructors of knowledge. Throughout the learning process, teachers mainly play the role as the organizers, mentors and helpers in the teaching process. They have the duty to motivate the enthusi asm of the students and let them learning initiatively.

Multimedia computer use in college English teaching has changed the monotony of the traditional teaching model. Students changed their form of study, which is passive enough, and through the bilateral com munication, they participate in the teaching process actively. Multimedia teaching, through sound, image, text and the interfaces of animation, increased the students’ auditory, visual and other sensory stimuli.

This kind of vivid and solid teaching model not only improved the students’ interest and memory, but also provides a convenient self-study actually. Students are unlimited by the time and space to control of their own learning through self-test feedback according to their levels, abilities and needs to choose different levels of learning materials.

English teaching is a process that students con struct meaning actively. American linguist Larry

Selinker, put forward the theory of “intermediary language” in 1972. And he believed that students con struct their own language structure when they see the language materials and then produce the system of an intermediary language by induction and deduction.

This system is not only different from the student’s mother tongue, but also different from the target language they have learned. The main feature is that the system has transitivity and openness. With the deepen understanding of the target language system of students, the grammar of intermediary language is constantly being rewritten, updated and moved closer to the target language syntax. When students need to adjust to a new language, they should input original language knowledge to make the new information integrated in the system. It explains why foreign language learning is an individual mechanism based on the original language and foreign language information on the ongoing process of self-constructed. In English teaching, teachers should change the situation that students accepted knowledge passively. They should give full play to their roles in class and let the teaching mode transformed from “knowledge transfer” to “comprehensive ability cultivation”. First, we should stimulate students’ motivation in English learning. Motivation affects the interest and quality of the students’ English learning. Success largely depends on the motivation of learning English. Student motivation in learning can be divided into integrative motivation and instrumental motivation. Motivated students with integrative motivation can establish a long-term goal and take “I want to learn” as their learning attitude to participate in various language activities actively. It will be easier for them to study a second language well. While students who have instrumental motivation to learn English for the reason that English is a required course, their purposes are to pass the English exam and meet the social demands on students. Although the latter’s goal is not long-lasting than the former and their motivation may be disappearing when they have achieved their utilitarian goal. They realized that learning English is closely related to their vital interests, these students will be more active to participate in some learning activities. Second, guide students to use math cognitive strategies. 6 SUMMARY Teachers should provide students with complex and real problems. They not only need to find out these questions themselves, but also need to realize that a complicated question has several di�erent answers. Teachers should encourage students to use multiple perspectives to solve the problem, which is obviously anastomoses with creative teaching activities. Teachers also should pay more attention to students’ preview, clearly telling students the requirement of looking up new words and phrases before class. On the basis of understanding the main content of the article, students should underline the di�culties and questions appears in the textbooks, discover the characteristics of text structure and have an evaluation or doubt on the author’s point of view and so on. Looking up the relations between the topic and the characteristics of time of the humanity, philosophy, art, value, and con struct, ideology and its relationship with the subject, which are firmly connected with the characteristics of the times and themes, is also required. Teachers can also set aside some guidance prep questions before class, make students relate the topic with their old experience before teacher’s conduct, as well as construct knowledge. In college English teaching, following the concept of constructivist learning, the application of information and network technology, learners can not only be “free” self-learning, but also but also can exchange and achieve a variety of collab orative learning with peoples from di�erent places, at di�erent ages, gender, ethnic background knowl edge and even in di�erent groups. Only when the full enthusiasm of students’ English learning initiative played, the independent learning and interaction with others in the scenario activities, the acquisi tion of language learning and language skills closely together, can college English teaching reform truly

On assistance of ideological and political education for academic ethos construction

Yacong Liu

College of Chinese Language and Culture, Beihua University

ABSTRACT: Academic ethos construction is a long-term cultural project. In order to solve the current problem in academic ethos, the working concept of ideological and political education should be changed. Regard aca demic ethos construction as the focus of ideological and political education. Have a further improvement in working mechanism that relate to the academic ethos. Try to improve the working methods. Build a united working team elaborately. In this way, establish a good cultural ecology and let the students grow healthily.

KEYWORDS: Ideological and political; Education; Academic ethos; Construction

1 INTRODUCTION

Academic ethos is a kind of good cultural atmosphere of meticulous scholarship for a university. It is also moral standards and conscious behavior to teachers and students. A good academic ethos in the univer sity can not only assure and facilitate the fulfillment of high-quality study tasks, but also can be benefi cial to amplify and enrich the spiritual plane, so as to impel the personality to the direction of nobility and perfection. It can be said that academic ethos con struction is an important task to build a fine spiritual homeland and to cultivate students’ spirits. Therefore, it is emphasized by universities. “How doing a good job in academic ethos construction” has been a hot topic for many years. And di�erent scholars have put forward di�erent opinions. This thesis will discuss academic ethos construction from the viewpoint of the assistance of ideological and political education.

The so-called “academic ethos” here, adopt a narrow meaning, merely means “students’ habits of learn ing”. The author will also learn more from specialists.

2 MAIN PROBLEMS OF ACADEMIC ETHOS

IN UNIVERSITIES

Needless to say, despite every college and univer sities are always persist firmly in strengthening the academic ethos construction. And they are certain to make a good performance. However, overview the current academic ethos, there are still many problems that cannot live up to the hard work that has been done so long.

First, the learning goal has “lost in mist”. The so-called learning goal is that the students have definite behavior direction. They know clearly about what they need and what they want. This needs to trigger their motivation. The motivation will enforce their behavior. This is the base of academic ethos construction. Overview of the current reality, students’ learning goal can be concluded as “being lost in mist”. That is, they are very confused and do not know what to do, or very utilitarian in studying their courses. The reason for “being lost in mist” is the absence of their dreams and goals. Many students regard entering university as the most important dream or an ultimate goal to pursue. However, after entering university, the contrast between the realistic university and ideal university, lead to the lacking of interest and motivation in the study. Having realized that entering university is merely an intervening goal and have to face the pressure of finding a job, the students’ studying goal deviate to hunting a good job and make a lot of money. Therefore, some students do not care about refining on study, but turn their eye on whether they can find a good job by studying their major. Those students, whose major is unsatisfactory in finding a job, will lose their confidence in life. The idea of “uselessness of study” will possess the public voice. No matter their “being in mist” at the beginning of entering the university, or their “pragmatism” based on hunting a job, their intention is very utilitarian. The state of “being lost in mist” shows the confusion that their goal has realized after entering the university. Yet “pragmatism” shows the utilitarian goal that pursuit of comfort and material desire. As the situation like this, what the academic ethos is needless to say. Second, the interest of study faint day by day. The lack of learning goals of students directly influences the learning interest, which lead to the insufficient of learning motivation. The fainting interest in study is an important reason for the falling of the academic ethos in university.

Interest of learning is the original motivation of study. The indifference in the study, weaken the internal motivation of students. The students do not focus on the content of the class anymore. The absen tees increase from time to time; while the interest of study nonacademic deviation is more universal. For instance, being addicted in cyber games, indulges in love, being enthusiastic in communicative activities and focus on the second degree and so on. In addi tion, the students that can be selected as outstanding individuals are most student cadres with low perfor mance in the study. This result in the unhealthy ethos, like exploiting the connection and valuing interests, pervades in the campus. All this would lead to the increasing of “inferior scholars” and the decreasing of “super scholars” gradually.

The reasons for the lack of student interest are multiple. Except for “national education reforms lag behind the requirement of social economics to tal ents, teaching content is obsolete, teaching method is single. It fails to arouse students’ enthusiasm to study.” The outdated and insufficient basic experi mental instruments cannot fulfill the cultivation of students’ practical skill is internal factor; in the man agement of students, a system which the evaluation of academic ethos is not sophisticated. This result in the situation that the industrious students cannot get award and due encourage; and these students may be dispirited. This is the external factor. These factors lead to students’ interests faint gradually.

Third, the studying attitude is shiftlessness. The studying attitude takes on the approval of signifi cance of study, the pursuit for learning goal and the interest and emotion to knowledge. It can be seen that learning attitude is in related to learning goals and interests. Learning attitude is restricted by learning goals and interests. In the aspect of academic ethos, the fainting of the former two factors will be certain to influence learning attitude.

Learning goals and interest determine learning attitude. Under the situation of “being lost in mist” and interest decreasing, students’ learning attitude is being in the lower atmosphere. The demonstration is as follows: lazy behavior, lack of diligent studying spirit; be shiftless to courses, ambition decreases; sleeping in the class, absence become a universal phe nomenon. It is reported by a questionnaire of Anhui

University of Technology that among the options of

“evaluate your studying situation”, 43.9% students chose “dealing with it casually. When examination comes, make a pop hard work”. Pass is everything.

Passing the final exam is the students’ attitude to study. The shiftless attitude to study reflect the students’ wrong outlook on life and values. Waste time shows the absence of responsibility for life and society. Attitude determines behavior. Correct the attitude to study is a premise for academic ethos construction. Forth, the lax discipline of learning. Learning discipline is a mechanical insurance of study order, and also external factors in the formation of good academic ethos. It emphasizes the consistency of students’ learning behavior. Strict learning discipline is propitious to maintain a formal learning circumstance and learning order. It is a strong guarantee to the formation of good academic ethos. A disorder learning discipline manifested in: disobedience of teaching order; being late or leaving early; sleeping in class or listening to music, reading books unrelated to class and fiddling with a cell phone; violating rules and disciplines of university, intentionally playing truant, being absent in self-study class, even going shopping, playing table games and amorism during formal lessons; ignoring academic honesty, copy homework and cheat in the exam. If learning discipline is lax, the studying order will be surely affected. The laxity of learning discipline is result from ill-regulated management. While the slack discipline caused by students’ weak consciousness. Therefore, strengthening management, establishing better learning discipline by compulsion, enhancing education, cultivating students’ self-conscious obedience to regulation is a significant part in academic ethos construction. Fifth, learning methods are obsolete. Scientific learning methods are a key to form good academic ethos. An appropriate learning method will avoid detours and generate a strong feeling of success, in which way increase the consciousness of good academic ethos. The teaching of learning method is a weak part in university teaching. In the process of teaching, teachers usually emphasis theoretical conveying, the method of “teaching a man to fish” is usually ignored. The education from elementary school to high school that students received is examination-oriented education. Their learning method is also used to deal with examination. The rigidness of thinking mode, the obsolescence of learning method, cannot adapt to university study. This adds a new confusion to students facing with study. If they cannot adjust their learning mode, grasp new learning method, and inherit the rigid learning method and thinking mode in middle school, they will be sure to feel perplexed and lost their interest in study gradually. The ancient maxim “teaching a man to fish is superior to giving a man fish” is still helpful in modern academic ethos construction. Teachers should pay special attention to the teaching method when he or she gives lessons, especially the new means and new ways bring by developing science and technology.

Methods just like tools. With effective tools, the task will be completed with minimum fuss and maximum efficiency. Students’ confidence improves, good aca demic ethos will spread.

3 THE ASSISTENCE OF IDEOLOGICAL AND

POLITICAL EDUCATION

The problems appear above demonstrate that learn ing goals and learning attitude is the key. That is the so-called goals trigger interest and attitude determines success or failure. Help students to establish correct periodical goals of life and regulate the attitude to turning point in life. It is the theme of ideological and political education. Ideological and political educa tion should assist to the academic ethos construction.

3.1 Regard academic ethos construction as theme, renew working concept

Ideological and political education is multiplex.

The working focus often adjusted along with polit ical needs and situation varies. This is the dynamic feature dynamic of ideological and political work.

For instance, since the 18th National Congress of the CPC, it requires that strongly enhance the con struction of socialist core values. The ideological and political work focuses on it naturally. Implement central spirit and do a good job in construction actively. The characteristic of changing over time in ideological and political work improve reactivity and adaptability. While it also leads to the unstable of working focus. So someone holds that ideological and political work in a university like a tide. When it comes, it is dealt with. When it leaves, it is ignored.

Academic ethos construction in university is a long-term task. The feature of stability requires long unremitting efforts. How to make ideological and political work to become assistance to academic ethos construction? The author argues that renew working concept, establish academic ethos construction as theme and make best use of the situation to do the work well. It still takes socialist core values as an example, socialist core values have ample connota tions. It can give an appropriate explanation with the academic ethos construction. So both the core social ist values and academic ethos construction can be put into practice, creating a win-win situation.

The concept of academic ethos construction as theme is essentially a dialectics of meeting changes with constancy. Time changes, theme fixes. Under new circumstance, assist academic ethos construc tion with new concept and new content, which will surely make the construction keep up with times. Ideological and political work in university can build a firm working focus. 3.2 Promote working method, regard academic ethos construction as starting point Launch the ideological and political work is mainly communicating with students. Yet the students of post 90s are more and more di�cult to deal with. This has become a common sense of teaching sta�. The reason for the di�culties in ideological and political work is that the starting point is unclear and working method is inappropriate. In fact, taking ideological and political education as the assistance of academic ethos construction can be a reasonable starting point. According to the features of di�erent individuals, it can adopt a new working method, which is helpful to ideological and political work. At the center of students, there are many problems in a study which is associated with academic ethos. Ideological and political work starts from advocating good academic ethos, solve the problems and contradictions among students, let students realize the teachers’ dual concern about life and study, guide them to recognize self-problem and help them make progress. In order to give a better assistance of ideological and political education to academic ethos, working method should be improved. The ways of rigid supervision and inspection is expected to be replaced by the new humane method. Only if the students are being respected, can they accept instruction pleased. Appropriate working methods are positive energy. And passing positive energy is the ultimate target of academic ethos construction. 3.3 Focus on academic ethos construction, improve working mechanism Academic ethos construction needs both hardware and software facilities. From the view of assistance of ideological and political education, regarding academic ethos construction as a cure and improving the working mechanism is the starting point and home to ideological and political education. The nature of working mechanism is the internal relationship and effective function of working programs. It determines what and how to do. Focusing on academic ethos construction and establishing a better mechanism of assistance of ideological and political education is also supposed from what and how to do. What to do is discussed firstly. Working program is the structure of working content. Ideological and political education work is supposed to aim at the fundamental content and main problems to determine its working program. For example, set educational content in accordance to grades and carry out education of academic ethos; organize education of the academic ethos according to the types and fea tures of different students; in response to social influ ence, insist education of academic ethos and so on. So as to let the ideological and political education work becomes a streamline and a workflow. And the objects will be specified and the solution to the question will be appropriate. The work will carry out orderly and

Targeted, regulate and keep up with the times.

How to do is discussed secondly. Working regu lation is an administrative method to discipline the behavior. In order to solve the problems in ideolog ical and political education work and promote the well development in academic ethos construction, the regulation is to be complete. So the university can be governed according to the regulation, the students should obey the regulation. And the regulation is the insurance for the work. Promoting the regulation is to base on socialist core values and reflect the master status of students. In this way, students teach them selves, discipline themselves and encourage them with consciousness in practice.

3.4 Treat academic ethos as duty, perfect working mechanism

Academic ethos construction is a long term basic project. In order to carry out well, an excellent work team is needed. “Whom the team will compose with?” the opinions are usually instructors, profes sional teachers and supervisors as the main part.

This kind of opinion is reasonable. But it is not enough. Academic ethos construction is carried out in certain circumstances under social background.

This determines the future of pluralism. Therefore, the members of the team should be multiplex. These calls for integration of resources, so as to build a work team that not only being good at ideological and political education, but also been enthusiastic in con structing the team. The members include excellent

A comparative study of British and Chinese vocational education— enlightenments brought by English vocational education

Wei Feng

Beijing Institute of Economic and Management, Beijing, China

ABSTRACT: In recent years, British government regards vocational education as an important factor in enhancing national competitiveness, and has taken significant initiatives and reform efforts, which formed its own distinctive characteristics of vocational education. UK vocational education administration experienced a process from germination to maturity, in the process, it formed a complete management system, and its overall management of education and employment, the creation of specialized management agencies to implement hierarchical management experience is worthy of learning.

KEYWORD: Vocational education, Framework, Policy environment, Comparative

The vocational education of UK has developed for hundreds of years. In recent years, economy situation facing by the British are: not enough job opportuni ties for young people, or very high youth unemploy ment. And vocational education and training is able to provide real jobs, so it is very popular. After select ing a vocational education, people can apply it to the work directly, forming a good circulation. On the one hand, it can improve the skills in terms of capacity and design to prepare for future work. On the other hand, the British Government has also attached great importance to vocational education, regarding voca tional education as a major measure to revitalize eco nomic development of British, proposing concepts of

“world class skills” and “Skills Strategy”.

In China, the development of vocational education is facing many challenges. China has gone through thirty years of reform and opening up, productive forces have developed in a high speed. And the quan tity and quality of vocational technological talents the society demands have been greatly improved. China has abundant labor resources, but currently some regions and industries have seen a “labor shortage” phenomenon, which is a sign of “structural” shortage of talents in China’s labor market. This phenomenon is the same as to the condition of Britain in 1960s and 1970s. “He who excels in learning can be an official.”, “He who rules lives by mental perplex ity; He who is ruled lives by physical labor”. These views have been deeply rooted in the soil of Chinese people’s heart and mind. [1] Thus, although the

Chinese government strongly advocated the devel opment of vocational education since the mid-1980s, no remarkable achievements have been made over the three decades, vocational education does not reflect its own characteristics and advantages fundamentally, it is almost the same with the ordinary higher education, which is worthy of our depth discussion, and learn from foreign advanced concepts, developing and improving China’s vocational education. This paper studies the British education policy environment, the framework of the development, compare of evaluation system, and mainly start from the following aspects: 1 THE ADMINISTRATIVE POLICY ENVIRONMENT OF VOCATIONAL EDUCATION IN CHINA AND BRITAIN 1.1 Vocational education administration policy environment of China China, at this stage, is facing the problem that the separation of education and training and the separation of Ministry of Education and Employment Ministry (Ministry of Labor) ,which is the same to British education. In an overall view, the vocational education in China have two systems, one is vocational school which managed by the education sector, and the second is technological school belongs to large enterprise or industrial management, and accept administrative management by the labor administrative departments. This management partition is extremely unfavorable to the development of vocational education in the new era, especially not conducive to the promotion of vocational qualification certificate system. China’s current vocational qualification management is approach by the Ministry of Labor, and it is responsible for developing national standards of vocational skills and vocational skills appraisal poli cies. However, for convenience of vocational schools under its management, the Ministry of Education does not participate in unified vocational skills identifica tion, accessing to vocational qualifications, but equal academic certificate to the vocational qualification certificate, which makes discount on the seriousness of the vocational qualification certificate, quality of vocational education cannot be ensured. Meanwhile the labor sector management technical schools and other job training in the aspect teaching do not accept the management education sector, and scientific of education is difficult to be guaranteed.

1.2 Vocational education administrative environment of Britain

From November 10 th to December 7 th in 2013, in order to improve the quality of teachers of vocational education and learn advanced vocational education teaching philosophy, 19 backbone teachers of voca tional education went to England to study vocational education, which is lead by the Beijing Municipal

Education Commission, aiming to improve the qual ity. During the inspection and the learning process, which impressed us is the educational philosophy of

British vocational education. Both the British gov ernment departments and vocational education insti tutions are advocating “market demand oriented and meet stakeholder needs.” [2]

1.2.1 Setting up a specialized organization, and realizing hierarchical management

Development of vocational education is a�ected by education, employment, the level of development of productive forces, and so on. The problems in the actual operation are too complicated, which involves lots of departments, and the management is not easy. Secondly, in the development of voca tional education, we have problems with policy for mulation and inspection and supervision, as well as the implementation of specific issues. When tack ling the problems in vocational education devel opment, UK established specialized agencies, and used hierarchical management approach, which is worthy of learning.

Educational administrative departments involved in too many specific issues, affecting its broader thinking of vocational education and management, which is not conducive to the further development of vocational education. Education administrative departments develop policies and guide the imple mentation of the policies themselves, and finally inspect and supervise by their own, which is not conducive to the real implementation of the policy, and may susceptible to corruption. 1.2.2 Multi-sector coordination and cooperation, and actively participate In Britain, it is an e�ectively combination between the administration of vocational education and the functions of government administrative departments of education. some public institutions and private institutions forms a multi-level and multi-channel management network, which can give full play to its own advantages of various management channels, so vocational education which under the guidance of the government’s macroeconomic policy, absorbing a variety of social, involvement of civil power, and achieved good results. If we can learn from vocational education experience of UK, such as letting the some public enterprises to participate in the completion of national occupational skills standards, the development of relevant industry standards, preparation of teaching materials, certificates assessment and other related matters, and it can stimulate the vocation- related parties to participate vocational education enterprises to participate actively, like school, companies, and can better coordinate the various relationships, so that all the di�erent departments work together more e�ectively. 2 VOCATIONAL QUALIFICATION FRAMEWORK OF CHINESE AND BRITISH VOCATIONAL EDUCATION 2.1 Dual system The framework of English vocational education, which we call “dual system”, is the co-existence of vocational education and higher education. After students choose one path, two paths can transmute into each other. [3] Such as in the framework of Scottish Vocational Education, students can learn through HNC, HND courses, choose employment, or choose to receive higher education directly. It’s more flexible. There is a big di�erence from China’s vocational education. Chinese government attaches great importance to academic education, whose training location is primary management sta�. While in Britain, vocational education is for training mechanic talents, namely, producing the first line sta�. At the same time, the jobs can be classified in great detail, which is closely related to the development of vocational qualification certificate. Di�erent jobs correspond to di�erent vocational qualification certificate, and the degree of specialization is extremely high. I think this is the issue which Chinese government needs to consider the issue further, whether the location is accurate or not?

2.2 Apprenticeship

The apprenticeship of England has a relatively strict education system, which is very popular in Britain at the same time. In England there are about 500,000 apprenticeship trainees. Only in the construction industry, there are 8000 apprentices. The training content of apprenticeship this time is the following several aspects:

2.2.1 Apprenticeship framework

The overall teaching framework of apprenticeship is mainly put forward by employers. Students are trained according to what goals students need to achieve, at the end they get vocational qualification certificates, but also they are required to acquire some soft skills to some extent. For example, courses such as English, mathematics, computer and so on should meet the standard. They also need to cooperate with other members and foster their interpersonal skills.

2.2.2 Apprenticeship grade classification

There are three levels of apprenticeship, intermedi ate, advanced, band four. Intermediate is equivalent of primary and secondary vocational qualification certificate level; advanced level is equivalent to ter tiary level vocational qualification certificate; band four is equivalent to qualifications of higher educa tion, namely management level. At the same time, during the entire framework upgrade, there are very strict standards, such as students, who want to go into the senior from intermediate, also need to get a pro fessional work equivalent to tertiary level, except for getting intermediate certificate and various soft skills. 2.2.3 Apprenticeship and employers

The demand for apprenticeship has a very close rela tionship with the employers. Most sta�, participating in apprenticeship learning has worked. Therefore, the views of employers determine who is qualified to participate in apprenticeship learning. The learn ing goal of apprenticeship is that after the comple tion of study, there is an ongoing job opportunities, and they have more understanding of the contents in work areas. During the learning period, employers will give more opportunity to learners to learn more skills, while providing work mentor for guidance.

Since government pays for apprenticeship learning, namely government provides enterprise £ 1,500 per year each person, the number of participants is lim ited. Not more than 10 people in every enterprise can participate in apprenticeship learning year. Of course, the main target which is funded by government is participants who join in apprenticeship learning in the year of 16 to 18. In addition, for freelancers, college will first help them find a working opportunity, such as help them find a suitable employer, then participate in the study. The College will provide academic support`positive proposals and guidance to apprentices, which is probably one of the reasons why apprenticeship is so popular. When the employer has other special requirements, the College will actively provide help and employers give feedback. Sometimes college also invites employers to give lectures. The relationship between employers and colleges are very close, so we can see that the engagement of employers throughout the vocational education is far more than China, which is what we highly recommend. 3 EVALUATION SYSTEM BETWEEN CHINESE AND BRITISH VOCATIONAL EDUCATION At present, China’s vocational education evaluation system is still the traditional teaching evaluation, that is college department subordinate to the Board of Education should receive teaching evaluation every two years, and then the college makes appropriate correction in limited time, or it may be sifted out. While the British government gives full funding for vocational education. It is also free for students to receive vocational education. Therefore, government set up a special agency to monitor for supervising the usage of school funds. This is very di�erent from China. Ofsted supervision system is most famous in Britain. Ofsted currently covers all supervisory agencies for service skills in children and adolescents. Currently it prepares to take over the supervision of child care from the hands of the government. The scope of responsibility is very wide. In England one of every three people will accept Ofsted supervision services. In Britain, parents will send kids into the nursery if they have to work. All nurseries in Britain have to register in Ofsted, and the costs are very high. The number of nurseries which Ofsted supervises will reach 1.5 million. The biggest task of Ofsted is to oversee and manage schools. They manage 800 million children and young people, more of whom are young people over the age of 16, with the number of 600 million. They are mostly funded by the government, some are full-time, and there are also a large part of part-time students who go there two or three days a week.

Ofsted also bear a great responsibility in the care of young people. They have a lot of work and have to deal with many complaints every year. The scope of supervision includes the learning and training for early education, social care, public schools and some private schools, teenagers and adults (including some prison inmates).

Ofsted is a government department, except that it has no minister. The current director is HMCI

Michael Wilshaw. Subordinate supervisors are at different qualifications. Some are in the formation, and some are outside the formation. Staff without formation is not eligible for the supervision of col lege. Ofsted receives funding from the Ministry of

Education and Business Innovation and Technology, but does not receive their direct management. Such an arrangement is to wish Ofsted to work fairly and equitably. The chief of Ofsted reports directly to the established Committee under the British Parliament.

The parliamentary committee is composed of mem bers of different political parties. Each year Ofsted provides report to the Commission. The report of this year will open next month. Ofsted has a public website. There are one million visitors per month: www.ofsted.gov.uk.

Of continuing education and training institutions over 16 years old, there are 3,300 high schools,

243 colleges, 513 private training institutions, 218 community institutions, 16 university institutions, and some prisons training institutions. Many large companies such as BMW, Rolls-Royce and other companies can get money from the government for providing courses for apprentices on condition that the course must meet Ofsted’s standards, which says that students trained can obtain the corresponding qualification certificates. The proportion of theoret ical and practical aspects varies depending on dif ferent subjects. During learning in the framework of apprenticeship, students must be hired by enter prises in the whole process, and learning takes place in the process. Learning outside of work can also occur in the college or in the company. The age limit of apprenticeships is 1-4 years, which will be deter mined according to the different levels.

Ofsted supervises learning experience of learn ers. The guiding principle is “to improve working standards and improve lives.” Supervisory task is to reflect the learner’s learning experience very accu

A comparison of Path encoding in English and Chinese

Changyin Zhou

School of English Language Literature and Culture Beijing International Studies University Beijing, P. R. China

Yinhong Huang

No.1 Middle School of Fengtai District, Beijing, P.R. China

ABSTRACT: English and Chinese both belong to satellite-framed languages in lexicalizing motion events.

However, they are not entirely identical in Path encoding. Path comprises Vector, Conformation, and Deictic.

Vector comprises Arrival, Departure and Traversal. English and Chinese use different forms (prepositions vs. verbs) to represent Traversal. The Arrival component in Chinese can denote “realized arrival” while that in

English cannot. English is not fine-grained as Chinese in the specification of Conformation. The use of Deictic in Chinese is more pervasive than that in English. Satellite elements in English are realized as particles and prepositions while those in Chinese are realized as directional verbs.

KEYWORDS: Path; Motion event; Satellite-framed languages; Vector; Conformation; Deictic

1 INTRODUCTION

The conceptualization and linguistic representation of motion events is a key issue in cognitive linguistic study. According to Talmy (2000a), a motion event is a macro-event which is composed of a main event and a co-event. The co-event in a motion is the manner or the cause. The main event has four basic components, namely Motion, Figure, Ground and Path. The Figure is the moving object, the Ground is the reference-point object with respect to which the Figure moves, and the

Path is the course followed by the Figure with respect to the Ground. These four components can be illus trated in the sentence John [Figure] went [Motion] into [Path] the room [Ground].

Among the components of a motion event, Path is taken to be the core element. According to the typ ical encoding of Path, Talmy (2000a) distinguishes two types of language across the world: verb-framed language and satellite-framed language. Satellite framed languages such as English typically lexical ize Path in a satellite element which is subordinate to the main verb or verb root. In contrast, verb-framed languages such as Spanish typically encode Path in the main verb, with the Manner or Cause expressed by adjuncts. The two types of lexicalization can be seen from the English sentence The bottle floated into the cave and the Spanish sentence La botella entro flotando a la cueva ‘The bottle entered the cave floating’. In Talmy’s classification (2000b: 109), both

English and Chinese belong to satellite-framed lan guages. This paper just aims to make a comparison between Path representations in English and Chinese to see the similarity as well as the minute differences between the mechanisms of Path encoding in these two languages. 2 THE COMPARISON OF THE CONCEPTUAL STRUCTURES OF PATH IN ENGLISH AND CHINESE According to Talmy (2000b: 53), Path is a conceptual complex which comprises three main components, namely Vector, Conformation, and Deictic. So, this paper will first compare English and Chinese Path encoding in these three aspects in the following sections. 2.1 The comparison of Vector as a component of Path in English and Chinese Vector refers to “the basic types of arrival, traversal, and departure that a Figural schema can execute with respect to a Ground schema” (Talmy, 2000b: 53). The three basic components of Vector are Arrival, Traversal and Departure. Arrival denotes motion “to or towards an ending point”, Departure denotes motion “from a source or starting point”, and Traversal denotes motion “between the starting point and ending point”, for example, move along or past. English and Chinese show differences in linguistic encoding of Vector. First, English and Chinese may use different forms to represent the same concept.

For example, in English, the motion of “Traversal in circle” is represented by the preposition around as in the sentence The old man walked around the lake. However, in Chinese, this kind of motion has to be expressed by the verb rao ‘move around’, as in the sentence Lao-ren rao-zhe hu zou ‘The old man walked around the lake’. It is not allowed to use rao

‘move around’ as a Path satellite as in English. This can be seen from the ungrammatical sentence * Lao ren zou rao-zhe hu in Chinese. Second, English and

Chinese vary in the degree of specification of Arrival.

In Chinese, the Arrival component can denote “real ized arrival” (Chu, 2004:150) as shown in the sentence

Xiao nan-hai pao-dao le shan-shang ‘The little boy ran up the hill’. In addition, the Arrival component can also denote “toward-but-not-arrive”, as shown in the sentence Xiao nan-hai pao-shang shan qu ‘The little boy ran up the hill’. However, both of these two sentences are expressed in the same sentence in

English, namely The little boy ran up the hill, which shows that English does not state explicitly whether the goal is reached or not.

2.2 The comparison of Conformation as a component of Path in English and Chinese

The Conformation component of Path is “a geometric complex that relates the fundamental Ground schema within a Motion-aspect formula to the schema for a full Ground object” (Talmy, 2000b: 54). That is to say, the Conformation is associated with the geom etry of the Ground and the geometric relationship between the Figure and the Ground. The Ground can be conceptualized as containers. In this case, we have the Inside or Outside Conformation, for exam ple, move into or out of. We also have the Surface

Conformation, for example, move on or the Above/

Beneath Conformation. The Ground can also be con ceptualized as points. In this case, we have the Beside

Conformation, for example, move past.

Sometimes, Vector and Conformation may coex ist. Take the English sentence The little girl walked into the room as an example. In this sentence, the

English Path satellite into embodies both Vector and

Conformation. The figure the little girl reached its goal (vector) which is represented by the room, and the Ground, namely the room, is a container which specifies the Conformation. English and Chinese dif fer in the degree of specification of Conformation. For example, due to the different types of Conformation in a motion event, we can distinguish four types of

Traversal as illustrated below:

1 a. They walked through the forest and arrived at the sea. b. They flew over the sea and arrived at the beautiful land. c. They walked across the street and arrived at the supermarket. d. They walked past the supermarket and arrived at the school. In (1a), the path through is the combination of Traversal and Inside, showing the Figure is moving through the inside of the Ground. Similarly, in (1b), (1c) and (1d), the Path over, across and past are the combination of Traversal with Above, Surface and Beside respectively. However, despite the distinctive features of each type of Traversal, all these four types of Traversal are expressed by guo ‘pass’ in Chinese. They can be translated as chuanguo ‘pass through’, feiguo ‘fly past’, chuanguo ‘pass through’ and zouguo ‘walk past’ respectively. It is clear that Chinese does not distinguish the types of Conformation in the expression of Traversal. 2.3 The comparison of Deictic as a component of Path in English and Chinese Deictic is not only related to Figure and Ground but also to the speaker. The Deictic component is defined as “typically has only two member notions ‘toward the speaker’ and ‘in direction other than toward the speaker’ “ (Talmy, 2000b: 56). That is to say, the Deictic component contains two members: Hither and Thither. Deictic is a universal feature in natural languages. The deictic members of Hither and Thither are represented by the complement verbs lai ‘come’ and qu ‘go’ in Chinese. In English, deictic Path can be expressed by Deictic Path verbs come and go, or can be conflated with other meanings in verbs, such as the transitive English verbs bring and take (Talmy, 2000b: 161). English deictic verbs bring and take incorporate the Manner of motion and deictic information. Their Chinese equivalents na-lai ‘hold come’ and na-qu ‘hold go’, however, can be divided into two parts, namely the Manner verb na ‘hold’ and the Deictic component lai/qu ‘come/go’. The use of Deictic in motion conceptualization is much more pervasive in Chinese than that in English. English does not pay special attention to Deictic in some cases of motion conceptualization as shown in the sentence A cat streaked out from under a parked car and flew out of sight. In this sentence, the English Path satellite out does not express the direction “toward the speaker”. However, if we translated this sentence into Chinese, the English verb phrase streaked out will be translated as cuan-chu-lai ‘spring out come’ with the Deictic Path component lai ‘come’ following the verb phrase cuan-chu ‘spring out’. It should be noted that it would be difficult for the above English sentence to add the Deictic Path information. One reason given by Lamarre (2005: 91) is that “one of the factors explaining the pervasive expression of Deictic direction in Chinese is the lexicalization pattern of

Path verbs and Path satellites. Path verbs are most of the time bimorphemic (for example, chu-lai ‘out come’), and deictic direction gets readily expressed in sentences where non-Deictic Path is marked.” And the tendency for using the Deictic in Chinese is much stronger when there is no noun phrases following the verb in the clause.

3 THE COMPARISON OF THE LINGUISTIC

REALIZATIONS OF PATH IN ENGLISH

AND CHINESE

Although the linguistic encoding of path both in

English and in Chinese are typically represented by satellites. However, the actual realizations of Path in

English and Chinese show some differences as far as their syntactic categories are concerned.

Satellite elements in English mainly include par ticles and prepositions. Satellites are traditionally called verb particles in English (Talmy 2000b: 103).

In English, the particles expressing Path fall into three categories, namely particles expressing the goal of the motion as to, in, into, on and onto, the source of the motion as from, out, off and away, and passing by as past, over, around, through, across and down. They are illustrated by the following examples:

2 a. After he went into the room, he found that boy. b. Sherman marched out of the burning town and the Confederates returned. c. A tall black boy of their own age ran breathlessly around the house and out toward the tethered horses.

Prepositions are also essential in encoding Path of motion in English. According to Jackend off (1983), the prepositions expressing Path can be divided into three types based on the encoding of different kinds of spatial relationships: TO Paths, FROM Paths, and

VIA Paths. They can all be illustrated in the sen tence He went from the station, along the avenue and through the crowds, past the monument, to his office.

Satellites in Chinese, as a contrast with those in

English, are realized as directional verbs. Directional verbs in Chinese can be categorized into three types.

The first type only consists of the two deictic path verbs lai ‘come’ and qu ‘go’. The directions of lai

‘come’ and qu ‘go’ are reverse. It is obvious that lai

‘come’ shows the direction of the standing point of speaker while qu ‘go’ shows the opposite direction of the standing point of the speaker. The second type of Chinese directional verbs includes shang ‘go up to’, xia ‘go down to’, jin ‘go into’, hui ‘go back’, guo ‘go past’, qi ‘go up’ and kai ‘open’. They are all monosyl lable directional verbs which show the original posi tion of Figure and emphasize the direction and Path in a motion event. Shang ‘go up to’, xia ‘go down’ and qi ‘go up’ are conceptualizations of Figure in the vertical direction. Jin ‘go into’, chu ‘go out’, dao ‘go to’ and guo ‘go past’ are conceptualizations under the internal reference frame. Guo ‘go past’ means passing a certain space. Its ground can be a point, a plane or an object. The corresponding conceptualizations of guo ‘go past’ in English may be across as in du-guo ‘cross over’, through as in chuan-guo ‘pass through’, past as in lu-guo ‘go past’, and around as in rao-guo ‘bypass’. The conceptualization of hui ‘go back’ involves two motion events, namely the arrival of the Figure at the destination and his coming back to the starting point. The third type of directional verbs in Chinese are called complex directional verbs. They are composed of monosyllable directional verbs followed by deictic verbs lai ‘come’ and qu ‘go’. Complex directional verbs in Chinese include shang-lai ‘come up’, shang-qu ‘go up’, xia-lai ‘come down’, xia-qu ‘go down’, jin-lai ‘come into’, jin-qu ‘go into’, hui-lai ‘come back’, hui-qu ‘go back’, guo-lai ‘come over’, guo-qu ‘go over’, and qi-lai ‘up come’. *Qi-qu ‘up go’ is not permitted in mandarin Chinese. The Chinese sentences Ta cong-lou-xia na-shang-lai yi-benshu ‘He brought a book from downstairs’ and Qing ba-zhe-ben-shu na-shang-qu ‘Please take this book upward’ can illustrate these complex directional verbs. 4 CONCLUSION The comparison of Path encoding in English and Chinese shows that, although Talmy’s classification of languages into satellite-framed languages and verb-framed languages sheds lights on the typological properties of natural languages in motion lexicalization, the complexity of motion events, specifically Path encoding, is far more complex than our expectation. Verbs play a more important role in Chinese Path encoding than that in English, English is not fine-grained as Chinese in the specification of Conformation, and the use of Deictic in Chinese is more pervasive than that in English. As for what actual cognitive mechanism causes the minute differences between English and Chinese in Path encoding, we still need to have a further exploration. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Note: This work was supported by grants from the National Social Science Fund of China (12BYY089), the Training Program for Great Wall Scholars of Beijing Educational Committee, the Special Item Fund of BISU 090052 and the Comprehensive Reform Program of 2014 Beijing Personnel Training Promotion (391002/002).

[1] Chu, C. Z. 2004. Event Conceptualization and

Grammatical Realization: The Case of Motion in

Mandarin Chinese [D]. Hawaii: University of Hawaii.

[2] Jackendoff, R. 1983. Semantics and Cognition [M]. Cambridge: MIT Press.

[3] Lamarre, C. 2005. The Linguistic Encoding of Motion

Events in Chinese with Reference to Cross- dialectal

Variation [A]: COE-ECS Working Paper [C], 1–24.

[4] Talmy, L. 1985. Lexicalization Patterns: Semantic

Structure in Lexical Forms [A]: Language Typology and Syntactic Description (vol.III) [C]. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 57–149. [5] Talmy, L. 1991. Path to Realization: A Typology of Event Conflation [J]: Proceedings of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, (17): 480–519. [6] Talmy, L. 2000a. Toward A Cognitive Semantics: Vol. I: Concept Structuring System [M]. Cambridge: MIT Press. [7] Talmy, L. 2000b. Toward A Cognitive Semantics: Vol. II: Typology and Process in Concept Structuring [M]. Cambridge: MIT Press.

Review of China mobile English learning: Achievements and shortcomings -based on statistical analysis of literature for

10 years (2004–2014) in CNKI (China National Knowledge Infrastructure)

Ping Chen

Wuhan City Vocational College

ABSTRACT: The CNKI includes 153 pieces of paper for 10-year period of 2004–2014 about mobile

English learning. We conducted a statistical analysis of 10 years of research among mobile English learning achievements and shortcomings and summarized in order to provide advice and reference for study in the future.

KEYWORDS: Mobile English learning; Review; Research areas

1 INTRODUCTION

Along with the rapid development of mobile technol ogy and the popularity of mobility, it has become an increasingly prominent feature of mobile technology.

In the field of English, language learning spawned a new form of learning—Mobile English learning.

At the beginning of this century, China experts and scholars began to study this new learning method and introduce it to apply to all areas of the country learn ing English.

The article Composition, characteristics and evaluation of mobile English teaching published by Hanling and others in 2004 marks the beginning of research on the Chinese open mobile

English learning. 10 years can be divided into two phases from 2004 to the present: 2004–2008 was tough period and there are very few people and sporadic achievements in this field. 2009–2014 is the full start-up period. At this stage, research team continues to expand, the research results are emerging.

The author intends to review the Mobile English

Learning for nearly 10 years from 2004 to September in 2014 in order to clarify the characteristics of the development of English learning research in China

Mobile, trace China Mobile English learners and scholars studying the concept of change, sum up the achievements and shortcomings, clear future research directions in order to provide a useful reference for future research. 2 RESEARCH METHODS AND OBJECT 2.1 Research objectives and analysis unit The research goal of this paper is to present research analysis and the unit of analysis is a separate piece of paper. 2.2 Designing analysis dimension Research starts with five dimensions, the study sample number distribution, content, author, number of units and the article published. When designing content analysis categories, according to the study purpose and content, the content analysis categories are set in five parts, theory of a mobile English learning, applied research, curriculum design and development studies, terminal platform and software research and development and related technology research. 2.3 Research methods This paper uses content analysis. Content analysis is a variety of literature for the study, research methods objective, systematic and quantitative description of the content for dissemination. 2.4 Sampling content This paper uses CNKI and Chinese Academic Journal as retrieving source. I retrieve the 2004–2014 ended

September 24 article published in the statistics with

“mobile learning” and contain “English” or “mobile

English teaching” as the theme. The analysis excludes all non-academic articles. Then I spent 25 hours care fully reading the rest of the literature categorized.

Ultimately, I got the e�ective sample 153.

3 DATA STATISTICS AND ANALYSIS AND

ANALYSIS OF THE AUTHORS

3.1 Trends of mobile English learning thesis in the 10 years

Figure 1 shows that domestic mobile English learn ing research started late. In 2004, the field was first published research papers. It did not come out a paper in three years from 2005 to 2007. It was published 3 in 2008 and 7 in 2009. Then it entered a stable period of development. In 2010, it published 6 articles.

Beginning in 2011, the development trend of steadily rises in the speed of 13 in 2011, 27 in 2012 and 44 in

2013, indicating that research in this area has obtained more and more attention. As far as September 2014, a total of 153 mobile English learning has become a hot research field.

3.2 The basic situation papers

From 2004 to September 24 in 2014, more than three of the 13 species, a total of 59 papers published a number of journal articles mobile English learning, according to the number of articles published in the following descending order sorting.

From 2004 to September 24 in 2014, Modern

Educational Technology, electronic test and Chinese education information are the three journals pub lishing the English mobile learning research papers, each containing 7 pieces of articles. Software Guide

Journal, China Education Technology and Equipment each contains 6 pieces of articles. Hubei radio and

Television University contain five pieces of articles.

Science and Education Guide and other six kinds of journals contain three pieces of articles. Education

Forum and other six kinds of journals contain two pieces of articles. There are another 80 kinds of journals, each carrying a message. It means that 153 papers published in journals are scattered, distributed in the domestic 100 kinds of journals. 3.3 Analysis of the number of articles published by authors I analyzed statistics for 153 mobile English learning authors (only containing the first author). In the 10-year period, the author who published the most paper about mobile English learning is Yang Weiyan. She published 7. Xia Zengliang published four. Hu Shun, Pan Ruoyun, Hu Jing, Jiang Guangbiao, Zhang Chengguo each published 3, Guo Fengchi and other six teachers each published two. These scholars made a great contribution to our mobile English learning research in the past 10 years. 3.4 Analysis of authors’ unit In the 10 years, units who published more than two papers on English learning mobile number (in accordance with the first authorship), ordinary institutions of higher learning English is the main base of domestic mobile learning research, especially radio and TV University. The number of articles over two Part of the 12 units have three radio and television universities, namely Shantou radio and TV University, Shenzhen radio and TV University and Nantong radio and Television University. 3.5 Analysis of paper content Theoretical concepts of mobile English learning system are primarily for mobile learning, characteristics, nature, content, advantages, problems, policy analysis and research methods, the feasibility of the application, research and other aspects of the domestic status quo. Mobile English learning application, curriculum design and development resources and terminal platform and software development research in three areas share common is the school education, especially universities, but research is still no breakthrough in the development. Good pre-designed mobile learning in teaching practice protection. Curriculum design and instructional design resources will be the future direction of future e�orts. Mobile English learning related technologies, most remain in the domestic application of technology, it rarely comes to the forefront of technological innovation. This is because this area of research has higher skill level requirements for researchers, so research in this area is not much.

Year 2004 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014

Number 1 3 7 6 13 27 44 52

Figure 1. Time distribution diagram of domestic mobile English learning articles published from 2004 to 2014.

4 ACHIEVEMENTS AND SHORTCOMINGS OF

MOBILE ENGLISH LEARNING RESEARCH

IN THE RECENT 10 YEARS

4.1 Achievements

In this 10-year period, mobile English learning research has made considerable progress, constantly expanding field of study, the research team has grown, and showed three aspects of the characteristic.

4.1.1 Mobile English learning platform was colorful. The level of demand for a variety of applications came up

With the growing popularity of smart phones and tab let computers and other mobile devices, research and development to create a mobile English learning plat form also appeared strong. A more extensive range of mobile platforms research, design more specialized and targeted to meet the learners’ vocabulary, gram mar, everyday conversation practice speaking di�er ent training needs of user groups for large, medium and small di�erent levels of students, showing diver sification and popular trends.

From the initial stage or laptop-based SMS, WAP way to the development of 3G technology main stream models and different levels of learning groups learning system makes an in-depth study of the rise to a new level. Depending on the actual learning objectives developed various mobile English learning application system came into being.

4.1.2 Diverse research areas and multi-angle data acquisition

Table 5 shows that mobile English learning research areas include the theory, applications, resources, design and development, mobile terminal platform and software development and related technology research. Among them, mobile English learning class applied research articles ratio of 33.3%, accounted for the largest proportion. Study of College English learning areas (total 40 articles, accounting for 26,1% of the total) to the fullest.

Theoretical research can be refined into the theoret ical system for the study, research and learning Survey

Research Summary Overview. (It has a total of 41 articles, accounting for 26.7% of the total). Research on Theoretical System began fusion experiments to explore new technologies. Survey of College Students’

English Learning Mobile for mobile English learning improved a theoretical data. Research of the over view field summarizes trends in the field of mobile

English learning, learning English for further move ment direction. This is the basis of theoretical research mission. Educational Research maturing gradu ally makes the value of mobile learning can be truly realized. Quantitative studies curriculum design and development of research resources and end platforms and terminal software development is rising. We should pay attention to the relevant technical studies are relevant experts and scholars. These five studies constitute a diverse class of mobile English learning research. Diverse research areas correspond with multi- angle, multi-level data acquisition. Mobile English Learning comprehensive coverage of college undergraduates, electricity college students, college students, adults, vocational students, high school students and students at all levels of English learners. Research areas include different fields of study vocabulary, reading, teaching, Grading and hearing, etc. It makes the multi-angle studies sight. 4.1.3 Innovative learning applications, mobile English learning were introduced English flipped classroom The rapid development of IT of mobile Internet, big data, cloud computing and other technologies led to a profound revolution in the field of education to learn a huge impact on traditional teaching mode places. Flip classroom originated in the United States as a new teaching model, driven exploration of theory and practice within the global scope of the new round of classroom teaching. By comparing the traditional English classroom for English flipped classroom, Lin Yufei and other people come to three advantages of English flipped classroom. On this basis, according to the characteristics of the mobile student who combines English flipped classroom needs, they set up a project team of English teachers and computer technology professionals constituted the use of “Application Park” (www.apppark.cn), also Apppark. We can get free online production of mobile learning software of Workplace English. The mobile English learning applied to flip the classroom teaching model is a new attempt of English teaching reform. Their organic integration will promote the effectiveness of English teaching, comprehensive approach to improve effectiveness and efficiency. Although until September 24, 2014, there is only an article about mobile English learning and flipped classroom fusion research. But “mobile learning”, “flipped classroom” has aroused increasing concern of educators and scholars at home and abroad. 4.2 Deficiencies 4.2.1 Lack of research on mobile English learning process Not much research for the mobile learning process is involved. This phenomenon stems in part from the study did not cause enough attention to the academic and point of view of research and the focus are of the limitations of many scholars, but the main reason is that China’s mobile English learning started late, there are still many unknown areas waiting for more in-depth exploration by experts and scholars.

While learning activities can take place “any where, anytime”, but the process is a dynamic system.

Setbacks experienced by learners in the learning pro cess find it difficult to maintain enthusiasm for mobile learning. Learning is a sensitive process that needs to be practiced in safe and positive psychological envi ronment. Learning is a personalized and emotional process. Non-intelligence factors learner, knowledge structure, the structure will directly affect on the abil ity of mobile English learning. No teaching concepts of teaching make it difficult to move the English learning research results into teaching achievements.

In a sense, mobile English learning is “software”. It is a teaching, learners, learning environment, learning resources of four mutually reinforcing mutual restraint systems, the study of mobile English learning process is worthy of serious study of a new perspective.

4.2.2 The lack of in-depth theoretical studies, no scientific system

In the 10-year period from 2004 to 2014, China’s research in the field of mobile English learning the ory has made certain achievements, build the basic concept of mobile learning and related theories, laid a theoretical foundation for the further development of mobile English learning.

But the majority of them are the macro-level the oretical research, meso and micro levels are below normal, the guidance is not strong, but there is still a repeat of the study, not widely studied relatively superficial level and low tendency. Overall, it is still in the exploratory stage, there is a great distance from the formation of the discipline system. The theoret ical study of all basic research needs of the system, extensive, in-depth and advanced theories do sup port, in order to provide a new entry point for mobile

English learning research, inject fresh vitality.

4.2.3 Serious imbalance of application

At present, the application of mobile English learning by combining multiple levels of education needs and characteristics of di�erent teaching objectives, teach ing model based on di�erent scenarios, from both the oretical and practical aspects of the exploration and research. But the breadth and depth of research and coverage deficiencies are in serious imbalance. Mobile

English learning application model studies tend appli cation model of school education. Distance education and adult education are seldom studied. There is no training research about corporate training. The study

Practice on bilingual education and exam reform of vocational computer programming

Jiangtao Geng, Zanfu Xie & Xiaoyun Mo

Guangzhou International Economics, College, Guangzhou, China

ABSTRACT: The application of bilingual teaching in vocational colleges is necessary choice of acting on international standards, promoting education reform, improving the competitive advantage of the profession.

As computer programming languages are developed in America with native English, it is of great significance for vocational college to promote bilingual education in computer programming courses. This paper analyzes the current teaching situation in vocational programming courses, describes the practice of bilingual teach ing vocational programming from three aspects such as teaching resources, teaching methods and assessment methods to improve the students’ programming ability, and to promote development of bilingual education on vocational programming courses.

KEYWORDS: Vocational education; Bilingual education; Examination reform; C ++ programming

1 INTRODUCTION

Due to the impact of economic globalization, the domestic higher education, particularly in computer science teaching is gradually with the international standards, bilingual education is increasingly get ting more attention, especially after the Ministry of Education in the field of IT and other high-tech advance bilingual teaching demands are released, bilingual education has flourished up in com puter teaching in our colleges. Guangzhou Foreign

Economic Technical College, as a vocational college, which can cultivate high-quality, highly skilled per sonnel with foreign language, foreign, foreign exper tise as to meet the needs of personnel training and market demand and carry out bilingual teaching of at the Institute of C ++ programming at college of infor mation. However, how to e�ectively carry out bilin gual teaching computer programming in vocational colleges? This is a common issue that will be ongo ing faced by bilingual teaching and vocational col leges. We combine the practice of computer language

C ++ bilingual education and examination reforms implementation try to discuss this issue.

2 CURRENT TEACHING STATUS AND

EXISTING PROBLEMS IN TODAY’S

COMPUTER PROGRAMMING

Computer programming courses are compulsory of computer in vocational college, but the complete system, strict logic, highly abstract and complex structures often make students daunting. Currently, vocational colleges in teaching computer programming either using the traditional lecture-based teaching mode, or a combination of modes part experiment, there are the following problems: 2.1 Defects in advanced and practical of textbook Textbooks are important knowledge carriers of teaching plan implementation, teaching content reflection and teaching methods, is the basic tool for students to gain knowledge and ability, as well as an important basis for the assessment of teaching e�ectiveness. Although there are many versions of the computer programming on the current market, most are programming materials, its content system essentially based on discipline system construction is to impart declarative knowledge. It is a theoretical knowledge-based system. This evolution came from the regular higher education textbooks, not in line with vocational students’ cognitive process, during the actual process of teaching, students are tired of studying and teachers are di�cult to teach. 2.2 Poor teaching methods and teaching methods, lack of training of programming ability in teaching Teaching is still stuck in the traditional training model of science and engineering, basic theoretical knowledge and practical ability for individuals experiments consisting of the main body of teaching. In the classroom, teaching plays a leading role, student lack of learning enthusiasm and initiative; it is against students’ creative ability and personalization. A gen eral lack of teaching students programming skills and vocational training to develop the quality of the team, leading to trained students largely divorced from demand of industry.

2.3 Drawbacks between theory and practice of course assessment

Traditional computer programming of college has semester examination, which in the exam structure generally includes two parts as homework and final exam, mainly is the form of the written closed-book exam, supplemented by practical exam; multi-use assessment test score percentile, and in the semes ter, normal and final exam usually accounts for 30% and 70% respectively. This “Panax open” semester examination system has simple structure, and easy to operate and manage, over the years, it is widely used in teaching in college and vocational programming long look at the modern conception of quality edu cation; the drawbacks of this semester examination system in theory and practice are manifold. Firstly, it is attention to the teaching activities of the results of the evaluation, ignoring incentives for the teaching process, relaxation amplitude, long cycle during the learning process of student, is not conducive to mobi lize the enthusiasm; Secondly, poor systemic in teach ing content assessment, neither test scores objectively or fully reflect the semester teaching situation nor objectively reflect the student’s actual programming ability, reliability is not strong; thirdly, it focus on the functional identification of tests, rather than feedback to improve functionality, teachers can not get timely feedback of improvements in the teaching process, which is not conducive to teaching and learning.

3 BILINGUAL TEACHING OF COMPUTER

PROGRAMMING AND PRACTICE ON

EXAM REFORM

Overall, vocational colleges’ bilingual teaching of computer programming is still in the experimental stage, and there are still many di�culties, criticism and questioning, all of which need us to continue to explore and practice. For teachers, bilingual educa tion is a highly di�cult teaching model, but also has a higher level of teaching requirements. It requires teachers to work twice as hard work to complete the teaching task with high quality. For students, voca tional students’ English level is generally low; there is a defect in listening and reading. Moreover, com puter programming language has many inherent pro fessional terms and information etc. which students need to spend more time to digest the contents they learned in the classroom in their free time. To ensure the quality of bilingual teaching computer programming and get better results, we focused on solving the above problems and have done a useful exploration and practice. 3.1 Object-oriented materials system of programming C ++ bilingual teaching Textbooks are an important basis for teaching and learning, it is the fundamental guarantee of bilingual education reform. Without suitable textbooks, bilingual education is bound to become a source of usage. But water. In bilingual education, students with good materials, review before having class, Knowing the content and keywords, you can do more with less, and achieve better learning outcomes; while teachers with good textbook, they will have better systematic preparation and reference to achieve better teaching results. In terms of bilingual teaching materials, we have adopted main textbooks, experimental textbooks and teaching aids to optimize the integration of the teaching system. The practice has proved that such a system, which can meet the requirements of textbook’s content in advanced and practical, but also can be a good balance between individual needs of many students, and broaden their horizons. In the experimental materials, we use national courses, <> which was edited by Professor Zheng Li of Tsinghua university as student books and experimental guide books. Experimental material not only summarizes the knowledge of each part, consolidate and strengthen the basic concepts and knowledge; but also through careful experiments designed to enable students to achieve in-depth understanding and proficiency in the practice of the teaching content. In choosing the teaching reference books, we recommend two classical works: the latest original <> was written by foreign programming guru Stanley B. Lippman and <> was written by the father of C ++ of Bjarne Stroustrup’s to students. And in the teaching process, continue to guide the students see these classical examples of reference, and to digest and absorb, effectively improve the starting point on the basis of student’s programming ability. 3.2 Emphasizes teaching methods and ways of team programming capabilities We are in the bilingual classroom of <>, take bilingual teaching “bilingual textbook, English courseware, taught in English and Chinese”. the bilingual teaching. This is mainly considerate it is very di�cult to fully teach in English and foreign language teaching materials for vocational students, and the majority of teachers and students’

English listening and speaking skills also are lower than comfortable level. And bilingual education is not a foreign language teaching, it is focused on the theory and skills of teaching object-oriented programming.

Taking use of pure English courseware has high lighted jargon, while 60% Chinese and 40% English which are not only more helpful for students to grasp the teaching content, but also make the professional

English terms and expressions gradually infiltrated into the student’s mind. Such teaching mode can not only make the students feel the new teaching ideas and enhance interest in learning and dealing with practical problems, but also mobilize the enthusiasm and creativity of students, master advanced science and technology.

In the training process of the project, which requires the student team to complete the program ming together. In order to emphasize the core pro gramming goal of the student team, we set for each team in each semester with specific programming goals of 1000 lines source code. For each of the train ing, using teaching activity Presentation which was widely used abroad to make students identify their dominant position and role in the team in the divi sion courses, advocates “do” in “learning” concept, and requires each group of students to complete the analysis, multiple links program design, coding and debugging as well as lectures and so on of presenta tion requirements. Through a combination of activi ties at classroom and extracurricular learning, which greatly mobilize the students’ learning enthusiasm and initiative, promote the cultivation of students’ teamwork ability.

Teaching training courses around the following topics to start:

Training one: Beginning to Program in C ++: Data types and Operators

Training two: Selection and Iteration

Training three: Arrays and Structures

Training four: Strings and Functions

Training five: Objects and Classes

Training six: Pointers and Dynamic Memory

Training seven: Operator Overloading

Training eight: Inheritance and Polymorphism

Training nine: Templates, Files and Streams

Programming code of selected team will be taken on the stage in every training summarize, the teacher will comment and direct timely on designing code and discuss with students, through mutual assis tance to enhance programming capabilities, active in the students’ thinking, and achieved good teaching effectiveness.

Competency examination reform, examination is not only the evaluation of education, it also directs teaching, plays a leading role. To establish a scientific assessment method of bilingual teaching computer programming is not only beneficial to evaluate the effects of bilingual education, but also it has important significance for information promotion of bilingual teaching. Traditional single exam papers can’t examine the students’ comprehensive programming capabilities fully. Competency-based curriculum programming exam is an important part of testing and improving students’ innovative thinking and programming capabilities. The purpose of the examination reform is to reform existed drawbacks and problems, rather than cancel the examination system. Reform is to make the exam to better play its role in the evaluation and feedback, serve for the training of students’ innovative thinking and programming capabilities. In specific practice, we use the following appraisal structure: Overall score = training report scores (50%) + the computer measurement (20%) + Ending written test (30%) Where: Training report results from 9 Training reports (5% per each) and one lecture score (5%); Computer measurement is right for each student on the actual computer testing, examining students’ programming and debugging ability; The final written examination is a closed book written examination, which focusing on curriculum theory system. You can see the results of the evaluation mechanism, the largest proportion is about the training report once in two weeks, which is an incremental assessment method. From the organization’s training content, training implementation to training achievements show, frequent training as a core curriculum throughout the teaching process, both on the teaching process to make timely incentives, but also play a very good feedback to improve. And by training and presentation for many times, students and teachers have interaction process, the evaluation of teachers combine with self- assessment of students within the group, so that comprehensive results obtained objectively and comprehensively not only reflect a teaching situation of the semester, but also comprehensive and objective reflect the actual programming capabilities of the student team. Training report largely reflects the student team’s comprehensive ability of collaboration and team leadership, and computer is measured for each individual student, which reflects the basic requirements for each student in teaching, and also avoid the phenomenon of redundancy in team members, which is particularly important for vocational students. The final written examination aims to test the student’s ability of grasping and applying basic concepts and theories in courses to enable students through a comprehensive review. “Reviewing the Old” to strengthen the overall grasp of curriculum theory.

With the implementation of the performance evaluation mechanism described above, achieved the following results:

1 Incremental assessment methods promote style construction. Enable students to change from pas sive learning to active learning, emphasizing the dominant position of students to greatly mobilize students’ learning consciousness and initiative

2 Unifying the assessment of student’s ability of teamwork development and individual independ ent, to make up drawbacks when testing students’ teamwork ability in traditional examination; both complement each other, both can not lose fair indi viduality, it also has promoted the cultivation of team spirit among the students.

3 Examination reform organically combines with classroom teaching reform, which has promoted the implementation of the education reform. It changed the existence of the traditional exam examination content limitations large, standard ized exam questions, exam form a single, scoring refined quantification, assessment and examination purposes utilitarian information feedback mecha nism imperfect status quo.

In summary, the above result evaluation system, which can better overcome the shortcomings of the existing exam system and can not only test the stu dents’ practical programming skills more accurately, but also has a positive role in promoting on the whole teaching.

4 CONCLUSIONS

Currently, accelerate the development of modern vocational education and train the new century skills

The impact of network technologies on higher education management and countermeasures

Yuexin Cui

Dongying Ploytechnic, Dongying, Shandong, China

ABSTRACT: The 21st century is an era of information technology, network technology begins in all areas of life and production and also higher education administration to apply network technology and network man agement. However, in the rapid development of information technology today, due to network with their own information technology, high-speed, information-based features are widely used in educational management in universities, so that some common problems on the network has infiltrated into university education manage ment, making college educational management in the new face new problems and challenges. Through the influence of network technology for higher education management of the research on network technology, we make a few constructive suggestions on education management application and universities.

KEYWORDS: Network technologies; Higher Education Management; Information Technology

Under the current circumstances, the network technology presents a very fast update status, and hits in Higher Education Management network tech nology. Based on this situation, Higher Education

Management must correctly handle the impact and challenges posed by network technology. This arti cle will analyze network technology for its manage ment of colleges and universities for the impact of education and educational management of colleges and universities to bring exhibits regularity ana lyzed and the appropriate policy response to this situation.

1 NETWORK TECHNOLOGY’S IMPACT ON

MANAGING HIGHER EDUCATION

With the popularization and development of net work technology, education and management of colleges and universities su�ers strong interference, as an educational media and tools, the Internet has made education management undergone a qualitative change in education and management is no longer a top-down indoctrination method, but the interaction between people passed in the form of information, current college students more emphasis on indi viduality, their ability to accept greater autonomy higher education managers therefore has to rely on network technology to improve the level of education management. 1.1 Influence of network technology to university education management Higher Education Management appears after the network technology and it has been a very strong impact. Networks can be said to be an educational tool or an intermediary. Historically, the emergence of a new educational tool or media will make the educational management su�er a certain change. In the era of paperless education, education can be said that parents instill way, that is, experienced personnel and down content delivery, in such a way to impart knowledge is very limitations; after the paper appeared, people use it, and in exchanges it is more convenient, but the teaching methods are mostly scripted, single formula taught to students; now there is a network of information sources which are more extensive, if teachers or administrators still use the traditional way of education, their knowledge of the field is relatively narrow, personal research is very limited, now college students have their own way of thinking and own character, with a strong ability to accept, they will go to collect information on various aspects. In today’s rapid development of network technology, education and management of colleges and universities are also facing new challenges, the popu larity of network technology to some extent affected the administration of university education, and we need to address network technology to the impact of Higher Education Management, which highlights performance in the following areas:

1.2 Management in higher education has rich forms

With the network technology in higher education it not only enriches the teaching methods and the content of teaching colleges, while the use of com puter multimedia and other modern technology also facilitates the administration of university teaching to some extent. Education Management University’s gradual transition to the information from the tradi tional workforce management, which saves human resources colleges and universities, but also improve the e�ciency of higher education management. At the same time, for the management of university- related network technologies (such as o�ce automation sys tems, university financial management systems, etc.) unskilled workers, the network technology in univer sity administration also increased management di culty in the work they carry out.

1.3 Education mode gradually opens

In this era of rapid development of network informa tion, people must have an open and closed unity of thinking, that enables the exchange of information, energy and other tangible or intangible substance in an open environment, and then play its role in the closure of. The traditional teaching of teachers in col leges and universities, mainly teachers, laboratories and other information flows are in relatively closed spaces for teaching, but with the application of net work technology in university education, students not only learn in the school’s multimedia teaching establishments, they can learn o�-campus accord ing to their actual needs to learn. Moreover, the use of network technology students can learn through the Internet broader field of knowledge, learning is no longer limited by space and time. This breaks the traditional concept of closed-end education to some extent, and universities rely on the carrier network technology for all sectors of society and can carry out open teaching.

2 RESPONDING METHODS OF THE HIGHER

EDUCATION INSTITUTIONS

2.1 Changing concepts of education

Management changes will be gradually eased, and the main body is for students to play. Management is a top-down, but that has equal significance grooming. The main purpose will be to divert students develop the ability to become self-managed learning. After the student access to the Internet now, it has a very broad exposure level, if having a sense of self-management is more helpful for them to learn. Some human studies have shown that an act of so-called self- management of learning is to combine self- organization and control capabilities, it is not just an intellectual, but also a learning skills, it is a process of self-training and self-restraint. 2.2 Vigorously upgrades and new network technology platform Network technologies include network hardware, software, construction, network management, maintenance and popularization of network knowledge, and now many colleges and universities is just a LAN, but the network hardware, software construction lag, network management is not standardized, network knowledge is not universal. Today, people are students, work and life increasingly inseparable from the network. Internet technology has become the basic facilities in colleges of education, for the development of universities, students, life is particularly important. If the university network hardware and software construction can not keep up, it will bring a lot of problems in Higher Education Management. Multimedia classrooms, universities, laboratories, language lab, student hostels should have a stable, fast network, university teachers and students can ensure timely and smooth access to a variety of information, promote the development of colleges and universities, in addition, only to build a wireless network, so the network is not restricted by the real space of time, so that students are more convenient and e�cient using online learning. 3 OPTIMIZE NETWORK TECHNOLOGY PLATFORM OF UNIVERSITY Most colleges and universities are equipped with computer hardware and local area networks, but there are still some problems in networking technology platform, maintenance and network literacy and so on. AC In general, university information depends largely on the condition of network hardware, if conditions are poor, it will lead to students unable to fully expand the appropriate learning tasks, and thus impede the orderly administration of university education. Therefore, universities must expand the scope of network construction, covering a range of students to focus activities and strengthen the network of literacy, education and management to ensure the smooth progress of the work of universities.

Strengthen Office network, reach distributed learn ing. Strengthening University’s office network means full use of network technology to achieve high office

‘paperless’ and simultaneous transmission of infor mation, so it not only can effectively improve work efficiency, but also can effectively save educational resources. In addition, because the state finances are only on the part of universities to give financial subsidies, which led some universities to expand the size of the school, because insufficient capital investment and cannot carry out related work, and the use of network technology can effectively solve this problem. The use of network technology in uni versities “distribution learning” is through a network of student teaching in different areas, it can not only save resources into education, but also can effectively expand the scale of education.

4 ADVANTAGE OF APPLICATION OF

NETWORK TECHNOLOGY

Advantage of application of Network Technology in Education Management in Universities Schools can make education resource management, human resources, reasonable configuration. Network

Technology in Higher Education Management appli cation, which not only can make universities be away from the traditional management model and resource allocation model, you can also make the school’s edu cational resources management, human resources and other rationalized configuration. Because of college education management information network, you can make the school’s resource allocation through the Internet rational and e�ective allocation and uti lization, saving a lot of schools in the allocation of resources wasted manpower, resources, and schools and departments can enhance a certain extent, pro ductivity and e�ciency at all levels of management.

For example, universities can network technology, implement video conferencing, online education plat form functions in educational management resources.

In many universities today, it is also applied the tra ditional pyramid-type organization and management structure. The so-called pyramid organizational struc ture is a hierarchical management structure when such structures are as a result of the division of labor, the management level is too narrow, too many managers and other related limitations result in school educa tional administration, organizational management are too many overlapping pole earth work e�ciency and reducing the e�ciency of management personnel. In the use of network technology organization and man agement structure of higher education management, the use of networked information technology, public, can make the management of the network, so that the leader can be given directly to the grassroots worker tasks and requirements in the form of the network to avoid open middle management traditional organizational structures. This not only makes college education management organization structure to avoid the waste of human resources and management of resources, but also improves the e�ciency and e�ciency of management. 5 STRONG PROMOTE NETWORKING AND MULTIMEDIA TEACHING Implementation of online teaching and multimedia teaching is to improve teaching e�ciency, and it is an important way to enhance teaching e�ectiveness. Expansion of the scale of higher education, campus restrictions are no longer hardware facilities. This opens up broad prospects for colleges and universities to carry out higher education through the network. Such as: the most experienced teachers teaching, not on campus, space, geographical restrictions, in principle unlimited number of education; using video and multimedia technology, teaching vivid, both to see the atomic, molecular structure, biological cell’s micro world genes, but also to see the universe, the ocean, the atomic bomb and other macro processes in a relatively short period of time, impart a greater amount of information and so on. At the same time, you can achieve a two-way interactive teaching, students ask questions online, homework, teachers online Q, assignments, change the title, proposition, examinations; There are learning time, place arbitrary choice, as long as the convenience of students, and they may at any time receive online learning; there are many learning content, schedule arbitrary choice, the di�culty can be repeated to learn, and it has mastered the part can be skipped; students can actively participate in the learning process, virtual reality technology, students can participate in the process control, immersive and so on. Strengthen the network technology, ethics education, students are users of the network, and recipient information is released, thus enhancing network ethics education and ideological and political education to improve college students consciously resist harmful information awareness and the ability to build online Marxism positions, which have basic significance. China’s traditional Confucianism and ethical norms, moral system of socialism, for college students play a certain role. Mainly it is reflected in two aspects, one is the moral requirements into college students self-discipline to make it adhere to the code of ethics in network communication, standardize their communication behavior; the second is the other traditional media for students and college students do not obey the norms of moral behavior and expand the accused, the formation of public opinion in a certain range is in order to correct the behavior of individual anomie, so that people enhance self- protection capabilities, consciously abide by the law, to resist the temptation of bad information, form a good internal restraint mechanism. The only way to encourage people to consciously establish a network sense of responsibil ity is ethically facilitating online Marxism education establishment and consolidation of positions.

6 STRENGTHEN THE CONSTRUCTION OF

CAMPUS CULTURE, AND ENHANCE THE

OVERALL QUALITY OF STUDENTS

The so-called campus culture in schools this particu lar geographical area refers living or working in one of the people (including students, teachers, etc.), in its long learning, living process is created by the cam pus environment, behavior and mental awareness of accumulation, the overall awareness of the intrinsic properties of the school and school spirit, teaching style, study style endures in the style of unity and overall performance. In the information society, con temporary young college students are living in the three levels of society, and that is the great human society, a small community on campus, online virtual community. A good campus cultural environment not only enables students to be a sublimated realm of thought, culture optimistic attitude towards life, high moral character, good manners and elegant aesthetics to autonomy, creativity, environmental adaptability, and other Quality aspects can be improved, but also can become eliminate negative information network society fortified positions. Through the construction of campus culture, we should create a spirit of the times, the fine tradition of good style of study, the lofty ideals of culture and education environment, so that students are a�ected by the good atmosphere, the edification and infection, in order to e�ectively resist

On the prospects of the quality education under the education and management of higher vocational schools

He Huang

Dalian Vocational and Technical College, Dalian, China

ABSTRACT: Establishing internal quality assurance in higher vocational college teaching vocational educa tion system is the basis for the implementation of total quality management, which is to have a major impact on the teaching quality of teaching management activities elements organically linked, it plays to their unique strengths to form a stable and effective system to protect and improve the quality of teaching overall. The key is to correct school’s idea, clearly the center of the target culture, highlight the quality of personnel training and teaching work, do vocational specialties, ensure that personnel training objectives are truly vocational, and make the quality of vocational education in general further improved and developed

KEYWORDS: Education; Higher Vocational Education Management Academy

China implement nation-building demonstration vocational colleges, and vocational education has a new development opportunity to review the results of a decade of higher vocational education it can be summed up in two aspects: First, to achieve a leap of career development, vocational education has become a new growth point of the development of China’s higher education and it has become a new bright spot in the development of vocational education in China; the second is the reform has made a breakthrough, out of higher vocational education development of a road with Chinese characteristics. The CPC Central

Committee and the State Council attach great impor tance to the development of higher vocational edu cation with the arrangement of the “National Model Vocational College building program,” the o�cial launch and construction tasks, the implementation of our development, and the goal is more clear and accu rate. During the “Eleventh Five-Year”, the general task of the educational front is “universal, develop and improve,” it spreads and consolidates compul sory education and vigorously develops vocational education, improves the quality of higher education.

Vigorously developing vocational education includes vigorously developing vocational education; improv ing the quality of higher education includes improv ing the quality of vocational education. The current focus of development of higher vocational education is to strengthen the connotation construction, improve the quality of education, to further deepen reform, to serve for the purpose of employment-oriented, and innovative training model is to improve the quality of personnel training, so that vocational education is in the promotion of our country from the population big country to country human resources, and it can further the development of strong human resources in the process, to play a bigger and better role. 1 POSITIONING OF A HIGHER VOCATIONAL AND TECHNICAL EDUCATION 1997 UNESCO issued a newly revised “ISCED”, “Standard Classification” will be divided into seven levels of education, university education is for five level, and it is divided into academic-based education (5A) and technical-oriented education (SB), academic education (5A) “course is largely theoretical, the purpose is to enter the advanced study courses and career in engineering and it is required to make full preparations”. That is academic-based education, reinforcement theory, and mainly engaged in theoretical research and engineering-type career. Technically oriented education (SB) is a practice-oriented course content which is divided in specific occupations, the main purpose is to allow students to be engaged in practical skills and possess knowledge required for a career or class of occupations or trades, students completed their studies at this level should have entered the job market in general practical ability and qualifications ‘required’. SB is higher vocational and technical education, popular expression is the vocational and technical education and is vocational education programs through training two to three years of post-secondary and secondary education, those educated at the same time have some basic knowledge and expertise, the main is to make sure they have the appropriate professional skills.

Strengthen macro-control, plan vocational person nel training programs to develop talent competition rules, and maintain continuing vocational education, healthy development of the layout. The Ministry of

Education vocational education institutions should co-ordinate and consider reasonable arrangements, highlight features to prevent herd, low-level redundant construction, which results in excessive competition, idle and waste of educational resources. In competing for students, it prevents unfair competition to recruit students. We should formulate relevant rules, norms, behavior vocational education, and create quality, brand strength to participate in a competitive environ ment. In encouraging the formation of the pattern of multiple investors, the government is still dominant, and it should increase investment, and create a solid foundation for higher vocational education. 2 FULLY GUARANTEE THE AUTONOMY OF

THE SCHOOL

Government plans major aspects of admissions, recruitment admission, fees ceiling tube pipe to live, schools should set up a professional according to market demand, the preparation of lesson plans to choose the curriculum, use flexible teaching meth ods, and engage in a variety of school mode. The

Government simply establishes a scientific evaluation system to control, so that the school itself forms a normal operation mechanism, market acceptance of the specifications of the school for students training, scientific research, and products testing industry. If you train the student to get social recognition, there is a high reputation in the community, great achieve ments, industrial products are well-known, they are bound to grow, otherwise it will atrophy, failure, and be eliminated, and this is the market rules.

3 A COMPREHENSIVE THOUGHT OF

QUALITY HIGHER VOCATIONAL

EDUCATION MANAGEMENT

Quality management as specialized management activities began from the late 19th century industrial production. Since the late 19th century to the pres ent, the industrial production in the field of quality management has gone through three stages and three modes, namely the quality of the testing phase and the post-test quality management, statistical quality control phase and statistical quality management, total quality management and total quality stage management mode. Total Quality Management is an advanced quality management concepts and tech niques developed on the basis of the statistical quality management. Since the 1950s, the rapid development of the social productive forces, science and technology advances, accelerate product upgrading, in market competition, people on product quality and quality management requirements and expectations have undergone some new changes in the past and only focus on producing on the basis of general performance, it also increases the durability, feasibility, safety, maintainability and economy requirements. Also, management science theories, especially the theory of behavioral science have some new developments include prominent point which is the emphasis on the human factor and emphasis on “participation in management.” Business management at the beginning of the application of the concept of system analysis requires the system to analyze the point of view of quality and quality management. Moreover, with increasing competition in the market, especially the international market competition, countries are increasingly focusing on product liability and quality assurance issues. 3.1 Connotation of quality management of higher vocational education Total quality management is di�erent from the conventional quality management methods (such as product quality inspection, statistical quality control) which lie in its comprehensiveness (totality). First, the quality of its management is comprehensive, because the quality of the functions of the various departments are involved in the organization of an organization, and therefore the quality function requires decomposition into all parts of the organization, clear quality objectives and content management activities, as well as strengthen the sector coordination between organizations. Secondly, it is the whole process of implementation of the management, and throughout the market research, product planning is of all aspects of design, manufacturing, inspection and test, service, etc., we emphasize the principle of prevention, and every aspect of the work process is in line with the intended target, the product quality in all aspects of the whole process of the formation is relevant to factors to control them, and it eliminates the factors that caused the error in every aspect. Finally, it is all the sta� to participate in quality management. Quality is an organization that links the various activities of the various departments and comprehensive reflection of all the work, any one aspect of the quality of work of any one person is to varying degrees, and it directly or indirectly a�ects the quality. Therefore, to fully mobilize the enthusiasm and creativity of the organization of all the sta�, from the top management of the organization down to every employee, it has become an essential and vital, in order to form an all care about quality, everyone works together, achieving the situation of full participation in quality management. In addition, it also has a strict quality assurance system, uses systems theory and methods, and emphasizes the various aspects of the production of organic links and cooperation in various sectors. Therefore, the quality management of comprehensive “Three Principle” will become a prominent feature or characteristic of TQM.

3.2 The main features of the application of total quality management in higher vocational education teaching institutions

Total Quality Management in Higher Vocational

College is the whole process and the various factors that a�ect teaching quality of higher vocational edu cation institutions to manage a comprehensive, sys tematic, and it involves all school activities related to everyone in the school, throughout the school among the education and teaching, its main features can be summarized as “three-wide and one.” Three full refers to the entire process, full participation and compre hensive position, it means that implementation of quality management is to run through the whole pro cess from beginning to end, involving all aspects of the system, you need to participate in the organization of each level of each employee; “One more” refers to the diversity of methods, the utilization of a variety of advanced management methods and techniques for quality management. The whole process of Higher

Vocational Education Teaching Quality Management

College is from the vocational education analysis, to position higher vocational institutions, design per sonnel training program, advance vocational educa tion and implement the Higher Colleges Universities

Vocational Education Evaluation and teaching pro cess analysis. Vocational education need analysis, which is a very complex and extremely important issue from di�erent angles educational needs, it should be the theme of the school, regional and other services to start. Positioning refers to vocational col leges of higher vocational education on the basis of the analysis, it is combined with the school’s own conditions and advantages, determines school per sonnel training objectives, professional structure, school level, school size, school ways, and service areas, etc. Vocational education institutions teaching process is the implementation process to implement vocational education personnel training program, its implementation is directly related to the quality of higher vocational education institutions. Quality of

Higher Vocational Education Evaluation and Analysis and improvement of teaching is the last link in voca tional colleges total quality management process, its evaluation and analysis of school location, personnel training program design, education and teaching pro cess will have a major impact.

In management activities of basic education, there are many aspects of the relationship. For example, there are the relationship between the county and township administrative organization of education educational administrative organizations, county administrative organization of education and the relationship between primary and secondary schools and so on. Management of basic education has a clear purpose, these relationships can be coordinated to prevent job bias, while changing the basic education is not conducive to achieving the purpose of the management system, method, etc., We change those educational ideas and concepts to achieve basic education for management purposes contrary, etc. and make education at all levels of management of the administrative organization of basic education systems converge into the state of collaboration and cooperation. Third, the management of basic education has an important unifying role. In addition to basic education in the management of educational administrative organization, activities are organized by the school at all levels of behavior, there are all kinds of behavior at all levels of management personnel, and different status and different content of the work, the different responsibilities, and thus their ideological level will be a big difference in professional quality, ability to work, ideals and so on. In order to effectively manage basic education, we must allow them to join forces for a common goal. And purposeful management of basic education can unite on the basis of each individual education management working in different positions, so that combination is as a whole to work hard to achieve the purpose. At the same time, correct, proper purpose can stimulate their enthusiasm for the work, to mobilize their enthusiasm, thus promoting the smooth development of basic education in management and the implementation of quality education. 3.3 Construction of rational faculty and management staff University teachers and administrators are the main teaching and management, management level professional level of teachers and administrators directly a�ect the quality of the College of Humanities and Education. Now the team and the establishment of management sta� of the university faculty have been some irrationality. As teachers are too large to improve the quality of and keep up with the pace of social development, many teachers do not pay attention to practice and study. This has resulted in a number of school teachers being not convincing, not able to analyze specific issues, and it is combined with the actual content of the students and would not have been paying enough attention in class. The management team has some problems, some school administrators are set unreasonably, there are 800,900 students in the jurisdiction, they have been able to settle these students and cope with their daily work, it will spend most of your time and e�ort, there is no time and e�ort of humanities students manage to go to quality education.

Humane Quality of Higher Education Management scope should not just stick to teaching, and it can have a richer form of management and education. Not only from life practice, students not only receive a good humanistic quality education, but also it can improve school quality, and optimize the campus culture.

3.4 Enrich forms of quality of humanities education

Humanistic Education should be a diversity of forms, such as it may be used in the form of extra-curricular teaching. For example, in the same time we carry out various activities to expand humanistic quality educa tion. For example, the patriotic education and human istic quality education combined. Etc. These are rich in the form of the existing humanistic quality educa tion, and broaden the Humanistic Education manage ment ideas, and it is not just limited to the classroom, in fact, it can even be a school, it is extra-curricular.

Humanistic quality education in the form of diversity management for Humanistic Education runs higher requirements, requirements management is more flex ible. Managers also put forward new demands. A more rational and e�cient management system is essential.

4 SUMMARY

Establishing internal quality assurance in higher vocational colleges teaching vocational education

How to strengthen recessive ideological and political education?

Ning Cao

College of Humanities, Xuzhou Institute of Technology, Xuzhou, Jiangsu, China

ABSTRACT: The current Chinese universities’ problems of implicit ideological and political education have not given sufficient attention, some college students in the cognitive aspects of implicit ideological and polit ical education are still a lack of scientific and reasonable evaluation system. How to strengthen university implicit ideological and political education should improve the level of understanding on the establishment of a special fund to create financial security recessive ideological and political education. Recessive ideological and political education should be implanted into the campus culture construction. Staff of higher education should also play their own charisma effect and play a role of the internet in recessive ideological and political education among.

KEYWORDS: University; Recessive; Ideological and Political Education

1 INTRODUCTION

The ideological and political education can be divided into explicit and implicit. Process refers mostly implicit ideological and political education of students in the implementation of the ideologi cal and political education. The education sta� will educate the intent and the purpose of hiding in the student’s environment and the particular form allow students to study the ideological and political the ory courses on campus life. They are unaware of the gradual acceptance of the content of the ideological and political education. And they complete the pur pose of ideological and political education. Recessive

Ideological and Political Education is a big trend and they are the ideological and political education and the development of new forms of stage. Currently, the implicit ideological and political education is gradu ally being ideological and political education of sta attention. Implicit Ideological and Political Education in Colleges and Universities are to improve the e�ec tiveness of ideological and political education is very meaningful.

2 CONNOTATION AND CHARACTERISTICS

OF AN IMPLICIT IDEOLOGICAL AND

POLITICAL EDUCATION

Implicit Ideological and Political Education refer to the ideological and political education process, through covert, devious infiltration of education, the educational purpose and contents hidden around the students, so that students acquire the appropriate knowledge in the unconscious state methods. From the terms of connotation, implicit ideological and political education is non-academic, it does not exist systematic discipline norms, it more is hidden under the entity’s non-physical culture, and mainly students tend to have emotion. Moreover, they will have other non-intelligence factors research and development. And implicit ideological and political education to the demarcation point is not the dominant ideological and political education that has been the absolute thing, but they should be relative. Both interaction and mutual integration are due to di�erences in the mode of transmission, Recessive Ideological and Political Education have their unique characteristics [1]. 2.1 Concealment of educational content To be implicit ideological and political education process, the content and purpose of education include a form of indirect, covert penetration to students, teachers guide students to gradually integrate into the atmosphere and set the scene. Advantages of this approach is that it is not so noticeable and educated in the unconscious state, they unknowingly receive educational information on the subtle role of implicit ideological and political education of play. 2.2 The educational process has the figure of crossing time and space With the dominant ideological and political education of di�erent recessive ideological, political education has changed the time and venue of the shackles. No teacher in the classroom and place fixed for the content and purpose of education that is to teach the students, but for students living on campus at any time, they can be able to close to the ideological and political education. For example: a freshman at the time of enrollment of students on campus tours can be organized in the joyful atmosphere for students to more easily accept the teacher’s words and deeds, and it may be rules and regulations to protect the environ ment, solidarity and other aspects of education.

2.3 Diversity of educational resources

Implicit Ideological and Political Education is in the broader space as well as a variety of forms of support for educational choice. It is essential to give up the preaching and text-based approach that has extended to specific scenarios, actions and behavior of the characters and other contagious on the way. Through these abundant forms, it is to present in the campus, hidden among the campus. Therefore, implementers

Recessive Ideological and Political Education should use more resources to improve the quality of educa tion, teaching. In addition, college students continue to strengthen and improve the ideological and politi cal training in ethics.

3 TO BUILD RECESSIVE IDEOLOGICAL AND

POLITICAL EDUCATION PRINCIPLE

First, it is the directional principle.

Directional principle requires Recessive

Ideological and Political Education with a clear polit ical direction. In the directional principle, we must adhere to Marxism-Leninism, Mao Zedong Thought,

Deng Xiaoping Theory and “Three Represents” important thought as well as the scientific concept of development as the guiding ideology that cre ated Recessive Ideological and Political Education

System. Furthermore, universities should try all sec tors collaborate to ensure that education can be in the same direction, only highly consistent in all sectors, can we effectively enhance the effectiveness of the ideological and political education.

Secondly, it is the principle of the student body.

We should constitute the object of ideological and political education and the development of moral character, although they cannot boot from and be reflected in the students through the process of ide ological contradictions inherent in the activities. So

Recessive Ideological and Political Education should not only strengthen the leading role of the teacher who reflects also more students in the teaching process.

They should be respected in the subject position, so that students of equality are in the teaching process.

So that teachers and students constitute a positive two-way communication interaction, for the inter action triggered by internal ideological contradic tions sports, play the role of control, self- regulating capacity, and actively accept advanced thinking, change wrong ideas, overcome bad behavior, accelerate ideological and moral development in the right direction and transformation [2]. Then, it is to learn innovative principles. Innovation belongs to the soul of a nation, if there is no innovation, there would be no development. Learning innovative principle requires Recessive Ideological and Political Education is not only to uphold the fine tradition of strengthening but also to absorb the more to continue innovation. Only uphold the principles of learning and innovation, can we be able to ensure that the basic requirements of the ideological and political education of vitality. Finally, it is the effectiveness of the principle. Recessive Ideological and political education must be to strengthen the educational results as a benchmark for enhancing the effectiveness of the efforts. Effectiveness is the starting point and end of all ideological and political education work is the foundation of its existence. Ideological and Political Education Research reflects the traditional dominant ideological and political education in many aspects of exhibition “irrationality and inefficiency.” Therefore, Recessive Ideological and Political Education must strengthen effectiveness. 4 CURRENT IMPLICIT IDEOLOGICAL AND POLITICAL EDUCATION IN COLLEGES AND UNIVERSITIES AND THE REASONS FOR THE PROBLEMS 4.1 Problems 4.1.1 Implicit ideological and political education theory practice deviates from the universities Among the country’s universities, the implicit theory with practice goes against the ideological and political education, the e�ect is not ideal. The idea is good, but in practice, it is not good enough. Such problems are prevalent in colleges and universities, although many of the activities are organized, students are actively involved, but because of various factors, the practice does not reflect their e�cacy. 4.1.2 The depth and breadth of recessive ideological and political education penetration are not sufficient. Implicit ideological and political education colleges have been in existence for a long time, it is to achieve the goal of teaching students gradually penetrate through the development and application of campus inherent potential. However, through the study, we found that the amount of resources that belonged to the campus election a huge system. The easier penetration of the universities in the implicit ideological and polit ical education, cannot achieve the desired breadth and depth. In addition, all colleges and universities should actively develop and use the potential of inter nal campus teaching resources, so that the elements of ideological and political education among di�erent resources permeate achieve proper breadth and depth, all resources should play a recessive e�ect [3].

4.1.3 Recessive ideological and political education does not meet student’ expectations

Implicit ideological and political education colleges are mainly to enhance an ideological and political education of college students’ ideological and moral qualities, but not just to meet current college students that improve their ideological and moral qualities in school, you also need to exercise their overall quality in societies, in particular, the ability to adapt to social practice. To the university level, students gradually become to know the reality through contact with the community, in practice they constantly upgrade them selves. The school does not really meet the students

‘expectations, and it did not improve the ideological and moral qualities, while enhancing students’ social adaptability.

4.2 Analysis of cause

4.2.1 Limitations of teacher cognition

Implicit in the use and implementation of the ideo logical and political education in colleges and uni versities in the process, the teacher played a leading role, but the limitations of their own has produced a problem in the application process.

There is no uniform for cognitive Recessive

Ideological and Political Education. Universities need to sort out as soon as the relevant definitions implicit ideological and political education to achieve a uni fied cognitive order to enhance the comprehensive ness and practicality. Implicit Cognition ideological and political education of college is not in place. It should recognize the importance of effective implicit ideological and political education, through cooperat ing with the dominant ideological and political edu cation, to improve the effectiveness of ideological and political education together. For targeted Recessive

Ideological and Political Education, it is not clear enough that we must realize Recessive Ideological and Political Education are in the form of ideology.

And the political education is in order to serve, we must target the ideological and political education headed in the right direction to use and implementa tion of the recessive form of ideological and political education, and have a goal and a plan for the gradual implementation of education. Only a correct view of the ideological and political education in colleges and university’s implicit goal, can it really enhance the effectiveness of ideological and political education, improve ideological and moral qualities of the students. 4.2.2 The social impact on college students Society has a two-sided nature, not only can we use to speed up the ideological and political education in colleges and universities recessive form, but also hinder the development of Recessive Ideological and Political Education. Currently, the university has more implicit ideological and political education issues; some are from the current social reality. Since the inception of the market economy, more and more people began to focus on economic development, social and moral problems come into being, that is the more serious corruption problem. Such realities of college students have a greater impact on their community through the edification of reality; they become more and more confused, thus ignoring the ideological and moral cultivation. 5 STRENGTHENING RECESSIVE IDEOLOGICAL AND POLITICAL EDUCATION POLICY 5.1 The effective combination of explicit ideological political education and implicit ideological political education As the two main forms of ideological and political education, they should enhance the e�ectiveness of ideological and political education that all have influence. They cannot be replaced. Only in the form of a certain kind of education, it is unable to complete the objectives and standards of education. Therefore, the two cannot waste one, only with the integration of the existing education recessive penetration, which is reflecting the implicit explicit content in education to create a dominant education and the integration of education recessive mode of education. 5.2 Effective functioning of the internet on ideological and political education With the development of technology, the Internet has become the knowledge of university life and it cannot be a lack of information the way, especially after micro blogging, letters and other new media production, which has a greater impact of lifestyle and ideas of college students. However, currently there is a lack of knowledge of Chinese universities in the ideological and political education and lack of content networking platform normative and guiding. This requires e�ective use of the favorable universities channel network, so that teachers and students can be a good interaction, to improve the e�ectiveness of ideological and political education [4].

5.3 Strengthen the construction of campus culture

Construction of campus culture implicit ideological and political education of college has a larger role in the e�ective use of campus culture that should be edu cating people to the campus culture for the channel to complete the implicit ideological and political edu cation. It should create a better campus environment and atmosphere. Environment can change the school; you want to create a clean, relaxed, comfortable cam pus environment. There is a formation of a variety of cultural activities on campus, the content of ideolog ical and political education e�ectively embedded in a variety of activities among students. They struggle to exercise awareness, build community needs good quality imperceptibly.

5.4 The effective combination of specialized courses with other teaching courses

Qualified personnel not only have solid professional knowledge and skills, but also have good morals.

We should penetrate in specialized moral content and other curriculum. Political, moral content can be integrated into courses among literature, history, geography, etc., which can penetrate in extracurricu lar activities. You can talk about all the courses as ide ological and political education arena, the ideological and political education are into all curriculums.

6 SUMMARY

In summary, Recessive Ideological and Political

The curriculum problem is the basis of model school construction

Shaoping Huang

Guangdong AIB Polytechnic College, Guangzhou, Guangdong, China

ABSTRACT: This thesis makes vocational school demonstration project as a starting point. It is a combination of the last ten years of literature on model school building. From the perspective of the audience, it is combing the characteristics of the project due to the inherent requirements of the decision-making level, which is leading to its subordinate business operating space that has very limited level and then free the needs of the audience. It believes that if it relaxes contemplation perspective, consolidates construction of the curriculum, or it is a prime choice related to project management.

KEYWORDS: Curriculum Issues, Model School Project, Coping Strategies

1 INTRODUCTION

Speaking of model school building, it was widely thought that the building of teachers is the core of professional development. Training base construction is the key, international exchanges and cooperation are inevitable, deepening reform is the driving force, the brand features are its lifeline.

Therefore, in the full swing of the building activi ties of model school, each construction unit is tightly around the subject of the relevant evaluation, which carries out many projects to create remarkable results.

However, when people jump out of the framework of the project, you will find the conversion of differ ent perspectives judgments, under granted. In fact, it is with the overlapping path and lost vision.

2 DECISION-MAKING LEVEL

Demonstration school construction projects as a top priority of the development of vocational college. If we have a serious interpretation of its projects, you will find that policy makers at the national level are actually “I hope the focus of strengthening individual professional to pull the entire building vocational” development. The construction of model of college is building a professional school of several key pro jects. To this end, various vocational colleges have set up a dedicated management team, developed a clear-building program and the selection of a good number of professional basis, which is trying to build a solid construction for three to five years, this num ber gradually become a professional building key professional industry.

So, how should we conduct professional building? As we all know, first-class professional are the focus and core construction for demonstration of vocational colleges (hereinafter referred to as model schools). However, the measure of whether a professional class is which includes at least the following five elements of contemplation, one is the main course, the second is teaching sites, the third is teachers, the fourth is student achievement, the last is the social reputation. Among the most important is the building course. Why do we say this? To answer this question, let us look at the real situation of vocational courses now. The study showed that there are a large number of relevant vocational curriculum reform and rapid construction, but “so far, vocational education programs cannot solve the current situation of vocational education and actual work, work process divorced from reality”. Scholars generally concern the classroom teaching process, teaching workers double quality issues such as whether the students’ ability to be well qualified for its corresponding career after graduation or to cultivate good character “is quite weak and in shortage. “Pale, hollow, superficial,” are the three words for the illness of the vocational courses for a long time. If we traced back, one is an onerous task of teaching. Teachers have too much work for the students. One is a handful professional teacher with highbrow, teachers are proud, and they really hardly can have easy integration of resources. On the other hand, it is a daunting task of building over many years, plus a haunting research pressure that “the requirements from all sides and additional tasks, making the current vocational teachers under enormous pressure.” This problem, in fact, as early as in the “Vocational training level assessment” activity comes after 2005, the relevant group of experts are to inspect the assess ment findings that would have shown that the teach ing staff, school funding and education infrastructure and all institutions are with widespread weaknesses.

But there is still a considerable gap between the insti tutions in the connotation of construction and the specific research data that we can see from the table below:

Since years of 2005-2012 of assessment after rec tification, such projects have been “great strides” to promote the construction of vocational college con notation of five aspects, but in reality, the objective problems remain hidden. To this end, the “decision is to accelerate the development of modern voca tional education” that recently issued the “outstand ing college career school characteristics to strengthen school-enterprise cooperative education” strategy will stand occasionally out. Around the “collabora tive” strategy, decision-making revolves around “to improve the quality of personnel training,” stresses the need to “promote the training model innovation, establishes a sound system of course link building”

Double “teachers, raises the level of information to strengthen international exchanges and cooperation.

“Executives have done with varying degrees of inter pretation, such as breaking the faculties’ fragmen tation, integration of college resources, deepening cooperation with numerous enterprises and so on and so forth. It is seemingly emphatic, but in fact, it is difficult.

The courses are the basis for teaching and support, as early as 1949, the father of the modern theory, of course Taylor once said, it is the core curriculum edu cation. There is no doubt, “There are no first-class courses, education, there is no information to convey, express meaning, which is indicating the value of the media. If we talk about the quality of education, it is not deep into the curriculum areas to improve the quality of teaching in any so-called” all “King outright and his words”. Seemingly, so-called any effort is to build a first-class professional and obviously nothing less than entirely different, and even self-deception, no matter how much the project is, it is nothing but superficial only. 3 BUSINESS LEVEL The study showed that since the establishment, curriculum reform has always been a leading cause of policy makers. “In which country will always play an irreplaceable role”, which determines the curriculum reform that cannot be separated from the government largely outside. Vocational education is of no exception. It is limited to congenital deficiency of multiple factors, and it has been the construction of vocational courses in the Cape High imitation and self-Solving stumble row. Naturally, as the various Departments of the operational level, due to the constraints lot of space operations, it is also limited. As the first rank individual teachers have the reluctance. Therefore, in the face of information technology, globalization, under a wave of construction, the market-oriented vocational courses are generally weak and underpowered. Because of this, operational level is around the construction projects of the model school, it is often hard to find homes and easy to select the hardware construction, the external school-enterprise cooperation, management systems make a big fuss. Through the efforts of these aspects, it can indeed make considerable achievements, and gradually build their own distinctive characteristics and unique school, refining unmatched educational philosophy of martial arts. However, due to the habit of waiting on top of the policy, the policy followed by the administration of the school moves forward inertia, business levels tend to be used for construction and reform in government administrative thrust. Once the project ended in full swing, the business layer will likely be at a loss, and lose the path. At the same time, incorporated into the professional construction projects of model school, the resources available will be another rare specialty of their rivals. If there is a broader view of the scale, we could eventually become a model school focused on building professional few. Thus, it is paradoxical that Matthew has emerged, leading to “the strong one will be strong and the weak one will stay weak,” the professional pattern is perhaps beyond the reach of reason, and then mention Curriculum. With respect to the majority of the large number of other students who are concerned, we would have been with the Department of the original piece of blue sky. But it

Table 1. Assess the issues and recommendations made by the Group.

Issues and Recommendations Number of institutions Ratio (100%)

Strong teaching sta

Increase investment and strengthen the teaching infrastructure

Strengthen the training model and Education Reform

Strengthen vocational education theory of learning and research

Improve the management level 12 11 7 3 3 100 92 58 25 25 artificially tilted because of a lack of funds and policy expertise, which ultimately led to gradually include key professional model schools, including some of the core construction and innovative curriculum, both becomes more difficult, the true essence of personnel training gradually disappears.

4 CONCLUSIONS

In summary, we believe that with the di�erent angles, corresponding coping strategies vary. From the deci sion-making level, we should use the right way to dis tribute the funds to handle the problems of college rather than innovate some useless things such as the accession of major, special courses, model college construction, the quality project and so on in one and other years.

Tracing the source of study, education at the national level has become big things, what its role is training for the country and to create hundreds of thousands of successors. The word education has its origin of “educate” in Latin. The original meaning of

“Import” or “Export”, meaning that by some means, it had the potential to put some kind of body and soul inside something it triggered. As the saying goes, it takes ten years to grow a tree, a hundred years to cul tivate an educated person. The vocational education is an important integral part of contemporary higher education, it is also carrying the sacred mission of

“inherit the good culture and make a promising future for future generations”. Therefore, we proposed deci sion-makers for generations’ good completely aban don “Project Management” and “toss management” philosophy, abandon discriminatory thinking of building, by stages to build 100 first-class courses, and then build domestic first-class professional.

First, on the level of the Ministry of Education, we should “do not slow down, do not toss”, focus on curric ulum issues, centralize national vocational resources, classify, organize crack, build up key professional construction, build quality curriculum resources, and thus for the benefit of the majority students. We should never again ignore the fact of “identical professional construction, lack of teachers, lack of experimental training conditions, the employment rate is not opti mistic and inefficient management of anomie”. Then we should never “ignore the real clients,” of too much one-sided focus on teaching, learning and student sta tus and quality of employment for granted, “and in fact, it is precisely important part that we ignored.”

Secondly, on the level of the provincial education department, we should use of force in the province, centralize vocational resources, organize part of the mature discipline. We should be focused to under

[2] Tong Naicheng. National Model Vocational Colleges must do four relocations[J]. Journal of Hubei

Polytechnic Institute, 2010, (1), pp.7–9+14.

[3] Luo Wenyan. Exemplary development strategies to explore vocational colleges [J]. Career Horizon, 2010,

(2), pp.37–39.

[4] Li Hefang. The effects and subsequent development of

National model of vocational colleges-As the exam ple of the first demonstration building institutions [J].

Vocational & Technical Education Forum, 2011, (28), pp.35–37.

[5] Gong Jianguo, Zhou Xuejun, Li Ying, Zhou Rong.

Thoughts on Constructing Model Higher Vocational

Colleges [J]. Adult Education, 2009, (9), pp.52–53.

[6] Wu Yaping. Analysis and overview of nearly a decade reform and construction of the vocational courses [J].

Vocational & Technical Education Forum, 2011, (33), pp.56–60.

[7] Huang Hai, Zhou Yanjun. Thoughts on Teaching

Materials Construction for Higher Vocational

Education, 2006, (2), pp.57–59.

[8] Wu Hongyu, Zhong Qianming. The Root causes and possible solution ways of Vocational teachers Burnout

[J]. Journal of Wenzhou Vocational & Technical

College, 2007, (1), pp.67–70.

[9] Yin Jialin. Vocational teacher burnout [J]. Journal of

Sichuan Engineering Technical College, 2008, (3), pp.15–17.

[10] Qing Zhongquan, Yang Qunxiang. From assess ing the effectiveness of corrective Construction and

Development of Vocational Colleges [J]. Journal of Guangdong AIB Polytechnic College, 2007, (4), pp.17–19.

[11] http://news.dahe.cn/2014/06-22/103029118.html

[12] Wang Xuefang. Situation and Thinking of Teaching

Staff in Higher Vocational Schools [J]. Ningbo

Vocational and Technical College, 2008, (4), pp.22–26.

[13] Li Libin. Study on Teaching Staff Construction in

Higher Vocational Colleges [J]. Hunan Industry

Polytechnic College, 2005, (1), pp.89–92.

[14] Tan Xiangguo. Vocational college faculty status analy sis and Construction [J]. Chongqing Industry & Trade

Vocational and Technical College, 2013, (1), pp.43–45.

[15] Qin Si. Investigates teachers in Higher Vocational

Schools—Taking Hunan Institute of Mechatronic

Technology as a case [J] entrepreneurial world, 2013,

(3), pp.53.

[16] Wang Yonglin, Wang Huiping, Du Jian. Situation of

Vocational teachers’ professional burnout [J]. Higher

Vocational Education(Journal of Tianjin Professional

College), 2008, (2), pp.84–86.

[17] Yang Dengxin, Wang Enjun, Yan Hua. Understanding and Thinking of Course Construction in Higher

Vocational Colleges [J]. Education and occupation,

2007, (20), pp.138–139.

[18] Zhai Haihun. Course is the key to improving the quality of higher education [J]. Henan Institute of Science and

Technology [J], 2011, (2), pp.6–7. [19] Huang Shaoping. Duke spit feeding the world’s hearts •meritocracy should be tolerant to diversity as—crack domestic vocational colleges teachers ‘shortage’ dilemma the only way [J] Guangdong AIB Polytechnic College, 2007, (1), pp.53–57. [20] Yan Yajun, Zhou Guping. Some Thoughts on Curriculum Reform [J]. Educational Research, 2008, (1), pp.31–35. [21] Tang Zhenhua, Zhao Xiaoyan Liu Shanshan. Try to discussion on way, power and nature of Vocational Curriculum Reform [J]. Vocational and Technical Education, 2012, (4), pp.47–50. [22] Zhang Jinggang, Zhao Xia. Reflections on vocational colleges to apply for the National Model Colleges [J]. Time education, 2007, (26), pp.22–23. [23] http://baike.sogou.com/v5764.htm [24] Chen Peiqiong. Vocational colleges to consider decision criteria to determine the - given exemplary vocational colleges to create a program designed to reflect [J] Vocational and Technical Education, 2007, (25). [25] http://www.huanxian.gov.cn/Item/Show.asp?m= 111&d=358 [26] Li Huaming, Li Li. Institutional innovation is an important condition for strengthening the connotation demonstration Colleges - Consideration of Guangdong AIB Polytechnic College to create an exemplary institution system [J] Journal of Guangdong AIB Polytechnic College, 2008. (1), pp.16–19. [27] Fan Liren. Strengthen management connotation construction management of vocational colleges do demonstration - Heilongjiang Agricultural Engineering Vocational College to strengthen the exploration and practice management connotation construction [J] Heilongjiang Agricultural Engineering Vocational College, 2008, (1), pp.3–6. [28] Sun Yun. Attitude and motivation strategies of Staff groups of Model Higher Vocational College in Construction period [J]. THE GUIDE OF SCIENCE & EDUCATION, 2010, (1), pp.95–96. [29] Chen Jie. Hundred National Demonstration Status and Development of Higher Vocational Colleges[J]. Journal of Chongqing College of Electronic Engineering, 2009, (2), pp.8–10. [30] Fan Wei, Ma Shuchao. Thinking about expediting the construction of demonstration vocational colleges [J]. Exploring Education Development, 2006, (19), pp.37–40. [31] Dong Dakui, Lu Ruifeng, Zhu Weping. Present Situation and Analysis Model Vocational Colleges [J]. Vocational and Technical Education, 2006, (01), pp.40–43. [32] Gao Zhenqiang. Build national demonstration vocational colleges: significance, problems and development strategy [J] Higher Studies, 2011, (03), pp.90–92. [33] http://news.xinhuanet.com/mrdx/2008-12/19/con tent_10526392.htm

Research on e�ectiveness of ideological and political education research in we-media age

Guilan Che

School of Electrical & Information Engineering, Southwest University for Nationalities, Chengdu City, Sichuan

Province, China

ABSTRACT: Self-media era of ideological and political education is facing new challenges: educators and educational object of gaining information changes reversibly, which challenged “teachers are” authority; the object of education is increasingly showing a strong “treasonable”, which is challenging the current ideological and political education model; fission dissemination of information is challenging the ideological and political education. We should give up the identity of the authority, and reshape the image of contemporary educators, we should innovate way of ideological and political education, building a network of new model of ideological and political is to deal with the challenges of the media, it’s an important means of improving the ideological and political implementation.

KEYWORDS: We-media era; Information dissemination; Networks; Ideological and Political Education

Internet as representative of information technol ogy brings a broad and profound impact on human thought and behavior on a global scale, but it also has brought great challenges to the ideological and polit ical work of college students, ideological and politi cal education must adapt to social development and carefully deal with the emergence of new situations.

In particular, the 18 th Chinese communist party con gress proposed the new mission that the party should

“firmly grasp the ideological work of the leadership and initiative, give correct guidance to improve the ability to guide, strengthen ideological mainstream of public opinion,” to face this task, Ideological polit ical educators must have a better understanding of the new things and strengthen the research on the impact of our media era of ideological and political education.

Since the ideological and political education is fac ing new challenges, with a wide range of applications and extensions of self-media among student, self- media are profoundly changing the current pattern that teachers and students possess educational infor mation resources on ideological and political educa tion, which impacts the current pattern of ideological and political education and educator’s Discourses status. Ideological and political education is facing severe challenges of the times.

Educators and educational object changes revers ibly on access to information, it is challenging the

“teacher’s” authority of the traditional education model, by the accumulation of knowledge and experience, educators not only in theory but also in knowledge base has a stronger discourse, the advantage that they can integrate the social and political needs of the economy, politics and other aspects of dynamic knowledge with the necessary reserves based on classroom education, by using persuasive and attractive lively content and language intensive education, knowledgeable “Teachers who “image can be convinced by the object of education and won their admiration. In the new media age, the deepening degree of involvement of the new media, the comparative advantage pattern which is established on the theory of the educational and asymmetric information and knowledge is broken, the way of gaining information for the object of education is changing from the passive acceptance of a given format to a dynamic type active search and it becomes more than a single way to get passed. Source of information is so convenient and diversified that “teachers are” dominant position in the transmission of information is weakened, capabilities of network media is unprecedented strengthened, “the disciples do not have better teachers, teacher does not have to Yin to his disciples,” in constantly been confirmed in the process of gaining information. Because “In traditional society, time and space are closely linked, ‘What time is’ and ‘what place’ are inseparable, and modern times is a ‘blurring’ of the time, it is open from specific space, with a the causal properties which is beyond space.

1 THE STUDENTS ‘PRESENT SITUATION OF

USING SELF-MEDIA

Since the emergence and widespread use of the media, it is a product of the times, it also the inev itable result of the development of information technology. As college students grew up under the media environment as the generation, they not only are impacted by we-media, but also deeply a�ect the development trend of we-media. On the one hand, we media meet the college students’ needs of show their independence and individuation, on the other hand, it also makes the daily lives of college students closer to the media.

1.1 Content and form of ideological and political education break through the restrictions of time and space

Since the backward past teaching equipment and teaching conditions, the students’ ideological edu cational activities are often carried out by teachers taught in a collective unity, and because of the lag in information technology, social a�airs for some students, cannot be understood timely, which leaded to University Students Ideological and Political

Education limited by time and space and reduced the e�ectiveness of teaching. Since the advent of the era of the media broke the constraint of time and space on ideological and political education of college students. With the help of convenient Internet tech nologies and mobile terminals, students are able to understand the social information and find the desired information quickly through the network, so that students’ ideological education more targeted and timeliness.

1.2 Self-reliance of students’ learning

The ultimate goal of education is to enable students to learn self-education. Every educator has their inde pendent initiative, college students through the use of network technology are based on their own cir cumstances and hobbies and other content from the primary to select the learning to improve their own quality and character cultivation. At the same time, we-media can protect students ‘personal information well. Everyone is on an equal, open network environ ment. The courage to boldly express their ideas out, it not only cultivates the students’ self-confidence, but also helps students gain a deeper level of com munication. It improves student self-management and self-learning ability. It maximizes the use of self-me dia technology to allow students to participate in the ideological and political education in independent activities, which has an active pact on improving students. 2 NEW MEDIA ENRICHES THE MEANS OF IDEOLOGICAL AND POLITICAL EDUCATION Traditional ideological and political education is based on classroom teaching, seminars, talk, and social practice as an aid. New media age, SMS, forums, micro blogging, with its convenient, flexible features, they are becoming the new carriers and new means of ideological and political education. New media can convey educational content to the educator in the shortest time, through text, images and other means of communication. Students can obtain the knowledge required information by phone, Internet and other ways. They are not necessarily in a specified location at a certain time to receive education with the traditional way. It provides students not only with convenience, but also enriched the means of ideological and political education. The new media have increased the autonomy of the ideological and political education of the new media age, college students change from passive learning to active learning through the network, forums, micro blogging and other new media, college students are able to choose their knowledge or information freely based on their needs, but you can also use diversified ways to reply to the information timely in two-way interaction. In active search, the e�ect of ideological and political education has been rising, and in two-way interactive information dissemination, and college students to actively participate in interaction, thereby it enhances the ideological and political education of college students in the autonomy. 3 IMPROVE THE QUALITY OF IDEOLOGICAL AND POLITICAL WORKERS, AND ENHANCE THE EFFECTIVENESS OF IDEOLOGICAL AND POLITICAL EDUCATION New media age, ideological and political educators in universities must have a deep understanding of the new media and managed applied network, mobile communications technologies to the ideological and political education of students. Meanwhile, we should use the Internet to build their own platform, and guide students learn the advantages of using the Internet; we should pay attention to network information and statements timely, and to guide students ‘comments; we pay attention to understand the idea of dynamic networks, and conduct public opinion surveys with new media, and spread ideological and political education. In addition, the ideological and political education workers also understand language and communication mode used by students to network and enrich the content of the ideological and political education with the way students like. It shortens the psychological distance between educators and stu dents, and teachers preaching.

4 STUDENTS’ REFLECTION ON

IDEOLOGICAL AND POLITICAL

EDUCATION ADAPTABILITY AT

WE-MEDIA AGE

In the self-media age, the challenges arising from the various media information of uncertainties, educators must emancipate our minds, and courage to explore, to innovate, and e�ectively avoid moral hazard due to a variety of ideas, which caused by lack of men tal preparation, prevention uncertainties caused by changes in the negative impact. As Marx pointed out:

“The people themselves are the basis of his own mate rial production, and other basic kinds of production is therefore him, all this happened on the human impact of the production of the main case, will be in a greater or lesser extent on the change”. People are of various functions and activities, which will change people as material wealth creators of all kinds of functions and activities performed by commodities. “Educators are intertwined in the reform, moral and network triple factors work together under the influence, in order to clean up its traditional ideological remnants with concept of contemporary art, we should be along with the trajectory of reform, we should use the latest tech nology to build a highly e�cient network education model, it is the current ideological and political edu cation policy.

4.1 The impact of self- media on contemporary ideological and political education

Since the emergence of new media, communicating with others is no longer limited by time and space, so it is popular among college students. Students can freely express their views on we- media, to highlight their own personality, to get the latest information, it can greatly satisfy their curiosity and showmanship.

However, with the dissemination of information from a variety of media, a lot of false information which is di�cult to discern has infiltrated many college stu dents, it is a great challenge to their outlook on life, values and ideals and beliefs.

Broaden their horizons, to promote the idea of col lege students mature. Since the media communicators from all levels of society, it not only has government officials, public intellectuals, movie stars, but also has grassroots from all walks of life. With the help of the self-accessible media information, everyone can speak freely on the self-media, including social phenomena discontent criticism of the government, even the information which is difficult to see in the traditional media can also be unimpeded on the media. We-media has become a big stage where different ideas collide together. Individualize and strengthen their self- consciousness of college students. Under the traditional means of communication, university students as receivers, only passively absorb all kinds of information, personality is difficult to highlight. With the development of media technology, students have greater information autonomy, the release of enthusiastic college students’ information dissemination, it narrows the distance between their community, which greatly stimulated the thinking of self-awareness and personality of college students. As long as there exists a network where college students can self on media freedom in communication with others and share their most realistic feeling of lives. Features of quick and easy and interactive of self-media meet the needs of college students for personalized information, it also inspired college students to show their personality will. There are moral anomie and dilute sense of responsibility of university students. We media as a communication tool, it facilitates the dissemination of information, but it also led to some of the Students’ Network Moral Decline. We-media is a virtual environment where college students can enjoy imagination, show personality, enjoy themselves, experience and roles that is completely different from reality. At the same time, convenience and non-binding of we-media contributed to the students’ psychological luck and indulgence. Network violence, disclosure of personal privacy, slanderous and other phenomena in the media is endless, vocabulary with an insult and the offense is not uncommon. 4.2 Information security crisis on ideological and political education The information presented here refers to the information in the self-perception and the news media. In the absence of information on the regulatory situation, in order to meet the public curiosity and social aspirations, we-media abandon the pursuit of social responsibility, it will focus on the negative news, and some even distort facts and fabricate news, social public opinion is distorted and amplified. Compared with the traditional one-way information dissemination and transfer of media, first of all, we media can easily collect source and public opinion in a short time, broad participatory media age makes the self-sustainability trend was particularly evident, thus it will have more abundant than other traditional media attention resources, the rapid spread of this information will undoubtedly make college students confused at the fact, and misleading their thinking and behavior. Secondly, the positive energy from the media attention on resource development is a shortage, educational way is single, the lack of artistry, for example, the influence of processing is away from the true personality of real people due to the reported lit erature, it tries to make the perfectly portrayed char acters remain in “paper”, it means typical lost Pursues can only be abandoned by the real world. Meanwhile, the current focus of the social contradictions stage appeared to provide negative emotions fermentation with the soil and air, negative emotion continue to extend the network justice and ine�ective, “spiral of silence” phenomenon intensified social contradic tions, it mixed with irrational down the true language

World’s “fence.” Finally, the ideological and political positions in the construction of classroom educators lag, dull language can not be compared with “color ful” self-media. The traditional cultural superiority is disappearing step by step when Western culture in advancing, they began to lose the right to speak, facing irresponsible remarks based on strong inter personal ideological and political education work in the Internet irresponsible remarks, they are power less. When the information element is formed as one thought becomes unsafe, the environmental crisis of ideological and political education has produced.

5 SUMMARY

In legal and institutional level, and we gradually formed to carry out legislative work on the Internet in

Education equipment configuration and funding situation analysis of underdeveloped areas of information technology in rural primary and secondary school

Zhongming Jiao School of Journalism and Communication, Gannan Normal University, Ganzhou, Jiangxi, China

ABSTRACT: In order to understand IT teaching conditions and living environment in the less developed areas of rural primary and secondary school, the paper uses questionnaire survey equipment to investigate education of some rural underdeveloped areas of information technology in primary and secondary school in

Jiangxi. And it has analyzed 2011–2013 investment and construction of the status quo in education funding for information technology equipment. The results show: Less developed areas in primary and secondary school education information and technology education equipment cannot meet the needs of the development of education with a lack of funding support, poor school environment and information technology teaching conditions. And this phenomenon has been analyzed, and effective measures are to improve primary and sec ondary school education in underdeveloped areas of information technology conditions and educational level.

KEYWORDS: Underdeveloped Areas; Primary and Secondary Schools; Educational Information;

Educational Equipment; Funding

Since 2000 China’s implementation of information technology education, the state has invested a lot of money in basic education of “Modern Distance

Education Project in rural areas” and “School Link” and other projects. Some scholars of education in basic education funding for investment in infor mation technology have been studied from a macro level [1], from educational information and rural basic education information technology investments and discuss countermeasures, it made a very good proposal [2] [3]. There is also information on the con struction of basic education in Northwest [4]. Thus, to understand the current primary and secondary infor mation and educational equipment funding situation in underdeveloped areas, optimization is an e�ective way to improve the delivery e�ciency and e�ective application of funds.

1 DEFINING A RESEARCH QUESTION

“Underdeveloped areas” refers to the constraints of history, ideas, location and other conditions, state of imbalance of the social economy. The factors of production and the availability of the low utilization rate of technological progress is slow, which lacks of adaptation to institutional arrangements for promot ing social and economic development, which result ing social and economic development of the region is relatively low. As relatively underdeveloped areas, history, dynamic concept, its basic meaning is at a low level of development, economic and social competitiveness is not strong. In order to more precisely define the less developed regions, some researchers ultimately draw conclusions by drawing the human development index and the index level of development. The areas are Shaanxi, Chongqing, Ningxia, Qinghai, Henan, Hunan, Jiangxi, Sichuan, Anhui, Tibet, Gansu, Guangxi, Hainan comprehensive development Index of Yunnan and Guizhou and the places of less than 75 percent of the national average and, therefore, these 15 areas are defined as China’s underdeveloped regions. Primary and secondary school education and information technology equipment refer to primary and secondary schools in information technology education with software, hardware sum of the equipment. This study is to investigate the technology and equipment investment of the current situation in Jiangxi primary and secondary education in underdeveloped areas. Basic information includes educational information and equipment, construction status of digital campus, building multimedia classroom situation, the construction status of voice laboratory, computer room on construction status. Through the device status information about the current degree of Funding in Jiangxi Province, we should see whether the primary and secondary equipment has reached the standard of education information.

2 RESEARCH DESIGN AND SAMPLE

CHARACTERISTICS

The study uses survey research, including surveys and interviews. Respondents were from Fuzhou,

Nanchang, Ji’an, Xinyu, Yichun and Ganzhou, respectively, a random sample of 38 rural primary schools (34 primary schools, three rural teaching points, a nine-year school) and 47 junior high schools in rural areas, the survey period is from 2011–2013.

In the schools surveyed, the largest numbers of rural primary school teachers are 201 and the students are more than the number of 4800, a small number of teachers are nine, the numbers of students are 248.

Rural teachers are at least 4, and students are 47. In junior high school: research is from six schools in

Fuzhou City, , Nanchang, Ji’an, Xinyu, Yichun and

Ganzhou. The schools Survey basic situation is: school enrollment is up to 4100 students; at least 300 students are in the school.

3 SURVEY DATA ANALYSIS

3.1 Basic education funding value of information technology equipment

3.1.1 Distribution of information technology in rural primary education equipment

In the survey of primary schools, from 2011 to

2013, the information technology education equip ment value is about 100 million yuan in five primary schools, the most are of the 3.2 million yuan, which is in a nine-year private school. The basic value of the distribution of its equipment is shown in Table 1.

Through the range of information technology equip ment values can be learned in Jiangxi rural primary education in the last three years of information tech nology equipment with less investment and lower edu cational value of information technology equipment. 3.1.2 Information rural primary education funding distribution equipment In these schools, the largest survey of information technology education equipment annually funds is 220,000 yuan, the less one is only 1–2 thousand yuan. From 2011 to 2013, Most funding of school for information technology equipment for the education of a primary school in the town, was 280,000, 340,000, 250,000, the total investment is 870,000. Nine-year schools are private schools; invest up to a total of 3.2 million. Total school year investigation into the distribution of funds as shown in Table 2. In the survey of 38 elementary schools, 13 schools are equipped less than 10,000 yuan, a percentage of 34.21%. Fewer instructions in economically underdeveloped areas of primary schools are applied to carry out modern educational technology funding. 3.1.3 Distribution of information technology education in rural junior high value equipment Junior middle schools in rural areas of information technology education in primary schools compared the distribution of equipment worth slightly better situation, up to 600 million, about a minimum of 10 million, but the value of the vast majority of school equipment is less than 50 million. (See Table 3). 3.1.4 The average purchase costs of junior high school education information and technology equipment In a sample of 47 junior middle schools in rural areas, more than half of the average high school education in rural areas in Jiangxi information technology equipment acquisition costs are 5 million or less, only two schools are more than 50 million acquisition cost (see Table 4). In today’s rapidly changing information technology equipment, such a low cost of equipment

Table 3. The distribution unit of information in junior high education equipment value: ten thousand yuan.

Funding >500 500–400 399–300 299–200 199–100 99–50 49–0

Number of Schools 2 0 1 3 6 10 24

Table 2. Rural primary information education funding distribution equipment unit: 10 thousand.

Funding >50 50–30 30–20 20–10 10–5 5–1 Less than 1

Number of Schools 4 0 2 9 5 7 13

Table 1. Distribution of information technology in rural primary education equipment value.

Funds range >1million 1000–500 thousand 500–100 thousand 100–50 thousand <50000

Number of Schools 5 4 10 8 11

Table 6. Multimedia distribution table construction funds.

Construction funds More than 1 million 1–0.5million 500–300 thousand 300–100 thousand 100–50 thousand 50000 below Ominous

Number of Schools 2 1 0 1 7 6 1

Table 5. Digital campus construction time and funding state distribution.

Year of construction 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013

Number of Schools 1 1 1 0 1 1 2 2 2 1

Investment funds (yuan) 200000 Unknown 500 0 100000 Unknown 100000 5000 20000 Sponsor

Table 4. The average purchase cost of education information technology equipment unit: ten thousand.

The average acquisition cost range 0 1–5 6–10 11–20 21–30 31–40 41–50 More than 51

Number of Schools 1 25 8 5 2 2 1 2 acquisition illustrates information equipment renewal in school education are slow to keep up with trends in

IT development.

3.2 Construction funds investment and digital campus situation

Each campus has digitized its school construction, they invested di�erent time and funds, mainly in the construction period from 2008 to 2012, the invest ment fund the gap is large, investment funds most of the province is 500 yuan, the most is 20 million, spe cifically as shown in Table 5.

3.3 Number of building multimedia classrooms and funding conditions

Construction funding multimedia education directly a�ects the quantity and quality of the multimedia classroom building has been built in 18 primary schools, which by construction funds for basic distri bution in Table 6. 3.3.1 The number of junior high school multimedia classroom building Junior high school building multimedia classroom situation is slightly better than the status quo in primary schools, 46 schools in the survey, besides two schools, all of the other junior high schools have at least one building multimedia classrooms. But there are more than 52% of the schools, only one classroom, 22 percent of the school building has two multimedia classrooms, although multimedia classrooms in junior high school basically universal, but its quantitative point of view, it cannot meet the teaching needs of teachers. Table 7 shows the multimedia classroom building for the number of junior high school. 3.3.2 Junior high school multimedia classroom construction investment funds case Junior high school multimedia classroom constructions are 10, which began from 2003 to 2013, and its funding varies in di�erent periods. As shown in Table 8 below.

Table 7. Distribution of the number of junior high school multimedia classrooms.

Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 14 34 No

Number of Schools 24 10 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2

Table 8. Multimedia classroom construction and distribution of investment funds.

Years 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013

Number 1 1 1 12 25 34 7 21 23 12 3

Funds (ten thousand) 40 12 8 55 25 61 115.1 209 352 15 18

Table 12. Primary time and money put into the distribution room building. 1998–2002 2003–2008 2009–2013 Ominous

Number of Schools 2 7 7 2

Funds (ten thousand) 27.67 132.5 147.8

Table 11. State primary school computer room.

Construction of distribution station 300–200 99–50 49–0 Unknown

Number of Schools 3 8 5 2

Table 10. Number of junior high school language lab construction, funds distribution.

Years 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013

Number 1 1 1 12 25 34 7 21 23 12 3

Funds (ten thousand) 40 12 8 55 25 61 115.1 209 352 15 18

Seen from the table, junior high schools con centrate on building multimedia classrooms for the

2009–2011 periods, the construction funds were

1.151,2.09,3.52 million.

3.4 Language lab building and the number of investment funds case

Elementary school language lab time and funding the construction of the case are shown in Table 9. Funds are from the year of construction, the language lab-building fund is still relatively small.

3.4.1 The number of junior high school language lab construction

46 junior middle schools were surveyed, language lab schools build a total of 17 junior high school building. Other than 84% of schools do not have to configure the language between rooms, schools has built language lab, one has 70, 2 schools have

2 with100 seats, a school has 3 rooms with 130 seats,

2 have four rooms with 200seats.

3.4.2 Junior high school language lab’s construction and investment funds

Time junior high school language lab building larger span, from 2005 to 2013, is the largest investment funds in 2011, which was 3.1 million. From the amount of funding the construction with the cast, the most in each language lab construction fund is 1.03 million yuan/room, and investment fund for a minimum of 50,000 yuan/room. And more than 59 percent of the construction funds in the language lab 5–6 million (see Table 10). With so little language lab building, it is worth considering how e�ective their teaching. 3.5 Construction of school computer room 3.5.1 The construction of rural primary room Surveyed in rural primary schools, 18 primary schools have rooms, 20 have no building room (but no room school was set up IT courses). That is more than half of the schools that do not have a computer room construction. Room school building distributed are shown in Table 11 the number of units from the computer room. 3.5.2 Rural primary room construction time and funding situation Rural Primary room construction time and funding situation are shown in Table 12. Seen from the table, the time of the computer room of the building focus on the past 10 years, the investment funds are up. 3.5.3 Rural junior high school computer room construction A total of 45 junior high schools in rural areas builds a computer room, the building rate reached 98%. Junior High School 3384 units were equipped with a computer, the number of units in each school building and room number of di�erent computers, the average number of computers in each room were about 75 units (see Table 13). 3.5.4 Funding situation of rural junior high school computer room construction Rural junior high school computer room construction funding gap is large (see Table 14), there are over 35.56% of the investment in school construction

Table 9. Lab building fund of investment distribution in primary language.

Construction time 2000–2003 2004–2008 2009–2013

Funds (ten thousand) 17.95 48 25.2 funding of 10 million or less, about 37.78 percent of the school’s computer room invested funds in

11–20 million. That is more than half of the school’s computer room less than 20 million funding.

4 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

In order to achieve a balanced development of edu cation, the less developed areas of educational infor mation are to improve the level of education is one of the focuses of the current plan. China’s “Decade of

Education Informatization Development Plan (2011–

2020)” clearly proposed to “narrow the digital divide, the actual demand for basic education, to improve the level of the basic configuration of all schools in the information infrastructure, teaching resources, soft ware tools, etc. raise the overall proficiency. Focus on supporting rural areas, remote and poor areas, minority areas of information technology schools and public service system. We should spare no e�orts to narrow between regions, between urban and rural dig ital divide “between schools and. However, we can see survey data from the analysis: the current information technology education in rural primary and secondary schools, and funding and equipment configuration compared to a big gap between developed areas, far short of the needs of information technology in edu cation, mainly in the following aspects.

4.1 Number of educational equipment of various types of information cannot meet the teaching needs

In the less developed areas of rural primary and sec ondary education information, technology equipment includes multimedia classrooms, a language lab, computer room, digital campus network. Judging from the number of configurations, these devices are basically not to meet the needs of teaching. It did not reach our country and our province education information device configuration standards related parameters. Especially, the country from the begin ning of 2000 requires schools to o�er IT courses at all levels, however, more than half of rural primary and secondary schools do not have a computer room construction, although these information technology courses are o�ered by the school, but teaching cannot achieve the teaching e�ect. Language lab, there are the same problems in the construction of the digital compass with the lack of these device configurations, which not only led to the quality of teaching issues that hinders the e�ective implementation of information technology in education, and severely restricted the sharing of physical education resources, thereby contributing to the great digital gap. 4.2 Insufficient capital investment results in equipment quality is not high Our educational information is mainly based on all levels of government funding, capital investment intensity is directly related to the level of local economic development, underdeveloped areas have relatively backward economy, due to the constraints of the local economic level, a serious shortage of investment in information technology funds, single investment, lack of total investment, the lack of protection mechanisms. As for the Educational information device “much older, less new, not used, failure and more”, the configurations are below the required standard of education information application, seriously a�ecting the e�ciency in the use of information technology and education e�ects equipment. 4.3 Lack of long-term funding mechanism to restrict investment in information technology education for sustainable development The current investment in underdeveloped areas in the country is to provide more “project-based” input-based, when the “Project” interrupted education information related activities will lose financial support, educational information restricted stability and sustainable development. As can be seen from the information technology equipment investment of time of the primary and secondary education in rural areas in Jiangxi, when there are the national project inputs, the capital investment is high at this stage, when there is no project inputs, schools at all levels have almost no capital investment. In short, as for equipment configuration of information technology in primary and secondary

Table 13. Rural junior high school computer room construction.

Quantity 1 2 3 4 5 14 8 4 1 3

Number of units (units) 80 166 292 252 415 725 568 312 200 374

Table 14. Rural junior high school computer room construction funding situation (ten thousand).

Construction funds 0–10 11–20 21–30 31–40 51–60 70–80 91–100 More than 101 1000

Number of Schools 16 17 4 3 1 1 1 1 1 education in underdeveloped areas, there are various problems limiting education information smoothly, in order to achieve the application of information tech nology to improve teaching effectiveness, to achieve true balanced development of education, the follow ing aspects should have their improvement.

4.4 Change mode of device ownership, improve the allocation rate of various types of equipment

The current ownership of the way primary and second ary education in underdeveloped areas of information technology equipment is generally all schools. These devices of schools configure need a lot of money. But lack of funds underdeveloped areas is a real problem, you can change the way the ownership of the equip ment to improve the rate of the device configuration, such as the use of “lease” and “outsourcing” of the way through to external agencies the way to pay for the transfer of professional services to bear. So that a solution to the question of money solves the problem of slow device configuration and update issues.

4.5 Optimization of funding mechanisms to promote the sustainable development of information technology in education

Change a single investment by the government based mechanisms, the power companies, communities and other aspects of integration in, achieve multi- transport e�ects. In the capital investment process should be carried out according to the status of teaching school, teaching planning system domains planning, step by step hierarchical allocation of funds, will be sustained and steady acquisition of information technology equipment of all types of education, to achieve sus tainable development of information technology in education .

4.6 Enhance teachers’ IT capacity of the rural application of new technology to improve the performance of school education

In recent years, government and education authorities

Fusion of modern information and English teaching technology under the constructivist theory background Juan Chen & Shuang Zhao

Hebei Institute of Communications, Shi Jiazhuang, Hebei, China

ABSTRACT: The rapid development of multimedia network technology, multimedia teaching English pro vides a technology platform. The constructivist theory and modern information technology are two pivot mul timedia teaching system. Only to unite the two together as one, it can form a reasonable and effective teaching system. Accordingly, this paper discusses the theory of multimedia teaching, design and multimedia network technology of a modern information technology education in English teaching and other related issues.

KEYWORDS: Constructivism; IT education; Multimedia teaching

1 INTRODUCTION

English is an important part of university teaching and at present domestic universities not only wide spread set English majors, but also will set one of the public courses in English. After the reform and open ing up, English education in the country has been receiving widespread attention. In recent years, with

China’s accession to WTO, foreign demand for talent multiplication, English education is highly valued.

But for a long time, the domestic English teaching always stays in the model of speaker teachers, the stu dents’ passive learning teaching. In this teaching, the teacher is teaching the subject and the student is the object of teaching and learning in a passive position. Therefore, students are not enthusiastic, and English teaching is di�cult to obtain better teaching results.

In order to improve students’ motivation to learn

English, to change the students’ passive learning situation, exploring new teaching ideas and teaching mode is imperative.

English teaching undergraduate and graduate populations such objects should learn foreign lan guage teaching and second language teaching in the more popular “Whole Language Approach” idea to organize teaching. The latter as a language teaching ideas, the theory is that it advocates the main language skills training which is holistic, not by imitating the process of learning the language and grasping all the details to get the language skills. It is mainly through contact with the outside world, and agrees to absorb all kinds of language specification, creating personal language skills. Therefore, it is very focused on the internal aspects of the language skills associated with each corresponding to the various aspects of language teaching, and it advocates listening, speaking, reading and writing skills attainment integration and strives to complete the language displayed in front of students. 2 SPECIFIC CONTENT OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY AND CURRICULUM INTEGRATION There are many statements and the definition of information technology and curriculum integration. Looking at these points, we found that the main contradiction is based on a di�erent understanding of course concepts generated. Information technology and curriculum integration refer to the integration of “IT” and “course”, not the “IT” and “curriculum integration”, which is crucial for us to correctly understand its meaning. In the system of scientific methodology, the “integration” represented as two or more smaller parts of things, phenomena, processes, physical attributes, relationships, information, energy, etc. in the context of compliance with the specific objective law or certain conditions, the combination of into a larger whole process and results. Information technology and curriculum integration definitions can be divided into “big integration theory” and “small integration theory” two. “Great integration theory” as understood course is a broad concept. This view is mainly information technology into the overall curriculum go, changing the course content and structure, change the entire curriculum. “Little integration theory” is the information technology and curriculum integration is equivalent to the integration of information technology and teaching. Education expert Professor Liu Maosen thinks: the so-called information technology and curriculum integration refer to the Purpose of IT education courses and curriculum teaching task, the task of teaching integrated in the same process. Here clearly defined information tech nology and curriculum integration is the integration of information technology courses and curriculum.

Education expert Professor Li Kedong thinks: infor mation technology and curriculum integration refer to the process of teaching information technology, information resources, information methods, human resources and curriculum combined together to com plete a new way of teaching tasks. The three basic points of Integration are: 1. Implement the teaching activities in the multimedia and web-based infor mation environment. 2. The teaching content of infor mation processing resources becomes learners. 3. The use of information processing tools allows students to reconstruct knowledge.

3 CONSTRUCTIVISM AND TASK-BASED

TEACHING

Constructivism is an important part of the cognitive theory, also known as structuralism. Its origins can be traced back the theory of cognitive psychologist

Jean Piaget. Constructivism thinks that learning is a process of active construction of knowledge, and therefore should be implemented student-centered, teacher-assisted learning model. In the constructivist teaching model, and teachers are helping students to construct knowledge and facilitator who, in addition, teachers in teaching, but also for the students to meet the learning needs and create learning situations. At the same time, teachers should organize and coordi nate the activities of students, which is conducive to the development of knowledge-building direction.

Therefore, in the teaching mode of constructivism, students are active builders of knowledge and the subject of information processing, rather than the traditional teaching mode passive learning object.

Constructivist teaching philosophy emphasizes stu dents’ learning motivation, as students learn the sub ject, in line with the development of the concept of modern education.

Task-based language teaching is a teaching method under the influence of the rise of construc tivist theory. In recent years, the teaching began to be introduced to our fundamental English classroom teaching. For term task, in academic research has a different understanding. It was defined as the task of learning the job, but to Richard Chee school of thought, represented by the task is to achieve specific learning goals and design activities, and therefore more in line with the requirements of constructivist teaching philosophy. In other words, one task is the task of teaching the teachers in teaching students to complete in order to facilitate language learning and settings. 4 CONSTRUCTIVIST THEORY OF EDUCATION IN ENGLISH TEACHING Constructivist learning theory to the current English teaching new ideas puts forward a series of new ideas, has an important guiding significance to the current English teaching, and provides theoretical support for English teaching reform and innovation in education. Above, we have said, constructivist theory of teaching English in practice has been receiving more and more attention. Therefore, we can say that the impact of the constructivist theory in college English teaching is also growing. Now, the multimedia are increasingly being applied to English teaching job, but in the end what is the e�ect of constructivist multimedia English teaching? This is a very worthy of study. Through a long period of study, we found that constructivist theory will have an impact on the multimedia teaching English in the following areas. 4.1 The impact of construction theory of college English writing Constructivist theory thinks that cooperative learning is the so-called “student interaction”, referring to the interaction between the students and the impact, including panel discussions, mutual evaluation, mutual encouragement, cooperation and mutual assistance and other activities for teaching and learning, and to create a relaxed and happy lively teaching environment of cooperation and competition, this environment is to encourage students to construct a good prerequisite knowledge structure. This is particularly important for the teaching of English writing teaching, because English writing itself is a practical lesson which requires students to actively participate to achieve the purpose of learning. Furthermore, students’ ultimate goal of English writing is to get communication ability of English listening, speaking, reading and translating this teacher-student exchanges and cooperation between students can make students get more opportunities of practice in class and benefit a lot. Teachers and students’ breaking communication barriers, and creating interactive classroom information technology and curriculum after integration, indeed with its unique charm promote the teaching and improve classroom teaching effectiveness. In many cases, we use multimedia courseware which ties the student body as a learning initiative with its limitations, although students are attracted by the courseware, but also in the “conclusion” shackles, which does not truly reflect the subjectivity. Meanwhile, teachers in the use of multimedia courseware are often overlooking normal exchanges between teachers and students. In fact, not only is the process of teaching students to acquire knowledge of the process, but also expose students to doubt, difficulties, obstacles and contradictory process and display student intelligence, personality and the for mation of independent innovation, and in this case, it needs talks between teachers and students. To achieve normal communication, effective communication, it is necessary to strengthen the teacher-student inter action, from a pragmatic view, do not put superfluous and should realistically solve the problem. In teach ing the use of information technology is not better, but advocates for the full, to be just right. Only in the case of getting the best support of information technology, it is the best “integrated” when teaching gets the best results.

4.2 Establish a comprehensive teaching evaluation system

For a long time, China’s traditional teaching evaluation system as an evaluation of the test results based primarily on student learning outcomes, while ignoring the students’ learning process inspection.

For this evaluation method of teaching, students will study hard for a period of time before the exam, blitz memory and recite and their test scores will be high.

For some students, this is inevitably unfair evaluation methods, and just. Compared with the traditional evaluation of teaching e�ectiveness, constructivist theory of teaching evaluation is more focused on assessment of the knowledge acquisition process, and more emphasis on the development of individ ual student learning assessment. Based on the the oretical construct, on the basis of English teaching, schools and teachers should change the traditional way of teaching evaluation, and give students a comprehensive evaluation with the evaluation of the student’s learning process and learning outcomes, which will help the students to make a more com prehensive evaluation. For learning outcomes mainly by way of examination, and for the evaluation of the knowledge acquisition process is relatively complex.

Specifically, on the basis of English teaching pro cess, teachers keep the students’ usual learning atti tude, classroom performance, homework completion observed and recorded. At the end of the semester, students were evaluated when teachers took these factors and final exam scores counted in accordance with a certain proportion, considering these factors in order to make a relatively fair student evaluation.

This comprehensive evaluation system of teaching students not only can be able to make a more appro priate evaluation, but also help to increase students’ interest in learning and improve students’ learning enthusiasm, and thus more e�ectively improve the e�ciency of the classroom.

From a philosophical point of view, integration usually refers to the interaction between several things or factors related to the synthesis of a new unified whole construction and refinement process. In this process, both in the process of “integration of ” those things, and those things “blend in” in the process this thing, the result is caused by changes in the development of these common-related things. Integration does not mean mixing. Mix only means that add simply two or more things together, and qualitative change of things itself in the mix did not happen. And integration emphasizes the integration between various components of a qualitative change and eventually forms a new unity. Thus, the comprehensive and in-depth integration requires relatively long development process variations. Understanding of information technology IT is not equivalent to computer technology. IT includes computer technology, which is only a small part of it. But in the eyes of current teachers, especially in primary and secondary school teachers, there are a lot of people misunderstanding the meaning of the information technology. They equate the IT with computer technology and thus information technology and curriculum integration will be “reasonable” misunderstood as computer technology and curriculum integration a. 5 SUMMARY Constructivist thinks cognitive development and learning process are closely related to the individual, thus more clearly illustrating the cognitive process of human learning that is how learning happened, how to construct meaning, how to form the concept, and what is the ideal learning environment etc. And it creates a more e�ective cognitive learning theory in the constructivist thought, which is important for our teaching practice, especially for English teaching and causes teaching practice with a clear basic stance, but also gives our teaching a practice guiding revelation: to play an active, initiative, focus on creativity. In English teaching activities, students and teachers’ enthusiasm should also be paid equal attention which means both emphasis on “bilateral activities” between teachers and students, also fully mobilizing “bilateral activities” or “multilateral” between students; Knowledge transfer – strengthen the traditional teaching model – memory of talents has many drawbacks for the cultivation of talents. Therefore, implementing education policy, using teaching theory, selected to implement teaching strategies, teaching methods design, and materials should be conducive to teaching students to play an active resistance, mobilize the initiative and contribute to creating ability paying attention breaking the “balance”. Learner’s individual cognitive schemata is through the “assimilation” and “accommodation” and continues to develop from a “balanced” state to another higher level of “balance” the state.

The key is to rebuild the “unbalanced” completed.

This requires educators to care, truly understand the students, and be minded people in teaching practice so that establishing the factors that cause an imbal ance and causing learning activities into the healthy, growing cycle.

[1] Zhao Huimin. Based on constructivist theory of task based college English teaching [J] Mudanjiang College of Education, 2014, 08:79–80. [2] Jia Hong. On the constructivist theory revelation for English Teaching [J] Xinjiang Education Institute, 2005,03:70–75. [3] Pang Hui. on the Construction college English teaching theory under the Teachers ‘Role [J] Shandong Agricultural Administrators’ College, Jan. 2009:184–185. [4] Liaoshun Ping. College English Teaching investigation under the Perspective of Constructivism [J] Zhaotong University, 2013, 06:108–112. [5] Yuan Zhaohui. New Model of College English Teaching under the Constructivist Theory [J] Shaanxi Education (Higher Education Edition), 2013, Z2:84. [6] Li Wei. Revelation social constructivist theory of College English Teaching[J] academy (education and research), 2012, 10:30.

Comparative study of college English traditional listening and speaking mode and network listening and speaking teaching mode

Shuang Zhao & Juan Chen

Hebei Institute of Communications, Shi Jiazhuang, Hebei, China

ABSTRACT: Since 1958, the United States Watson research center designed the world’s first computer teaching system, the history of computer technology in education lasted for over 40 years, with the beginning of digitized audio and global network as a symbol of the information age, the rapid development of multimedia network technology’s application crosses various fields, like other areas, foreign language teaching has also benefited. January 2004, Department of Higher Education issued a “College English Curriculum Require ments” (Trial), which clearly states: “It should make full use of opportunities of multimedia, network technolo gy development which is brought about by the introduction of the new teaching model to improve the original teachers’ single classroom teaching mode. The new model should be based on modern information technology support, especially network technology, the English teaching towards individualized learning, independent of time and place restrictions learning, active learning direction.”

KEYWORDS: College English; Teaching model; Online teaching

Constructivists view that learning environment con tains four elements, namely: “situational”, “collabora tion”, “conversation” and “construction of meaning.”

Internet media is not helping teachers teach the means of knowledge, but to create situations, to provide stu dents with a self-learning environment. The core of constructivists’ theory is based on student-centered, emphasizing the students’ knowledge of active explo ration, active discovery and significance of the active construction of knowledge. Due to the requirements of constructivists learning environment has been the latest IT achievements of contemporary strong sup port, which makes the constructivist’s theory and teaching practice increasingly, the majority of teach ers are generally combined, it also has become a new era of China’s reform and foreign language teaching network the guiding ideology of foreign language teaching. In constructivists’ mode, it is under the guidance of a personalized online teaching, collab orative learning, learning modules and management have been matured enough.

1 CURRENT SITUATION OF COLLEGE

ENGLISH LISTENING AND SPEAKING

CLASSROOM

After college English teaching reform policies intro duced, many universities have carried out to explore new ways of teaching multimedia network envi ronment, and human-computer-based multimedia teaching model combines classroom computers and gradually improve and perfect. This mode to hear the main emphasis is personalized learning and independent study. But in recent years the journal literature shows: Most of the studies were talking about college Intensive Teaching and achievement in the classroom, said the e�ectiveness of the audio-visual classroom and self-study involves very little so far it has not said molding audiovisual teaching model was put and come out. The so-called liberal learning is a teacher in addition to individual guidance, entirely for students, according to their interests and hobbies of their own choice of learning content learning. With this way of teaching, the teachers emphasize the greatest advantages of computer-assisted language teaching, convinced that with the support of computers and networks, the locale truer, richer language materials, so when students personalized learning giants will be greater. In fact, many students ignore the guidance of teachers, the teachers do not even ask questions, which is not conducive to learning freestyle emotional exchange of teachers and students, and the students in the complicated network resources in a variety of hypertext links easy to deviate and Trek, plus they will soon learn inert lose interest in learning and go to the movies and entertainment. Audiovisual listening and speaking is the status quo analysis of classroom teaching, practice teaching in English universities, many colleges and universities have to reform college English teaching, to meet the needs of the new era of national personnel training, truly implement the Ministry of

Education and College English Teaching Reform

CET spirit, improve the quality of English teaching, teachers teach mainly single classroom teaching must be reformed. Given to the number of stu dents and the relatively limited use of educational resources, we make full use of multimedia, network technology development opportunities brought to modern information technology support, especially network technology, is teaching English listening and speaking towards personalized learning, not limited by time and place of learning, active learn ing direction. September 2006, our foreign language teaching site for teachers and students in the school, building a New Horizon College English teaching resources online learning platform and, creating a relaxed and harmonious, pleasant learning envi ronment and learning atmosphere for personality development of students, teachers online teaching provides a convenience. This advanced network teaching has brought a series of planned teaching mode from the classroom to the textbook reform designed to achieve a large amount of information, three-dimensional multi-dimensional presentation of teaching and learning model human-computer interaction.

Web-based learning for learners of various net works offers more possibilities and opportunities.

For example, since it is possible to obtain informa tion quickly on the Internet, which encourages stu dents to find what they are interested in. We can use the Internet to quickly find the latest news. We can use the Internet to quickly find a variety of different types of audio-visual learning resources. Learning is through virtual exchanges. Various networks through exchanges between computers for learners opened up another important area. Open University in the

UK, if the students themselves do not understand a previous text, or cannot, answer any questions, he can send for help to “all the people” through the com puter, all the problems in less than eight hours can be answered. Learners can, through their own needs, by Email proactive interaction with their learning partner, instructor, etc., discusses learning prob lems. In addition, they can also take the initiative, with the “bulletin board” for learning. Multimedia assisted English audio - visual teaching is to appear as linguistics, education, information technology, produce and produce, along with their development and growth. 20th century transformational genera tive linguistics was born, brought about a profound revolution. With the advent of the digital society, language labs are “high tech” and “digital.” A new generation of multimedia language system, intelli gent language systems continue to produce. This requires us to constantly adapt teaching methods and study mode multimedia language system. 2 BUSINESS ENGLISH AUDIO MULTIMEDIA NETWORK TEACHING MODE UNDER THE LISTENING AND SPEAKING Business English audio multimedia network teaching environment that breaks the traditional teaching concept and ideas, it has unique advantages, how to build a business English audio multimedia network teaching mode under that of many English teachers should consider. The following is the author of some of the practical teaching ideas and practices. Multimedia network builds a real business environment. Multimedia network teaching business English listening and speaking, by the action of language, image and sound simultaneously in multiple organs of students, so that they have a “virtual reality” feel, will greatly narrow the gap between education and the actual business environment. By presenting real multimedia network in the business world, you can fill the gaps textbook knowledge which is limited and effective to remedy student business knowledge and experience missing. Students through real feel real business environment greatly stimulated the interest and enthusiasm for learning. For teachers, the flexible use of multimedia network for teaching listening and speaking business is very important. In instructional design, teachers need to find business English listening and speaking teaching resources from various sources (textbooks, newspapers, magazines, books, business copywriting business to the Internet), to create conditions for improving students’ communicative competence; in the teaching process, teachers should provide students with the real business English listening and speaking scenarios (such as offices, airports, etc.) and oral communication for business vivid, true themes. As taught in business negotiations prewar to prepare teaching, teachers must first do multimedia network, through illustrations, audio and video combined form, to show the students a real opening scene of the movie business negotiation. The negotiating atmosphere of the scene immediately fascinates every student. 3 LIMITATIONS OF TRADITIONAL TEACHING MODE With the modern English language proficiency continues to improve, the current model, there have been many limitations and drawbacks, unable to meet the needs of college students, we cannot mobilize the enthusiasm of the students to participate in urgent need of reform listening and speaking patterns. Through this investigation, we analyze the data by combining modern educational trends, listening and speaking teaching should do the following: on audiovisual content, said: innovative, and up to date. Keep up the theme of the times, the use of any recent news facts; improve students’ English skills for current events. Each unit corresponds to establishing objec tives and improving usability, thereby strengthening students’ purpose, and it allows students to apply their knowledge can be very good. Audiovisual and blind listening combined make audiovisual say chal lenging, sparking student interest. The teacher’s role: teachers can use means of tests to test students’ lis tening comprehension, and increase student interest.

The teacher should strengthen the feedback and com munication with students. The end of each exercise, the teacher should note that students need to improve the place, or the student’s right or wrong, the appro priate recommendations to give students, so that stu dents can better understand their English defect and change direction. Hardware: computer configuration to improve the engine room, perfect system defect, making the network more smoothly teaching listen ing and speaking, students save time and improve e�ciency. In short, Developing English audio multi media network environment of teaching and research, it is the call of the times, and constantly improves the requirements of college English listening and speak ing teaching mode network, and it is the only way for the students to raise English ability to the next level.

4 NETWORK ENVIRONMENT TO OPTIMIZE

THE TEACHING EFFECT

The teaching network environment, the most impor tant non-real-time interactions between students and teachers, this interaction is conducive to learning and living order overlooked, giving the opportunity to dis cuss the participants to speak when others thinking di�erent, so as to respond, leaving the other side of the issue and deal with room preparation time, mak ing his remarks posted online when possible to think twice. In addition, many researchers note that the online discussion is more equal than the traditional classroom discussion and democracy. E-learning platform, multimedia learning courseware and other three-dimensional multi-level teaching resources enable students to acquire knowledge of the chan nel towards the direction of diversification. In this way, students from passive recipients become active explorers, learning itself is turned personalization and autonomy. Therefore, the network teaching bet ter meets the di�erent levels of students’ individual requirements. Students learning environment equality of personality is not only conducive to their brains, imagination and creativity, but also better reflects the value of the individual, and thus bearing the res ponsibility of self-learning consciously. Teachers can mobilize the enthusiasm of the students, so that stu dents learn to maximize autonomy, which gives full play to their innovative spirit, we can make teachers teaching philosophy successfully implemented. Web-based teaching model, such as multimedia, teaching can combine with the traditional face to face teaching, instructor in business English listening and speaking training process to teach students skills related to specific materials for the difficulty, and provide practical and specific business operations in the scene strong simulation exercises to practice at the same time enhance the training of students’ independent learning ability, will be able to use a lot of rich online learning resources, students can consciously become the subject of a whole self-learning process, teachers ready to give proper guidance, can be effectively business English listening and speaking courses for real-time performance and accurate self-assessment. Traditional teaching mode and network teaching mode in teaching practice and procedure are in each of deficiencies, such as it can effectively combine the two to make the teaching process optimized. Based on the above empirical research, teaching business English listening and speaking should strengthen the following: As students are learning the subject, you first need to strengthen students’ self-awareness and ability to learn. Choose moderate difficulty and extensive real theme Business English listening and speaking material, each topic is based on a simulation of Business Communication active scene. Take full advantage of the rich features of network resources and fast, so that teachers and students will learn cognitive timely, practice, master, and use it to consolidate several key aspects combine to make the students of business English listening and speaking courses efficiency can be improved quickly and efficiently. 5 SUMMARY The Interactive English Teaching Network has unparalleled advantages, it ended the traditional “Teacher - Classroom - recorder” single teaching model for English language learners to provide a good carrier, relaxed learning environment, greatly mobilized student interest in learning English, learning to play the initiative for the creation of favorable conditions. In the network environment, students become active and meaningful, with more teachers and students beyond the traditional classroom interaction and student interaction and human-computer interaction, it not only trains the students’ self- learning ability, but also mobilizes students’ actively exploring capacity. Of course, even though the network teaching listening and speaking have significant advantages, but there are still some shortcomings. First, the ability of independent learning needs to be improved. Some students don’t proficiently use modern information technology, lack proper attitude and approach to learning independent information technology and they have created a new environ ment, but they lack the independent learning ability, thus a�ecting the e�ciency of the use of e-learning.

Second, Language laboratory construction scale keeps up with student growth, limiting the overall network teaching reform pace. However, with the fur ther development of interactive audiovisual, teaching mode is increasingly sophisticated. These issues will be resolved sooner or later.

[1] Zhang Wanxin. Based College English audio Moodle platform that build and practice of integrated teaching mode[A]. Guizhou Institute of Foreign Languages. Proceedings of the 2012 Symposium to learn a foreign language in Guizhou Province[C]. Guizhou Province Foreign Society: 2012:5. [2] Zhu Wenxin Business English audio multimedia network teaching mode under [J] Hotan Teachers College, 2011,02:164–165. [3] Luo Mei Yun. Network audiovisual teaching mode in English Teaching [J] Shanxi Normal University (Social Sciences), 2011, S4:201–203. [4] Gao Songjie, Gao Yuuan. Teaching mode in the network environment [J] audiovisual technology horizon, 2014,20:151. [5] Liu Xiaoxing. innovative teaching college English listening and speaking patterns [J] Ningbo Institute of Education, 2012,03 49–52. [6] Ren Xiaowei. Teaching Mode in College English Teaching Listening and Speaking - A Case Study of Taizhou College[J] Jinan Vocational College, 2013,06:63–64 + 67.

Ink applied research of element graphic design teaching in intangible cultural context

Songqi Yao & Xiao Chen

Pingxiang University, Pingxiang, Jiangxi, China

ABSTRACT: With spreading and deepening of intangible cultural heritage protection movement in this cen tury, Chinese ink art is among the masterpieces of the oral and intangible heritage of humanity. Institutions of higher education are an academic heritage, culture, communication, personnel training platform and carrier, we assume an important role in the protection of heritage and ink art. Modern design teaching is in order to better local cultural heritage, but also to change their design education, more and more traditional elements are used in the classroom student design works. This paper aims to cultural connotations of traditional Chinese ink painting itself carrying elements and aesthetic charm of the excavation, analysis and sorting, which will be teaching in their designs into modern art. The contemporary art and design are to make cultural connotation and aesthetic meaning, making a good combination of tradition and art.

KEYWORDS: Ink; Graphic Design; Research

1 INTRODUCTION

In recent years, more and more international artists and designers began to focus on China’s intangible cultural heritage and traditional folk culture. The pro tection of Chinese traditional culture and history have more and more attention of the world, as an integral part of traditional cultures ink art, it is also facing the problem of inheritance and development. Ink art is the essence of Chinese traditional culture; it is a valu able resource for art. But the lack of awareness in the importance and value of teaching and research and in graphic design, graphic design college education in today’s excessive emphasis on art theory and tech niques of Western knowledge and learning, leading to many colleges and universities teaching design effect is similar, traditional art teaching and research base in a blank state. More and more college students have training design class of intangible culture and tradi tional Chinese culture is poorly understood. Many colleges of art and design students on Chinese ink art are ignorant, leading many students continue to follow the design of the works of others ideas lack of artistic content and cultural heritage, such as teaching model seriously that affected and hindered the college quality, innovation and development.

2 LANGUAGE FEATURES OF INK ART

There is a new understanding of the natural charac teristics of the ink, simple features, ethereal features, features black and white, highlight ink is a living, and ink is spiritual. By studying the characteristics of the ink in the graphic design course, re-sort and integration, and the combination of modern fashion, completely jump off the traditional sense of the ink, making our dialogue with the world based on the local starting point. Involvement in teaching graphic design ink art, is conducive to the development of graphic design, graphic design can improve the quality of the work, such as design work to make us feel the quiet, empty, ethereal realm, and fashion is an abstract way to find real Chinese designs for the world. More and more artists in the literature on the nature of the ink use in the pursuit of art, often in the creation of a natural ideal, so that the ink has a “natural” art features. Ink Art emphasizes sincere thoughts and feelings of the natural expression should reflect the true nature of emotions, to make the screen image of the natural form of expression without embellishment, not false exterior, primitive nature, not deliberate, but it should be a natural quietness and activeness in heart to show things in the world. “Virtual and real, no painting at all into Wonderland” is a simple summary of Chinese painting and cultural beauty. [1] Ink art of “simple” feature is not a general sense of simple, sloppy, sloppy, but it is to reach the delight in emptying several pens dripping, meaning cross wide, which relies on non-accomplishment of the deep, the skill cannot, its image is of simple, rich meaning to convey minimal elements for more information. Ink art where special emphasis is teaser to go cut some unnecessary details, so that the screen is virtual and real. There is a notable feature is the black and white as the main color painting. Ink works at a real representative and white part is an artistic process that includes virtual mood. There is stability in the works of black role, there is a sense of weight, and large areas of white gives a light, crisp, elegant feeling, only with the combination of black and white, to make the screen full of visual impact.

3 ANALYSIS AND RESEARCH OF TWO

TEACHING GRAPHIC DESIGN At present, in the Chinese graphic design, courses offered roughly are divided into public courses, spe cialized basic courses, specialized courses. Teaching content is around the drawing, color, sketching, three compositions, art history, Chinese crafts, Introduction to design, computer-aided software design, creative graphics, graphic design, logo design, typography, graphic design, book design, packaging design, CI planning and design, computer integrated design started. Throughout the course content, the course focuses on the technical capacity to learn, the lack of design ideas and culture of accumulation. China has a long history of students through arts, crafts and

Chinese art history courses get minimal decorations limited traditional culture and education. Most of the teachers and students are to focus only on collecting and exploring the external shape and decoration of formal beauty, ignoring the historical evolution of the shape of the object carried by age and cultural system. It does not strengthen learning traditional

Chinese culture; the lack of cultural roots is equiva lent to the loss of soil to survive.

4 APPLICATION OF CHINESE TRADITIONAL

INK ART IN GRAPHIC DESIGN

TEACHING With significantly growing of the Chinese economy,

China’s comprehensive national strength is improv ing. The way of the development direction of graphic design teaching should go with Chinese characteris tics graphic design, graphic design teaching reform direction to meet the needs of the geographical local ization designed to absorb the essence of traditional ink painting, using to show the beauty in the form of ink. To emphasize the meaning of traditional ink painting is with a distinctive, unique personality par ticipate in the exchange and development of world culture. The effective use of the elements of tradi tional Chinese ink painting, modern aesthetic form to find a meeting point, which enriches the design of the form, but also has the spirit of the times, in line with the modern aesthetic Claim. So as a source of creativity, graphic design is to strengthen the teaching of Chinese traditional graphic design for future students in the school, in the context of profound local culture, learning Chinese traditional culture, heritage and promote it, its five thousand years of cultural precipitation culture of learning is particularly important. On graphic design education, it should focus on the basic cultural connotation of the spread of graphic design to fully explore the topic, ink art through the use of the rich features and means of expression, at the same time more effective dissemination of graphic design and presentation of information is to achieve heritage social responsibility traditional ink painting. Effective use of traditional ink elements and modern aesthetic form are to find a meeting point, which enriches the design of the form, and has the spirit of the times, in line with the modern aesthetic requirements. So for the future in graphic design students at the school, in the context of profound local culture, learning Chinese traditional ink culture, heritage and promote it, its five thousand years of culture has a creative source of precipitation, graphic design is to strengthen the teaching of Chinese traditional ink-cultural learning that is particularly important. In graphic design visual elements, you need to spread your ideas and plans, with text and graphics to convey information to the audience, through these visual elements so that people know about your ideas and plans. So the graphic design of teaching Chinese traditional ink-cultural learning should be reflected in the following aspects. First is to combine creative design theme ink, ink art is to complete the graphic design, which requires us to have a higher understanding of the ink, the subject matter and graphic design are to use the screen coincide with an ink picture to illustrate the theme of the design and meaning. It is an illustration design course. The second is the use of ink calligraphy elements to assist in graphic design, and now a lot of graphic design, such as the cover, logo design courses, has extensive use of calligraphy as a design element, which greatly enlivened the character design content. The third is the implication with ink pen and performance results for graphic design, mainly in the performance of ink-point, line was re-constituted, this type of design is widely used in the design Loushu broader application, which can be a good starting to enrich the performance of graphic design techniques. Therefore, to find the best combination of both, we will be able to use the ink in the form of the design. [2] For the design theme, we should consider whether this performance is suitable for ink language to express, not all designs are suitable for ink to show, so when choosing performance techniques, it must not be far-fetched, mechanically, abuse generic. If you use the language to express the ink, the ink on the ideological content of the inclusion techniques should also very clearly understand. Play simple techniques will work empty, not prone to appeal. Ink painting techniques and design combined should have formal beauty. Therefore, to find the best combination of both, we will be able to use the ink in the form of the design.

Teaching in graphic design is to enable students to fully understand the various forms of traditional

Chinese patterns, digging its profound meaning, cleverly integrated into the graphic design into their heritage and develop it, which will make China’s graphic design work to design more cultural future and social. Text graphic design is the indispensable constituent elements, with the graphic elements to achieve creative theme. Text is not just conveying information; it also plays a decorative landscaping and even the role of cultural heritage. Therefore, it works on the text put forward higher requirements.

In addition, we look at many of our graphic design work, it is the application of computer art, calligra phy has its advantages side, it is easy to regulate; but it is the lack of spirit and vitality and the lack of art istry. Innovation is the soul of design, graphic design teaching to enable students to use text elements to explore, to innovate. In modern graphic design, the use of the traditional text graphics creative graphic design is very common that can be said to be one of the most characteristic manifestations of localization.

Manifestations of Chinese traditional ink characters have a unique charm carving, calligraphy, Chinese character fonts and ingenious structure that it picto graphic Chinese characters implies infinite possibil ities in visual performance. Students are encouraged to use the traditional text design, performance works connotation.

For the re-understanding and use of ink art, graphic design course will bring new vitality; greatly enrich the content of graphic design courses. Today ink art has been widely used in various fields of graphic design courses; courses in the field of poster design, packaging design courses, book design curriculum, and logo design courses are playing an increasingly important role. We use in Graphic Design Teaching ink art elements, which generally have the following two reasons. On the one hand, it is to enable students to pursue a bold innovation in the form of freedom of artistic expression; the other is to make our students understand the traditional ink painting, traditional ink culture produce deep feelings, especially for tra ditional ink cultural heritage with a sense of respon sibility. This needs to be based on the traditional teaching process, the use of ink, an organic design concept borrowed from the West, the traditional ink and Time elements are into one personality and common wealth to the vitality of the new form of artistic expression, to convey with a Chinese character design. 5 CONCLUSIONS Looking back over the past 30 years of Chinese Modern Graphic Design that have traveled, although it still could not get a set to their own satisfaction, and social satisfaction of sound modern graphic design education system. However, we must not blindly chase discarded from the cultural reality of alien cultural forms of primitive cultural tradition, let us education gradually lose the rich cultural heritage of indigenous emotional memories. Lost glory of Chinese national culture personality of modern graphic design will not qualify for independent status in world culture. Therefore, the new understanding of the national culture is a very pressing issue of education practitioners must face. The Chinese traditional ink art has a unique graphical sense, ideographic nature, in the form of beauty that can help us to avoid superficial and standardization of modern graphic design knowledge, to make the teaching of modern graphic design is unique and original visual language for ideological connotation. Chinese traditional ink painting beneficial inspiration is for the modern graphic design education in modern society development, graphic design for teaching and research should not only be for a single analysis of a discipline, whether in practice or in theory, we should put Graphic design as a cultural form to treat. National thing constitutes the essence of the times and social properties design culture. Different nationalities and different ages constitute special circumstances of different cultural values. Therefore, the cultural traditions of each nation should be effectively constructed in every nation in the design of a certain age and cultural systems. Ink art has unique styling and beauty in line with the creation of art and design requirements, which will give designers today with endless spiritual insights, creating both a “functional beauty”, but it has the “design beauty” newborn cultural context. Today, in the field of Western design, powerful thinking force postmodernism has to make a more humane, more regionalization, more historical sources are fully developed and utilized. However, in the era of global economic integration, in the form of foreign culture blindly chasing the trend, we design teaching must not in this backdrop gradually lost domestic unique, valuable cultural genes, with the loss of a unique nation individual brilliance. On the basis of the traditional ink painting full understand ing, whichever is the “meaning”, which is extended his “God” in the right leading university teaching graphic design to be refined and play, we may find a personal style, modern style ethnic style, traditional styles complement each other in the development of new design direction. [3] At the same time, so that the cultural tradition of pioneering, emotional, cognitive nationality, art and design originality, performance practices and teaching resources Smart diversity require tight combination with the development of the times, it is the Construction of Modern Graphic

Design Teaching System with Chinese culture

Research on moral education of PE teaching

Pengju Li

Zhengzhou Normal University, Zhengzhou, Henan, China

ABSTRACT: Moral education in Physical Education is mainly embodied in physical education content, physical education organization, activities, and sports competitions. Moral education in the implementation process of Physical Education is with the characteristics of direct participation, dynamic, body and mind. Moral education in Physical Education pathways is: a combination of conventional classroom education; a combi nation of different materials and features educational content, emotion in teaching, affection, the use of reason able physical education teaching methods and forms of organizational education, the combination of students’ behavior education, infrequent events combined treatment education and a leading role of outstanding teachers.

KEYWORDS: Physical Education; Moral Education; Quality Education

Moral education is an important part of school edu cation. Strengthen students’ ideological and moral education. Physical education is an important task to improve the quality of teaching an important part of sports. Physical education consciously is inte grated into the moral education, students will not only be able to exercise, the more important thing is to develop students’ patriotism and collective spirit, have the idea of the organization, discipline and love of labor, to protect public property of civilized behav ior, students’ honest wit, proactive, and progressive mental qualities. Therefore, according to the students’ physical education teachers in physical education manifested their thought, emotion, personality and behavior and they should grasp its characteristics, in accordance with its laws, to penetrate into PE teach ing moral education in all aspects of the process.

1 THE IMPORTANCE MORAL EDUCATION

OF PE TEACHING

1.1 Schools need to achieve training objectives

Schools should cultivate and foster moral, intellec tual and physical development of qualified personnel; as for the basic way of teaching, physical education is no exception. Because the moral education of students working there is simultaneous, hierarchy, repeated, practical, progressive features, and Physical

Education with openness, community, competition, practice and teaching materials, teaching organization particularity and other characteristics, which deter mines the special status of moral education, which is the subject of any other educational irreplaceable. 1.2 Need to improve the physical quality of teaching How is the final result Physical Education, in addition to teaching other factors, student understanding of sports attitude, the collective spirit, sense of morality, learning motivation, enthusiasm, organization and discipline, scraps entrepreneurial spirit and so on, the quality of teaching has the greatest impact. Arguably, the two classes in the same school, the original basis of the students’ sports are almost the same, but after a few years, but significant di�erences in physical education, two classes of students in di�erent moral quality are an important cause of the di�erence. Moral education is an important part of school education that plays a very important position in school education. In school education, physical education is the only one from early childhood to higher education that must be compulsory courses offered. Throughout the school age, children must undergo physical education, therefore, physical education is an important way to carry out an effective means and moral education. How will the new era of moral combine the two sports integration, namely, moral education in physical education college physical education must be the subject of further study. 1.3 The moral function of PE teaching Physical Education actively guides students to establish a scientific outlook on life and values, to stimulate their interest in learning, to identify the coordinates of life. Correct course of life pursues di�erent goals and ideals. Therefore, physical education should have di�erent projects, di�erent side to stimulate students’ interest and guide them to establish a scientific out look on life and values, to promote the comprehen sive development of their future in society.

Physical Education enables the students because of their common values and sense of community, which mainly reflected in the teaching of collective pro jects, such as football, basketball, volleyball, group calisthenics, etc., they are for the benefit of collective honor and closely united together.

Physical Education students through the cultivation of emotion, will, perseverance, faith achieves the pur pose of educating people, complements the work of the school moral education, extension and concrete.

In physical education, it is through a standard, cor rectness, standard, graceful movements of teaching techniques to stimulate students’ interest and desire to learn to increase their faith, develop their will and perseverance to achieve the purpose of teaching.

Due to competitive sports, it can stimulate stu dents’ ambition, self-motivated, they worked hard to cultivate courage of excellent quality, such as sports teaching competition, difficult teaching programs and students poor showing changes in other aspects of the incentive function sport.

Sports and fatigue, slow stress, enhance mental health association; it can alleviate human anxiety, relieve symptoms of depression, get sports pleas ure, and get physical and psychological satisfaction, such as stress, fatigue and other symptoms resulting in learning and work, which can be adjusted through sports, the effect is significant.

2 MORAL EDUCATION METHOD OF THE

PHYSICAL EDUCATION TEACHING

With a noble spirit to shape students in physical edu cation, teacher’s words and deeds directly a�ected and infected with the students. As a teacher must strengthen his cultivation, improve his or her own quality, availability of an enthusiastic, proactive pro fessionalism. Through good manners teachers, stu dents will establish a good image, plus the teacher’s demonstration action specification, walking, instru mentation and rich content, so that students are sub ject to the influence of the subtle, imitation look at ourselves, to give comprehensive education.

Teachers use a good feeling to infect students in physical education, ideological and moral education, the key is the teacher’s words and deeds. But by example more than to explain in words, the nature of physical education teachers decide most of the time outdoors and students directly contact, regardless of wind and rain, heat or cold must lead the students to complete the task of physical exercise, in this difficult environment, the impact of teacher is the greatest.

In summer, the location of the station is the teacher facing the sun; in the cold, the location of the station is the teacher of this invisible outlet face of education, teachers and students are into deep emotion and judgment of good things, thus improving students in the pursuit of the good things. Physical education teachers, should encourage competition frequently by using the method of ideological and moral education of students. To stimulate more general language, posture implies, model demonstration and other means are to encourage advanced and spur lagging behind, to mobilize the consciousness of the students’ enthusiasm and creativity. Physical education in a variety of ball games, relay, standard tests, competitions, etc., are filled with fierce competition. It has a strong moral education factor. Teachers use the time to encourage competition law. The first is to educate students on the proper treatment of a temporary victory, students good personality psychology, both to enjoy the joy of success, to better withstand the test of failure, so stay humble in victory, stay positive in defeat. Second, we must educate the students for discipline, legal education, because any competition is conditional, which must be carried out within the scope of the rules, or they will be punished, so as to enhance the students’ law concepts. Finally, it should enable students to recognize the individual high technology, only in close cooperation between the fellow are in full play, to train students the spirit of collectivism. 3 THERE ARE MORAL EDUCATION PROBLEMS IN UNIVERSITY OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION College Physical Education at the moment of moral education is facing a number of puzzles; causes of confusion are not the same. Through long-term observation, study author summarizes the following three reasons: First, it is the influence of the social environment. With the deepening of the reform of contemporary society, the negative impact of the market economy is also becoming increasingly apparent. It has a strong impact on the contemporary college students worldwide and life goals, resulting in some students in the classroom performance of passive sports, team consciousness, even in sports, it generates resentment greatly influenced the course of Physical Education in Moral Education. Second, it is the impact of the campus environment. With the surge enrollment in the number of universities in higher education in 2000, the construction of school facilities and the environment are far less than the existing needs of the students, resulting in a lack of college students learning resources. Some students feel neglected, which produced a slack learning ideas, this gives moral education in colleges tremendous impact. Third, it is the impact of the family environ ment. Now the students are mostly the only child at home, by all sorts of pet parents, their life skills train ing and social skills are more scarce in the context of contemporary society, many parents of children give pragmatism and utilitarianism education for college students, which had a tremendous negative moral impact.

Diversity basis for moral education disciplines provides a scientific basis for sport. It is a science, is a door for people’s physical and mental development of important knowledge. It is built on the basis of the natural sciences, social sciences and humanities, and basic ideas of dialectical materialism and historical materialism as a methodology, based on anatomy, mechanics, physiology, education, ethics, psychology as the basis for discipline. Our moral education for students not only has a rich theoretical content of education, but also has a scientific basis, so that the students will not only generate reverse psychology.

For example, in support jump teaching, some stu dents have very good physical fitness, and poor tech nical action, and then we can combine anatomy and mechanics to improve the technical movements, in order to achieve the purpose of cultivating students’ self-confidence. Some students have good physical condition, technical movements are correct, but they do not dare cross the equipment, then we can combine knowledge of pedagogy, psychology, to improve stu dents’ psychological quality to students courageous and resolute will of the quality. Without these basic disciplines as a teaching based on the student’s edu cation, they will become hollow and weak, let alone in the apartment Moral Education in the Physical

Education.

4 FEATURES OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION

DETERMINES THAT IT IS AN IMPORTANT

MEANS OF MORAL EDUCATION

Unlike other cultures, teaching Physical Education classes, the di�erence between it and other sub jects teaching are cultural di�erences between each other. Physical Education is extremely dynamic, openness, and social and has other characteristics.

Dynamics refers both to the students’ thinking intel lectual activity and observation ability. It also refers to teachers and students, and students, teachers and equipment, student interaction and practical equip ment, which allows students to participate directly in body and mind, the students visual, auditory and full tactile stimulation can stimulate the students’ good emotional experience. In general, students of various ideologies and behavior are not reflected in the ver bal, but their actions shown for out. Teachers base on student performance out of the actual situation timely and target for moral education, both specific and practical, so that students can be inspired ideologically, the key is through hands-on and experience, it puts this good idea awareness and behavior together, and it deepen memory. Both with respect to openness within the Church teaching classes in terms of other cultures, it refers to the interference of the external environment, varied and complex, suggesting the di�culty of Physical Education in the organization, the moral education penetration provides a good opportunity. Students in an open environment actively or passively accept all kinds of information and education related or unrelated to, and under the guidance of teachers, to analyze, to judge, to deal with this information to form their own subjective consciousness, which the students are against bad idea and erosion behavior. It can create a better cultural environment on campus, which has a significant e�ect. 5 PRINCIPLES AND CONTENTS OF MORAL PENETRATION Principles of teaching profession colleges, according to the characteristics and features of the teaching materials, carries out moral penetration to adhere to the following points: ① insist on scientific principles. During moral education, we must adhere to the scientific theory, students should correct outlook on life and values. ② adhere to the principle of linking theory with practice. Ethics during penetration, in conjunction with students usually live in a common phenomenon to explain, taking into account the characteristics of students’ thinking and cognitive rules. ⑨ adhere to the principles guiding emotion. Ethics during penetration adheres to infect students with the truth, to take full advantage of the power of example of the moral education of students. Meanwhile, teachers can lead by example, to make a demonstration for students. In order for students to carry out the effective moral education, moral education accurately grasps the contents, to grasp the content from the following: ① base on the contents of the textbooks. Teacher before class prepare lessons seriously, understand the textbook, identify the point of moral teaching materials, and then penetrate the relevant moral education and teaching content must not engage in disjointed “filler” and “episode.” ② According to the characteristics of students, it should be individualized. Depending on the grade of college students is to take a different method of penetration. For high school students, sometimes even hidden content may also be subtle method, they can understand their own independent truth contained therein; however, for low-grade students, sometimes even explicit content can use tips method.

6 SUMMARY

Ideological and moral education in physical educa tion, physical education must be the same charac teristics; the content and form get closer together to prevent conduct just empty talk. Physical Education teachers are to make good use of the positive factors, improve teaching art, the work of educating peo ple throughout the teaching process, and constantly improve the ways and means of educating people, complete the task of teaching, for the training of qualified personnel and for high-quality of e�orts the work of the new century.

[1] Feng Limin. How moral education [J] in Physical

Education Teaching Forum, 2010, 28:113–114. [2] Chen Jie. Ways and means to carry out physical education teaching moral education [J] Yancheng Institute of Technology (Social Sciences), 2002, 04:45–46. [3] Guan Yanwei. Performed utilizing the advantages of PE teaching Moral Education [J] of Shandong Youth Administrative Cadres College, 2003, 02:106–107. [4] Zhang Xiuyan. How to make moral education [J] examination (teaching and research version) in elementary physical education, 2012, 11:230. [5] Luo Hongxiu. Sports teaching how to make moral education [J] exam Weekly, 2013, 49:99–100. [6] Jiao Ma. In College Physical Education Situation and Countermeasures of Moral Education, Hubei Province [D]., Wuhan Institute of Physical Education, 2009, pp.1–30. [7] Zeng Tao. Use PE teaching moral education for students [J] stationery and technology, 2013, 22: 138. [8] Zhao Jiangang. How to be carried out in elementary physical education in the moral education [J] Science magazine, 2011, 13:38.

Present situation and development of vocational education in English

Lihua Li

Guang’an Vocational and Technical College, Guang’an City, Sichuan Province, China

ABSTRACT: The rise of higher vocational education in our country is just a few years ago. In recent years, the country’s institutions of higher learning at different levels almost opened vocational school vocational classes, including a certain scale of running private schools, but also they have established nationally recog nized vocational education classes to satisfy the high school grade point average of students for further studies to improve the quality of the people, for the country to develop vocational and technical personnel played a positive role. But over the same period they are to be admitted into the school when vocational students are far from proficient in English language, to classroom teaching English it brought many difficulties. Thus, with the deepening of China’s reform and opening up, especially after China joining the WTO, English as a common language has increasingly shown its importance. How to improve high vocational English teaching is a topic worth serious discussion among educators.

KEYWORDS: Higher vocational education; English; Development

English education has a long way to go; its mode needs to be innovative. Although for students in vocational colleges, in addition to English students,

English is just a public lesson, attitude of students of colleges is same for CET-4 and 6; as long as they test over the line of AB grade they get a diploma. As the cradle of society to cultivate practical talents, in the face of foreign trade growing external environ ment, vocational colleges for students are not only to strengthen the importance of English education, but also follow the times, from the reality of the vari ous professions, it is really available for students to learn a practical, convenient communication tools to use them. For example, from the author teaching lib eral arts colleges and students of English education should be more emphasis on foreign culture (includ ing literature, law, art, etc.), Professor of knowledge will combine English and Chinese Studies on edu cation and it is an e�ective teaching model. This often happens that many students are on the Chinese lit erary culture and they have a strong interest, in their specialized courses they unaware to see literature, after school the book is submitted, and also they write checks. Try to think of another angle, many vocational colleges adjust curriculum, college and university

English language have been di�cult to escape the same fate of deleting. From the content is concerned,

English textbooks and curricula for the language and cultural background of the attachment introduce very few liberal arts with the same English textbooks, and because today’s Grading exams generally favored technology science articles, from the perspective of the candidate consideration, students can not hold back one day lengthy list of words science vocabulary, a chapter is to do in this area of reading comprehension, even though they do not understand the content of these articles. Vocational students has its own characteristics, compared to undergraduate and even graduate-level students, their learning ability is weak, while their English education on the one hand is more inclined to interpersonal level of basic communication infrastructure and English-speaking countries understand the cultural background, on the other hand, with respect to the English, after all, they know more about their country and are more interested in Chinese culture, that the Chinese culture knowledge is to be incorporated into the teaching of English will increase their interest in learning English. 1 VOCATIONAL ENGLISH TEACHING PROBLEMS 1.1 Teaching content is without professional characteristics Over the years, the field of education at all levels use a single foreign language teaching course content, a professional English Education, Vocational doesn’t have their own characteristics, from the content to see it is basically a condensed version of English. Students step into the community after application in English to show serious suited, they cannot meet the needs of today’s reform and open society for technology, production, management, service and other areas of senior complex, application-oriented talents and international foreign language skills. In practice, more and more people realize that skills-oriented,

English teaching prominent application is consistent with the overall objectives of vocational talents.

1.2 The purpose of teaching emphasizes research and lightens application

Currently, vocational English three, four exam has been an important measure of the quality of teaching vocational English, and the institutions also use exam pass rate as judge and as the main basis for the level of teaching, teachers and students regard this English exam as the ultimate goal of teaching and learning, in which English teaching does have a significant role in promoting and improving students’ overall English proficiency, it seems to have been recognized by the community. But it is, after all, it does not fully reflect the actual level of English of students, and it can not really test the students’ ability to use English and meet the needs of social practice. In a sense, vocational education in grade English exam to Heroes has become di�cult to adapt vocational English teaching major obstacle to meet the social development of the market demand.

1.3 Teaching methods are out of date

Most are still in vocational English teaching class room, books and teacher-centered. Teachers mainly use vocabulary, grammar, translation pedagogy; teachers generally lack the integrated use of a var iety of teaching methods in the teaching of English ability. Heavy presence vocabulary quantity is light in teaching; emphasize intensive reading, lighten the extensive reading; emphasize imparting knowledge, lighten skills training; emphasize teaching to the test, lighten quality training and so on. This backward teaching methods and teaching mode only produce chalk and talk, ignore the personality development of students, students lack practical experience and knowledge consolidation, lack teacher-student inter action, it is di�cult to achieve satisfactory results.

Teaching methods are backward, most vocational

English teaching or in “Teacher - chalk - blackboard -

Textbook - recorder,” the main foreign language teaching is seriously lagging behind in the develop ment of modern educational technology, and they also lack good English teaching hardware environment.

1.4 Single assessment methods

Means to measure student of English at present vocational colleges teaching quality are often writ ten exam and the student achievement levels are only tested through exams. This assessment criterion has its advantages, such as simple and easy to grasp scoring criteria, it is less time-consuming and strong before and after e�ect. However, this form is not on students’ oral communication skills, ability to use, flexible, practical communicative ability, comprehensive quality tests conducted appropriately and get the realistic capabilities relevant indicators. This assessment tools often lead to students learning English essentially still based on imitation, repetition and rote. 2 SITUATION OF VOCATIONAL ENGLISH EDUCATION 2.1 Students’ foundation is weak, lack motivation to learn In recent years, vocational students are mainly from the entrance, but the English-based vocational students are weak in almost all vocational colleges widespread problem. Although the junior to high school students have six years of English learning experience, but they cannot hear, can not say, can not read English. After entering students learn not only about all aspects of vocational colleges to make it up, but must continue to improve in order to achieve the employment need of a degree of listening, speaking, reading, writing, translation ability in daily activities and be able to communicate in a foreign operational activity for simple oral and written communication. Lacking motivation to learn vocational students is a common problem, they lack a high degree of political consciousness and a correct outlook on life in the presence of students, and they do not recognize the importance of learning English. Tremendous pressure is on today’s graduates’ employment system and the financial crisis, students think they do not know what to do after graduation; English does not necessarily need them to learn better. Therefore, under the auspices of these factors, vocational students in English classes are not interested or do not come to class, or visits absenteeism, killing time. The short-term vocational students learning English will have an impact e�ect. From the long-term goal, the vocational education is di�cult to meet the market demand for talent, knowledge structure and it is not conducive to successful employment vocational students. 2.2 Weak teachers, vocational education lack capacity The vast majority of secondary school vocational colleges is upgraded and transformed from adult college students to improve the quality of the hardware upgrade, compared to faculty it has not kept pace. Many common English teachers are still guarding the traditional teaching concept, the teaching as a simple cognitive processes, one-way indoctrination teaching modes allows students to get knowledge, but they cannot use. Vocational English teaching objectives are clear, understanding that English cannot be linked to education and employment-oriented. There is less stressed and professional relevance, so it can not have a teaching concept of higher vocational education in the true sense; it is di�cult to build the capacity and quality of vocational students professional positions required.

3 WAYS TO REFORM AND IMPROVE

VOCATIONAL EDUCATION IN ENGLISH

Establish a new student-centered teaching phil osophy. Focus on reforms to strengthen the student’s second language proficiency, this fundamental goal. English is a very practical foundation course; lan guage skills are to master and it depends on the prac tice of individual students. Teaching e�ectiveness depends largely on student initiative and partici pation. First, student-centered is focused on students

‘comprehensive language proficiency; the second is the combination of curricular and extracurricular, focusing on students’ self-learning ability; the third is the design focuses on classroom teaching students which meets the requirements of students actively involved. Classroom emphasizes on “teacher-led, student-centered.” Change the old teachers teach and teaching student’s passive learning. Guided indepen dent learning doesn’t only take into account learning the language, but also teaches them how to learn the methods, attitudes and practical application skills.

Vocational education in English should overcome the traditional English teaching “dumb English” malpractice, change light weight method of knowl edge and the ability to lighten the knowledge, appli cation re-examination, heavy inheritance and lighten innovative teaching ideas, to build a new English teaching English training model, which reflects the

“student-centered, teacher-led,” the guiding ideology, to quality education for the content, it is in order to cultivate innovative talents as the goal, reform teach ing methods and methods, expand and update teach ing content in order to promote college students to improve the English proficiency.

4 OPEN VOCATIONAL ENGLISH

EDUCATIONS

Occupational Vocational English Education deter mines the openness of vocational English edu cation. The 21st century is information varied, there is rapid development of the times, and the changing requirements of the Workplace English teaching should have a strong open feature. Create open teaching situation. Vocational English Teaching by the following ways is for students to create an open learning environment: First, the creation of open teaching space. The classroom teaching space is by extending the network to the network via a multimedia learning platform to create an open learning space for students learning English. Internet and campus network has a wealth of English learning resources, multimedia, network technology network for students learning English a platform. Second, create an open teaching atmosphere. Change teachers dominate the classroom, students passively accept the teaching and learning environment, teachers and students actively participate in teaching activities and create an interactive atmosphere. Through life and continuous exchange between teachers and students, we promote the construction of students’ English language knowledge and skills. Third, create an open language environment, attention to campus and off-campus internship is training bases. Relying on classroom training communicative competence is not enough, whether learners have the opportunity to use English to carry out communication activities will directly affect the learning of English. We should make full use of all available resources on campus training base for students to create a good environment for learning English as a platform for students to use English. Guide students to leave the campus at the same time, use off-campus practice base and improve their English language learning practical ability to enhance the fluency of expression. By creating a classroom, online, on campus and off-campus internship training base for students is a good base, open language learning environment meets the needs of students learning English, students adapt to the changing needs of the future of professional positions. 5 STRENGTHENING GENERAL EDUCATION For a long time our country is too general education and professional higher education leads to a correction of one-sided development. General Education courses include a relatively wide range of the humanities, natural sciences, sports and tool skills courses (foreign languages, computers, etc.), basically covering the major public university courses and basic course. Often, people put “basic” understanding as the basics, the basic theory and basic skills, today’s perspective; it is made from the perspective of imparting knowledge to the view with certain one-sidedness. From the perspective of quality education, the “base” should also include the student’s ability to learn the ability to independently acquire knowledge.

In addition, general education courses should be involved in basic, comprehensive, e�ectiveness and transferability is stronger than knowledge. Only in this way, the students can have a rapidly chang ing society’s ability to adapt in the future. In recent years, school student increased human spirit, cul tural quality aspects of the curriculum, it is necess ary. However, the quality of a person’s personality, psychological motivation, interest, emotion, will and personality, etc. as well as the right to treat the relationship between man and nature, which so reflects cultivate human spirit, but it also relies on the influence of the environment and atmosphere, by the human spirit penetrating into the culture and practice of teaching all courses, this is also an important part of general education. In addition, from the perspec tive of lifelong education, today’s college education in a person’s life in the “basic” is more obvious, to strengthen general education and the foundation of self-evident.

6 SUMMARY

Many developed countries in the last century have already begun to implement vocational education and it has proved to implement a wide range of vocational education to promote the rapid develop

Research on development trend of higher vocational students’ psychological health

Tao Qin

Chongqing College of Electronic Engineering, Chongqing, China

Fangfang Liu

Chongqing Three Gorges Medical College, Chongqing, China

ABSTRACT: According to five consecutive year’s mental health survey for freshmen in a higher vocational school, it is found that: vocational students’ mental health is gradually improving; the most prominent psycho logical problems among higher vocational students are: compulsion, depression and interpersonal communica tion; boys’ mental health is significantly better than girls’; students from different grades varied mental health problems.

KEYWORDS: Higher vocational; Mental health; Development Trend

With the rapid development of vocational education in China, higher vocational students’ mental health has attracted more and more attention. In order to fully know about and master the status and devel opment trends of higher vocational students’ mental health, to discover promptly, to predict confusions of psychological problems that higher vocational stu dents faced with and thus provide a basis for schools’ mental health education, student management, psychological counseling and crisis intervention, we have done this mental health survey on freshmen in Chongqing College of Electronic Engineering in grade 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 and 2012 for five con secutive years. Hope to find development trends of higher vocational students’ mental health status.

1 SUBJECT AND METHODS

1.1 Subjects

In this study, subjects are students of Chongqing

College of Electronic Engineering grade in 2008 (a total of 992 people, 465 boys, 527 girls), 2009 (a total of

1146 people, 806 boys, 340 girls), 2010 (a total of 4215 people, 2721 boys, 1494 girls ), 2011 (a total of 6290 people, 3771 boys and 2519 girls ) and 2012 (a total of

6650 people, 4003 boys and 2647 girls ) There are five grades students in all (a total of 19,293 people, 11,766 boys, 7527 girls). Due to the expansion of the school, and the implementation of general survey on freshmen, the data from 2010 onwards has a great growth). 1.2 Test tool The measure of the study used a questionnaire of “the self-rating scale of mental symptom (SCL - 90)” (The self-report symptom list, 90). This scale is made by Derogatis LR in 1975, introduced and compiled by Wu Wenyuan in Shanghai Railway Medical College. It contained broad information ranging from feeling, emotion, thought, consciousness, behavior to habits, relationships, diet, etc. There are ninety- ten questions in detail, reflecting the psychological symptoms of the disease factor that somatization, obsessive-compulsive symptoms, interpersonal sensitivity, depression, anxiety, hostility, terror, paranoia, psychosis and others. Each symptom scores in five grades, that is, no, very light, medium, emphasis, severe [1]. 1.3 Research process Students in all grades are surveyed within two months after entering into the college. Students in grade 2008 and 2009 are Surveyed with paper questionnaires, from 2010, students use computers to finish the questionnaires online. To ensure that the investigation is scientifically objective and accuracy, teachers who have been trained formally are responsible for the survey, before the test instructions are demonstrated in unified guidance, the significance of the test and the confidentiality of THE TEST RESULTS ARE STRESSED AT THE SAME TIME.

1.4 Statistical methods

Data were analyzed and dealt with spss18.0 statistical package.

2 RESULTS AND ANALYSIS

2.1 The overall status of students’ mental health

According to the interpretation of SCL-90 scale, the whole or any factor scores 3 points or more, suggesting that students have moderate to severe distress with this item. From practical working experience, only when there is moderate to severe problem among students, while the need of seeking professional help exists. Normally when there is only mild distress, the vast majority of students can adjust their status by themselves with time passing by and through self-regulation,. Therefore, when comes to analysis with data, I have only focused on cases with moderate to severe distress and analyzed them. As we can see from Table 1, students with moderate to severe distress have remained at around 5% (except for 2008, which may be related to smaller sample data), this rate is consistent with previous studies

[2–3]. Students at all levels of the mental state are basically stable from the perspective of moderate to severe distress. And there’s no evidence of more or fewer students having moderate to severe distress as time goes by.

The top three severe factors detected in each grade are: 2008, compulsion, interpersonal relation ship, depression; 2009, compulsion, depression, hostility; 2010, depression, compulsion, hostility;

2011, compulsion, hostility, depression; 2012, com pulsion, interpersonal relationship, hostility. It can be seen during 5 years, the main problems troubled students are focused on compulsion, depression, interpersonal relationship and hostility. While inter personal relationship and hostility basically reflect that students have problems with interpersonal communication. It can be considered that the three main problems caused severe psychological distress among freshmen should be compulsion, depression and interpersonal communication. When educated, higher vocational students in mental health, it should be focused around these three aspects. 2.2 Comparisons between male and female students’ mental health Compared to male and female students with five years of continuous data, it can be found that boys’ all factors and total average score are significantly lower than girls’ (except the paranoia factor p value at the 0.05 level, other factors and total average are both p at 0.001 levels). That is, the mental health of boys is better than girls. From the comparison between male and female students in different grades, although it is slightly different between male and female students in each year, individual scores are not significantly different, but the overall situation is similar to the overall of the five consecutive years. It is obvious that the differences between boys and girls have always been there. This conclusion is the same as the results before [4]. Accordingly, when carried out mental health education among higher vocational students, we should pay attention to this feature and strengthen the education and guidance of mental health to girls. Analyzing annual data on the one-way ANOVA analysis, we can find that there are significant differences (p <0.001) between the years of the score. After hoc analysis, we can find: total average 2008> 2009> 2010> 2011> 2012 (p <0.05, among this total average score between 2011 and 2012 was not significantly different, but it is closed to the p = 0.06 levels). This reflects that the higher vocational students ‘mental health has gradually increased to a certain extent, this increase, although is no clearly response in the detected rate of moderate to severe problems, but at least shows that college students’ mental health is developed in a good direction. This result is different from previous findings [5], but it just shows that in recent years China has achieved some results in promoting mental health education and improving students’ psychological quality.

Table 1. SCL-90 with moderate to severe problems detected in the percentage.

Project somati zation compulsion depression Interpersonal- sensitivity anxiety hostility terror paranoid psychosis other total average detected rate

2008 0.50 5.54 2.92 3.43 1.92 2.12 1.61 1.31 1.51 1.92 0.40 10.08

2009 0.61 2.88 2.01 1.75 1.48 2.01 0.96 1.05 0.44 1.48 0.70 4.97

2010 0.12 1.90 2.02 0.76 0.62 1.47 0.57 0.64 0.52 0.76 0.24 4.56

2011 0.51 1.99 1.35 1.32 0.99 1.54 0.75 0.84 0.89 1.02 0.45 4.56

2012 0.27 2.20 0.99 1.74 0.95 1.34 0.81 0.77 0.66 0.87 0.42 4.48

From Table 2, we can see relationships between each factor’s score for five consecutive years. It’s dif ferent with the total average score that each factor did not decrease significantly like the total score year by year (showing a declining trend in general), it reflects different factors in different years have different impact to higher vocational students. That is to say in different years, mental confusions the students faced with are various. Therefore, when educate higher vocational students in mental health, we should take full advantage of the specific problems students faced and carried out targeted education and guidance.

3 DISCUSSION AND SUGGESTIONS

Through the analysis above, we have basically known mental health status and development trends of higher vocational students. Combined with the conclusion we obtained, the following recommendations are pro posed specially:

3.1 Improve the system of mental health education

Mental health education is an important issue which has a long way to go, in order to train more healthy talents, we must continue to improve and implement the system of mental health education. A sound system of mental health education must have three links: education, intervention and problem solving.

Find out a variety of needs and the changing needs of students without delay and conduct individuality education; intervene in emergent crisis and solve psychological problems that may occur in the bud; it is a necessary link of mental health education to conduct psychological instructing and counseling on time to students with mental confusion and also the essential condition of mental health education to operate efficiently. Only by establishing a complete system of mental health education, can mental health education really be implemented. 3.2 Early education and prevention From the survey and study to the Chongqing College of Electronic Engineering students in five grades, we have found that as people pay more attention to mental health, schools strengthen mental health education; mental health of the freshmen in higher vocational schools is getting better. This fully illustrated that putting mental health education in advance appropriately can help students grow up healthily. Moreover, from the student’s own development, in different stages of growth, we will certainly face different problems. If all issues are left to be solved in college, it is tantamount to remedy when it’s getting worse. In the process of mental health education, we should face up to the needs of students sufficiently and educate in advance, so that when faced with mental confusion, it can be solved easily. College mental health education should focus on social adaptation so that students can be successfully integrated into society after graduation and contribute to the progress and development of society. This is prevention indeed.

Table 2. SCL-90 scores for each factor relational tables for five consecutive years. factor Relationship of each year’s score Note

Somatization 2008>2011>2010>2009>2012 the difference was not significant between the 2009 and 2010, the difference was not significant between the 2009 and 2012 compulsion 2008>2010>2009>2012>2011 the difference was not significant between the 2011 and 2012 depression 2008>2010>2009>2011>2012

Interpersonal relationship 2008>2012>2011>2009>2010 the difference was not significant between the 2009 and 2010 anxiety 2008>2010>2009>2011>2012 the difference was not significant between the 2009 and 2010 the difference was not significant between the 2011 and 2012 hostility 2008>2010>2009>2011>2012 the difference was not significant between the 2011 and 2012 terror 2008>2010>2009>2011>2012 the difference was not significant between the 2009 and 2011 paranoid 2008>2010>2009>2012>2011 the difference was not significant between the 2009 and 2010, the difference was not significant between the 2009 and 2012 psychotic 2008>2010>2009>2011>2012 the difference was not significant between the 2009 and 2010, the difference was not significant between the 2009 and 2012 others 08>09>10>11>12 the difference was not significant between the 2009 and 2010

3.3 Integration of resources and efficient production

Because of the fluctuation of college students’ mental health status, it is a top priority to grasp the status of vocational students’ mental health at this stage of mental health education. It is difficult for an indi vidual or few individual schools to predict accurately on such a large group of students. Only the integration of all available resources together can analyze and predict status of mental health accurately of entire vocational school students, even all college students, so as to lay the foundation to provide targeted mental health education. Such targeted education, is not only focused on freshmen in different years and different states, but also include targeted education for the dif

A research on the situation and development strategy of reserve athletes in ordinary universities

Wei Bao

Physical Education Department of Harbin Engineering University, China

ABSTRACT: With the transformation of Chinese sports talents cultivation mode, sports team construction at high level in universities has made great achievements. Especially establishing reserves in key universities is the key step of the new mode, which is the primary mode of sports team at a high level in ordinary universities.

To research the situation of key sports team construction at a high level, from the degree of competitive sports sustainable development, we research and analyze the cultivation mode of Chinese sports talents and influence factors, aiming at building a talents cultivation mode suitable for Chinese professional competitive sports devel opment and exploring the sustainable way for athletes sports in theory.

KEYWORDS: Ordinary University, Competitive Sports and Reserves

1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Type area

In the 1980s, with the further development of political and economic system reform and transformation from planning economy to a social market econ omy, in order to solve the problems in the process of competitive talents cultivation, the government puts forward combination of sports and education policy.

Mainly presenting that some high teams enter univer sities, some secondary teams enter middle schools and universities organize their own sports team at a high level. In all, more schools participate in the competitive sports reserves cultivation, learning from experience of western developed countries and exploring the combination of sports and education. So the reform idea of hosting competitive sports based on society forms gradually. A combination of sports and education, the cultivation system that universities train competitive sports reserves is a trend for inter national competitive sports development and guides

Chinese competitive sports reserves cultivation.

2 RESEARCH RESULTS AND ANALYSIS

2.1 The definition of competitive sports reserves cultivation concept

Reserve means the preliminary preparation for supply. Talent means someone with a specialty. Competitive sports reserves mean people with competitive sports specialty trained preliminarily for taking part in competitive sports and making great achievement

Competitive sports reserves have 2 connotations, general sense and narrow sense. In a narrow sense, competitive sports reserves mean all players making great achievements for training in later competi tive sports. In the general sense, competitive sports reserves mean all players making great achievements for training in later competitive sports and sta�, mainly including players and coach. The competitive sports reserves in the text mean players and coach taking part in training preliminarily for making great achievements in later time. Besides, from jurisdiction belonging to competitive sports reserves cultivation, currently, there are 3 aspects of Chinese competitive sports reserves origins: sports system, sports system and the condominium form of all kinds of traditional sports events and universities. 2.2 The new trend and situation for reserve athletes cultivation in ordinary universities In April, 1984, the original national education com mission published notice on the part of the ordinary higher school trial for high level athletes, which opened a door for the retired sports players to enter universities. In the mode, education of professional sports players is clearly incomplete and the profes sional diploma they get are not enough so that the trend of finding jobs based on majors is not optimistic. 2.3 The disadvantages of reserve athletes cultivation in ordinary universities 2.3.1 Rigid system and mechanism and single talented training mode With the further development of the whole-nation system in the new history background and present development situation, the original combination of sports and education system cannot satisfy the demands and it exposes many problems: there is a di�erence between sport commission and education commission in talents training stress and work target position and lacks unified standards for understanding of system connotation and denotation. Besides sports university stresses sports, but ignores culture, which makes comprehensive development empty, which makes amateur sports players have di�culty in living.

Once they cannot enter high level training, it means players are useless, which causes many problems for individuals, family and society.

2.3.2 Gap between theory and practice and outstanding contradiction between study and training

The coordination and strategies of many problems of players training at a high level in ordinary univer sities are not reasonable and scientific. It separates competitive sports from the education system force fully, which makes choice of reserves reduce greatly and many talents are likely to be hidden. At the same time, the implementation of Single Son and Daughter

Policy make parents give up the opportunities for study and training when they consider their children’s future. Furthermore, the contradiction between study and training in the process of reserve training are not well solved, which have been key problems hindering competitive sports development for a long time.

2.3.3 The hindrance to talents delivery way

Nowadays, the sports team at a high level in key uni versities is trained for primary team of professional club and the division of characters between excel lent reserves delivery communication agencies is not clear. Function and Behavior is not standard and bridge functions are not performed fully. Although the department in charge of sports formulates and prom ulgates many related documents of sports reserves communication, but in the operation of di�erent areas and di�erent departments, players communication does not fully present principle of volunteer, mutual benefit, order, openness and legitimacy.

2.4 The advantages of reserve athletes cultivation in ordinary universities

2.4.1 Enriching campus cultural life and promoting spirit cultivation, construction on campus

The sports players at the highest level to draw oth ers attention mostly in universities and training and competition attract students. The high skills and out standing performance are not only sports but also the arts. Participating in it gets achievement and enriches life experience. Watching training and competition of players at high level gets the art appreciation feeling alike. Universities’ establishment of sports teams at high level adds beautiful spots for campus cultural life, which becomes a shining flower on campus. 2.4.2 Promoting campus brand recognition and benefiting campus brand construction More and more universities sense the importance of brand recognition on enrollment expansion and employment promotion. In foreign countries, building a sports team at a high level is a method to enlarge campus brand recognition. So many universities unite sports union and there are many exciting competitions in and between campuses. With social development and idea transformation, Chinese universities are struggling for brands. 2.4.3 Double high training target has more attraction The competitive sports talents training target at high level is competitive sports talents with high sports skills and high culture, which satisfies the demand of future society and parents’ willingness. It is useful for training sports talents adept at both the pen and the sword. Furthermore, Universities hosting sports team at the highest level have great advantages: direct management of sports team of high level training tends to form A Dragon management. 3 SOME PROBLEMS TO DEAL WITH FOR ATHLETE SPORTS RESERVES CULTIVATION IN ORDINARY UNIVERSITIES 3.1 Straightening system and mechanism out and controlling quality of enrollment strictly With the funds, invest and construct together, turning the mode that the sports department covers reserves training into a win-win model that sports department share sources and shoulder responsibilities in the administration department. Enrollment in ordinary universities adopts wide in and severe out policy which reduce culture demands on campus appropriately, which makes promising players enter universities through their own e�orts. 3.2 Solving the contradiction between study and training and improving sports players comprehensive qualities Making full use of the credit system reform in university education and making use of flexible education system policy, formulating relevant preferential enrollment policy and the master degree following bachelor degree management mechanism, bringing in excellent athlete reserves out of the province and at the same time, enrolling excellent players or union teams in the sports department in the province. The universities with credit system include training competition into education plans.

The excellent students representing schools, city or province to take part in the competition and making great achievements can score credit and the way replacing supply with award to increase the strength of the material rewards.

3.3 Bringing excellent talents providing human security

Adopting all forms to strengthen professional train ing to coaches and coach degree education, position training, qualification authentication, the system of card mount guard and transforming from the ordinary degree (college and technical secondary degree) to bachelor degree or master degree, from experience to technology and from single guide training to training or comprehensive scientific research.

3.4 Expanding financial channels and building good material basis

Increasing funds input of competitive sports reserves, listing professional funds of competitive sports reserves training in the financial department budget of the school, which increases year by year with the increase of financial income and encouraging social power to involve in competitive sports reserves culti vation. Through e�orts in many aspects, it makes one event or many events of key university construction scores and gets a fine project in National Games or

Olympic Games and traditional advantages events in part of universities can also get a fine project in the

The roots of psychological trauma and post-traumatic stress reaction/ disorders and the intervention

Jing Zeng

Psychological Consulting Centre, China West Normal University, Nanchong, Sichuan, China

ABSTRACT: Psychological trauma refers to the catastrophic or traumatic events harmful to individuals’ inner world. Strong emotional and psychological reaction caused by traumatic factors will form psychological shadows, and the improper coping of these events will lead to a post-traumatic stress disorder. In this paper, the author makes an exploration of the roots of psychological trauma and of post-traumatic stress reaction or disorders, which were caused by natural traumatic events, such as floods, snowstorms, earthquakes and other man-made factors such as wars, accidents from a psychological point of view. Finally, some suggestions of intervention are provided to the relevant departments to make relevant rebuilding policies.

KEYWORDS: Psychological Trauma; Post-Traumatic Stress Reaction; PTSD; Intervention

1 INTRODUCTION

The people’s psychological trauma, which is caused by the natural disasters and the accidental events, has received the attentions from the people in the psycho logical community with a gradual step.

In this paper, from the perspective of the psychology, the author carries out an exploration on the psychological trauma as well as the roots of psychological trauma and of post-traumatic stress reaction or disorders, which are caused by the natural disasters such as floods, snowstorms and earthquakes.

Finally, some suggestions of intervention are pro vided to the relevant departments to make relevant rebuilding policies.

2 PSYCHOLOGICAL TRAUMA

Psychological trauma mainly refers to the strong emotional reactions and psychological hurts that are caused by all kinds of natural disasters and man-made accidents and especially refers to the psychological hurts that are resulted in by the life-threatening accidents [1] .

Generally speaking, the psychological trauma can give rise to a series of the changes in psychological behaviors [2] .

On the one hand, psychological trauma is caused by the chronic obstructive pulmonary diseases in emotions, feelings, behaviors, physical bodies and cognitions, which impose threaten on life and are generated by the accumulation of the chronic nega tive emotions. On the other hand, psychological trauma includes the psychological hurts, which are caused by the patience as well as the emergent catastrophic events that are life-threatening. 3 CHARACTERISTICS AND DISORDERS OF PSYCHOLOGICAL TRAUMA STRESS 3.1 Stress Generally speaking, stress is a reaction model. When the stimulus events make the balance and the load capacity of the organism broken or exceed the reach of the abilities of the individuals, they will be embodied as the pressure of human beings. However, the responses of physiological stress can be expected under the normal circumstances. A good many of the psychological responses are learned actually, and depend on the perception and explanation to the world. 3.2 Psychological stress after catastrophic and post-traumatic events Reactions of psychological stress are the normal life experiences in general. The threatening, emergency, urgent, shocking and the uncertain consequences of the diseases and accidents are not the most fundamental reasons why the psychological stress of the individuals appears. The trauma status of a minority of people will be penetrated into the cognitive and behavioral patterns. This will not only generate a serious impact on the psychological and physiological states and bring about the extensive mental anguishes and simultaneously will affect the work as well as the normal interpersonal relationship. All these can continue for several years, and hence give rise to the decline in the quality of life [3] .

3.3 Characteristics of psychological stress after disasters

Usually, there are four stages necessary for people to experience after disasters.

First of all, it is the impact period, which means that the disasters and the traumatic events occurred shortly or at that time.

Next, it is the defense period, in which the peo ple want to make the psychological balance restored.

Then, it is the solution period, in which the people positively take measures to accept the reality of the disasters.

Finally, it is the growth period. According to the previous experience, the people that have experienced the natural disasters such as earthquake are likely to suffer the changes shown in the following.

3.4 The sense of security has been reduced significantly

At the time the disaster happens and in the long period after the disaster, the people are highly worried about their basic survival issues in the future, such as whether the surroundings are secured and will be damaged or not and whether their life and health have a guarantee or not.

At the same time, the people will care about the people that have a very close relationship with them, and hence show a series of actions such as panic-strike, helplessness, escaping, degradation, and feeling frightened.

3.5 Nervous breakdown.

The main problems of the people experiencing a dis aster lie in the sense of belonging and the demands of care. Besides, there is also a psychological crisis with a more destructive feature. That is the mental disor der that appears at a delayed time and continues for a long time after the people undergo the psychological trauma with an extraordinary threat or catastrophe.

3.6 Post-traumatic stress disorder.

In the third version of the Diagnostic and Statistical

Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM) that was published first in 1998 in the United States, it is mentioned that post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) refers to the reactions on the delaying or prolonging of the stress events or situations that have the unusual threats or catastrophes on the individuals [4] . After the individuals suffer from the intense mental trauma, the main clinical manifestations mainly include three aspects [5] . First, the individuals are repeated to encounter the intrusive memory. Second, the sustainable awareness increases. Third, the individuals continue to avoid reality. 4 ROOTS OF PSYCHOLOGICAL TRAUMA AND POST-TRAUMATIC STRESS REACTION /DISORDERS Existing researches have clearly shown that people will suffer from psychological crisis if they lost the balance that is caused by the internal or external changes and also are unable to rely on their own efforts to get back to the normal state within the short term [6] . The experience and inspiration of psychological assistances after the earthquakes in the former Soviet Union Armenia 2005 and India, Kashmir 2005 include the psychological problems that are commonly seen after the earthquake, and point out that the post-traumatic stress disorders and depressions are the typical problems of the psychological trauma after earthquake [7] . Psychological stress reactions are the adaptive responses that are produced from the human physical bodies in all kinds of stimuli. From the perspective of the nature, psychological stress reactions can be classified into positive and negative reactions. Positive psychological stress can make people maintain the psychological balance during the stress period, while the negative psychological stress often makes the abilities of people in dealing with stress intervened and weakened. Besides, the threat, emergency, urgency, shocking and uncertain consequences of the catastrophic events are the fundamental causes of the psychological stress of the individuals [8] . 5 INTERVENTIONS OF PSYCHOLOGICAL TRAUMA AND POST-TRAUMATIC STRESS REACTION /DISORDERS The interventions of the psychological crisis after disasters are equally important with other support, relief and rescue work, and the function of the psychological intervention is even a longer project [9] . It is possible for the traumatic psychological experience to give rise to short-term or long-term psychological and physiological effects on people [15] .

In the psychological intervention, it is highly necessary to pay attention to the following aspects.

First of all, remember not to regard all people in the disaster areas as those who are in need of a psychological intervention.

Second, the psychological intervention needs the professional psychologists to make an evaluation of the psychological and physiological states of the people, and then the psychological treatment can be implemented with a clear purpose in accordance with the types of reactions [10] .

Third, psychological intervention is a long and arduous work. Fourth, in the psychological intervention after the disasters, the psychological treatment that makes the psychological trauma exposed is a highly serious task, and hence it is necessary for the doctors to considerately treat the experience of exposing psychological trauma in the traumatic treatment and prevent the emergence of the secondary trauma [11] .

There are three major purposes of implementing the psychological crisis intervention.

First of all, it is aimed at preventing the self harm, the harm-to-others owing to the fluctuations of emotions.

Second, it aims at making the people experiencing the disasters restored in the mental balance and get back to reality.

Third, it is aiming at making the people experiencing the disasters, learn better countermeasures and strategies that can cope with the possible emergencies in the future [7] .

Therefore, psychological intervention can be considered from the following aspects.

5.1 Making the emotion of the people stable, finding the key points of trauma patients in emotional experience, guiding them to transfer their focus on psychological trauma experience

After the natural disasters such as earthquakes occur, the psychological disorder that the victims in the dis asters will encounter with the great possibility is the

PTSD.

More specifically, the victims will generate the scared reactions on the external information such as the things and situations that are not supposed to be frightening.

These victims not only have the feeling of terrors in the inner world, and also generate the obvious tension, sweating, trembling and other reactions in physical bodies, and even can have some shrink-back and escaping behaviors [12] . 5.2 Assisting the traumatic individuals in regaining “a sense of control” in life, restoring the mental balance, and getting back to the real life The loss of the sense of control as well as the sense of uncertainty is one of the most important psychological needs of the traumatized individuals. For children, the earthquakes make destroyed not only the physical and interpersonal environments that they are familiar with and also the original order pace of life. However, the children cannot get a proper understanding of the facts that have happened and also have no idea about what they can do and cannot make a prediction on the future, and hence often have the feeling of helplessness [13\14] . 5.3 Helping the traumatic individuals learn the methods and means of coping with the similar event and gradually achieve the goal of self-help After the disasters, there are the survivors that are traumatized in the psychological trauma, the family members that feel extremely grieved and the rescue personnel that witness the tragic death situation with their own eyes. However, for these persons, the nightmare has just begun. Therefore, how to treat and cure the wounded souls of these persons is highly important. One of the main purposes of intervention is allowing the patients to learn the ways to deal with difficulties and setbacks. This will not only help the victims to get over the current crisis, and will also be conductive to the adaptation to future [16] . 5.4 Providing traumatic individual with the positive and long-lasting psychological supports In the psychological trauma treatment, the individuals will suffer the emotional experience again when they often want to initiatively get rid of or forget the experience in disasters. Therefore, any form of intervention should be equipped with the positive and persistent intervention programs and measures, and therefore promotes the victims to suffer from the traumas and be capable of coping with the difficulties and adapt to life with their own efforts. 6 CONCLUSIONS The highly serious natural disasters and accidents can make the people experiencing them feel depressed about the tininess and incompetence of human beings.

As a result, these people can make a change to their original beliefs, and can even lose the confi dence in them and all human beings. From the above analysis, it can be known that the threat, emergency, urgency, shocking and uncertain consequences of the catastrophic events are the fundamental causes for the psychological stress of the individuals.

Importantly, in the implementation of the psycho logical intervention, it is highly necessary to prevent the emergence of the self-harm, the harm-to-others owing to the fluctuations of emotions, and help the victims to restore the psychological balance, get back to the reality and learn the better countermeasures and strategies that are used to cope with the possible accidents in the future.

[1] Dongmei Zhao, Heyong Shen, Zhiya Liu. Theory and

Research on Trauma-related Dissociative Symptom[J].

Advances in Psychological Science, 2006, 14 (6): page

895–900.

[2] Rui Yang, Yajie Li. Psychological Effect of Patients with Trauma and Their Psychological Nursing Care[J].

Chinese Nursing Research, April, 2004, 18 (7), pp.577–579.

[3] Xinhuanet. http :/ / www. ah. xinhuanet. com/ news/

2008 - 05/ 18.

[4] Yue He, Hongtao Zhang. Psychological Effect and

Psychological Recovery of PTSD[J]. Chinese Journal of Clinical Rehabilitation, 2003, 7(16):2346–2347.

[5] Yun Wei. Diagnostic Standards of PTSD[J]. Psychology and Health, 2006, 8:9, pp.11.

[6] Jiehua Chen, Zhouyan Xiao. Construction of Long term Intervention Mechanism of Public Psychological

Crisis[J]. Beijing Observation, 2008(7), pp. 27–29. [7] Wanjin Meng, Chong Zhang, Meng Zhang, Jing Zhang. The Mental Health Aid after Earthquake:The Experience of Foreign Countries and Its Enlightenment to China[J]. Chinese Journal of Special Education, 2008, 6:63–68. [8] Liyi Zhang, Chunxia Chen, Zhixiong Xu. Psychological Crisis Intervention after Earthquake Disaster[J]. People’s Military Surgeon, 2008, 7:411–412. [9] Juanjuan Kan. Importance and Execution of Intervention on Post-Traumatic Psychological Crisis[J]. Journal of Safety Science and Technology, 2008.6 (3):75–78. [10] Baojuan Ye, Qingling Yao, Shengqiang Zhu, Shouni Tang. On the Post-disaster Psychological Intervention[J]. Journal of New Medicine, 2008, 6:913–914. [11] Hong Yuan, Jingchen Zheng, Li Cao, Shike Hou. Psychological Trauma of Survivals in Earthquake and the Crisis Intervention[J]. China Journal of Emergency Resuscitation and Disaster Medicine, 2008, 8:469–470. [12] Zheming Tu, Gangya Han. FAQ in Psychology after Disasters (Replenishment)[J]. Medical Journal of Chinese People’s Health, 2008, 7(13):1490–1491. [13] Li Xiao, Yan Cui. Psychological Aid after Disaster— Intervention of Psychological Crisis[J]. Chinese Community Doctors, 2008, 11:54. Disaster relief. [14] Hong Lin. Psychological Needs of Children after Earthquake and the Treatment (VCD) [J /CD ]. Chinese Journal of Clinicians (Electronic Edition)[J], 2008, 2 (7):841–844. [15] Kan Zhang. Practices of Psychological Aids of Foreign Countries. Seeking Truth[J], 2008, 16:59–61. [16] Wenfeng Ouyang. Disaster Reliefs that should not be Neglected—Psychological Intervention[J]. Science, Doctor·Expert Forun, 2008, 345–346.

The study on university sport education reform based on modular teaching

Lin Wang & Hui Ge

Henan Zhengzhou Electric Power College, Zhengzhou, China

ABSTRACT: Modular teaching is the international labor organization of research and development in the teaching Learn to give priority to, to ability training as the core function of a teaching mode. In our country higher education implementation of quality education during the course of this teaching mode, with its flexi bility, Pertinence, realism, the characteristics of the economy, more and more attention, and started to come in

The course reform of universities into practice. University public physical education has the distinct Health skill learning characteristics, the possibility of using modular teaching model, the university public Sports course target, knowledge system, skills requirements and the creativity of the students and the organic combination of the fitness ability. Through the reasonable design, construct a new type of male the sports course of platform, is to be based on the students, deepen university public physical education the reform process is worth areas of research.

1 MODULAR TEACHING CONTENTS AND

CHARACTERISTICS

1.1 The connotation of the modular teaching

Modular teaching is a kind of more advanced ability training type teaching mode type. This model broke the traditional course system, in order to train stu dents’ vocational can it force for the end goal, the the oretical knowledge and skills required is an organic whole, revolve around the special ability to set the theme of the combined teaching activities, is a content and its time one, take credit, but detection, has limited content teaching units, it can get by di�erent combi nation of teaching activities. Modular teaching of the structure can be divided into three levels: the macro module and micro modal. Macro module described is a complete professional, such as body Yukon learn a bachelor or master’s graduate student of a profes sional; Medium module description is a professional in the learning and deepen the study direction; Micro module describes each module of the specific content and with its can bring skills, is to meet medium and macroscopic module in the overall comprehensive ability to the foundation.

1.2 Patterned teaching characteristics

One is reflected in knowledge output to the teaching idea of output capacity, have extremely strong tar geted. Modular teaching is in training students’ ability as the starting point and design, when students make a module, should obtain relevant skills. This teaching pattern changed what content to I teach in marked by the direction of output knowledge, teaching concept, to realize the ability for the teaching idea of output guidance that students should obtain by learning what ability. Two is a relative independence and expanding. Modular teaching will be involved in training students’ ability of knowledge, technology, method and means of organic integration, through the integrated design, from a specific capacity of the relatively independent function module. At the same time, the function module is not closed, it can be with the improvement of the ability request, knowledge, technical updates, methods and means of improved, to update the function module design, reflects the expansion of good sex. Three reflects the individuality of the transparent learning process. Through the integration of the function module design, and make students understand by learning to make their own ability to improve where, and through the formation of the clinical ability from the quality of the learning process. At the same time, but also through the special functional design, to meet the different from others student’s individualized ability needs. Four is realizing resource intensive configuration. Modular teaching is involved in all aspects of teaching resources, such as teachers’ resources, subject resources, information resources, resource management, security resources, but also through the elaborate design will this resource configuration, optimization, especially aimed at training students’ ability to different subject knowledge system, ability elements, such as teachers’ specialty consolidation and full release of these resources of energy.

Five is with good interoperability. The modular teaching model not only have been used in the basic education, and higher education in fields, especially in higher vocational education is widely used in. Not only can be used for theoretical course teaching, also can be used to practice, application course teaching, reflected the teaching model has good interoperabil ity and fusion.

2 UNIVERSITY SPORTS CURRICULUM

IMPLEMENTATION OF MODULAR

TEACHING FEASIBILITY ANALYSIS

2.1 Course objectives with the core function modular teaching mode

The modular teaching pattern of the core function is the knowledge transfer into on students’ ability train ing, the university public sports have distinct training students’ sports innovative spirit and the characteris tics of independent fitness ability. National ordinary university physical education curriculum, teaching guidelines (hereinafter referred to as the compen dium) establishment of the basic objectives and devel opment goals in as a university physical education curriculum goal, and to give students the way to three independent college sports course education new modes, reflected the university physical education curriculum teaching thought of public deep reform and a kind of brand-new value orientation. Especially the objectives of the course target clearly reflected the essence of public sports teaching through univer sity, the training of the students’ innovation spirit and independent sports, fitness ability, this is the core of the public physical education curriculum university and the key, and with a modular teaching pattern of the core functions are in agreement.

2.2 To make up for the current university public sports course, some defects university sports course reform in despite line, but there are still some defects, mainly reflects in two aspects

One is the highest level in the university physical education curriculum should have the quality of the public to reveal. Our country school sports course includes pre-school physical education, elementary school sports, middle school sports and university public sports course, formed a complete with low to high organic course system. In this system, the uni versity public physical education curriculum reveals it is undoubtedly the highest levels of the school physical education curriculum. The highest level of public physical education curriculum to the university is in target task, the knowledge structure, the ability quality and so on di�erent from other levels school sports course special quality. But in the actual operation, the university public sports curriculum and high school sports than course still appear some lag. Especially with the many college sports teaching still stay on students’ learning sports, technology, skills, and how to guide students through the has mastered sports knowledge and skills for based on appropriate to oneself of means, methods and exercise in the ability of the obvious shortcomings. Secondly, it is whether the basic course with options class patterns, or under the credit system of elective courses as the main body, the required courses and extracurricular exercise for the supplement, athletic training to develop patterns, the university public sports course has a very important problem is still not solved, the problem is that the current model actually able to train students’ what kind of ability. In practice, students are through the specific sports (whether it is unified arrangement, or customize) to accept the sports course education, but these sports and training students’ ability exist a relation, has not been clear comb. The key to the problem lies in cultivating the ability of the target is not the support it system. The two aspects of the defects in fact reflect university public sports teaching. The end goal remains to be clear. Teaching goal is currently not reaching the end of things, is through the efforts, to, will produce before into things. This requests us to have thought, we expect the student in the beginning ability, and on the basis of what way to get through what kind of end ability. Therefore, in the practice of public sports teaching university to clear the goal, modular teaching mode should be our choice. First of all, from the theory established public sports teaching university end goal is to develop the students’ innovative spirit and independent sports, fitness ability, highlights the university physical education curriculum should be the quality of the public. Secondly, the construction and the end target practice level consistent contain knowledge system, capability, project support, system function, and make full use of the same transport power project, can be based on the competitive sports and training, fitness and entertainment, health and health care and other different theory, the combination of a variety of different exercises, using different load strength, in order to realize the ability of different target (the competitive ability, fitness ability, etc), the sports unique character, design meet different needs of the ability to function modules, construct a new type of university public sports curriculum platform.

3 UNIVERSITY NEW SPORTS COURSE THE

CONSTRUCTION OF THE PLATFORM

3.1 Constructing university public physical education curriculum

The basic thought of the platform To construct the new university public sports course platform, adhere to the basic idea of the is to strengthen the, the goal, reflect three, that is, to highlight the public sports teaching, strengthen university goal: is to highlight the public sports teaching university training stu dents’ sports innovative spirit and ability of inde pendent fitness this end goal. Reflect three: a system of function modules, meets diversified. Cultivating students’ innovative spirit and independent sports fit ness ability ultimate target, outstanding system inte gration, function modular, meet diversified. System integration: is to combine university public physical education curriculum goal of the end, will help the student to obtain the independent ability and physi cal fitness knowledge, health knowledge, ability ele ments, such as sports organic integration, integrated design. Function modular: according to the principle is building blocks, will be based on the ability of the expected training goal involved sports knowledge, health knowledge, ability elements, such as sports design into di�erent function module and assembly, formed a complete public sports course platform framework. Meet diversified is to platform function diversity, meet the need of the variety of student sports ability, in order to stimulate the students’ phys ical education learning passion, master the skill for their own exercise.

3.2 College sports teaching platform structure, function and characteristics

It is to point to in the platform is production and con struction process, for convenient operation and set ting the table. In the material civilization and spiritual civilization highly developed today, a word has its platform more extensive connotation, it is consid ered to be people communicate, and study, have very strong interactive feature stage. University public sports course platform is the functional system, the support system and safeguard system structure, three forms stable relations, as a platform the skeleton. The function of public physical education curriculum sys tem is the main system platform, is based on the end target for traction, ability training as the key point, will capacity requirements into course general objec tive and specific points target, and design into di�er ent functional module. Every function module of the realization of the function of support for its support module to support, the knowledge system, capability and sports, making form has relatively independent, di�erent functions of the task, meet di�erent ability required system. According to the present college programs and public sports teaching in actual, established in cultivating students’ innovative spirit and independent sports fitness ability for total course on the basis of the goal, set up three points target, namely to the cultivation of students’ autonomous exercise ability, improve physical health level as the goal of the physical quality and health level function module; To improve the students’ ability of sports and competition have skill levels for the target of the campaign and the contest function module; In order to develop students’ leisure entertainment, hobbies, and adjust body and mind ability as the goal of the fitness and entertainment function module. Each module of the corresponding with knowledge and capability and project configuration, formed a complete modular teaching platform. Security system and the support system is to realize the function of the basic system of the normal operation of the system. Security system by the material guarantee, teachers’ security, time guarantee constitute; Support system by running mechanism and intellectual support, follow evaluation form. University public sports course platform has the following features: one is the module function is clear. University public sports course platform is the course with a clear goal in total decomposition of the points to goal and can operate the function module, and achieving these goals can be furnished with what ability, project by what knowledge to support and ability to clearly show all elements, to avoid the course objectives in the process of teaching and teaching to result in some of the evil. 2 it is by selecting projects into choose ability training, have more pertinence. University public sports course platform is the goal, the function, the project, knowledge, ability of organic combination, make students understand in the choice of choice and the goal of cultivating the relationship, understand this choice can improve their ability of what respect, understand to form the ability be through which projects, in what way method, in what knowledge help down through their own repeated practice to achieve lasting, make choice of clear purpose clearly. Three is expanding the space of the extension. University public sports course platform is the way according to the function module design, which can be whole or local assembly, also can whole or partial disassembly. As long as the sports in the continuous development, the platform can form a new function module, and constantly update and rich content, meet university public sports teaching and different students’ ability to need. At the same time, the platform can also timely eliminated and development of sports does not adapt things, show the spatial extension expansion and flexibility.

3.3 University sport education curriculum

Operation of public platform University course platform is the current public sports course pattern in function, content, space and so on to develop exten sions, want to make their normal operation, give full play to the function, must by security system and the support system to give strong support, must the three systems operate together. Therefore, should strive to realize three change a is get the and high school phys ical education and health course interface, realize the technology to teaching by teaching change at present,

China’s high school physical education and health course whether from the teaching content or struc ture has close to university public physical education curriculum, teaching high school and students’ sports options special knowledge and skills to university public PE teaching has brought new challenges, sim ple repetition is not public sports should have quality of university. This requires university public sport must be alignment and high school sports interface, technology to teaching by teaching transformation.

Two is to give full play to the teacher’s special expertise, and achieved by leading gradually to guide to change. University public sports course platform can make an ace of physical education teacher fully unfold, but also on the part of the teacher puts for ward the new higher requirements. Especially in three independent backgrounds, need to teacher’s dominant position appropriate displacement: standing in the student opposite demo; Stand in front led students;

Standing in the student side help; Standing in the student behind the service. Establish a new type of relationship between teachers and students, the more beneficial to set up the students’ subjectivity and autonomy. Three is for the students, the teaching management to teaching service to change.

University public sports course platform for the carrier, with three independent ways, students accept university physical education curriculum in pub lic education, and implementation of credit system, make the students’ learning relative freedom and the option to increase, which requires we must strengthen

The influence and countermeasures of network to psychology of juvenile delinquency

Chunmei Li & Li Lin

Mudanjiang Medical University, Mu Dan Jiang, Hei Long Jiang Province, China

ABSTRACT: With the majority of young people increasingly becoming the main force of the use of the network, the network as a new kind of social factors on the growth of young people is increasingly prominent.

Network not only helps young people broaden their horizons, obtain avant-garde concepts, concern about the world cutting-edge issues, but also spreads some violence, pornographic or reactionary spams. It also brings the network addiction problem which will cause a serious negative impact on the healthy growth of young people and lead to increasing juvenile crime. The number of juvenile criminals has increased every year in China and tends to lower ages. The malignant development, will cause great harm to social stability. Of course, there are many causes of juvenile delinquency, and the shown characteristics are also diverse.

KEYWORD: Juvenile; cognitive structure; Network

1 INTRODUCTION

The latest statistics from the Juvenile Delinquency

Research Association of China show that the total number of juvenile delinquency in China has accounted for more than 70% of the total number of criminals. Among them, 15-year-old juvenile crimi nal cases account for more than 70% of the total num ber of juvenile delinquency cases. It is estimated that the district spanned campus extortion events account for about 60% of the entire campus extortion nui sance events. A related survey shows that there are more than 50% problem children. School violence has intensified to the point of disheartening. Violent incidents continue to happen, and give a warning to our family and school education status quo.

2 JUVENILE DELINQUENCY

CHARACTERISTICS

2.1 Crime shows “crazy” and “sudden”

A teenager is in the period of life from childishness to maturity. Because some young people did not shape a sound personality in the process of social evolution, they are often prone to go astray. Because young peo ple overexert during criminal activities, they are often with a large degree of madness. Because juvenile criminal motives tend to be simpler, their purposes will be more single, randomness stronger. In gen eral, their behaviors are with less premeditated, and without careful consideration and careful planning beforehand, but are often induced and stimulated by certain factors, or acting on impulse and then cause sudden crime. This sudden sexual behavior of adolescent emotional impulsion is of di�cult controlling of their own, even some of them would kill somebody just for stealing some money to go to the Internet bar. 2.2 Psychological characteristics of cognitive structure Adolescence is the transition period from children to adult. During this period, height, weight, muscle, bone, nervous system development speed up, and the gender identity begins to emerge. Drastic physiological changes in the adolescent period cause the drastic psychological changes. The significant feature of psychological changes is a strong, independent requirement of independence with social interaction. They feel they have grown up and do not want anything to depend on adults. The truth is, they also lack such independent activities and abilities of independent problem-handling and problem-solving. 2.3 Vicious expansions of egoistic desire and precocious psychology In real life, some parents of children do not give their children a proper education, but pamper and spoil children overly, which develop their self-willed and selfish characteristics. Strong pursuit of personal eating and drinking often leads to the contradiction between high consumption and low-income, then the sense of frustration in psychology appears. In order to achieve the balance of this abnormal psychology, they set on the path of stealing, looting and lying.

2.4 Distortions and evolution of victory psychology

Victory psychology is a general psychological charac teristic of adolescents, and is also their inner motiva tion to make progress. Given the ideological education of health during this period, they will be able to make it to the right direction. At present, a lot of martial arts films are shown in visual media. Due to their low ability to distinguish, they often go to fight, rob, steal, and even kill other people for so-called friends.

Adolescence is a stage of life that one must experi ence, and a transition period from children to adults.

The psychological characteristics of the adolescent are positive, upward, which have been created for people towards life, towards social conditions, and to lay the foundation. Just paying attention to guide good education, China’s rising generation will be healthy and robust and indomitable talents, a mighty army of construction. They will contribute wisdom and strength to realize the four modernizations great Long

March. Some psychologists believe that “adolescence is a crime”, which spreads that juvenile delinquency is unavoidable. The juvenile education pessimism is unjustified. Because it is theoretically absurd and harmful, it ignores the positive juvenile psychological upward factors and exaggerates the negative aspects of the juvenile psychological characteristics. In prac tice, it is a fundamental breach of the vast majority of our young, healthy growth of no arguable fact.

3 NETWORK ON JUVENILE DELINQUENCY

PSYCHOLOGY

The network is increasingly becoming essential tools in the life of adolescents, such as learning, entertain ment and interaction. At the same time, some bad contents are flooding to the Internet. The negative e�ects of adverse network activities gradually influ ence more on young people than traditional mass media, which makes the network to become one of the important social factors a�ecting the psychology of juvenile delinquency. Throughout this investiga tion, the e�ects of network on juvenile delinquency psychology are mainly internet addiction, internet violence, Internet pornography and friends influence.

3.1 Communication barriers caused by Internet addiction easily advocates to psychological problems and ethical issues, then give rise to the criminal mind

Adolescents who are dealing with the online media for a long time will lose sensibility and actively participate in the awareness of the reality surrounding environment, which may lead to be silent, withdrawn, nervous, alienated, lacking of a sense of responsibility as well as fraud psychology. Addicted to the Internet for a long time, their real-time interaction will be reduced, and even they will alienate reality interpersonal environment. They would produce loneliness and depression. If they have the poor psychological adjustment ability, they can easily produce a psychological crisis and personality disorders. Some teenagers may produce deviant behavior because of these personality disorders. 3.2 Adverse users Virtual network space lets a lot of people think that they can freely express with various statements and exchange all kinds of information even rumors and lies, which easily a�ect the inexperienced young people. They think they have found true friendship, even for users to go through anything. Some people will take advantage of the youth psychology to lure and abet juvenile delinquency. Some of the young people will form criminal gangs because of “like-minded”. This is the new trends in cybercrime. 3.3 Expansion of network desire breeds the motivation for juvenile crime The motivation for the crime is the inner cause of crime to commit criminal acts and the inner reason to contribute to the crime, which is often linked with the basic human desire. The network is a bizarre world. In this world, they have willful allies and enemies in the online game. They contend in music in a virtual community. And it’s coupled with bad information on hard to prevent violence, fraud, and pornography. Good and evil are woven into a charming picture which can inspire the youth potential desire for money, sexuality, conquer and revenge, and their social identity desire will erupt rapidly within a very short period of time. These basic human desires of adolescence are originally in an unconscious state, but the stimulation of the network highlights it. When the desire achieves considerable strength, it will induce the motivation of juvenile delinquency. From the usual psychological point of view, the motivation is the appearance of the image traces left in the cerebral cortex with the stimulation of human needs. 3.4 Impact of the Internet on young people to produce awareness of crime Awareness of crime is based on the material and spiritual needs of people. From a static perspective, good and evil of a person do not exist, because each person’s basic needs are the same. However, from a dynamic point of view, it must pass certain human behavior to get to meet people in the pursuit of the need to meet the process taken by behavior means of the same, they will have contact with other people and society, and are subject to the evaluation of the ethical, legal and social norms, and result the sense of right and wrong. Young people are social men, their needs for “basic necessities of life, social identity and adults are no di�erent. However, in the choice of the need for legitimacy of the evaluation and pursuit, they are more naïve and more impulsive than adults.

Therefore, young people’s long-term exposure to spread all kinds of bad information on the computer network and the network will easily induce all sorts of perverse needs, and produce the psychological desire gained by means that are not recognized and the sim ple, brutal psychology to meet the needs of society.

3.5 Network addiction causes teenagers dilute interpersonal

Network addiction can cause varying degrees of communication barriers, which can contribute to adolescent psychological and moral issues and cause criminal psychology adolescents who are dealing with online media, lose sensibility and actively participate in the awareness of the real ity surrounding environment and then may lead to be silent, withdrawn, nervous, alienated, lacking of accountability, fraudulent and psychological unhealthy. The network addiction causes young people overly concerned with the man-machine dialogue, and the exchanges, thereby dilute the individual and society and others. They will often reduce the realistic interaction time, and even alien ate reality interpersonal environment.

4 EDUCATIONAL MEASURES ON YOUNG

PEOPLE’S MENTAL HEALTH

4.1 To correctly understand and treat the parents’ divorce

Young people eager to get the fatherly and motherly love. If their parents divorce, it can be an objective fact that the children need strengthening guidance and education to properly treat parents’ divorce. It is necessary to help children establish self-esteem, self love, self-reliance and self-improvement. At the same time, the divorced parents should give children more love, try their best to avoid family shadow to the chil dren, and ensure the healthy growth of children. The mental health of children from divorced families has drawn the attention of the social, schools, and fami lies. It needs to be taken seriously and strengthen the prevention. 4.2 Family prevention countermeasures The family plays a vital role in the growth of young people. It is the first line of defense in the prevention of juvenile delinquency. Therefore, it is particularly critical for the family to take precautionary measures to prevent the network, which has a negative impact on children. Parents should improve the quality of the network capacity. 4.3 Countermeasures of school’s prevention First, schools can take their own advantage to teach young people the necessary knowledge of the Internet and to teach them to use the Internet properly, safely and scientifically. It is necessary to let students know the harm of the bad information by publicity, divert young people’s curiosity and cultivate the legal awareness of young people about network. At the same time, it’s needed to strengthen the two sides of education, so that students understand cybercrime cases and learn how to protect them in the complex network environment. For example, do not disclose their own phone and home address to net friends; do not meet net friends alone; and do not send any online photos. Besides, control their time online, so as to help students improve their ability to identify and self-protect. 4.4 Putting prevention Prevent youth from Internet addiction through the following measures: to strengthen education and guidance; to guide young people with a correct view of the Internet, a correct view of the usefulness of the Internet in learning life; to try to avoid its negative e�ects, in particular, not to be indulged in online entertainment, and non-exposure to online pornography content. It needs to attach importance to the social role of environmental concerns and constraints. It needs to create a good family, school life atmosphere, harmonious reality of interpersonal relationships with parents, teachers, classmates, and friends. It needs to give enough physiological and psychological care to the young. And health education institutions give regularly irregular network mental health education to strengthen the positive guidance for young people. 4.5 Ideological and political works and psychotherapy Adhere to the principle of treating the symptoms. Timely and comprehensive treatment to young people who have been su�ering from the network addiction disorder should combine psychotherapy with ideological, political work and medication. First, we should fully implement the requirements of quality education, strengthen ideological education. And strive to improve the ability to identify and improve young people by young people “Three Views” that view of the world, life and values education, self-con trol, and ultimately help improve personality to fundamentally solve the root of the problem. To the

Youth Internet addiction disorder, it is necessary to pay attention to timely conduct of psychotherapy, medication supplemented when necessary, in order to solve the problem of treating the symptoms, to pre vent serious, deteriorating.

4.6 Strengthen supervision and purification cyberspace

4.6.1 To strengthen the supervision of the dissemination of information on the network and online games

Closely monitor Internet portals, timely intercepted unhealthy information, research and develop and install security software on the network, intercept and filter out harmful information for adolescent physi cal and mental health in a timely manner. And take administrative measures to establish a sound level access to the system such as games, online game fatigue system, etc. to prevent young people from being addicted to online psychological deviation in order to build a ground for criminal psychology.

4.6.2 Strengthen supervision of the network culture market

Standardize the management of Internet cafes, imple ment the division of functions. Strengthen collab oration remediation. Strict implementation of the provisions that prohibit bars the admission of minors.

Severely punish and ban the illegal business cafes in accordance with the provisions. Encourage “green bar” or “Rest assured Internet cafes” in schools and community. Promote the production and dissemina tion of high-grade networking products.

4.6.3 Strengthen prevention relying on the integrated force of the community

The whole society should concern about the healthy growth of young people. The Communist Youth

Discussion on the self-maintenance and support mode of training equipment in higher vocational colleges

Bingyi Huang, Lijun Li & Hongxiu Meng

Xingtai Polytechnic College, Xingtai, Hebei, China

ABSTRACT: University teaching and research equipment maintenance costs are increasing with the rapid development of the school. Equipment as a teaching resource should play its role fully and effectively at the same time from quality improve equipment management and material consumption reduction these two aspects to reduce maintenance costs and expenses. This article tells the necessity of self-maintenance, feasibility anal ysis and establishes a competitive mechanism. And this is a feasible way for equipment maintenance. The vocational colleges need to adapt to the situation.

KEYWORD: Higher Vocational Colleges, Self-maintenance, Training Equipment

1 INTRODUCTION

Equipment maintenance costs as auxiliary College equipment fund, occupy a part of the university budget management. Although is only about one per cent of the total college equipment, mismanagement or the giving up of teaching and research will have a serious impact. In recent years, with the continuous progress of the college expansion and popularization of higher education, the university has expanded rap idly. Also it will surge in the stock of equipment for teaching, research, and experiments, so equipment maintenance costs have gone up sharply. Increased maintenance costs will inevitably bring pressure to the school management and funding, and university funding also has less well-o� case. The inevitable requirement for equipment maintenance work is to achieve the best results with minimal maintenance costs. Therefore, improving equipment utilization, reducing equipment repair rate and maintenance expenses as well as the college equipment man agement work have also become the subjects of the equipment management sector faces.

University training equipment maintenance man agement is an important part of the work of the uni versity laboratory management. Proper maintenance management is not only to maintain the integrity of the teaching and research equipment and ensure the normal order of teaching and research work, but also to extend the service life of the equipment and reduce the reported loss scrapped conservation education funding. In recent years, the university training equip ment has been growing, stop times to raise a large number of machines, electricity, light combination of imported equipment into the university laboratory. These are newer and higher requirements for maintenance and maintenance management. However, due to the small scale of the general colleges and universities, maintenance is difficult to focus on implementation of enterprise management, still career management-based, and fewer full-time maintenance staff, the technical level is not high. Due to the negative impact of the market economy, the enthusiasm to play the bad reasons, the college management and maintenance are faced with many problems and difficulties. Therefore, to ensure the college training equipment can be normally used, it needs to reform the existing equipment maintenance mode. The article recommends the device self-repair mode and self-protection mode. 2 EMPHASIS ON THE DAY-TO-DAY MAINTENANCE AND UPKEEP OF THE EQUIPMENT, IMPROVE EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT AND TECHNICAL LEVEL I believe that it should proceed from the way of reforming maintenance management, and strengthen the construction of the maintenance team at the same time to improve their technical level. In the reform of the maintenance management approach, the most important is to follow the ideological principles. To recognize that e�ective management approach is important to a school situation. University equipment maintenance management is an economic and technical management. Managers should act in accordance with economic laws. Make the transi tion from simple administration-based approach to economic management; the transition from the maintenance of unpaid service to paid services, from career-type “iron rice bowl”, egalitarianism to pay for more work. The less labor, the less you earn. No work, no allocation of transition and market economy.

The ultimate goal is to completely maintenance work market. Therefore, both the quality and e�ectiveness of equipment should be ensured. Besides, reduce equipment maintenance costs, improve equipment maintenance and maintenance requirements, clear the implementation of equipment maintenance quality, clear the implementation of equipment maintenance responsibility, and enhance the personnel device management business, technology and quality.

3 ENHANCE THE BUSINESS AND

TECHNICAL LEVEL OF EQUIPMENT

MANAGEMENT, COMBINED WITH

EQUIPMENT OPERATION, MAINTENANCE,

AND MAINTENANCE

Teaching and research equipment maintenance and maintenance work, in fact, is a high-tech management of a service for the only goal in teaching and research and a means to reduce equipment maintenance costs that cannot be ignored. Therefore, in conjunction with the specific circumstances of the school, establish and improve the teaching, research, experiment, practice equipment maintenance and maintenance of the var ious rules and regulations, such as the maintenance process specification, quality standards, acceptance of the system. In depth and detailed data measuring equipment and its components, inspection, testing, maintenance work is documented, to ensure that every aspect of the device management process can be taken strictly in accordance with the principle of maintenance equipment, process planning, technical implementation of norms and standards. Device man agement departments should carry out spot checks and the supervision of maintenance and maintenance of the implementation. Strengthen equipment man agement responsibility to do a good job in equipment maintenance work to ensure that the running of the teaching and research equipment is safe and normal.

Prolong the life of the equipment through e�ective maintenance. Reduce the number of failures and reduce maintenance costs.

Pay attention to overall maintenance. Meticulous maintenance not only can keep the equipment in good technical condition and work status and prevent operator error and human degradation, but also can improve and enhance the status of equipment and technology, and extended equipment life cycle, slow down the natural aging of the equipment, eliminating equipment operation, the use of various risks, improve efficiency, in order to protect the safe operation of the teaching and research equipment, reduce equipment maintenance costs of inputs. Therefore, in the implement of equipment management, each department, each responsible person must be careful of the operating conditions of the equipment and instruments detailed records of monitoring, careful examination and routine maintenance, maintenance of equipment operation site. In order to improve equipment maintenance of the efficiency and effectiveness of fault diagnosis instrument equipped with professional equipment managers at all levels to ensure timely detection of problems and timely treatment. Therefore, the equipment maintenance work is an integral part of the process equipment and equipment management content. Improving equipment maintenance work is the key to improve equipment reliability. Take measures and means to ensure the safe and economic operation of important equipment. Strengthen equipment maintenance measures to improve the requirements, clear system. Take the responsibility to ensure that the equipment is running in high-quality and high efficiency, to extend the life cycle of the equipment and the service period, and reduce maintenance costs expenditures. 4 TO ESTABLISH EQUIPMENT FAILURE PREVENTION SYSTEM With the development of material science and design and manufacturing technology, teaching and research equipment, design, production, manufacture, introduction a lot of new technologies, new processes, new materials, new structures, equipment management, maintenance, maintenance proposed higher demand. It requires more science, better technical support and management of the equipment. But it also brings a new di�culty to the judgment of the equipment failure. To this end, the equipment managers not only need to improve the level of science and technology and skills, but also to master the operation of equipment as well as the principle of the device structure, performance, features, and accurately predict the possible failure to establish the key parts, it is important prevention system parts, key procedures and equipment failure emergency treatment program, database, e�ectively put an end to a fault occurs. Do a detailed record of the sudden equipment failure. Provide detailed reference data and information and real corrective maintenance to ensure that the equipment is in good technical condition and work status. Prevention system and the implementation of the emergency plan are for e�ectively improving equipment management, maintenance, improvement and the performance, accuracy and e�ciency of the equipment. In order to improve the teaching, research equipment e�ciency, active use of new technologies, new processes, data acquisition equipment problems and failure analysis tools, maintenance and renovation should combine with the use of new technologies, new processes, new materials and advanced equipment for correc tive maintenance. And this should be done accord ing to the teaching, research, experiment, practice equipment characteristics, requirements, frequency of use, the use of the scope, backward substitution and updated technology, energy consumption, low e�ciency of equipment and components.

For large precision teaching and research equip ment, in addition to the daily necessary maintenance and management, it acquires suppliers to sign the related contract as a contract, which explicitly asks them to provide maintenance training and techni cal support. Also, the maintenance of the different devices should be selected by the social research or the use of tender form skillful and reputable social maintenance department as a partner to solve equip ment maintenance work, to fully tap the social profes sional maintenance of power equipment maintenance, to reduce maintenance time, to improve the quality of maintenance, and to reduce equipment maintenance costs.

5 REDUCE EQUIPMENT PARTS,

MAINTENANCE MATERIALS CONSUMPTION

Control the expenditure of maintenance funds is an important factor to reduce maintenance costs.

Equipment parts and materials maintenance costs typically account for about 65% of the equipment maintenance costs. Strengthening the various forms of management, market research, social tendering, e�ective control and reducing the cost of the purchase of equipment parts and materials savings on mainte nance costs will play a big role.

6 REFORM OF THE MAINTENANCE

MANAGEMENT APPROACH

1 To change the current maintenance funding for centralized management and unified expenditure.

Maintenance expenses can be allocated to the equipment user departments lump sum to use sav ings prizes, cost overruns have not been replaced.

The allocation of funds is to be taken into account as much as possible. The total value of the recency of departmental equipment, the decomposition of these factors for a certain percentage of the funds indicators should be calculated according to the formula. 2 Repairs to the implementation of the paid services. Equipment classification is to develop a reasonable fee according to the standard fee. A certain percentage of the original value of the fees can be equipment. In general, the less equipment at cost, the higher the standard of their fees should be, and on the contrary, should be lower. Charges internal banks Liu Tongquan circulation can be used in schools, to be settled within a certain period of time. 3 To create a competitive mechanism. Allow the equipment user departments to select the repair person. Self-study, you can send a full-time maintenance sta� to repair, it can ask the school outside other personnel repair. School equipment repair market is completely open, and part-time sta�, full-time sta�, school sta�, school personnel can come to occupy the market. 4 To establish appropriate safeguards system, including the implementation of the warranty system and reward system. Warranty system refers to the same part of the same piece of equipment repairs within a certain time after the introduction of free repair. The warranty time is according to the situation in schools, general machinery and equipment for six months and electronic equipment for three months. The maintenance paid services is linked with the part of the salaries and bonuses of the full-time maintenance sta� quality and quantity of their work; from the recovery of funds (net of costs), the corresponding proportion as a bonus. After a rigorous assessment, reward the outstanding achievements of the maintenance sta�, and the poor performance of the maintenance sta� will be subject to punitive treatment. 7 CONCLUSION The maintenance and management of the post-reform approach would have the following advantages: 1 Equipment department heads the financial management to strengthen the day-to-day maintenance of the equipment, and to minimize the failure to reduce repair costs. It will help extend the life of equipment, reduce the reported loss scrapped, save the funding for education, and improve the overall e�ectiveness of the school to manage school. 2 Largely broaden the channels for equipment maintenance. Set up of university equipment repair market competition mechanism. This exclusivity means that the school repair situation no longer exists. In order to win in the competition, it is necessary to improve the service attitude, improve their technical level, and constantly learn new knowledge, new technologies, and new pro cesses. This is conducive to the improvement of the quality of the full-time maintenance team business.

3 For university maintenance work to implement new management approach, the administration is macro shift maintenance work to the enterprise management. Establish and perfect the relevant rules and regulations to guide the competitive repair work healthily carried out to prevent unfair competition, and maintenance. Guarantee the school’s overall interests and ideological and polit ical education work.

To strengthen the construction of university maintenance team, it is necessary to appropriately increase the number of staff, and at the same time to pay attention to improve the existing level of pro fessional and technical personnel. Appropriate divi

The study on sports psychology consultants based on competence model

Yong Qiao

Physical Education Department, Wuhan Polytechnic University, Wuhan, Hubei, China

ABSTRACT: This study describes the current research on the ability of sports psychology consultant, and compares the two kinds of capacity model of sports psychology consultant from China and abroad. Through the description and comparison, research thinks, the development of the future of the research in our ability to sports psychology consultant should focus on the improved model, establish the evaluation criteria of ability sports psychology consultant.

KEYWORDS: Sports Psychology Consultant; Competence Model; Competence Study

1 THE COMPETENCE STUDIES AND

APPLICATIONS

1.1 Situation abroad

The strength of the study and research has been widely accepted and used in many enterprises and organiza tions, for the famous psychologist, professor David

McClelland of Harvard University, published “test ability not intelligence” in 1973, and points out that the ability to test should instead of intelligence test evaluation and predict a person’s professional perfor mance. Although the historical research ability is not long, a large number of theory and practice research has made some clinical psychology, education psy chology and industrial psychology (Norris, 1991) [1].

These studies mainly used in areas of management, career counseling, medical system, etc. For example:

AT&T and IBM’s leaders’ theory to the competence into human resources management. From the 1980 s to the early 1990 s, many countries have established their vocational qualification system, such as the national vocational qualification certificate (NVQs) of the United Kingdom, the national qualifications framework (NQF) of the Australian national training board and technical standards of the state of the United

States. But this professional qualification system is for any career, the lowest required, it like knowledge and skills is easy to measure, rather than the central surface’s ability [2]. At present, the research on the trendy ability is changing from developing individual performance improvement group performance; that is to say, excellent performer is characteristic of the ability of the window [3]. 1.2 Situation domestic In China, the attention on learning ability in the 1990 s, most of the research and development ability is proposed on the basis of the five general model is Spencer in 1993. The number of research for growth capacity is 2000 years later. But the research object is limited professional education workers, senior management personnel and government o�cials. For example: chien ming wang, “(2002)” research lichen ability of the senior managerial personnel of the communication industry in China’s behavior event interview method [4]. And most of the research is to follow the methods like behavior event interview (shell), picture story exercise, focus talk, and systematic, comprehensive level observation organization, the latter is by foreign scholars in a foreign environment. Much of the purpose of the research is to build a model related ability, for example, “loyalty and peak (2004) establish ken price capacity model of senior management personnel in the family enterprise [5], but the lack of practice of research. 1.3 Application in the field of sports The development of sports psychology, many scholars, the concept of application ability of the stadium. All the signs are that, the quality of sports psychology consulting is decisive high level sports competition, especially close competitors. In addition, the sports psychology consultant works not only to seal the athlete’s influence on the performance of the game, but also have great influence on their professional development. Therefore, many scholars have realized that the test of the professional knowledge and skills can’t distinguish between qualified sports psychology con sultant from the rest.

2 THE CURRENT STUDY SITUATIONS

OF THE COMPETENCE OF SPORTS

PSYCHOLOGY CONSULTANTS

In 1966, Oglivie and Tutko published a book titled: The athletes and how to handle them [6 pounds. The book is considered to be the threshold value of the research capacity model sports psychology consultation. Since then, many foreign scholars are into their own research.

Gould research (1991) more sports psychologist char acteristics (knowledge, working mode and etc), and lists the service project (biofeedback) according to the order of importance [7 liters. In addition to the knowl edge and skills of the survey show that Sanchez (2005) good features (flexible and open mind, the shy; and communication skills and is a very important sports psychology consultant [8]. A survey by Partington and

Orlick form in 1987, evaluation sports psychology consultant had enough players. In addition to the sec ond about the surface’s ability of knowledge and the skill, the remaining six items for the central enterprise competitive sports psychology consultant, including the ability to communicate, positive attitude, reliable and flexible accidents, [9]. Research in an ability of the advisory hockey sports psychology shows that trust and good communication and athletes are consultants a successful important factor of the psychological con sultation of the current situation, including the under standing ability, can adapt to the professional sports environment and so on (sweat! So, most scholars think there is a sports psychology consultant competent decision is the central ability.

Although the study of the ability in our country sports psychology consultant started later than in developed countries, we have made some achieve ments, especially in the ability of the model sports psychology consultant. As a kind of effect to identify and predict index, a person’s job performance, study the ability to help us establish a China evaluation standard of sports psychology consulting with norms of behavior, keep their moral and promote the devel opment of sports psychology.

3 STUDIES ON COMPETENCE MODEL OF

SPORTS PSYCHOLOGY CONSULTANTS

Two competence models of sports psychology con sultants Poczwardowski and his collaborators (1998) proposed in “A sport psychology service deliv ery heuristic: building on the theory and practice” eleven important factors in designing, implementing and evaluating sports psychology consultation. It includes: (l) Professional boundaries; (2) Professional philosophy; (3) Making contact; (4) Assessment; (5) Conceptualization athletes’ concerns and potential interventions; (6) Range, types, and organization of the service; (7) Program implementation; (8) Managing the self as an intervention instrument; (9) Program and consultant evaluation; (10) Conclusions and implication; (11) leaving the setting [11]. With the approach of Behavior Events Interview (BEl), we primarily constituted the competence model of sports psychology consultants in China. It consists of the following 8 competencies: (1) Knowledge application; (2) Detail observation, (3) Potential interventions, (4) Teamwork, (5) Role-adjustment, (6) Self-management, (7) Peer communication, (8) considering the long-range interest of athletes [12]. 4 COMPARISON AND ANALYSIS ON THE ABOVE COMPETENCE MODELS Through the comparison below, we discovered three di�erences between these two models, which are mainly resulted from the athletic sports mechanics in China. First, the Chinese model according to distinguishing good advisors and the average man. It belongs to the model of differentiated ability. Competence model belongs to the basic skills. Comparison of the above competence models Poczwardowski’s Model Chinese Model Similarities Professional boundaries Conceptualization athletes’ concerns and potential interventions Conclusions and implication Managing the self as an intervention instrument Knowledge application Potential interventions Peer communication Self-management Di�erences Professional philosophy Making contact Assessment Range, types, and organization of service Program implementation Program and consultant evaluation leaving the setting Detail observation Teamwork Ro Ie-adjustment considering the long-range interest of athletes

Second, China’s sports machinery is quite different from the developed countries. In China, a sports psy chology consultant is usually employed by a sports team, not special athletes, consultants have had to deal with complex relations of athletes, coaches and sports management team, at the same time, China’s advisory roles should be adjusted his/her normal.

Some scholars talked about, difficult to handle, and role-adjustment, multiple situation, there are a lot of sensitive issues. In the process of change of the role, the role of different easily influences each other 0, so we have to make sure that every role, grasp the role behavior and function carefully, avoid role conflict and improve [13].

Third, incompetence model, it mentions a qualita tive and quantitative evaluation, and new effect con sulting project approach to the study of science. This project is useful to construct the professional stand ards of sports psychology consultation.

5 FUTURE ORIENTATION OF COMPETENCE

STUDY OF SPORTS PSYCHOLOGY

CONSULTANTS

And the development and strengthening our coun try sports, we should improve the capacity model in our country sports psychology consultant, establish evaluation standards of sports psychology consultant and provide accurate reference rankings, testing and sports psychology consultant.

[1] Norris, N. The trouble with competence[J]. Cambridge

Journal of Education, 3:331–341.1991. [2] Hyland, T. Competence, Education and NVQs: Dissenting Perspectives[M]. London, Cassell, 1994. [3] Chen Yunchuan, Lei Vi. The review of competence study application and development [J], Management Science, 2010,25(6): 141–144. [4] Shi Kan, Wang Jicheng. The study on the assessment of competence model of senior administrators in China [1]. Journal of Psychology, 2009, 34(3):306–311. [5] Zhong Lifeng, Shi Kan. The competence model of the senior managers in family-run enterprises [J]. Journal of Psychology, 2009, pp. 36. [6] Ogilvie, B.C, & Tutko, T. Problem athletes and how to handle them [M]. New York, Great Britian: Pelham Books, 1966. [7] Gould, D., Murphy, S., Tammen, V.,& May, J. An evaluation of U.S. Olympic sport psychology consultant effectiveness, The Sport Psychologists, 1991, 5:111–127. [8] Sanchez, X., Godin, P., & Zanet, F. D. Who delivers sport psychology services? Examining the field reality in Europe, The Sport Psychologists, 2005, 19:81–92. [9] Orlick T,Partington J., The sport psychology Consultant Evaluation Form, The Sport Psychologist, 1987, 1:309–317. [10] Halliwell, W. Providing Sport Psychology Consulting Services in Professional Hockey[J], The Sport Psychologist, 1990, 4(4):369–377. [11] Artur Poczwardowski, Clay P.Sherman, Keith P. Henschen,. A sport psychology service delivery heuristic: building on theory and practice, The Sport Psychologist. 1998, 12:191–207. [12] Zhang Ling. The competence model of sports psychology consultants in China, International Convention on Science, Education and Medicine in Sports, 2008, 249. [13] Bei Enbo. Psychology Consultant’s Role orientation and role behavior in high level sports team (1). Journal of Wuhan Institute of Physical Education. 2003, 37(6):136–138. This page intentionally left blank

Explore the text constitute and art design in the teaching of

PS graphic design

Li Qin

Academy of Art, Harbin University of Science and Technology, Harbin, China

ABSTRACT: As a design school education “three constitute”, PS graphic design is the key construction disciplines of art institutions, the text form of art and design is one of the important aspects of PS graphic design teaching. Text and images constitute art and design. Art design are compared to richer variety, because it is not only after the art image processing functions, but also uses their own language characteristic expressions, so it can convey information more profound cultural connotations. PS software (Photoshop Software for short) represents the image format and color mode which is very rich and can be multi-layered artistic treatment. In the image distortion function and filter function, it can be designed with the support of a very rich artistic space, and creates many Guangguai and magical visual effects.

KEYWORDS: PS Graphic Design; Plane teaching; text form; Art and Design

Text is a cultural symbol of people formed in a long term process of development, and it has a unique meaning and connotation. Entered a new era, with the development of society and technology, PS technol ogy was introduced in graphic design teaching, mak ing more diverse forms of art and design, in addition to the use of images to convey some of the design ideas, we also use PS technology artistic text design, so that the original only has a cultural connotation of the word and has become like having the image of the instructions and graphics capabilities, so that the entire graphic design has more level and taste. So now a lot of art colleges and universities have begun to focus on the text with the PS technology art and design, graphic design PS. This paper analyzes the characteristics and function of art and design on its text, and achieving design e�ects are discussed.

1 PS GRAPHIC DESIGN ANALYSIS

1.1 The basic connotation of graphic design graphic design, as the name suggests, is a kind of artistic activity in a design space of the plane. It is an art form, in order to achieve di�erent visual e�ects, with a flat material as a medium to convey and flat surface material images, text and other art treatment convey a unique artistic activity and artistic ideas and information to others. These design element design and graphic design are included in the main carried out on a two-dimensional space and layout design of e�ective combinations. The design uses categories including the following aspects, layout design, font design, screen design, photography and illustration design and so on. All of these designs is the central purpose or convey some information or guidance of an act, or to explain a certain sense, and so on. With the rapid development of society and science and technology, modern printing technology with hightech development is also manifested in the form of graphic design to develop a broader space. Designers can font typography, layout design and unique visual concept and other professional skills, and complete their creative purposes. Where the art word processing and graphic design images are the two most important content, graphic design is the most important way of thinking expression. The main purpose of graphic design is to identify aspects of merchandise, publications, letters, posters, web design or print ads, etc., They are often able to improve the content, and the quality of these items is improved through the artistic design and approach design. 1.2 PS technology in graphic design PS technology is the use of Photoshop software to design artistic treatment of items about images, text and color. And PS Graphic design is the use of PS technology software for graphic design process, so that the original idea that can be just imagined can be in reality. PS software with superior features of all other software cannot be replaced. Current, PS, as graphic design software, is the most ideal choice for design. Due to the content and scope of graphic design are relatively broad, as long as there is demand on the need for the design of graphic design presence, in addition to graphic design and art design is somewhat di�erent, it is a pure art design work with reality detachment and even con trary to the reality; but graphic design must be from a practical point of view, in order to meet the actual needs of customers, through the close integration of art and technology, artistic conception and technical operations, it is a commercial activity with a strong utilitarian nature to obtain economic benefits for the ultimate goal.

2 THE ROLE OF TEXT OF ART IN

GRAPHIC DESIGN

2.1 Properties of text

Text is used to record the language of symbols of mankind, it is human survival after a long evolution and created, representing the generation of human civilization. So the text has the following character istics: First, the text has identifiable. Text generation is to record some important things, so in order to let everyone can understand the meaning of records, we give the text a specific meaning, and therefore it has an identifiable character. Second, it is the word indicative e�ect. Our history is a long history of ancient civilization, and text generation has thou sands of years, the ancients in the creation of the text mainly from the six aspects to consider, namely pictographs, phonetic, knowing, that things turn injection and guise, while these six areas play a role and set of instructions. Third, the text has a sense of history. The text from the beginning of Oracle inscriptions were experienced big Xiaozhuan, o cial script, regular script, etc., until the spread so far, each of which represents a piece of history writing, and writing will play a di�erent character in di�erent artistic e�ect.

2.2 The text of art and design in graphic design

2.1.1 The problem of insufficient filling the picture information

Graphic design has artistic and technical require ments that are very high commercial activity, and they are responsible for propaganda function. The contents constitute a graphic design, including pic tures and text, pictures give people a strong sense of visual impact, people’s impression of the graphic design gradually is deepened, but some designers are often thought too deep, or the idea is a lot, but limited design level results in that customers do not understand the phenomenon, and therefore must be designed in the text next to the picture plane designed to help people understand the customer or other related art design purpose and design ideas. 2.1.2 A strong visual impact In addition to drawing with a visual impact outside the artistic process through the text equally, the e�ect of such visual impact is still di�erent from the pictures. First picture showing artistic e�ect more intuitive, because it is often the emergence of graphic design as a subject, but in order to achieve the e�ect of publicity, graphic design drawings are generally not too di�cult to understand; and design aspects of the text can be selected on the relatively more , distortion or deformation, color matching e�ects, text and pictures positional relationship, etc., they can cause another visual e�ect on the screen, but it’s more subtle and more interesting artistic expression. 3 TEXT ANALYSIS OF ART AND DESIGN IN PS GRAPHIC DESIGN TEACHING 3.1 PS graphic design teaching must focus on the text of art and design PS plane instructional design is the school using teaching software for the PS. Most school teachers use PS teaching software for graphic design, and editorial design still emphasizes images and text editor designed to ignore the situation. The arrangements of classroom lectures and homework assignments are designed with emphasis on image, the text of art and design is as a supplement to the image, making the students regard the focus on collecting images and compiling the design. Although the use of PS technology can complete design of the image, but the text of the art design level has not been really improved, resulting in graphic design works of “one-sided”, and it greatly reduces the artistry of graphic design works, and sometimes it is di�cult to meet customer needs. Therefore, in teaching graphic design, we should be sure to update the teaching philosophy, PS technology will truly teach students of graphic design, let them deal with the ability to grasp pictures and text. In general, the picture share proportion in graphic design and text should be the same proportion, adding pictures proportion is 40%, then the proportion of the text should also be designed to be 40%, and the remaining 20% is a graphic design blank, so it is only well-proportioned decent. The text designed to function is no longer a simple interpretation of the picture, the picture one can read the text and then explain tantamount to superfluous. The text design rational combination is with the pictures, you can complete an expression of graphic design message out. 3.2 PS graphic design typography teaching must adapt to market demand Text is crystallized people thousands of years of wisdom, not the cold, meaningless symbols, it is full of strong vitality and activity, and therefore, the

PS graphic design teaching design of the text must be in full compliance characteristics and principles.

First, text design follows the principle of adaptability.

Di�erent graphic design expresses certainly not the same the meaning, text design is necessary, according to each graphic design ideas and to set the mood. For example, when designing a cover for a literary work, it would seem simple and solemn, and the choice of picture color is not too bright, not too fancy text and changes should be as simple as possible. And in people daily necessities design, text design can be soft and beautiful type, like the well-known skin care brand OLAY design style. Second, the text is designed to have a perceptible, graphic design, text design and pictures have a significant role, it must have a strong perceptible, because after art process ing without having knowledge of, this art design is a failure. And the text is originally designed to explain the function of bears, do not even have to know the text of the design, so the picture is also more di cult to understand. Third, the text must be designed to have a certain beauty. Graphic design is the art of the deal after the formation of the works, but also some di�erences are with his art, which is to meet custom ers’ needs and design, so there must be customers get to enjoy the beauty, if you like that kind of pure work of art beauty, it can only be “highbrow” nor adapted to carry good activities. Therefore PS plane teaching text design must adhere to these principles, in order to enable students to adapt to the demands of the mod ern market.

3.3 Focus of PS text graphic design teaching

Introduction of PS technology makes the graphic design of some of the ideas to be realized. PS Graphic

Design in teaching should focus on teaching deline ated according to the text of some design features.

First, it is the use of flat graphic text design. Our char acters are preserved historic hieroglyphic world, after years, precipitation has spawned a lot of fonts, and links between each word are very close, especially the radical and pronunciation of the same word, we make use of the graphic method art and design may produce a completely di�erent mood artistic e�ects.

Teaching and research of professional software application skills based on work task-driven — application skills of Thsware tri-dimensional quantity automatic calculation software

Huaguo Jiang

Luzhou Vocational and Technical College, Luzhou, Sichuan, China

ABSTRACT: In recent years, expanding the scale of the project, work on the project cost is ever increasing, engineering calculations workers is growing. To realize the automatic calculation of engineering quality is not only the need of engineering cost management, but also the requirement of the engineering management during the engineering construction. The 3-dimensional visual quantity automatic calculation software can solve the complicated problems existing in the engineering quantity calculation.

KEYWORDS: Engineering quantity; Reinforcing steel; Engineering cos; Visual quantity automatic calcula tion software

1 INTRODUCTION

Throughout the construction industry, with the inten sification of competition in the industry, bidding cycles are getting shorter, the accuracy of the budget have become increasingly demanding. The tradi tional method of hand-Count the amount work has been unable to meet their daily needs, we can only use the computer to quickly and accurately Count the amount. Facilitate accurate software supporting com puting tools has become the industry’s urgent need for e�cient work and good assistant. Count the amount graphics software in project cost management grad ually been widely used. In recent years, a lot of construction cost consulting enterprises and Count the amount graphics software application level has been significantly improved through the gold Luban,

PKPM, Glodon software, a few months before they will Count the amount work to complete within a week can be done, greatly improved work e�ciency.

Thsware was established in Shenzhen, it has a series of more varieties production. Thsware’s Count the amount software apart is the engineering and steel integrated in a software, the building components are arranged directly on the chart bars, reinforced con struction drawings can be output. Thsware’s Count the amount three-dimensional software development to the present, the function is already very complete and powerful, works on an entirely calculated with out any problems. However, it is not if we understand and study in depth, use the correct amount of calcu lations there is a certain degree of difficulty. Articles research on teaching skills of Thsware professional software application. 2 GENERAL APPROACH OF GRAPHIC CALCULATION 2.1 Familiar with engineering drawings Familiar with engineering drawings. Compared with the traditional method of calculating, the amount of graphics calculation familiar with the drawings that can be reduced in time, as the process of establishing an engineering model itself is familiar with the process of engineering drawings, and say it is easy to modify the computer, that are not familiar with manual drawings. 1 Familiar with the drawings, including paper and electronic drawings, in which the electronic drawing familiarity and preparation include: As the design institute uses different software, you need to count the amount imported electronic map software for transformation or reinforced, or need to use the DWG file conversion tool to convert. 2 Electronic drawing name relabeled, some institute provides an electronic drawing no Chinese name of the document, you need to apply after the easy mark. 3 Structure can imported into the steel sampling software that should be considered, and then imported to Count the amount graphics software. So that one can avoid duplication of e�ort, the second is reinforced beam sampling software can be identified in situ labeling, that the same name can identify di�erent locations beam cross-section and elevation modifications improve accuracy and reduce the workload.

4 The model that uses electronic documents to convert must attend to the same that have the same name, but the focus of the beam cross section marked di�erent situations, then only recognize the first cross-sectional dimension concentrated, resulting in errors.

5 To determine the sequence of successively trans formed based on the engineering and design features.

2.2 Build engineering models

① Modeling is done the construction of project in the computer, including two aspects: a) Count the amount drawn plan: The main is to determine the base, col umns, beams, walls, door and window openings, lin tels and ancillary components such as frame members plane position; 2) defines the attributes of each com ponent: Component di�erent categories, the specific attributes, which sets the same search mechanism is fixed, can be applied flexibly.

② Modeling sequence: 1) First, Count the amount floor plan drawing, and then define the component properties; 2) first define the component properties, and then Count the amount drawn plan; 3) calculation the amount of floor plan drawing process while defin ing component properties.

③ Modeling to accelerate the use of electronic chart progress: a) tracing method. Importing elec tronic chart to determine the appropriate ratio

2) transformation methods. Count the amount software generally provides grids, walls, columns, doors, windows, tables (such as windows and doors, tables, column, table, the height of the table) trans formation can also import existing data reinforced turn-like software (including the main structural component of the data), greatly accelerated the speed of modeling.

3 ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF

COUNT THE AMOUNT GRAPHICS

Advantages include the following aspects: ① the computational complexity of graphics, such as foun dation, earthwork, foundation pits, sloping roof com ponents and so on. Can Count the amount earthwork construction. Built drawings of the actual require ments, definitions excavation elevation for di�erent locations, di�erent boundary earthwork slope, as we accurately calculate earthwork, provides excel lent convenience. ② easy to modify, statistics. We can quickly be modified to recalculate statistics. ③ stereoscopic display and visualization verifica tion, modeling and calculation can verify the cor rectness of the rules set parity. ④ the design check. Identify problems and timely communication with the designer to accurately calculate the amount of the actual project. ⑤ easy measurement of the whole construction process audit. Actual progress can be modeled, Count the amount. You can also take advantage of the e�ect of three-dimensional modeling, to guide the construction. Especially for large construction projects sometimes multi-year construction. In order to ask for progress payments to the Party, it is necessary to complete the project according to the actual amount calculation amount. In this case, simply copy a file to be modified according to the actual progress, the software will automatically aggregate. So Count the amount work to do more with less. ⑥ facilitate the operator’s three-dimensional imagination capabilities. ⑦ conducive to the carrying inventory norms, changing practices. Count the amount steel sampling software built-in flat method according to Atlas and norms automatic deductions accurately Count the amount. Built-in flat laws and norms by the user according to di�erent needs, set and modify their own to meet diverse needs. Disadvantages include the following aspects: ① input data and more time-consuming project, not improve work efficiency.②Computer Language & Engineering language can not be converted directly. ③page conversion project, can not be intelligent operation records.④Replace functionality bulk properties still need to improve.⑤unable to columns, beams, walls, slabs attainment project separately.⑥software generates a table format is fixed and can not be modified accordingly according to specific requirements. Three dimensional of Thsware Count the amount software operating procedures 1 Set the project properties, the main contents of the project name and the use of fixed and count the amount use of the list or count the amount fixed; 2 The import electronic diagram system diagram, materials and other definitions; 3 The identification or engineering content (devices) are arranged in the interface; 4 Designation is set floor information; 5 Carry out engineering calculations and get BOQ Application Examples The project is a school building, set canteen, conference, canteen in one, building area of 1434 square meters, four, and with a basement, the roof level half empty spacious rooftop terrace. Required to calculate the amount of installation works are: • Electrical Systems • Water supply and drainage system • Air-conditioning system • Weak systems • Fire protection system • Fire Alarm System

Calculation contents:

Taking the electrical system and water supply as example, the flow chart shown in Figure 1 and figure 2.

Water supply and drainage system operation pro cess is shown in Figure 2.

4 SOFTWARE APPLICATION STATUS

At present, a computer software engineering calcula tion has been more than a decade. During this time,

Count the amount software developed rapidly, but the cost of oilfield construction market most peo ple still remain in the hand count pricing software engineering and then apply the state, the author of several large oilfields cost advisory bodies and rel evant design unit conducted a survey of status quo can not be optimistic, because of the design units and the cost of consultancy mismatch between software applications, making the software a low penetration rate, the reason are the following: 1 As traditionally neglected and project cost management methods and mistakes, there is contempt “budget and final accounts,” the tendency of sta�, resulting in a long project cost is not high quality. Despite recent national implementation of the “Certified Cost Engineer” examination system has been reversed to some extent, this phenomenon, but due to some historical reasons, the main force is still the “same team.” 2 Calculation the amount of software requires modeling — graphical input operation is more cumbersome. Most software modeling depends on the design and drafting software such as AutoCAD and other graphics platform software support, and this class of software applications requires a higher starting point for users, being unable to meet the requirements. 3 Some can directly call the digital images of the software, in the practical application e�ect is not ideal. Since a wide variety of graphics software category, di�erent standards, not the unified data interface, leading to Count the amount software errors in reading drawings frequently, modify volume, making the function greatly reduced, a�ecting the software promotion. 4 The amount of calculation using the software subject to certain restrictions, coupled with some of the department’s work is more onerous than usual, leading to Count the amount software for real promotion generated a great deal of resistance, the application range is very limited. Combined with stubbornly high development costs, but also limits the use of expansion of the scope. 5 CONCLUSION The emergence and gradual promotion of count the amount graphics software, although still not completely solve engineering calculation of the amount, but the project cost industry has a huge impact. The real cost of a comprehensive computerized era, Count the amount graphics software with the continued promotion and application, are not far o�. We want to use the software in the process of constantly summing up experience and skills enable us to continuously improve the level of the operating software, make software truly flexible work for us, as the majority cost of sta� is a good helper, so that cost no longer tedious boring work.

Figure 1. Flow chart of electrical system.

Figure 2. Water supply and drainage system operation process.

Electrical systems Distribution box; wire tube; cables, wires, switches, sockets, lamps, other devices

Plumbing systems Water supply pipeline; drainage; meter, gate valve; ware; other devices

Air conditioning systems Duct; cold water pipe; return pipe; outlet; new fan; fan coil; pipe supports, pipe insulation

Weak electrical systems Cable; cable TV lines, telephone lines, monitoring network cable

Fire systems and alarm systems Water supply pipeline; sprinkler pipes; monitor wiring; control equipment; other devices

[1] Chen Dan. Concrete beam wall plane connecting nodes

Research [J]. Shanxi Architecture, 2007 (02), pp. 76–77.

[2] Huang Yong. Build two high pressure outlet architec ture finite element analysis and safety review [J]. Water

Resources and Hydropower, 2001 (01), pp. 26–31. [3] Shi Shengrong. HZS100 concrete mixing batching machine design [J]. Shanxi Architecture, 2007 (36), pp. 326–327.

The application of Germany dual education system in nursing education in China

Yan Zhao

Shandong Medical College, Jinan, China

ABSTRACT: In this paper, the German occupational education, especially “dual-script system” vocational education model, also analysis the characteristics of the vocational education in Germany, and analysis of the present situation of China’s vocational education, can get into our country nursing education enlightenment To understand the current state of nursing students’ subjectivity education and exploration-oriented teaching policy to develop it.

KEYWORDS: Germany Dual Education System; Nursing Education; China

1 THE GENERAL SITUATION OF

VOCATIONAL EDUCATION IN GERMANY

Germany’s vocational and technical education is known as the German economic boom of the “secret weapon”, and “dual-script system” model is known as the secret weapon “launch authority” place. (a) The

German education system.

1.1 The primary education: pre-school education

Elementary education: first class education.

Secondary education: the second stage education.

The second stage of class I education is basically a general secondary education, equivalent to our coun try junior high school; Level II, including education and professional medium general secondary educa tion, equivalent to high school in China. The second stage education also belongs to obligation education.

The second phase I level education. In Germany have four kinds of high school: the subject of mid dle school, middle school, high school and grammar, overall middle school. Get grammar school graduate from high school students has obtained the certificate of qualification in Germany university study, and complete high school diploma is also called “univer sity matures certificate”.

The second phase II education level has the same educational level, such as professional or specialized subject graduates of completing middle school, also have on the university of qualification. 1.2 Higher education: the third stage education University. Here refers to the university, in Germany often called the academic type KeXueXing University or college (comprehensive university), university entrance conditions for “university matures certificate”. Application technology university. Technology applied university, the study contents on practice, the educational system is relatively short. 1.2.1 “Dual-script system” vocational education The so-called dual system vocational education, meaning to teenagers in the enterprise is receiving vocational skill and the related professional knowledge, training, and in vocational schools accept vocational professional theory and the common cultural knowledge education. It is di�erent from school system, can be called a part of the school system vocational education form. Accept the dual system training of the students, the general must have high school, middle school of the main body or (equivalent to our country’s junior high school diploma, and, after that, or through the labor bureau of job-introduction center choose an enterprise, according to the provisions of the relevant laws signed a contract with the enterprise training, get a training position, and then to relevant professional school registration made theoretical study qualification. So he would be a dual system vocational education mode of the students. He has a dual identity: in schools is the student, in the enterprise is apprenticeship, he has to study training site: training enterprise and vocational school.

1.3 The main agency responsibilities and obligations

1.3.1 These institutions are mainly responsible for the law, management, funds and assessment requirements

The federal education and scientific research depart ments. In professional education issues it plays a comprehensive and coordinated role, reflects in: the vocational education competent federal modification, and its reserves the right of explanation; Supervise the implementation of the law; Be responsible for setting the professional education in great and has the policy of principle; The federal occupational edu cation institute director; Responsible for vocational education regulations issued continue to practice and training teachers about education qualification regu lations; Career education funding in “discrimination,” and “top”; Vocational education funding the module test and research projects.

The federal ministry and other business depart ment. It is mainly responsible for the training of professional recognition and abolished, in addition to agriculture, judicial, health professional points by the federal food, justice, and health departments responsible for outside, most of the other handicraft industry and the industrial and commercial flying training professional all by the responsible. Whether admit or abolished a vocational training, must ask for federal teach families in advance of the department of agreed, otherwise can take effect. The ministry and other business department through the form of law issued national approbatory training professional, regulations, the purpose of which is to unify the industry training contents, specifications and require ments, practices, training teachers’ qualifications, training organization principle, the matters needing attention and after the training the exam of a series of regulations.

States cultural and educational minister extended meeting. Its main task is to make sure that the German education career in common and comparability with a necessary at least standards. It is a voluntary educa tion ministers states a tool of the inner harmony.

The federal states duty. The basic law of the state to school the competent authority, the states com petent department also through its of the bear the corresponding task. States and fully exercise their vocational education is responsible for some of the specific funding support, to the competent profes sional education process guild exercise legal super vision power.

Industry association. German industry associ ation is the regional division, have mandatory, the industry’s mission is to represent the interests of the members of the association, maintain and keep the business communities long some credit tradition. Industry association in addition to promote economic development in the industry must complete the tasks outside, still take some tasks entrusted by the country, vocational education is one of the most important one. German industry association mainly has the guild, commercial and industrial ‘guild, handicraft doctors’ guild, etc. Career education responsibilities to the guild basically has: for the training of enterprise qualification authentication and supervision; Shorten and extend the training time; Responsible for review the contract between the enterprise and the apprentice training contract; Responsible for the examination; Vocational education committee; Formulate rules and regulations; Supervision and consultation; The arbitration commission, etc. The federal occupational education institute. It is the German occupational education to provide guidance and service. It was born in 1976, the former is established in 1970 “the federal research institute of professional education” (Bundesinstitut fur Berufsildungsforschung, BBF). It is the main task of the vocational education through the “research”, assist business community, especially German industrial and commercial industry conference, to promote the national vocational education development. The agency cost the nation undertakes, the highest policy-making body is leadership committee. 1.4 The teaching content and the test method Dual system vocational education teaching contents is according to the di�erent characteristics of the enterprise and school division and cooperation both. Enterprise training according to the federal teach families department and the relevant specialized units promulgated by the regulation on joint training. The German ministry announced the national training profession has admitted 93 career categories: 371 careers. Each specialized units and make the relevant professional category respectively the training regulations, including the education content, time arrangement, examination way, etc and, in conjunction with the federal teach branch department jointly promulgated. Each training according to training regulations and the enterprise the characteristics of the enterprise develop specific training plan and put into practice. Its task is to obey enterprise training in the precondition of ordinary and professional education implementation, deepening enterprise training of professional theory. Dual system vocational education assessment, performance certificate issued by the various industries will be responsible for. The exam is divided into midterm exam and graduation exam two kinds, including the oral exam from the test form, the written test and actual operation skills test. Through the examination of the apprenticeship to graduate to get the country admits post qualification certificate, become the location of the qualified technicians.

1.5 The German dual system vocational education of several prominent characteristics

The general situation of vocational education in

Germany, we can see the German occupational edu cation perfect sex and successful sex, is also the

German dual system vocational education to the global necessity, from Germany dual system voca tional education we can clearly see the outstanding characteristic of it. Dual system vocational education form of the students, most of the time in the enter prise to carry on the practice operation skills training, and the enterprise at present is accepted the use of equipment and technology, training in the very great degree is productive Labor way, so as to reduce the cost and improve the learning of purpose, be helpful for students in after the training and then into work.

Big enterprise most has their own training base and personnel. Don’t have the ability to provide compre hensive training in accordance with articles alone and diversification of vocational training of small and medium-sized enterprise, also can through the cross enterprise training and school factory supplementary training or entrust other enterprises to participate in vocational education training method.

2 NURSING EDUCATION PRESENT

SITUATION IN OUR COUNTRY

Although in recent years the development of voca tional education by the unprecedented attention, however the social from all walks of life remains per vasive despised the vocational education concept, the vocational education appeal not enough is still a real problem.

Now some junior high school teachers told stu dents, you will learn to let you don’t work hard to go to a vocational school; some students according to their interest in the choice of vocational schools, but parents were too shy in front of my colleagues brought, afraid of face is beautiful. The former is the performance of the cultural idea, the latter is the social psychological reaction. This is the vocational education, lack charm of the specific performance.

In fact, in our country related human resource pol icy has released related Suggestions: senior techni cal worker treatment equivalent to senior engineer, associate professor of the average treatment. But, the policy Suggestions has been no implement. The labor and social security professional skill appraisal center director research material-11 think this is profes sional education of the fundamental solution attrac tive reason: to improve the treatment of the workers, let the intermediate skilled workers in the share of social distribution continues to improve, let them in decency and dignity of the work. Currently there is a long-term can’t solve problems, is our vocational education management system has not straighten, shown in three aspects: one is the education of secondary vocational schools, secondary vocational mouth internal management not straighten, vocational schools and high office belong to two company management. Although professional education accounts for the whole education of half the sky, but the number is still in a head a little headier, in the setting of the administrative structure of a large head is still a small head. 2 it is education mouth and labor for vocational education management mouth not straighten, ministry of education and national human resources and social security each tube a stand, independently, each becomes the system, resulting in all provinces, local education and the labor department for the professional education management exist contradictions. Three is education and vocational education for the mouth industry management not straighten, because before a few years education system reform, almost all industries out of the vocational college of management, but not at the same time to build up an actual participation in vocational education for industry management system, and the professional education and forced lacerate all walks of natural born with contact. The above problem resulted in serious two big consequences: the first is the professional education there is a lack of resources and resources scattered coexist, the absence of policy and politics than the coexist, inadequate investment and bull leadership coexist. The result is primary school, secondary vocational and technical school or both had to be careful, be afraid of standing wrong line, table wrong state, and dilemma. The second is the vocational colleges and the relationship between industry is loose, cultivate students not marketable goods. In Germany, vocational education development swing, some students don’t want to read comprehensive university, and are willing to accept vocational education. In our country, the vocational education is deeply hit the “inferior education” mark, many students less than having won’t read vocational school and vocational education in our country and the less developed related, but history cultural reasons also cannot ignore. Our country has five thousand years long history, the dama popular, “ranking thought deeply rooted, which makes our society today, advocating knowledge, far beyond advocate abilities and skills, and seriously hindered the development of vocational education now. In Germany, the enterprise assumes the “dual system” vocational education, 70% of the costs, it’s not only make the enterprise won the high skill work personnel, and to provide the community with a large number of skilled talents.

Enterprise development of society should be held responsible and obligations. In our country, the enter prise participation in vocational education depth and the breadth are not enough. According to the report, our country at present various types of senior techni cal workers there are shortages, the vocational educa tion as is a golden opportunity, not only can solve the problem of higher vocational graduates’ employment, and is actively seeking cooperation between colleges and vocational colleges now. Relevant departments should guide enterprises to participate in higher voca tional education. Teachers in addition to a bachelor’s degree or above with major in outside, still should have a professional post professional qualification, full-time teachers must also regularly enterprise training or under the reform, to update the profes sional knowledge, skilled professional skills. These benefits in the teaching process to strengthen the students’ practical ability of the students. According to the actual situation of the industry, enterprise was founded, school, students, education department, labor department, the party’s representative constitute management institution, overall planning, coordina tion and management of the local education career, solve resource segmentation, education and market and society from the drawbacks. In short, vigor ously developing vocational education and training to adapt to the needs of socialist modernization of specialized personnel and workers is history entrusts with our difficult mission, our vocational education development lags.

3 NURSING EDUCATION IN CHINA CAN

BE OBTAINED FROM THE FOLLOWING

ENLIGHTENMENT

Compared with school system vocational education, dual system vocational education pays more attention to the cultivation of practical skills and exact guar antee. This makes the production line to train first actual operation of the vocational education person nel really become popular education by the enter prise. Although our country’s at present the extremely

Research on college English open course cloud computing application mode

Zhi Li & Yifu Luo

Harbin University of Science and Technology

ABSTRACT: In recent years, open courses showing a new trend. The rise of massive open online course has enabled OCW to overcome the shortcomings of its traditional mode. Meanwhile, as the cloud computing tech nology matures, its features including flexibility, scalability, sharing, low cost and serviceability have rendered new technical supports for the application of OCW. In this article, we build a SECTIONS model of college

English open course application based on cloud computing, and design and realize the cloud computing based massive real-time interactive learning system based on the SECTIONS model.

KEYWORDS: Cloud Computing; Open Courses; SECTIONS Model; Real-time Interaction 1 OPEN TEACHING MODE OF

COLLEGE ENGLISH

As a compulsory basic course for college students, college English is faced with many challenges brought about college enrollment, such as enrolling more students and lager class scale. A deeper, more comprehensive reform of college English teaching is imminent. In 2007, the Ministry of Education made clear demands to reform the traditional college

English teaching: under the new teaching model, stu dents and teachers can take advantage of multimedia and network resources; students under the guidance of teachers, develop their own learning plan and choose their own e-learning content, so that they can get the best learning results. The college English open course cloud computing application mode mentioned in this article is an attempt towards the goal of this reform.

College English open course cloud computing application mode is based on modern educational technology, and through open teaching objectives, open teaching resources, open teaching environment, open teaching methods, and open teaching evaluation, to improve students’ English language proficiency.

1.1 Open teaching objectives

The main goal is teaching students English language proficiency, especially reading and writing skills.

Teaching objectives are more open rather than sin gle and immutable. Moreover, teaching goal setting process is open. That is to say, it needs teachers and students to participate together, but not a teacher or school mandatory requirements; teaching objective itself is open, it can be adjusted according to specific circumstances. 1.2 Open teaching resources In traditional college English teaching mode, fixed textbooks are often the only teaching materials. However, with the development of printing, multimedia, network technology, teachers and students can conveniently obtain a variety of teaching materials through various channels now. So opening of teaching resources is possible. 1.3 Open teaching environment Under the support of multimedia and network technology, English teaching can break through the restrictions of time and space. Open and configure-completed internal and external teaching environment provides more choice for teachers and students, and appropriate teaching environment will undoubtedly help improve teaching effectiveness. 1.4 Open teaching methods Any single teaching method will not help achieve the goal of college English teaching. In the open teaching mode, teachers can choose apposite teaching methods based on various factors, to achieve the best teaching results.

1.5 Open teaching evaluation

Openness of open teaching evaluation includes: com bination of process evaluation and summative eval uation; combination of teacher’s evaluation students’ self-evaluation.

2 OVERALL DESIGN OF CLOUD

COMPUTING APPLICATION MODE

2.1 Design principles

Through the SECTIONS architecture, from eight angles of Support Services (S), Effect Evaluation (E), Creative Common (C), Information Technology (T),

Interactivity (I), Open Access (O), Network Learning

Community (N) and Sustainability (S), we construct cloud computing, large-scale and real-time interactive learning system, hoping that through comprehensive, systematic and structured way OCW (Open Course

Ware) application to provide learners more meaning ful learning experience. SECTIONS architecture is shown as Figure 1:

2.2 Application mode

Based on SECTIONS design principle, we propose an English open course cloud computing application mode: push existing English open courses running in the cloud computing environment, to achieve large scale and real-time interactive teaching applica tions. Create a learner-centered, real-time interactive teaching platform and use existing cloud computing technology to achieve interactive learning commu nities at any time, anyway, anyone, and anywhere. What is more important, this platform can solve the learning outcomes tracking evaluation, so as to prepare for opening the certification and accreditation of open courses. In a real-time interactive teaching model based on cloud computing, OCW application of the new approach is a complete interactive access, a dynamic, traceability and formal learning mode. OCW real-time interactive application mode is shown as Figure 2: English open courses based on cloud computing application mainly reflect as real-time interactive application mode, which includes four elements of teachers, learner, open courses and cloud computing environment. In this mode, learners and teachers use OCW application through the cloud computing environment, achieving communication between teachers and learners in the learning process, and providing guidance and help for learners. Learners through active learning use the fragmented time to complete the study of open courses, and stage and summative test arranged by the teachers. The cloud computing platform provides teachers and learners a cross- platform, real-time, interactive learning platform, and is the core of the open curriculum, real-time interactive applications. It needs to support cross-platform applications, including PC, mobile phone, iPad, etc. Anyone using any terminal at anytime and anywhere can visit this platform. It is a system architecture to allow learners use the fragmented time to learn systematic knowledge, achieving online real-time video of open courses, real-time interaction between teachers and learners, learning community interaction, and real-time assessment of learning outcomes.

Figure 1. SECTIONS architecture. Figure 2. OCW real-time interactive application mode.

3 FUNCTIONAL DESIGN OF CLOUD

COMPUTING APPLICATION MODE

The main applications of English open courses are based on the Internet. Fast update speed of Internet and IT innovation provides a more reliable, exten sive and convenient environment for English open courses. As Figure 3 shows, real-time interactive application mode is mainly composed of cloud computing platform, user service management module, curriculum resource management module, real-time interactive course management module, learning assessment management module, learning progress management module, learning communities management module, operation and maintenance management module, etc.

Figure 3. Functional design of cloud computing application mode.

3.1 Cloud computing platform

Establish a cross-platform, cross-terminal, focusing on the cloud architecture, open platform, providing

English language learning service for users, includ ing cross-platform access anytime and anywhere, and cloud file sharing. No matter where you are, as long as your mobile terminal can connect to the internet via WIFI or 3G, you can join in real-time communi cation with teachers or learners, greatly enhancing the flexibility and adaptability of English open courses.

This will not only allow learners to enjoy learning, social networking, communication and a rich variety of services freely, but also make full use of learners’ fragmented time to learning English systematically, so as to keep their study enthusiasm and continuity.

3.2 User service management module

User service management module first defines the system user: visitor, registered user, paid user, admin istrator, etc. Visitors can view the open programs as well as some information on the platform. Only registered users and paid users can enter into the individual learning center, to make use of personal learning progress and learning community management. Administrators are responsible for maintenance of system, applications, and other functions. Through the platform to verify the identity of users and other technical means, the system achieves user access control and resource protection. 3.3 Curriculum resource management module Based on an understanding of existing domestic and foreign English openness courses, on the one hand, the academic curriculum team in charge of reviewing the open courses, make certain technical processing so that the open courses meet the needs of real-time interactive, and then publish them to real-time interactive platform; on the other hand, learners share their high-quality English open courses based on their experiences, releasing in a real-time interactive platform personal interface. Meanwhile, they can also select the high-quality open courses from all kinds of public resources into the platform course.

To obtain the best teaching on demand resources on the Internet, can provide more choices of courses and attract more learners to share that.

3.4 Real-time interactive course management module

1 Real-time spots. Conventional video conferenc ing network synchronization generally only guar antees six parties involved in. But once exceed this, video fluency will not guarantee. The use of dynamic load balancing technology can allow near one thousand learners to watch the video simultaneously.

2 Real-time interactive experience. In “micro cell

“real-time interactive teaching process, teacher prepared questions or test in advance as required courses conducted spots, when before, during or after the courses.

3 Self-learning platform. All the English courses in the platform can be selected by learners, accord ing to their schedule. Learners can purchase their desired course by charging a cloud service to com plete study.

3.5 Learning assessment management module

1 Learners online tracking. The system will first judge learner’s true identity, according to initial information. During the course, the system will film learner’s photo, and send accurate informa tion to teachers after comparison.

2 Interactive feedback evaluation. After learners receive the test information from the teachers, they need to separately feedback, and at the same time system complete automatic scoring and feedback to the teacher.

3 Personalized evaluation. The system completes counting and classification of a variety of data.

According to the indicators of learners, teach ers can give their personalized comprehensive evaluation.

3.6 Learning progress management module

Teachers design learning units based on the syllabus, and make systematic structural arrangements, and then provide a complete course content and sched

Study on the application of virtual reality to the teaching of information technology course

Guiming Wang & Naiyu Wang

State Grid of China Technology College, China

ABSTRACT: Along with the progress of science and technology, the social demand for talents is getting greater and greater and also the requirements are becoming higher and higher. Accordingly, teaching patterns are changing and the traditional teaching way now has been difficult to meet the teaching requirements. Virtual reality technology is applied to the teaching of information technology course, so as to let students improve the recognition on the knowledge points in the virtual environment.

KEYWORDS: Virtual Reality Technology; Information Technology Course; Application Study

1 INTRODUCTION

Along with the constant improvement of the level of science and technology, virtual reality, which was once used as a scientific technology for the experi mental studies, has been integrated into every aspect of people’s modern production under the unceasing innovation and improvement. Now, virtual reality has raised an educational tide in the educational world.

The introduction of virtual reality can not only meet the needs of the students for teaching, but also can promote the students’ logical thinking ability (i.e.

Practical ability) improved greatly.

2 THE TEACHING OF INFORMATION COURSE

Information technology refers to computer technol ogy, network technology and communication-related technology. It is unreasonable and one-sided to clas sify information technology education into technol ogy education. Information technology education is composed of two parts: (1) information technology course; (2) information technology and other subjects.

Information technology mainly focuses on the cultiva tion of students’ innovation ability and practice ability.

Many people mix information education with computer. Information education needs to rely on computers in the implementation. That is to say, the computer is a hardware part, while information technology education is the software part. 3 VIRTUAL REALITY TECHNOLOGY Virtual reality means that a real system technology will be expressed with a virtual system. From a narrow sense, virtual simulation technology is a new technology to emerge along with the development of computer technology. From a broad sense, virtual simulation has been always in existence in the human world. Now, simulation technology has developed its own system and becomes the third basic method for human to know the world in the development of the computer. 3.1 The definition of virtual reality Virtual reality (VR), which emerged in the 1980s, is a comprehensive, integrated technology and involves a wide range of knowledge. It puts the things of the real world into a virtual environment, mainly using computer graphics, artificial intelligence, and sensor technology, so that a personal feeling in scenes is generated in the minds of users. Moreover, experiencers can personally operate it and let the virtual environment interact with the natural world. VR has three meanings: (1) virtual environment is generated with the aid of computer technology; (2) user’s sense of reality always exists in the virtual environment; (3) users can communicate with the virtual environment through their intrinsic ability to communicate.

3.2 The basic features of virtual reality

Virtual reality features immersion, interactivity, illusoriness, and lifelikeness. Immersion means that experiencers can get multiple feelings such as visual sense, tactile sense and auditory sense of a virtual environment, so that the virtual environment produces a sense of reality and lets experiencers feel unreal.

Interactivity means that experiencers not only can access to a virtual environment, but also can interact with it. Experiencer can operate and control the virtual environment using body movements. The virtual envi ronment will also provide a corresponding response.

Illusoriness means that users can simulate the cur rent environment, previous environment, possible environment in the future, and fantasy environment with the aid of the tools such as computer.

Lifelikeness is reflected in two aspects. On the one hand, users seem to be in a real world in a virtual l environment and distinguish the fantasy and the real ity. On the other hand, environment will provide a corresponding reflection according to the laws of the real world should when users communicate with the virtual environment in a communication way.

3.3 The application of virtual reality

Virtual reality has been used in many fields. Scene simulation means that the scenes to be built or already built will be expressed using the virtual reality tech nology. The application of this technology can help relevant personnel design a reasonable assessment of the scene planning, and simultaneously citizens can be promoted to provide suggestions after a virtual tour, so as to help relevant personnel improve build ing the scenes.

Real estate roaming technology means that real estate developers implement the marketing promo tion activities for real estate using network tech nology, animation, and multimedia, etc. Real estate developers will display the image of an example room to home buyers using the virtual reality technology, allowing them to see the community appearance in a few years.

In interior design, virtual reality can not only play a role of demonstration media, but also can be used as a design tool. With the application of the virtual reality, the design quality of designers is improved, so it is popular among the designers.

4 THE APPLICATION OF VIRTUAL REALITY

TO THE TEACHING OF INFORMATION

TECHNOLOGY COURSE

The introduction of virtual reality makes up for education and will change into a powerful method for promoting the development of the information technology education. 4.1 The construction of simulation model The simulation model in the teaching includes electronic equipment, structural three-dimensional physical model, and mathematical model and so on. The three-dimensional physical model is to improve the fidelity based on the physical status of equipment. Under the sufficient degree, it is necessary to screen and improve the complexity of the visual system for the construction of system mathematical modeling. 4.2 Promoting teachers and students to develop the virtual simulation teaching center Teachers can fuse the major and interest with virtual reality together and describe the knowledge scenes fully using the 3d modeling mechanical and electronic simulation software, FLASH, 3DSMAX, and virtual reality, etc. The implementation of this measure can not only let the teachers and students to learn how to use the software, but also can display some abstract, hard-to-understand formulas through the virtual reality technology plus the three dimensional animation. 4.3 Rewriting the teaching plan with virtual reality Schools should make the teaching process further segmented, so as to eliminate the solid, mechanical rules in the teaching method. Film, games, and plots are integrated into the textbook of information technology course. The most important to keep in mind is that all the teaching contents must be very attractive for students. The change and segmentation of information technology course need the common cooperation and assistance from major teachers, and then the teaching situation and reality environment can be shown using a virtual reality simulation platform. 4.4 Applied to experimental training Information technology course, because of its particularity, focuses on the operating practice in terms of the learning key. Schools pay very much attention to the students’ practical operation skills, and this is also a requirement of employing units for the students majoring in information technology. Therefore, the graduates, who possess a very strong practical ability, will become an eye-catching at the talent market beyond all doubts. On training very strong practical personnel, experimental teaching is an essential part of the teaching contents. Under a lot of previous limitations, many experimental training courses could not be implemented, or demonstrated by teachers themselves.

In experimental training class, virtual reality can be introduced for allowing more students to partic ipate in the experiment course. It is easy to oper ate, because there are no cumbersome programs in the operation of the simulation software and virtual instruments. The time domain signal spectrum anal ysis is taken as an example: there exists an obvious application difference between HP3562A dynamic signal analyzer and the simulation software virtual instrument. The HP3562A dynamic signal analyzer is very complex to operate, so it is necessary to cor rectly set up a dozen of menus such as measurement way, display way, coordinates, window, and average, and then the spectrum analysis function can be started up. Such a complex program is very difficult for stu dents to operate, so it is hard to master. Differently, the simulation software spectrum analyzer is easy to operate as long as the equipment number and chan nel characters are set up well, and also only one setting-up is required.

With the application of virtual reality, the previous problems such as less experiment and too many class hours change for students. In the past, students needed about 20 hours for 6 experiments. Today, the situation changes greatly and 6 hours are only necessary for more than a dozen experiments. The virtual resources of experimental training are in a steady flow, while the application of virtual reality can promote schools to limitlessly consume the virtual materials in the experimental training under the limited conditions, so that schools can save a large amount of the pre vious cost on the maintenance, repair and update of experimental training equipment. And the experimen tal training equipment can be updated along with the progress of virtual reality.

4.5 Solving the openness of experiment training service

The introduction of virtual reality can help experi mental training overcome the previous limitations on both space and regions. Students can review the virtual experiment using the computer as long as they are willing to. They can repeatedly validate and

Design and realization of scientific research management system in colleges and universities based on the structure of B/S model

Chunxi Wang

Henan University, Kaifeng, China

ABSTRACT: The scientific research activities and scientific research ability have become an important indicator of college comprehensive strength, which lead to the university’s scientific research work and the statistical work to be constantly huge and aggravate. Scientific management and the traditional means have been unable to meet the needs of scientific research management based on common office software. In this situ ation, through the computer information technology to reconstruct scientific research management information system, to strengthen the daily management of the scientific research work and integrate process of scientific research work, that can provide a real and effective reference for decision-making layer. Therefore, this paper analyzes and researches the system architecture, database, function module and system interface design, intro duced the Ajax technology, and realizes university’s scientific research system based on.NET platform.

KEYWORDS: Scientific research management; Project: B/S; Approval; Ajax; management information system;

1 INTRODUCTION

The research work is a very important work in

Colleges and universities, and scientific research management level will directly affect the enthu siasm of scientific research quality and personnel scientific research. The project management of sci entific research management personnel in Colleges and universities is various, now mainly rely on sci entific research management system for a variety of scientific research management assistant. Scientific research management system mainly carries on the management of the various affairs of scientific research work in Colleges and universities, includ ing scientific research, scientific research personnel, research tasks and achievements in scientific research, scientific research institutions, the work of scientific research evaluation calculation and all kinds of sci entific and statistical report. But the traditional scien tific research management system is mainly based on

C/S (client / server) mode, with the development of

Internet/Intranet, this model cannot adapt to the net work platform of the new application requirements.

University scientific research management sys tem is a network management platform of university scientific research management to realize the scien tific research work, and taking the platform as the core to form a timely updating of scientific research data centers and research management communica tion platform, which can provide a comprehensive, real-time and accurately research information for the relevant department in school, to provide support for school leaders on the scientific decision. To provide convenient service for the scientific research activities of the school teachers, and provides great convenience for the management of scientific research personnel to carry out the work. We can see that the various units use a variety of information technology to design and realize the construction of the scientific research management system according to their own situation of the starting from different angles. Based on the comparison and analysis, in-depth research and study, combined with the actual management of scientific research, this paper uses a UML model based on the.NET framework, and introduce Ajax technology, design and implement a university research management system. 2 THE OVERALL STRUCTURE OF MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Now colleges all over the country basically have established a certain scale of the campus network, and further connected with the Internet, the online management of scientific research work has laid a good foundation. We found a new B/S (Browser/ server) mode of development is also applicable to the scientific research management system in Colleges and universities. This model only requires the development of the software on the server, and can be used directly in the client browser (such as IE) can be, because the client operation as simple as browsing

Webpage. Therefore the operator doesn’t run through specialized training, to achieve the client zero mainte nance. Even ordinary people can also through anyone be connected to the Internet computer to do.

The system adopts three-layer architecture (Browser/

Web Server, Application Server/Database Server devel opment system), as shown in Figure 1 structure system.

The system structure can be simply divided into a data access layer, business logic layer, control layer and presentation layer.

Data processing layer: scientific research manage ment system itself is a large database management system, operation and calculation of a large database system. Data processing layer provides modeling, data structure of the storage operation and other basic services related to the database.

Business logic layer: the business logic layer is mainly responsible for the expression of various busi ness logic, such as online office, scientific research appraisal and other core business by the business logic layer implementation. Control layer and presentation layer: Based on the data processing layer and business logic layer, control layer and presentation layer can provide operations and browse view to the user, and the user of the service processing request processing. 3 THE SYSTEM FUNCTION MODULE The system can be divided into three parts, namely the core business processes, database and system services. The database is the foundation of the system, including organization, personnel, funding, projects, achievements, academic activities, awards and other information. On the base of the database, combined with the daily management of scientific research, the system provides data auditing, office, project process management, performance assessment and annual statistics and other core business processes. System service provides users, permissions, parameter setting and security functions. That shown in figure 2.

Figure 2. The structure of scientific research management system.

Figure 1. Structure diagram of system.

4 TOP-LEVEL USE CASE DIAGRAM

IN THE SYSTEM

We can abstract the following cases by analysis the main function of the scientific research management system:

Login: user enters their username, password, tem porary verification code to log in scientific research management system login interface.

Office: scientific research personnel to consult the notice (message); the management of scientific research personnel, scientific Secretary issued notice to the subordinate research secretary or scientific research personnel (messages), the exchange of infor mation. At the same time by looking at the reception to understand the document reading, further imple ment message and tracking.

The maintenance of the system: the system administrator user management, system configu ration, data maintenance, user online monitor and log management. According to the distribution of competence in the role and custom system role. For researchers, account number, password, role permission assignment and the statistical data and the basic data export. The system use case diagram as shown in figure 3. 5 THE ACCESS SEQUENCE DIAGRAM OF SYSTEM Sequence diagram is used to describe the dynamic interaction between objects, which focuses on object message transmission time sequence. The timing diagram of the message can be a signal, operation calls, similar to C++ in the RPC (Remote Procedure Calls). When the receiving object when a message is received, immediately starts execution, the object is activated, to represent the activated by object lifeline on a slender rectangular box.

Figure 3. Top main use case.

Figure 4. System login sequence diagram.

1 Login sequence User login system as shown in Figure 4: the user

(including scientific research personnel, scientific research, scientific research management person nel Secretary) open login interface, fill in the user name, password, temporary verification code logon information on the page, the system according to the user information to judge the legitimacy of user data in the library, if not legal, prompt login failed to return the landing interface; verified by users enter the system. The user enters the page through the project management on the main menu button, the user implements related system operation, accord ing to the requirements of project management, the implementation of the corresponding operation.

The user exit system after complete the operation.

2 Project Management Sequence Diagram Sequence diagram system project processing sub module as shown in figure 5. System user login system and open the project application form page browsing or query information system pro ject in the project management module, according to the user operation and display the results; a user needs to apply for project, open the new applica tion form, users fill out; project information in the application form, fill in after submit finished, save the application list system; user can edit just sub mit application form, open funds input table, finan cial information, click save, the system automati cally updates the project basic information in the financial information; users can also open a pro ject member list, adding items to the project mem bers, click save, system automatic membership information save and update the project basic information table. 6 THE PARTIAL CODE OF MANAGEMENT SYSTEM BASED ON AJAX System development is mainly being in the Visual studio 2010 environment, using SQL-Server 2005 to establish a database, using ASP.NET to design the WEB program, using ADO.NET to realize data connection. .Net provides a convenient way to save the project configuration information, it is using a configuration file, the file suffix configuration file is “.Config”, in the Asp.net configuration file name General default is “web.config”. Each “web. config” file is a text file based on XML, and can save to any directory in the Web application. The “web. config” file is not compiled when publishing a Web application into a DLL file. The “web.config” file is a XML file, the root of which is , the common child nodes under the < configuration> node are: < configSections>, , < connectionStrings> and . The node is mainly used in the application configuration information to configure some sites, while the node is mainly used to configure the database connection string information website. is asp.net 1.1 times, in.Net framework 2, the new . The following configuration in the “web.config” file is:

Figure 5. Project management sequence diagram.

User ID= sa;Password=“ providerName=“System.

Data.SqlClient”/>

The node is used to set up asp.net authentication mode. It has four kinds of authentica tion mode, their values are as follows:

Mode Windows use Windows authentication, suitable for a domain user or users in LAN. Forms form validation, rely on the web site developers for authentication. Passport uses the authentication ser vice Microsoft provides for authentication. None no authentication.

The system configuration is as follows:

7 CONCLUSIONS

The extensive application of computer and network to collect, modify, delete, query and statistical research and information work on Teachers’ scientific, that can realize the transformation of scientific research project application program and project approval from repetitive manual operation into a simple and

The construction and application of computer network teaching platform

Chang Liu, Fang Wang & Li Lin

Mudanjiang Medical University, Mudanjiang, Heilongjiang

ABSTRACT: Article uses a lot of JavaScript and Ajax technologies and scripting language network teaching platform to achieve a basic teaching module, which consists mainly of course description, syllabus, documen tation, job module, message reply, announcements, links and other eight modules, to meet the students’ knowl edge of the course of study and understanding, greatly enriched the website swirling effect when learning new visual experience for students, so that students improve learning efficiency in a relaxed learning environment.

KEYWORDS: Computer networks, Course website, JSP, Online education, Interactive

1 INTRODUCTION

E-learning combine with the Internet and education, to make the Internet brings a wealth of information resources to education, so that education can fully enjoy all the convenience brought by the Internet, greatly enhancing the competitiveness of education.

Networked learning makes individualized instruction possible. Teachers can publish online education plat form courseware, teaching content and other infor mation related to teaching, to provide students with an open “virtual campus.” Students can choose their own learning content according to their needs any time and anywhere, even through the network with classmates and teachers to discuss. Such individu alized, interactive learning environment has a great effect for students’ personality development.

E-learning has become a major way to learn in the information society. How to develop a good multime dia network courseware it? Face of network course ware development boom, we believe that the current network courseware development urgent problem: the use of existing network resources, education and human resources as well as the characteristics of pub lic elective college education in China combined with the actual situation of joint collaboration and devel opment of network courseware quality to meet the educational resource sharing.

Online courses through the network performance of a discipline teaching content and teaching activi ties implemented by the sum of it at a certain teaching objectives, teaching strategies to organize course con tent and online teaching, teaching resources as well as in the implementation of network teaching platform in teaching activity. Internet course includes online learning, discussion, homework, tutoring, answering, internships, testing and other teaching. Articles establish an independent site according to various network design technologies for “Computer Network Teaching Platform”. With teaching website, students will be able to easily understand the course of specific teaching programs, refer to knowledge; teachers can easily publish notifications, jobs and so on. Teaching and learning will be more convenient communication, teaching website is an important adjunct teacher teaching tool, but also an important platform for the exchange of teachers and students, which greatly enrich the teaching content and teaching methods, improve teaching quality. The core teaching site is mainly for teachers and students, for teachers to easily complete the task of teaching, teaching students to obtain real-time information. Web site should achieve: the teacher easily publish course information, upload teaching materials, assignments, online students online Q and other rich teaching function; students to enter the site, we can understand and learn in this course-related information, downloading a job, right difficult issues a message for the teacher to answer questions in a timely manner; additional background management functions should be to achieve the appropriate background management functions. 2 ANALYSIS ON FUNCTION REQUIREMENTS OF COURSE WEBSITE In order to establish more clearly the content for the students and more convenient to communicate with the teacher, a better grasp of the knowledge. So the teaching website is divided into three subsystems: teacher subsystem, student management subsystem, the webpage subsystem, as shown in figure 1.

2.1 The teacher management system

Web sites for teachers have the highest management authority, as with administrator privileges. Therefore, teachers should have the user features include a sylla bus, course profiles, teachers, teaching lesson plans, teaching videos, operations management, message management, Post management, and student user authentication management and rights management capabilities, while teachers can upload data to the system and to show it.

Homework Management: Post a job as a teacher, he taught the students should be able to receive this information. But also to view the job handed situa tion, that this job paid a total of a few students. When a job expires, or all of the students have to pay up, to achieve the purpose of teaching, should be able to delete the job log.

Post management: This function is user has the general function of the teacher should also have.

Therefore, teachers users can edit, publish on the stickers, because the teacher has the highest author ity, so the teacher is not required when posting vetted system only gives “whether to submit the stickers” message can be, but when students posting states are not audited, the audit passed only by the teacher in order to be seen by all users, and discussion.

Message Management: When the teacher user needs and in this site when a user to exchange infor mation, and the information is only that teachers users and a user between two people can see it, then it will be a personal message, while you can also delete a message, if a Users view before receiving this infor mation deleted, then the receiving user will not see the message, you can also delete other users to the teacher user comments.

User management: Teachers can not only modify their own user profile, you can also modify the stu dent information.

Rights management for each of the different roles assigned different permissions. 2.2 The student management system Students are the main users; students should have features include posting information, job information, message information, personal information changes, and view teacher information. Posted Management: Students can display some of their own post and content can be varied. When the administrator can see that this statement is inappropriate, you can delete it. Job management functions: job is a student in the normal process of learning an important way to consolidate knowledge. So the teacher publishing jobs, students need to know what the teacher announced job, and can upload your own job done, handed the job after the piece has been handed the job will become a state record; remind students that the job has been submitted. The system prompts a change of jobs that have read after marking by the teacher, so that students know exactly what their job situation. Personal Message Management: Students need to exchange information with a user, and this information is only to see both parties, then it will be a personal message, but can also delete a message, if a Users view before receiving this information is deleted, then the receiving user will not see the message, the same can also delete other users to the student user comments. 3 THE DESIGN OF SYSTEM FUNCTION MODULE 3.1 User management User management, business flow chart is shown in Figure 2. First, the system administrator review teacher personal information, the teacher enters the user management interface when audit, or gives an error message. If you are a new user require user registration, the user registration process is: the

Figure 1. Block diagram of the system. application user to check the existence of registered users to verify user information three steps. If you are a student logging into the system, we must first log in, if you are a new user you must be registered, registra tion and login. Administrator login for system mainte nance, students view information about courses, post a message, download operation and so on. Visitors view course-related information. Administrators can manage to tourists: add new users, modify user infor mation already exists, query, and delete.

3.2 The course information management

Flow chart of course information management is shown in Figure 3. Only an administrator or teacher logged in to manage information on the course, into the background home page and click on the button information management course curriculum infor mation management, including: teaching lesson plan management, curriculum management, curriculum profile management, reference management.

3.3 Job management

Job management flow chart is shown in Figure 4. Only an administrator or teacher logged in to the job infor mation management, into the background homepage and click button operations management operations management, including: review of the job, the job of the release, download the job, the job submission. 3.4 Message management Message management flow chart is shown in Figure 6. Students visit the website and click on a message reception module can create a new message, you can also view other people comment on their new replies. Administrators can leave a message after login backstage management module, you can reply to other people’s comments, you can delete the comments of others, and you can delete someone else’s reply. Web site for student exchanges between the fronts provides a platform for website background foreground total message management module. 3.5 Document management Documentation management flow chart is shown in Figure 5. Document management is divided into teachers’ documentation management and documentation management students, teachers visit the website background, you can upload new documentation, you can query, edit, delete the existing documentation, and

Figure 2. Block diagram of the user.

Figure 3. Block diagram of course information. Figure 5. Block diagram of document. Figure 4. Block diagram of job management. students can visit the website foreground Download teacher upload documentation to learn.

3.6 Bulletin management

Announcements management flow chart is shown in

Figure 7. Administrator login and click on the back ground announcement, the administrator can add new announcements, updates, and deletes existing announcements, all announcements, bulletin informa tion retrieval, editing announcement expiration time.

When displayed in the foreground announcement, first determine the time to failure notice, if the notice has expired announcement is not displayed, if not to the announcement of the failure time is displayed notice, and then determine the type of notice, if it is shown in the foreground scroll Announcements, if it is in the foreground pop-up display pop-up display announcement. Students at the front desk will be able to click on the name to see the corresponding announcement.

4 THE REALIZE OF SYSTEM COURSE

WEBSITE

4.1 User login

Specific programming ideas: When a user enters a user name and password, and submitted to the back office systems, back office systems, according to user name and password in the data to find out whether there is a current user and the corresponding pass word, if it returns a user object, otherwise returns null. Specific code as follows: public User checkUser(User user) { String userName = user.getUserName(); String password = user.getPassword(); Criteria criteria = session.createCriteria(User.class); If (userName!=null) { cri ter ia .add(Restr ict ions.eq(“userName”, userName)); } If (password!=null) { cr i te r ia .add(Rest r ic t ions .eq(“password” , password)); } criteria.addOrder( Order.asc(“userName”) ); User ur = (User)criteria.list().get(0); return ur; } 4.2 Operation to achieve the underlying database Database user needs forming an independent DBMSspecific conceptual model through a comprehensive, induction and abstraction. public class TemplateDAO extends BaseDAO { private Class classInfo; public TemplateDAO(Class classInfo) { this.classInfo = classInfo; } public void save(T object) { session.saveOrUpdate(object); //Add, update a data to the database } public void add(T object) { session.save(object); //Add the piece of data to the database } public void update(T object) { session.update(object); //update a data to the database } /*Remove the specified object. Will be found the first one that is not null primary key attribute search object.*/ public void delete(T object)throws Exception { Ttemp = null; Method[] methods = object.getClass(). getMethods();

Figure 6. Block diagram of message management.

Figure 7. Block diagram of announcement. for(int i=0, max=methods.length; i < max; ++i)

{ if(methods[i].getName().startsWith(“get”)

==true) { Serializable tp = (Serializable)methods[i]. invoke (object, null); if(tp!= null) { temp = (T)session.get(object.getClass(),tp); if(temp!=null ) break; }

}

} session.delete(temp);

}

5 CONCLUSIONS

The system needed to achieve the project’s basic modules and functions necessary to complete the requirements of the system, to meet the needs of teaching. System stability is higher; you can let the

The design of English self-learning system based on WEB

Jianshan Cheng

Wuhan Institute of Technology, Wuhan, Hubei Province, China

ABSTRACT: This paper analyzes the working principle of self-help English learning system based on Web, choose Microsoft Speech SDK5.1 as the core technology to construct the system based on the WebVoiceCtl package. Call the Text To Speech Engine to complete the text to speech, finally, we realize the English listening test based on Web. In addition, the program call Speech Recognition Engine through the WebVoiceCtl control to complete the speech recognition, and realize the test of spoken English based on Web. This paper design and develop a Web for small corpus of College English listening teaching based on the introduction of basic Web corpus, the corpus has realized to the listening material retrieval, browsing, online listening watch and update functions. Finally, the English self-learning software system can provide the Web English listening, speaking and writing skills training in the ASP.NET environment.

KEYWORDS: Web University corpus; English listening; Speech recognition; Microsoft Speech SDK;

WebVoiceCtl

1 INTRODUCTION

Computer assisted learning has become a popular mode of learning, learning English is no excep tion. For example, people are learning English or read English articles often come across a new word, many people will immediately turn to the lexicon word by query software. At present the popular lexicon mostly is single version software, such as Google PowerWord, linguist translation, their use has some limitations, which cannot be Web oriented query for a word, speech expression, oral corrective and learning resource sharing etc.. This paper describes the Web envi ronment, how to construct an English self-learning software system.

English learning emphasizes the “listen” and

“say” and “writing” three skills training [1],

Chinese students English reading ability is gener ally good, but due to the lack of language environ ment, their listening and speaking ability is yet to be improved. Therefore, how to use the complete Web technology, multimedia technology, speech recog nition technology can be a Web user oriented open

English learning system, and focus on listening and speaking training, to improve the comprehen sive quality of English of Chinese students is a very meaningful thing. 2 DESIGN OF SELF-LEARNING ENGLISH BASED ON WEB SYSTEM Web English self-learning system use TTS, SR, XML and database technology, the key integrated technology is as shown in figure 1. The client software must first normal install Microsoft Speech SDK 5.1 before using. When the TTSPage. AspX Webpage is being loaded to the client browser, which implements a Spvoice object through the JavaScript script, the object is embedded in the Web page, when the user retrieval Thesaurus of English words, phrases, sentences and so obtain English text information, the Spvoice object will call the client computer TTS engine, the execution of the Speak method convert text to speech information, and through the client computer sends a loudspeaker. In the SRPage.AspX Webpage embedded WebVoiceCtl control, it must first complete the registration in the client registry. When a client and server connection, the server immediately for a copy of the WebVoice.xml file to the client, the user can input in English words, phrases and sentences, and injected it into the WebVoice.xml file, in a speech recognition engine is initialized, the WebVoiceCtl accepts the customer end speech input, then reads the WebVoice.xml file to complete the function of speech recognition.

2 THE WORKING PRINCIPLE OF SPEECH

RECOGNITION

In order to realize the speech recognition based on the

Web, the conversion engine must be embedded in a

Webpage with ActiveX [4] . Canada can complete speech recognition ActiveX WebVoiceCtl controls based

Geoff Bailey Speech SDK 5.1 and ATL technology package 1, the controls can be embedded into the Web page, accept voice input from the user, then, according to the Grammar to complete the identification of the specified words, sentences, English speech recognition meets the correct standard pronunciation [2] .

The process of speech recognition WebVoicceCtl is as shown in figure 2. To identify the content stored in an XML file in WebVoice.xml, the program staff can carry on the programming to loading in recognition of words and sentences need to prepare for the speech recognition. Recognition of speech rules are stored in the Grammar.xml, when the WebVoiceCtl control is successfully compiled, the rules are loaded into the control, and cannot be modified, it must set the phonetic rules in compiler generation control. In speech recognition, the speech recognition engine will take the user speech input is compared with the running of the phonetic rules, if the recognition rule matching, prompt correct recognition, or prompt the user to input voice information.

Figure 1. The key technology schematic of integrated English self learning system based on the Web.

Figure 2. The flow chart of voice recognition function for WebVoiceCtl control.

3 THE DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT OF WEB

LISTENING TEACHING BASED ON CORPUS

The construction of the Web listening corpus will have important significance for promoting the reform of university English listening teaching, it can solve existing problems in university English listening teaching, and improve the teaching effect and the students’ learning ability. The construction method of the existing corpus and the design idea is the basis on the Web corpus, the author uses the dynamic database technology built a Web that can provide retrieval and automatic testing function based on the corpus. The corpus collected 1071 listening materials suitable for use in College English Listening Teaching of various genres and themes, support the retrieval and online test function, can be used for classroom teaching, can also provide learning resources for students autono mous learning.

The structure of a corpus of College English listen ing teaching based on the Web is as shown in fig. 3.

(1) Login The module provides teachers and students login the system interface, need to enter a user name and password.

(2) Retrieval, browsing, listen and download After logging in, you can see the corpus system has clear navigation, classification and retrieval or can be directly input to query the lis tening material. Teachers can choose the specific teaching content, presented to students; students can live according to their own level and interest, to choose their own data to listening, fully embodies the autonomy of learning. At the same time, in order to facilitate the students review and practice, the system provides the download function, students can download their own interest or have difficulty feeling content to a computer or a mobile storage device, easy to use their spare time to practice listening. (3) Online test Corpus provides a simple online test function. Students logged in, click the online test system of automatic extraction corpus composed of paper, can be tested after hearing students submit answers, the system automatically scores according to the standard answers in the database. (4) Update and maintenance The teacher, through the administrator account in the system, update, management and maintenance of corpus system, can continue to add new listening materials.

Figure 3. The structure of corpus based on university English listening teaching.

4 IMPLEMENTATION OF SELF-LEARNING

ENGLISH SYSTEM BASED ON WEB

Software development environment: MicrosoftVisual

Studio 2005+SQLServer 2000+Microsoft Speech

SDK 5.1 + WebVoiceCtl +IIS+XML, OS: Win2000

SP4/Win XP SP2.

4.1 The realization of text to speech conversion function

Text to speech software realization thought are as follows (only with the word TTS as an example,

TTS processing method, phrase, sentence and other similar). The first step is to create an SpVoice object through the script, and loading it into the user’s browser, the script code: VAR VoiceObj =newActiveXObject (“SAPI.SpVoice”). The second step. Creating a trigger function of TTS picture button: . Third step. Implementation of SpeakText method, text content is converted to speech: VoiceObj.Speak ($(TxtWord).Value, 1). At the same time, users can also set the reader to read the mouth in the English text read aloud. Microsoft designed 1 sets of reasonable die image sequence [1] , the lip image sequences can be accurately simulated people English pronunciation mouth, the script code is as follows. Where VisemeId is the number of the mouth, it changes from 1 to 21, the cycle repeated.

Function

VoiceObj::Viseme(StreamNum,StreamPos,

Duration,VisemeType,Feature,VisemeId) {

//Map the VisemeId to the appropriate.bmp if( VisemeId == 15 || VisemeId == 17 || VisemeId

== 18 || VisemeId ==21 ) idImage.src =0picture/mouthop1.bmp0; else if( VisemeId == 14 || VisemeId == 16 ||

VisemeId == 19 || VisemeId == 20 ) idImage.src =0picture/mouthop2.bmp0; else if( VisemeId == 4 || VisemeId == 6 || VisemeId

== 9 || VisemeId == 12 ) idImage.src =0picture/mouthop3.bmp0; else if( VisemeId == 1 || VisemeId == 2 || VisemeId

== 3 || VisemeId == 11 ) idImage.src =0picture/mouthop4.bmp0; else if( VisemeId == 7 || VisemeId == 8 ) idImage.src =0picture/mouthnar.bmp0; else if( VisemeId == 5 || VisemeId == 10 ||

VisemeId == 13 ) idImage.src =0picture/mouthmed.bmp0; else idImage.src =0picture/mouthclo.bmp0;

}

4.2 The realization of speech recognition function

With a single English word speech recognition as an example, the correct recognition of phrases, sen tences and texts is dependent on the English words one by one, so English word speech recognition is the key to the whole speech recognition function.

The first step. To create SRPage.AspX and embed the WebVoiceCtl control in the Webpage. When a client makes a speech recognition request, it can res pond and handle properly.

The second step. To initialize speech recognition conversion engine. The code is encapsulated in the

WebVoiceCtl control, is the realization of C++, Geoff and Bailey has the good package, all of the following are referenced.

The third step. To input the word recognition.

Users choose to be recognized words into WebVoice. xml, ready for the speech recognition, this is the pro gramming interface provides two developers.

The fourth step. To complete voice recognition. 4 Chapter 4: Humanities, politics, and philosophy

The role of agricultural mechanization technology in the promotion of scientific and technological achievements in agriculture

Zhiying Tang & Xiaoming Fu

College of Mechanical Engineering, Hainan University, Haikou

ABSTRACT: Agricultural mechanization is to the use advanced and applicable agricultural machinery and equipment in agriculture to improve agricultural production conditions, and continuously improve the pro duction technology and economic, ecological processes of agriculture. The level of agricultural science and technology depends largely on the degree of agricultural mechanization promotion. An agricultural country level depends on the degree of modern agricultural mechanization level of the application, and the era of mech anization in agriculture can not only save a lot of labor, reduce labor intensity, but also improve labor efficiency, and enhance resistance to natural disasters. The importance of agricultural mechanization technology in the scientific and technological achievements in agriculture is visible.

KEYWORD: Agricultural mechanization technology, Marketing, Scientific and technological achievements

1 INTRODUCTION

Now, with the development of science and technology, mechanization technology has been widely applied to agricultural production. Agricultural production has also changed the traditional mode of production into a mechanized mass production era. This trans formation of agriculture science and technology is essential. Agricultural mechanization has been widely promoted in order to have an efficient trans formation of agricultural scientific and technological achievements.

2 IMPORTANT ROLE OF PROMOTING

AGRICULTURAL MECHANIZATION

TECHNOLOGY IN THE PROMOTION

Extensive promotion of agricultural mechanization technology is to achieve the transformation of agricultural scientific and technological achieve ments. Only in conjunction with the conversion of agricultural scientific and technological achieve ments, other supporting production, and other factors of production together, we can meet people’s produc tion requirements, and subsequently form a new agri cultural productivity. We provide efficient operation of agricultural production, place the needs of agricul tural production materials as a carrier by means of agricultural machinery, which represents the carrier’s advanced productive forces, its efficiency is several times or even ten times more than the number of the traditional mode of production. This realization in the short time transforms more agricultural scientific and technological achievements, improves work efficiency, and shortens the conversion time. [1] If only using the traditional mode of production to achieve scientific and technological achievements, its efficiency can not be compared with the mechanization of production, and this is a clear example of the role of agricultural mechanization. Agricultural machinery agricultural scientific and technological achievements in the realization process will be unable to achieve the effect of the traditional mode of production achieved. First, agricultural machinery application makes use of agricultural production more reasonable, the traditional mode of production used in human or animal can not achieve the mechanical production of high quality. For example, in the terms of both sides it saves spacing, accuracy and other transplanting labor. Secondly, the high efficiency of agricultural machinery can be achieved in a suitable farming, and it is suitable temperature for crop growth and development to ensure that the appropriate conditions improve the yield of agricultural production. Two aspects are combined to improve the level of agricultural science and technology achievements, saving manpower, material resources, and it played a magnified effect. In fertilization, the traditional fertilization can only put fertilizer in the soil surface, and agricultural machinery can put fertilizer in the deep soil, which not only makes full use of fertilizers, but also improves fertilizer efficiency, so that crop yields has also been improved. Agricultural science and technology achievements not appear alone, and it needs agriculture, biotechnology, engineering and other aspects of tech nology complements and the comprehensive appli cation to get. With the rapid development of world science and technology, mechanical construction has been widely used in various fields, especially in terms of agricultural production. Technological develop ment correspondingly increased requirements for others, so that agricultural mechanization and agri cultural scientific and technological achievements are in mutual adaptation. In addition, the modern agri cultural scientific and technological achievements in agriculture, biology, engineering and other aspects of integrated application also requires mutual binding, and mutual adaptation.

3 PROBLEMS IN AGRICULTURAL SCIENCE

AND TECHNOLOGY ACHIEVEMENTS

TRANSFORMATION PROCESS

The United States is the world’s most developed country and has comprehensive national strength, and it is also the most developed countries in agri cultural technology. US producers accounted for only

0.3 percent of the labor world, but US production of cereals accounted for 17.6% of the world and soy bean accounted for 46.5%, cotton accounted for 20%, meat and milk each accounted for 16% and 15.7%.

Becoming the world’s biggest exporter of agricultural products, American from the beginning of last cen tury in 40 years leads the world when Western coun tries have completed two of the industrial revolution and ongoing third technological revolution. At the time the United States has already begun to promote the mechanization of production, making the United

States a leader in the development of agricultural science and technology in the world.

In the 1960s, the United States’ more mechanized production earthshaking changes have taken place, from tilling the land to all aspects of planting, harvest ing, etc. it achieved full mechanization. Compared to the United States, when the new China was just founded, both lack technical personnel and funds. Be ongoing at the time of the Great Leap Forward and the

Chinese people’s commune movement, these aspects add up since then has led to China’s agricultural back wardness. In the 1970s, the agricultural development of the US is even more overwhelming, the United

States has formed a comprehensive mechanization of production of cash crops, like farming in these areas, but there is still at the world’s highest level.

Up to now, the level of agricultural development in the United States still leads the world advanced level of agricultural mechanization and agricultural production of the US can not be underestimated. Since the founding of New China, under the correct leadership of the Party and the country, China’s agricultural production has made significant progress, but there is still a gap compared to the developed world. According to the US advanced technology and experience, factors that promote agricultural mechanization technology constraints are mainly of two things: First, to promote institution-building technology lag; the second is to promote the cultural quality lags behind the object. 4 REMEDY 4.1 Implement the promotion, increase the exchange of experiences To solve the problem encountered in the promotion of agricultural mechanization technology in China, they need to start from the root. For technical problems delayed construction promotion agencies, China in the 1990s has promulgated the “Agricultural Technology Promotion Act,” which would clear the promotion of principles: it should be conducive to the development of agriculture; to respect the wishes of workers engaged in agriculture; to pursue the maximization of agricultural production interests. This requires the promotion department to achieve a clear, standardized for their promotional efforts, and it can not be done with the law runs counter to the promotion. Promotion departments and individuals should strictly follow the procedures to promote, enhance the effectiveness and quality of scientific and technological achievements, in addition, after each completed various departments and individuals we conduct the exchange of experiences, improve work skills. 4.2 Provide technical guidance, periodic training and learning For the problem of the poor promotion of the cultural level, the government departments should put the appropriate documents, which are issued by the department under a unified next level, until it is delivered to the hands of the peasant masses. In addition, authorities are also sent to several technical staff at each village or region, by the field staff to provide technical guidance for the people, and to promote agricultural mechanization technology. The township departments can also offer technical training classes regularly, every village will send some unity to the township department staff to learn, and then we go back after the introduction of agricultural mechanization technology to farmers, thus improving efficiency and save manpower and material resources.

Scientific and technological achievements meets production requirements, which should be applied to the production of scientific and technological achievements, it is tested in practice and technologi cal achievements and meets production requirements.

Prior to this, we need researchers to peasant masses, propaganda agricultural mechanization, and give the peasants in terms of technology and guidance, and guide the masses of peasants to accept agricultural mechanization, and constantly improve the technical level. Promotion of agricultural mechanization tech nology in changing our agricultural country is also a great help to change in agricultural production pat terns, it improves the economic development of rural areas, to improve China’s economic development.

5 CASE OF AGRICULTURAL

MECHANIZATION TECHNOLOGY

EXTENSION

5.1 Northeast “big barn”

Heilongjiang Province, known as the “North Wharf ” in the world, with its promotion of agricultural mech anization level, has important links. 88.6% of the province’s agricultural practices are adopted mecha nization of agriculture, and it is the highest level of mechanization provinces. At present, Heilongjiang

Province, are focused on creating thousands of tons of “big barn”, promotion and application of agricul tural mechanization technology is just for the big barn to create thousands of tons of providing support and assistance. In addition, Heilongjiang Province also has the largest number of modern agricultural cooperatives, also the introduction of advanced machinery and equipment are put into agricultural production to ensure their crop yields and fast growth, and promote farmers increase production. 5.2 Agricultural province - Henan Henan Province is China’s most populous province, is also the province with the largest number of agricultural population. As a predominantly agricultural big province it has so much population and very little land per capita food consumption. However, output in Henan province each year is large to promote agricultural mechanization technologies which with its area are inseparable. Henan land in the plains, facilitate mechanized operations, so the level of mechanization of Henan Province is relatively high, in all aspects of farming, planting, fertilization, irrigation, harvesting, etc. they are widely used in the mechanized largescale production. In the case of large-scale production of agricultural mechanization in Heilongjiang Province, we can see, mechanized production mode saves a lot of labor, reduce labor intensity, but also improve labor efficiency in agricultural production, it is very significant. And through the promotion of agricultural mechanization and technology, agricultural scientific and technological achievements conversion rate is also very high in Henan Province, a significant change occurred in the level of agricultural province compared with before. 6 CONCLUSIONS Through articles on the promotion of agricultural mechanization level of technology analysis, and Heilongjiang and Henan preliminary analysis of the implementation of agricultural mechanization can be obtained: the level of agricultural mechanization of agriculture determines the transformation of scientific and technological achievements. The level depends on the extent of agricultural use of agricultural mechanization. It is widely visible on the development of agricultural mechanization and has an important impact, and it also promotes the development of rural economy. Measured in terms of the level of agricultural mechanization our standards, 2009 was 48.8% of mechanization level, in 2010 it was more than 50 percent, marking China’s agricultural production has entered a stage of mechanical-based, but some areas have not yet realized mechanization promotion, therefore, we also need to promote agricultural mechanization technology.

Figure 1. Agricultural growth after the implementation of agricultural mechanization in Heilongjiang Province histogram.

[1] Zhang Xianju. On the role of agricultural technology promotion of scientific and technological achieve ments in agriculture[J]. Shandong Agricultural (Rural

Economy Edition), 2002(06). [2] Zong Xiaojie [D] Study of Agricultural Mechanization contribution to agricultural development. Northeast Agricultural University,2000.

Physical activity status of civil servants and their health-related research

Yicheng Zhou

School of Politics and Public Administration, Soochow University, Collaborative Innovation Center for New-type

Urbanization and Social Governance of Jiangsu Province

Suhua Bi

JiangSu Provincial Academy of Social Sciences

Qingle Liu

School of Government, Central University of Finance and Economics

Jianyun Bao

Visiting scholar of University of Chicago

ABSTRACT: Since the 1980s, people’s material and spiritual life are constantly enriched and improved.

People’s values are constantly changing, more and more people realize that participate in physical exercise for their own importance in sports. The status of people’s lives has been greatly improved, for most residents; they participate in physical activity and have gradually become a richer cultural life, and they enhance the basic needs of physical, mental lifelong sports have gradually deep heart. While people continue to enhance the sports consciousness exercise, we also see some potential problems, such as the rapid development of science and technology is to bring more and more problems to people. As people, enjoy the level of automation in the material aspects of life. They gradually have cars, telephones, washing machines, refrigerators, microwave ovens, rice cookers. And the household products go into our lives, we enjoy the material on those by making more and more people gradually reduce the daily activities. And the most prominent is the elevators and cars, reducing active time and the amount of activity, a lot of heat stored in the human body is causing various dis eases, from the results of medical research over the past decade. Various diseases associated with obesity have been become the most important factor in human deaths worldwide, the rapid emergence of this disease and the rapid development of social science and technology form a clear lack of coordination, for which many experts at home and abroad for such issues of deep study and research.

KEYWORDS: Civil Servants; Physical Activity; Health

How is the health status of civil servants, for the par ty’s line and policy implementation guidelines and government has an important impact on influencing people’s minds, the same will affect the efficiency of the government. Civil healthy physique and stamina as well as proper health conscious are that they suc cessfully complete various tasks on the basis only a healthy body in order to ensure that they improve efficiency. Moreover, they extend the working life to enable them to live longer, so systematic, scientific, and comprehensive and effective for civil servants physical health were assessed in order to develop effective measures in order to provide reliable infor mation to improve the health status of civil servants.

At the same time in order to stimulate the enthusiasm of civil servants, exercise can help promote national and social concern for the health of the civil ser vice. At the same time, we have mastered the civil physical health factor, which allows us to propose appropriate measures and to take effective measures for the government to solve some problems first-hand information provided. Numerous epidemiological studies have demonstrated that lack of physical activity is an important risk factor for health, which is associated with cardiovascular. It is closely related to the occurrence of disease, diabetes, cancer and other important diseases. Connotation of physical activity is more abundant than we usually refer to physical exercise, physical activity covers physical exercise, and physical exercise is an important aspect of physical activity. And in terms of physical activity and other civil servants are very lacking, which has caused serious health problems. It wants to study the status of physical activity through the investigation and analysis of the civil service, which would like to know the health status of civil servants and to deal with the problems, to put forward relevant intervention strategies. Civil servants are a special group, by a level of physical activity through the civil service test, physical activity status of civil servants is to understand, analyze factors influencing physical activity of civil servants, and to explore the relationship between civil servants between physical activity and physical fitness. It is reasonable to carry out health education for civil servants, civil servants are targeted boost to physical activity levels, thus improving the physical health of the civil service, it is to improve efficiency and provide theoretical and practical basis.

1 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN PHYSICAL

ACTIVITY AND HEALTH The current study doses respond to the relationship between physical activity and cardiovascular health.

There are also many deficiencies. For example, the amount and intensity of physical activity are obtained by way of a questionnaire related information, research has shown that measured through questionnaires youth physical activity tend to be higher than the actual level of overestimation of the amount of physical activity that may mask the body true relationship between activity and health. We should analyze the relationship between physical activity and health through impre cise mathematical statistics. Some studies of physical activity variability will have a percentile method for processing into categorical variables, and then each categorical variable were compared in each classifica tion contained in the body as a large range of activ ity. Therefore cannot articulate better dose-response between physical activity and health. Some studies have used the traditional linear model of physical activity variables to treat as a continuous variable. The result is expressed as physical activity increased by

1 units, the health effects of the decline or rise much, because it is non-linear relationship between physical activity and health effects. At low levels of physical, activity is to increase physical activity increased at a unit that brings health effects and high levels of phys ical activity a health effects of physical activity units that is completely different. Therefore, this study uses the objectivity of measurement methods to measure physical activity and physical activity that is using

Fractional Polynomial Model that will be analyzed as a continuous variable, optimum model of physi cal activity and cardiovascular metabolic health risks among adolescents. Thus fitting dose effect curves, it can better illustrate the effect of physical activity and adolescent dose cardio metabolic health risks. The level of physical activity is to improve human health, research has just begun, physical activity. Fitness and health of many problems are needed to continue in-depth study: such as different ways to enhance the specificity of the effect of sports physical, physical activity and the effect of chronic disease prevention and control mechanism. Personalized sports formulation and monitoring of prescription are to reduce weight for controlling the relationship between volume and intensity of physical activity and weight regain control. These are the Chinese traditional sports fitness effects and evaluation methods. Sports, fitness and health research is a cross- disciplinary comprehensive research in the field, you need to work closely with sports science, medicine, environmental science and other fields of experts, academics, sports fitness results verify, investigate the mechanism of prevention of the disease, so that Sports activities play a greater role in health, enhancing the level of health. A physical activity health effect of the disease has been confirmed by numerous studies. Like a drug to cure the disease, its “dose - efficacy ‘relationship needs further research. According to the principle of specialized body to adapt to different stimuli, different types, different strength, different frequency stimulation of physical activity on the body will obviously produce different results. On exercise form, Western popular aerobic activity and strength training effect have been relatively well studied, but health and wellness tai chi and other eastern instruments suitable for elderly activity efficacy and effects on health and disease has not been enough research attention. On the load of the exercise, the bodies are most sensitive to changes in the intensity of the different groups of people in what the optimal intensity exercise these fundamental issues have not been scientifically answered. We should have more follow-up research to make a deeper level of understanding and a more scientific answer to these basic questions. 2 CIVIL PHYSICAL ACTIVITY Civil sevenths are mainly in office-based work environment, the situation of physical activity tend to be influenced by many factors. Therefore, we have civil service status of physical activity of overall statistics and survey results were analyzed to understand the level of physical activity and other civil servants. We should fully understand the factors involved in physical activity, and take advantage of these factors continue to improve these good factors, thereby promoting civil servants to participate in physical activity to improve health purposes.

Because there are no outdoor chores urban high- intensity physical activity events, mostly mild physical activity of moderate has no intensity physical activity or physical activity. In today’s society house work and household appliances era, physical activ ity in daily life is produced by the civil housework that greatly reduced its overall energy consumption less and less. In this study, for female civil servants and more household activities than men, there is a significant difference between the two, which is the domestic activities of the women’s tradition of a great relationship. Nevertheless, the woman’s housework physical activity is very low, only slightly higher than the physical activity of work, which is the tra ditional sense of the woman of strength in domestic consumption that has been very different. Civil works with sit-based, moderate-intensity physical activity almost no high-intensity physical activity physical activity. Therefore, to improve their overall level of physical activity, physical activity outside of work is very important. In this study, the intensity of physical activity in leisure time test takers stroke behind the traffic intensity physical activity, indicating that they will actively engage in sports activities, but because of the subjective factor in many aspects of conscious ness, working time, venue, entertainment, etc., so that active participation exercises fewer people.

The civil physiological activity limitation is due to health reasons, the situation is better. But with age, physical activity for health reasons will make it sub ject to more restrictions; the vast majority of civil servants is to perform their normal functions in the life and work. Most civil servants, there is a certain degree of physical pain, but nearly 60 percent of civil servants pain no impact on daily activities. The major ity of civil servants in the past one month because of emotional reasons will not affect their normal life, but with age, growth, emotional status of civil servants will be more stable; mental health of the civil service needs to be improved. The vitality of civil servants on their own subjective experience is not optimistic.

A civil servant generally is not because of physical or emotional reasons, to make social activity limitation.

Some civil servants failures are to understand their health status and development trends. Evaluation of civil servants to change their health over the past year is not high, nearly thirty percent of civil servants for their own health changes disappointed.

3 HEALTH STATUS OF CIVIL SERVANTS

Mental health knowledge should hold seminars and simple method for determining their own health in the civil service, strengthen civil maintain mental health awareness, improve their understanding of their own health, thereby improving the overall health of the civil service. Moreover, we are conducting various forms of physical activity to promote an active lifestyle. Regularly we should participate in sports activities, which is a means of entertainment activities to get rid of the bad habit of effective life. Civil authorities should address the heavy tasks, long desk. Some civil servants have bad habits, daily activities of small amounts of the status quo, regularly to carry out work units between events, festivals sports, cultural and recreational activities and other forms of physical fitness activities, multi-organization of civil servants loved swimming, badminton, table tennis, long walk, bowling and aerobics competitions and other projects, advocating active lifestyle. Through the body to withstand sustained exercise, it is a certain intensity, tolerance to improve the function of the human body’s internal organs to meet the needs for a long time to learn. The popularity of physical exercise is a positive against the disease, lifestyle, effective way is to improve the scientific knowledge and the quality of life of physical exercise for civil servants to actively create conditions to facilitate material. 4 SUMMARY Civil physical activity can really unfold the key activities. At the operational activities, we should begin with the means to plan, demand, strengthen routine supervision and inspection, to encourage all levels of fitness network to play to their strengths, creating unique features. Secondly, some of the civil service organizations are to participate in physical activity, in order to carry out activities to promote and strive to make physical activity. The traditional, regular, small-scale grass-roots-oriented activities are with the fitness department of holiday’s diversification of activities. Civil physical activity should be noted as a combination of large and small events with more emphasis on medium and small sports, fitness, and recreation activities. They should be combined and there should be more emphasis on fitness activities, timing and recurrent activities. We should have more emphasis on recurring activities, canonical form activity combined with a flexible form, to promote innovation activities according to their characteristic manner, taking into account all age groups, all levels of needs and the needs of a variety of physical-based groups. Civil physical activity should be closely linked to the characteristics of the times to promote the theme, and the theme runs through physical activity among civil servants, and advocate healthy, wholesome mass sports activities.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

(1) A Project Funded by Collaborative Innovation

Center for New-type Urbanization and Social

Governance of Jiangsu Province; (2) A Project Funded by the Priority Academic Program Development of Jiangsu Higher Education Institutions (PAPD)

Politics. The article is A Project Funded by the Priority

Academic Program Development of Jiangsu Higher

Education Institutions (PAPD) Politics (2014-1).

[1] Liu Ji. Physical activity and mental health [J] Tianjin

Institute of Physical Education, 1994, 03: 16–21.

[2] Gao Hong. Advances in physical activity and mental health effects Review [J] Physical Education, 2005,06:

67–70. [3] Yang Xiao. College students’ physical activity and mental health training analysis [J] Science and Technology Information, 2010, 22: 653. [4] Yang Chenfei. Influence Nanzhao Yunnan Traditional Ethnic Sports Culture on the evolution of [D]. Northwest Normal University, 2013. [5] Wu Xuelian. Exercise and Dietary Intervention American child obesity prevention and control of low-income families build [D]. Beijing Sports University, 2012. [6] Zhang Ke. Weinan City in the elderly workout Investigation and Research [D]. Shaanxi Normal University, 2012.

Analysis and practical significance of Lenin’s legal supervision theory

Si Bai

Northwestern Polytechnical University, Shanxi, Baoji, China

ABSTRACT: In order to ensure that the law can be effectively implemented, Lenin started from social reality and construction of regime in Soviet Russia, and systematically analyzed value significance and system con struction of legal supervision, based on which he proposed to establish a unified legal supervision system to fulfill the functions of legal supervision. The paper starts with the theoretical basis and content of Lenin’s legal supervision, and expounds the importance of legal supervision in Soviet Russia.

KEYWORD: Legal supervision system, Procuratorial organ, Restriction of power

The legal thought of Lenin is the inheritance and development of Marxist legal thought, and the legal thought of Lenin is an important part of Marxist legal thought. Legal system unity thought and establishing specialized legal supervision theory system has com mon guiding significance for legislative construction of socialist countries.

Legal supervision is a legal system that is formed by supervision of the country in order to guarantee the uniform implementation of the constitution and laws, and it includes legal examination, supervision, inspection and guidance on social subjects for legal activities. Legal supervision includes state supervi sion and social supervision. State supervision means the supervision with the coercive power of state of state organs according to legal authority, procedure and ways. Social supervision means the supervision of social organizations and mass on state organs and personnel.

Lenin attached great importance to the important role of legal supervision in socialist legal construc tion in Soviet Russia. Therefore, after the October

Revolution, he combined the politics, economy and culture of Russia, and the distinctive legal supervi sion theory system developed and formed.

1 SOCIAL BACKGROUND OF LENIN’S

LEGAL SUPERVISION

After the October Revolution, in order to solve the problems of legal construction under the condition of socialism, he combined the practical situation of

Russian society, and proposed and perfected legal supervision theory.

In the early stage of the October Revolution, judicial reformation was implemented in Soviet Russia, but remnants of feudalism were not eliminated. Localism and misconducts were universal. The behaviors not only hindered economic development, but also hinders the process of political democratization. So there is a need to strengthen the legal construction. Lenin said that the crucial reason of uncivilized phenomenon is indulging the old Russian opinions and habits of semi-barbarian. If we don’t implement the necessary condition of establishing uniformity, it is impossible to maintain and create the civilization system. Based on the social background, Lenin proposed legal supervision theory. After the October Revolution, Lenin attached great importance to the legal construction of Soviet Russian society. He accelerated the step of forming legal supervision system. And he established and published laws in Soviet Russia such as Peace Law, the Labor Code and Laws about Supervising Workers. The new economic policy which was implemented in 1921 needs to apply legal means to consolidate revolutionary order. Lenin said that the current task is to develop civil circulation, the new economic policy requires to do it, and it demands more revolutionary laws……the more consolidated the regime, the more rapid the development of civil circulation, and it is more urgent to propose more resolute slogans of revolutionary law. The formulation and promulgation of the laws, not only provide the basis for executive and judicial activities, but also provides a criterion for legal supervision. It is necessary to implement unified legal supervision in Russian society. In the first five years after the October Revolution, Lenin dispersed the task of legal supervision in law enforcement agencies. The dispersed legal supervision system not only wastes human and material resources, but also is not good for maintaining efficiency and unity of the legal system. So Lenin thought it was necessary to establish specialized legal supervision organ in Soviet Russia.

In Theory of Dual Leadership and the Rule of Law,

Lenin expounds legal supervision theory, which lays theoretical foundation for legal supervision system in

Soviet Russia.

2 MAIN CONTENT OF LENIN’S LEGAL

SUPERVISION THOUGHT

Lenin’s legal supervision theory system is dominated by establishing specialized legal supervision organs, and is supplemented by active participation of the mass. From the perspective of the subject of legal supervision, party organization, special legal author ity and the mass have the responsibility and obligation to supervise the implementation of laws. From the perspective of the object of legal supervision, the supervision of specialized organs of power is com bined with the supervision of the mass to enhance the force and effect of supervision and prevent from abuse of authority.

2.1 Lenin advocated to establish specialized legal supervision organs

Lenin considered that law is the manifestation of all the people’s will, and is the guarantee of interests and democratic rights of the people. So the law must be unified, and it doesn’t allow localized laws. The legal system should not be the legal system of Kaluga

Governorate and Kazan Governorate, and it should be the unified legal system of Russia. In the early stage of the Soviet Republic, the national legal system was not established, and the local authority emphasized particularity. Lenin thought that local legal system threatens the establishment of unified legal system.

There is no doubt that we live in lawless sea, and local influence is one of the most serious obstacles to estab lish legal system and civilization system. Therefore,

Lenin advocated to prevent from and overcome local negative influence, which demands to establish national legal system including legal supervision system.

Lenin advocated to establish specialized organs to supervise law enforcement of the country to maintain the authority of the law and ensure the legal unity.

Lenin stipulated that The people’s procuratorate is a specialized organ of legal supervision, and the major task is to supervise execution of laws. And he advocated to implement a vertical leadership system.

Lenin considered that eliminating the interference and influence of the local authority on legal super vision needs to ensure that local prosecutors are independent of local authority, which demands to retain the authority of procuratorate raising objections on the decisions or resolutions of local government authorities. And it ensures the unified implementation of the legal system. Therefore, procuratorial organs are not suitable to accept double leadership of central government agencies and local government authorities. Local procuratorial personnel only can be appointed by central government agencies, and only can be led by central organs. Not only that, the former Soviet Union Constitution affirmed that procuratorial organs should implement a vertical leadership system. Article 168 of the constitution stipulated that procuratorial organs exercise authority independently, which doesn’t be interfered by any local authority and is only subordinated to the Attorney General of Soviet Union. Lenin thought that in order to make procuratorate become real legal supervision organ and perform the legal supervision function, the authority of legal supervision of procuratorial organs should be ensured from the quality and material of procuratorial personnel. In How to Reorganize Procuratorate of Workers and Farmers, Lenin proposed how to strengthen the construction of procuratorial organs. The first condition is to use electives to fully ensure that it is responsible. The second condition is that the loyalty and capability of personnel should be high quality. The third condition is that they should be close to the highest organ of the party. We can see that Lenin proposed that the personnel of legal supervision organs should be legal talents with excellent quality, great capability and high status. The cultivation of the talents ensures the accurate implementation of laws, which can effectively manage society and the country. 2.2 Attaching great importance to social supervision of the masses Lenin considered that the subject of state power should be the people, and the drafted and passed Audit Committee Rules about legal supervision, which provides legal security for the people to exert supervision right. Lenin advocated the workers and farmers without any public service can participate in supervision, including petition supervision and supervision of public opinion, which provides effective channels for the masses to exert supervision authority. In addition, Lenin considered that complaint and accuse is an important social supervision way to ensure law enforcement, so he attached great importance to system construction of complaint and accuse of the masses. Lenin instructed the director of the People’s Committee General Office that for all complaints received by government departments and personnel, the written accusation should be reported in 24 hours and the oral complaints should be reported in 48 hours. The general office should register the complaints specially.

2.3 Emphasizing leadership of the party on legal supervision

Lenin considered that the Attorney General, the Supreme Court and Judicial People’s Committee should accept the supervision of the party. The Party

Central Committee can effectively oppose and rec tify the faults and undue influence by leadership and supervision on laws, which ensures that the laws can be implemented uniformly. As the highest supervi sion organ, the Central Vigilance Commission has the right to join in the meeting of the Political Bureau.

The Central Vigilance Commission has high status and high authority. It doesn’t belong to the Central

Committee. The status of the local Procuratorial

Committee and Central Procuratorial Committee is equal.

3 SIGNIFICANCE OF LENIN’S LEGAL

SUPERVISION THOUGHT

3.1 Lenin’s legal supervision thought contributes to maintain the unity of the legal system

Economic base decides superstructure, and super structure react to the economic base. The unity of social, legal system is the reflection of a socialist economy, and it ensures socialist economic con struction. In order to overcome the local impact and make unified implementation of national laws, Lenin repeatedly emphasized the function of legal supervi sion of state attorney general. He said that the unique authority of the attorney general is to supervise the republic to really comprehend the legal system with out the limitation of local influence. The responsi bility of the attorney general is to make the task of any local authority have no conflict with laws. The attorney general must protest all illegal decisions, but he has no the right to stop exerting the decisions.

The reason why Lenin emphasized the unity of the legal system is that the unity of the legal system is a powerful protection of national unity. Only resolutely defending the unity of the legal system can realize national unity.

3.2 While guaranteeing legal enforcement, Lenin’s legal supervision thought guarantees stability of social order

New Factory Rule in 1897, Lenin demonstrated the

[3] Lenin .Lenin Collection[M].Volume 43. Beijing,

People’s Publishing House.1987.195.

[4] Lenin .Lenin Collection[M].Volume 43. Beijing,

People’s Publishing House.1987.196.

[5] Lenin .Lenin Collection[M].Volume 43. Beijing,

People’s Publishing House.1987.194.

[6] Lenin .Lenin Collection[M].Volume 43. Beijing,

People’s Publishing House.1987.378. [7] Lenin .Lenin Collection[M].Volume 43. Beijing, People’s Publishing House.1987.435. [8] Lenin .Lenin Collection[M].Volume 4. Beijing, People’s Publishing House.1972.693. [9] Lenin .Lenin Collection[M].Volume2. Beijing, People’s Publishing House.1959.253.

Accurate analysis of “Chinese New Standard” with the exploration of classical poetry “mood” method

Tanghua Yuan

School of Literature, Beihua University, Jilin, China

ABSTRACT: The mood is intended to send poetry lyric and a form of expressive, while the Chinese have a long attention of the “mood” to convey tradition and from the east, we can see the nation’s awareness of think ing, oriental poet’s emphasis of things’ teaser, expression of mood. Therefore, secondary school teachers in the resolution of the “Chinese New Standard” in Chinese classical poetry pay attention for poetry with the main objective unity, and the traditional interpretation of metaphor Fu poetry “mood.”

KEYWORDS: Mood, Subjective and objective, Fu Bi Xing

Chinese classical poetry in the history of Chinese lit erature is a flower with long lasting wonderful things.

Its rhythm, artistic beauty that spreads so far, still moves countless writers and poets. Chinese classical poetry is an important part of secondary “Chinese

New Standard” how to understand, comprehensive and accurate analysis of “mood” “Chinese New Standard” in Chinese classical poetry, and how improve student learning of Chinese classical poetry, appreciation has become a secondary grim task that language teach ers and teaching workers faced. The author believes that we should pay attention to poetry subjective and objective unity, and understanding poetry, and the use of Fu Bi Xing approach that is learning to appreciate an important way of classical Chinese poetry.

1 A “MOOD” IS AN IMPORTANT WAY

TO INTERPRET CLASSICAL CHINESE

POETRY

Chinese classical poetry emphasizes the idea of

“Expressing feeling, be lyrical”, its emphasis on the

“mood” of the unification and it is a long tradition and it is one of the nation’s traditional features of Chinese literature. Back in the West anniversary, in the “Book of Changes”, there are diagrams and line statements and in the Spring and Autumn Period, the total collec tion of poetry--“The Book of Songs” is on the expres sion of “mood”.

There are many reasons why people in China pay attention to “mood”. From the epistemological per spective, Asians recognize patterns and different modes of Western knowledge, which determines the different cultures of East and West: Oriental mode of thinking is integrated, the Western way of think ing is to analyze. As Chen Bohai said: “China has heavy intuition, introspection and personal insight, priori reason and ethical spirit, they are accustomed to the contemplation of things as a whole and ‘that thing sees a reason’ type of taste; Western pay attention to experiment and facts, logic and scientific re-discovered love of the affair as fine layers of anatomy and inferring. “[1] Chen’s passage sums up the most important reason of the mood in classical Chinese poetry that is “Chinese philosophers did not know a well-developed sense of awareness and logic, it seems incoherent caught in expressing ideas, this case will make the habit in systems thinking, people get a sense of uncertainty on a philosophy unexpected.”[2] Therefore, when the poet wrote a poem, they often do not direct line drawing, but to go through a process of analogy, to borrow scenery and objects to declare love. The Most representative of Chinese ancient method of understanding things is in “Book of Changes” in the “copulative” summarized the “watching - analyze - Dao” approach. This approach is reflected in the literature, especially poetry formed on the mood of the tradition of great importance. Because of that, Chinese classical poetry in terms of time or the understanding has heavy “mood” of the tradition. Therefore, interpretation, analysis of classical Chinese poetry of the secondary school teachers should pay attention to explain the “mood” for students to appreciate poetry and poets creative purposes. 2 PARSING CHINESE CLASSICAL POETRY “MOOD” APPROACH 2.1 Note subjective and objective unity of poetry “Conception” refers to works of lyrical scenes showing the kind, virtual and real, active life rhythm poetic charm infinite space. It is “the thoughts and feelings of literary works depicted life picture and perfor mance art fused to form a consistent state.” [3] Mood consists of two parts, “meaning” and “territory”, it is actually the harmony of love with “meaning” or

“love”, it refers to the author’s thoughts and feelings;

“territory” or “feeling” refers to the specific scene depicted in the works, so the mood is a poet thoughts and feelings and images combined with the specific realm of art. As Wang Guowei said: “There are peo ple having high grid and their own famous things in old time.” Conception of poetry is the concentrated expression of poetic beauty, it is to create a unique image by refining, animating, creating musical language of the unity, and it constitutes a beautiful and profound mood. This is what makes poetry have a high concentration, and it can be summarized to reflect the social life, to express thoughts and feelings and the expression of the wishes of the ideal function.

Therefore, if you want a correct understanding of classical Chinese poetry in the “mood” you should pay attention to the subjective and the objective of unity, in close connection with the main object.

Mr. Li Zehou said “mood, is like the typical thing, if it is to be analyzed. It contains two aspects: an objec tive reflection of the image of life and the creation of the artist’s subjective emotions ideal for simple clar ity. We want to know the essence of the former called

‘territory’ aspect, which is called the ‘meaning’ of the terms of ‘mood’, it is the organic unity of these two aspects of life as reflected in objective reality.”

Secondary school teachers in the teaching of

Chinese classical poetry must have the author’s sub jective and objective images, they should think things as an organic unity, in order to allow students to appreciate the good mood of classical Chinese poetry and authors’ mood. In “Chinese New Standard” (the first two days under), we select the Tao “drinking”

(Fifth), for example

Build a house in the human environment, traveling without noise.

What are you doing? The heart is distant.

Harvest the daisy under the Eastern fence, leisurely to see the mountain.

With good mountain air, the birds come back home.

Among them, there is a real natural beauty, but the desire of resolution has forgotten the words.

This one of masterpiece better is able to reflect the mood of song poetry of Tao. Many teachers in lec tures tell the students that this poem can be translated into “My family is built into the bustling road; it did not bother to socialize from traveling bustle. If you want to ask how I can have such extraordinary joy, spiritual things avoid natural quietness away from this world. When I wander under the east wall of the Qing

Ju mood, I suddenly looked up to see the mountain scenery wonderful joy. Wisps of fog lingering twilight color rising, birds fly in team with the Knot Mountains embrace. Nanshan, ah, it has true meaning of life, how can I express?” The main reason for this is closer to the effect of translating poetry, but it did not express the mood of poetry, this phenomenon is the creation of subjective and objective description of the scene. There is no unified interpretation of poetry. First, it is the poetry objective images, scenes are not understood thoroughly. Secondly, it is the poetry of images; the scene did not understand how to convey his ideas. “Jielu people throughout the” land, mining Ju place “Tori” evening “Mountain Air” of the poem appears as “birds phase also,” the King, etc., is actually a mood, it is the author objective basis for rendering or conveying emotion. These objective bases for understanding are wrong, beautiful poetry readers not necessarily perceive mood. If “Jie Lu in the human environment” is understood as “busy road”, that place of residence might be understood as a secluded alley in cities, and it is combined with the poem’s time to understand. You can know the author when he wrote this poem, he moved home in Xun Yang (now Jiangxi Jiujiang City)’s Village, in the Yangtze River. Therefore, the correct understanding of the land after the objective will be the creation of the territory of the whole poem to shift depending on the pink, MEI Li Bai pleasant quiet village is among the people rather than ordinary remote cities street people. It is because in such a quiet place away Miao, the author’s heart will be extraordinarily joyful. The “take Ju Dong under Gracilaria” and “Tori” cannot be understood simply as “east wall”, but a specific environment. If it’s interpreted as the east wall, then it is uninteresting with no poetry, became it is a direct description of the growth environment of the chrysanthemum. Tao Yuanming particularly likes chrysanthemum with daisy ornamental value, he believes, “The Story of Qiu has good color, Yi Lu drop-its English”; Ju has food value, “wine can be cured Considers, Ju Xie made decadent age.” Because Tao Yuanming subjective loves Daisy, he will be in the land of casual daisy chrysanthemum mining, while looking down on the fence mining Ju, leisurely nature inadvertently looked up to see the mountains, in a moment, he feel a natural adaptive kind of fun, myself and Nanshan between Chrysanthemum really reached a tacit understanding. Therefore, he only “leisurely” sees the mountain. A “leisurely” simple action is just a matter of the body without outside interference heart that reflected in the action, indirect inner feelings so closely integrated with the objective scene up. “Mountain Air” cannot be simply interpreted as pink clouds. But it should be understood as mountain weather, sooner or later on the occasion of Lushan scene. It should include sunset, twilight, pink clouds, Nanshan, as well as the nature of the atmosphere. In between there is such a strong natural flavor of the mountain, “birds phase and also” Nature cannot be understood as “Huixiang mountains”, but the “birds owned forest.” Tao Yuanming has an evening gazing at the mountains and the birds own forests that cause food for thought, in so many scenes, the bird flew to the place where they will go. Of course, it is a return to nature, so “birds phase and also” is the right return joy of nature; it found a home for their own lives fun and philosophy of life.

By analyzing this poem, we can know a lot of

Chinese classical poetry, they are literally sentence scenery, as the Great Masters Wang Guowei said: “All the King Poets also love language.” Therefore, it is the correct understanding of subjective and objective unity of poetry, so poetry accurately resolves the

“mood” of important ways.

2.2 Interpretation of poetry “mood” with “Fu Bi Xing” approach

Interpretation of “mood” approach poetry has many reading law such as poetry readings and other enlightened eye, but I believe that the correct under standing of poetry Fu Bi Xing tactics is used. It is understood that poetry “mood” is an essential way, because poetry or painting is a portrait, or a lyric, or sensible, or scene management integration, that will be used Fu, Xing.

About Fu Bi Xing--three performance methods, ancient scholars have different interpretations: Liu

Xie in “Wen Xin Diao Long • Bixing chapter” said that: “Bi is who attached it; Xing who play it ... Fu

Xing care concept encyclical, wan from chapter, said the name is also small, classes are also great “and Zhu

Xi in his” poetry Biography “he proposed:.”. Fu who shops and lays out being to the respect it, “ ” than those to each other things than this thing “and “Xing who resigned to say something else to cause the Wing also “. Song Zhongmeng said:” Syria that of matter endowed with romance, love also claims to make the best material in case that the ratio of care, the situa tion may also attached. It touches things in order to play the situation that the Xing, things emotionally also. “(Wang Ying Lin” trapped learn Ji Wen “primer)

Three kinds of knowledge from the creative skills of Zhu Xi understanding Fu Bi Xing, speaks relatively concise, most scholars have taken this saying, and Liu

Xie and Zhong Mongolia from the emotional point of view, from the creators of poetry subjective feel ings and objective objects understanding the relation ship between the angle Fu, Xing’s. Zhong Mongolia speaks more explanations. It is that the three methods can be a matter of poetry, love, and all can express clearly.

Bixing is the creation of a principle of poetry, it is a specific soul that touched the poet at a particular time to produce the next environment. Xing, with both objective and rich psychological meaning, is the meaning of subjective feelings. But it has the objective meaning of feelings, not simply an objective description, subjective feelings, it is the thing I double now, it is called the “mood.” In “Chinese New Standard” (three days under) take the “The Cooing “As an example: The waterfowl would coo Upon an islet in the brook. A lad would like to woo A lass with nice and pretty look. There grows the water grass The folk are fond to pick; There lives the pretty lass, For whom the lad is sick. Ignored by the pretty lass, The lad would truly yearn. The lad is hard to pass; All night he’ll toss and turn. There grows the water grass The folk are fond to choose; There lives the pretty lass Whom the lad pursues. There grows the water grass The folk are fond to gain; There lives the pretty lass The lad would entertain. “The waterfowl would coo”, is the author of watching waterfowl called on the Yellow River, at this particular time and environment, it causes the man in the pursuit of My Fair Lady, which is the start. The “cocks sing, in the River Island” is not a purely objective dressing writing; both scenery and objects, there are men’s emotions. “My Fair Lady, Marty” is not purely subjective catharsis, both for the woman looks and virtue depiction of the woman’s love for another man. The poem uses the ratio of metaphor, in the poem, it is to achieve a unified scene, two things I now convey to the beauty of artistic conception. On the surface all the scenery, nature, subjective praise, but the poem is not an entirely simple tribute. “Chinese New Standard” in a lot of poetry can use this method to analyze, such as Songs of the South “Lament”, the Han Dynasty “Motherhood”, Tao Yuanming’s “return home vegetable garden,” Li Bai’s “gift to Wang Lun,” Du Fu “Wang Yue,” and so on. Almost every poem has used the Bixing practices; it strengthens the “mood” of expression. A common method of conception of Fu in Chinese classical poetry is conveyed. Fu law has more than narrative poetry events, scene description, and the description of the scene itself in lyrical.

In “Chinese New Standard”, take the “My Man is

Away” as an example

My man’s away to serve the state,

I cannot anticipate

How long he will there stay,

Or when he’ll be home from so far away.

The sun is setting in the west,

The fowls are roosting in their nest,

The sheep and cattle come to rest.

To serve the state my man’s away.

How can I not think of him night and day?

My man’s away to serve the state,

I can’t anticipate

When we’ll again have met.

The sun’s already set,

The fowls are roosting in their nest,

The sheep and cattle come to rest.

To serve the state my man’s away.

Keep him from hunger and thirst, I pray.

Poetry surface is briefly described in the evening, chicken, and lamb and caw return to the habitat.

However, all things in such a rest home reunion circumstances cause the distant beloved wife

(husband) thoughts. Such poetry is no longer simple scenery, and lyrical. However, it combines with narrative, descriptive, lyrical things and does things objectively, with a unified view of the subjective feeling. The whole poem conveys sunset, thinking woman looking back when the hospital Siv mood.

Such depictions Fu technique has great influence on the later description, such as Pan’s “widow Fu” warm

Relations of high-tech talent investment in education, health and regional economic output

Jinsong Xu

Suzhou Chien-shiung Institute of Technology

Linfeng Zheng

Chinese Academy of Sciences

Hongtao Wu

Medical college, Soochow University

Zhonggen Mao

School of Business Administration, Southwestern University of Finance and Economics

ABSTRACT: Investment and benefit statistics of higher education are a cross between the edge of the research statistics, economics, accounting, applied pedagogy, methodology issues. This paper has tried to put through statistical research on higher education and its benefits, and it is to define its connotation and extension, with the economics of higher education inputs and output method for qualitative analysis. On the basis of qualitative research, it is to determine the effectiveness of higher education investment and statistical, which should be calculated and which should not be counted. It is followed by basic statistical indicators by contrast, correlation analysis extends out several statistical analyses of indicators to establish an investment in science and its benefits statistical indicator system of higher education. This indicator system includes a series of reflection on how to invest in higher education and its benefits, economics, education, accounting category translate into quantifiable statistical indicators.

KEYWORDS: High-Tech Talent; Investment in Education; Health; Regional Economic

1 INVESTMENT AND BENEFIT IN HIGHER

EDUCATION

Higher Education Investment and Benefit statistical indicator system is an important means to understand the situation of higher education investment, a meas ure of return on investment in higher education. Its design is a very complicated systematic project involv ing many fields of economics, education, statistics, sociology, accounting, etc., which is demanding and difficult. In order to ensure it is scientific, in the design process, we must follow the following principles.

Individual Statistics, General Statistics combined in the design process, which should adhere to the principle of individual statistics and comprehensive statistical combining. Because investment in higher education and its benefits, both embodied in a specific area or areas, but also reflected the overall perfor mance. If only we emphasize individual statistics without paying attention to comprehensive statistics, it will see the trees, but not the forest, resulting in one sided statistical results; if you do not pay attention to individual statistics, comprehensive statistics became a forest without this, without water, its credibility degree will be greatly reduced. The total investment in higher education statistical indicators of the total investment in higher education refers to the state, social organizations and individuals to financial allocations, payments, fund-raising, donations, for a total investment of higher education. From the overall scope of higher education, it includes colleges and universities, adult colleges and universities, military academies, colleges and universities, TV universities and higher education self-study examination. It reflects a country’s total investment in higher education. 2 EDUCATION AND ECONOMIC GROWTH What kind of an education way affects economic growth? First, only in its anti-traditional education, can we achieve liberation, encourage the transformation of people and tell people how to raise their own demands. To this extent, it is economic growth source, namely the development of an enabling envi ronment for economic development; secondly, educa tion is in the utilization of natural resources, because education provides resources it can be more effec tively develop management talent, but education can provide technology for rich resources instead meager resources of the way to overcome the shortage of certain resources. Without education, people cannot adapt to changing production needs far. Once again, education has higher capital than other forms of non-human regeneration persistence, the speed deval uation of human resources and disposal of tangible capital than appearing slow. There is a certain invest ment in education compared with the same non-hu man capital expenditures, in addition to other equal terms, but also with greater productivity; and finally, education is a consumer, education funding mainly is from the consumption. Because of the possibility of investment in physical capital is conditional on sav ings, even if the internal rate of return is more than the internal rate of return and low educational mate rial capital, within a certain range, the additional cost of education has a pure contribution to education.

Because otherwise, it transfers resources consumed in the indirect production.

Since the 1980s, empirical research on human capital for economic growth has achieved in the role of a series of results. Some Western scholars are to study the mechanism of economic development and analysis of economic growth trends that show that the difference between a country’s human capital invest ment in both countries maintain is a key factor for sustained economic growth, but also the developing countries are to achieve economic growth, a neces sary condition. The role of human capital investment of universal is of significance, practice after World

War II Japan, Germany and parts of the developing world to prove this point. The rise of the Japanese economy relies on education, science historian famous contemporary. Japan Yuasa light towards the introduction of many developing countries in the world’s advanced science and technology. It is not a very successful issue, there have been some brilliant expositions, “After the war, many developing coun tries cannot be the reason why Japan as well as the introduction, digestion and absorption of advanced science and technology, the main reason is the lack of universal education and it is to improve the necessary conditions for this modernization.”

3 EDUCATION AND SCIENCE &

TECHNOLOGY

Increasing per capita years of schooling promotes the advancement of human capital formation and science and technology, and thus the national economy is to achieve rapid growth. Although China has achieved rapid economic development, but China and the three countries have taken different modes. Each element in the promotion of economic growth, the rapid increase in capital has played a huge role in the development of human capital that is relatively backward; the contribution of education to economic growth is small. The United States, Japan, and South Korea’s economic have a low growth during the early. Human resource development and physical capital formation have been relatively balanced, both attach importance to invest in physical capital, but also pay attention to human resources development, and thus the economy can continue to grow rapidly. In the past twenty years, it has been to promote China’s rapid economic growth factors, the technological progress and human capital are two elements of China’s economic growth, the potential has not been fully tapped, and it has a large upside. Education as an important means and methods of human resource development and technologies has a progress, which will play an increasingly important role in economic growth. Meanwhile, the success of catching the United States, Japan, South Korea and other countries also profoundly explains. Education Development determines the extent of a country’s level of human resources development and the speed of technological progress, which determines a country’s economic growth and the strength of economic strength, Education is the main driving forces of modern economic and social further development. China is to realize economies of the developed countries to catch up, we must maintain the current high economic growth, while focusing on the quality of economic growth, achieve from extensive to intensive economic growth mode transformation, which requires countries to formulate development strategies. It must have a deep understanding and awareness of the importance of the development of education, by developing education and promoting the development and advancement of technology, human resources, which will be the focus of China’s economic boom. Human capital and other factors of production like capital and other substances are produced indispensable, because any capital and resources are to play a role in the real process of production activities; they are inseparable with the corresponding scientific and technical knowledge and skills of workers use. Moreover, the development, research and development of new machines, new technology applications for new resources are inseparable from having to participate in a certain level of knowledge and skills of workers. In the modern economy, the average skill level of workers and labor efficiency, as well as scientific and technological knowledge and use of the reserves are key factors. And one of these factors fully functional prerequisites is that they go through human capital as a carrier, thus human capital plays an important role in promoting the process of tech nological progress, and the development of human resources and the accumulation of human capital but also education are inseparable. Universal education can improve the quality of the people, for the community to cultivate various types of workers and numerous scientific research personnel to promote advances in basic science and advanced technology of the invention.

4 REGIONAL ECONOMY AND TECHNOLOGY

Talent source of the problem has many the solu tion, the key issue is the right to guide policy and its essential continuity, flexibility, further emancipate the mind, the introduction of diverse forms of talent mechanism and smooth distribution channels. The process of China’s large population flows for dec ades to see, the flow of talent is always accompanied by the migration of the population to perform. The early 1850s and 1860s, the eastern cities of intellec tuals, technicians are to support the mainland, the mainland’s economic development has played an extremely important role. However, this time with a semi-militarized way of an administrative order to the entire plant, preparation of the workshop moved to the western practice, for various reasons, it cannot be done today. In the mid 1970s, young intellectuals of the 1960s a large crowd moved, which is a prod uct of the particular social and historical background, and now it is unable to do so. In the Mid-1980s, the development of the Shenzhen Special Economic

Zone, and after the development of Hainan, DC, are a guide policies to attract a variety of favorable conditions, thousands of talents to DC, DC for the economical construction inject a strong science and technology strength for the rapid rise of the SAR has played a very important role.

However, throughout the country, it is always new century’s long-term national policy. Thus, we should introduce talents, develop human resources, increase education investment and people in the process, the central and local governments should develop both long-term and realistic as soon as a viable development plan, the establishment of an efficient employment mechanism, strive in a shorter time com pletion of the rational allocation of talent, avoid the short-sighted behavior. Economic development in a gradual manner should have an orderly flow of talent; depth education in constant development, the western development is in full swing. Here we highlight the issue that deserves attention; it is the introduction of high-quality personnel and strengthening basic edu cation, expanding higher education effectively. What effective measures are adopted to retain talent? In the information economy, the success of a region will be without geographical limitations, it is not a lack of financial capital plaque limitations and constraints, the secret of its success lies in the education and knowledge placed in a priority position. So “Western flourished, education first,” Education and knowledge are enhancing the national full use of information skills, and also it is to accelerate the use of IT national education form a virtuous circle, and gradually develop a strong scientific and technological talents layer. Regardless of any age, even in those countries the labor surplus, there will be a shortage of unskilled labor phenomenon. Because after experienced Lewis is turning point, in the past, we can hire the unskilled worker at any time, they are becoming increasingly scarce. Because this part of the substantial increase in the demand for workforce, the most significant changes are in supply and demand, so their wages will be significantly faster speed up. When the higher human capital and human capital occupational wages develops with lower speed, it is not the same, it will slowly appear wage convergence condition. This phenomenon is reflected in people’s concept. And economists will put this phenomenon as human capital returns that decline. 5 OUTPUT OF EDUCATION Education has two returns, one is the private return that individuals in the labor market can get in return, and this time there will be some return of market failure. Second, it is the social returns, the returns will be more long-term, individuals may not understand. Educational economics tells us that the highest social returns to education are a pre-school stage, followed by a compulsory common higher education and vocational education. Through this, we can draw the following conclusions combing: First, the government should invest more money into running an education, but it should be invested in the marketplace that cannot be done spontaneously. For those with higher private rate of return, it can all be part of the education and training sector for the market to decide. Second, we should continue to increase the number of years of education, in order to really encourage families to send their children to school, you should have pre-school and high school education that is also included in the compulsory education in our country. 6 SUMMARY Each region should develop in line with the actual development of the regional characteristics of higher education strategy. Judging from the level of regional economic development in the eastern coastal areas due to the older, higher starting point, the interaction has formed a relatively complete system of higher educa tion and regional development. And it has become the center of higher education professionals gathered so beneficial to engage more for more cutting-edge basic research, and the development of high-tech industries play a greater role in China’s economic restructur ing and industrial upgrading. The Midwest should rely more on a local higher education system to train more talents for local development, in particular, they should strengthen the cultivation of applied talents, which is conducive to digestion and absorption of advanced technologies, to promote the sustainable and healthy places development. At the same time, the government should strengthen macro-control efforts on the regional development of higher educa tion; increase the level of economic development of backward region’s investment to develop more sup port preferential policies to attract more talent to the

Midwest Higher flow and for creating more space for development, so that it can ease development. In the narrow inter-regional imbalances, we should pay more attention to the imbalance within the region in order to achieve the overall level of development and

The analysis on social determinants of health of the floating population

Yicheng Zhou

School of Politics and Public Administration, Soochow University, Collaborative Innovation Center for New-type

Urbanization and Social Governance of Jiangsu Province

Benhui Shi

Sichuan Academy of Social Science

Zhenzhong Deng

School of Medicine, University of Tokyo

Qiangbin Li

School of Public Administration, Sichuan University

ABSTRACT: Health literacy refers to the individual obtaining and understanding, and it deals with the basic health information and services and the ability of using the information and services to make good health deci sions. At present, research works related to health literacy in our country are in the initial stage. The information on floating population’s health literacy is blank. The Chinese Health Education Center (formerly the Chinese

Disease Prevention and Control Center Health Education) Ministry of Social Welfare Studies undertook special

“Chinese public health literacy survey and evaluation system” to develop a suitable evaluation index system of health literacy of the public, which is used for evaluation of our country’s public health literacy level. October to

December 2007, the Chinese health education center of this set of evaluation index in Jinan Shandong Province examined the health literacy status of the floating population, and analyzed the influence factors of health litera cy of the floating population. The national macroeconomic regulation, the control of the floating population and the rational allocation of health resources determine priority health work, and they provide evidence for health related policies and regulations of the floating population.

KEYWORDS: Floating population; Health; Social determinants; Disease

With the rapid process of industrialization and urbanization in China, migration has become one of China’s common social phenomena. According to statistics, in 2010 the number of floating popu lation in China reached to 221 million people. The main manifestation of the population is still the rural surplus labor mobility flows to the cities. Because our country resources distribute imbalance between urban and rural areas, the urban population health is generally better than the rural population. For the overall education level is not high, the floating pop ulation is the lack of professional labor skills. When they flow to the cities, they are often with low-wage, long working hours, higher occupational risk factors of work, and coupled with poor living conditions, lack of health knowledge and skills. So many studies show that the floating population is at high risk of infectious diseases (such as AIDS, tuberculosis, sexually transmitted diseases), occupational diseases, reproductive health problems, and psychological problems. Studies in other countries have also shown that the floating population has higher health risk than local residents. 1 LEVEL OF EDUCATION AND THE FLOW OF PERSONNEL HEALTH The level of education is a major factor affecting the knowledge and behavior of the flowing personnel health. For young people, they should carry out various forms of formal education to have the necessary physical health, fertility and other related knowledge, which guide young people to take an active and healthy lifestyle and enhance self-protection awareness and reduce risk. Difference of cultural adaptation is a barrier to medical and health services accessibility. The health services demanded for the floating population is restricted. It is not only mainly due to the low income of the floating population, but also because of low-income health care and relatively high charge of medical institutions, many sufferers don’t go to see a doctor and adopt the way of self care. The back burner way health insurance coverage is low, thereby reaching the purpose to improve the health of migrants before us is still daunting problems ultimately.

Previous studies pay more attention to the health of urban residents and migrant population, and the differences between the health services utilization and the reasons. To a certain extent, it ignores the differences between migrants and the rural retaining population. Faced by present high and low health care situation, working and living in the city of the float ing population health risks make the floating popu lation health and health services utilization is worse than urban residents and even worse than the rural residents. Among the three categories of the popula tion, the floating population is in the most vulnerable position.

Therefore, this article used the United Nations population fund young floating population health risk assessment project of the survey data, focusing on health service utilization reveal the 15 to 24-year-old young migrants, and comparing the youth of the floating population and the rural youth population, to better promote youth to provide the floating population.

The problems of the floating population’s health and hygiene behavior should arouse our atten tion. On the one hand, we should strengthen health education and promotion work for the entire group of floating population in order to improve their health awareness to take efforts to eliminate bad habits that threaten their health. On the other hand, pay attention to different professional outstanding problems of the floating population and the influence factors of spe cific effective behavior intervention work. For exam ple, among the bad habits of the floating population, smoking and drinking account for a large proportion.

Because the construction of the male floating popu lation is in the majority, so we should target to carry out health education, and non-smoking and alcohol limit among the floating population in the building.

Obesity, diabetes, high blood pressure patients often accompanied by insulin resistance, and insulin action in the liver is the target organ, but also the fat intake, oxidative fatty acid metabolism, cholesterol synthe sis, phospholipids, lipoprotein synthesis and secre tion of vital organs. When lipid disorders, enter the fat liver cells is much, when it’s more than the use of stem cells and synthetic lipoprotein oxidation and transport capacity, the lipid easily gathered in liver cells, eventually leading to liver cell degeneration, swelling and the formation of fatty liver. 2 HEALTH LITERACY LEVEL OF FLOATING POPULATION The floating population is young adults, but they are usually under the larger intensity of labor and work pressure, and their medical and health services available are limited. For the people at higher potential risk of diseases, we need to urge them to form the habits of doing regular physical examinations and establish the concept of “disease prevention”. In order to guide them to make use of the health care resources more properly and effectively, this is very important for both the individuals and the society as a whole. The main factor that affects the flowing population health literacy is education, which is consistent with the national urban and rural residents’ health literacy survey results. In addition, occupation also affects the health literacy of the floating population; while in rural residents’ survey, we also get the same results. Because China’s floating population management is still dominated by industry management, it varies greatly among different occupations. National legislation should clearly stipulate that private businesses hire employees for its regular physical examinations, pay medical treatment insurance and safeguard the legitimate rights and interests of the floating population. Health literacy level of women is higher than men’s. This is perhaps because women bear a smaller society and life stress and pay more attention to their health. It also reminds us those men as the main flow of the population and the main social labor, it’s needed to strengthen health education to improve their health knowledge. More importantly, change their attitudes and reduce their risk of dangerous behavior. Floating population working for a long time and due to a longer living time in the city, they obtain more health knowledge and gradually assimilated the city, which is higher than the level of health literacy of short time migrant workers. Floating population health literacy level is higher than rural residents and significantly lower than the level of urban residents. Although floating population own health knowledge and self-care skills is poor, but the relatively high educational level of population mobility and floating population into the city to live and work in also be able to obtain more than the outflow of health resources and services, and in recent years, the Chinese government and health sector are also attaches great importance to the problems of health and sanitation of the floating population workers, and they launched a series of health education works related to AIDS awareness. In the process of carrying out AIDS education, we should pay attention to the characteristics of different economic conditions of the region, to carry out more targeted AIDS edu cation works.

Strong rural people are more inclined to work out side the home. Based on this, scholars have put for ward the rural-urban floating population health tends to be better than that of the urban population and rural left-behind the population’s point of view, namely the

“healthy immigrant effect”. However, due to China’s

Rural - Urban floating population has many peculiar ities, it may lead to this kind of view not fully embod ied and sufficient. First, select health indicators will affect the results of our observation, select two weeks prevalence, prevalence of chronic diseases, self-rated health and other indicators, the conclusion would be different. Second, the Chinese floating population faces more health risks, and their lives in a weaker position. Although there is no lack rural-urban floating population working in all kinds of enterprises which are in “white collar” class, but a greater proportion of people are engaged in the food service industry, pro duction lines, construction and other occupations. All kinds of health risks faced by these occupations can lead to poor health conditions, such as occupational risks, supply and use of inadequate health services, medical security insufficiency. Third, China’s floating population age structure is of the light, so some dis eases appear slowly, and not being taken seriously, it is difficult to become the main reason for its return.

Our study observed that Chinese floating population in poor health than populations in urban and rural.

3 SOCIAL FACTORS AFFECTING THE

PREVALENCE TREATMENT OF FLOATING

POPULATION

Medical insurance is an important factor in the impact of health services utilization. In university analysis, we found that medical insurance is different, treatment proportion is different statistically. The impact of health insurance has two levels of factors:

First, floating population’s health insurance coverage is narrow. For the young floating population, since the labor market is oversupplied, many companies can not follow the requirements of the labor law and its employment floating population labor contracts. Thus the medical insurance and industrial injury insurance policy cannot be implemented. It directly affects the ability of migrants to pay for health services, and thus having an impact on health services utilization.

Second, the NCMS off-site use is disordered.

With the popularity of the NCMS, research locations in the home most of the migrants are paid NCMS, but for the floating population workers, it has not yet formed cooperative policies on how to use the new rural in different places. Currently, part of the province and across the health insurance fixed point hospital can use the new farming and submit an expense account, but there is no promotion of national level. Therefore, the rural youth population of Zhashui with health insurance is big, but new urban young floating population’s insurance coverage is narrow, and this could lead to the purchase of health insurance but not having an impact on treatment behavior. Strengthening the cooperation between the departments working to promote health management of the floating population also plays an important role. Health prevention work requires the joint participation of migrants in all sectors of society; the health sector needs to strengthen public security, and communication departments to establish liaison and linkage mechanism to promote physical and mental health of the floating population. 4 COMMUNITY HEALTH RECORDS MANAGEMENT OF THE FLOATING POPULATION Take measures to improve information collection and archives work. In view of the establishment of the floating population has big mobility, and informative collection is inconvenient, publicity and information gathering can be established outlets in the place that floating population must pass by. And contact with the staff that deal with the Public Security Bureau police station to apply for temporary residence permits, rental agency, community committees, employers, and most migrants medical institutions (such as: general hospitals, specialty hospitals, community health centers, pharmacies, etc.), employ it as a health file information collectors, the implementation of grid information collection system, and regular reporting aggregated information collected to establish and update the floating population health archives. Improve the archives information sharing mechanism, saving resources (1) The establishment of the department to share. Public security department and the family planning department of health have established the floating population information request, and suggest to establish the mechanism of information sharing between government departments and the collected information sharing of the floating population to avoid duplication of information collection manpower and time consumption. (2) The establishment of a shared area. Floating population flow is frequent, so it is recommended to improve the flow of population transfer and call on the health records system, and gradually realize the dynamics of the flow of archives with the people flow dynamic mechanism, the estab lishment of critical information query and file trans fer specifications, to avoid repetition in different areas of health records to establish and maintain the continuity and timeliness of the file.

5 SUMMARY

A large number of floating population in cities is a phenomenon that occurs in the market, economic process of modern economic development; floating population is also the object of district hospitals and health services.

The floating population’s health education is to provide one of the contents of the primary health care services. The results of this study show that floating population, community health education is feasible and effective. But the methods of the float ing population health education must be formed and scientific. This paper aims to provide the preliminary study results. To make such health education insti tutionalization and standardization, all departments need to work together in all aspects. Faced with the floating population health needs and the present situ ation of the lack of health education, health education of workers has a long way to go. With various forms of health education and rich educational content, the improvement of community health consciousness of the floating population has a certain effect.

In the modern era, the use of modern audio-visual means for the floating population in community health education is very necessary. To live close to their actual data as a health education content, it is also the thing should be very concerned about. How

The creation of public nature in community public space design

Wei Zhang & Ru Jia

School of Arts & Design, Hubei University of Technology, Wuhan, Hubei, China

ABSTRACT: The rational design of urban public space absorbs more and more attention of the community.

In the end, people need public spaces of an active exploration and attempt. Through the human experience of urban public space, the design of public space in the city questioned the rationality, emphasized the human behavior activities on public space design requirements, and emphasized the place of people, human behav ior activities, and the activities of the Trinity design ideas. By comparing the two public spaces analysis of

Chongqing, it further emphasized the left of human activity, human stories and spirit; public space has lost its significance.

KEYWORDS: Public Space; Human Space; Behavioral Activity

1 THE NATURE OF URBAN PUBLIC SPACE

Urban Public Space, is a multi-level, multi-functional space, it sets in Performance, rest, recreation, fitness, food, culture, etc. as a whole, it is a stage of people’s social lives, and urban public space is not just for people to visit but for people to use, people become part of it. Therefore, its essence is to participate in the activities of human subjects, emphasize the expe rience of people in the place, have the emphasis on human activity in the environment, and emphasize the physical characteristics of the workplace, human activity and the integrity of the meaning of the Trinity.

Analyzing on urban public space and events and activities should be analyzed.

Activities Subject: People are the main user of the activity space, but also one of the constituent elements of the space is the landscape. The activity inside is the subject of our people, including people in different ages, different classes, occupations, hobbies and cultural backgrounds, it is a place in where they have freedom and equality opportunities to commu nicate. It thanks to the participation of people, only it should have a public urban public space, openness.

Events: it mainly refers to social activities, from the user’s behavior constituted. Human activity in social activities in outdoor public spaces can be sum marized into three types: the need for activity, selec tivity activities and sociability activities. Because human exist of necessity, activity is necessary, and it is largely unaffected by environmental quality.

Selective activity is just like walking after dinner and so on. According to the mood and environment, you can make a decision of leisure class activities, so environmental quality is relationships. Sociability activities are such as gathering in the park and chatting in the pedestrian street. In social life, sociability activities intersection occurs is a necessity and selective, especially in the latter two activities on the environment, the requirement in public spaces is increasingly higher and higher. They need to focus on humanity. That is the event which is designed in our urban public space. Activities subject, Events, venues combine to constitute the three humane urban public spaces. The activity to reinforce Subject creates in the place or places have attracted an urban space, which has the common meaning of the word. 2 DEFINITION OF HUMANE URBAN PUBLIC SPACE The so-called humane urban public space is the ability to create the conditions in which people have a pleasant experience psychological feeling of space. In such a space, people can get a variety of behavioral activity, get warm, comfortable, freedom, dignity, pleasant, relaxed, safe, vibrant, meaningful psychological feelings, it is a space to show their worth and share with joy for people to see and be seen where is the sustenance of hope and its local ownership. Without the human activity, human stories and spirit, public space has lost its significance. The formal study of urban public space is something nearly three decades behind the rise of public space, which bears deep-seated social change. After the reform and opening up, China’s socialist market economy develops, people’s basic needs for food and clothing are developed to a higher level, with the national legalization process, citizens have right to meet these needs, and public space is one of the important forms that developed. It is these diverse public spaces together that meet the basic needs of the people’s social, leisure, ideographic, so as to promote grass-roots social integration and maintain social sta bility. With the development of the economy and soci ety, the demand for community public space is more intense, there is more eager to produce modern inner face interaction with others. Convenient network deepens people’s understanding of the outside world to make people’s inner world becomes empty. In the

Internet age, staying at home can do many things, such as online shopping, online dating. However, there are many direct contacts with the outside to pro duce desire, satisfaction, and happiness. Public space is just to meet this demand for human nature, which is conducive to social harmony.

3 FUNCTION OF THE URBAN COMMUNITY

PUBLIC SPACE

From single to multiple, there is less focus on build ing our traditional community public space. For peo ple in small-scale residential space intimate interac tion prone. And the traditional culture of “Piers good neighbor” thought is more deeply in the Neighborhood

Association. From the intimation interaction bun galow-style home-cooked style of straight floor unit in the short and then gradually unfamiliar buildings, public spaces also change in the housing structure. It gradually expands the geographical scope. The struc ture has become relatively independent center space.

Its function is also accompanied to influence the thinking of the people-oriented exchanges gradually from a focus on easy to pluralism, in order to narrow the psychological distance between people.

3.1 To promote cultural integration field

This small community of society is the basis of the state and society, with different backgrounds heter ogeneity of people living in the same community, a simple geographic community cannot eliminate the barriers to build trust, and deep cultural identity can enable communities to create synergy. Community consensus is through mutual communication, the formation of public opinion through extensive inte gration subtly promotes cultural identity. Residents agreed to achieve the attitudes and social identity, public space community is an important community cultural integration field, prompting community plays an important function of cultural integration. In the field of public space within the community, different cultures direct collision sparks, do not agree to the identity process is unfolding. 3.2 To cultivate public awareness of community residents Community public space is everybody, the whole community is like a small community, and we are concerned at what is happening in this community, which requires public awareness within the community residents and public spirit. The community is to foster this sense of public space and platform spirit into the residents of this space to learn to adapt to a common platform, in the development of this platform gradually establish public awareness of the rules, they have a citizen of the cardinal virtues. Public awareness is a social responsibility of citizens, citizens enjoy the right to a public space must fit with the common sense of responsibility of the residents. Public space has always been a place that not only contains the physical facilities. From the rise of Western European cities, “public rights” and “public interest” in the social space are not just the substance on some public facilities, which also gave birth to a unique Western society the maintenance of public rights and public space and spirit of public goods. Britons thus forming a habit to be used to restrain people’s behavior. Thus, public awareness is accompanied by the growth of public space to grow. Therefore, cultivating community public awareness is an important guarantee to build community public space. 3.3 Analysis of overall regional public space Formation and shaping of public space are with its own not only borders, form, content and other factors related to land use patterns and various factors that under its urban context, usage patterns, construction mode, and regional development policies may be produced for public spaces entrenched influence. In the research area, the traditional concept of living, awareness of private land under development model will largely affect the whole region and even the formation and use of urban public space systems. Concept and residential land use patterns have led to the impact of traffic parking on public space. An area of land dividing the permeability of the formation of large-scale and accessibility is poor, then the walls and structures are to make room for a small unit of land fragmentation. People who travel activity for a long time will be formed under the guidance of the inherent psychological convenient route mode, so traffic will be concentrated in a few fixed public spaces, which cannot be evacuated. The small unit parking problem cannot be resolved internally, so people put into vehicles parked only a few public spaces, making the parking problem has seriously affected the quality of public space upgrade.

4 HISTORY AND IMPORTANCE OF URBAN

PUBLIC SPACES

4.1 Development of urban public space

The concept of urban public space first appeared in

Western society, it is the emergence and development in China. And it has experienced a long 100 years, traditional Chinese public space is public space different from the West. China’s traditional urban pub lic space is mainly in line type of street-based, and can provide more a lack of public activities, places, peo ple only hold festivals and other public events in the temple or temple vestibule. Meanwhile, convenient transportation and other places of public piers and the bridge formed an open market, but several types of public open spaces are not a public space western in the traditional sense. With the development of the times, the Western concept of public space in our country, our public spaces have a new location. From

1949 to 1987, the development of urban public space has gone through five stages, namely the recovery phase, development phase, turbulent phase, the lag phase and re-development phase.

4.2 The importance of urban public space

Urban public space is to show a city’s image and appearance of the window, its shape and architecture representing are different tastes and characteristics of the city. And its design brings a wealth of artistic appeal and beauty to enjoy, featuring space for people to create a landscape full of charm, intimacy and a sense of belonging, while adding charm of the city.

Here the author briefly describes the importance of urban public space. Human needs not only mate rial things, but also mental things. It is the subject of urban activities, urban humane issues throughout urban development, survival and development of the city play a decisive role. First, the urban public space is the image of a city, the urban public space design brings together the government people, serves the people thing, public awareness of love city often because of urban public space and enhanced. We can say that urban public space is that people read the city to experience an important place in the city. Second, the construction of urban public space is a strong guarantee to maintain the urban ecological environ ment. Now, some cities have blind pursuit of GDP, resulting in serious damage to the natural environment and pollution of the environment. For the friendly environment, the strategic principles of the ecological priority need to be to implement the construction of urban public space among builders need to focus on urban public space ecology and use the function to protect the building block of the original ecology of the natural environment, ecological optimization of space, to create a healthy city. Macross pure space is from the modern urban environment, historical and cultural background of the city, so that people living in them lost their basic sense of belonging and identity. To re-establish such a humanistic quality of urban public space, the designer must abandon empty large-scale design, pay attention to create a specific, unique place. They should have use of current design theory, analytic philosophy of urban public space design under the new situation; I found different types of venues in the city, organizing urban nodes and landmarks could be identified by the formation of the urban environment characteristics. In urban public space design, research will meet human needs, cultural, social and other natural join of urban space can be a good guide urban public space design. Urban public space is an important symbol of modern urban civilization, in the planning and design of public space to focus on the actual contact with people’s daily lives. They strengthen multi-purpose, multi-layered construction of a green open space system, to meet the different age, gender, hobbies and income of the residents of different needs at different times. For example, Beijing uses existing vacant city building site fitness that received good results, both for residents to provide compatibility strong venues and to improve the efficiency of the use of urban open space. In addition, from planning and design ways to phenomenology, it should be emphasizing the direct return to the real world and find a place to lose integrity and reality, and find the lost sense of belonging and identity, make people’s lives again with a very deep significance. 5 SUMMARY The design of urban space is both a science and behavior and a cultural behavior, which is planning a series of rights and interests of the local urban living environment of human life. And the behavior of the collection is closely related to human behavior activities, while human behavior is often activity by age, social habits, hobbies, different religions and even sex, and they form their own fields, which requires our serious concern and research activities on human behavior and the impact of space design requirements. Public spaces are not for people to visit, but for people to use, people become part of the public, they use the space left and it will lose its significance, becoming lost in space. When the design is for life, for the intrinsic human experience, when the designer has become an intrinsic and into the lives of local people, when the object is designed with a function and meaning, we will return to space before humanity.

[1] Li Xueping, Cao Chaolong. Production community social organization and community public space [J] urban issues, 2013,06: 85–89.

[2] Kong Xiangwei. Interactive community public life and public space [D]. Southeast University, 2005.

[3] Wang Chao. Public deletion of urban public space and its governance [D]. Shandong University, 2014.

[4] Ye Qinli. Based on the perspective of the new rural community of farmers Reconstruction public space

[D]. Southwestern University, 2014. [5] Wu Wei. Urban Public Space Public Policy Research and Related Design [D]. Chongqing University, 2012. [6] Chen Suqin. Construction urban community public space [J] Sichuan Institute of Technology (Social Sciences), 2009,05: 43–47. [7] Cao Haiying. community or society - new construction residential area of public space public nature [J], 2010,02: 61–65.

Development of university document resources construction for the background of information services

Dongwang Jin

Nanyang Institute of Technology, Henan, China

ABSTRACT: The arrival of the information age, especially development and popularization of digital and network, which fundamentally changes the development process of the library, the library’s status as literature resource center has been hit. As the core work of the library document resources construction in concepts, content structure and evaluation, etc. also undergone profound changes, a series of new problems have taken out, which we need to think and solve. In this passage, we discussed from the problem facing of Document

Resources Construction work in the digital environment and how to deal with these challenges.

KEYWORDS: Information services; Literature resources; Library

For the school’s teaching and research services is the purpose of the University Libraries, Literature

Resource Construction of University Library and

Discipline Construction should adapt. In recent years, as China’s rapid economic development, which promotes the development and reform of higher education, and international standards, cul tivate first-class talent has become the latest educa tional goals and ideas under the New Situation. At the same time, relevant departments of the State have higher requirement for University Library, and more specifically, as in recent years has been engaged in

Undergraduate Education Assessment, which has specific provisions for students to the university’s literature resources and average yearly books, uni versity libraries and thus a positive innovation and reform, resources Construction of University Library under attack, collections decline in the quality, col lection structure was in confusion. How to improve the quality of literature resource construction, while accelerating the pace of construction, has become an important issue which was currently facing by the university library.

1 OVERVIEW OF UNIVERSITY LIBRARY’S

DOCUMENT RESOURCE CONSTRUCTION

1.1 Meaning of document resource construction

The so-called Document Resource construction is based on service tasks on literature information, service object and Document Information needs of the entire community, system planning, selection, collection, organization and management literature resources, the establishment of the whole process of having a specific function of the collection system. Libraries and other intelligence agencies within a certain range of literatures should work on the literature of the accumulation of resources in a planned and rational distribution to meet and protect all the activities of social development and nation-building needs. Literature resources as a knowledge resource and intellectual resources, not naturally occurring, but need the people to accumulate and construct. Document Resource Construction is an important part of the literature of intelligence career, a branch of modern library science, information science, philology joint research. 1.2 Document resource construction situation of university library With the continuous deepening of reform and opening up and the gradual establishment of a socialist market economic system, especially the institutional reform of the education system and the deepening of college enrollment, college is in constant expansion, growth stage, enrollment is increasing, multi-campus appearance, which makes limited library resources of universities dwarf, contradictions stand out. Library Resource construction is an important task, it is necessary to have a positive interaction, it is necessary to understand the status of University Library Literature Resources Construction in order to better develop practical solutions to make the library literature resources value tends to be more utilized.

2 LONG-TERM PRESERVATION OF

DIGITAL RESOURCE

No matter how changes in technology and ideas to ensure that the resources can be permanently liter ature retrieval is still a major responsibility and the challenge of research libraries. The main challenge involves two aspects: First, the rapid development of digital technology, but it still lags far behind our expectations; the second is due to many providers of digital resources is a database management and maintenance, the library cannot directly control, and database providers typically not commit to perma nent preservation and long-term retrieval, which is a big threat to the preservation of library electronic resources. Although the library by means of licens ing agreements and other trying to solve this prob lem, but the means of protection the law is still very limited, in the past decade, research libraries, biggest failure is to let this situation continue to evolve, it must take steps to reverse this situation to restore the library to save the responsibility of academic research materials and depositary functions cultural heritage of mankind. In addition, in printed publica tions dominated era, the world is basically through publications deposit system ensures that libraries and other public institutions in the legal protection of stored documents down to complete the protec tion of human cultural heritage. The digital resources because of its production, publishing, management and use of printed resources are very different; it is difficult by means of a single deposit system to solve its long-term preservation. Since the 90s of the last century, many countries have been working on long term preservation of digital resources, but so far, this is still an unsolved problem.

The purpose of the Literature Resources

Construction is to provide the user needs to be able to meet their literature resources and support. Internet age, every university library must be evaluated from the height of network development, awareness of the museum’s literature resources, construction to con stantly update the traditional concept of literature resources, get rid of the traditional, self-satisfaction as the center of the museum style Document Resource

Construction mode. In a certain extent, to guarantee the systematic collection of literature resources and the promise of integrity, strengthening the division of labor between the various interlibrary in order to achieve a reasonable division of labor between inter library. What resources are co-ordinate arrangements by which library construction and implementation of a unified standard, in order to form a surface point spread wide and complementary literature resources system in a broad sense. 3 INFLUENCE OF NETWORK ENVIRONMENT FOR UNIVERSITY LIBRARY COLLECTIONS CONSTRUCTION A previous collection of object libraries is mainly books, journals and other paper documents, as well as the increasing maturity of the booming multimedia, hypermedia computer technology and network technology, electronic information resources, vector library collections, collections constitute have taken place profound changes. The development of library resources from a single type of print to audiovisual and electronic type and other multimedia coexists direction, magnetic media, optical media as the carrier of the new information media, which greatly increases the amount of information collected. In addition to possession of a clear carrier of information resources, but also through a network connect within the all of the information resources of region, nation, even the world, forming a logical sense of “collection”, which led to the construction of the collection from the traditional concept to the establishment of a limited physical entity, change to network information. In the collection construction, instead of trying to have all the information resources, but stressed that the use of network technology to quickly retrieve information resource around. 4 STRATEGIES OF THE COLLEGE OR UNIVERSITY LIBRARY CONSTRUCTION UNDER NETWORK ENVIRONMENT 4.1 Update the concept, adjust library construction To meet the requirements of the times, the university library should eliminate not fit “small”, “large” old conservative ideas which are not adopted for timely development, establish a modern library to adapt to innovative ideas, such as “ILL” to carry out sharing of resources to achieve network interconnection, aimed to serve the teaching and research. In determining the library’s collections focus on locating and continuously adjust the structure of different levels of books. Adjust information literature resources necessary to meet the higher education needs of scientific research, requiring a level of program reader knowledge, literature resources as the basis, prepare to configure the protection of teaching and research literature, and play good function of common property literature. 4.2 Establish impeccable coordination organization Strict organizational management and sound coordination organization is the protection of the university document information resources in healthy devel opment. At present, the biggest obstacle of the province’s universities Document Information

Resources Construction is fragmented management system, which makes the Document Information

Resources Sharing progress hindered. Therefore, as soon as possible to establish an authoritative lit erature resource construction leading coordination organization of universities in Henan, responsible for promotion, organizing and coordinating the work of college information resources construction in region, unified planning and management for universities

Literature Information Resource Sharing Working of the province’s colleges and universities, reasona ble layout, formulate overall development plan and implementation of the program’s to coordinate and integrate the region electronic version of the book type information resource; integrate and link the related resources website of various departments, to achieve interoperability; have organization and divi sion on various characteristic database construction.

Develop appropriate policies and regulations, clarify the responsibilities of various agencies, and regulate various aspects of the behavior, to ensure that the interests of the parties are not infringed. Meanwhile, a series of problems caused by sharing of information resources relevant to develop unified technical stand ards and specification operations. Through a series of rules and norms to successful promote regional university resources sharing work.

4.3 Limitations of the literature resource construction theory

Since it was born in the mid-1980s, document

Resource Construction has made a innovative con cepts for our intelligence community’s book, which soon gained widespread recognition of Library and

Information sector, and it is a rare phenomenon for Library and Information academic in our coun try. Proposal for construction of the theory of lit erature resources, not only enriched the collection development theory, but also promote the sharing pace for literature of the intelligence community resource books. However, a mere 10 years or so, the mid-1990s, some of our scholars raised the issue of Document Resources Construction would like develop as information resource construction. People wonder why literature resource construction which was generally accepted by theory and practice lose the vitality after more than 10 years later. The answer is: Human’s means and methods of recording and dis seminating knowledge, information had tremendous change, which has led to the Evolution of Document

Resources construction Theory. As responsibility of libraries to provide information services for society, if it needs to get information resources from online, it is necessary to convey information resources to online, even though no one was doing this provision, but there is no denying this is an indisputable fact. Therefore, if you want to use a virtual library collections, you must build a virtual collection, namely to enrich the collections of information resources for the object, develop various types of databases and do online services, which is the inevitable choice for libraries under the network environment, but also only to build virtual collections, libraries can truly share resources. Although due to the constraints of intellectual property, a lot of information resources cannot be in the form of fulltext database of Internet services, but advanced electronic document delivery means have overcome the technical obstacles for us to remotely obtain a document. Therefore, develop the collections information resources, build virtual collections are an important part of Networked Library Information Resources. And this important part wasn’t contained by the literature resources construction theory 4.4 Documental information and contradiction between price surge with the shortfall funds The level of library collections quality is key to the book purchases. Purposeful, planned purchase of books, which is important for improving the quality of collections and meet readers need. In the past, the quality of collections in large part to the collection as a measure of the number, because the form of a single document at that time, and because of the geographical and time constraints, the reader, have great difficulty to obtain information from afar, and therefore the construction of the museum’s literature resources are following the “small”, “large” principle. With the development of technology and the emergence of new disciplines, new knowledge and information are surging, there has also been the soaring price of books and material situation, so that the growth rate of funding the acquisition of library literature is far less than the amount of information and price increases rate, resulting in library collections “small”, the ideal pattern of “large” is completely broken. The impact of diversification of traditional paper documents support the procurement of the current literature, the literature is no longer a single carrier in the form of printed type. Tapes, floppy disks, CD-ROMs, audio-visual, microform, multimedia and web-based electronic document come after another, how to reasonably collect a variety of media literature, is the problem faced by documents procurement workers.

4.5 Higher education reform breaks the traditional library collection’s structure

In order to meet the social needs of personnel train ing, higher education continues to do the systematic reform. Especially in recent years, with the combina tion of Universities, who has adjusted and increased the new disciplines and majors, disciplines and cross-disciplinary universities emerge which will inevitably lead to changes in the library’s collection of books structure. Document Resources Construction of University how to keep pace with this change and development, to better serve the teaching, research and service, it is a problem we also need to think about.

5 SUMMARY

Document Resources Construction’s sustainability goal is to build a literature resources, security sys tem which can adapt disciplines, construction of uni versities and literature resource development needs.

The so-called safeguard academic literature refers to within a range of disciplines, applications, research and reference document collection are quite complete, which can fully support the teaching and research staff to have certain depth research, tutoring, fully meet all levels of the personnel needs for discipline documents of the whole guarantee. For research universities, sustainable effect evaluation should focus on build ing discipline inspection satisfy systematic literature resources systematic literature resources, continuity, timeliness and cutting-edge, continuity, timeliness and cutting-edge. Evaluation is a sustainable effect on University systems planning, selection, collection, organization and management literature resource, the establishment of the whole process of the evaluation

Chinese empty nesters’ health status and research progress of community care needs

Wei Liu

Party School of C. P. C. Jiangsu Committee, School of International Relations and Public Affairs, Fudan

University, China

Youguo Zhang

College of Political Science and Law, Capital Normal University, China

Yanwei Li

School of Public Administration, Erasmus University Rotterdam

ABSTRACT: Under the premise of basic care, empty nesters need more knowledge about health, especially health education knowledge of disease nursing, such as elder chronic disease prevention, control measures and self-care methods. Health education is the main way to prevent hypertension; we can encourage patients to actively participate in health maintenance to change unhealthy lifestyle. Strengthen health education, the elder learns about common symptoms and influencing factors of chronic diseases, which is very important for the treatment and prevention of chronic diseases. A chronic disease characterized by a long incubation period, longer duration, high medical costs, there is no effective clinical treatment, therefore, it needs more medical personnel to provide appropriate health education and prevention methods to reduce the psychological stress of patients, to reduce empty nesters’ worry, to carry out a full range of community health education, and continu ously improve the life quality of empty nesters in urban and rural areas.

KEYWORDS: Chinese empty-nesters; Health; Community care

1 HEALTH STATUS OF EMPTY NESTERS

Health is a prefect physical and mental condition, as well as good adaptability, not merely the condition absence of disease and debilitating. Health includes physical and psychological aspects. Physical health reflects the physical condition which is the most intu itive performance of health. Mental health is increas ingly important in the expression of health, anxiety and depression has become an important factor a�ecting health.

With increasing age, the physiology of empty nest ers declined, generally physical health status is poor.

Two weeks prevalence and prevalence of chronic diseases empty nesters are high, where chronic dis eases are the main factors affecting physical health, but also more than two weeks of illness are caused by chronic persistent, high blood pressure, heart disease, diabetes, arthritis, which cataracts are ranked five chronic types first. Due to age, physical dysfunction, chronic problems, empty nesters cooking, shopping and other activities of daily living decline, or even get up, dressing, bathing, washing, eating simple everyday life events, indoor activities were unable to take care of themselves. Empty nesters’ mental health can not be optimistic, anxiety and depression are common psychological problems with them, and depression are the main one, anxiety tends to turn into depression, and then form a mixture of the two. Lack of children’ care and spiritual comfort is the main reason trigger mental health problems of empty nesters. Pension requirements and community needs of empty nesters is a hot issue by research scholars, due to different cultural attitudes of east and west, the researchers focused. Western countries’ implementation of social pension has a sound pension and social welfare systems, which demand attention focused on health care and health research in the empty-nesters pension problem. The domestic traditional concept of family pension has a dominant position, the corresponding pension system and social welfare system is not yet perfect, pension model and sanitation needs are still important research topics.

2 FACTORS’ IMPACT ON CITY EMPTY

NESTERS’ MENTAL HEALTH OF ALL

THE DIFFERENT TYPES OF FAMILY

STRUCTURES

The comparison shows that gender di�erences in mental health status of women empty nesters signif icantly worse than men. Relatively low income, low level of education, delicate emotion than men, plus women live longer than men, so many single older women live alone, more alone and lonely, so women experience more psychological pressure than the big poor mental health. The significant age di�erence test suggests that depression, low self-esteem factor aver age younger age group was significantly greater than the age group, the sensitive anxiety factor younger age group was significantly greater than the age group and the older group, interpersonal problem factors old age group was significantly higher than the younger age groups, and the cognition problem was significantly the younger age group was smaller than age group and senior citizens groups. After the younger elder retired from work, they still cannot accept it, especially the sudden drop in social status; social values can not reflect which make the elder feel lost, easy to self-esteem, depression and anxiety sensitivity. With age increasing, insu�cient physi cal strength and inconvenient action would seriously a�ect the interpersonal activity of elder, cognitive problems occur more when physiological functions of the elder decline.

Population aging has become an important public issue and the major social issues worldwide. From the

Research of the older person’s physical and mental health, discussion about health service models for empty nesters is the critical and practical problems for community health workers to solve. There are study of elder community care aspects, but these only stay on health education, psychological care and life care, in fact, empty nesters relevant factors affecting phys ical and mental health is very complex, mental health and interpersonal relationships, family relationships, sports activities, income and housing satisfaction was positively correlated, empty nesters undergoing major life events and the risk of more number of diseases, poorer mental health, mental health and suffering from several diseases negatively correlated. Life events, coping style, personality traits and social sup port for the health of the elder may play an important role through the physical and mental intermediation.

Physical health has become an important problem for empty nesters social, especially related knowledge of chronic diseases’ propaganda and prevention is urgent universal coverage. For existing empty nesters’ physical health care needs, the government, society, empty nest families and empty nesters themselves have to face the problem and should fully and properly solve this problem, the government need to increase Medicare efforts to promote the system, while the sound aspects of elder welfare system, improve the comprehensive pension system; society should raise awareness of the social pension, and create social respect, care for the elder and pension of a good social atmosphere; empty nest families should always strengthen material and spiritual solace for elder, promote traditional filial piety, empty nesters themselves should strengthen self-psychological adjustment, and actively maintain contact with the community, enrich their daily lives, and actively cooperate with a variety of chronic disease prevention and treatment. In short, the community fully and actively cooperate together to solve critical issues of the empty-nesters, thereby improving the overall quality of life, and creating a “healthy and harmonious aging” society. 3 LIFE QUALITY OF EMPTY NESTERS AFFECTS THEIR MENTAL HEALTH Improve the life quality of empty nesters from all aspects. Recommendations are as follows: ① rescue mechanism established by the loving state and society, the accumulation of economic power to form social charity atmosphere, and only when physical level, cultural level and social level is guaranteed we can solve the problem well; ② safeguard the elder legitimate interests, whether from social discrimination, bullying old o�ense, or from acts refuse to support their children, can pass laws to make the protection of the legitimate rights and interests of the elder; ③ develop community-based care services to encourage laid-o� workers engaged in community care services. ④ carry out various forms of cultural and sports activities to enrich the cultural life of empty nesters. ⑤ attention of elder mental health education, help the elder learn positive psychological defenses, maintain mental balance. By correlation of empty nesters’ life quality and mental health, and that factors that affect quality of life and empty nesters showed a consistent level of mental health, improve life quality of empty nesters is an important part of the future of our aging. By many children care for their parents, government leaders, financial support, social assistance and other aspects of cooperation, establish and improve community health care system and improve the life quality of empty nesters and mental health. To make “empty nesters” longevity, happiness, improve the quality of life of the elder, to meet the psychological needs of children and the elder, these are social responsibility and obligations, so that the elder can act, can happy, can learn, can achieve which is truly “healthy aging” and “active aging” goal.

4 CURRENT DEVELOPMENT OF AGED

COMMUNITY CARE

Community care community care originated in the

1950s in Britain, mainly comprising community care and care by two aspects. UK government considers the main components of community care characteris tics should include: ① services required flexibility and sensitivity in order to respond to the di�erent needs of the elder and there is a demand for the service of their nurse. ② services provided should have room for the elder consumer to choose from. ③ Services provided should not be more than elder required, In case of the negative consequences of over-reliance on care. ④ services provided should focus on those who are most in need of the elder. Community care is the development direction for the aged, the role of government and community care to provide the necessary services to the elder have the ability to maintain a su�cient level of self-care, living under conditions of autonomy and independence.

Current Condition of the Needs of Community

Care.

Empty nesters are almost reluctant to leave their familiar place to the pension agency, so choose com munity care is their first consideration. From the young to the elder senior citizens, from empty-nest couples to live alone, from health to the infirm, the demand of empty nesters to take care more and more specialized requirements is increasingly high.

Development Status and Problems of Elder

Community Care, In recent years, community health services business attracted the attention of the country, and also introduced a number of community convenience service measures. In Tianjin, Dalian and other cities, community health service carried out earlier, the current community health service net work coverage up to 100 percent, every street has a community health service center. Some community health service center also operates nursing homes, focusing on elder health care services provided.

Many policies proposed, home care for the elder has brought convenience. While many of the city’s com munity health services have begun to take effect, but compared to developed countries, the level of com munity care development China is still in its infancy, some good service project has not gained popularity, the majority of the city’s elder community care, there are still many problems, such as, insufficient num ber of personnel engaged in community care; service content and form relatively simple; the specialist knowledge needed to enhance the training of community nurses; community-based home care needs to be further expanded. 5 SOLUTIONS OF EMPTY NESTER ISSUE 5.1 Touting the traditional Chinese filial piety, encouraging family pension In our country, in fact, the vast majority of older people still want their children to support themselves. “Children and grandchildren around the knee side,” This is the ideal of the elder to enjoy their grandchildren, so the children should live with their parents as much as possible, try to support parents responsible, it is our traditional virtues of the Chinese nation, and is the inherent and the promotion of Confucian culture. 5.2 Advocating spiritual support Some young people think that enough money to their parents or hire a nanny to take care of everything will be fine, in fact, older people really need is spiritual comfort. For those who work outside or other reasons and the parents do not live in the same city, children should regularly communicate with parents by telephone, SMS, etc., so that, although the children apart, you can make the elder feel they are not alone. In addition, children should have time “ come home and have a look “ to accompany their parents to chat, to help parents to do housework, so that parents feel the warmth and joy from the heart. 5.3 Improve the social pension system With the gradual increase of the nuclear family, family pension function gradually weakened, the social pension to replace the family pension has become an inevitable trend. At present, China’s total public pension institutions nearly 40,000, providing 1.1 million beds, the number of less than 1% of the elder population, which is obviously di�cult to meet the needs of empty nesters. Therefore, the government should vigorously set up nursing homes, nursing homes, elder apartments, nursing homes and other pension institutions, and encourage the establishment of private pension institutions to supple the number of state-owned pension agency, and improve the monopoly of the state-owned pension agency. Increasing private pension institutions will inevitably lead to competition, the results of the competition are the various pension institutions to improve the quality of service while reducing the charges, and the ultimate beneficiaries will be empty-nesters.

6 SUMMARY

Home care is the family pension as the core, community care service network perimeter, the pension system for the protection of the home care system. Home Care is a new way of pension, because of its low investment, wide coverage, flexible service, to ease the financial burden on the government and many other advantages, it has attracted people of all ages. Communities as the older “second space” can provide services for the elder anytime, including life care, housekeeping services, psychological coun seling, legal aid, health education, health care and other services. The community should establish the elder activity center, recreation to enrich the leisure life of the elder. Community health records should be established for each elder, in order to keep abreast of their health. In addition to preventing accidents the elder, but also establish an emergency call system, facilitate the elder feel free to contact with the com munity. Encourage volunteers in the community to implement time saving mode communities to estab lish volunteer teams to encourage laid-o� workers or students to become a volunteer with the “empty nester” old twinning help, housekeeping, chat, escort

Characteristics of Audit Committee and effectiveness of its internal control

Yuanxian Zhao & Xiangli Hu

Hubei University of Economics, Wuhan, Hubei, China

ABSTRACT: The Audit Committee is a very important part in the enterprise, its main role is on behalf of the Board of Directors to review, monitor and evaluate the company’s internal control. Playing the role of the audit committee can help prevent the economic crisis because of poor management, prevent the phenomenon of corporate embezzlement and accounting fraud. It is an important role in internal control. The thesis begins with an introduction to the Audit Committee, and analyzes the characteristics of the Audit Committee and effectiveness of internal controls.

KEYWORDS: Audit Committee; Characteristics of Audit Committee; Internal controls; Effectiveness

1 INTRODUCTION

With the rapid economic development, the market gradually transformed from a seller’s market into a buyer’s market. Facing more critical eyes of consum ers, and increasingly fierce competition, enterprises will be the risk of being out of the market in the slightest mistake of management.

Audit Committee, as one committee of the Board, has a significant impact on internal governance of the corporate in recent years. Audit committees can help enterprises to improve the internal management level as an important means of preventing the occurrence of adverse events.

2 OVERVIEW AND FEATURES OF THE AUDIT

COMMITTEE

The Audit Committee is initiated by the Board of issue, company and its members not including the

Executive Directors. Its role of the Audit Committee is not to be ignored as a group. The purpose of the audit committee of the company aimed at auditing the accounting, and financial report.

The main responsibilities of the Audit Committee has the following six: to supervise audit process, audit procedures of external auditors; to review and present suspicious points of the company’s financial information; to develop and implement policies of non- audit services; to oversee the company’s inter nal audit system and implementation process; to investigate the company internal control system and the transaction concerning large number of factors; act as messengers for the company’s internal and external audit. For an enterprise, the impact of Audit Committee cannot be ignored. The role it plays, are inseparable from the stability of the business management. The Audit Committee can ensure the reliability of the financial statements and financial information, in order to reduce the phenomenon of corporate fraud, has made an important contribution to guarantee the steady expansion of the company. Audit, as an economic supervision activity, mainly owned independence, authority, impartiality, professionalism, diligence of these five characteristics. The Audit Committee is responsible for the Board, so it has a strong independence and authority. Independence is an essential characteristic of the Audit Committee to oversee the business, which is very important in the selection of members, its members cannot be disturbed by various factors of the company in the process of the company’s supervision,. To make the process of supervision become more effective, the Audit Committee at the same time have a strong authority. To avoid complicit deceive phenomenon, the Audit Committee has very strong impartiality, which is to ensure fairness of the monitoring process. To improve the quality of financial statements, audit committee members must have a professional audit of financial and accounting information, ability, so professionalism is an important factor to complete supervision in high quality. During the audit process, the Audit Committee must understand a variety of economical matters relating to the company, so there will be frequent meetings of the phenomenon, thus, the Audit Committee also has diligent characteristics.

3 THE EFFECTIVENESS STANDARDS OF

THE INTERNAL CONTROL

Evaluation of the effectiveness of internal control based mainly in three ways: First, to measure in accordance with COSO report.; the second is to evaluate based on the five elements of “internal con trol evaluation guidelines “, namely, the risk control objectives refinement, a reasonable degree of control activities, control activities related to the operation, control activities related to the consistency and con tinuity of operation; the third is based on the level of disclosure of internal control self-assessment report and internal controls to measure the effectiveness of internal controls.

4 DIFFERENT POINTS OF VIEW OF

THE BOARD ABOUT THE AFFECT OF

INTERNAL CONTROLS VALIDITY

The Audit Committee plays an important role in bal ancing the relationship between the Board and the agent of the company. Due to the continued economic development, and improved productivity, the agency has become a common phenomenon. One provides operating assets, the one offers business intelligence, asset providers have residual claims, but do not par ticipate in enterprise management activities, intelli gence providers join business management, but do not have residual claim. The purpose of both is largely a conflict, the principal hope offered by the resource itself can bring greater benefits to him more, and the agent wants to have higher wages and more leisure time. And in the case of separation of management and ownership, the probability of some bad things happened is very high. In order to solve the contra diction between the two, as well as the interests of the principal is guaranteed, to supervise the management agent is an indispensable part. Establishment of the

Audit Committee, can constrain the behavior of the agent and the company’s business, help enterprises to improve operational efficiency, reduce agency costs.

From an economic point of view of contract theory, companies can be seen as an integrated body among factor of productions. The relationship between prin cipal and agent is maintained by the contract, and the improvement of contract needs to rely on the over sight and incentive mechanisms of the company, and the Audit Committee plays a key role in the improve ment of contract, oversight of internal control, and maintaining internal harmony from.

To analyze the quality of governance affect the validity of the audit committee of internal control.

Corporate governance refers to the coordination of all relations with the company’s interests. The role of the audit committee is to oversee the internal control and inspection is part of the management company, which will also affect the internal control of enterprises. The internal control theory is to discuss the impact of the Audit Committee on internal control. The Audit Committee is an independent body strong, its existence is not only with other companies and are away from organizations, and associated with each other, which guarantees the impartiality of the monitoring process. In China’s “basic norms of internal control” in the effectiveness of internal control, gives a comprehensive assessment standard that contains the internal structure of the situation, risk assessment, risk control, information and communication, the five elements of internal control. 5 THE BOARD’S ROLE IN THE INTERNAL CONTROL The role of Internal Control Audit Committee is to analyze the following four main factors. First, internal corporate factors, internal factors related to a corporate sense of self-control staff. It is a basic factor to affect the staff’s behavior self-restraint and process of self behavioral constraints. This is like the factors affecting health care for employees, when the health factor cannot reach the standard, the employees will complain. In the company’s internal environment, the corporate governance structure is the most critical factor for the environmental control is, is also the most basic one. The Board of Audit impact on risk assessments. In the course of business, due to a variety of factors in the external environment, companies may have an adverse effect, this phenomenon is inevitable. So the ability to undertake the risk of identification, assessment, development of control measures and assess is indispensable for the enterprise. In the process of risk assessment, companies will be involved in all aspects, and the Audit Committee of the Board’s committees, plays one of its crucial roles in the risk assessment. Responsibilities of the Audit Committee are to conduct internal audits and oversight of financial information. Therefore, the Audit Committee improves the effectiveness of internal controls by the realization of the purpose of oversight of the risk assessment. To reduce the risk, companies must have a very comprehensive information and communication mechanism, which helps companies to absorb and transfer information. Improve information communication mechanism ensures fast and accurate information at all management levels of enterprises, the functional departments for delivery and feedback. In this communication system, communication and feedback on the effectiveness of the Audit Committee is as a factor to ensure the effectiveness of internal control, a member meeting of the Audit Committee, the Board of Directors participating in the meeting, as well as the annual review of the work of information and communication are inseparable feedback.

Internal Oversight is the most critical one of the five elements of internal control. Establishing inter nal control oversight mechanisms can help audit institutions and internal control clear their responsi bilities and help standardize the monitoring program.

Shareholders will be granted the right to pay to the

Board of Directors so that it has the right to master the business decision-making enterprises, and is respon sible for internal monitoring. The Audit Committee is responsible for a way to perform their duties through the development of work rules, monitoring the com pany’s internal management, the Audit Committee meeting held on schedule, coordination of internal control. The implementation of these activities con tributes to the internal organization and external testing and improves the effectiveness of institutions to assess risk and to help companies develop to make up for gaps in the internal control program. Therefore, strengthening internal controls of the audit commit tee can help companies improve the effectiveness of internal controls.

6 RECOMMENDS TO IMPROVE THE

EFFECTIVENESS OF INTERNAL

CONTROL FOR THE BOARD

6.1 The committee needs to ensure the independence and strengthening

The independence of the audit committee is an important part to ensure effective monitoring process.

In order to ensure the independence of the audit com mittee, whose members are not acceptable offering of security consulting fees and other remuneration, nor hold any position in any offering of securities of the company’s subsidiaries.

The independence of the audit committee is very important, in order to ensure and enhance the inde pendence of the audit committee, it should enhance the independence of the board, and the establishment of an independent board of directors to precede repu tation evaluation mechanism.

Prevent damaging independence of the Audit

Committee by manipulating the process by hiring directors for the major shareholders. Independent directors should be used to accumulate voting optional; this approach helps to improve the fairness of election of Directors, so that minority shareholders have the opportunity to choose the independent direc tors of their choice. And in the hiring process, the major shareholders should vote for their own point of those who carry out the process referred to evade, avoid large shareholders stymied. We should estab lish an independent director’s reputation assessment bodies, strengthen the constraints of director’s acts to avoid collusion between independent directors and managers, making it fairer and more independent when directors are fulfilling their obligations. 6.2 Ensure and enhance the professionalism of the Audit Committee The Audit Committee of the Board, as directly responsible for the organization, its main task is to communicate with the internal auditors to review the financial reports of internal control and supervision. The work to be completed, the audit committee members need to have a high financial and accounting practice. It’s the only way to detect and control the financial risk of the enterprise, and enterprise management level as well as an evaluation of internal control policies. In order to ensure and improve the professionalism of the characteristics of the audit committee, companies can clearly indicate their job qualifications at the time hiring staff of the audit committee,. Audit Committee members must have extensive qualifications and professional accounting knowledge and work experience. To ensure the professional members of the Audit Committee, the enterprise shall have timing arrangements for professional training for members of the Committee. In the process of appointment to the Audit Committee, the enterprise should limit internal financial employee to take this position, as it is a vital measure to ensure the oversee effectiveness of the Audit Committee. 6.3 To ensure the implementation of the regulations of the Audit Committee Scale size, complexity within the enterprise, corporate risk profile are concerned with the task of the Audit Committee, this way, the formulation of the Audit Committee charter becomes necessary, its work rules include four parts, namely, requirements of members, duties, decision-making process and procedure. Members requested that mainly refers to study the establishment of mechanisms for the election of members of the Audit Committee appointed, the size, office requirements and the implementation of the induction date. The duties refers to, have a clearly definition of financial reporting, internal and external audit, internal control responsibilities. The decision-making process refers that the Audit Committee communicates with the auditor, report to the board of Directors. Rules of procedure refer to develop a date, the times, the audit committee meetings held, and the provisions of its resolution are to convene the conditions and procedures.

6.4 The Audit Committee established information disclosure mechanism

In order to ensure the transparency of the audit com mittee, it is not as blackmail others handle, it should establish an audit committee information disclosure mechanism. Requirements for audit committee mem bers will own qualifications, ability, work experience, number of shares and payment of all released. The

Audit Committee shall disclose the financial state ments and internal control reviews of each of its members.

7 CONCLUSIONS

The Audit Committee is very important for an enter prise to maintain its principal and agent relation ship, improve enterprise management, enterprise risk assessment and control. To order to have a more robust development, it is an indispensable part of the enterprises to concern about the development of Region culture resources—the motivation that drives people to create animated cartoon

Hongxian Liu

Wuhan Textile University School of Media and Communication, Wuhan, Hubei, China

ABSTRACT: The importance of the original artistic animation was discussed from the protection of region cultural resources and the exploiture plan of the cultural resources in Hubei Province

KEYWORDS: Region culture motive the original artistic animation

1 INTRODUCTION OF ANIMATION

INDUSTRY

Rely on human intellect and inspiration and get help from the development and application of intellectual property rights and the processing of the cultural resources have brought animation industry with prod ucts with high value attached. The animation industry has a number of special features of which perhaps the most important are knowledge-intensive and knowl edge-based industry and the newly-emerged industry of producing high value products. The development of animation industry is also of great importance to promote culture competitive ability and induce the construction change of industry.

2 THE IMPORTANCE OF THE DEVELOPMENT

OF ANIMATION INDUSTRY

First of all, we suffer from an acute shortage of spe cialized creative personnel and the original artistic works. The lack of ideas is the biggest problem of product development. A creative work is the core of the industrial chain. But the problem facing us is that the lack of nationality and the distinct characteristics.

We need to promote the degree of industrial concen tration. We were behind the standards in quality, effi ciency, technology and high added value.

Secondly, the integral industrial chain has not been formed yet. A creative work is the core of the indus trial chain. This strategy seeks to extend the industrial chain by the cooperation and exploitation, assignment of copyright and patent, and to develop and extend the peripheral industry of the cartoon. In other words, we must act in compliance with the law of evolution in the Hubei animation industry. The value industrial chain has several subdivisions: natural resources, cre ative work, manufacture, package, the movement of the cargo and publicly display. At least two important features of the chain must be taken into account. On the one hand, vertical industrial chain stretching involves industrial chain segmentation, development and the policy of opening, on the other hand, horizontal industrial chain stretching involves division of labor, interdisciplinary collaboration, process of creating value. All these will foster and strengthen close cooperation and value added network. The state has issued a decision on strategic planning and the development strategy in promoting the development of construction. This file name is Several Opinions on Ministry of culture give support to the animation industry. Under the background of internationalization, we must enhance the soft strength of culture, advance Chinese traditional culture, break away from traditional industry ideology. And we should compel us all to see the world through new eyes and find a new niche for ourselves. The research needs to be unfolded mainly on analysis the customers, the expression language, techniques, economic mechanism and cultural forms. Pay close attention to encourage enterprises to cross industries, to cross regions to look for cooperation partners. And discusses the differences between Chinese and foreign enterprises. As well as stressing the importance of passing on our culture to the younger generations. China can only start from its own reality and explore a road of advance suited to us. With a good atmosphere, the industry can move towards the road of benign development. The saying of “regional culture” means that in the process of practice, enormous spiritual and material wealth were created by the people in a certain area during the social development of thousands of years. The characteristic was embodied in the spread and development of geography, history and in a certain area. The cultural resource could affect the process of originality, project management, the process of developing and designing cultural goods.

It is a critical issue which restricts the development of New Content Industry in China. Region Culture has both decorative and practical value, folkloric and formularized characteristic, a characteristic of spontaneity and has the requirement of passing on our culture to the younger generations. The influence on the formal language systems in different time and space is not alike due to geographical and dimensional conditions. And it will appear in an endless variety of shapes.

3 ABOUT CULTURE RESOURCES

Hubei is the birthplace of Chu Culture and the Culture of the Three Kingdoms. The role of cultural industry to drive consumption and environment-friendly, pro ductive forces, to increase soft power and the core competitive strength should be given full play. It is an urgent task to vigorously develop an economy with distinctive local characteristics by making full use of the abundant local cultural resources and speed up the rising of the central regions so as to turn our rich natural cultural resources into product and eco nomic advantages. Just under this background, this paper presents a solution to the problem. However, it is still controversial as how to define the category and the present condition of the Chu Culture and the

Culture of the Three Kingdoms. Accordingly, this article proved development strategies. Hubei Cultural

Industry will be better developed on the basis, that is, on the basis of present empirical investigation and systematical analysis of the existing problems.

According to the policy of “the 12th five-year-plan scheme of adjusting the patterns of economic devel opment of different industries” and against the back drop of building up the development strategies of cul tural-centered and a vigorous development of cultural and creative industries as well as digital media and animation, we shall develop an overall plan for pro moting the games business, developing the cultural industry and boosting industrial upgrade.

Consequently, the application of the distinctive region’s culture has recently played a key role in pro moting animation creative industries. Stressing the importance of passing on our culture to the younger generations and the realities of contemporary soci ety are the most available and most effective form of ongoing positive reinforcement of the production process. Injecting regional culture into animation production would play an important part in helping us to make animation with Chinese characteristics.

On the one hand, it may help to restore and protect the traditional and cultural features. They make use of cultural resources recur throughout much of many fine works, such us The legend of Nezha, Lotus Light, the Adventures of little carp, Qins Moon and Water culture one five romance pearl water transfer etc. Many outstanding works had borrowed their stories from traditional region culture and various forms of artistic expression. On the other hand, it may help to develop branding strategies, and find the difference in regional style and subject matter between domestic industry and foreign industry. 4 THE STRONG IMPACT OF CHINESE CULTURE The profoundness of the Chinese culture and its everlasting charm, will be organized to constitute a unique opportunity where the Chu Culture promised Chu Pattern Design. It produces a strong impact to the eyes and it’s an artistic idiom contains romantic, warm, lively and free style. The constituent factor is curved. It would create a lively and swirling dynamic atmosphere. The basic characteristics and shapes of Chu Culture is geometric and compound modeling. Repetition is the main kinds of formation. For the purpose of setting up the harmonious atmosphere, it follows the law of order and make use of warm color and adjacent colors to get the basic color scheme. It makes use of black and red color to represent its main features. The subject matter, modeling, color and formation have become a system of visual symbol. The use of graphical resource is well worth looking into. This was of importance for the further research of building up a native brand idea, enriching designing language and transmission of Chu Cultural. We have to start with the survey and analysis of the domestic and international Animation Industry and its development history. And we could integrate the importance of the key driver of the growth of Hubei Animation Industry, market research, academic exchanges and the great breakthrough from theory into the practice, for the purpose of producing a sustainable development system to cultivate the core competency of creative industries in Hubei. 5 THE MEASURES PEOPLE SHOULD TAKE Geographically, Hubei is located in the Jing-Chu cultural centers. On the background of the new era of 21st century, the development of Hubei culture and economic sociology needs to concentrate study of the modern value of Jing-Chu cultural. The modern value of Jin-Chu culture is that the rich and colorful culture resources and the advanced culture spirit. These are the vital cultural essence of Jin-Chu culture. It possesses the valuable modern value. Simultaneously, it furnished subjects and traditional culture’s source for animation production. We could take advantage of the perfect specialized talented person market system, the sound intellectual property rights system, the advanced technology, the abundant funding and the key driving motivation to improve the competitive strength of creative industries in Hubei.

We could apply the restructured region culture resources to animated cartoon creation. A great deal of those works had been adapted from the region culture resources. An adaptation, innovation and recurrence of the prototype is important.

For the purpose of getting the approval of the mainstream society, we should combine the new fashion environment closely, because, no one wants to design out of an animation of trends.

The original artistic animation is the core competencies of Animation. In order to create conditions for improving the development environment and carry down and develop the excellent region culture, continuous efforts to strengthen the protection of intellectual property rights need to be regarded.

6 CONCLUSIONS

The dominant position of the Hubei cultural resources is the cultural resources. We should treat the

On the inheritance of ancient architecture decoration in the residential construction of urbanization

Shulan Wang & Pinfeng Tan

Hebei University of Technology, Tianjin City, China

Lan Li

Cangzhou Normal University, Cangzhou, Hebei, China

ABSTRACT: Chinese traditional architectural paintings are more drawn to the interior and exterior painting walls, canopies, beams, Fang, stigma, brackets and interior ceilings, caisson, the architectural art of building components were processed and formed their rich colors, making the Chinese ancient architecture even more magnificent. It has two kinds of practical effects, one is to decorate building, and the second is to protect the individual masonry wood components and parts them from wind and rain erosion. In other words, functional and aesthetic painting is set in one. Most Chinese ancient buildings are wooden structures, for aesthetics and durability wooden structural parts, are generally required to cover color to paint the cover, so the Chinese ancient buildings, whether internal walls, ceiling, doors, windows, roofs, etc. are painted with colors, sculpturing patterns and patterns to enhance the expressive power of art architecture, it can be said that the ancient Chinese architecture buildings are colorized architecture. From afar to go, the overall color of ancient Chinese archi tecture makes people’s hearts worship must be generated by the primary function of psychological respected.

Ancient architectural decoration can be summarized into three categories: gold, color ornaments and carvings, color ornaments which include brush color decoration ornaments, painting and murals are as one of the three categories, the color was given such a high mission in the world, yet there are no countries can be compared with it, the reason is not just the appearance of color can achieve architectural beauty, but also to show people’s color sustenance and beliefs in a certain extent. The ancient architectural sculpture was created by people in the production practice activities, and it is a product of the interaction between material and spiritual civilization and has a very high social value and artistic value. It carries historical and cultural information, expresses the people’s spiritual and cultural pursuits and beliefs and through different art forms, reflects the beauty of differ ent materials, expresses a different artistic content. KEYWORDS: Ancient architecture; Decoration; Urbanization; Inheritance

In the nature, we can often see tall pine trees, bamboo swaying in the wind, shelter belts lining on the both sides of the road, and the vertical state images that look like a waterfall pouring down. When we see these vertical natural objects, our minds suddenly open heartily, feeling like a natural waterfall because of these vertical lines that engender tension and seri ous. In addition, when the sun rises or dusk falls down, or the sun shines, we see the distant skyline and the endless horizon, and the delightful, quiet, open minded, peaceful and beautiful emotions come up.

This delightful psychological feeling is the grace that nature gives to us. The revelation comes from the phe nomenon of human nature is applied to the pattern.

Using a straight line parallel to the cross ornamen tation graphic composition had already appeared in the Neolithic Yangshao painted pottery in the Yellow

River Basin over. Graphic stripe fabric ornamenta tion has verifiable physically, that is Hubei Jiangling Masan One Warring States Chu Tomb unearthed diamond brocade ornamentation. 1 THE MAIN MATERIAL OF AN ANCIENT BUILDINGS China is rich in forest resources along the Yangtze River basin, wood became the main material of the building. Ancestors in a long-term constructing process slowly mastered the wood processing skills, gradually forming a wooden skeleton of a large roof architectural style and then the wooden structure has become the main carrier of ancient Chinese architecture. In the wood components of this is to protect the paint timber, wood components under the stone foundation is to add moisture barrier, for its functional needs, it even evolved into painting and sculpture. Ryoka pane is to facilitate paste paper, but it evolved into hundreds of patterns. Doornail is just a component, the ancient version of the doors, wood with nails to connect, and then adding the cap on the nails to prevent rain erosion, but later the door was transformed, no longer need door-nail, but as a door-nail decoration it is preserved. Tongwa temple architecture used, in order to avoid the infiltration of rainwater permeating into the nail holes along the corrosion beneath the wooden structure, and it will be put up a cap on the head of the nail, which evolved into a variety of small mammals after processing. In the Han dynasty, semi Vatan evolved into circle Vatan, and its function is to improve the water-watt head beam effect, Vatan has become an ornament again.

Most Vatan has no fancy colors, all are gray and rough texture, but between the large white walls and black tiles, on the head of the neat rafters hundreds of

Vatan ties into a string of gray chain beads and fulls of highly decorative.

Accordance with the provisions of the Qing

Dynasty, residential buildings, monasteries, aristo cratic mansion decorative painting and other build ings can not be decorated as the court building, so folk practices came up. Its carvers are mostly folk crafts men, the choice of subject matter is more freedom, but all expressing the meaning of auspiciousness, architectural thus entrusted with people’s prayer and desire. Such as Yunnan Jianshui residential painting is rich in local characteristics, not by official practice, and painted freely by local craftsmen. Another exam ple is the painting architectural Kunming Xishan

Huating Temple, it is drawn by local artisans, which main colors are red, white, blue, green, yellow, etc., not only focus on the contrast of colors, but also pays attention to the color of the same hue interspersed use. While it still retains three parts: Fang heart, algae head, hoop the first, but the content inside is painted with a Buddhist sense of flying, lotus patterns, etc., it is consistent with its charm. In this respect, folk art also nourishes the architectural painting.

From central to local, a new round of “Urbanization

Construction” is going forward, and urbanization will be the engine of China over the next decade. Some local large-scale “city building movements”, maybe to protect traditional culture, to build local character istic towns at the very beginning, but they may ignore whether such behavior is sustainable, green.

China has a long history and culture, there are many local characteristics of small towns, ancient architecture, local style, cultural heritage, the core of the city is our residents, we must reflect the historical style, and blend into the unique imprint and inherit the historical and cultural heritage in the process of protection of traditional Chinese culture, rather than building an empty shell, copying some ancient build ing, thus leaving behind lots of quitter “unfinished” cities. Europe attaches great importance to the historical traditions and the protection of cultural heritage in the process of urbanization, Paris, London, Rome and other world cities, although having different development models, they generally maintained a historical style, many European obscure towns, also showing a colorful history and cultural heritage. In the construction of China’s urbanization, we should tap local specialties, such as Shandong Zaozhuang Taierzhuang city tour, you can strongly reflect Taierzhuang city canal culture, not only protect the ancient city of culture, but also develop the local economy, it is a good thing to serve multiple purposes. Another example is the old city “narrow alley”, it is the legacy of Chengdu, the larger scale of the Qing Dynasty of ancient streets, which transformed into a lot of modern, fashion elements of life. I hope in the urbanization construction, more traditional and modern will combine with each other to create rich local characteristic towns, taking a sustainable development path of urban green. 2 MAINTENANCE OF ANCIENT BUILDINGS For a long time, people are lack of sufficient attention the heritage buildings of the old town and its regular maintenance, in the development process of the city, the immovable cultural relics and historical and cultural district of protection are not optimistic. However, it is precisely the kind of heritage and cultural characteristics of each city. Urban people actually do not want to let these relics damaged and disappeared, but also they want to repair all of the damaged cultural relics very much, but the current social-economic capacity makes it impossible. Many ancient houses face to be demolished because of the new urbanization. Community of ancient historical and cultural blocks is surrounded by a modern community, someday it might not exist. So ensuring the city’s historical context inheritance is the key. At the same time we have to wake up the awareness of the whole society to protect our heritage. Because the existing cultural relics in the immovable city are mostly downtown home use, if the current user has the ability of protecting, managing and using the cultural relics, to maintaining its existing use is a better choice. To ease the contradiction between the urban construction and the protection of cultural relics, we formulated the “organic shed reform” program, repairing many historic old houses and then let the cultural departments use it. They will incorporate the heritage into large shanty town renovation plan, and the restored immovable cultural relics continue to serve for the city economic and social life, with its new features that given a continuation of the use of relics. This practice has been noticed in improving the protection of cultural relics of ancient buildings and other immovable status.

Urbanization is a way we must go, but we can lose our own culture in the process of urbanization.

Ancient architecture is our precious cultural heritage, in the process of urbanization, the government should better co-ordinate town planning, not only to pro tect the ancient dwellings monomers and the ancient buildings, but also to improve the whole societies’ human environment and the ecological environment, and some can also be re-planned and constructed into new attractions, and to be further exploited. In short, urbanization and retaining our cultural traditions are not opposite, which purpose is the same.

3 ANCIENT ARCHITECTURAL DECORATION

USED IN MODERN PACKAGING DESIGN

Chinese ancient buildings’ decoration using in mod ern packaging design combines graphic design with three-dimensional design is a commonly used expres sion in modern packaging design. The expression forms of ancient architectural elements in a modern packaging design are the same.

Graphic design, such as tea box, moon cake boxes, wine packaging, etc., when in their packaging design, the first is to be able to reveal the inner shine through packaging or packaged goods, to be clear at a glance.

While the existing historic ancient architecture is in a strict structure, rational design and has strong cultural connotations. If the packages of these products can be rightly patterned in ancient architectural elements, they not only reflect its rich cultural heritage, but also better reflect the quality of their products. At the same time it is playing a promotional merchandised effect.

Secondly, we should grasp good composition skills.

Chinese ancient architectural decoration is a combi nation of simplicity and luxury, such as the residential type buildings emphasis on simple, historical and cul tural; the palace is mainly based on luxury, wealth and solemn; the pursuit of private garden class architec ture is elegant, quiet and comfortable. While framing techniques we should make reasonable use of con trast. Such as the thickness of the contrasting compo sition of graphics, distance contrast, density contrast, static and dynamic contrast and so on. Meanwhile, a package design must have an innovative design, dis tinctive artistic personality and ethnic style, and the elements of ancient Chinese architecture packaging design just meet this characteristic.

Three-dimensional design: packaging design mostly refers to the shape of the packaging container, which includes square, round, the width and length and the curvature changes of a container shaped must comply with the principles of “scientific, strong, beautiful, economy”. How to make three-dimensional modeling achieve artistic beauty, and product packaging achieve harmony and unity, are the thrust of the package design. The Chinese ancient building itself is three-dimensional, the interior space of the structure of this kind as a packaging container itself can reflect three-dimensional. Chinese ancient buildings are decorated with a sense of rhythm and order, so that people feel soft and elegant after seeing them, and showing a rhythm. The packaging of moon cake box, tea, wine and so on, in order to reflect the rhythm can be achieved by refining from architectural decoration in one part, so that the shape of the performance can be both smooth and stretchy. 4 TO ESTABLISHING THE CONCEPT OF THE PROTECTION OF ANCIENT BUILDINGS IN THE TOWN DEVELOPMENT PLAN When making the development of town planning, we should fully research, locating prospects of development of small towns and in what industry to drive sustainable development in the small towns can not make onrush development as our goal. The plan as an integrated system is a global, strategic road-map, covering all areas of life. Therefore, we should blend the thought of protecting ancient buildings into urban plans, and establish the ideas of “the resident is not the burden of urban development, but the wealth, capital and power of the urban development,”. Through the guidance of the government, we integrate resources and improve quality, while continuing to accelerate the process of urbanization, and we should do a really good job in the protection and use of residential areas. 4.1 Implementing the strategies of protecting the old towns and the development of new towns In the constructions of old towns, it will disrupt the precious traditional cultural heritage the our ancestors left to us, in order to avoid the destruction of ancient buildings in the process of urbanization, the planning should take the ideas of keeping away the old town and opening up the new district building. We should avoid tearing down historic Old Town to build a modern town, and also avoid the phenomenon the Metro prosperity, while the historical and cultural value of the old fading down. Use the new development in the development of industry to provide financial assistance to the maintenance of the old City, and use the development of tourism in old ancient town to promote new investment, so that protection and construction is interfering with each other. Such as the county Hibiscus Town is strengthening Streets (wood house) protection, while at the same speeding up the construction of the new district, the old new investment provides the conditions for tourism and the new development provides financial support for the protection of old. It not only effectively protects the old ancient buildings, but also greatly facilitates the process of urbanization.

4.2 Rationally implementing the tourism resources development and effectively protecting the ancient buildings, realizing the replacement of resources

We should fully develop the tourism resources of the featured ancient buildings, and use tourism to drive new urbanization construction, and then realizing the replacement of tourism resources and private capi tal. The rational, scientific development of the tour ism value of the ancient architecture can foster the development of other related industries in the region.

Realize the cycle of the replacement of tourism resources of the ancient architecture to the private capital and the use of private capital to protect the virtuous maintenance of ancient buildings, so that we can realize the real effective protection and sustaina ble use of the residents.

Urbanization process is a sign of modern civilization, and the inevitable trend of historical development, in today’s rapid development of urbanization, our town is changing everyday, therefore, the protection of the national characteris tics of ancient buildings requires diversified in order to adapt to the new requirements of the times and changes. In the urbanization construction, we should strengthen the protection of ancient buildings, to pro tect the achievements of ancient architecture develop ment of tourism, and then promoting the urbanization.

5 SUMMARY

With the increasing degree of China’s opening up, many of the people and foreigners have a strong interest in Chinese traditional culture. China’s ancient

The manifestation of texture art in the creative design of fashion fabrics

Wei Zhong & Meiting Yan

Wuhan Textile University School of Fashion Design, Wuhan, Hubei, China

ABSTRACT: This paper presents a discussion of the characters and design patterns of the digital texture design in fashion fabrics. It starts with the characters of fabric texture design, taking digital printing technology as a detailed example, and raises a possible design route and pattern of the innovative design of fashion fabrics under digital technology.

KEYWORDS: Texture, Manifestation, Design Pattern

Fabric Texture has gradually shown its importance as a main carrier of visual art in fashion design. And the creative design of fashion fabric has become a major direction for fashion designers of today to run their innovative ideas and creative thoughts. In recent years, the technique of digital printing has been widely applied in the fashion fabric region due to its fast-reaction and environmental protection qualities.

Apart from a high-tech and artistic production man ner, it also makes printing more precise and provides with abundant colors and a large range of color gamut for designing purposes. Together with its easy-to-use character and contamination free quality, digital printing is now widely used in the manifestations of texture art in fashion fabric design.

1 TEXTURES AND THEIR MANIFESTATION

Texture refers to the outer appearance of an objec tively existing matter. It represents the quality of a certain material and reflects on its properties. More simply, texture is the perceived surface quality of a certain material and its outer shape. It shows the detailed beauty of the whole artwork. Texture is of the same importance with planes, color and three- dimensional composition in the creation of visual art. The manifestation of texture art has an aggregate characteristic. It’s usually formed by the combina tion or recombination of single elements, such as the repeated points, lines or planes, as to create rich visual and tactile effects. To designers, all kinds of natural textures can be used as the design materials or made into a design object. They make it by using various art techniques and present them in a graphic way. In the fashion area, texture is used as an element in the tex tile fabric printing designs. So for fashion designers, it is quite essential to have a thorough knowledge of the structures and contents of texture as to grasp the laws of creating textures in their pattern designs, and thus making outstanding artworks. Textures are quite commonly seen in art designs and paintings while in fabric designs, there are visual textures and tactile textures. Textures are usually formed by the recombination of the basic elements: points, lines and planes. By handcraft or with technology, these elements are made to present new structures, expressing the ideas of the designer and arousing people’s appreciation of beauty in both visual and tactile ways. In the art design realm, texture, as a significant element, is often manifested in an abstract way while in the fabric design realm fabric textures are created by changing its structure from two- dimensional to three-dimensional or by deconstruction and reorganization. The most commonly used techniques for creating fabric textiles are as follows: 1.1 Spraying In this technique, the textile dyes should first be mixed with particular solvent at a certain percentage to get the appropriate concentration. Then apply this mixture liquid on the fabrics by spraying, sprinkling, pouring or splashing as to create natural textures modeling of the ecological nature of the characters. The patterns of texture may vary when using different tools, spraying in different ways or at different angles. Temperature, time, spraying force, concentration of the solution are all factors to form different textures, and thus the result is varied. 1.2 Stain dyeing In this technique, dyestuff will be dubbed into dye liquor. Then take some strong absorbent paper and dip partially or overall in the liquid as to create stains, render or other effects. The dipped paper can be wholly or partly applied to obtain a variety of spectac ular visual effects. This technique may give people an impression of a rich yet unvarnished natural beauty.

1.3 Painting

It’s a basic skill for pattern designers to proficiently use the painting tools in hand drawing, and it’s also a basic requirement for them to acquire a variety of painting techniques as to create various textures.

Thick or thin, soft or rough, conservative or aggres sive, the brushwork of a skilled artist can result in brilliant effects. Painting here as a method in the creation of textures is more concerned with Chinese

Painting and Chinese Gongbi Painting techniques, such as rendering, ink and wash or brushing. By using these techniques, fabrics can be dyed layer by layer to get the color from deep to light, or made into subtle, transparent or moonlight effects.

1.4 Rubbing

It’s a traditional painting technique mostly seen in

Chinese painting, watercolor painting, seal engraving and woodblock. Rubbing is often used as to create textures that are unvarnished, rugged, natural or vivid, which stands for the original beauty of the nature.

This is very meaningful to make a characterized pat terns. It’s also the most often used technique in the printing pattern designs.

1.5 Cut and paste

It is a technique that can be used as to see the whole effect of a certain fabric by cutting and pasting the fabric pieces. We can get abundant texture patterns from the techniques stated above. And with this method, we make, new textures by simply cutting and pasting the existing texture patterns according to their picture structures. Taking the useful parts of patterned pictures or materials with textures, and then decom pose or combine them to achieve wonderful effects.

1.6 Resist dyeing

Resist dyeing (resist-dyeing) is a term for a number of traditional methods of dyeing textiles with patterns.

Methods are used to “resist” or prevent the dye from reaching all the cloths, thereby creating a pattern and ground. Resist dyeing in painting is carried out with oil-based paints such as oil pastels, crayons, oil markers, etc. and water-based paints like watercolor.

As water and oil do not mutually melt, these two kinds of colors can automatically separate themselves when used together, and thus, resulting in wondrous or abstract textures. In design of fabric textures, this character can be used the same way. We take powdery chemicals or wax as the resist agent for preventing dyeing, and then paint on the fabric with the chemical in the shape of designing textures. Then wait until the paper gets dry and paint undissolved dark colors on the whole paper. When all of these materials get dry, put the paper on running water to wash away the chemical agent preventing dyeing. Then the textures previously covered by the resist agent will show out. It can also be achieved by painting resist agent according to the patterns, then we get white or lightcolored pattern in these parts. 1.7 Crumpling It can be done by first taking a piece of drawing paper (or other paper materials that are soft and absorbent) and draw the basic layer with pencil and watercolor, then unfold it and paint on its surface with thicker pigment. It can also be achieved by using paints, spraying or rubbing techniques as to make special texture effects. This method is a combination of paper folding and painting. It creates effects that are wonderful and of multiple beauty, just like listening to a symphony concert. 1.8 Sanding Sanding in the make-up of texture is similar to the technique of lacquer paintings in hand drawing. It can be made by painting and coloring the pattern first, then sanding repeatedly on the whole or in part of the fabric while at the same time filling in colors. This helps create a texture of subtle, rich and rustic visual effects. The “sand wash” in the processing of jeans is one of the examples of sanding technique. Jeans are first washed with oxidant chemicals and processed with sands or stones in the details as to make vintage feelings and fading effects, then wash the processed fabric with clean water while adding a little softener. After these, the fabric generates a slight layer of fluff on the surface and its tactile quality turns soft and mild, making the fabric very comfortable to wear. 2 DIGITAL TEXTURE Thanks to the development of digital printing technology, the digital printing design, which was used only in fabric patterns, is now an independent design realm and has been constantly applied in the apparel production. This makes the style of fashion more diverse, giving an unlimited space for fashion designers to run their inspirations. Digital texture refers texture patterns designed relying on a computer or computer-aided design software. The application of technology has made a great impact on the pattern design industry. The computer aided design has the characteristics of digitalization and virtualization. As in the design of texture pattern, materials can be freely copied, pasted, stitched and combined to form wonderful patterns with the cre ativity of the designer. Software such as CorelDraw,

Photoshop, Painter, Adobe Illustrator, are often used in digital texture design while in textile pattern designs, there are professional software like Jinchang.

The digital texture design has exceeded the traditional design methods. It can simulate the random and irreg ular character of a natural texture or a hand-painted texture, while at the same time is more directional and controllable, making it a more convenient technique that other production methods cannot match.

The digital ink-jet printing is a new way of textile fabric texture pattern design. It exceeds the traditional production methods of pattern printing with inno vated design techniques and has offered fabric pattern designers with a brand new artistic creation form, giving a broader space for the design and application of fabric texture.

3 FASHION FABRICS IN THE CREATIVE

DESIGN

The beauty of fashion fabrics is reflected on their textures, and the word “texture” can be interpreted as tactile feelings such as rough and smooth, soft and hard, light and heavy, etc. Various texture visual effects enrich the surface details of fabrics and also reflects a dynamic and creative aesthetic feature. We can also evaluate if a designer’s thoughts have been fully expressed from the application and manifesta tion of this special element.

The manipulation and transformation of fashion fabrics are based on a thorough knowledge of the physical and chemical properties of all types of fab rics. We can make up new textures and visual effects by using traditional or modern techniques to change its original shape and surface. Fashion fabric design is not only the expression of the fabric itself, but the expression of the designer’s ideal, personality and

Leisure sports characteristics and development trends in China

Ruidong Wang

Zhengzhou Normal University, Zhengzhou, China

ABSTRACT: The 21st century is the era of human recreation. What leisure and sport bring to people is bound to be a civilized, healthy, happy, and new life patterns. Throughout the development of sports and leisure his tory, we can see that in the era of leisure sports agricultural, civilization reflects a more casual game. Strictly speaking, leisure sport is a product of the birth of modern industrial civilization. But today, it has become a recreational sport entirely necessities of life, recreation is the ultimate ownership of human beings, but also one of the best state of human existence, and therefore we have reason to believe that in the near future, leisure sports will bring a self-liberation and ultimate human freedom.

KEYWORDS: Culture; Recreation; Games; Leisure Sports

1 INTRODUCTION

Lu Yuanzhen in the “Chinese sports sociology com ment” understood leisure sports; it is the physical activity of people in their spare time. To participate in this sport activity is not bound by strict rules of competitive sports, without going through a difficult long-term training, which does not bear the burden of glory for the country and the people. It’s just an investment in which people voluntarily, or not to keep fit, it is to achieve a pleasant spiritual and mental relaxation for sports purposes 1 . Famous scholar Yu

Tao believes that leisure time physical development of modern society is in a certain stage of the history of the product, which is to adapt to the current way of modern sports. We have done against the material and spiritual, social and environmental development relies on, so that people fully enjoy freedom of lei sure sports to bring awareness, self-worth reflection

2 . Shi Zhenguo, Tian Pu published an article “busy leisure. Leisure Sports” the leisure sports are defined as people of leisure time in the body to participate in a major means of voluntary participation, inde pendent choice of ways to achieve physical fitness, emotional regulation, for the purpose of entertain ment, healthy physical activity a scientific way. 3 Xi

Yubao thinks, leisure sports first time is to have free dom of idle time, in order to select sports programs in terms of their interest as the basis for comparison exercise, relaxing entertainment activities through these last reached on the body physical fitness, hearts beyond self-satisfaction and feeling of meaningful social activities. 4 the emphasis on this leisure sport is “self ” to participate in a voluntary, self-selection of favorite sports, in order to achieve self-training, fitness and entertainment purposes. By applying, the external factors are forced to participate in sports activities, the participants do not belong in terms of leisure activities. 2 DIFFERENT FROM SPORTS AND LEISURE, LEISURE SPORTS IS MAINLY ENTERTAINMENT, FITNESS FOR PURPOSE Leisure sports entertainment is characterized by sports decision. It has no sports intense confrontation, and it can be avoided due to the failure to produce the negative psychology, people engaged in sports do not have to shoulder the responsibility for the success of the outcome, whether it is not any pressure on the mental or physical. Leisure sport itself is interesting that where the attraction of sports enthusiasts lies. Leisure Sports is the harmony of mind and body function. As for the harmony of body and mind, in fact, physical activity itself and the people feel good coordination, resulting in feelings of pleasure through recreational sports, and pleasure in turn of consolidating physical health through physical activity to promote health. The regulation of human psychology is where the value of leisure sports. A peoples’ physical activity is an important part of the joyful mood of leisure sports promotion. For every sport, it is forced to participate and they actively participate in their training effect that is very different, and it is forced to participate in a psychological sport. It is hard to generate a sense of pleasure from the sport, of course, there is no enthusiasm at all, and it cannot be sustained and active participation in sports. Mostly, because I like that it is very easy to arouse people’s mental pleasure, and in a pleasant psychological support. The physiological capacity has been greatly enhanced in the leisure sport in which people can be self-governed, accord ing to their interests, hobbies, free choice of activi ties, therefore, in the leisure sports book people can fatigue the mind, so that people in a relaxed mood, are in a happy state for this reason, sports was showing strong vitality.

3 LEISURE SPORTS FEATURES

Leisure Sports on its origin, is not a modern new cre ation, because it is the form of leisure sports since ancient times. For example, the ancient custom of the seasonal sports activities takes advantage of the ancients slack or holidays (such as the Dragon Boat

Festival, the Lantern Festival, etc.) to carry out. Now it is proposed recreational sports, in terms of words, meaning and function of ancient indeed are different, because a lot of leisure sport has a contemporary feature.

3.1 Individual optional features

First, from a psychological point of view, recreational sports are no compulsive seeking; stress-free feeling of a course of conduct is by the individual choice of sports activities. On the other hand, Leisure Sports is a practice-oriented individual, with a clear sense of individual characteristics and physical behavior tendencies. People are living in their leisure time engaged in physical activity; you cannot directly bind by any organizations and groups. Leisure and health ier way of life for everyone, and the pursuit of the actual operation characteristics and tendencies also vary. Most people based on their personality, have interests and ability to choose sports activities. Such as outgoing, interested people will tend to have a more extensive selection of open collective projects rather introverted, narrow interests that will tend to select latching personal items (such as qigong, yoga, meditation, tai chi, fishing, etc.). For ease of understanding, we have sports and school sports, for example, we can make a comparison. We know that in competitive sports athletes or coaches when he chose a sport for him, the athletes will do after years of hard work to improve athletic performance.

In addition, in the process of training and competi tion, athletes must be trained and competition ven ues according to referee rules, equipment. Another example is the school sports that have prescribed syllabus, lesson plans and teaching regulations, any student are to be bound by these rules and learning content specified by PE teacher learning. That sports and school sports are for every individual who has a certain compulsive participants who have different degrees of pressure sensor, which does not allow the individual freedom of choice. Leisure sport is quite different. This work is in physical exercise, more than learning to participate, without action by the training program or technical requirements that do not need to press a specified time and place to participate in the exercise, it does not matter the venue with standard equipment. In other words, when leisure side where someone can choose the time, place and space for physical exercise, you can select one or more sports. Then the poor can run in the morning and evening, tai chi can also play in the morning and in the evening they can play qigong. In short, with the wishes of the individual leisure sports, it is not forced; there is no pressure, which is particularly prominent. 3.2 Competition is not strong Competition refers to the parties, an individual, collective or group to seek to conduct mutual achievements. In this mutual behavior, it will inspire and mobilize people to be positive, to overcome difficulties and strive to complete the task of fighting. At the same time, people have become full of physical and emotional tension and the need for more intense self-hope for success. Obviously, this fighting spirit and success inspiration tension boom essential for athletes. If an athlete lacks this fighting spirit, emotions and a strong desire, it is difficult to improve athletic level. Leisure sports are on the contrary, the vast majority of people who participate in physical activity in their leisure time, the pursuit of pleasure and relax for trying to create a competitive principle, the victory of world supremacy missed. Like most runners, they do not exercise which is now seeking for fast and long distance, but in accordance with the sports and medical experts found in favor of a healthy heartbeat and pulse to measure and control the running speed. 4 CONDITIONS LEISURE SPORTS DEVELOPMENT HAS MATURED The development of leisure sports is affected by many factors. Level of socio-economic development is the decision of the material basis for the development of leisure sports, leisure sports people is the key to understanding, leisure time is carried out to protect recreational sports, the number of people participating in leisure sports can develop as a premise. 4.1 Social and economic development in the objective for the development of sports and leisure material foundation To engage in recreational sports activities requires the necessary investment to build sports venues, sports equipment and purchase all that need a lot of money.

Economic development is to promote the improve ment of living standards, only when people have a certain amount of income can be used in the other life balance of interest when the field is to engage in rec reational sports that have become possible. People run around for food and clothing in economically under developed regions, it is just like a fairy to ask them to spend hundreds of dollars to play a game of bowl ing tale. Therefore, economic development improves the living standards of the material conditions and leisure sports. China’s economy in recent years has been in a row at a rate of about 8% growth in GDP that has exceeded 6 trillion marks, per capita annual income of nearly 3000 yuan. People’s living standards increase, according to 1996 “Chinese workers living survey overall progress report” statistics, the city’s per capita consumption is about 27.9 kilograms of meat, eggs 10.1 kg. the calorie consumption must seek new ways to concomitant cardiovascular disease repre senting “diseases of civilization “patients gradually increased, through physical activity or health is the primary means of rehabilitation. Therefore, after the material life improved, spiritual life becomes more and more urgent health needs, some pioneers have been put into motion in a recreational sport.

4.2 Leisure times engaged in leisure sports is the fundamental guarantee

Due to reform of the system of working hours per week, five-day work is to implement development and social service systems. The family labor increased automation, which changes in family structure and other factors, making it greatly increased leisure time.

If you work eight hours a day, if calculated according to that, then there is at least 30 hours per week of lei sure time, for young people who may have to minors at home. In addition, with lifestyle change, many young people like the nightlife, so nighttime can also tap and use. Therefore, in the leisure sports in time is completely guaranteed.

5 THE IMPACT OF URBANIZATION ON LEISURE SPORTS

Urbanization, to some extent, can be understood as a government-led social behavior, and therefore, many of the social phenomenon of urbanization process will inevitably appear in the government’s attention and concern of the whole society. The development of leisure sport is just for the urbanization process in the most direct response sports. Increased urbaniza tion brings not only the city’s population, but make the increase of leisure sports audience, its influence is also reflected in the government departments that pay attention to the quality of life of the people, and thus paying more attention to the promotion and development of leisure sport. Meanwhile, when the quality of life is improved, it will increase leisure time, the desire for leisure sports body will become more intense, and the degree of social concern has reached unprecedented heights. The number of leisure sports equipment and facilities is an important part of a significant increase in urbanization that is reasonable for existing urban land planning. Government attention and public concern have dual power, the number of sports equipment of leisure facilities was a rapid increase in momentum. Especially in the fitness industry to advance, all kinds of fitness trails, national sports venues have sprung up rapidly emerging, urban land use planning in the proportion of leisure sports sites on the rise. Increase in equipment and facilities of these sites, to a certain extent, can meet the people on the part of the desire of leisure sport and attract more of leisure sports participants. Chinese Urban Leisure Sports Development Strategies 6 SUMMARY Our country is building a harmonious society in the time towards a comprehensive well-off society, which has a comprehensive “leisure time.” Our leisure and recreational sports demand is very strong, we do not mention the theoretical study, compared with developed countries, even though the reference to our own practice of leisure and recreational sports activities has also been lagging behind the times. Currently the city is extremely active leisure sports practice, an urgent need for practical urban theory to be guided recreational sports. The city leisure break just started a fertility study, it can be said, the city leisure sports in China are basically the theory a virgin land to be developed, but have much to offer for a vast world. Therefore, from all angles on the issue of sports and leisure to explore the city is a priority. This is the driving force and pressure. We should accelerate the development of leisure sports education and the creation of leisure physical education major, as well as a number of leisure sports culture studies as soon as possible. We should cultivate guidance, management and operating personnel; in order to meet the social needs of the casual off sterile. We should step up publicity efforts to establish a scientific value of leisure sports, leisure sports are civilized, healthy and scientific way of life. Sports are related to changes in the development of leisure and quality of life of our traditional concept of life continues to increase. Therefore, all levels of government should increase leisure sports propaganda, in simple terms to guide advocacy through radio, television and other news media, to make the masses to actively participate in recreational sports fitness and leisure time activities. And it should to educate people to establish the scientific value of leisure sports, make people recognize that a harmo nious society in the fast-paced, high- efficiency work pressure. Staying healthy is the indispensable support forces of comprehensive development.

Study abroad in leisure sports industry started earlier with higher levels, both in theory and in prac tice, study abroad has made many achievements, forming a complete theoretical system, the devel opment of research on leisure sports industry has an important reference and reference value. As for the

China’s national conditions, the development of the research on the leisure sports industry started late.

Although with the advent of the era of social pro gress and leisure economy, more and more scholars devoted to the study of leisure sports industry in the past and have achieved some results. However, over all, study of leisure sports industry is still relatively fragmented; lack a certain depth and breadth. Leisure sports industry has less development in the region,

On the inheritance and development of folk music

Kai Guo

School of Film and Television, Hebei University of Science and Technology, Shijiazhuang, Hebei, China

ABSTRACT: Folk music in the past was inherited through family tradition, apprenticeship, social folk life, etc., mainly by the way of oral teaching method. Since the founding of New China, the country in addition to investigate and research the minority musicians, takes into consideration the special education and minority musical heritage and the establishment of different forms and characteristics of art institutions. In the inher itance and development of folk music, the advantages of school education cannot be ignored. We should pay attention to the inheritance and development of folk music in college music reform, so that music education has become a platform to promote the national music culture.

KEYWORDS: Folk Music; Heritage; Development

1 INTRODUCTION

China National Vocal Music in the course of history has been the survival and development of the five thousand years, and it has gone through three stages: the traditional Chinese vocal ancient times, the birth and growth of national vocal during the modern sense of the reform and opening up, China’s modern nation vocal prosperity and development. With the rise of the introduction of Western culture and the Chinese

New Culture Movement, Western music also entered

China, and continues to affect China’s national vocal.

Especially after the May Fourth Movement, school songs emerged. Early school songs of old songs fill new word-based, with Chinese folk songs, tunes or the Europe minor melody of the song filled into the creation of new words. School Songs are a musical movement with a sense of enlightenment, it was

Western music, including Western Bel Canto wide spread in China that took the first step to create a distinct ancient, Western integration of new singing made psychologically preparation, laying the founda tion for later learning Chinese national Vocal Western

Bel Canto founded Modern Chinese Vocal Music

School.

2 SIGNIFICANCE OF FOLK

MUSIC HERITAGE

As a college music educator, students learn and understand our national folk music to observe the sit uation analysis, these students know little about folk music, let alone learning and heritage, opera appreci ation and systems learning often only stay on paper, without understanding. In contrast, they are familiar with popular music, knowledge of Western music and its history than to Chinese folk music in a more systematic and comprehensive. Folk music is complex; if there is no the whole concern and attention of society, our music without nationality may gradually lose our traditional music. Music protection, promotion and heritage should not be because of the ideological differences moment and relaxed. Just as today, Western music is also changing, every period, there are new genres and types of music born, but the focus on traditional Western music does not affect, every kind of music has its relatively fixed researchers, interpreters and viewer, showing a flourishing momentum. There are 56 ethnic Chinese geographically widespread; they have national distinctive features, colorful music. If all folk music culture has been a very good development to the popularity of mutual penetration of influence, which is bound to make our nation’s outstanding cultural flowers bloom even more colorfully. 3 THE RISE OF MINORITIES ORIGINAL MUSIC AND HOT CULTURAL The word “Original” is derived from the natural sciences in the draw. Ecology is a state of the interaction between the survival and development of biological and environmental ecology is all-original to survive in the natural condition of things. Ecological and cultural ecology cannot leave the talk, it’s not talking about the culture, but from ecology to talk, the most vivid metaphor is the “the native soil supports the native people.” The protection of intangible cultural heritage and the original music for the minority culture protection are an important component. Today, the world began to increasingly emphasize national characteristics, people come to realize save personality, value the importance of different cultures, and “Global politics began to be reconstructed along cultural lines.” Original music and cultural hot minority China also began to raise, mostly from minority original music backcountry, wild ravines, with today’s mainstream commercial culture in stark contrast, which is a way to develop intelligent cultural resources.

With our higher music education to mass educa tion shift from elite education, music education in our professional education should also be the basis of sex transformations. Aesthetic practitioners and musical culture communicator in target university culture are not just musically skilled professionals, but also have the overall quality; this is able to adapt to the social development needs of the new musical talent. Folk music as an important part of culture, contains a wealth of cultural and historical connotations, the people of all ethnic groups create it in the long history of the devel opment process. Folk music reflects the culture, cus toms, language, aesthetic point of view of the nation, and even reflects the soul of this nation and the idea is that the national carrier of the spirit. In today’s rapid economic development, China’s national music culture is facing the threat of continuity and survival. We want to train the next generation aware of the importance of the national spirit of national culture, to promote the basic stance of the firm’s national cultural essence. We are only sure that folk music in college music edu cation can help students interested in folk music, can help create the times national music culture.

Chinese folk music has thousands of years of evo lution. It has the form of a single sound with musical band cavity resistance, texture and other characteris tics of the Chinese music system that is unique in the world of music system, distinctive features, which is a precious legacy of human art. With the rapid devel opment of modern science and technology in today’s multi-cultural harmony in the international environ ment, how to inherit the essence of folk music and to promote their times is innovation and development with full of vigor in modern society. We are in the study of Chinese folk music that must face and strive to explore the proposition of Chinese folk music her itage and how to further develop. In the Context of contemporary globalization, we discuss both folk music forms and styles of basic background charac teristics, but also on the development of our national heritage and music made new demands - should have an international perspective. International perspective does not get out of traditional culture, but the Chinese folk music is in the world of a broader range, from a macro, profound international perspective and values to re-examine our national music. In other words, it should be diversified position under a worldwide context, provide an indispensable theoretical perspective and way of thinking to the study and practice of related topics. 4 HERITAGE AND DEVELOPMENT OF FOLK MUSIC In the face of folk music, we cannot stall in the essence and heritage, but should continue to renew and flourish. At the same time, we should provide more, better, richer era, ethnic and creative good music for the general audience, thus revitalizing the spirit of Chinese civilization. However, with the continuous development of society, popular music has become a dominant force in the music market, so that the development of folk music and heritage of the situation are not very good. In the long river of history, folk music is verbal creativity with an oral tradition way to survive in society. But, with the development of the community and producing new things, traditional music culture has been the impact of multicultural music player everywhere. We can play pop songs anywhere, in that strong “oppression” of folk music only in keeping on the basis of its original features, through constant innovation, and coordinated development, it is to be able to reflect the unique charm of traditional folk music. Thus, the development and transmission of folk music would have to find a growing point for his art, to prevent rejection of any foreign, era, a new musical and cultural elements. For example, using high technology is to provide a platform for the development of folk music, new blood to meet the modern aesthetic concepts. Alternatively, we can select the appropriate way to meet the public’s appreciation of standards to allow more people to understand it, study it, in order to better develop and cultural heritage of folk music. 4.1 To change the traditional concept, establish a national self-confidence For the revival and development of Hungarian folk music that has made a great contribution to the wellknown Hungarian folk music, educator Kodaly said “national culture is the national nature of national dignity, national will sign national folk music culture that is the essence of the perfect musical performance. ““ Only in the folk music, were genuine musical and cultural traditions of this nation retained. “So we have to fundamentally change” things that cannot compete with others “concept. We should clarify and emphasize the foundation of traditional music in the construction and development of modern folk music and recognize the unique value of the folk music, traditional Chinese music and establish a new concept of education and national self-confidence, which is a prerequisite for national music heritage and devel opment. Secondly, we should have the establishment of a complete theoretical system of folk music, tra ditional music to establish the dominant position in the Chinese music education.

4.2 Nature of minority music

Because of the single lifestyle, the lagging liv ing conditions, the lack of contact with the outside world of minority in history, the nation’s ideological and cultural freedom forms in a relatively dispersed way, eclectic music in such an environment is to pro duce more “free” or labor song, or facts burning, or emotional catharsis. This process has not modified musicians and formed the original type of music, which embodies the wisdom and emotional minor ity of working people, natural and pollution-free.

The straightforwardness releases people’s inner feel ings, which fully embodies the “Heaven” harmoni ous beauty. They are the minority peoples living in long-term production process of practice together, which will stand the test of time and history screen ing, which is a natural minority musical that brings its unparalleled advantage.

4.3 Nature of ethnic music

In addition to natural minority music, it has close contact with nature, Max had said:. “People create their own history, but they are not free to create, but in direct touch, and established, inherited from the past down creation.”Nature is a complex concept, which includes a wide range of content location, topography, climate, hydrological characteristics and natural resources, etc. In the long history of development, economic and social development in ethnic minority areas have restricted by the natu ral environment, which is relatively backward. And musical forms are produced relatively simple and mostly to express and to reflect on nature, such as living in tropical and subtropical areas of the valley between the mountains of Yunnan Dai, elephants, peacocks and other soft spot. Dai folk mostly reflects the state of the Dai life, the lyrics are mostly related to their lives that reflects the image and peacocks, bamboo, etc. train with international standards, the national characteristics of teachers. Although China has a lot of folk music teachers, but with the teach ers, they lack of an international perspective, they cannot blend the world music and folk music, which limits the folk music heritage and development of Chinese universities. Therefore, training with international standards for college teachers with national characteristics is the only way of musical development. We can be achieved it by sending our national music teachers to go abroad for further study to understand the diverse world music, folk music for our development will open up new paths. You can also hire musicians worldwide, giving lectures to students. “Understand the world music culture, in order to better develop this folk music.” Therefore, we can have the construction of teachers; students open windows to understand the world music. To the national music education, music education is supplemented by courses in the world system. The folk music is the basic thing that we cannot miss in the world. Therefore, we should strengthen the Inheritance and Development of folk music, it is necessary to establish national music as the mainstay, the policy of the world music education is just as the supplementing part. Therefore, in the curriculum, educational model is to reform the Soviet Union and European musical curriculum, we should open the main ethnic music as world music education, and it is supplemented by the foreign curriculum. It is the only way to inherit and develop the national heritage of music education and it is also to let this get rich folk music. 5 SUMMARY The impact of modern social civilization and traditional cultures is presented in many ways, both in the moral system, in the behavior or the way of thinking and the relations of production, as well as the music. Now, some minority young people cannot speak the nation’s language, the statute does not comply with the nation’s folklore, folk religion, or more to the attitude of the nation’s disdain. Something new would be more attractive for them, and the young people with varying degrees refuse the music in different ways. All sorts of conflicts phenomenon really need to give attention to the subject. But, in a civilized society, while advocating the traditional culture, we need to look it in two ways. For the outstanding national culture and music for the minority words, it is the essence of traditional culture, the arts are the national character of the art exhibition of ethnic minorities. If they lose it, you will lose an important part of the most primitive ethnic minority culture and national identity of all ethnic groups will be greatly diminished. The continuation of folk music is a symbol of the survival of the Chinese nation. Cultural heritage and development of ethnic music, with the music cultivation of our sentiments, stimulate our patriotism; they enhance the cultural quality of the whole nation, contribute to the construction of the Chinese nation. Therefore, those who are interested in the music should be determined to settle in the Chinese music and study Chinese folk music.

[1] Huang Chengcheng. “Chinese folk music heritage and development” Workshop Summary [J] Chinese music,

2011, 01: 217–220 + 3.

[2] Li Sihua. Return of human nature: the inheritance and development of minority music [J] Honghe University,

2011, 04: 118–121.

[3] Wang Ying. Anna multicultural heritage and develop ment of folk music background [J] big stage, 2013,

03: 241–242.

[4] Ren Zhanzhong. The World Multicultural Music

Education in the background of our national musical heritage and development [J] art technology, 2014, 10: 176–212. [5] Rizhao Getu. College music education reform should attach importance to the inheritance and development of folk music [J] Inner Mongolia University for Nationalities, 2012, 01: 160–161. [6] Chen Mingyang. Folk music heritage and cultural activities in the community Inheritance and Development - Jidong folk music, for example [J] writers, 2012, 24: 205–206. [7] Wang Shoukuan. Inheritance and Protection of Minorities in Northeast music [J] Northern music, 2014, 07: 23.

“Impression·liu sanjie” – a research on the participation and perception of residents in scenic area and community

Yucui Wang

Guilin University of Technology, China

ABSTRACT: Tight space and interactive resources grant tourism community residents a vital body status in community tourism development and construction process. Residents’ all-sided and effective participation in

Tourism development process, with no doubt, is an open democratization process and an effective way to ensure sustainable development of tourism as it can raise residents’ income and eliminate bad influence of tourism.

“Impression·Liu Sanjie” is a scenic spot where “landscape live-action” is performed. Local residents (farmers) serve as the main part. Through a survey and analysis of participation and perception of community residents, this paper aims at finding some useful consult and inspirations for the development, management and policy formulation of other rural scenic region alike.

KEYWORDS: “Impression·Liu Sanjie”; Participation of community residents; Tourism perception

A community is a group of people who share common social life, live in a certain area under organization constraint, have interactive relationship and sustain a common culture together. Community participation in tourism, proved by practice, can availably eliminate the bad influence of tourism development and ensure the sustainable development of a scenic spot. The reason is that perception of tourism development will directly influence community residents’ participation, which in turn affects their perception. Namely, both influence each other. Hence, a research on commu nity residents’ perception of changes in every aspect of a community will reflect how tourism influences the economy, social culture, ecological environment, etc. of a community in a real and objective way, which can serve as a vital beneficial guide for formulating pro-phase development and scheme of tourism com munity as well as its business and management pol icy after development. Community residents act as a main force in community tourism development. Their participation and perception has become a concern focus for exploring sustainable development of a cer tain scenic area.

1 GENERAL INTRODUCTION OF

DEVELOPMENT IN “ IMPRESSION·LIU

SANJIE” SCENIC SPOT

1.1 Project construction

“Impression•Liu Sanjie” scenic spot is located at the meeting of Lijiang river and Tianjia river in Yangshuo County of Guilin in Guangxi. It is a venue for the first “landscape live-action show” of new concept, which is invested and built by Guilin Guangwei & Wenhua Tourism Cultural Industries Company Ltd, and is made and directed by Chinese eminent director Zhang Yimou, Wang Chaoge and Fan Yue. The premiere was on Mar. 20 th , 2004. This show exploits Lijiang Waters with a radius of 2 km as its stage, 12 mounts and the wide vault of heaven as its setting, the life of fishermen in Lijiang as its recourses, and 400 local residents as its actors. It masterly combines a world- famous landscape of Guilin in Guangxi with the legend of Liu Sanjie, and creatively merges Liu Sanjie – the singing queen of the Zhuang people, Guangxi minorities amorous feelings, lights on fishing boats on Lijang River and plenty of other elements into Guilin Landscape, in a way that the harmonious relationship between human and nature is successfully interpreted while the state “human and nature in one” is created. The show, referred to as “A Masterpiece created with God”, has become an international hit since it came on the scene. The landscape park project in “ impression• Liu Sanjie” is devised by institute of architecture at Tsinghua University. Act up to the conception “Green Art, Environmental Protection First”, protection of Lijiang riverbank and primary state of water surface is especially stressed with advanced environment-friendly technology adopted in all performance property and equipments. When performance is ended, all the staff should leave the scene right away, with property and sets cleaned out and natural landscape restored.

1.2 Project benefits

As an original cultural wealth, acting as a pioneer of landscape live-action show in China and internationally,

“ Impression·Liu Sanjie” attracts over 4000 audience a night since its premiere. Performance status of “most audiences among national performance industry, big gest influence and largest sales volume” is preserved.

Statistics proves, tourists received by “ Impression·Liu

Sanjie” has broke 1million early in the year 2007 and made a record of most annual viewer of Chinese the atrical performance. In 2011, visitors received have reached 1.5 million with an income of over 300 million yuan, which greatly contributes to tourism benefit and even fiscal income in Yangshuo County.

The prevalent “impression•Liu Sanjie” brings large economic benefits to over 2750 villagers of near

400 households in 7 natural villages including Tian

Jiahe, Mushan, Guanjia, Xiamo, Bai Shawan, Mu

Shanzha and Maozai Mount. As investigated, there are over 750 actors for the whole project, including

450 local farmers. At least one villager in each house hold is responsible for work, including management, public security, cleaning, tour guide and actors from

4 natural villages of Tian Jiahe, Mushan, Guanjia and

Xiamo while a certain part of the villagers work as actors in the tourist spot in 3 natural villages far away of Bai Shawan, Mu Shanzha and Maozai Mount.

Villagers working in scenic spot get a monthly income from 800yuan to 1500yuan, based on their positions and roles. Incomplete statistics released by the tourism department shows that, by acting, cater ing, rental housing, selling food on vendor’s stall, renting telescope, raincoats and cotton-padded coats, local villagers can receive a total benefit of over

7 million yuan from “Impression• Liu Sanjie”, that is,

15 to 20 thousand yuan for each household.

2 SURVEY AND ANALYSIS OF THE

PARTICIPATION AND PERCEPTION

OF “IMPRESSION·LIU SANJIE”

COMMUNITY RESIDENTS

“Impression Liu Sanjie” community consists of 7 natural villages surrounding scenic spot including

Tian Jiahe, Mushan, Guanjia, Xiamo, Mu Shanzha,

Bai Shawan and Maozai Mount. Community

Residents refer to the villagers of the 7 villages.

To objectively reveal the relation of the successful development of “Impression Liu Sanjie” and com munity residents, this paper designed a questionnaire with 27 indexes to investigate “ to what extent com munity residents participate in tourism development in the scenic spot, residents’ influence and perception of tourism development and those residents’ general attitude towards community tourism development”. Sampling survey was carried out among community residents while part of respondents received improvisational interview. Classification statistics and summary of raw data from 184 reclaimed effective questionnaires by using Excel worked out a corresponding data system. Among the respondents, the number of male and female is 96 and 88 respectively, which is nearly 1:1; they are aged 16 to 60 years old and mostly 16 to 40 years old, totaling 144 people, accounting for 78.3%. Among all the respondents, those who received Junior high or higher education totaled 160 people, accounting for 87.0%, in which most received a junior high education, accounting for 52.2%. They mostly live in Si Jiahe, Mu Shancun and Guan Jiacun, totaled 40people, 35people and 29 people, accounting for 21.7%, 19.5% and 15.7% respectively. 2.1 An analysis of work of community residents in “impression·liu sanjie” scenic spot 2.1.1 Work level of participation in scenic spot-related service The statistical result in table 1 shows that the ratio of residents’ participating in tourism-related work in the scenic spot is quite high, which has reached 72.3%. According to relevant statistics in the questionnaire, 27.7% villagers not participating are mostly from Xiamo, Mu Shanzha, Bai Shawan and Maizai Mount, which is 1-1.5 km far away from “Impression·Liu Sanjie” scenic spot than Tian Jiahe, Mushan and Guanjia. As a result, those villagers participate in much less service work in the scenic spot, and mostly work in the evening performance. 2.1.2 Work content for participation in scenic spot This item only requires filling in by those 113 people who “participate in tourism-related work in the scenic spot (directly or indirectly)”. The statistical result shows that the level of residents’ participating in tourism-related work is quite low, mostly physical work that is non-technical or half-technical, including acting, security, cleaning, tour guiding etc., among which, acting topped on the list, reaching 60.9% while administrative level only accounts for 2.3%. Besides, the option “others” refers to other tourism-related work apart from work in the scenic spot, including selling food, renting raincoats, rental housing, etc. it accounts for 12.0%, a little higher than security work, cleaning and tour guiding. Those who choose “others” are mostly female and villagers in Tian Jiahe which is closest to the scenic spot. It proves that the independent enthusiasm of local villagers to participate in community tourism development is quite high.

Table 1. A list of work of community residents in “Impression·Liu Sanjie” scenic spot.

2.1.3 Operation mode for participation in the scenic spot

This item only requires filling in by those 117 people who directly participate in the scenic spot (16peo ple indirectly participating in “others” not to fill). It is showed by the result that 31.6% residents partic ipate through quota allocation while another 68.4% through free registers. It is understood that basi cally one farmer from land-exploited household can directly work in the scenic spot through quota alloca tion, and villagers able to sign up freely are restricted to the above-mentioned 7 natural villages. 2.1.4 Work category for participation in the scenic spot This item only requires filling in with those 117 people who directly participate in the scenic spot. The result shows that permanent staff account for a high 88.0% and those of temporary employment is only 12.0%. For the reason that actors must be local villagers, index limits for each village is made. Nevertheless, villagers enthusiastically sign up. Certain priority goes to land-exploited villagers.

2.1.5 Work hour for participation in the scenic spot

This item only requires filling in with those 117 people who directly participate in the scenic spot.

The statistical result shows that, 76.1% people work mostly at night and only 11.1% people work in day time. Day or night shift accounts for 12.8%. It is also known that actors and directors, mainly work at night, administrative and cleaning staff in the daytime, while security staff on a day or night shift.

2.1.6 Remuneration for participation in tourismrelated work in the scenic spot

This item only requires filling in with those 133 peo ple who directly or indirectly participate in tourism- related services. Each receives a different monthly income due to different positions and work category, among which, 801-1100yuan accounts for 58.7%,

1101-1400yuan accounts for 23.3%, <1401yuan takes

9.7% and <800yuan only takes 8.3%. It can be seen that most actors receive an average monthly income of 800-1400yuan. Besides, labor and employment contract is signed between “Impression·Liu Sanjie” scenic spot and farmer actors, for whom insurance is bought apart from paying salary. Under the standard management, according to law, Farmer actors’ work quality and labor discipline are evaluated. Farming in daytime and acting at night, community farmers enjoyed a brand new life thanks to “Impression·Liu

Sanjie” show. They experience a new life value under transfer of roles and artistic edification.

2.2 An analysis of community residents’ perception of “impression·liu sanjie” tourism influence

Note: questionnaires answers adopt 5 options includ ing “strongly agree, agree, not sure, disagree, and strongly disagree”. “Agree” in table 2 is the percent age of “strongly agree” and “agree; “disagree” is the percentage of “disagree” and “strongly disagree”.

Table 3 below is the same.

2.2.1 Community residents’ perception of economic influence by the scenic spot

Table 2 shows that residents have a quite strong per ception of positive economic influence brought by

“Impression·Liu Sanjie” scenic spot. Approval rates of the 7 influences are higher than 70%, including promoting local economic development, raising villagers’ employment and income, raise villagers’ living standards, reasonably compensating land- exploited villagers, benefiting most villagers, adding infrastructure; while approval rate of raising the liv ing cost is only 20.5%. Most villagers take the living cost as daily expenses. Performing at night and still doing farming, villagers still live by self-sufficiency of basic living matters. As a result, basic living cost does not largely rise with increasing income. 2.2.2 Community residents’ perception of cultural influence brought by scenic spot development Table 2 shows that residents’ perception of positive cultural influence is quite strong, while weak for the negative. For instance, the approval rate of raising local fame and enriching villagers’ entertainment life is higher than 85%, while for impacting local traditional culture and reducing trust among people is 25.6% and 38.5% respectively. In a word, residents’ perception of social and cultural influence by “Impression·Liu Sanjie” tourism is positive. 2.2.3 Community residents’ perception of environmental influence brought by scenic spot development Table2 tells residents’ perception of environmental influence brought by “Impression·Liu Sanjie” tourism development is weak. For example, the approval rate of improving their living environment and raising environmental protection awareness is 23.8% and 53.3%, respectively, while the approval and disapproval rate of breaking the of peaceful living atmosphere is 30.8% and 56.4%; half the villagers believe that original quiet life isn’t broken, but 51.2% people are not sure about environmental degradation. As a whole, villagers do not have a strong perception of influence on environment. Whereas, relatively speaking, positive perception overweigh negative one. 2.3 An analysis of community residents’ general attitude towards “impression·liu sanjie” tourism development Table 3 tells that, community residents are sure of the positive influence brought by “Impression·Liu Sanjie” tourism development. 69.2% of them agree advantages overweigh disadvantages and 84.6% believe that tourism can promote rural economic development. For economic influence always plays a leading role in residents’ attitude towards tourism development, the good economic influence of “Impression·Liu Sanjie” make 92.3% residents content with its current development and 82.1% content with its development company. But, for “too many tourists, scale should be controlled”, attitudes differs. “Agree”, “disagree”, “not sure” takes 41.4%, 35.9% and 23.1% respectively. Most residents think that 2 shows a night are too close in time, and that serious crowd phenomenon of audience and vehicles will cause traffic jams, emotional fantod of waiting audience, an increase of garbage, excessive actor’s intensity etc. That becomes more serious when a session of show rises to 3. Reasonably speaking,

Table 3. A list of community residents’ attitude towards

“Impression·Liu Sanjie” tourism development.

Table 2. A list of residents’ perception on economy, culture and environment influenced by “Impression·Liu Sanjie” tourism development. audience number and performance session should be controlled, and the former comes first for the sake of economic benefit.

2.4 A summery of survey result

The aforementioned result shows that commu nity residents are enthusiastic for participation in

“Impression·Liu Sanjie” to a high extent. Good income is received in a direct or indirect way; positive influ ence on economy, culture and environment is strongly perceived; residents show a supportive attitude, and are greatly satisfied with overall “Impression·Liu Sanjie” development. 3 SUCCESSFUL DEVELOPMENT AND OPERATING MANAGEMENT INSPIRATION OF “IMPRESSION·LIU SANJIE” Aforementioned result shows, combined with interview of villagers, the writer believes, that community residents have such a high cognition, satisfaction and support for “Impression·Liu Sanjie” all depends on their participation and benefits received. Meanwhile, their approval and support in turn effectively promote lasting hot business for “Impression·Liu Sanjie”. This is a win-win benign circulation. On one hand, many local farmers are recruited in “Impression·Liu Sanjie” development, which gives those idle and poor farmers who go out to work at sunrise and back home at sunset an opportunity to join “Impression·Liu Sanjie” live-action show in their free time without delaying farming in the day. Transfer of roles and artistic edification greatly enriches their life and raises their cultural quality; farmers’ conception and pursuit totally changed, giv ing them a new development platform and spiritual state. Meanwhile, the good income obviously improves living condition and environment of local farmers. For instance, quite a few villagers have built storied houses and brought fashionable house hold appliances. Life quality has greatly improved. On the other hand, with the support of community residents, good benefits have been received and the benign operating situation has been created in

“Impression·Liu Sanjie” scenic spot. For investors, recruiting local villagers as actors not only solve the large crew’ problems of accommodation, transporta tion and dining, but also reduce operation cost and guarantee performance power. A lofty artistic realm of “human and nature in one” is realized, with the win-win interactive situation created.

“Impression·Liu Sanjie” scenic spot, in the coun tryside, though, rarely raises conflict between its company and residents. Local residents’ wide partici pation makes their benefits blend into “Impression·Liu

Sanjie” operation process. In that way, villagers, leaving land without leaving their home, perform in their free time in the evening, which helps them make money and get cultural entertainment life enriched while receiving artistic edification to raise the life quality. Hence, the villagers hope “Impression·Liu

Sanjie” a flourishing future genuinely. High participa tion of community residents, good economic benefits and positive attitude is key to the successful develop ment of “Impression·Liu Sanjie”, and the fundamen tal source power for the sustainable development of The city color life under the concept of humanistic ecology – a case study of clothing, food, shelter and transportation

Jingyun Wang

Department of Fine Arts, Baoding University, Baoding, Hebei, China

WeiJun Wang

College of Art Hebei University, Baoding, Hebei, China

ABSTRACT: With the continuous development of social economy, the quality of people’s life continuously upgrades and live content has been enriched. But with the development and construction, the city color has been polluted. This paper starts from the design concept of human ecology, especially highlights the current city life construction such as clothing, food, shelter, transportation and other aspects. Then summarizes and reflects the current construction in the development of city life for human ecology indifference and destruction and color design problems. Does the in-depth study and explores how making the city life color more in line with the human ecology and visual aesthetic demand. Puts forward some suggestions and strategies to solve the prob lems existing and do some good for the current city life color design. At last create a more suitable city color environment for the development of human life.

KEYWORDS: humanistic ecology; city life; color design

Human civilization in the continuous upgrading of reproduction has been continuously improved. The exploration and development of the earth are grow ing, with the rapid development of the economy and culture at the same time. This can also bring the over much exploitation that makes the natural environment deteriorates. The pollution situation is unceasing. So people are thinking about how to e�ectively prevent and control the pollution from the new view to make the human city life healthier and achieve the sustain able development and promotion. From the water body pollution to soil pollution, from air pollution to noise pollution, governance and prevention measures to the corresponding situations emerge in an endless stream. But we all overlooked the big pollution that can be seen everywhere in our life and influence the quality of our life – visual pollution. The most impor tant problem of visual pollution is the color. That is color pollution.

Color pollution refers to what people do in clothing, food, shelter, transportation brings seri ous discord and unsightly color visual effect. These exaggerated stimulus colors may make people feel uncomfortable visually and psychologically. This not only affects people’s physical and mental health, but also causes headache, irritability, visual confusion and other negative feelings. Through the investigation and understanding of the current city life, we find a series of color visual pollution phenomena. To control color visual pollution phenomenon fundamentally, it needs the cooperation of the national and government. Adopt relevant policies and regulations, from the fundamental to manage. At the same time, the designers in the field of clothing, food, shelter, transportation colors should rethink the duty and mission of their own, from the prospection of the humanities and ecology to plan integrally and design the city color in a more reasonable, healthy, environmentally friendly way. In a manner of speaking, from the humane ecological ideas to do city life color design, is a necessary thing to adapt to the city development and the need under the double pressure of social development and ecological crisis. It is an effective method to coordinate the harmonious relationship between man and nature. 1 CLOTHING From the ecological point of view, the negative e�ect of dress colors’ colorful changes brings a series of toxic chemical products and makes clothing industry cause serious pollution. To do the clothing color reconstruction from the humanistic ecological concept, first of all, we can use the natural beauty of the natural color, such as fiber own color. At the same time, use natural vegetable dyes for clothing dyeing as much as possible to reduce the dress damage to the natural environment. Because of the nature color is over time, space and natural climate baptism, it often exhibits a color in coordination. And so the extrac tion of color from nature used in clothing design will make us have safe and comfortable feelings.

Secondly, exaggerating and cluttering clothing color design, will not only reduce the people’s cultural life taste, but also cause serious pollution to the vision of life, affecting people’s physical and mental health.

Therefore, if we want to blend the clothing color in a harmonious way, we must fully understand the differ ent attributes of color and put a variety of elements in the matching rules of color. Make the color relations harmonious and united in the comparison, and make people gain the pleasure and satisfaction at the level of both visually and psychologically. In short, cloth ing color design as the mirror of the changing times, reflects the cultural, aesthetic trends and characteris tics in different times of life.

2 FOOD

With the city people’s living standard unceasingly rising, the requirements that people have for food packaging image design are also getting higher and higher. At the moment that city life getting rapidly developing, the food packaging has become fast disposable consumer goods. In order to attract the attention of consumers, many businessmen only pay attention to the shape and color of the food packaging, but not pay attention to the practicality and color collo cation. The result is that not only causing a lot of waste of resources, but also producing color visual pollution in life. Because of the number and types of excessive pursuit of food packaging color, there is a substantial increase in the amount of ink. If businessmen want to reduce the product cost it will make technology di�cult in food packaging in the process of recycling. It makes water resources and ecological environment polluted seriously. And too much inharmonious food packag ing color, o�set color e�ect in sales presentation and purchasing may bring consumers visual fatigue obvi ously. Even the packaging materials are used in the green way, the lack of humanistic spirit connotation in color design also makes people feel uncomfortable visually and psychologically and pollutes the environ ment. Therefore, designers must fully understand the color and the purchase psychology of consumers, no need to deliberately create too much provocative pack aging color as long as food characteristics and the per formance of color image reaching harmony. We can successfully complete the commercial application and cultural di�usion of food packaging color. Not only to promotes the food consumption, but also beautify the city life, reduces environmental pollution and waste of resources. It can be said hard-core. 3 SHELTER In the current city life space of architectural color design, we pursue tone and e�ect too much, but seldom relate color with physical and mental health together. For example, some businessmen in order to pursue business purpose to attract customers, paint dazzling color of high purity in the commercial space , or make store door color designed to stimulate with the surrounding environment to attract people’s attention. Also, some of the entertainment places and building periphery layout neon lights that are all with high color purity, tawdry and stimulating. Those buildings’ exterior color and design, perhaps, will attract attention and concern of people in a short period of time, but from a macro point of view it is the destruction of the ecological environment. It will produce visual fatigue in di�erent degree and cause damage to the physiology and psychology of the people when people gaze it for long. And, many modern cities are lacking overall planning of architectural color that result in the situation of “thousands of the cities from a drab uniformity” and the lack of new ideas. But the architecture color planning is too simple and crude, it will make the city building color monotonous rigid and living environment quality poor. Compared with the rapid abandonment of consumption of food packaging, color pollution to the city construction will last years of or more. From the perspective of human ecology to create city building color harmony, not only need the government to carry out corresponding measures to manage entirely, but also need designers to promote cultural and artistic connotation of city building. And to pour into the vigorous freshness for living space, increase the expression and implication of modern architecture. Rational planning and landscaping of city life in the building color from the humanities ecological point of view, will not only enhance the visual quality of living space, but also can alleviate the pressure of work and life. Make people feel harmonious with nature, regulate the physical and mental health. 4 TRANSPORTATION As people city life quality rising, the coverage of transportation becomes wider and more abundant. Take the city public transportation as an example, bus, taxi, subway and so on have become infrastructure service in the city life. It is forming a flowing color indispensable in city life. The color design as an important part of city life color is attracting more and more attention. However, at present, the color planning of most of the city’s public transport is not planned enough. Some public transport in order to highlight the self, to attract passengers, they design the color of the body turgidly and lack of harmonious beauty. The result is that it becomes misfits with the whole environment of city color. Even the public transport advertises for businessmen. They make the connected advertising body quality rough, mottled, and the form of advertising is not harmonious with the body. It has destructed the overall aesthetic of city life color, caused serious visual pollution, but doesn’t take e�ect in cultural communication or shaping the following card of the city image.

In this situation, confined to the management and planning of transport color, we should not only consider its own color, but also from the function and the effect to do rational planning, even taking into account the color related to cohesion and trans port elements, such as platform color, and even the whole city environment color. Make the traffic color become the organic part of city living environment, and color psychology feelings that caused by flowing color of traffic tool should be considered, to create and maintain a harmonious color and to create a good environment of city color.

In a word, as the development process of city life improves ceaselessly, human beings have realized

Evaluation and optimization study of industrial upgrading for energy—taking the North Chengdu Reconstruction as an example

Ping Zhou

School of Civil Engineering, Southwest Jiaotong University, Chengdu

Feng Zhou

School of Mechanical Engineering, Southwest Jiaotong University, Chengdu

Tao Huang

Faculty of Geosciences and Environmental Engineering, Southwest Jiaotong University, Chengdu

ABSTRACT: This paper has studied the environmental situation before and after the North Chengdu

Reconstruction and the benefits of energy saving and emission reduction after the reconstruction based on

Jinniu, Chenghua, and Xindu District, which are involved in the major livelihood project – North Chengdu

Reconstruction. This paper is mainly focusing on the following aspects: industrial restructuring project undertaken to assess the North changed the ecological environmental benefits, this paper chooses practical measures to analyze industrial upgrading energy saving effect. Evaluation to determine specific measures and establish the appropriate data mode, means the use of mathematical statistics and predictive analy sis of industrial structure benefit study research environment to be changed to change the amount of the corresponding index of the North after the industrial structure and industrial upgrading in order to get the

North to the north of the city changed impact on the ecological environment. Finally, based on evaluation results, a more optimized scheme is presented to provide theory basis and experience reference for future city reconstruction and planning. Finally, the actual benefits of this scheme presented are analyzed and calculated.

KEYWORDS: North Chengdu Reconstruction; Industrial upgrading; Time Series Model; Evaluation and

Optimization

1 INTRODUCTION

In specific planning of north Chengdu reconstruc tion[1], it will launch a relocation work of commodity market, freight yard, logistics service station and stor age enterprise, implementing “shut down a group”,

“upgrade and improve a group” and “transforming a group” mode for relocation, making north reconstruc tion engineering area into a commodity wholesale logistics highland, international trade and logistics center, comprehensive commercial community (asso ciation) and trade headquarters gathered, e-commerce innovation base and feature commodity price finding center in the Midwest. Commodity market relocation will take lotus pond area, north train station area, five-stone area, Sima bridge area, 8 mile village area,

Chuanshan Road and Laochengguan Road market as the pre-relocation focus, striving to 3 years to see the results.

Under north reconstruction background, the indus try upgrading will have different degrees of influence for 3 northern districts of the city and even the whole Chengdu energy consumption mode and structure. This paper will discuss the industrial structure change and relevant energy consumption relationship, and Figure 1 shows the specific research methods and ideas. 2 INDUSTRIAL UPGRADING ANALYSIS 2.1 Previous economic data statistics and analysis The statistical data adopted by this paper is mainly from previous “Chengdu statistics yearbook” and “Chinese city statistics yearbook”. In order to accurately analyze the original industrial structure, it first conducts collection and sorting of the previous Jinniu area, Shanghai area and Xindu area industrial economic data [1], with specific data in Table 1. In the above statistical data, due to many reasons, the statistics yearbook data is not complete, lacking of 2007 and 2008 economic data. In order to make an accurate prediction of future economic development trend, this paper adopts the average value method

Figure 1. Research step diagram of north reconstruction industrial struct.

Table 1. 2001~2012 three districts of north city GDP unit: billion yuan. to fill the missing data. Through the statistical data analysis and combined with the actual economic development level of Chengdu City, this method is feasible and simple, which fully meets the corresponding requirements. The specific operation is as follows.

Suppose x ij is missing value, then the missing data is the average value of left and right data, i.e.

(2.1)

Among them, represents j data in i year.

2.2 Prediction model establishment of future industrial structure

Suppose it conducts reconstruction of north city, based on the future three industrial GDP prediction, it can according to the previous economic data feature and current policy, economic condition, social environment, industrial structure, science and technology development level and regional difference and other actual status, it constructs a GM model (Gray Model) for prediction of various industrial GDP. According to three industrial GDP data feature, it has 12 years of GDP value. By taking Jinniu area first industry value as an example, suppose is 12 elements of array, the value is respectively Jinniu area 2001~2012 first industrial GDP data, and then x x x x( (1), (2), , (12)) (0) (0) (0) (0) �= (2.2) To ensure that the current data to establish gray model for gray prediction [2], and it needs sequence class ratio k( )λ , to ensure that all levels of k( )λ fall on admissible covering X e e n n ( , ) 2 1 2 1 = − + − + . x ij x x x ij i j i j 2 1, 1,

= + + − k x k x k k( ) ( 1) ( ) ( 2,3, ,12) (0) (0) �λ = − = (2.3)

Obtaining

Not meeting the requirement

It falls can cover, with proper constants c, as trans lation transform y k x k c k n( ) ( ) ( 1,2, , ) (0) (0) �= + = (2.4)

Taking c 100= , it has

Class ratio meeting the requirement. x (0) AGO (Accumulated Generating Operation) for generating sequence x x x x( (1), (2), , (12)) (1) (1) (1) (1) �= (2.5)

Among them,

Then, obtaining x (0) AGO generating sequence

Defining x (1) gray derivative as

(2.6)

Making z (1) as sequence x (1) mean (mean) sequence, i.e. z k x k x k( ) 0.5 ( ) 0.5 ( 1) (1) (1) (1) = + − (2.7)

Among them, k 2,3, ,12�= .

Then z z z z( (1), (2), , (12)) (1) (1) (1) (1) �= (2.8)

Defining GM(1,1) gray differential equation model as k az k bd( ) ( ) (1) + = (2.9a) i.e x k az k b( ) ( ) (0) (1) + = (2.9b) Among them, x k( ) (0) is known as grey derivative, making a called as development coefficient, Z k( ) (1) is known as the white background value, and b is known as gray dosage. Making 2,3, ,12k = � into the equation (5.9b) (0) (1) (0) (1) (0) (1) (2) (2) , (3) (3) , ( ) (12) . x az b x az b x n az b � + = � + = � � � � + = � �� N Y is known as a data vector, B is reference vector, u is reference vector, and GM(1,1) can be expressed as matrix equation. N Y B u= × (2.11) For the definition method of reference vector u, in fact, if it exists T 1 ( )B B − ⋅ , by least square rule (2.12) The specific expression is as follows. 2 2 ( 1) ˆ ˆ , ( 1) ( 1) CD n E DF CE a b n F C n F C − − − = = − − − − (2.13) Among them, 12n = . The parameters are as follows. ∑ ∑ ∑ ∑ ======C z k D x k E z k x k F z k ( ), ( ), ( ) ( ), ( ( )) k k k k (1) 2 12 (0) 2 12 (1) (0) 2 12 (1 ) 2 2 12 Through calculation obtained:

λ = (0.980,1.021,1.355,1.783,1.277,1.248,

1.000,1.330,1.043,1.059,1.355)

X (0.8574,1.1663)=

=y (101.4,101.4,101.4,101.0,100.6,

100.4,100.3,100.3,100.2,100.2,100.2)

(0)

λ = (0.9997,1.0003,1.0038,1.0047,1.0013,1.0009,

1.0000,1.0009,1.0001,1.0002,1.0007) x k x i k i k

( ) ( ), 1,2, ,12 (1) (0) 1 � ∑ = = =

=x (1.45,1.48,1.45,1.07,0.6,0.47,0.37665,

0.37665,0.2833,0.2717,0.2565,0.1893)

(1) k x k x k x kd( ) ( ) ( ) ( 1) (0) (1) (1) = = − − =Y (101.4,101.4,101.0,100.6,100.4, 100.3,100.3,100.2,100.2,100.2) N T =z (152.1,253.6,354.9,455.7,556.2,656.7, 757.0,857.4,957.6,1057.9,1158.1) (1) (0) (0) (0) T ( (2), (3), , (12)) , N Y x x x= � T ( , ) ,u a b= (1) (1) (1) (2) 1 (3) 1 , (12) 1 z z B z � � − � � − � � = � � � � − � � � � � � (2.10) T (1) 1 z B � � = � � � � � � �� T 0.963180341,0.0781880 ˆ ( )96u = −

Further obtained:

Later, it needs to test the prediction value, making the residual as

(2.14)

If ε

Calculated and obtained

(1) (101.4,202.7,303.8,404.8,505.7,606.5, 707.1,807.6,907.9,1008.2,1108.3,1208.2,1308.1) x =

ρ = − − −

(0.0015,0.001, 0.0024, 0.0033,0.00001,0.0003,

0.0013,0.0003,0.0011,0.0011,0.0006, 0.0022)

Figure 2. Residual analysis chart. the class ratio 0 ( )kl , and it uses development coeffi cient a to solve corresponding class ratio deviation.

If ρ

It tests to obtain the class ratio deviation analysis chart as follows. ρ λ= − − + � � � � � � k a a k( ) 1 1 0.5 1 0.5 ( ) 0 (2.15)

Then, it conducts class deviation value for test.

First, the reference data (0) ( 1)x k − , (0) ( )x k calculate Figure 3. Class ratio deviation analysis chart. procedures are detailed in appendix. It calculates to obtain future three districts of north city GDP, with detailed result as shown in the following Table 2. There is a need to explain, as the above data is obtained by the prediction model, and the negative value is entirely possible, not contradictory. But in fact, GDP is not possible for the negative, the minimum can only be zero, for the negative in the table, in the following discussion, it can be corrected to zero, with the actual consistency. Based on the above of the next three industry GDP value, it can be analyzed to obtain the 2017 industrial structural situation in not transformed Jinniu area, Shanghai area and Xindu area of Chengdu City. 2.4 Various industrial cost-effectiveness ratio and energy consumption According to economic theory [3], industrial cost- effectiveness can reflect the developmental level of industrial structure. Thus, the research on the industrial benefit cost ratio is a reflection of the way of industrial structure. Through related literature, we can know that Sichuan Province previous years’ consumption ratio results are in Table 3. Learned from the table, with the passage of time, the progress of science and technology and social productivity, some industry cost-effectiveness ratio will be lower and lower, and some will be higher and higher. In order to give 2017 three districts of north city energy consumption, by taking 2010 cost-effectiveness ratio as a constant, it can calculate various energy consumption, and the result can be given in Table 4. 2.5 North reconstruction planning, industrial structure, distribution and development trend In industrial structure, north Chengdu focuses on adjusting industrial status, making low-end wholesale market, warehouse logistics to commercial business, cultural creation, tourism leisure and headquarter and other modern service industry development. South Chengdu is the gathering place of the advanced manufacturing industry and high-end service industry, and IT industry, new material, aviation, logistics, finance, commerce and trade are very developed, strong impetus to the Chengdu city and even Sichuan �ε = − =k x k x k x k k n( ) ( ) ˆ ( ) ( ) ( 1,2, , ) (0) (0) (0) can achieve a higher requirement.

ε = − −(0.0017,0.00331,0.0043,0.0018, 0.0014, 0.0011,

0.00018,0.00054,0.0017,0.0028,0.0034)

2.3 Future industrial structure prediction model solution

In the above established future industrial structure pre diction model, it designs relevant algorithm for solu tion. Due to limited space, the specific algorithmic

Table 2. 2013–2017 three districts of northern city GDP prediction unit: billion yuan. (b) Chenghua area (c) Xindu area (a) Jinniu area

Figure 4. 2017 three districts of north city industrial structure.

Table 3. Sichuan Province previous years’ industrial cost-effectiveness ratio.

Unit: ten thousand tons of standard coal

Year First industry Second industry Third industry Architecture Industry

2005 0.184 0.286 3.371 0.451

2008 0.135 0.230 2.216 0.386

2009 0.125 0.223 2.086 0.389

2010 0.108 0.253 1.741 0.369 Table 4. 2017 three districts of north city energy consumption. Unit: Ten thousand tons of standard coal Industry Area First industry Second industry Third industry Total Architecture Industry Jinniu area 0 93.63 146.14 644.31 884.07 Chenghua area 0 63.87 125.57 507.12 696.56 Xindu area 28.50 37.26 340.17 171.25 577.19 Total 28.50 194.76 611.88 1322.68 2157.82 Table 5. 2013 Jinjiang industrial structure chart. Industry First industry Second industry Third industry Total Architecture Industry GDP/ billion 0.72 41.47 59.34 505.08 606.61 Ratio/% 0.12 6.84 9.78 83.26 100.00 Figure 5. North reconstruction regional industrial planning distribution chart. Province’s economic development. South city takes an international modern new city as the goal, with careful planning, strict quality, focusing on level, forming modern industry, modern city and modern life demonstration area. The following takes Jinjiang District as an example, referring to the industrial structure ratio mode, calculating north reconstruction three districts of north city industrial structure. Through the above calculation, in the same GDP amount, the energy consumption of three districts of north city reconstruction and the contrast before are as follows.

3 INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURE OPTIMIZATION

MANAGEMENT RESEARCH

Industrial structure improvement is reflected as indus trial coordination, development and structure improve ment. The industrial quality and efficiency improve ment are reflected as production element optimization combination, technical level, management level and product quality improvement. All the decisions and factors of influencing economic growth will have direct or indirect different degrees of influence on industrial structure change. Knowledge and technology innova tion, population scale and structure, economic system, natural resource endowment, capital scale, demand structure and international trade are the basic restriction factors of the industrial structure evolution process.

According to the development situation of national cities, Shanghai city industrial structure is worthy of reference in economics and environmental protection.

This paper takes the industrial structure of Shanghai

City as an example, conducting analysis and calcula tion of Chengdu north reconstruction three districts, with the final result as shown inTable 6.

If Chengdu industrial structure adjustment is as

Shanghai, then it can be calculated that the same GDP energy consumption, through calculation, the result is as shown in Table 7.

Through the above data, it can be seen that, if the

Table 6. Shanghai industrial structure and energy consumption.

Industry First industry Second industry Third industry Architecture Industry

Energy/ten thousand tons of standard coal 68.68 214.75 5850.90 3744.25

GDP/billion yuan 127.80 757.01 7097.76 12199.15

Cost effectiveness ratio/ten thousand tons of standard coal 0.5374 0.2837 0.8243 0.3069 Table 7. North reconstruction planning and optimization plan industrial structure comparison.

Unit: ten thousand tons of standard coal

Industry First industry Second industry Third industry Total Architecture Industry

Not north reconstruction 3.0996 49.2892 1065.3550 488.4572 1606.2010

After north reconstruction 0.2777 53.4228 256.8335 663.4980 974.0320

New planning 1.3726 59.8833 121.5978 551.4441 734.2978 Figure 6. North planning and optimization planning industrial structure comparison. 5 Chapter 5: The others

Promotion of library management and book circulation to research on medical research

Chengbi Zheng

Library of Taishan Medical University, Taishan, China

ABSTRACT: With the acceleration of the process of social information, information resources construction has become an important part of national development strategies. The library is one of the main information resources constructions and is an important information resource position of social construction. Computer applications in the book management, greatly improve the management efficiency of the library, and have changed the traditional management service model. The universal service network extends to every corner make reader can read everywhere, breaking the boundaries of time and space and also greatly promoting the modernization of the library. Library modernization, according to the characteristics of the objective law refers library work practices, uses modern technological conditions, rational organization of scientific management of library work, to maximize efficiency and quality and effectively complete the task library. Library essence of modern management techniques is to achieve the modernization of libraries and library management mod ernization. The modern library information system can be divided into three aspects of building automation libraries, library networks and digital libraries. Digital library management directly reflects a country’s level of a regional knowledge economy and information industry development, and digital network resource manage ment in the book gradually dominates.

KEYWORDS: Library management; Book circulation; Medical research

Librarians should face the future and meet the challenge of continuing education. Librarians’ important way is to continue to improve the professional quality of education. The library by providing information services to provide knowledge services, librarians continuing learning and continuing education is imminent. Library managers should possess the fol lowing qualities: First, grasp the broad scientific and cultural knowledge and expertise in library science, including the Library Studies, book’s classification, cataloging modern literature, reader services, Chinese book search, scientific literature retrieval. Only have a solid grasp of basic skills, librarians can do the job, to help readers solve practical problems. Second, they should master computer technology. Third, have a composite structure of knowledge. With the new dis ciplines, interdisciplinary occur, subject knowledge and di�erentiation is highly centralized, single knowledge structure has been di�cult to the diverse requirements of competent information services, librarians need to have a wealth of academic knowl edge. Librarians don’t only have strong information retrieval capabilities, but also have good utilization of intelligence information; They not only understand the computer operation, but also master the network resource management. Fourth, they are with a high level of foreign language. To be able to get advanced information tracking, librarians need to have a good command of foreign languages. 1 ADVANTAGE OF THE OPEN MODE MANAGEMENT IN UNIVERSITY LIBRARY CIRCULATION 1.1 Opening book circulation mode management can bring convenience to the reader Management Library Circulation open mode can provide quality space environment for readers, substantial library resources and e�cient book lending service. First, the management mode of Library Circulation open space layout requirements of the library is high, spacious, comfortable, and convenient is necessary environmental conditions, it can provide high-quality environment for readers to borrow books space; secondly, Library Circulation prerequisite open mode is the full collection of library resources and tiered deployment, which can fully meet the quantity and quality of library resources needs of readers; and finally, point to retrieve, review and documentation of Library information Tibetan, borrowing integration the service model brings great convenience to the reader, and also allows the reader to choose and apply the books and have a wider space. All in all, the library book circulation open management model can maximize convenience for the reader to borrow books.

1.2 Open book circulation patterns can fully enhance the effective utilization of book management

Book circulation librarian open model management has certain requirements to the quality of the readers and librarians. First, librarian of the open manage ment model has a su�cient grasp for books in circu lation, and arranges the library format according to the reader’s requirements and feedback suggestions to make sure that di�erent types of books can fully meet the needs of its readers demand rate levels. Secondly,

Library patrons need to have a general understanding of the structural model and the pattern of library col lections, and fully abides the rules of lending libraries and librarians can also be in the form of direct dia logue or feedback through the Library Information system requirements for all aspects of feedback, pro cesses and borrow books and other resources, and to optimize the management of open books circulation system can fully meet the needs of readers of the book project, thereby increasing the e�ective utilization of library resources.

2 MEDICAL RESEARCH QUALITY MANAGER IS THEIR NEEDS OF INFORMATION QUALITY EDUCATION

Information literacy education, for medical research manager in a sense, is the information society, education and the development of high-quality education to survive. Information Literacy Education contains information awareness, information and knowledge and skills, information concepts, infor mation ethics, information psychological, informa tion security, and many other educational contents.

Medical research managers not only to the medical researchers are engaged in the work of a considera ble degree of familiarity, but also play a role in the wizard. Therefore, managers must keep up with med ical research on the rapid pace of development of the life sciences, research and management in their daily activities, they are combined with the results of the project, or a little bit of learning to understand and continuously improve the quality of their medical information, over the composition of their own infor mation systems, it is very important. The basic theory of medical research and management science is from the sublimation of systems science and other neigh boring disciplines and managers learn from medical research and practical experience of other experts’ enthusiastic participation of research management. Medical research managers to organizational management coordinate technical cooperation and relationship between the professional. And this organization, coordination must be based on master professional and skilled use of information held by the information basis. The Book Circulation Management System is a special kind of computer information systems specifically for the library field. In the library field, the library management information system is also known as an integrated library automation system, which is the basis for the modernization of the library information management and information services, which is to guide people to quickly and accurately obtain the museum resources, and make library resources ensure proper management. Research and development of domestic integrated library management system has entered the practical stage early. Technically speaking, it has undergone a stand-alone, multi-user microcomputer single network segment, the computer network of the Internet and other multi-stage of development. Many libraries have basically achieved the interview, cataloging, automated collection, circulation, public access and other major services, and started to enter the campus network construction period, the network laid the foundation for the development of library automation systems. However, the country is still in the preliminary general library automation integrated systems of practical stage, yet it is to tap into the network to bring the whole library building automation business. Many libraries do not have a good understanding of computers to study and interconnection agreements, hardware and software configuration is also very irregular, or they do not support the current common network protocol TCP/IP, which is set up barriers to network development. Management (Management) refers, together with others, or by someone else to make the activities more efficient process to complete. Here, the meaning of the functions or processes represents the main activities undertaken by managers. These functions can be broadly described as planning, organizing, leading and controlling. Medical research management is the study of medicine and health science and technology innovation activities of people, things, the nature of material systems, characteristics and rules, and we follow the rules of conduct of modern scientific management, to produce systems amplify the effectiveness of knowledge. It is a medical science, management science, and the creation of interdisciplinary science. Medical research management, human resources management includes medical research, medical research program implementation and management, medical research fund management, medical management and technological achievements, intelligence management. The fundamental starting point is to focus on the basic objectives of medical research, the incentive and protection of medical science and technology workers’ enthusiasm, consciousness and initiative. The ultimate goal is to serve the medical science.

3 INNOVATION OF SCIENTIFIC MANAGEMENT IS BASIC NEED OF MEDICAL RESEARCH

The fundamental goal of scientific research activities is to continually create new achievements in the promotion of social development, and innovation is the primary factor in scientific progress, and it is the living soul.

3.1 Research management innovation provides a favorable external environment for medical research

Medical research activities need to have the ability to research and innovative executives for ways and means of information technology, the experimental conditions are to complete the research activities, as well as a wide range of communication channels and opportunities for academic and other external environment. Through new technology innovation policies and regulations, coordination and man agement mechanism, operational research mode, scientific knowledge of the external environment is in line with the requirements of innovation, to provide a favorable environment for medical research.

3.2 Research management innovation has penetrated into all areas of medical research

A major breakthrough and innovation management mechanism of modern medical science and tech nology are closely linked. Implementation of the

“Human Genome Project”, “human proteome plan” and a series of innovative medical research and stra tegic planning greatly promoted the development of modern science and technology. Research manage ment innovation has become to achieve new knowl edge, new technology boosters.

3.3 Innovation of research and management is needs of medical research

Object of research in the field of medical research is multidisciplinary, such as Bioinformatics, life sciences, nano medicine and computational biology.

Multidisciplinary organization of joint research is a major scientific breakthrough in the form of mul ti-disciplinary integration and it can produce creative thinking and innovative research. Features change the way medical research determines the change management which must be followed, breaks the old mode of management, and establishes new medical research management mechanism. 4 SUMMARY Analysis and synthesis are unity spear. Analysis is the objective things down into various parts or the various elements; partial or comprehensive is to link the various elements into a whole, investigated the relationship between the various elements of contact between B, through the analysis and synthesis it can reveal the internal relations of things, make things by general and vague impression, into a precise, clear impression is a comprehensive analysis of the premise and foundation, and it is the result of a comprehensive analysis, the analysis and synthesis process is a scientific abstract process, it is a reproduction of the overall objective things in thought process, so the training of analytical skills and comprehensive ability is to make medical researchers to form an essential basis for scientific thinking, retrieval process is a process of analysis and synthesis: First represent information needs, which is the starting point for analyzing the subject, the second is to select the search strategy in the medical literature search, the search strategy is the key to the whole relationship retrieval plans and programs, and directly a�ects the search results and makes an issue retrieval, analysis must retrieve the theme, clear retrieval requirements and objectives develop search strategies to retrieve those who own little o� target retrieval adjusted according to continuously improve and optimize the search strategy, and ultimately determine the satisfaction of search results, the case must obtain specific documents, or to grasp a particular region or country on an issue published literature; It is to find a certain number of years on an issue published literature, or to obtain certain issues related to literature; theme concept retrieval is accurate; and retrieving the scope and type of professional literature, age, language and number, etc., through the search strategy training, medical researchers can develop a comprehensive research and analysis capability, the three screening search results in the search process, the search results are retrieved for each to make evaluations and judgments, and to make the appropriate changes and adjustments search strategy, until achieving satisfactory results, for example, when there are too much literature detectable amount, you need to consider appropriate narrow your search, by increasing restrictive search terms or using the more specifically reference to the concept of search terms and other methods to reduce the amount of literature detection; anti-B, when the amount is too small in literature, detection measures should be considered on the opposite.

[1] Song Chunsheng. University Library Circulation Management [J] Information Development & Economy, 2010,18: 32–34.

[2] Hou Aihua. Spend on construction in the new market-oriented books in circulation [J] Chinese commerce, 2011,11: 192–193.

[3] Xu Sailu. on the Management Innovation University Library Circulation [J] Information Development & Economy, 2007,24: 78–80. [4] Wang Kun. network environments do snow sports books Circulation countermeasures [J] snow sports, 2007,05: 53–55. [5] Wang Shufen. technology research library circulation management system [J] Journal of Guilin College of Aerospace Technology, 2008,02: 35–37. [6] Liu Chengyu, Jin Wei. exploration cost of books in circulation path analysis, [J] Chinese commerce, 2014,17: 33–34. [7] Chen Jing. University Library Book Circulation Problems and Solutions in the management of [J] primary and secondary school library and information world, Jan. 2009: 46–47 + 42. [8] Chen Jing. University Library Book Circulation Problems and Solutions in the management of [J] primary and secondary school library and information world, Jan. 2009: 46–47 + 42.

Green design horizon, hand-painted rendering performance techniques to explore

JianHua Yong

Chongqing Education College, Chongqing, China

ABSTRACT: Green design horizon, explores the hand-painted rendering performance techniques. From conception to action, composition distribution, global and local processing, local expansion method, the performance of rendering and other aspects of analysis and propose countermeasures. Accumulation of professional materials for designers and nutrient at the same time raises awareness of the environment, space and natural understanding. To improve the aesthetic horizon, hand-painted rendering green design and students’ ability to innovate education is of great significance.

KEYWORDS: Green design; renderings; Hand-painted; Innovation performance

With the rapid development of social economy, more and more get of each session of green design. Hand painted rendering performance skill and the students’ innovative education require constant reform, with the time synchronization.”Hand-drawn renderings are architectural design, landscape design, interior design, landscape design, fashion design and indus trial design. An important professional compulsory course for designers in the design field to express design intent and the means to convey the design con cept [1]. ““ Designing as a traditional means of hand painted, always carries out the entire design process.

It is the quickest, most intuitive and simplest expres sion, but also a dynamic, a thinking and living design language. To play an important role in the design, these features are unmatched by computer-aided design tools [2]. “In the era of the society focuses on green design, strengthening the hand-painted render ings of learning conducive to the deepening of the design qualities will help improve the professional skills, such as building performance. Figure, the performance of indoor and outdoor renderings, and even strengthening the design accurately reflects the intention to do the design in a rapid and handy way.

Currently, combine the concept of green design with the innovative education to explore effective hand drawing performance techniques, try to talk about the following points. Grasp the design and conception. At present, the green design concept has already been thoroughly popular. Environmental art design education also should combine the talent training with the practical need of society innovation. In hand drawing representation, “The idea is novel conception of the spiritual renderings works correctly grasp the conception and design ideas, as much as possible on the screen is designed to express the effect, to create a practical work is hand-painted renderings of the points, whether it is by what means and techniques, or what form of painting with the works completed, the shape of the spatial patterns are carried around the idea of the designer’s conception [3].” For environmental art design professionals and students and teachers, the use of “brain” is a painting depicting and not only the skills to improve. More important is the accumulation of professionalism designers. As a general hand-painted rendering, a concise and positive characteristic, which requires us in a relatively short period of time, to grasp the design intent generally depicted images quickly, succinctly the characteristics of the objects shown? In a real reasonable and appropriate time under the premise of an exaggeration, generalization and choice, imagination reflects the personal understanding of the real world, view and control level. Imagination comes from a combination of time and space, from the information received and the personal knowledge and accomplishment. In daily life, there is more than the accumulation of some of the image of the symbol. Take conception, feelings and other visual graphic methods and techniques to enhance the performance of the appeal. With good grasp of logic and thinking in images, the design will burst out of “inspiration” spark. “Inspiration” are often set down the stage, appeared in the road, or even a dream in the United States. Good quality art and design show in memory of the people, and can quickly catch and develop this “inspiration”. But if space and thinking ability is weak, and hand drawing skills are poor, even the best ideas will be flashed. We should gradually learn to develop the trade-offs, generalization, and skills to develop an understanding of the physical image and digestion, and improve the image of art and space thinking ability. With the performance of the skilled techniques, professional literacy enrichment, the idea of a corresponding increase in capacity and speed, both careful and specific descriptions, it will be quick to capture the general feeling of the moment. In terms of composition and the overall layout, hand drawing should be in combination with the concept of green design, and strengthen the study of composition and the overall layout, etc. Composition is to a large number of model elements on the screen combining organic and in accordance with the design theme of the need to reasonably arrange the screen in place, the formation of both antagonistic and uni fied picture, in order to achieve visual balance of psy chological. The composition of any painting styles is essential to the performance of the initial stage, the face of complex scenes. Avoid copying the environ ment, and avoid screen clutter and incomprehensible.

On the scene to observe, select, prioritize, grasp the active screen more clearly to choose their own inter est and have some typical scenes of the landscape composition. Should be cut and choice, highlight the center scene. What is detrimental to the composition and related objects may be appropriate to move the location or weakened deleted. Primary and secondary scenery contrast, mutual echo and set off in shape, size, light and shade. In combination and layout the segmentation crisscross overlap, harmonious and uni fied. In order to describe the main center of the scene, its basic shape, structure, relationships, important detail, medium shot may be appropriate to summa rize, and the vision can only draw the outline shape.

At the same time, appropriate adjustments in the composition and the depth is not an ideal place for the whole time from the local, to maintain the overall impression of a unified and clear-cut, and strive to achieve the unity and integrity of the final picture.

In the election scene composition, the overall depth, partial characterization and overall adjustment are not procedural, formulaic steps, but are often repeated alternately. The way of thinking is the key to the overall flexibility in the use of observation methods.

Properly handling the relationship between the whole and local, hand-painted rendering performance will be more harmonious. In our education and innovative talent training, not only for strengthening the study of composition and the overall layout, but also to master the art of hand drawing performance. On the whole and local relationships handling, hand drawing performance techniques need to follow the basic law of art and design, which always runs through the concept of green design. A holistic approach, grasps the overall relationship between the objects drawn to link the various parts observed to form an organic whole. Misplaced priorities of embracing only gives a flat and a list of all the details can only give a complex. First draw a large structure, shape, proportion and perspective, and then further characterize the local. The last is to grasp the whole picture from the overall effect, and it is easier to grasp. Be depicted in the scene, first using a pencil or “point” to set the general layout of the scene. And sketch out the scene in general outline. Outline in the layout and contours at the same time with careful observation, a clear relationship between the proportion of various parts of the scene and relations perspective. For more complex features of the structure, also draw some scenery away lines, vanishing points as the supplement. In the broad contours of the basic accuracy, based on the line of the screen and then show images of the desired shape and structure to further explain clearly sought to paint right size, the accurate proportion, lay the foundation for further characterization. Second, partial characterization, usually use a pen or marker pen to draw, most from light to deep, deeper layers of tone painting, a complete characterization of the various local scene, so put pen to paper must be carefully observed before the object depicted, more recent, medium and long-term differences in material colors, accurate lines and used to select the stroke. What the first picture is on the screen scene, what scene after the painting, starting from the composition, so that with confidence, there shall not floc. Characterization of local, be sure to note the overall time to time, each local image portrayed, not only make the most effort, but also determine the success or failure of the step. Finally, adjusts the departure from the whole. When we complete the characterization of the various local scenes, use the entire screen to adjust the unified work for better coordination between various local, black and white picture by adjusting the layout of the relationship and of works can be more complete. Properly handled the relationship between the whole and local, hand-painted rendering performance will be more harmonious. In the aspect of local spread representation. In hand drawing performance, strengthen the study of local spread technique. Local expansion method of concentrating on detail from the beginning is to be a partial characterization. Basically a local paint is put in place more completely, and then pushed around. In general, what chooses the local put pen to paper is the visual image Center. Before we put pen to paper on the screen composition, scene layout, perspective changes, the distance light and dark color label, as well as what kind of lines used, must be aware of, then they have to write coherently, not dragging its feet. The painting is an author of environmental observation and the accumulation of experience, shaping the physical image of the body is training, but also a picture composition by organizational environment the ability to exercise. The first is to observe and analyze. You can look through the viewfinder vision, medium shot, close-range, where the analysis is the visual center, where light is needed painting, and various features in the space occupied by the screen. Through observation and anal ysis, in general, distant objects in the virtual screen the entire scene, so in painting color should not be too deep, can be used to add vertical lines to represent; medium shot black and white contrast features to con sider, not stronger than the close-range can be used to describe the changing lines, with the vision to distin guish; close-range is the center of the composition, if the method to draw close-range light and dark, deep color application performance, to increase the weight, so that the composition played on the balance and increase The role of the screen changes. If it is close range in the shadow, then use dark colors to enhance the performance of its profound sense, to increase the weight of the screen. The second is to put pen to paper.

In general, put pen to paper from the visual center, close-started to this position as a coordinate in order to determine the height and location of other features.

Then the prospects unfinished painting started to other parts of the landscape and distant medium shot, seize the scene size, height ratio, quasi-landscape painting perspective is very important. Hand-drawn renderings use a partial re-unfinished painting a local, getting from here to expand the local painting. We need to keep in mind and consider the location of each scene, proportion and color relationship, cannot be taken lightly. Be sure to keep the scene before put pen to paper observing and analyzing the overall impression of each to be a local unfinished to remind myself not to make the local out of the whole so that out of hand drawing will be more complete. In the aspect of freehand drawing skill to be mastered, hand drawing and computer drawing are different. The main is the freehand drawing design staffs use their quality and technique of the knowledge to keep learning and mastering the basic skills of freehand drawing. “hand renderings of design expression, reflecting the design concepts and design capabilities, is hand-painted renderings of the soul [4] as a hand-drawn renderings based on an objective object of a painting style, “The design performance figure technique of expression varied, with the performance of a pencil sketch, watercolor performance, the performance of watercolor, pen light color performance, Mark than performance, printing performance, the performance of computer-aided design, etc. Among them, the performance of methods vivid watercolor, bright; thick gouache performance of the method, three-dimensional sense; pen light color performance of the method of quickly and eas ily; printing performance of the methods detailed, real. distinctive performance practices, but they are based on and drawing, color, perspective, the composition of a painting knowledge.”[5] Due to the use of sim ple tools, easy to carry, not only to consider drawing techniques, but also think about how to draw, how to put pen to paper, the so-called “Conceiving Before.” Concept and have ideas, drawing on the environment and chosen content, careful observation of the performance of the object, from the big , the external shape and internal experience of God changes, feeling the first impression or impress your place, from different angles to choose the best viewing angle. Determining the angle and position, and then do further observation and study, and a strong knowledge of memorizing when the images “as Bamboo “in the chest, you can write a. put pen to paper before, distant, medium and close-range differences, accurate selection of the use of lines and strokes, what first draw, what after the painting, from the overall composition of the starting portray local time pay attention to the whole. Write to “stable” “quasi,” “ruthless”. “Stable” refers to the depth that we observed in the images, research to understand after write to firm, calm, busy chaos; “quasi” means write to remind ourselves “one step”, can not be hesitant, vague; “hard” refers to the transport line must be sure to write about strong, avoid delicate, Fu Hua, to seize the main structure of the line, dynamic lines, seize the great feeling of depth characterization, with the main Once on the organization screen, do not copy images blindly and without thought, according to the first impression of understanding and feeling, back on the whole, the last pack to adjust the screen so that more coordination between local addition, the performance of the screen to see whether the symbol perspective of the law. Contrary to the law of the screen will be distorted perspective, a loss of beauty. Applying the rule to deal with all kinds of images to make the shape and structure of images more rigorous. “The development of contemporary hand-painted works gradually elevated to a kind of spiritual wealth, which has a higher value of art collections [5].” We want to combine the green design concept, with the environmental art design and other professional in the process of the innovative talent training, learning and mastering hand-painted rendering techniques. Use all kinds of forms, with spirituality, feeling to read hand-painted works. Use artistic language interpretation and the performance effect to give hand drawing richer connotation. ACKNOWLEDGMENT Chinese library classification number: G645 literature identifier: A Fund project: In this paper, by the Chongqing higher education teaching reform project of undergraduate course colleges and universities from the “green design exploration and practice of ” environmental art design innovation talented fund (number: JG2014109).

[1] Huang Liang. Role of the lines in the performance of hand-painted [J]. ART PANORAMA .2011.4, pp. 62.

[2] Cheng Rui. Hand-painted and Design - On the handpainted art and design in the modern environment in the application [J]. Contemporary art .2010.1, pp. 35–36.

[3] Yang Liyong. Discussion on the artistry of handpainted renderings[J]. Inner Art, 2009(1), pp. 108–110.

[4] Yang Bo, Xiao Xia. The design ideas is the soul of hand-painted renderings [J]. ARTS CIRCLE .2007.4, pp. 65. [5] Liu Huadong. Rendering representation methods of teaching practice and research. [J] LITERARY GALLERY. 2010.10, pp. 165. [6] Shi Bingsu. The artistic charm of Hand-painted renderings [J]. Art and Design (theoretical). 2011.1, pp. 38–40. Author: Yong Jianhua, male, Chongqing people, born in May 1974, master degree, professor, mainly engaged in environmental art design education and research work.

A review of flavonoids’ biological activities

Shuang Cao

Chongqing Three Gorges Medical College

ABSTRACT: Flavonoids are an important organic compound widely existing in the natural world. In addition, flavonoids are a class of polyphenols with strong biological activity and pharmacological activity.

A large number of research show that flavonoids have many abiological activities and pharmacological activ ities such as anti-cancer, anti-tumor, adjusting arrhythmia, blood pressure lowering, blood sugar lowering, anti-oxidation, anti-inflammation and antibacterial activity. This thesis summarizes the recent studies of the physiological activity of flavonoids in order that we can select more effective and safe drugs and find the new lead compounds.

KEYWORDS: Flavonoids; Biological Activity; Pharmacological Activity

1 INTRODUCTION

Flavonoids are an important organic compound widely existing in the natural world. This kind of aer obic heterocyclic compounds mostly exists in higher plants and pteridophyte plants. From the perspective of plant systematics, the ability of plants to produce flavonoids is closely related to the lignification of the plant itself. Flavonoids are mainly distributed in vascular plants, but rarely in other lower plants.

Bean, labiatae, and compositae are rich in flavonoids.

Flavonoids have not been found in algae and bacteria microorganisms yet. A large number of studies showed that flavonoids have a wide range of biological activities such as scav enging free radicals, anti-oxidation, anti-mutation, anti-tumor, anti-virus, and anti-bacteria, and regulat ing immunity, protecting liver, anti-inflammation and anti-allergy, and anti-diabetes. With the change of the concept of people’s lives, all kinds of products with natural active ingredients are widely focused in the world and flavonoids are becoming one of the most important spots because of their pure nature, strong activity, and extensive effects, etc.

2 THE CANCER-PREVENTION AND ANTI-CANCER EFFECTS

The cancer-prevention and anti-cancer effects of fla vonoids achieve the purpose through the free- radical effect and directly inhibiting cancer cell growth factors and carcinogenic factors [1]. Carcinogenic factors promote free radicals to produce in the body and gather around lipid cell membranes, so that cancer is caused by lipid peroxidation and cell DNA damage. Biological flavonoids play an anti-cancer effect because of the function of inhibiting tumor cell glycolysis and growth, the mitochondrial succinate oxidase activity and the phosphatidyl inositol kinase activity. Quercetin can inhibit protein kinase C and calmodulin, so as to effectively inhibit tumor. In addition, quercetin can effectively induce microsomal aromatics hydroxylase and epoxide hydrolase, making polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons benzopyrene lose the carcinogenic activity through hydroxylation and hydrolyzation. Experimental results showed that some biological flavonoids have certain carcinogenic and mutagenic effect in vitro. Genotoxicity such as quercetin, kaempferol, and leave flavone can produce peroxides and reactive oxygen under the available trace metals and aerobic conditions, causing DNA chain breaking. However, Ames experiments found that these compounds are non-toxic in vivo and play cancer-prevention and anti-cancer effects. 3 THE ANTI-TUMOR EFFECT A large number of literature reports showed that the anti-tumor effect of flavonoids is mainly to make intervention in cell signal transduction, promote tumor suppressor gene expression and anti-tumor cell proliferation and induce apoptosis, so as to achieve the anti-tumor purpose [2]. Silvia synthesized 9 flavonoids derivatives using CoMFA design and tested the biological activities, finding that the inhibitory effect of compound 4f on P450 was superior to that of market drugs [3–5].

4 THE EFFECTS ON THE CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM 4.1 The effect on the myocardial function

Flavonoids can interdict β receptors and play a time-varying myocardial contraction regulating effect by positively influencing mitochondria and inhibit ing the activity of the cardiac phosphodiesterase at the subcellular level, in order to improve myocardial diastolic function, resist the myocardial ischemia caused by hypophysin, reduce the myocardial infarc tion caused by ligated coronary artery, increase the ability of the body to bear hypoxia, and fight the arrhythmia caused by all factors. Therefore, they can be applied to the treatment of arrhythmia, angina and myocardial infarction, etc.

4.2 The effect on the blood vessels

Flavonoids can play an effect on dilating blood ves sels and improve the contraction and diastolic func tion of vascular smooth muscle. Its action mechanism is related to adjusting the internal flow of extracellu lar Ca 2+ and the release of intracellular Ca 2+ . They can also play an effect on the vascular active substances and the enzymes affecting active materials. 5-HT can cause intracranial vascular contraction and less blood flow, and simultaneously it is taken in by platelet to promote ADP to convert to ADP, causing platelet aggregation [6]. Adenosine deaminase is located in the endothelial cells of capillary tubes and blood ves sels, which plays an important role in blood pressure adjustment, platelet aggregation and neurotransmis sion. Some flavonoids can effectively prevent LDL oxidation and play an inhibitory effect on the adeno sine deaminase of aortic endothelial cells, so it can be applied to the treatment of migraine, cardiovascular disease and atherosclerosis, etc. Soybean isoflavones can inhibit the platelet aggregation induced by throm bin and platelet activating factors and the coronary artery inhibit induced by vascular permeability fac tors in the high concentration condition [7].

4.3 The effect on blood pressure

Puerarin can play certain antihypertensive effect on normal or hypertensive animals, and intravenously injected puerarin can make the blood pressure of nor mally anaesthetic dogs shortly but significantly lower and also significantly reduce the blood pressure of sober, spontaneously hypertensive rats [8]. Therefore, flavonoids can play a good curative effect on the symptoms such as headache, dizziness, and tinnitus caused by high blood pressure. 5 THE EFFECTS ON THE ENDOCRINE SYSTEM 5.1 The effect on blood sugar decrease Diabetes is mainly caused by insulin hyposecretion and polyhydric alcohols metabolic pathway abnormalities. Aldose reductase is a key enzyme in polyhydric alcohols metabolic pathway abnormalities, which makes many enzymes recovered to alcohol, so that diabetes complications are caused. Flavonoids can promote the recovery of pancreatic β cells, reduce blood sugar and serum cholesterol, improve the glucose tolerance, resist the blood sugar rising effect of adrenaline, and inhibit aldose reductase. Therefore, it can be applied to the treatment of diabetes as well as complications. 5.2 The hormone-like effect Many flavonoids are structurally similar to tocotrienols and can play a female-hormone-like effect, and also they have the steroid-hormone-like function of stimulant and inhibitory bidirectional regulation [9]. Flavonoids are of certain affinity to estrogen receptors because of the similarity to estrogen and can combine with an oxidase in uterine tissue, besides it integrates with estrogen receptors [10]. The enzyme can inhibit the activity of many enzymes and rise along with the increase of the concentration of estrogen. In flavonoids, therefore, the dual role of estrogen is reflected. In addition, flavonoids possess an effect on promoting the growth of growth factors and can speed up the growth of the uterus through releasing gonadotropins, promoting the function of gonad, or hindering the metabolism of estrogen, etc. 5.3 The effect on bone tissue Flavonoids can be used for the treatment of bone disease and osteoporosis disease. By mainly inhibiting the increase or decrease of prostaglandin E2 collagen synthesis, they inhibit [3H]-proline into digestible collagen and collagen protein, and mainly act on the non-collagen synthesis under the condition of low-concentration PEG2 and the collagen synthesis under the condition of high-concentration PEG2, so they can be applied to the treatment of bone diseases. Flavonoids can improve the sensitivity of thyroid to estrogen and the ability of thyroid C cells to secrete calcitonin, so as to finally eventually inhibit bone resorption and treat osteoporosis. They can also inhibit the diet calcium deficiency and the bone mineral density and bone calcium content decrease caused by V D .

6 ANTI-OXIDATION AND SCAVENGING THE ACTIVITY OF FREE RADICALS

In free radicals, one or more asymmetric electron atoms, molecules, or ions are contained. It is active in nature and possesses very strong oxidation ability.

If the amount of free radicals in the body surpasses the physical scavenging ability, a physical injure will be caused, because the extremely powerful attacks of super oxide anion and hydroxyl free radicals do great harm to tissue cells. They will make the sulfydryl in proteins or sulphur inactive in different ways, the bases in a DNA molecule produce free radicals and cause molecules fracture, and the unsaturated fatty acids or membrane lipid in phosphatide oxidized as super oxide so that the membrane lipid structure changes and losses the biological function, etc. Finally, mito chondria, DNA, RNA, and biofilms are extensively damaged, making the degenerative diseases such as cancer, aging and cardiovascular disease caused [11]. In recent years, the antioxidant activity of flavo noids has become one of research hotspots; many methods such as DPPH, FRAP [12], and chemilumi nescence are widely used for rapidly determining the antioxidant activity of flavonoids. Flavonoids, there fore, can effectively prevent and treat the diseases such as cancers and aging caused by free radicals.

6.4 The liver-protection effect

Biological flavonoids can treat acute or chronic hepa titis, liver cirrhosis, fatty liver, and the toxic liver dam age caused by galactosamine and CCl 4 , etc. They can significantly inhibit the liver malondialdehyde con tent increase caused by CCl 4 , reduce the glutathione consumption of liver damage, protect the integrity of the liver structure, and effectively prevent the soluble enzymes such as transaminase in liver cells from leak ing from cells and getting activity increase. Overall, the liver-protection effect of flavonoids is based on the antioxidant and free-radical activity [13].

7 THE ANTI-INFLAMMATORY AND ANTI-ALLERGIC EFFECT

The anti-inflammatory effect of flavonoids may be because lipoxygenase is inhibited in prostaglandin biosynthesis. The anti-allergic effect may be because flavonoids inhibit the antigenic combination or media release effect, the synthesis and release of PGE2 and leukotriene, and the activity of hyaluronidase, but do not compete for target cell receptor, so as to depress bioactivators [14]. Hydroxyethyl rutin and dihydro quercetin have a significant inhibitory effect on arth

[7] Marczin N, Papapetropoulos A, John D C, et al. Tyrosine kinase inhibitors suppress endotoxin and IL-Iβ-induced nonsynthesis in aortic smooth muscle cells [J]. american journal of physiology-endocrinology and metabolism, 1993, 265(2): 1014.

[8] Xuepeng SONG. The Antihypertensive Effect of Puerarin on the Rats with Spontaneous Hypertension and the Plasma Renin Activity of the Rats [J]. Chinese Journal of Pharmacology, 1998, 9 (5): 55.

[9] Liu Y., Teng Y.P., Zhang Y.M.. Advances in Dietary Isoflavones[J]. People’s Liberation Army of Preventive Medicine. 2000, 18(5), 384 (In Chinese).

[10] Kim Y.W., Hackett J.C., Brueggemeier R.W. Synthesis and Aromatase Inhibitory Activity of Novel PyridineContaining Isoflavones [J]. Journal of Medicinal chemistry. 2004, 47(16), 4032–4040. [11] RiceEvans C, Miller NJ. The relative antioxidantant activities of plant derived polyphenloic flavonoids [J]. Free radical Res, 1995, (22): 375–383. [12] Peter C. Wootton-Beard, Aisling Moran, Lisa Ryan. Stability of the Total Antioxidant Capacity and Total Polyphenol Content of 23 Commercially Available Vegetable Juices before and after in Vitro Digestion Measured by FRAP, DPPH, ABTS and Folin–Ciocalteu methods [J]. Food Research International. 2011, 44(1), 217–224. [13] Gu Y.F., Xiao B.L., Song A.X., Li M.J. Protection and Antioxidant Effects Of Soy Isoflavones On Acute Alcoholism Mice[J]. Journal of Henan University.(Nat. Sci), 2002, 32(3), 62 (in Chinese). [14] Wei WANG, Lin WANG. The Research Progress of Flavonoids Compounds [J]. Journal of Shenyang Medical College, 2002, 4 (2): 115–119. [15] Fukui H, Goyo K, Tabata H. Two Antimicrobial Flavones from the Leaves of G. glabra [J]. Chem Fharm Bull, 1998, 36 (10): 4174. [16] Augustin E. Prenylated is of Flavones from the Roots of Erythrina Sigmoidea [J]. Phtochemistry, 1994, 36 (4): 1074. an informa business C o m p u t e r S c i e n c e i n I n d u s t r i a l A p p l i c a t i o n s Computer Science and Industrial Application is a collection of papers from the 2014 Pacific-Asia Workshop on Computer Science in Industrial Application (CSIA 2014, Bangkok, Thailand, 17-18 November 2014). The book contains a wide range of topics, including: - Computer and Information Technology - Business management - E-commerce and Tourism - Education, Psychology and Multimedia The book is of interest to academics and professional involved in computer science. Computer Science in Industrial Applications Editor: Yanglv Ling Editor Ling